Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7

Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions is given by subject experts adhering to the latest syllabus guidelines. Become Proficient in the Concepts of Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Functions by consistently practicing from our BIM Book 8th Grade Ch 7 Functions Answer Key. To make it easy for you to understand the concepts we have provided step-by-step solutions in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions. You can download the quick resources without even paying a single penny.

Big Ideas Math Book 8th Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Functions

Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Ch 7 Functions Solutions provided here cover the questions from Lessons 7.1 to 7.5, Practice Tests, Review Tests, Cumulative Practice, Assessment Tests, etc. You can have deeper insights into all the Topics of Functions such as the representation of functions, linear functions, analyzing and sketching graphs, etc. Use the below available quick links for Big Ideas Math 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions Answer Key and clear all your ambiguities regarding the concerned topics.

STEAM Video/Performance Task

Getting Ready for Chapter 7

Lesson 1 Relations and Functions

Lesson 2 Representations of Functions 

Lesson 3 Linear Functions

Lesson 4 Comparing Linear and Non Linear Functions

Lesson 5 Analyzing and Sketching Graphs

Functions Connecting Concepts

Functions STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Apparent Temperature
Sometimes it feels hotter or colder outside than the actual apparent temperature. How hot or cold it feels is called the temperature. What weather factors might contribute to the apparent temperature?
Watch the STEAM Video “Apparent Temperature.” Then answer the following questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 1
1. Robert says that the Wet-Bulb Globe Temperature (WBGT)index is used as a measure of apparent temperature.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 2
In the formula, TW is the natural wet-bulb temperature, TG is the black-globe temperature, TD and is the dry-bulb temperature. Find WBGT when TW = 75ºF, TG = 100ºF, and TD = 84ºF.
2. Different categories of Wet-Bulb Globe Temperatures are shown in the chart. Each category can be represented by a different-colored flag. Which flag color is displayed when WGBT = 87.5ºF?

Performance Task

Heat Index
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the STEAM concepts you learned to answer the questions in the Video Performance Task. You will be given information about heat index.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 3
You will be asked to create a graph of the temperatures and heat indices. Why is it useful to know the heat index?

Functions Getting Ready for Chapter 7

Chapter Exploration

Work with a partner. Copy and complete the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 4

1.  Answer: ( 1 , 2 ) , ( 2 , 4 ) , ( 3 , 6 ) , ( 4 , 8 ) .

Explanation:
Given , Width w = 2 , Length l = x  where x = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 .
To find Area A of a rectangle we have , A = w × l
for x = 1 , A = 2 × 1 = 2 ,
for x = 2 , A = 2 × 2 = 4 ,
for x = 3 , A = 2 × 3 = 6 ,
for x = 4 , A = 2 × 4 = 8 ,
So, for every value of Input x = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 we have Output A = 2 , 4 , 6 , 8 , respectively .
That is ( 1 , 2 ) , ( 2 , 4 ) , ( 3 , 6 ) , ( 4 , 8 ) .

2. Answer: ( 1 , 6 ) , ( 2 , 8 ) , ( 3 , 10 ) , ( 4 , 12 ).

Explanation:
Given , Width w = 2 , Length l = x  where x = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 .
To find Perimeter of a rectangle we have , P = 2( l + w )
for x = 1 ,P = 2( 1 + 2 ) = 2 × 3 = 6 ,
for x = 2 , P = 2( 2 + 2 ) = 2 × 4 = 8  ,
for x = 3 , P = 2( 3 + 2 ) = 2 × 5 = 10  ,
for x = 4 , P = 2( 4 + 2 ) = 2 × 6 = 12  ,
So, for every value of Input x = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 we have Output P = 6 , 8 , 10 , 12 , respectively .
That is ( 1 , 6 ) , ( 2 , 8 ) , ( 3 , 10 ) , ( 4 , 12 ) .

3. Answer : ( 1 , 6 ) , ( 2 , 12 ) , ( 3 , 18 ) , ( 4 , 24 ) .

Explanation:
Given , Radius of a circle , where as  r = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
To find the circumference of a circle , we have C = 2Òr , Ò = 3.14 , or we can write it as 3 .
for r = 1 , C = 2 × 3 × 1 = 6 ,
for r = 2 , C = 2 × 3 × 2 = 12 ,
for r = 3 , C = 2 × 3 × 3 = 18 ,
for r = 4 , C = 2 × 3 × 4 = 24 ,
So, for every value of Input r = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 we have Output C = 6 , 12 , 18 , 24 , respectively .
That is ( 1 , 6 ) , ( 2 , 12 ) , ( 3 , 18 ) , ( 4 , 24 ) .

4. Answer: ( 1 , 9 ) , ( 2 , 18 ) , ( 3 , 27 ) , ( 4 , 36 )

Explanation:
Given , Two Edges of a cube = 3 , h = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
To find the Volume of the cube we have , V = a³
for h = 1 , V = 3 × 3 × 1 = 9 ,
for h = 2 , V = 3 × 3 × 2 = 12 ,
for h = 3 , V = 3 × 3 × 3 = 27 ,
for h = 4 , V = 3 × 3 × 4 = 36 ,
So, for every value of Input h = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 we have Output V = 9 , 18 , 27 , 36 , respectively .
That is ( 1 , 9 ) , ( 2 , 18 ) , ( 3 , 27 ) , ( 4 , 36 ) .

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
input
mapping diagram
nonlinear function
output
linear function

Answer : Input : The ordered pairs can be used to show inputs and outputs of a function ,The input is the number you feed into the expression, and the output is what you get after the calculations are finished.

mapping diagram : A relation pairs inputs with outputs , A relation can be represented by ordered pairs or a mapping diagram .

nonlinear function : nonlinear functions are functions which are not linear. Quadratic functions are one type of nonlinear function. It is a relation between two variables , function that does not form a line when graphed.

output ; The ordered pairs can be used to show inputs and outputs of a function ,The input is the number you feed into the expression, and the output is what you get after the calculations are finished.

linear function : A linear function is a relation between two variables that produces a straight line when graphed. And it has one dependent variable and one independent variable .

Lesson 7.1 Relations and Functions

EXPLORATION 1

Interpreting Diagrams
Work with a partner. Describe the relationship between the inputs and outputs in each diagram. Then complete each diagram. Is there more than one possible answer? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 1
Answer: a. The relation between the inputs and outputs is outputs are the result of twice as many times the inputs.
b. The relation between the inputs and outputs is outputs are the result of colors of inputs . In this case we can notice that , for any one input we can have more than one output .

Explanation:
a. As shown in the diagrams , The relation between the inputs and outputs is outputs are the result of twice as many times the inputs , so for input 1 = 1 × 1 = 1 as output ,
for input 2 = 2 × 2 = 4  ,
for input 3 = 3 × 3 = 9  ,
for input 5 = 5 × 5 = 25 ,
for input 8 = 8 × 8 = 64 ,
for input 9 = 9 × 9 = 81 ,

So, for every value of Input = 1 , 2 , 3 , 5 , 8 , 9 , we have Output = 1 , 4 , 9 , 25 , 64 , 81 , respectively .
That is ( 1 , 1 ) , ( 2 , 4 ) , ( 3 , 9 ) , ( 5 , 25 ) , ( 8 , 64 ) , ( 9 , 81 ) .

b. The relation between the inputs and outputs is outputs are the result of colors of inputs . 
for input Blueberry = color is blue as output
for  input lemon = color is yellow as output
for input Apple = color is yellow , red and green as output
for input Grape = color is green as output.

In this case we can notice that , for any one input we can have more than one output .

EXPLORATION 2

Describing Relationships Between Quantities
Work with a partner. The diagrams show the numbers of tickets bought by customers for two different plays and the total costs (in dollars).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 2
a. For each diagram, how many outputs does each input have?
b. Describe the prices of tickets for each play.
c. A person buys 4 tickets for each play. Can you determine the total cost of all 8 tickets? Explain.
Answer:
a. For Play A ,The number of inputs are equal to number of outputs ,
For Play B , The number of inputs are not equal to number of outputs .
So, input 1 = 2 outputs , input 2 = 3 outputs , input 3 = 4 outputs .

b. For Play A , The price of the each ticket is $8 .
For Play B , The price of each ticket is $4 or $8 .

c. For Play A , each ticket is $8 , Then for 4 tickets = 4 × $8 = $32 .
For Play B , each ticket is $4 or $8 , Then for 4 tickets = 4 × $8 = $32 . or 4 × $4 = $16 .

Explanation:
a. For Play A ,
The number of inputs are equal to number of outputs , 4 inputs = 4 outputs
That is ( 1 , 8 ) , ( 2 , 16 ) , ( 3 , 24 ) , ( 4 , 32 ) .
For Play B ,
The number of inputs are not equal to number of outputs , 3 inputs are not equal to 7 outputs
That is , for input 1 = 4 , 8 as outputs ,
for input 2 = 8 , 12 , 16 as outputs ,
for input 3 = 12 , 16 , 20 , 24 as outputs ,
So, input 1 = 2 outputs , input 2 = 3 outputs , input 3 = 4 outputs .

b. For Play A ,
The price of the each ticket is $8 .
For Play B ,
The price of each ticket is $4 or $8 .

c. Given , A person buys 4 tickets for each play.
For Play A , each ticket is $8 , Then for 4 tickets = 4 × $8 = $32 .
And for 8 tickets = 8 × $8 = $64 .
For Play B , each ticket is $4 or $8 , Then for 4 tickets = 4 × $8 = $32 . or 4 × $4 = $16 .
And for 8 tickets =8 × $4 =$32  or 8 × $8 = $64 .

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 3

Try It

List the ordered pairs shown in the mapping diagram.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 4
Answer: Ordered pairs are ( 0 , 12 ) , ( 2 , 10 ) , ( 4 , 8 ) , ( 6 , 6 ) .

Explanation:
As shown , Ordered pairs are the combinations of input and output
So , Ordered pairs are ( 0 , 12 ) , ( 2 , 10 ) , ( 4 , 8 ) , ( 6 , 6 ) .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 5
Answer: Ordered pairs are ( 1 , -1 ) , ( 1 , -2 ) , ( 2 , -3 ) , ( 2 , -4 ) .

Explanation:
As shown , Ordered pairs are the combinations of input and output
So , Ordered pairs are ( 1 , -1 ) , ( 1 , -2 ) , ( 2 , -3 ) , ( 2 , -4 ) .

Determine whether the relation is a function.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 6
Answer: The relation is not a function

Explanation:
The each input has  more than two outputs , Even one of those inputs are unclear of outputs
So , The relation is not a function .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 7
Answer: The relation is a function .

Explanation:
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
PRECISION
Describe how relations and functions are different.
Answer: Relations are nothing but the ordered pairs with Inputs and Outputs . On the other hand , Functions are The relation that pairs with one input with exactly one output  are called Functions.

IDENTIFYING FUNCTIONS List the ordered pairs shown in the mapping diagram. Then determine whether the relation is a function.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 8
Answer: The ordered pairs are ( 10 , 1 ) , ( 15 , 1 ) , ( 20 , 13 ) , ( 25 , 7 ) and The relation is a function .

Explanation:
As shown , The ordered pairs are ( 10 , 1 ) , ( 15 , 1 ) , ( 20 , 13 ) , ( 25 , 7 ) .
Each input has exactly one output ,
So, The relation is a function .

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 9
Answer: The ordered pairs are ( 0 , -5 ) , ( 0 , -4 ) , ( 1 , -4 ) , ( 2 , -3 ) , ( 3 , -2 ) and relation is not a function .

Explanation:
As shown , The ordered pairs are ( 0 , -5 ) , ( 0 , -4 ) , ( 1 , -4 ) , ( 2 , -3 ) , ( 3 , -2 ) .
The input 0 has more than one output ,
So, The relation is not a function .

Question 8.
OPEN-ENDED
Copy and complete the mapping diagram at the left to represent a relation that is a function. Then describe how you can not modify the mapping diagram so that the relation is a function.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 10
Answer: ordered pairs are ( -8 , -4 ) , ( 0 , -2 ) , ( 8 , 0 ) , ( 16 , 2 ) . To have the relation as a function we must have only one output for one input.

Explanation:
The ordered pairs of the diagram are ( -8 , -4 ) , ( 0 , -2 ) , ( 8 , 0 ) , ( 16 , 2 ) .
Each Input must have only one output in order to be the relation is a function ,
If ,The mapping diagram has the right to left representation or each input has more than one output , then the relation is not a function .
So , To have the relation as a function we must have only one output for one input.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
The mapping diagram represents the costs of reserving a hotel room for different numbers of nights.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 11
a. Is the cost a function of the number of nights reserved?
b. Describe the relationship between the cost and the number of nights reserved.
Answer: a. Yes , The cost is a function of the number of nights reserved .
b. The relationship between the cost and the number of nights reserved is , For every night reservation of the room is increasing by $85 with increase in the next reservation ,

Explanation:
a. From the diagram we have ,
Ordered pairs are ( 1 , -$85 ) , ( 2 , $170 ) , ( 3 , $255 ) , ( 4 , $340 ) . each input has exactly one output ,
So , the relation is a function and ,
Yes , The cost is a function of the number of nights reserved .

b. The relationship between the cost and the number of nights reserved is ,
For every night reservation of the room is increasing by $85 with increase in the next reservation,
that is , input 1 = $85 as output
Input 2 = $85 + $85 = $170 as output
Input 3 = $170 + $85 = $255 as output
Input 2 = $255 + $85 = $340 as output

So, The relationship between the cost and the number of nights reserved is ,
For every night reservation of the room is increasing by $85 with increase in the next reservation.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
The graph represents the number of contestants in each round of a talent competition.
a. Is the number of contestants a function of the round number?
b. Predict the number of contestants in the talent competition during Round 7. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 12
Answer: a. The number of contestants is a function of the round number.
b. The number of contestants in the talent competition during Round 7  are 2.

Explanation:
a. From the given graph , The ordered pairs are ( 1 , 128 ) , ( 2 , 64 ) , ( 3 , 32 ) , ( 4 , 16 ) .
Each input has only one output , The relation is a function .
So , the number of contestants is a function of the round number.

b. Firstly , The relation between the input and output is,
With every increase in the round number the number of contestants are decreasing by half the number of the previous round , That is, for  input 1 = 128 as output
For input 2 = 128 – 64 = 64  as output
For input 3 = 64 – 32 = 32  as output
For input 4 = 32 – 16 = 16  as output
For input 5 = 16 – 8 = 8  as output
For input 6 = 8 – 4 = 4  as output
For input 7 = 4 – 2 = 2  as output,
So, The number of contestants in the talent competition during Round 7  are 2 .

Relations and Functions Homework & Practice 7.1

Review & Refresh

Choose an appropriate data display for the situation. Explain your reasoning.
Question 1.
the number of runners in each
age group at a marathon
Answer: In a marathon ,the people of all age group are participating for a promotion on healthy lifestyle, The number of runners in each  group has kids, adults and old people to spread the awareness of leading a healthy life by running daily in the morning . Running or jogging in the morning can help us to maintain our body mass index at an optimal level which is good for heart. The Marathon is conducted by the government of health ministry to be example for the future generations.

Question 2.
the high temperature and the
attendance at a water park each day
Answer:  Generally, The water park is normally crowded depending on the season and the temperature, In summer the attendance in the waterpark is at the utmost point because of the high temperature and the seasonal vacation. Going to the water park in summer is super fun due to the number of  water slides , water rides will be a nice place to the whole family trip and as well as friends . In order to be there at a less crowded time spring is also a nice time to visit the water park .

Graph the linear equation.
Question 3.
y = 2x – 3
Answer:
Explanation:
Given , y = 2x – 3 , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 1 , then y = 2(1) – 3 = 2 – 3 = -1 . co-ordinates are (1 , -1)
if x = 2 , then y = 2(2) – 3 = 4 – 3 = 1 , co-ordinates are (2 , 1)
The co-ordinates (1 , -1) , (2 , 1) form a straight line .
So, y = 2x – 3 is a linear equation.

Question 4.
y = – 0.5x
Answer:
Explanation:
Given , y = -0.5x , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = -0.5(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 2 , then y = -0.5(2) = -1 , co-ordinates are (2 , -1)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (2 , -1) form a straight line .
So, y = -0.5x is a linear equation.

Question 5.
y = – 3x + 4
Answer:
Explanation:
Given , y = – 3x + 4 , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = – 3(0) + 4 = 4 . co-ordinates are (0 , 4)
if x = 1 , then y = – 3(1) + 4 = -3 + 4 = 1 , co-ordinates are (1 , 1)
if x = 2 , then y = – 3(2) + 4 = -6 + 4 = -2 , co-ordinates are (2 , -2)
The co-ordinates (0 , 4) , (1 , 1) , (2 , -2) form a straight line .
So, y = – 3x + 4 is a linear equation.

Question 6.
Which word best describes two figures that have the same size and the same shape?
A. congruent
B. adjacent
C. parallel
D. similar
Answer:  A. congruent

Explanation:
Two figures which have the same size and shape are congruent.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

INTERPRETING DIAGRAMS Describe the relationship between the inputs and outputs in the diagram. Then complete the diagram. Is there more than one possible answer? Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 275.)
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 13
Answer: The relationship between the inputs and outputs in the diagram is ,
For every increase in number of input is having the output of adding -4 to the previous output.

Explanation:
The relationship between the inputs and outputs in the diagram is ,
For every increase in number of input is having the output of adding -4 to the previous output ,
for input 1 = -1 as output
for input 2 = -1 + (-4) = -5 as output
for input 3 = -5 + (-4) = -9 as output
for input 4 = -9 + (-4) = -13 as output
for input 5 = -13 + (-4) = -17 as output
for input 6 = -17 + (-4) = -21 as output.
So, The relationship between the inputs and outputs in the diagram is ,
For every increase in number of input is having the output of adding -4 to the previous output .

In this case , we are witnessing only one output for one input.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 14
Answer: The relationship between the inputs and outputs in the diagram is,
Each input has the sports name and the output has the Starting letter of sports name.

Explanation:
The relationship between the inputs and outputs in the diagram is,
Each input has the sports name and the output has the Starting letter of sports name.
For input basketball = b as output
For input baseball = b as output
For input football = f as output
For input soccer = s as output
For input swimming = s as output,
So, The relationship between the inputs and outputs in the diagram is,
Each input has the sports name and the output has the Starting letter of sports name.

In this case we have more than one output for input.

LISTING ORDERED PAIRS List the ordered pairs shown in the mapping diagram.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 15
Answer: Ordered pairs are ( 0 , 4 ) , ( 3 , 5 ) , ( 6 , 6 ) , ( 9 , 7 ) .

Explanation:
As shown , Ordered pairs are the combinations of input and output
So , Ordered pairs are ( 0 , 4 ) , ( 3 , 5 ) , ( 6 , 6 ) , ( 9 , 7 ) .

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 16
Answer: Ordered pairs are ( 1 , 8 ) , ( 3 , 8 ) , ( 3 , 4 ) , ( 5 , 6 ) , ( 7 , 2 ).

Explanation:
As shown , Ordered pairs are the combinations of input and output
So , Ordered pairs are ( 1 , 8 ) , ( 3 , 8 ) , ( 3 , 4 ) , ( 5 , 6 ) , ( 7 , 2 ).

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 17
Answer: Ordered pairs are ( 6 , -5 ) , ( 7 , -5 ) , ( 8 , -10 ) , ( 9 , -10 ).

Explanation:
As shown , Ordered pairs are the combinations of input and output
So , Ordered pairs are ( 6 , -5 ) , ( 7 , -5 ) , ( 8 , -10 ) , ( 9 , -10 ).

IDENTIFYING FUNCTIONS Determine whether the relation is a function.
Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 18
Answer: The relation is not a function .

Explanation:
The each input has  more than two outputs , That is one input has multiple number of outputs.
Here , input 0 has two outputs which are 10 and 20 .
So , The relation is not a function .

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 19
Answer: The relation is a function .

Explanation:
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 20
Answer: The relation is a function .

Explanation:
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend determines whether the relation shown in the mapping diagram is a function. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 21
Answer: The relation is not a function .

Explanation:
The each input has  more than two outputs , That is one input has multiple number of outputs.
Here , input 4 has four outputs which are 5, 6 , 7 and 8.
So , The relation is not a function .

REASONING Draw a mapping diagram that represents the relation. Then determine whether the relation is a function. Explain.
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 22
Answer:  The mapping diagram representing the relation is

Explanation:
From the given graph , co-ordinates of the ordering pairs are( 1 , 1 ), ( 3 , 3 ), ( -1 , -1 ), ( -3 , -3 ).
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 23
Answer: The mapping diagram representing the relation is

Explanation:
From the given graph , co-ordinates of the ordering pairs are( 0 , 8 ),( 2 , 8 ),( 4 , 8 ),( 6 , 8 ),( 8 , 8 ),( -2 , 8 ),( -4 , 8 ). Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 24
Answer: The mapping diagram representing the relation is

Explanation:
From the given graph , co-ordinates of the ordering pairs are( -2 , 1 ),( -2 , 2 ),( -2 , 3 ),( -2 , 4 ),( -2 , 5 ),( -2 , 6 ).
Each input has more than one output ,
So , The relation is not a function.

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The normal pressure at sea level is 1 atmosphere of pressure(1 ATM). As you dive below sea level, the pressure changes. The mapping diagram represents the pressures at different depths.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 25
a. Complete the mapping diagram.
b. Is pressure a function of depth?
c. Describe the relationship between pressure and depth.
d. List the ordered pairs. Then plot the ordered pairs in a coordinate plane. What do you notice about the points?
e. RESEARCH What are common depths for beginner scuba divers? What are common depths for experienced scuba divers?
Answer: The detailed explanation of  all the answers are given below .

Explanation:
a. The mapping diagram is
b. Yes , the pressure is a function of depth, Because depth is related to pressure in the given mapping diagram.

c. The relationship between pressure and depth is,
for every 10m increase in Depth of input there is an increase in 1 ATM pressure .

d. The ordered pairs are ( 0 , 1 ) , ( 10 , 2 ) , (20 , 3 ) , ( 30 , 4 ) , ( 40 , 5 ), ( 50 , 6 ).
The plot of the ordered pairs in a coordinate plane is

From the graph, we have seen that, if the depth of the diving of scuba drivers increases then the water pressure increases with increase in depth. So, the graph have straight line .

e. The common depths for beginner scuba divers is 30 feet to 60 feet or 9 to 18 meters ,
The common depths for experienced scuba divers is more than 60 feet or more than 18 meters .

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the cost of purchasing 1, 2, 3, or 4 T-shirts from a souvenir shop.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 26
a. Is the cost a function of the number of T-shirts purchased?
b. Describe the relationship between the cost and the number cost per T-shirt of T-shirts purchased. How does the change as you purchase more T-shirts?
Answer: The detailed explanation of  all the answers are given below .

Explanation:
a. Yes , The cost is a function of the number of T-shirts purchased, Because the cost of the purchased T-shirts is varying with the number of T-shirts purchased.

b. The relationship between the cost and the number cost per T-shirt of T-shirts purchased is,
Input is the cost of 1 T-shirt is $10 as output , Then for 2 T-shirts cost will be $20
If 2 T-shirts will be purchased at same time, cost will be decreased by $2 so it will be $10 + 8 = $18 for 2 T-shirts.
As per the single T-shirt cost , For 3 T-shirts will be $30,
So in the table given that 3 T-shirts will cost $24 , because it cost $18 + 6 = $24 for 3 T-shirts.
It goes same for 4 T-shirts , For 4 T-shirts will be $40, because it cost $24 + 4 = $28 for 4 T-shirts.

The change as you purchase more T-shirts is For every increase in purchase of the number of T-shirts is decrease in the cost of total T-shirts purchased.

Question 21.
REPEATED REASONING
The table shows the outputs for several inputs. Use two methods to predict the output for an input of 200.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.1 27
Answer: The output for an input of 200 is 1025.

Explanation:
Method 1. The relation between inputs and outputs is as follows,
y = 25 + 5x
As input increases by 1 , output increases by 5 units,
To find output of 200 as input ,
put x = 200 in the equation,
y = 25 + 5(200)
= 25 + 1000
= 1025.
So , y = 1025.

Method 2.  As the table shown, for every increase in input there is an increase in 5 numbers in output,
So , For 1 input = 25 + 5 = 30 as output
For 2 input = 30 + 5 = 35 as out put
For 3 input = 35 + 5 = 40 as out put
For 4 input = 40 + 5 = 45 as out put
By doing this for number 200 as input we have , 1025 as output.

Lesson 7.2 Representations of Functions

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Table to Describe Relationships
Work with a partner. Make a table that shows the relationship  between the figure number x and the area A of each figure. Then use an equation to find which figure has an area of 81 square units when the pattern continues.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 1

Answer: a. The equation is y = 2x – 1, For figure has an area of 81 square units is 41.
b. The equation is y = x²,  For figure has an area of 81 square units is 9.

Explanation:
a. figure shows the 1 square unit of each box  for and it has a pattern of  2x – 1
figure 1 = 1 square unit
figure 2 =3 square units
figure 3 = 5 square unit and so on
So, the equation is y = 2x – 1 , it is in the form of y = mx + c,
Given to which figure has an area of 81 square units
substitute y  = 81, we have
y = 2x – 1
81 = 2x – 1
2x = 82
x = 41
So, For figure has an area of 81 square units is 41.

b. As shown above , we know that ,
figure 1 = 1 square unit
figure 2 =4 square units
figure 3 = 9 square unit and so on
Here we have a pattern of power of its own number,
So, the Equation  will be y = x²
Given to which figure has an area of 81 square units
substitute y  = 81, we have
x  = 9
So, For figure has an area of 81 square units is 9.

EXPLORATION 2

Using a Graph
Work with a partner. Use a graph to test the truth of each statement. If the statement is true, write an equation that shows how to obtain one measurement from the other.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 2
a. “You can find the horsepower of a race-car car engine if you know its volume in cubic inches”
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 3
b. “You can find the volume of a race-car engine in cubic centimeters if you know its volume in cubic inches.”
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 4

Answer: a. Given ordered pairs are (200 , 375) , (350 , 650) , (350 , 250) , (500 , 600)
We can not find the horsepower of a race-car car engine if you know its volume in cubic inches
b. Given ordered pairs are (100 , 1640) , (200 , 3280) , (300 , 4920) ,
Yes, You can find the volume of a race-car engine in cubic centimeters if you know its volume in cubic inches

Explanation:
a. Given ordered pairs are (200 , 375) , (350 , 650) , (350 , 250) , (500 , 600)
We can not find the horsepower of a race-car car engine if you know its volume in cubic inches

b. Given ordered pairs are (100 , 1640) , (200 , 3280) , (300 , 4920) ,
Yes, You can find the volume of a race-car engine in cubic centimeters if you know its volume in cubic inches

Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 5

Try It

Question 1.
Write a function rule for “The output is one-fourth of the input.”
Answer:  y = \(\frac{x}{4}\)

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is one-fourth of the input, will be ,
y = \(\frac{x}{4}\).

Find the value of y when x = 5.
Question 2.
y = 4x – 1
Answer: y = 19.

Explanation:
Given, y = 4x – 1
substitute x = 5 , we get
y = 4(5) – 1
y = 20 – 1 = 19
So, y = 19.

Question 3.
y = 10x
Answer: y = 50

Explanation:
Given, y =10x
substitute x = 5 , we get
y = 10(5)
y = 50
So, y = 50.

Question 4.
y = 7 – 3x
Answer: y = -8.

Explanation:
Given, y = 7 – 3x
substitute x = 5 , we get
y = 7 – 3(5)
y = 7 – 15 = -8
So, y = -8.

Graph the function.
Question 5.
y = x + 1
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = x + 1  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0 + 1 = 1 . co-ordinates are (0 , 1)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 + 1 = 2 . co-ordinates are (1 , 2)
if x = 2 , then y = 2 + 1 = 3 , co-ordinates are (2 , 3)
The co-ordinates (0 , 1) , (1 , 2) , (2 , 3) form a straight line .

Question 6.
y = – 3x
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = – 3x  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = -3(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = -3(1) = -3 . co-ordinates are (1 , -3)
if x = 2 , then y = -3(2) = -6 , co-ordinates are (2 , -6)
if x = 3 , then y = -3(3) = -9 , co-ordinates are (3 , -9)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , -3) , (2 , -6) ,(3 , -9) form a straight line .

Question 7.
y = 3x + 2
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = 3x + 2  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =3(0) + 2 = 2 . co-ordinates are (0 , 2)
if x = 1 , then y = 3(1) + 2= 5 . co-ordinates are (1 , 5)
if x = 2 , then y =3(2) + 2 = 7 , co-ordinates are (2 , 7)
The co-ordinates (0 , 2) , (1 , 5) , (2 , 7) form a straight line .

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

WRITING FUNCTION RULES Write a function rule for the statement.
Question 8.
The output is three times the input.
Answer: y = 3x

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is three times the input. will be ,
So , y = 3x .

Question 9.
The output is eight more than one-seventh of the input.
Answer: y = 8 + \(\frac{x}{7}\) .

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is eight more than one-seventh of the input., will be ,
So, y = 8 + \(\frac{x}{7}\) .

EVALUATING A FUNCTION Find the value of y when x = 5.
Question 10.
y = 6x
Answer: y = 30

Explanation:
Given, y = 6x
substitute x = 5 , we get
y = 6(5) =30
So, y = 30

Question 11.
y = 11 – x
Answer: y = 6

Explanation:
Given, y = 11 – x
substitute x = 5 , we get
y = 11 – 5 = 6
So, y = 6.

Question 12.
y = \(\frac{1}{5}\)x + 1
Answer:  y = 2.

Explanation:
Given, y = \(\frac{1}{5}\)x + 1
substitute x = 5 , we get
y = \(\frac{x}{5}\) + 1
y= \(\frac{5}{5}\) + 1
y = 1 + 1 = 2
So, y = 2 .

GRAPHING A FUNCTION Graph the function.
Question 13.
y = – 2x
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = – 2x  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = – 2(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = – 2(1)= -2 . co-ordinates are (1 , -2)
if x = 2 , then y =- 2(2) = -4 , co-ordinates are (2 , -4)
if x = 3 , then y =- 2(3) = -6 , co-ordinates are (3 , -6)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , -2) , (2 , -4) , (3 , -6) form a straight line .

Question 14.
y = x – 3
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = x – 3 , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0 – 3 = -3 . co-ordinates are (0 , -3)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 – 3= -2 . co-ordinates are (1 , -2)
if x = 2 , then y = 2 – 3 = -1 , co-ordinates are (2 , -1)
if x = 3 , then y = 3 – 3 = 0 , co-ordinates are (3 , 0)
The co-ordinates (0 , -3) , (1 , -2) , (2 , -1) , (3 , 0) form a straight line .

Question 15.
y = 9 – 3x
Answer: 

Explanation:
Given , y = 9 – 3x , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 9 – 3(0) = 9 . co-ordinates are (0 , 9)
if x = 1 , then y = 9 – 3(1) = 6 . co-ordinates are (1 , 6)
if x = 2 , then y = 9 – 3(2) = 3 , co-ordinates are (2 , 3)
if x = 3 , then y = 9 – 3(3) = 0 , co-ordinates are (3 , 0)
The co-ordinates (0 , 9) , (1 , 6) , (2 , 3) , (3 , 0) form a straight line .

Question 16.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 6
Answer: As mentioned in the explanation below  a & d , b & c are different .

Explanation:
Given ,
a. what output is 4 more than twice the input 3?
Let us say that , y is output and x is input and given as 3 ,
then, we have y = 4 + 2(3) = 10.
b. What output is twice the sum of the input 3 and 4?
Let us say that , y is output and x is input and given as 3 ,
then, we have y = 2( 3 + 4 ) = 14.
c. what output is the sum of 2 times the input 3 and 4?
Let us say that , y is output and x is input and given as 3 ,
then, we have y = 2( 3 + 4 ) = 14.
d. what output is 4 increased by twice the input 3?
Let us say that , y is output and x is input and given as 3 ,
then, we have y = 4 + 2(3) = 10.

So, a & d , b & c are different .

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 17.
The World Health Organization(WHO) suggests having 23 health-care workers for every 10,000 people. How many health-care workers are needed to meet the WHO suggestion for a population of 250,000 people? Justify your answer using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 7
Answer: So, 575 health-care workers are needed to meet the WHO suggestion for a population of 250,000 people

Explanation:
Given, The World Health Organization(WHO) suggests having 23 health-care workers for every 10,000 people.
we need to find how many health-care workers are needed to meet the WHO suggestion for a population of 250,000 people,
For every 10,000 people we have 23 care takers
Then for 250,000 people we have
\(\frac{23 × 250,000}{10,000}\)
= 23 × 25
= 575
So, 575 health-care workers are needed to meet the WHO suggestion for a population of 250,000 people

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
A truck produces 22 pounds of carbon dioxide for every gallon of diesel fuel burned. The fuel economy of the truck is 18 miles per gallon. Write and graph a function that describes the relationship between carbon dioxide produced and distance traveled.
Answer: y = 22x + 18  is the linear equation

Explanation:
Given, A truck produces 22 pounds of carbon dioxide for every gallon of diesel fuel burned.
The fuel economy of the truck is 18 miles per gallon.
So, we have y = 22x + 18 is in the form of y = mx +c
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 22(0) + 18 = 18 . co-ordinates are (0 , 18)
if x = 1 , then y =22(1) + 18= 40  . co-ordinates are (1 , 40)
if x = 2 , then y =22(2) + 18 = 62 , co-ordinates are (2 , 62)
if x = 3 , then y =22(3) + 18 = 84  , co-ordinates are (3 , 84)
The co-ordinates (0 , 18) , (1 , 40) , (2 , 62) , (3 , 84) form a straight line .
The graph is

Representations of Functions Homework & Practice 7.2

Review & Refresh

Determine whether the relation is a function. 
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 8
Answer:  The relation is a function .

Explanation:
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 9
Answer:  The relation is a function .

Explanation:
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 10
Answer: The relation is not a function .

Explanation:
The each input has  more than two outputs , That is one input has multiple number of outputs.
Here , input 2 has two outputs which are 0 and -4 .
So , The relation is not a function .

Find the slope of the line.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 11
Answer: slope = 1.

Explanation:
By using the slope equation , we know that
Slope = \(\frac{change in y}{change in x}\) or
slope = \(\frac{▲y}{▲x}\)
From the graph we know that change in y or ▲y is change from -2 to -4 =2
change in x or ▲x is change from 1 to 3 = 2 ,
So, slope = \(\frac{▲y}{▲x}\)
slope = \(\frac{2}{2}\)
slope = 1.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 12
Answer: slope = \(\frac{5}{2}\) .

Explanation:
By using the slope equation , we know that
Slope = \(\frac{change in y}{change in x}\) or
slope = \(\frac{▲y}{▲x}\)
From the graph we know that change in y or ▲y is change from -4 to 1 = 5
change in x or ▲x is change from -1 to -3 = 2 ,
So, slope = \(\frac{▲y}{▲x}\)
slope = \(\frac{5}{2}\) .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 13
Answer:  slope = \(\frac{1}{3}\) .

Explanation:
By using the slope equation , we know that
Slope = \(\frac{change in y}{change in x}\) or
slope = \(\frac{▲y}{▲x}\)
From the graph we know that change in y or ▲y is change from -4 to -3 = 1
change in x or ▲x is change from 1 to 4 = 3 ,
So, slope = \(\frac{▲y}{▲x}\)
slope = \(\frac{1}{3}\) .

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A GRAPH Use a graph to test the truth of the statement. If the statement is true, write an equation that shows how to obtain one measurement from the other measurement. (See Exploration 2, p. 281.)

Question 7.
“You can find the weight of a cell phone in ounces if you know its screen size in inches.”
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 14
Answer: we can does not find the weight of a cell phone in ounces if you know its screen size in inches.

From the given table , Ordered pairs are (4 , 4) , (4.7 , 4.8) , (5 , 4.8) , (5.5 , 6.4)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (4, 4) and (4.7, 4.8)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (4.8 – 4) / (4.7 – 4)
m = 0.8/0.7 .
So, we can does not find the weight of a cell phone in ounces if you know its screen size in inches.

Question 8.
“You can find the age of a child in years if you know the age of the child in months.”
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 15
Answer: YES, y = 0.08x + 0.04 is a linear equations

Explanation:
From the given table , Ordered pairs are (9 , 0.75) , (12 , 1) , (15 , 1.25) , (24 , 2)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (12 ,1) and (24, 2)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (2 – 1) / (24 – 12)
m = 1/12
m = 0.08.
substitute the slope in the (12 ,1) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 1 = 0.08(x – 12)
y –1 = 0.08x – 0.96
y = 0.08x –0.96 + 1
y =0.08 x + 0.04
So, y = 0.08x + 0.04 is a linear equation

WRITING FUNCTION RULES Write a function rule for the statement.
Question 9.
The output is half of the input.
Answer: y = \(\frac{x}{2}\).

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is half of the input, will be ,
y = \(\frac{x}{2}\).

Question 10.
The output is eleven more than the input.
Answer: y = x + 11

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is eleven more than the input, will be ,
y = x + 11

Question 11.
The output is three less than the input.
Answer: y = x – 3

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is three less than the input, will be ,
y = x – 3

Question 12.
The output is the cube of the input.
Answer: y = x³

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is the cube of the input, will be ,
y = x³

Question 13.
The output is six times the input.
Answer: y = 6x

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is six times the input, will be ,
y = 6x

Question 14.
The output is one more than twice the input.
Answer: y = 2x + 1

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is one more than twice the input, will be ,
y = 2x + 1

EVALUATING A FUNCTION Find the value of y for the given value of x.
Question 15.
y = x + 5; x = 3
Answer: y = 8

Explanation:
Given, y = x + 5
substitute x = 3 , we get
y = 3 + 5
So, y = 8.

Question 16.
y = 7x; x = – 5
Answer:  y = -35.

Explanation:
Given, y = 7x
substitute x = -5 , we get
y = 7(-5)
So, y = -35.

Question 17.
y = 1 – 2x; x = 9
Answer: y = -17

Explanation:
Given, y = 1 – 2x
substitute x = 9 , we get
y = 1 – 2(9)
y = 1 – 18
So, y = -17.

Question 18.
y = 3x + 2; x = 0.5
Answer: y = 5.5

Explanation:
Given, y = 3x + 2
substitute x = 0.5 , we get
y = 3(0.5) + 2
y = 3.5 + 2
So, y = 5.5 .

Question 19.
y = 2x3; x = 3
Answer: y = 54

Explanation:
Given, y = 2x3
substitute x = 3 , we get
y = 2(3)³
y = 2 × 27 = 54
So, y = 54.

Question 20.
y = \(\frac{x}{2}\) + 9; x = – 12
Answer: y = 3

Explanation:
Given, y = \(\frac{x}{2}\) + 9
substitute x = -12 , we get
y = \(\frac{-12}{2}\) + 9
y = -6 + 9
So, y = 3 .

GRAPHING A FUNCTION Graph the function.
Question 21.
y = x + 4
Answer: 

Explanation:
Given , y = x + 4  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0 + 4 = 4 . co-ordinates are (0 , 4)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 + 4 = 5 . co-ordinates are (1 , 5)
if x = 2 , then y = 2 + 4 = 6 , co-ordinates are (2 , 6)
if x = 3 , then y = 3 + 4 = 7 , co-ordinates are (3 , 7)
The co-ordinates (0 , 4) , (1 , 5) , (2 , 6) , (3 , 7) form a straight line .

Question 22.
y = 2x
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = 2x  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 2(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = 2(1) = 2 . co-ordinates are (1 , 2)
if x = 2 , then y = 2(2) = 4 , co-ordinates are (2 , 4)
if x = 3 , then y = 2(3) = 6 , co-ordinates are (3 , 6)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , 2) , (2 , 4) , (3 , 6) form a straight line .

Question 23.
y = – 5x + 3
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = – 5x + 3  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =- 5(0) + 3 = 3 . co-ordinates are (0 , 3)
if x = 1 , then y = – 5(1) + 3 = -2 . co-ordinates are (1 , -2)
if x = 2 , then y = – 5(2) + 3 = -7 , co-ordinates are (2 , -7)
if x = 3 , then y = – 5(3) + 3 = -12 , co-ordinates are (3 , -12)
The co-ordinates (0 , 3) , (1 , -2) , (2 , -7) , (3 , -12) form a straight line .

Question 24.
y = \(\frac{x}{4}\)
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = \(\frac{x}{4}\) , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = \(\frac{0}{4}\) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25 . co-ordinates are (1 , 0.25)
if x = 2 , then y = \(\frac{2}{4}\) = 0.5 , co-ordinates are (2 , 0.5)
if x = 3 , then y = \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 0.75 , co-ordinates are (3 , 0.75)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , 0.25) , (2 , 0.5) , (3 , 0.75) form a straight line .

Question 25.
y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x + 1
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x + 1  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =\(\frac{3}{2}\)(0) + 1 = 1 . co-ordinates are (0 , 1)
if x = 1 , then y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)(1) + 1= 2.5 . co-ordinates are (1 , 2.5)
if x = 2 , then y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)(2) + 1 = 4 , co-ordinates are (2 , 4)
if x = 3 , then y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)(3) + 1 = 5.5 , co-ordinates are (3 , 5.5)
The co-ordinates (0 , 1) , (1 , 2.5) , (2 , 4) , (3 , 5.5) form a straight line .

Question 26.
y = 1 + 0.5x
Answer:

Explanation:
Given , y = 1 + 0.5x  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =1 + 0.5(0) = 1 . co-ordinates are (0 , 1)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 + 0.5(1) = 1.5 . co-ordinates are (1 , 1.5)
if x = 2 , then y = 1 + 0.5(2) = 2 , co-ordinates are (2 , 2)
if x = 3 , then y = 1 + 0.5(3) = 2.5 , co-ordinates are (3 , 2.5)
The co-ordinates (0 , 1) , (1 , 1.5) , (2 , 2) , (3 , 2.5)  form a straight line .

MATCHING Match the graph with the function it represents.
A. y = \(\frac{x}{3}\)
B. y = x + 1
C. y = – 2x + 6
Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 16
Answer:  B. y = x + 1.

Explanation:
Given , y = x + 1  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0 + 1 = 1 . co-ordinates are (0 , 1)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 + 1 = 2 . co-ordinates are (1 , 2)
if x = 2 , then y = 2 + 1 = 3 , co-ordinates are (2 , 3)
The co-ordinates (0 , 1) , (1 , 2) , (2 , 3) form a straight line .

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 17
Answer: c. y = – 2x + 6

Explanation:
Given , y = – 2x + 6  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = – 2(0) + 6 = 6 . co-ordinates are (0 , 6)
if x = 1 , then y = – 2(1) + 6 = 4 . co-ordinates are (1 , 4)
if x = 2 , then y = – 2(2) + 6 = 2 , co-ordinates are (2 , 2)
if x = 3 , then y = – 2(3) + 6 = 0 , co-ordinates are (3 , 0)
The co-ordinates (0 , 6) , (1 , 4) , (2 , 2) , (3 , 0) form a straight line .

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 18
Answer: A. y = \(\frac{x}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given , y =  \(\frac{x}{3}\) , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =\(\frac{0}{3}\) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = \(\frac{1}{3}\)= 0.3 . co-ordinates are (1 , 0.3)
if x = 2 , then y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)= 0.6 , co-ordinates are (2 , 0.6)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , 0.3) , (2 , 0.6) form a straight line .

Question 30.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend graphs the function represented by the input-output table. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 19
Answer: Yes , He is correct

Explanation:

Ordered pairs are (-1 , -4) , (1 , -2) , (3 ,0) , (5 , 2)
these points form a straight line when graphed.
Yes , He is correct

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A dolphin eats 30 pounds of fish per day.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 20
a. Write and graph a function that relates the number p of pounds of fish that a dolphin eats in d days.
b. How many total pounds of fish does a dolphin eat in 30 days?
Answer:

Explanation:
a. Given , A dolphin eats 30 pounds of fish per day.
by each passing day eating fish is increased by the day passes .
So, y = 30x is the function,
The graph represents the function as

b. Given , A dolphin eats 30 pounds of fish per day.
then for 30 days ,
30 × 30 = 900 pounds
So, A dolphin eats 900 pounds of fish in 30 days

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You fill a fish tank with 55 gallons of water on Saturday. The water evaporates at a rate of 1.5 gallons per day. You plan to add water when the tank reaches 49 gallons. When will you add water? Justify your answer.
Answer: As the action starts on Saturday , the tank will reach 49 gallons after 4 days , That is on Wednesday.

Explanation:
Given data ,, implies that slope of the function m = -1.5
The y intercept b= 55,
Then the equation  will be y = 55 – 1.5x
Given , You plan to add water when the tank reaches 49 gallons.
determine x for y = 49 ,
So, 49 = 55 – 1.5x ,
1.5x = 55 – 49
1.5x = 6
x = \(\frac{6}{1.5}\)
x = 4.

As the action starts on Saturday , the tank will reach 49 gallons after 4 days , That is on Wednesday.

USING AN EQUATION Find the value of x for the given value of y.
Question 33.
y = 5x – 7; y = – 22
Answer: x = -3

Explanation:
Given, y = 5x – 7
x = \(\frac{y + 7}{5}\)
substitute y = -22 , we get
x = \(\frac{-22 + 7}{5}\)
x = \(\frac{- 15}{5}\)
x = -3
So, x = -3 .

Question 34.
y = 9 – 7x; y = 37
Answer: x = -4

Explanation:
Given, y = 9 – 7x
x = \(\frac{9 – y}{7}\)
substitute y = 37 , we get
x = \(\frac{9 – 37}{7}\)
x = \(\frac{- 28}{7}\)
x = -4
So, x = -4 .

Question 35.
y = \(\frac{x}{4}\) – 7; y = 2
Answer: x = 36

Explanation:
Given, y = \(\frac{x}{4}\) – 7
x = 4( y + 7)
substitute y = 2 , we get
x = 4( 2 + 7)
x = 4(9)
x = 36
So, x = 36 .

Question 36.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You decide to make and sell bracelets. The cost of your materials is $84.00. You charge $3.50 for each bracelet.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 21
a. P Write a function that represents the profit for selling b bracelets.
b. Which variable is independent? dependent? Explain.
c. You will break even when the cost of your materials equals your income. How many bracelets must you sell to break even?
Answer: a. A function that represents the profit for selling b bracelets is p = 3.5b – 84.
b. Here , the profit depends on the number of bracelets sold , b is the independent variable and p is the dependent variable.
c. To break even you must sell 24  bracelets.

Explanation:
a. Given , The cost of your materials is $84.00. You charge $3.50 for each bracelet,
Let p be the profit , b be the number of bracelets sold,
So, profit = income – cost .
p = 3.5b – 84.
Thus , A function that represents the profit for selling b bracelets is p = 3.5b – 84.

b. Here , the profit depends on the number of bracelets sold , b is the independent variable and p is the dependent variable.

c. set the income expression from part a equal to the cost of 84 and solve for b ,
So, income = cost .
3.5b = 84 ,
b = \(\frac{84}{3.5}\)
b = 24.

To break even you must sell 24  bracelets.

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A furniture store is having a sale where everything is 40% off.
a. Write and graph a function that represents the amount of discount on an item at regular price.
b. You buy a bookshelf that has a regular price of $85. What is the sale price of the bookshelf?
Answer: a. The function is y = 0.4x and the graph is given below.
b. The sale price of the bookshelf s $51.

Explanation:
a. A function that represents the amount of discount on an item at regular price is ,
Given , 40% = 0.4 ,
To find the percent of the number , we should multiply the number by the percent in the decimal form ,
so, the equation is d = 0.4p ,
let us convert it in to a function form , y = 0.4x
we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0.4(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = 0.4(1)= 0.4 . co-ordinates are (1 , 0.4)
if x = 2 , then y =0.4(2) = 0.8 , co-ordinates are (2 , 0.8)
if x = 3 , then y = 0.4(3) = 1.2 , co-ordinates are (3 , 1.2)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , 0.4) , (2 , 0.8) , (3 , 1.2) form a straight line .
The graph is
b. Given , You buy a bookshelf that has a regular price of $85.
The sale price of the bookshelf is ,
substituting the given price in p = 85 ,
it will be the discount d = 0.4 (85) = 34
Then the sale price is $85 – $34 = $51.

So, The sale price of the bookshelf s $51.

Question 38.
REASONING
You want to take a two-hour air boat tour. Which is a better deal, Snake Tours or Gator Tours? Use functions to justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 22
Answer: By using functions , $50 > $40 , So, Gator tours are cheaper than the snake tours .

Explanation:
Given , You want to take a two-hour air boat tour.
Let x be the hours of  air boat tour and y be the cost of air boat tour ,
Snake tours , y = 25x
putt x = 2 ,
So , y = 25 (2) = 50 .
y = 50.

Gator tour , y = 35 + \(\frac{5}{2}\)x
Put x = 2 ,
So, y = 35 + \(\frac{5}{2}\) x
y = 35 + 2.5x
y = 35 + 2.5 (2)
y = 35 + 5
y = 40 .

Finally $50 > $40 , So, Gator tours are cheaper than the snake tours

Question 39.
REASONING
The graph of a function is a line that passes through the points (3, 2), (5, 8), and (8, y). What is the value of y?
Answer: The value of y is 17 , so, The third given point is (8, 17)

Explanation:
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3,2) and (5,8)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (8 – 2) / (5 – 3)
m = 6 / 2
m = 3
Then use the slope and one of the given points (3,2) to find the y-intercept
y = mx +
2 = 3(3) + b
2 = 9 + b
-7 = b
The equation is   y = 3x -7
Then find the third point (8, y) by replacing x by 8
y = 3x -7
y = 3(8) -7
y = 24 -7
y = 17

so the third given point is (8, 17)

Question 40.
CRITICAL THINKING
Make a table where the independent variable is the side length of a square and the dependent variable is the perimeter. Make a second table where the independent variable is the side length of a square and the dependent variable is the area. Graph both functions in the same coordinate plane. Compare the functions.
Answer: The graph for the perimeter is linear , The graph for the Area is Quadratic .

Explanation:
Let us say , s be the side length of the square ,
Then the perimeter is P = 4s ,
The function will be y= 4x,
we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 4(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = 4(1) = 4 . co-ordinates are (1 , 4)
if x = 2 , then y = 4(2) =8 , co-ordinates are (2 , 8)
if x = 3 , then y = 4(3) = 0 , co-ordinates are (3 , 12)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , 4) , (2 ,8) , (3 , 12) form a straight line .

Table will be ,

Let us say , s be the side length of the square ,
Then the Area is A = s² ,
The function will be y=x²,
we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0² = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = 1² = 1 . co-ordinates are (1 , 1)
if x = 2 , then y = 2² =4 , co-ordinates are (2 , 4)
if x = 3 , then y = 3² = 9 , co-ordinates are (3 , 9)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , 1) , (2 ,4) , (3 , 9) form a straight line .

Second table is
Then the graph is 
The graph for the perimeter is linear , The graph for the Area is Quadratic .

Question 41.
PUZZLE
The blocks that form the diagonals of each square are shaded. Each block has an area of one square unit. Find the “green area” of Square 20. Find the “green area” of Square 21. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions 7.2 23
Answer:  The green area of the Square 20 is 46 square units and The green area of the Square 21 is 48 square units.

Explanation:
Given , Each block has an area of one square unit,
Square 1 has  the diagonals of each square are shaded. the “green area” is 3 + 3 = 6 square units ,
Square 2 has  the diagonals of each square are shaded. the “green area” is 4 + 4 = 8 square units ,
Square 3 has  the diagonals of each square are shaded. the “green area” is 5 + 5 = 10 square units ,
Square 4 has  the diagonals of each square are shaded. the “green area” is 6 + 6 = 12 square units,
Square 5 has  the diagonals of each square are shaded. the “green area” is 7 + 7 = 14 square units ,
Here , The number of squares are increasing by one block with the square numbers.
So for the , Square 20 has  the diagonals of each square are shaded. the “green area” is 23 + 23 = 46 square units,
And Square 21 has  the diagonals of each square are shaded. the “green area” is 24 + 24 = 48 square units.

Lesson 7.3 Linear Functions

EXPLORATION 1

Writing and Graphing Functions
Work with a partner. Each table shows a familiar pattern from geometry.

  • Determine what the variables x and y represent. Then write a function rule that relates y to x.
  • Is the function a linear function? Explain your reasoning.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 1
Answer: All of them are explained below

Explanation:
The variables x and y represents a rectangle
a. From the given table , Ordered pairs are (1 , 10) , (2 , 12) , (3 , 14) , (4 , 16)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 ,-1) and (2, -2)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (-2 – (-1)) / (2 – 0)
m = -1 / 2 .
substitute the slope in the (1 , 10) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 10 = -1/2 ( x –1)
2(y – 10) = -x  + 1
2y – 20 = -x+ 1
2y = -x  + 21
y = \(\frac{-1}{2}\) (x – 21)
So ,  y = \(\frac{-1}{2}\) (x – 21) is linear function.

b. The variables x and y represent a circle
Ordered pairs are (1 , 3.14 ) , (2 , 6.28) , (3 , 9.42) , (4 , 12.5 )
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 , 3.14 ) , (2 , 6.28)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (6.28 –3.14) / (2– 1)
m = 3.14/1
m = 3.14
substitute the slope in the (8 , 4) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 3.14 =3.14 ( x –1)
y – 3.14 = 3.14x – 3.14
y = 3.14x – 3.14 + 3.14
y = 3.14x
So ,  y = 3.14x  is linear function.
Where x is the diameter of the circle.

c. The variables x and y represents a trapezoid
a. From the given table , Ordered pairs are (1 , 5) , (2 , 6) , (3 , 7) , (4 , 8)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 ,5) and (2, 6)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (6 – 5) / (2 – 1)
m = 1 .
substitute the slope in the (1 ,5) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 5 = 1(x – 1)
y – 5 = x – 1
y = x – 1 + 5
y = x + 4
So, y = x + 4 is a linear equation

d. The variables x and y represents a cube
a. From the given table , Ordered pairs are (1 , 28) , (2 , 40) , (3 , 52) , (4 , 64)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 ,28) and (2, 40)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (40 – 28) / (2 – 1)
m = 12 .
substitute the slope in the (1 ,28) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 28 = 12(x – 1)
y – 28 = 12x – 12
y = 12x – 12 + 28
y = 12x + 16
So, y = 12x + 16 is a linear equation.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 2

Try It

Question 1.
Use the graph to write a linear function that relates y to x.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 3
Answer: the linear function is y = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)x -1.

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (-4 , 1) , (-2 , 0 ) , (0 , -1) , ( 2, -2 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,-1) and (2, -2)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (-2 – (-1)) / (2 – 0)
m = -1 / 2 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, -1 ) , The y intercept is -1.
So , the linear function is y = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)x -1.

Question 2.
Use the table to write a linear function that relates y to x.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 4
Answer: the linear function is y = (0)x + 2.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (-2 , 2) , (-1 , 2) , (0 , 2) , (1 , 2)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,2) and (1, 2)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (2 – 2) / (1 – 0)
m = 0
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 2 ) , The y intercept is 2.
So , the linear function is y = (0)x + 2.

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
The rate of descent doubles. Repeat parts (a) and (b).
Answer: a. the linear function is y = -1x + 65.
b. The slope indicates that the height decreases 1000 feet per minute.
The y intercept indicates that the descent begins at a cruising altitude of 65,000 feet.

Explanation:
a. From the Given table , The rate of descents is 5
If it doubles , then The rate of descents is 10.
The the ordered pairs will be (0 , 65) , (10 ,55) , (20 , 45) .
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,65) and (10, 55)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (55 – 65) / (10 – 0)
m = -10 / 10
m = -1
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 65 ) , The y intercept is 65.
So , the linear function is y = -1x + 65.

b. The slope indicates that the height decreases 1000 feet per minute.
The y intercept indicates that the descent begins at a cruising altitude of 65,000 feet.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
WRITING A LINEAR FUNCTION
Use the graph to write a linear function that relates y to x.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 5
Answer:  The linear function is y = -4x -2 .

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (-2 , 6) , (-1 , 2 ) , (0 , -2) , ( 1, -6 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,-2) and (1, -6)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (-6 – (-2)) / (1 – 0)
m = -4 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, -2) , The y intercept is -2.
So , the linear function is y = -4x -2 .

Question 5.
INTERPRETING A LINEAR FUNCTION
The table shows the revenue R (in millions of dollars) of a company when it spends A (in millions of dollars) on advertising.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 6
a. Write and graph a linear function that relates R to A.
b. Interpret the slope and the y-intercept.
Answer:  a. The linear function is y = 2x + 2. and the graph is shown below
b. The slope indicates that the increasing in the amount of spending on advertising by 2 million dollars
The y intercept indicates that the Revenue begins to increasing from the 2 million dollars.

Explanation:
a. From the given table ,
The the ordered pairs will be (0 , 2) , (2 ,6) , (4 , 10) , (6 , 14) , (8 ,18) .
The graph is
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,2) and (2, 6)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (6 – 2) / (2 – 0)
m = 4 / 2
m = 2
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 2 ) , The y intercept is 2.
So , the linear function is y = 2x + 2.

b. The slope indicates that the increasing in the amount of spending on advertising by 2 million dollars
The y intercept indicates that the Revenue begins to increasing from the 2 million dollars.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
Manager A earns $15 per hour and receives a $50 bonus. The graph shows the earnings of Manager B. (a) Which manager has a greater hourly wage? (b) After how many hours does Manager B earn more money than Manager A?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 7
Answer: a. Manager B has the greater hourly wage than Manager A .
b. As manager A receives a $50 bonus , Manager B has to work an hour extra to earn more money than Manager A .

Explanation:
a. Manager A earns $15 per hour and receives a $50 bonus.
The ordered pairs will be  (0 , 0) , (1 , 15) , (2 , 30) , (3 , 45)
The graph shows the earnings of Manager B.
Ordered pairs from the graph are  (0 , 0) , (1 , 25) , (2 , 50) , (3 , 75)
So, Manager B has the greater hourly wage than Manager A .

b. As manager A receives a $50 bonus , Manager B has to work an hour extra to earn more money than Manager A .

Question 7.
Each month, you start with 2 gigabytes of data and use 0.08 gigabyte per day. The table shows the amount (in gigabytes) of data that your friend has left days after the start of each month. Who runs out of data first? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 8
Answer:  you will be run out of data first

Explanation:
a. Given , Each month, you start with 2 gigabytes of data and use 0.08 gigabyte per day.
Let x be the number of days and y be the total data in gigabytes.
So, y = -0.08x + 2 ,
You will be out of data if , -0.08x + 2 = 0 ,
-0.08x + 2 = 0
2 = 0.08x
x = \(\frac{2}{0.08}\)
x = 25.
Hence ,you will be run out of data in 25 days.
b. Daily data usage for the friend will be given by the slope of the graph.
The the ordered pairs will be (0 , 3) , (7 ,2.3) , (14 , 1.6) .
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (7 ,2.3) and (14, 1.6)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (1.6 – 2.3) / (14 – 7)
m = -0.7 / 7
m = -0.1
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 3 ) , The y intercept is 3.
So , the linear function is y = -0.1x + 3.
Your friend will be out of data if ,
-0.1x + 3 = 0
3 = 0.1x
x = \(\frac{3}{0.1}\)
x = 30 .
Hence ,Friend will be run out of data in 30 days

So , you will be run out of data first

Linear Functions Homework & Practice 7.3

Review & Refresh

Write a function rule for the statement. Then graph the function.
Question 1.
The output is ten less than the input.
Answer: y = x – 10.

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is ten less than the input, will be ,
y = x – 10.

Question 2.
The output is one-third of the input.
Answer: y = \(\frac{x}{3}\)

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is one-third of the input, will be ,
y = \(\frac{x}{3}\) .

Solve the system.
Question 3.
y = x + 5
y = – 3x + 1
Answer: X = 0 , Y = 5

Explanation:
Y=3X+5 ——————-(1)
Y=X+5 ——————(2)
Substitute Y=X+5 in equation (1)
X+5=3X+5
Solve it for X
X+3X=55
4X=0
X=0/4=0
X = 0
Substitute X=0 in equation (1)
Y=0+5
Y=5

Question 4.
x + y = – 4
6x + 2y = 4
Answer:  X = 3 , Y= -7 .

Explanation:
2Y=−6X+4 ——————-(1)
Y= –X-4 ——————(2)
Substitute Y= –X-4 in equation (1)
2Y = −6X+4
2 ( X – 4 ) = −6X + 4
-2X – 8 = -6X + 4
6X -2X = 8 + 4
4X = 12
X = 3
Substitute X=3 in equation (2)
Y=– 3 – 4
Y= -7 .

Question 5.
– 4x + 3y = 14
y = 2x + 8
Answer:  X = -5 , Y = -2 .

Explanation:
3Y = 4X+14 ——————-(1)
Y = 2X + 8 ——————(2)
Substitute Y= 2X + 8 in equation (1)
3Y = 4X+14
3(2X + 8) = 4X+14
6X + 24 = 4X + 14
6X – 4X = 14 – 24
2X = -10
X = -5
Substitute X= -5 in equation (2)
Y= 2(-5) + 8
Y= -10 + 8
Y = -2.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

WRITING AND GRAPHING FUNCTIONS The table shows a familiar pattern from geometry. (a) Determine what the variables x and y represent. Then write a function rule that relates y to x. (b) Is the function a linear function? Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 289.)
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 9
Answer: a. The variables x and y represent a right angle triangle
b. y = 2x  is linear function.

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs
Ordered pairs are  (1 , 2) , (2 , 4) ,  (3 , 6 ) , (4 , 8), (5 , 10 ) .
a. the variables x and y represent a right angle triangle
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 , 2) , (2 , 4)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (4 – 2) / (2– 1)
m = 2/1
m = 2
b. substitute the slope in the (2 , 4) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 4 = 2 ( x – 2)
y – 4 = 2x – 4
y = 2x – 4 + 4
y = 2x
So ,  y = 2x  is linear function.

Given side of triangle is 4 then x= 4/2 = 2
x = 2 and y = 4.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 10
Answer: y = 3.14x  is linear function. and The variables x and y represent a circle

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (1 , 3.14 ) , (2 , 6.28) , (3 , 9.42) , (4 , 12.5 )
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 , 3.14 ) , (2 , 6.28)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (6.28 –3.14) / (2– 1)
m = 3.14/1
m = 3.14
substitute the slope in the (8 , 4) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 3.14 =3.14 ( x –1)
y – 3.14 = 3.14x – 3.14
y = 3.14x – 3.14 + 3.14
y = 3.14x
So ,  y = 3.14x  is linear function.
Where x is the diameter of the circle.

WRITING LINEAR FUNCTIONS Use the graph or table to write a linear function that relates y to x.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 11
Answer: The linear function is y = \(\frac{4}{3}\)x +2

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (-3 , -2) , (0 , 2 ) , (3 , 6) , ( 6, 10 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3 ,6) and (6, 10)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (10 – 6) / (6 – 3)
m = 4/3 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 2) , The y intercept is 2.
So , the linear function is y = \(\frac{4}{3}\)x +2 .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 12
Answer: The linear function is y = (0)x +3 .

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (-2 , 3) , (-1 , 3 ) , (0 , 3) , ( 1, 3 ) , (2 , 3)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 ,3) and (2, 3)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (3 – 3) / (2 – 1)
m = 0 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 3) , The y intercept is 3.
So , the linear function is y = (0)x +3 .

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 13
Answer: The linear function is y = \(\frac{-1}{4}\)x + 0.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (-8 , 2) , (-4 , 1) , (0 , 0) , (4 , -1)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (-8 ,2) and (-4, 1)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (1 – 2) / (-4 – (-8))
m = -1/4
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 0 ) , The y intercept is 0.
So , the linear function is y = \(\frac{-1}{4}\)x + 0.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 14
Answer: The linear function is y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x + 5.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (-3 , 3) , (0 , 5) , (3 , 7) , (6 , 9)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3 ,7) and (6, 9)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (9 – 7) / (6 – 3)
m = 2/3
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 5 ) , The y intercept is 5.
So , the linear function is y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x + 5.

Question 12.
INTERPRETING A LINEAR FUNCTION
The table shows the length y (in inches) of a person’s hair after x months.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 15
a. Write and graph a linear function that relates y to x.
b. Interpret the slope and the y-intercept.
Answer: a. The linear function is y = 0.5x + 11.
b. The slope indicates that the increasing in the hair length
The y intercept indicates that the increasing in hair length by time.

Explanation:
a. Given ,
The ordered pairs will be (0 , 11) , (3 ,12.5) , (6 , 14) .
The graph is
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3 ,12.5) and (6 , 14)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (14 – 12.5) / (6 – 3)
m = 1.5 / 3
m = 0.5
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 11 ) , The y intercept is 11.
So , the linear function is y = 0.5x + 11.

b. The slope indicates that the increasing in the hair length
The y intercept indicates that the increasing in hair length by time.

Question 13.
INTERPRETING A LINEAR FUNCTION
The table shows the percent (in decimal form) of battery power remaining x hours after you turn on a laptop computer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 16
a. Write and graph a linear function that relates y to x.
b. Interpret the slope, the x-intercept, and the y-intercept.
c. After how many hours is the battery power at75%?
Answer: a. The linear function is y = -0.2x + 1.
b. given below the explanation.
c. Battery will be 75% after 1.25 hours.

Explanation:
a. Given ,
The ordered pairs will be (0 , 1) , (2 ,0.6) , (4 , 0.2) .
The graph is
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (2 ,0.6) and (4 , 0.2)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (0.2 – 0.6) / (4 – 2)
m = -0.4 / 2
m = -0.2
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 1 ) , The y intercept is 1.
So , the linear function is y = -0.2x + 1.

b. Slope is -0.2 which means that as time increases by 1 hour, Battery power remaining decreases by 20% .
y intercept is 1, which means initially the battery power remaining before usage was 100%.
x intercept is 5 which means the battery remaining will be 0 after 5 hours.

c. battery percent will be 75% of 0.75 if ,
-0.2x + 1 = 0.75
0.2x = 1 – 0.75
x = 0.25/0.2
x = 1.25
Battery will be 75% after 1.25 hours.

Question 14.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The number y of calories burned after x minutes of kayaking is represented by the linear function y = 4.5x. The graph shows the number of calories burned by hiking.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 17
a. Which activity burns more calories per minute?
b. You perform each activity for 45 minutes. How many total calories do you burn? Justify your answer.
Answer: a. hiking burns more calories than kayaking .
b. In kayaking, 202.5 calories are burnt per minute. and In hiking , 225 calories are burnt per minute.

Explanation:
a. The number y of calories burned after x minutes of kayaking is represented by the linear function y = 4.5x.
So, The ordered pairs of the graph are (0 , 0) , (1 , 4.5) , (2 , 9) , (3, 13.5)
Here , In kayaking burns 4.5 calories per minute .
For hiking ,
The ordered pairs of the graph are (0 , 0) , (1 , 5) , (2 , 10) , (3, 15)
Here , In hiking burns 5 calories per minute.
Thus , hiking burns more calories than kayaking .

b. Given , perform each activity for 45 minutes.
Liner function of the kayaking is y = 4.5x
substitute x = 45 in equation
y = 4.5 (45)
y = 202.5
In kayaking, 202.5 calories are burnt per minute.
Linear function of the hiking is y = 5x
substitute x = 45 in equation
y = 5 (45)
y = 225
In hiking , 225 calories are burnt per minute.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You and a friend race each other. You give your friend a 50-foot head start. The distance y (in feet) your friend runs after x seconds is represented by the linear function y = 14x + 50. The table shows your distance at various times throughout the race. For what distances will you win the race? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 18
Answer: you will win the race for distances greater than 190 feet

Explanation:
The distance y (in feet) your friend runs after x seconds is represented by the linear function y = 14x + 50.
The slope of the line is 14 so , your friend runs at the rate of 14 ft per second
To find your rate , the ordered pairs are (2 , 38) , (4 , 76) , (6 , 114) , (8 , 152)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (2 ,38) and (4 , 76)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (76 – 38) / (4 – 2)
m = 38 / 2
m = 19
You are running at the rate of 19 ft per second.
To get the linear equation , substitute the slope in the (2 , 38) to get point slope to form a line.
Then we have , y = 19x
Now if x = 10 , to run faster then ,
y = 19(10)
y = 190 .
Your friend linear equation is y = 14x + 50 .
if x = 10 ,then
y = 14(10) + 50
y = 140 + 50
y = 190.
So , for x > 10 , means you will run farther than your friend which means you would win the race .
Therefore, you will win the race for distances greater than 190 feet.

Question 16.
REASONING
You and your friend are saving money to buy bicycles that cost $175 each. You have $45 to start and save an additional $5 each week. The graph shows the amount y(in dollars) that your friend has after x weeks. Who can buy a bicycle first? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 19
Answer:  your friend will but the bicycle first.

Explanation:
Given , your friend savings are
the ordered pairs are (0,15) and (3,39)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0,15) and (3,39)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (39 – 15) / (3 – 0)
m = 24 / 3
m = 8
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 15 ) , The y intercept is 15.
So , the linear function is y = 8x + 15.
to buy bicycles that cost $175 each
if y = 175 , then
175 = 8x + 15
8x = 175 – 15
x = 160/8
x = 20
So, your friend need 20 weeks to buy the bicycle
Given, You have $45 to start and save an additional $5 each week
So , the linear function will be y = 5x + 45.
to buy bicycles that cost $175 each
if y = 175 , then
175 = 5x + 45
5x = 175 – 45
x = 130/5
x = 26
So, you need 26 weeks to buy the bicycle.
Hence, your friend will but the bicycle first.

Question 17.
CRITICAL THINKING
Is every linear equation a linear function? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: All linear equations produce straight lines when graphed, not all linear equations produce linear functions. In order to be a linear function, a graph must be both linear (a straight line) and a function (matching each x-value to only one y-value).

Question 18.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The heat index is calculated using the relative humidity and the temperature. For every 1 degree increase in the temperature from 94°F to 97°F at 75% relative humidity, the heat index rises 4°F. On a summer day, the relative humidity is 75%, the temperature is 94°F, and the heat index is 124°F. Estimate the heat index when the relative humidity is 75% and the temperature is 100°F. Use a function to justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.3 20
Answer:  Heat index is 148°F

Explanation:
The form of linear equation is y = mx + c
and the slope of the function is given by m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
Let y be the heat index and x be the temperature
Given , (94, 124)
For every 1 degree increase in the temperature from 94°F to 97°F at 75% relative humidity, the heat index rises 4°F
that is m = 4
Since the line passes through (94, 124) means
124 = 4x + c
124 = 4(94) + c
124 = 376 + c
c = 124 – 376
c = -252
Linear function for the heat index is y = 4x – 252
put x = 100
So, y = 4(100) – 252
y = 400 – 252
y = 148.
Finally, Heat index is 148°F.


Lesson 7.4 Comparing Linear and Non Linear Functions

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Functions
Work with a partner. Each equation represents the height h (in feet) of a falling object after t seconds.

  • Graph each equation. Explain your method.
  • Decide whether each graph represents a or function.
  • Compare the falling objects.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 1
Answer: Explained below

Explanation:
a. Given, h = 300 – 15t can be written as y = 300 – 15x
h = 300 – 15t  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =300 – 15(0) = 300 . co-ordinates are (0 , 300)
if x = 1 , then y = 300 – 15(1) = 285 . co-ordinates are (1 , 285)
if x = 2 , then y = 300 – 15(2) = 270  , co-ordinates are (2 , 270)
if x = 3 , then y = 300 – 15(3) = 255  , co-ordinates are (3 , 255)
The co-ordinates (0 , 300) , (1 , 285) , (2 , 270) , (3 , 255) form a straight line .

The graph is

Given , h = 300- 16t2  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =300- 16(0)2  = 300 . co-ordinates are (0 , 300)
if x = 1 , then y =300- 16(1)2 = 284 . co-ordinates are (1 , 284)
if x = 2 , then y = 300- 16(2)2 = 236 , co-ordinates are (2 , 236)
if x = 3 , then y = 300- 16(3)2 = 252  , co-ordinates are (3 , 252)
The co-ordinates (0 , 300) , (1 , 284) , (2 , 236) , (3 , 252) does not form a straight line .

The graph is

b. For, h = 300 – 15t , The graph is linear so the so it is a function,
For h = 300- 16t2 , The graph is linear so the so it is a function.

c. Sky diver has the slow fall while compared to the bowling ball , because parachute can be controlled with the wind and can be divert the destination point, and bowling ball cannot be controlled while falling.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 2

Try It

Does the table represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 3
Answer: y = 2x – 12 is linear function.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (2 , -8) , (4 , -4) , (6 , 0) , (8 , 4)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (6 ,0) and (8, 4)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (4 – 0) / (8– 6)
m = 4/2
m = 2
substitute the slope in the (8 , 4) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 4 = 2 ( x – 8)
y – 4 = 2x – 16
y = 2x – 16 + 4
y = 2x – 12
So ,  y = 2x – 12 is linear function.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 4
Answer: y = –\(\frac{5}{3}\)x + 25 is linear function.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (0 , 25) , (3 , 20) , (7 , 15) , (12 , 10)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,25) and (3, 20)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (20 – 25) / (3– 0)
m = -5/3
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 25 ) , The y intercept is 25.
So , the linear function is y = –\(\frac{5}{3}\)x + 25.
So , y = –\(\frac{5}{3}\)x + 25 is linear function.

Does the equation represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 3.
y = x + 5
Answer: y = x + 5 is a linear function

Explanation:
Given , y = x + 5  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0 + 5 = 5 . co-ordinates are (0 , 5)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 + 5 = 6 . co-ordinates are (1 , 6)
if x = 2 , then y = 2 + 5 = 7 , co-ordinates are (2 , 7)
The co-ordinates (0 , 5) , (1 , 6) , (2 , 7) form a straight line .
Each x input has only one y output so it is a function .
And it  forms a straight line when graphed .
So, y = x + 5 is a linear function.

Question 4.
y = \(\frac{4x}{3}\)
Answer: y = \(\frac{4x}{3}\) is a linear function.

Explanation:
Given , y = \(\frac{4x}{3}\) , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = \(\frac{4(0)}{3}\) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = \(\frac{4(1)}{3}\) = \(\frac{4}{3}\)  = 1.3. co-ordinates are (1 , 1.3)
if x = 2 , then y = \(\frac{4(2)}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{3}\) = 2.6 , co-ordinates are (2 , 2.6)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 ,1.3 ) , (2 , 2.6) form a straight line .
Each x input has only one y output so it is a function .
And it forms a straight line when graphed .
So, y = \(\frac{4x}{3}\) is a linear function.

Question 5.
y = 1 – x2
Answer: y = 1 – x2 is not a linear function.

Explanation:
Given , y = 1 – x2  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 1 – 02 = 1 . co-ordinates are (0 , 1)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 – 12 = 0 . co-ordinates are (1 , 0)
if x = 2 , then y = 1 – 22 = -3 , co-ordinates are (2 , -3)
The co-ordinates (0 , 5) , (1 , 6) , (2 , 7) form a straight line .
Each x input has only one y output so it is a function .
And it does not forms a straight line when graphed .
So, y = 1 – x2 is not a linear function.

Does the graph represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 5
Answer: The graph represents a nonlinear function.

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (0 , 2) , (-1 , 0) ,  (-2 , -2 ) , (-3 , -4), (0 , 1 ) , (2 , -2) , ( 3, -4 )
The inputs have more than one output ,
And points form a straight line
So , the graph is non linear function

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 6
Answer: The graph is a linear function

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (0 , 0) , (-1 , -1) ,  (-2 , -2 ) , (-3 , -3), (1 , 1 ) , (2 , 2) , ( 3, 3 )
The inputs have exactly one output ,
And points form a straight line
So , the graph is a linear function.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

IDENTIFYING FUNCTIONS Does the table or graph represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 7
Answer: It is not a linear function

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (3 , 0) , (-1 , 2) , (-5 , 4) , (-9 , 6)
Each input has exactly one output
and it does not form a straight line when graphed
So, it is not a linear function .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 8
Answer: The graph is non linear function

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (0 , -1) , (-1 , 0) ,  (-2 , 3 ) , (1 , 0 ) , (2 , 3) .
The inputs have exactly one output ,
And points does not form a straight line
So , the graph is non linear function

Question 10.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which equation does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 9
Answer: 5xy = -2 does not belong with the other three.

Explanation:
15y = 6x , y = \(\frac{2}{5}\)x , 10y = 4x .
These are evaluated as 5y = 2x
5xy = -2 , is different from 5y = 2x.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 11.
The loudness of sound is measured in (dB). The graph shows the loudness y of a sound (in decibels) x meters from the source of the sound. Is the relationship between loudness and distance linear or nonlinear? Approximate the loudness of the sound 12 meters from the source.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 10
Answer: The relationship between loudness and distance  is nonlinear Function. And the loudness of the sound 12 meters from the source is approximately 85dB as shown in the graph.

Explanation:
As shown in the graph , the plot of the points does not form a straight line ,
Its a parabolic decay , The amount of loudness decreases with the increase in distance,
So, The relationship between loudness and distance  is nonlinear Function.

And the loudness of the sound 12 meters from the source is approximately 85dB as shown in the graph.

Question 12.
A video blogger is someone who records a video diary. A new website currently hosts 90 video bloggers and projects a gain of 10 video bloggers per month. The table below shows the actual numbers of video bloggers. How does the projection differ from the actual change?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 11
Answer: Projections are more than the actual values

Explanation:

So, Projections are more than the actual values

Comparing Linear and Non Linear Functions Homework & Practice 7.4

Review & Refresh

Write a linear function that relates y to x.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 12
Answer: The linear function is y = x – 2

In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (0 , -2) , (1 , -1 ) , (-1 , -3) , ( 2, 0), (3 , 1) , (4 , 2) , ( 5, 3)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (2 ,0) and (3, 1)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (1 – 0) / (3 – 2)
m = 1 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, -2 ) , The y intercept is -2.
So , the linear function is y = x – 2 .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 13
Answer: The linear function is y =\(\frac{-1}{1.5}\)x + 5.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (0 , 5) , (1.5 , 4) , (3 , 3) , (4.5 , 2)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1.5 ,4) and (3, 3)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (3 – 4) / (3 – 1.5)
m = -1 /1.5
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 5 ) , The y intercept is 5.
So , the linear function is y =\(\frac{-1}{1.5}\)x + 5.

The vertices of a figure are given. Draw the figure and its image after a dilation with the given scale factor. Identify the type of dilation.
Question 3.
A (- 3, 1), B (- 1, 3), C (- 1, 1); k = 3
Answer: The New right angle triangle is larger than the original one So , its a increase .

Explanation:
Given , (- 3, 1),  (- 1, 3),  (- 1, 1) these pairs form a right angle triangle
K = 3 , For the dilation figure multiply the 3 with the given ordered pairs , then
(- 3, 1) × 3 = ( -9 , 3)
(- 1, 3) × 3 = ( -3 , 9)
(- 1, 1) × 3 = (-3 , 3)
From these new ordered pairs we form a new  right angle triangle
The figure is
The New right angle triangle is larger than the original one So , its a increase .

Question 4.
J (2, 4), K (6, 10), L (8, 10), M (8, 4); k = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer: It is a reduction

Explanation:
Given , (2, 4),  (6, 10),  (8, 10) ,(8,4) these pairs forms a figure
K = 0.25 , For the dilation figure multiply the 3 with the given ordered pairs , then
(2, 4) × 0.25 = (0.5, 1)
(6, 10) × 0.25 = (1.5, 2.5)
(8, 10) × 0.25 = (2, 2.5)
(8, 4) × 0.25 = (2 , 1)
From these new ordered pairs we form a new figure
The figure is
The New figure is smaller than the original , So, It is a reduction .

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING FUNCTIONS Graph each equation. Decide whether each graph represents a linear or nonlinear function. (See Exploration 1, p. 295.)
Question 5.
h = 5 + 6t Equation 1
h = 5 + 6t2 Equation 2
Answer: h = 5 + 6t Equation 1 is a linear function
h = 5 + 6t2 Equation 2 is a non linear function .

Explanation:
Given , h = 5 + 6t  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 5 + 6(0) = 5 . co-ordinates are (0 , 5)
if x = 1 , then y = 5 + 6(1) = 11 . co-ordinates are (1 , 11)
if x = 2 , then y = 5 + 6(2) = 17 , co-ordinates are (2 , 17)
if x = 3 , then y = 5 + 6(3) = 23 , co-ordinates are (3 , 23)
The co-ordinates (0 , 5) , (1 , 11) , (2 , 17) , (3 , 23) form a straight line .

Given , h = 5 + 6t2  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 5 + 6(0)² = 5 . co-ordinates are (0 , 5)
if x = 1 , then y = 5 + 6(1)² = 11 . co-ordinates are (1 , 11)
if x = 2 , then y = 5 + 6(2)² = 26 , co-ordinates are (2 , 26)
if x = 3 , then y = 5 + 6(3)² = 59 , co-ordinates are (3 , 59)
The co-ordinates (0 , 5) , (1 , 11) , (2 , 26) , (3 , 59) does not form a straight line .

The graph of both equations is
So, h = 5 + 6t Equation 1 is a linear function
h = 5 + 6t2 Equation 2 is a non linear function .

Question 6.
y = – \(\frac{x}{3}\) Equation 1
y = – \(\frac{3}{x}\) Equation 2
Answer:  y = – \(\frac{x}{3}\) Equation 1 is a linear function
y = – \(\frac{3}{x}\) Equation 2 is a non linear function.

Given , y =- \(\frac{x}{3}\) , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =- \(\frac{0}{3}\) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = – \(\frac{1}{3}\) = – 0.3 . co-ordinates are (1 , – 0.3 )
if x = 2 , then y = – \(\frac{2}{3}\) = – 0.6 , co-ordinates are (2 ,-0.6)
if x = 3 , then y = – \(\frac{3}{3}\) = -1 , co-ordinates are (3 , -1)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , -0.3) , (2 , -0.6) , (3 , -1) form a straight line .

Given , y =- \(\frac{3}{x}\) , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =- \(\frac{3}{0}\) = no number
if x = 1 , then y = – \(\frac{3}{1}\) = – 3 . co-ordinates are (1 , – 1 )
if x = 2 , then y = – \(\frac{3}{2}\) = – 1.5 , co-ordinates are (2 ,-1.5)
if x = 3 , then y = – \(\frac{3}{3}\) = -1 , co-ordinates are (3 , -1)
The co-ordinates (1 , -1) , (2 , -1.5) , (3 , -1) form a straight line .

The graph of both the equations is
So,  y = – \(\frac{x}{3}\) Equation 1 is a linear function
y = – \(\frac{3}{x}\) Equation 2 is a non linear function.

IDENTIFYING FUNCTIONS FROM TABLES Does the table represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 14
Answer:  linear function is y = 4x + 4.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (0 , 4) , (1 , 8) , (2 , 12) , (3 , 16)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (2 , 12) and (3 , 16)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (16 – 12) / (3– 2)
m = 4/1
m = 4
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 4 ) , The y intercept is 4.
So , the linear equation is y = 4x + 4.
And it is a linear function.

The graph is

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 15
Answer: y = 4x – 6 is linear function.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (6 , 21) , (5 , 15) , (4 , 10) , (3 , 6)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (4 , 10) and (3 , 6)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (6 – 10) / (3– 4)
m = -4/-1
m = 4
substitute the slope in the(4 , 10) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 10 = 4 ( x – 4)
y – 10 = 4x – 16
y = 4x – 16 + 10
y = 4x – 6
So ,  y = 4x – 6 is linear function.

The graph is

IDENTIFYING FUNCTIONS FROM EQUATIONS Does the equation represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 9.
2x + 3y = 7
Answer: The function is linear when m = \(\frac{-2}{3}\) and c = \(\frac{7}{3}\)

Explanation:
Given ,2x + 3y = 7
3y = 7 – 2x
y = \(\frac{-2}{3}\)x+ \(\frac{7}{3}\)
So, The function is linear when m = \(\frac{-2}{3}\) and c = \(\frac{7}{3}\)

Question 10.
y + x = 4x + 5
Answer: The function is linear when m = 3 and c = 5 .

Explanation:
Given , y + x = 4x + 5
y = 4x – x + 5
y = 3x + 5
So, The function is linear when m = 3 and c = 5 .

Question 11.
y = \(\frac{8}{x^{2}}\)
Answer: The function is linear when m = 8 and c = 0 .

Explanation:
Given , y = \(\frac{8}{x^{2}}\)
slope m = 8
c = 0
So, The function is linear when m = 8 and c = 0 .

IDENTIFYING FUNCTIONS FROM GRAPHS Does the graph represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 16
Answer: The graph is linear function

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (0 , 1) , (2 , 0) ,  (4 , -1 ) , (-2 , 2), ( -4, 3 )
The inputs have exactly one output ,
And points form a straight line
So , the graph is linear function

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 17
Answer: The graph is non linear function.

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (0 , 0) , (-1 , -1) ,  (-4 , -2 ) , (1 , 1), ( 4, 2 )
The inputs have exactly one output ,
And points does not form a straight line
So , the graph is non linear function

Question 14.
IDENTIFYING A FUNCTION
The graph shows the volume V (in cubic feet) of a cube with an edge length of x feet. Does linear nonlinear the graph represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 18
Answer: The graph is non linear function

n order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (1 , 1) , (2 , 8) ,  (3 , 27 ) , (4 , 64)
The inputs have exactly one output ,
And points does not form a straight line
So , the graph is non linear function

Question 15.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The frequency y (in terahertz) of a light wave is a function of its wavelength x (in nanometers). Is the function relating the wavelength of light to its frequency linear or nonlinear?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 19
Answer: The function is a non linear function

Explanation:
table is as follows
change in x is constant but change in y is not constant , it is increasing
So, the function is a non linear function .

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the cost (in dollars) of pounds of sun flower seeds.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 20
a. What is the missing -value that makes the table represent a linear function?
b. Write a linear function that represents the cost of x pounds of seeds. Interpret the slope.
c. Does the function have a maximum value? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:  a. 3 pounds = $4.2
b. y = 1.4x  is linear function.
c.  If y has maximum value then the x also has maximum value.

Explanation:
a. As per the table 1 pound = $1.4
2 pounds = $2.8
3pounds = $4.2
4 pounds = $5.6
So, the price is increasing with weight of the seeds.

b. Ordered pairs are (2 , 2.8) , (3 , 4.2) , (4 , 5.6)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3 , 4.2) and (4 , 5.6)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (5.6 – 4.2) / (4 – 3)
m = 1.4
substitute the slope in the (3 , 4.2) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 4.2 = 1.4 ( x – 3)
y – 4.2 = 1.4x – 4.2
y = 1.4x – 4.2 + 4.2
y = 1.4x
So ,  y = 1.4x  is linear function.

c. As shown in the table , and the function if y increases then x also increases with respect to the y
So, if y has maximum value then the x also has maximum value.

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A birch tree is 9 feet tall and grows at a rate of 2 feet per year. The table shows the height h (in feet) of a willow tree after x years.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.4 21
a. Does the table represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
b. Which tree is taller after 10 years? Explain.
Answer: There is no linear relationship between x and y .

Explanation:
Table is as follows
Change in y is constant but change in x is increasing , not a constant
Hence, there is no linear relationship between x and y .

Question 18.
CRITICAL THINKING
In their first year, Show A has 7 million viewers and Show B has 5 million viewers. Each year, Show A has 90% of the viewers it had in the previous year. Show B loses 200,000 viewers each year.
a. Determine whether the function relating the year to the number of viewers is linear or nonlinear for each show.
b. Which show has more viewers in its sixth year?
Answer: a. The function relating the year to the number of viewers is linear
b. Both shows  has same number of viewers in the sixth year .

Explanation:
a. Given, In their first year, Show A has 7 million viewers and Show B has 5 million viewers. Each year, Show A has 90% of the viewers it had in the previous year. Show B loses 200,000 viewers each year.
For show A
So , In first year = 7
2 year = 90% of 7 = 6.3
3 year = 90% of 6.3 = 5.6
4 year = 90% of 5.6 = 5.04
5 year = 90% of 5 = 4.5
6 year = 90% of 4.5 = 4.05
So the ordered pairs are (1 , 7) , (2 , 6.3) , (3 , 5.6) , (4 , 5), (5 , 4.5) , (6 , 4)

For show B
In first year = 5 , As the viewers reduces by 2,00,000 in 5M
2 year = 5 – 0.2 = 4.8
3 year = 4.8 – 0.2 = 4.6
4 year = 4.6 – 0.2 = 4.4
5 year = 4.4 – 0.2 = 4.2
6 year = 54.2 – 0.2 = 4
So the ordered pairs are (1 , 5) , (2 , 4.8) , (3 , 4.6) , (4 , 4.4), (5 , 4.2) , (6 , 4)
As the year increases the viewers are also decreasing constantly as per the individual shows
So, The function relating the year to the number of viewers is linear .

b. As shown in part a , the ordered pairs having (6,4) represents the number of viewers to the year
So, Both shows  has same number of viewers in the sixth year .

Question 19.
NUMBER SENSE
The ordered pairs represent a function. (0,- 1), (1, 0), (2, 3), (3, 8), and (4, 15)
a. Graph the ordered pairs and describe the pattern. Is the function linear or nonlinear?
b. Write an equation that represents the function.
Answer: a. The graph is shown below and function is linear
b. The linear equation is y = 7x – 1.

Explanation:
Given, ordered pairs represent a function. (0,- 1), (1, 0), (2, 3), (3, 8), and (4, 15)
a. the graph is 
Each input has exactly one output and it forms a straight line So, the graph is linear
b. First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3 ,8) and (4, 15)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (15 – 8) / (4– 3)
m = 7/1
m = 7
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, -1 ) , The y intercept is -1.
So , the linear equation is y = 7x – 1.

Lesson 7.5 Analyzing and Sketching Graphs

EXPLORATION 1

Matching Situations to Graphs
Work with a partner. Each graph shows your speed during a bike ride. Match each situation with its graph. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 1
a. You increase your speed, then ride at a constant speed along a bike path. You then slow down until you reach your friend’s house. Analyze Relationships
b. You increase your speed, then go down a hill. You then quickly come to a stop at an intersection.
c. You increase your speed, then stop at a store for a couple of minutes. You then continue to ride, increasing your speed.
d. You ride at a constant speed, then go up a hill. Once on top of the hill, you increase your speed.
Answer: a – C ,
b – A ,
c – D ,
d – B ,

Explanation:
a. You increase your speed, then ride at a constant speed along a bike path. You then slow down until you reach your friend’s house. The graph C has the perfect graph representing the situation of given question.
b. You increase your speed, then go down a hill. You then quickly come to a stop at an intersection.
Because The graph A has the bike speed representing the situation for the time .
c. You increase your speed, then stop at a store for a couple of minutes. You then continue to ride, increasing your speed. Thus, The graph D is the final answer for the question
d. You ride at a constant speed, then go up a hill. Once on top of the hill, you increase your speed.
Because of the speed with respect to time the graph B is the correct answer for the question.

EXPLORATION 2

Interpreting a Graph
Work with a partner. Write a short paragraph that describe show the height changes over time in the graph shown. What situation can this graph represent?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 2
Answer: The Graph can be representing a situation for low and high tides of the Ocean

Explanation:
As shown in the figure, The graph is plotted between the height and time,
We can take an example of an Ocean for its waves , As the time passes at the morning of a normal day, The waves of the ocean start rising higher at a period of time, and for the time being maintaining a peak height then drops to a lower height at a particular intervals of time , this process takes place for a while and vise versa.
Thus, the Graph can be representing a situation for low and high tides of the Ocean

Try It

Question 1.
The graph shows the location of a pelican relative to your location.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 3
a. Describe the path of the pelican.
b. Write an explanation for the decrease in the vertical distance of the pelican.
Answer: Both of them are explained below.

Explanation:
a. The path of the pelican is flying in the air , As they always fly in line and the amazing thing is the deeper the prey the higher they dive.
The graph shows the relationship between the horizontal distance that is the height from the land, vertical distance is the point from where its destination point is located, so at the starting point of the flight it has more distance from the ground means flying at a higher level , as the time passes it reaches to the closer point of its destination point so the altitude of the flight decreases with the decrease in the vertical distance and at a particular distance reaches its point of destination.

b. The decrease in the vertical distance of the pelican. is due to its flight to the destination point as it requires to stop flying to reach it, so in order to have a smooth landing on the ground , the bird gradually decreases its speed by decreasing its altitude.

Question 2.
A fully-charged battery loses its charge at a constant rate until it has no charge left. You plug it in, and it fully recharges at a constant rate. Then it loses its charge at a constant rate until it has no charge left. Sketch a graph that represents this situation.
Answer:  The graph is

Explanation:
In the graph , let the x-axis be time and y-axis be the battery charge ,
A fully-charged battery loses its charge at a constant rate until it has no charge left. So, line segment starts from 100 and decreases until it touches the x-axis.
You plug it in, and it fully recharges at a constant rate. Thus, line segment increases at a constant rate until it reaches 100
Then it loses its charge at a constant rate until it has no charge left. line segment decreases again at a constant rate until it again touches the x-axis .

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
ANALYZING GRAPHS
The graph shows the growth rate of a plant over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 4
a. Describe the change in growth rate.
b. Write an explanation for the decrease in growth rate and the increase in growth rate.
Answer: the answers are given below

Explanation:
a. the change in growth rate of a plant over the time is given by its size and height , So as the time passes the growth rate is constant from the the start and from a particular time the growth rate has been dropping slightly due to external or internal reasons of a plant and again at some time the growth rate is increasing at a constant rate until it reaches to its perfect growth of a plant.

b. The decrease in growth rate of the plant is due to some external causes like weather, rain, sunlight , watering, and the soil may effect its growth rate and the increase in growth rate is probably due to its soil fertility and sufficient sunlight providing sufficient chlorophyll.

Question 4.
SKETCHING GRAPHS
As you snowboard down a hill, you gain speed at a constant rate. You come to a steep section of the hill and gain speed at a greater constant rate. You then slow down at a constant rate until you come to a stop. Sketch a graph that represents this situation.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
In the graph , let the x-axis be time and y-axis be the speed ,
As you snowboard down a hill, you gain speed at a constant rate, line segment decreases at a constant rate
You come to a steep section of the hill and gain speed at a greater constant rate, line segment becomes steeper i.e., the line segment decreases at a high constant rate.
You then slow down at a constant rate until you come to a stop, line segment becomes flatter i.e., the constant rate of decrease becomes less until it touches its x-axis

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
Two rowing teams are in a race. The graph shows their distances from the finish line over time. Describe the speed of each team throughout the race. Then determine which team finishes first.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 5
Answer: Team B will finishes race first.

Explanation:
Team A , The relationship between the time and distance from the finish line is given in the graph,
At starting point Team A has maintained a fair speed at the Beginning of the race and has been a little slow while reaching out to the destination point, and for a while they have been balancing the speed with the distance representing a curving point in the graph and directly dropping to the finish line drastically creating a slope, until it reaches in the x-axis line.
Team B , The relationship between the time and distance from the finish line is given in the graph,
As same as the Team A , Team B has a perfect start but it has been a way different them Team A because Team B has a game plan to win the race, as shown in the graph they have maintained a constant speed while reaching out to the destination and also having a smooth drift at a level of decreasing their distance from the finish line.

Team B will  finishes the race first because they are having a constant and smooth decreasing speed which comes to an end gradually at the finishing line.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
The graphs show the movements of two airplanes over time. Describe the movement of each airplane.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 6
Answer: Detailed explanation is given below.

Explanation:
As shown in the graph , x-axis is time and y-axis be the height above ground
Airplane A, the line segment at a constant rate at the time of starting of the takeoff and then drops to a point while decreasing in the height to the ground for landing and for a constant time it is at the ground level until again it takes off  having an increase in the height from the ground level , at last it maintains a constant speed.

Airplane B, the line segment at a constant rate at the time of starting of the takeoff and then drops to a point while decreasing in the height to the ground for landing and for a constant time it is at the ground level until again it takes off  having an increase in the height from the ground level , at last it maintains a constant speed.
It is as same as the airplane A.

Analyzing and Sketching Graphs Homework & Practice 7.5

Review & Refresh

Does the table or equation represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 7
Answer: y = -0.5x + 11.5 is a linear function.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (-5 , 14) , (-1 , 12) , (3 , 10) , (7 , 8)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3 , 10) and (7 , 8)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (8 – 10) / (7 – 3)
m = -2/4
m = -0.5
substitute the slope in the(3 , 10) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 10 = -0.5 ( x – 3)
y – 10 = -0.5x + 1.5
y = -0.5x + 1.5 + 10
y = -0.5x + 11.5
So , the linear equation is y = -0.5x + 11.5
And it is a linear function.

The graph is

Question 2.
y = x2 + 8
Answer: The function is linear  when m= 1 and c = 8.

Explanation:
Given , y = x2 + 8 ,
slope m = 1
c = 8
So, the function is linear when m = 1 and c= 8.

Graph the linear equation.
Question 3.
– 4x + y = – 1
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
we can write – 4x + y = – 1 as y = 4x – 1
Given , y = 4x – 1  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 4(0) – 1 = -1 . co-ordinates are (0 , -1)
if x = 1 , then y = 4(1) – 1 = 3 . co-ordinates are (1 , 3)
if x = 2 , then y = 4(2) – 1 = 7 , co-ordinates are (2 , 7)
if x = 3 , then y = 4(3) – 1= 11 , co-ordinates are (3 , 11)
The co-ordinates (0 , -1) , (1 , 3) , (2 , 7) , (3 , 11) form a straight line .

Question 4.
2x – 3y = 12
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
we can write  2x – 3y = 12 as y = \(\frac{2x-12}{3}\) or y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x – 4
Given , y =\(\frac{2}{3}\)x – 4 , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)0 – 4= – 4 . co-ordinates are (0 , -4)
if x = 1 , then y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)1 – 4 = 0.66 – 4 = -3.3 . co-ordinates are (1 , -3.3)
if x = 2 , then y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)2 – 4 =0.66(2) – 4 =1.3 – 4 = -2.6, co-ordinates are (2 , -2.6)
if x = 3 , then y = \(\frac{2}{3}\)3 – 4 = 0.66(3) – 4 = 1.98 – 4 = -2.0  , co-ordinates are (3 , -2.0)
The co-ordinates (0 , -4) , (1 , -3.3) , (2 , -2.6) , (3 , -2) form a straight line .

Question 5.
5x + 10y = 30
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
5x + 10y = 30 can be written as y = -0.5x + 3
take 5 common on both sides we get
x + 2y = 6
y = \(\frac{-x + 6}{2}\)
y = \(\frac{-x}{2}\) + 6
y = -0.5x + 3
Given , y =-0.5x + 3 , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = -0.5(0) + 3 = 3 . co-ordinates are (0 , 3)
if x = 1 , then y = -0.5(1) + 3= 2.5 . co-ordinates are (1 , 2.5)
if x = 2 , then y = -0.5(2) + 3 = 4 , co-ordinates are (2 , 4)
if x = 3 , then y = -0.5(3) + 3 = 4.5  , co-ordinates are (3 , 4.5)
The co-ordinates (0 , 3) , (1 , 2.5) , (2 , 4) , (3 , 4.5)does not form a straight line .

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

MATCHING DESCRIPTIONS WITH GRAPHS The graph shows your speed during a run. Match the verbal description with the part of the graph it describes. (See Exploration 1, p. 301.)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 8
Question 6.
You run at a constant speed.
Answer: C

Explanation:
Because the line segment of the graph at point C show that the running speed is constant for a particular time ,
Thus forming a straight horizontal line.

Question 7.
You slow down at a constant rate.
Answer: D

Explanation:
Because the line segment of the graph at point D show that the running speed is decreasing at a constant rate for a particular time ,
Thus forming a straight steep line down the time axis.

Question 8.
You increase your speed at a constant rate.
Answer: A

Explanation:
Because the line segment of the graph at point A show that the running speed is increasing at a constant rate at a starting point of the race on time ,
Thus forming a slope in the graph.

Question 9.
You increase your speed at a faster and faster rate.
Answer: B

Explanation:
Because the line segment of the graph at point B show that the running speed is increasing at a faster rate after starting the race and maintaining a gradual growth of the speed and after reaching the next point speed is doubled from before ,
Thus forming a slope with a curve in the graph.

ANALYZING GRAPHS Describe the relationship between the two quantities.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 9
Answer: As the Time passes there will be increase in the volume.

Explanation:
The graph shows the relation between the volume and time of a Balloon , To fill up the balloon with air, with the inlet of air increases in volume and the time taken to fill the balloon with air is shown ,
The line segment starts at initial point stating the balloon at a no air state, then gradually increases with constant halts having constant volume at a particular time and vice versa.

So, As the Time passes there will be increase in the volume.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 10
Answer: As the times passes Dollars are maintaining imbalance.

Explanation:
The relationship between the time and dollars is given in the graph, As we all know money is never ever constant with time , As if it only increases or decreases or having both simultaneously , in this graph the line segment is having a steep and at some point of time it is maintaining a slight growth constantly with the time.

So, As the times passes Dollars are maintaining imbalance.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 11
Answer: An engine power is directly proportional to the engine speed and its horse power

Explanation:
The relationship between the engine speed and horse power is given in the graph, Generally every automobile is is defined as the best for its horse power which is the heart of the engine and it highlights the speed of the vehicle, Here engine power is defined by the horse power and the engine speed the line segment is having a curve increment in the horse power due to the increase in engine speed.

So, An engine power is directly proportional to the engine speed and its horse power

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 12
Answer: As time increases the process of grams decaying will be faster.

Explanation:
The relationship between grams and time is given in the graph, its obvious that every product has its own expiry date, and if it crosses that its starts to decay, the graph implies that with the increase time the quality of the gram decreases or grams start to decay . The line segment in the graph shows that the gradually decrease indicating the spoiling rate of the grams  with rate of change of time.

So, As time increases the process of grams decaying will be faster.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 13
Answer: At the particular intervals of time hair growth has stopped and at regular intervals again starts growing with respect to the time.

Explanation:
The graph shows the relationship between the length of the hair and time taken to the growth of the hair, of course hair growth is not constant every time, here we have the graph with the line segment  not constant and having breaks at the times of interval.

So, At the particular intervals of time hair growth has stopped and at regular intervals again starts growing with respect to the time.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 14
Answer: In a period of time the balance will be reduced gradually at regular intervals maintaining a constant balance to clear the loan.

Explanation:
The relationship between the balance of the loan with the time period of the loan to be cleared, The loan should be cleared in the time limit and should maintain a neat balance, every increase in time period the balance is debited from the loan , there will be decrease in the balance and gaps are occurred in the graph.

so, In a period of time the balance will be reduced gradually at regular intervals maintaining a constant balance to clear the loan.

Question 16.
ANALYZING GRAPHS
Write an explanation for the relationship shown in the graph in Exercise 10.
Answer: The graph shows the relation between the volume and time of a Balloon , To fill up the balloon with air, with the inlet of air increases in volume and the time taken to fill the balloon with air is shown ,
The line segment starts at initial point stating the balloon at a no air state, then gradually increases with constant halts having constant volume at a particular time and vice versa.

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The graph shows the natural gas usage for a house.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 15
a. Describe the change in usage from January to March.
b. Describe the change in usage from March to May.
Answer: a. The change in usage from January to March, As shown in the graph the usage is at peaks in the month of January and started to decrease after that month and continuing to decrease in the month of March.
b.  The change in usage from March to May, As shown in the graph the usage is continuing to decrease in the month of March and started to increase again in the month of May and maintaining to use highly from the month of May.

Explanation:
a. The change in usage from January to March, As shown in the graph the usage is at peaks in the month of January and started to decrease after that month and continuing to decrease in the month of March.

b.  The change in usage from March to May, As shown in the graph the usage is continuing to decrease in the month of March and started to increase again in the month of May and maintaining to use highly from the month of May.

SKETCHING GRAPHS Sketch a graph that represents the situation.
Question 18.
The value of a television decreases at a constant rate, and then remains constant.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
Draw the axis and label the x- axis as time and y- axis as value, then sketch the graph,
The value of the television decreases at a constant rate: line segment starts to decrease at a constant rate,
And then remains constant, after reaching a certain value : line segment becomes parallel to horizontal axis.

Question 19.
The distance from the ground changes as your friend swings on a swing.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
Your friend starts close to the ground and then swings up. Then she falls back down close to the ground again and swings back . When she swings back, she gets higher than when she was swinging forward, she then starts to swing forward again getting close to the ground and then going up even higher than when she was swinging backward, she continues to getting higher and higher every time she swings forwards and backwards,

Question 20.
The value of a rare coin increases at a faster and faster rate.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
Draw the Axis and label them as x-axis as time and y – axis as distance,
The value of a rare coin increases at a faster and faster rate , so the curve moves upwards at an increasing rate.

Question 21.
You are typing at a constant rate. You pause to think about your next paragraph and then you resume typing at the same constant rate.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
A constant rate means that portion of the graph is linear , pausing means the number of words stays constant, typing again at the same constant rate means the last piece of the graph is linear again with the same slope as the first portion of the graph.

Question 22.
CRITICAL THINKING
The graph shows the speed of an object over time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 16
a. Sketch a graph that shows the distance traveled by the object over time.
b. Describe a possible situation represented by the graphs.
Answer: a. The distance and time are directly proportional to each other.
b. As time passes the speed and time are relatively balancing each other in the graph.

Explanation:
a. The graph is 
In this graph the relationship between distance and time is shown, for example , let the object be a bike, the time taken to reach the destination for the bike is directly proportional to the distance travelled , So as time passes the distance is gradually increasing from the starting point.

So, the distance and time are directly proportional to each other.

b. Th graph shown , is the relationship between the speed and the time , let the object moving be Train,
it is running between the station so it has to be halted in the stations to be listed in the stoppings , So the line segment is started with a constant speed with the time and again at the time interval dropping the speed with respect to time it has maintaining the same speed .

So, As time passes the speed and time are relatively balancing each other in the graph.

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The graph shows the average scores of two bowlers from the start of a season to the end of the season.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 17
a. Describe each bowler’s performance.
b. Who had a greater average score most of the season? Who had a greater average score at the end of the season?
c. Write an explanation for the change in each bowler’s average score throughout the bowling season.
Answer: All the answers are explained below

Explanation:
a.  Bowler A : As the graph represent the relationship between the score and the week, bowler A has started with the good take off and having able to grasp the same energy his performance on the goals are increasing rapidly over the week and had the good score than Bowler B.

Bowler B : As the graph represent the relationship between the score and the week, bowler B has started with the good take off but as the time passes the performance of the  bowler is has been intended to decrease his scores gradually over the week.

b.  Bowler A and Bowler B had a greater average score most of the season, but Bowler A had a greater average score at the end of the season

c. Bowler A has the same energy his performance on the goals are increasing rapidly over the week and had the good score than Bowler B. so it has a smaller change in average’s score in the bowling season .
While Bowler B has good take off but as the time passes the performance of the  bowler is has been intended to decrease his scores gradually over the week. so he has a drastic change in average’s score in the bowling season .

Question 24.
DIG DEEPER!
You can use a supply and demand model to understand how the price of a product changes in a market. The supply curve of a particular product represents the quantity suppliers will produce at various prices. The demand curve for the product represents the quantity consumers are willing to buy at various prices.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions 7.5 18

a. Describe and interpret each curve.
b. Which part of the graph represents a surplus? Explain your reasoning.
c. The curves intersect at the equilibrium point, which is where the quantity produced equals the quantity demanded. Suppose that demand for a product suddenly increases, causing the entire demand curve to shift to the right. What happens to the equilibrium point?
Answer:  All of them are explained below .

Explanation:
a. The supply curve of a particular product represents the quantity suppliers will produce at various prices, As shown in the graph, the relationship between the price and quantity is given , so if prices increases gradually Quantity increases .
The demand curve for the product represents the quantity consumers are willing to buy at various prices, As shown in the graph, the relationship between the price and quantity is given , so if prices decreases with increase in Quantity .

b. The graph does not implies any surplus because each demand and supply is given by their respective curve over the prices and quantity

c. As shown in the graph, The curves intersect at the equilibrium point, which is where the quantity produced equals the quantity demanded. Given, that demand for a product suddenly increases, causing the entire demand curve to shift to the right. Then the equilibrium point will be pointed where the two curves meet after the change in the demand graph so change in the supply graph is also possible.

Functions Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
The table shows the lengths x (in inches) and weights y(in pounds) of several infants born at a hospital. Determine whether weight is a function of length. Then estimate the weight of an infant that is 20 inches long.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cc 1
Understand the problem.
You know the lengths and weights of several infants. You are asked to determine whether weight is a function of length and to estimate the weight of a 20-inch-long infant.

Make a plan.
Determine whether any of the lengths are paired with more than one weight. Then use a graphing calculator to find an equation that represents the data. Evaluate the equation when x = 20 to estimate the weight of a 20-inch-long infant.

Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer: Weight is the function of the length

Explanation:
From the table we have , Each length has only one weight , so weight is a function of length.
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (19.3 , 7.3) and (18.9 , 6.5)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (6.5 – 7.3) / (18.9 – 19.3)
m = 0.2
substitute the slope in the (19.3 , 7.3) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 7.3 = 0.2 ( x – 19.3)
y – 7.3 = 0.2x – 3.86
y = 0.2x – 3.86 + 7.3
y = 0.2x + 3.4
So ,  y = 0.2x + 3.4 is linear function.

For x = 20 ,
y = 0.2 (20) + 3.4
y = 4 + 3.4
y = 7.4

So, The weight of an infant that is 20 inches long. is 7.4.

Question 2.
Each mapping diagram represents a linear function. At what point do the graphs of the functions intersect? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cc 2
Answer:  The point of intersection is (-1, -4)

Explanation:
Function 1 – Ordered pairs are ( -8 , 24 ) , ( -3 , 4 ) , ( -1 , -4 ) , ( 1 , -12) .
Function 2 – Ordered pairs are ( 6 , 17 ) , ( 10 , 29 ) , ( 13 , 38 ) , ( 15 , 44 ) .
Graph the points we get, So, The point of intersection is (-1,-4).

Performance Task

Heat Index
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Apparent Temperature.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cc 3
Answer:

Functions Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 1
Input: Ordered pairs can be used to show inputs and outputs , inputs are represented by x

Output: Ordered pairs can be used to show inputs and outputs , Outputs are represented by y

Relation: A relation pairs inputs with outputs

Mapping diagram: A relation can be represented by ordered pairs or mapping diagrams.

Function: The relation that pairs each input with exactly one output is a function.

Function rule: it is an equation, that describes the relationship between inputs(independent variables) and outputs(dependent variables).

Linear function: A linear function is a function whose graph is a straight line i.e., non vertical line . A linear can be written in the form y = mx + c , where m is the slope and c is the y intercept

Non linear function: The graph of a linear function shows a constant rate of change, A non linear function does not have a constant rate of change, So its graph is a not a line.

Graphic Organizers
You can use an Example and Non-Example Chart to list examples and non-examples of a concept. Here is an Example and Non-Example Chart for functions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 3
1. linear functions
2. nonlinear functions
3. linear functions with positive slope
4. linear functions with negative slope

Answer: 1. linear functions

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 4

7.1 Relations and Functions (pp. 275–280)
Learning Target: Understand the concept of a function.

List the ordered pairs shown in the mapping diagram. Then determine whether the relation is a function.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 5
Answer: The ordered pairs are ( 1 , -4 ) , ( 3 , 6 ) , ( 5 , 0 ) , ( 7 , 6 ) , ( 7 , 8 ) and The relation is not a function .

Explanation:
As shown , The ordered pairs are ( 1 , -4 ) , ( 3 , 6 ) , ( 5 , 0 ) , ( 7 , 6 ) , ( 7 , 8 ) .
The input 7 has more than one output,
So, The relation is not a function .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 6
Answer: ordered pairs are ( 0 , 0 ) , ( 1 , 10 ) , ( 2 , 5 ) , ( 3 , 15 ) and The relation is a function .

Explanation:
As shown , The ordered pairs are ( 0 , 0 ) , ( 1 , 10 ) , ( 2 , 5 ) , ( 3 , 15 ).
Each input has exactly one output ,
So, The relation is a function .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 7
Answer: The ordered pairs are ( -1 , 0 ) , ( -1 , 1 ) , ( 0 , 1 ) , ( 1 , 2 ), ( 3 ,3 ) and The relation is not a function

Explanation:
As shown , The ordered pairs are ( -1 , 0 ) , ( -1 , 1 ) , ( 0 , 1 ) , ( 1 , 2 ), ( 3 ,3 ) .
The input -1 has more than one output ,
So, The relation is not a function .

Question 4.
For ordered pairs that represent relations, which coordinate represents the input? the output?
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 8
Answer: x coordinate is the input and y coordinate is the output

Explanation:
Ordered pairs from the given graph are ( 2 , 7 ) , ( 3 , 7 ) , ( 4 , 5 ) , ( 5 , 5 ) , ( 6 , 3 ) .
So , x coordinate is the input and y coordinate is the output

Question 5.
Draw a mapping diagram that represents the relation shown in the graph. Then determine whether the relation is a function. Explain.
Answer:

Explanation:
The mapping diagram is
each input has more than one output
So, relation is not a function.

Question 6.
The mapping diagram represents the lengths (in centimeters) of a rubber band when different amounts of force (in Newtons) are applied.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 9
a. Is the length of a rubber band a function of the force applied to the rubber band?
b. Describe the relationship between the length of a rubber band and the force applied to the rubber band.
Answer:  a. Yes
b. For every increase in 0.7 in input there is an increment of 2 in output.

Explanation:
a. The ordered pairs are  ( 0 , 5 ) , ( 0.7 , 7 ) , ( 1.4 , 9 ) , ( 2.1 , 11 )
Each input has exactly one output
So, the length of a rubber band a function of the force applied to the rubber band.

b. For every increase in 0.7 in input there is an increment of 2 in output.

7.2 Representations of Functions (pp. 281–288)
Learning Target: Represent functions in a variety of ways.

Write a function rule for the statement.
Question 7.
The output is two less than the input.
Answer: y = x – 2

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is two less than the input, will be
y = x – 2

Question 8.
The output is two more than one-fourth of the input.
Answer: y = \(\frac{x}{4}\) + 2

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is two more than one-fourth of the input, will be
y = \(\frac{x}{4}\) + 2

Find the value of y for the given value of x.
Question 9.
y = 2x – 3; x = – 4
Answer: y = -8

Explanation:
Given, y = 2x
substitute x = -4 , we get
y = 2(-4)
y = -8.

Question 10.
y = 2 – 9x ; x = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer: y = – 3.4

Explanation:
Given , y = 2 – 9x
substitute x = \(\frac{2}{3}\) , we get
y = 2 – 9 (0.6)
y = 2 – 5.4
y = – 3.4

Question 11.
y = \(\frac{x}{3}\) + 5; x = 6
Answer: y = 7.

Explanation:
Given, y = \(\frac{x}{3}\) + 5
substitute x = 6 , we get
y = \(\frac{6}{3}\) + 5
y = 2 + 5
y = 7.

Graph the function.
Question 12.
y = x + 3
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
Given , y = x + 3  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 0 + 3 = 3 . co-ordinates are (0 , 4)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 + 3  = 4 . co-ordinates are (1 , 5)
if x = 2 , then y = 2 + 3 = 5 , co-ordinates are (2 , 6)
if x = 3 , then y = 3 + 3 = 6 , co-ordinates are (3 , 7)
The co-ordinates (0 , 3) , (1 , 4) , (2 , 5) , (3 , 6) form a straight line .

Question 13.
y = – 5x
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
Given , y = – 5x  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =- 5(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = – 5(1)  = – 5 . co-ordinates are (1 , – 5)
if x = 2 , then y = – 5(2) = -10 , co-ordinates are (2 , -10)
if x = 3 , then y =- 5(3) = -15 , co-ordinates are (3 , -15)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , -5) , (2 , -10) , (3 , -15) form a straight line .

Question 14.
y = 3 – 3x
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
Given , y =3 – 3x , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 3 – 3(0) = 3 . co-ordinates are (0 , 3)
if x = 1 , then y = 3 – 3(1)  = 0 . co-ordinates are (1 , 0)
if x = 2 , then y = 3 – 3(2) = – 3 , co-ordinates are (2 , – 3)
if x = 3 , then y =3 – 3(3) = – 6 , co-ordinates are (3 , – 6)
The co-ordinates (0 , 3) , (1 , 0) , (2 , – 3) , (3 , – 6) form a straight line .

Question 15.
An online music store sells songs for $0.90 each.
a. Write a function that you can use to find the cost of buying songs.
b. What is the cost of buying 5 songs?
Answer: a. C = 0.90s
b. $4.5

Explanation:
a. The total cost is equal to the cost of each song times the number of songs, if each song is $0.90,
Then the total cost C of s songs is C = 0.90s.

b. Substituting s= 5 in C = 0.90s we get,
C = 0.90(5) = 4.5.
So, cost of 5 songs is $4.5.

7.3 Linear Functions (pp. 289–294)
Learning Target: Use functions to model linear relationships.

Use the graph or table to write a linear function that relates y to x.
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 16
Answer: The linear function is y = \(\frac{1}{3}\)x + 3.

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (3 , 4) , (0 , 3 ) , (-3 , 2) , ( -6, 1 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,3) and (-3, 2)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (2 – 3) / (-3 – 0)
m = -1 / -3 .
m = 1/3 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 3 ) , The y intercept is 3.
So , the linear function is y = \(\frac{1}{3}\)x + 3.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 17
Answer: The linear function is y = −(0)x -7.

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (-2 , -7) , (0 , -7 ) , (2 , -7) , ( 4 , -7 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 ,-7) and (2, -7)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (-7 – (-7)) / (2 – 0)
m = 0 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, -7 ) , The y intercept is -7.
So , the linear function is y = −(0)x -7.

Question 18.
The table shows the age x (in weeks) of a puppy and its weight y (in pounds).
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 18
a. Write and graph a linear function that relates y to x.
b. Interpret the slope and the y-intercept.
c. After how many weeks will the puppy weigh 33 pounds?
Answer: a. y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x + 3
b. 3 pounds
c. Age is 20 weeks

Explanation:
a. In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (6 , 12) , (8 , 15 ) , (10 , 18) , ( 12 , 21 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points ((6 ,12) and (8 , 15)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (15 – 12) / (8 – 6)
m = 3/2 .
substitute the slope in the (6 ,12) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 12 = 3/2 ( x – 6)
2(y – 12) = 3(x – 6)
2y – 24 = 3x – 18
2y = 3x – 18 + 24
2y  = 3x + 6
So ,  2y  = 3x + 6 or y = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x + 3 is linear function.

b. The slope measures the rate of change of weight due to change in weeks, Here the slope of 3/2 means that as one week passes, weight of the puppy increases by 3/2 pounds.
y intercept measures the weight of the puppy, when it was born which is 3 pounds in this case measured by c.

c. put y = 33,
33 = \(\frac3}{2}\)x + 3
30 = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x
30 × 2 = 3x
x = 60/3
x = 20.
So, Age is 20 weeks.

7.4 Comparing Linear and Nonlinear Functions (pp. 295–300)
Learning Target: Understand differences between linear and nonlinear functions.

Does the table represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 19
Answer: y = 3x – 8 is linear function.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (3 , 1 ) , (6 , 10) , (9 , 19) , (12 , 28)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (3 , 1 ) and (6 , 10)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (10 – 1) / (6– 3)
m = 9/3
m = 3
substitute the slope in the (3 , 1) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 1 = 3 ( x – 3)
y – 1 = 3x – 9
y = 3x – 9 + 1
y = 3x – 8
So ,  y = 3x – 8 is linear function.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 20
Answer: y = -x + 4 is linear function.

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are (1 , 3 ) , (3 , 1) , (5 , 1) , (7 , 3)
Plot the points in the table , Draw a line through the points
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (1 , 3 ) and (3 , 1)
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (1 – 3) / (3– 1)
m = -2/2
m = -1
substitute the slope in the (1 , 3) to get point slope to form a line.
y-y1 = m (x-x1)
y – 3 = -1 ( x – 1)
y – 3 = -x + 1
y = -x + 1 + 3
y = -x + 4
So ,  y = -x + 4 is linear function.

Question 21.
Does the graph represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 21
Answer: The graph represent a non linear function.

Explanation:
As shown in the graph linear function represents a  straight line to which not happened here,
So , the graph is non linear function

Question 22.
Does the equation y = 2.3x represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Answer: y = 2.3x is a linear function.

Explanation:
Given , y = 2.3x  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y = 2.3(0) = 0 . co-ordinates are (0 , 0)
if x = 1 , then y = 2.3(1) = 2.3 . co-ordinates are (1 , 2.3)
if x = 2 , then y = 2.3(2) = 4.6 , co-ordinates are (2 , 4.6)
The co-ordinates (0 , 0) , (1 , 2.3) , (2 , 4.6) form a straight line .
Each x input has only one y output so it is a function .
And it  forms a straight line when graphed .
So, y = 2.3x is a linear function.

7.5 Analyzing and Sketching Graphs (pp. 301–306)
Learning Target: Use graphs of functions to describe relationships between quantities.

Question 23.
Describe the relationship between the two quantities in the graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 23
Answer: At certain point of time, line segment is increased with respect to time and maintained a constant change and again dropped gradually with the increase in time.

Explanation:
The relationship between the graph is population and time ,
At certain point of time, line segment is increased with respect to time and maintained a constant change and again dropped gradually with the increase in time.
So, the city population is not constant at all the time.

Sketch a graph that represents the situation.
Question 24.
You climb a climbing wall. You climb halfway up the wall at a constant rate, then stop and take a break. You then climb to the top of the wall at a greater constant rate.
Answer: The graph is 

Explanation:
You start climbing a wall at a constant rate so the first portion of the graph needs to be linear with a positive slope, you then take a break which means your height is constant so the second part of the graph needs to be a horizontal line, you then start climbing again at a constant rate, so the last part of the graph needs to be linear with a positive slope.

Question 25.
The price of a stock increases at a constant rate for several months before the stock market crashes. The price then quickly decreases at a constant rate.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
The stock price is increasing at a constant rate so the first part of the graph needs to be linear with positive slope, Then price begins to drop quickly so the second part of the graph needs to be linear with a steep negative slope.

Question 26.
The graph shows the sales of two companies during a particular year.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 7 Functions cr 26
a. Describe the sales of each company.
b. Which company has greater total sales for the year?
c. Give a possible explanation for the change in each company’s sales throughout the year.
Answer: All The explanation is given below

a. Company A – The sales of the company is increasing at a constant rate so the first part of the graph needs to be linear with positive slope, and decreasing with a slight negative steep and again increasing at a constant rate increasing the sales of the company

Company B – The sales of the company is increasing at a constant rate so the first part of the graph needs to be increase in curve with a slight decrease in the graph leading to decrease in sales and vise versa.

b. Company A has the greater total sales for the year compared to Company B, with maintaining the sales up to the mark without losses.

c. The change in each company’s sales throughout the year,  Company A – The sales of the company is increasing at a constant rate so the first part of the graph needs to be linear with positive slope,
Company B – The sales of the company is increasing at a constant rate so the first part of the graph needs to be increase in curve with a slight decrease in the graph leading to decrease in sales

Functions Practice Test

Question 1.
List the ordered pairs shown in the mapping diagram. Then determine whether the relation is a function.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions pt 1
Answer: The relation is a function

Explanation:
As shown , Ordered pairs are the combinations of input and output
So , Ordered pairs are ( 2 , 9 ) , ( 4 , 9 ) , ( 6 , 10 ) , ( 8 , 11 ) .
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Question 2.
Draw a mapping diagram that represents the relation. Then determine whether the relation is a function. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions pt 2
Answer: The mapping diagram is

Explanation:
Ordered pairs from the given graph are ( -3 , 5 ) , ( -1 , 1 ) , ( -1 , 3 ) , ( 1 , 2 ) , ( 3 , 4 ) .
Each input has exactly one output ,
So , The relation is a function .

Question 3.
Write a function rule for “The output is twice the input.”
Answer: y = 2x

Explanation:
Let us say x is input and y is output , then
The output is twice the input. will be
y = 2x

Question 4.
Graph the function y = 1 – 3x.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
Given , y = 1 – 3x  , we know y = mx + c , where m = slope , c = constant
To obtain the graph , we should have ordered pairs ,
So , if x = 0 , then y =1 – 3(0) = 1 . co-ordinates are (0 , 1)
if x = 1 , then y = 1 – 3(1)  = -2 . co-ordinates are (1 , -2)
if x = 2 , then y = 1 – 3(2) = -5 , co-ordinates are (2 , -5)
if x = 3 , then y =1 – 3(3) = -8 , co-ordinates are (3 , -8)
The co-ordinates (0 , 1) , (1 , -2) , (2 , -5) , (3 , -8) form a straight line .

Question 5.
Use the graph to write a linear function that relates y to x.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions pt 5
Answer: The linear function is y = 0.5x – 1

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (-4 , -3) , (-2 , -2 ) , (0 , -1) , ( 2 , 0 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 , -1) and ( 2 , 0 )
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (0 – (-1)) / (2 – 0)
m = 1 / 2 .
m = 0.5 .
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, -1 ) , The y intercept is -1.
So , the linear function is y = 0.5x – 1 .

Question 6.
Does the table represent a linear or nonlinear function? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions pt 6
Answer: The linear function is y = −4x + 8

Explanation:
In order to write the function we have to write the ordered pairs of the graph ,
Ordered pairs are  (0 , 8) , (2 , 0 ) , (4 , -8) , ( 6 , -16 )
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (0 , 8) and (2 , 0 )
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (0 – 8) / (2 – 0)
m = -4
Because the line crosses the y axis at ( 0, 8 ) , The y intercept is 8.
So , the linear function is y = −4x + 8.

Question 7.
The table shows the number of y meters a water-skier travels in x minutes.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions pt 7
a. Write a function that relates y to x.
b. Graph the linear function.
c. At this rate, how many kilometers will the water-skier travel in 12 minutes?
d. Another water-skier travels at the same rate but starts a minute after the first water-skier. Will this water-skier catch up to the first water-skier? Explain.
Answer: All the answers are given below

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are  (1 , 600) , (2 , 1200 ) , (3 , 1800) , ( 4 , 2400 ) , (5 , 3000)
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points(1 , 600) and (2 , 1200 )
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (1200 – 600) / (2 – 1)
m = 600
So, the line is of the form y = 600x + c
put x= 3 and y = 1800 in the above equation we get,
1800 = 600(3) + c
c = 1800 – 1800
c = 0.
So, The line is y = 600x.

b. The graph is

c. put x = 12 in y = 600x
y = 600(12)
y = 7200
7200 meters, i.e., 7.2km

d. Another water skier travels at the same rate but starts a minute after the first water skier, Since both are travelling at the same rate , the water skier who was late will always be behind the first water skier.

Question 8.
The graph shows the prices of two stocks during one day.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions pt 8
a. Describe the changes in the price of each stock.
b. Which stock has a greater price at the end of the day?
c. Give a possible explanation for the change in the price of Stock B throughout the day.
Answer: Detailed Explanation is given below.

Explanation:
a. The changes in the price of each stock is Stock A has the constant increase in stock for a particular time and maintains a constant price forming a straight line in the graph, and again decreasing with a negative slope and vise versa, while Stock B is having steep negative slope that is decreasing in the prices with the time and having a constant horizontal line. and having a positive increase in the slope and same repeats again.

b. stock B has a greater price at the end of the day, having a positive increase in the slope

c. The change in the price of Stock B throughout the day, is having steep negative slope that is decreasing in the prices with the time and having a constant horizontal line. and having a positive increase in the slope and same repeats again, compared to stock A .

Question 9.
You are competing in a footrace. You begin the race by increasing your speed at a constant rate. You then run at a constant speed until you get a cramp and have to stop. You wait until your cramp goes away before you start increasing your speed again at a constant rate. Sketch a graph that represents the situation.
Answer: The graph is

Explanation:
You begin the race by increasing your speed at a constant rate so the first portion of the graph needs to be linear with a positive slope , you then run at a constant speed so the next portion of the graph needs to be horizontal line , you then stop and take a break , so your speed is zero, which means the next portion of the line needs to be
horizontal line on the x axis , you then increase your speed again at a constant rate sop that the last portion of the graph needs to be linear with a positive slope

Functions Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 1
Question 1.
What is the slope of the line?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 2
Answer: Not in the options but the answer is m = -4/3

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are  (-4 , 5) , (1 , -3 ),
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (-3 – 5) / (2 – (-4))
m = -8/6
m = -4/3.

Question 2.
Which value of a makes the equation 24 = \(\frac{a}{3}\) – 9 true?
F. 5
G. 11
H. 45
I. 99
Answer: I. 99

Explanation:
Substitute a = 99 , in the given equation we get,
24 = \(\frac{a}{3}\) – 9
24 = \(\frac{99}{3}\) – 9
24 = 33 – 9
24 = 24.
So, last option is the correct answer.

Question 3.
A mapping diagram is shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 3
What number belongs in the box so that the equation describes the function represented by the mapping diagram?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 5
Answer: m = 7 , y = 7x + 5

Explanation:
Ordered pairs are  (4 , 33) , (7 , 54 ), (10 , 75) , (13 , 96 ),
First find the slope m of the line containing the two given points (4 , 33) and (7 , 54 )
m = (y2-y1) / (x2-x1)
m= (54 – 33) / (7 – 4)
m = 21/3
m = 7.
So, y = 7x + 5

Question 4.
What is the solution of the system of linear equations?
3x + 2y = 5
x = y + 5
A. (3, – 2)
B. (- 2, 3)
C. (- 1, 4)
D. (1, – 4)
Answer: A. (3, – 2)

Explanation:
Given 3x + 2y = 5
Then substitute , x = y + 5 in the above equation
3( y + 5) + 2y = 5
3y + 15 + 2y = 5
5y + 15 = 5
5( y + 3) = 5
y + 3 = 1
y = 1 – 3
y = -2,
substitute y = -2 in x = y + 5 then
x = 3
So, (3 , -2)

Question 5.
The director of a research lab wants to present data to donors. The data show how the lab uses a large amount of donated money for research and only a small amount of money for other expenses. Which type of display best represents these data?
F. box-and-whisker plot
G. circle graph
H. line graph
I. scatter plot
Answer: I. scatter plot

Explanation:
Scatter plot is the best graph for this type of data where vertical axis will show the amount of money and Horizontal axis will show research and other expenses.

Question 6.
Which graph shows a nonlinear function?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 6
Answer: option B

Explanation:
As all the other options are representing the linear function that is forming a straight line  expect for option B , it is representing a non linear equation.

Question 7.
Which equation of a line passes through the point (—2, 3) and has a slope of \(\frac{3}{4}\)?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 7
Answer:  F. y – 3 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)(x + 2)

Explanation:
Given, y – 3 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)(x + 2)
it is in the form of y = mx + c
so, slope m = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Substitute the given points in this equation that is x = -2 and y = 3
3 – 3 = \(\frac{3}{4}\)(-2 + 2)
0 = 0.
So, F is the correct option.

Question 8.
The tables show the sales (in millions of dollars) for two companies over a five-year period.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 8
Part A Does the first table show a linear function? Explain your reasoning.
Part B Does the second table show a linear function? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: Part A, the first table shows a linear function,
Part B the second table shows a linear function.

Explanation:
Part A – ordered pairs are (1 , 2) , (2 , 4) , (3 , 6) , (4 , 8) , (5 , 10)
Each input has exactly one output and forms a straight line when graphed
So, it is a linear function.

Part B – ordered pairs are (1 , 1) , (2 , 1) , (3 , 2) , (4 , 3) , (5 , 5)
Each input has exactly one output and does not form a straight line when graphed
So, it is a linear function.

Question 9.
The equations y = – x + 4 and y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 8 form a system of linear equations. The table shows the values of y for given values of x.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 9
What can you conclude from the table?
A. The system has one solution, when x = 0.
B. The system has one solution, when x = 4.
C. The system has one solution, when x = 8.
D. The system has no solution.
Answer: C. The system has one solution, when x = 8.

Explanation:
Given , y = – x + 4 and y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 8
for x = 8 we have
y = -8 + 4 = -4
y = 0.5(8) – 8 = 4 – 8 = -4
Both the equations have one solution for x = 8
So, The system has one solution, when x = 8.

Question 10.
The vertices of a triangle are A (- 1, 3), B (1, 2), and C (- 1, – 1). Dilate the triangle using a scale factor of 2. What is the y-coordinate of the image of B?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions cp 10
Answer: The New right angle triangle is larger than the original one So , its a increase .

Explanation:
Given , (- 1, 3),  ( 1, 2 ),  (- 1, -1) these pairs form a right angle triangle
K = 2 , For the dilation figure multiply the 3 with the given ordered pairs , then
(- 1, 3) × 2 = ( -2 , 6)
( 1, 2) × 2 = ( 2 , 4)
(- 1, -1) × 2 = (-2 , -2)
From these new ordered pairs we form a new  right angle triangle

The New right angle triangle is larger than the original one So, it’s an increase.

Conclusion

Enhance your problem-solving skills and overall math proficiency using the Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Chapter 7 Functions. Give your best in exams by solving the Problems Over here aligned as per the Latest BIM Textbooks. In case of any suggestions do leave us your queries via the comment box so that we can get back to you.

Must Try:

CHOLAFIN Pivot Calculator

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10

Students can find the exact solution for every question of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths. So, the students who are searching for the Grade 1 Solution Key can get them on the Big Ideas Math Answer page. In order to excel in the exams, you have to choose the best material. Thus Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths from here and start practicing the problems.

Big Ideas Math 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths

Here we can discuss different topics on Measuring and Comparing, Order Objects by Length, Compare Lengths Indirectly, Measure Lengths, Measure More Lengths, Solve Compare Problems Involving Length, and so on. Compare the topic you learned here with the real time and understand the topic deeply. Those topics were being set up by the mathematical experts as indicated by the latest edition. Scroll down this page to get the answers to all the inquiries. Click on the links to look at the subjects shrouded in this chapter Measuring and comparing lengths.

Lesson 1 Order Objects by Length

Lesson 2 Compare Lengths Indirectly

Lesson 3 Measure Lengths

Lesson 4 Measure More Lengths

Lesson 5 Solve Compare Problems Involving Length

Performance Task

Measure and Compare Lengths Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
longer
shorter

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 1
Answer:
The first image longer and the second image is shorter.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-1

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to identify the words. Find each word in the word search.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-2

Lesson 10.1 Order Objects by Length

Explore and Grow

Draw an object that is shorter than the pencil and longer than the crayon.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 3

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-5
Chalk is smaller than crayon.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Order from longest to shortest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 5
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Purple, Pink, Blue.

Explanation:
In the above image, the purple color tube is the longest after that the pink color tube is the longest, and the blue color tube is the shortest.

Question 2.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 6
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Yellow, Green, Black.

Explanation:
In the above image, the yellow brush is the longest, and then the green brush is the longest. The black brush is the shortest.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Order from longest to shortest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 7
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Purple crayon, Red crayon, Green crayon.

Explanation:
In the above image, the Purple crayon is the longest, and then the red crayon is the longest. The green crayon is the shortest.

Question 4.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 8
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is, Pink is the shortest, green is the largest, and blue is the longest.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the order from shortest to longest is, Pink is the shortest, green is the largest, and blue is the longest.

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend ordered from shortest to longest. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 9
  Yellow   ,          green  ,           red   
Answer:
No, my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
No, my friend is not correct. He represented the order from longest to shortest. In the above image, the red chill is the shortest, and the green chili is the longest. The black brush is the shortest.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your yarn is longer than Newton’s. Descartes’s is longer than Newton’s and shorter than yours. Who has the longest yarn?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 10
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 11
Who has the longest yarn?
You             Newton      Descartes
Answer:
My yarn is the longest yarn.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-img-1
As my yarn is longer than Newton’s and Descartes’s is longer than Newton’s and shorter than mine. So the longest yarn is mine, and the largest yarn is Descartes. The shortest yarn is Newton’s.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
Descartes’s pencil is shorter than Newton’s. Yours is shorter than Newton’s and longer than Descartes’s. Who has the shortest pencil?
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 12
Who has the shortest pencil?
Descartes        Newton           You
Answer: Your pencil is shorted among the three.

Order Objects by Length Practice 10.1

Order from longest to shortest.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 13
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order of the bats from longest to the shortest is
Bat 2, Bat 1, Bat 3.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see the longest bat is bat 2 and then the largest bat is bat 1. The shortest bat is bat 3.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 14
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order of the colors from longest to shortest is
Gold, Blue, Red.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the longest color is gold and then the largest color is blue. The shortest color is red.

Question 3.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 15
_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is
Vine 3, Vine 1, Vine 2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the shortest vine is vine 3 after that the largest vine is vine 1 and the longest vine is Vine 2.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Use the clues to match. The red pencil is longer than the yellow pencil. The shortest pencil is blue.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 16
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is
Blue pencil, Yellow pencil, Red pencil.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-16
As by the given clue, the Blue pencil is the shortest pencil, the Yellow pencil is the largest pencil, and the Red pencil is the longest pencil.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Your jump rope is longer than Newton’s. Descartes’s is longer than Newton’s and shorter than yours. Who has the longest jump rope?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 17
Who has the longest jump rope?
You           Newton        Descartes
Answer:
My rope is the longest jump rope.

Explanation:
As my jump rope is longer than Newton’s and Descartes’s jump rope longer than Newton’s and Newton’s jump rope is shorter than yours. So my jump rope is Longer, Newton’s jump rope is the Largest, and the shortest rope is Descartes.

Review & Refresh

Compare.

Question 6.
25 ○ 52
Answer:
25 > 52.

Explanation:
Given that to compare 25 and 52. So we can see that 52 is greater than 25.

Question 7.
41 ○ 44
Answer:
41 > 44.

Explanation:
Given that to compare 41 and 44. So we can see that 44 is greater than 41.

Lesson 10.2 Compare Lengths Indirectly

Explore and Grow

Use string to compare the keys. Which key is longer?
How do you know?

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 18

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 19
Answer:
Key 1 is longer than Key 2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that key 1 is longer than key 2.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 20
Answer:
The Pen is longer than Eraser.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-20
In the above image, we can see that the Pen is longer than the Easer.

Question 2.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 21
Answer:

Explanation:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 22
Answer:
Object 2 is shorter than object 1.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-22
In the above image, we can see that object two is shorter than object 1.

Question 4.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 23
Answer:
The spoon is longer than the brush.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-23
We can see in the above image, that the spoon is longer than the brush. So we will round off the spoon.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER
Which object is longer? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 24
Answer:
The book’s shelf is longer than the key.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-24
As we can see in the above image, that the books shelf is longer than the key. So we will circle the books shelf.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A green crayon is shorter than a blue crayon. The blue crayon is shorter than a yellow crayon. Is the green crayon longer than or shorter than the yellow crayon?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 25
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 26
Longer              Shorter
Answer:
The green crayon is shorter than the yellow crayon.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-img-1-1
Given that green crayon is shorter than blue crayon, and blue crayon is shorter than yellow crayon. So green crayon is shorter than yellow crayon.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
A yellow ribbon is longer than a pink ribbon. The pink ribbon is longer than a blue ribbon. Is the yellow ribbon longer than or shorter than the blue ribbon?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 27
Draw a picture:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 28
Longer            Shorter
Answer:
The Yellow ribbon is longer than the blue ribbon.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths- img 2
Given that yellow ribbon is longer than pink ribbon, and the pink ribbon is longer than a blue ribbon. So yellow ribbon is longer than the blue ribbon.

Compare Lengths Indirectly Practice 10.2

Question 1.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 29
Answer:
Object 1 is longer than object 2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that object one is longer than image two. So we will circle object one.

Question 2.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 30
Answer:
Object two is shorter than object one.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-30
In the above image, we can see that object two is shorter than object one. So we will circle object two.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER
Use the clues to match.
The blue string is longer than the orange string.
The purple string is shorter than the orange string.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 31
Answer:
The order of the strings from longest to shortest is
Blue string, Orange string, Purple string.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-31
Given that the blue string is longer than the orange string, and the purple string is shorter than the orange string.
So the order of the strings is the blue string is longer, the orange string is the largest and the purple string is the shortest.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
A kayak is shorter than a canoe. The canoe is shorter than a paddle board. Is the kayak longer than or shorter than the paddle board?

Longer             Shorter
Answer:
The Kayak is shorter than the paddle board.

Explanation:
Given that the Kayak is shorter than a canoe, and the canoe is shorter than a paddle board. So the Kayak is shorter than the paddle board.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Circle the objects that have capacity as an attribute.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 32
Answer:
The objects which have the capacity to store are circled in the below image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-32
The circled items have the capacity to store. As we can see that the lid jar is used to store any items, and chalk box is used to store chalk pieces, and glass is used to store water or any liquids, and a glue bottle is used to store glue. So these items have the capacity to store. And the remaining things do not have that much capacity to store.

Lesson 10.3 Measure Lengths

Explore and Grow

Find and measure the objects shown in your classroom.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 33

Answer:
The length of the table is about two colored red tiles.

Explanation:
The table is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored red tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 34

Answer:
The length of the pencil is about one tile.

Explanation:
The pencil is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the pencil is one colored red tile, which means one unit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Show and Grow

Measure

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 35

about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about one tile.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about one colored tile, which means one unit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 36

about ___________ color tile

Answer:
The length of the object is about five colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about five colored tiles, which means five units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Measure

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 37

about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 38

about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about three colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about three colored tiles, which means three units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 5.
MP Precision
Which picture shows the correct way to measure the straw?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 39
Answer:
The red color tiles are the correct way to measure the straw.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that the correct way to measure the straw is the red color tiles.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Will the scissors fit inside a pencil case that is 7 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 40
Circle:      Yes     No
Tell how you know:
Answer:
Yes, the scissors can fit inside a pencil case that is 7 color tiles long.

Explanation:
Yes, the scissors can fit inside a pencil case. As the length of the scissors is four colored tiles. As the scissors are measured by using the colored tile. And each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the scissors is about four colored tiles, which means four units. And the pencil case is 7 colored tiles long. So the scissors can fit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
Will the cell phone fit inside a case that is 5 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 41
Circle:     Yes     No
Tell how you know:
Answer:
No, the cell phone cannot fit inside a case of 5 color tiles long.

Explanation:
No, the cell phone cannot fit inside a case of 5 color tiles long. As the length of the cell phone is six colored tiles. And the cell phone is measured by using the colored tile. And each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the cell phone is about six colored tiles, which means six units. And cannot fit inside 5 colored tiles long. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Measure Lengths Practice 10.3

Measure.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 42
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 43
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the object is about two colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about two colored tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 44
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the glue stick is about three colored tiles.

Explanation:
The glue stick is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the glue stick is about three colored tiles, which means three units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 4.
MP Reasoning
The green yarn is about 3 color tiles long. How long is the blue yarn?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 45
about ___________ color tile
Answer:
The length of the blue yarn is about six color tiles.

Explanation:
Given that the length of the green yarn is three color tiles long, so we should find the length of the blue yarn. To measure the length of the blue yarn, we will take the colored tiles without gaps or any overlaps between them. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the blue yarn is about six colored tiles, which means six units.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Will the gift card fit inside an envelope that is 8 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 46
Circle:      Yes      No
Tell how you know:
Answer:
Yes, the gift can fit inside an envelope that is 8 color tiles long.

Explanation:
Yes, the gif card can fit inside an envelope that is 8 color tiles long. As the length of the gift card is four colored tiles. And the gift card is measured by using the colored tile. And each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the gift is about four colored tiles, which means four units. And the envelope is 8 colored tiles long. So the gift card can fit. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Complete the fact family.
7 + 3 = _________                                     __________ – 3 = 7
_________ + _________ = _________             _________ – 7 = _________
Answer:
7 + 3 is 10,
3 + 7 is 10
10 – 3 is 7,
10 –  7 is 3.

Explanation:
As a fact family represents a group of math facts, equations, which are created by using the same set of digits. This fact family defines the relation between the three numbers which are involved. In addition or subtraction in a fact family, there will be four addition and subtractions will be created using these three numbers. So
7 + 3 is 10,
3 + 7 is 10
10 – 3 is 7,
10 –  7 is 3.

Lesson 10.4 Measure More Lengths

Explore and Grow

Find and measure the objects shown in your classroom two ways. What do you notice?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 47

Answer:
The length of the table is about two colored red tiles and the length of the table which is measured using a paper clip is one paper clip.

Explanation:
The table is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored red tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the table with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the table using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the table will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the table will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 48
Answer:
The length of the pencil is about two colored red tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is one paper clip.

Explanation:
The pencil is measured by using the colored red tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored red tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the table with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the pencil using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the table will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Show and Grow

Measure

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 49
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the brush is about four colored tiles and the length of the brush which is measured using a paper clip is two paper clips.

Explanation:
The brush is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the brush with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the brush using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the table will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the brush will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 50
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the skating board is about two colored tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is one paper clip.

Explanation:
The skating board is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the table is two colored tiles, which means two units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the skating board with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the skating board using the paper clip is one paper clip, which means one unit. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the skating board will be two color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be one paper clip. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Measure.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 51
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the object is about six colored tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is three paper clips.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is six colored tiles, which means six units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the table with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the object using the paper clip is three paper clips, which means three units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the object will be six color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be three paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 52
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:

The length of the sunscreen lotion bottle is about four colored tiles and the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle which is measured using a paper clip is two paper clips.

Explanation:
The sunscreen lotion bottle is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle is four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the sunscreen lotion bottle with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle using the paper clip is two paper clips, which means two units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle will be four color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the sunscreen lotion bottle will be two paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the pencil is more paper clips long than color tiles. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 53
Answer:
No, my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
No, my friend is not correct. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So my friend is not correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your guitar is 33 color tiles long. Is your guitar more than or less than 33 paper clips long?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 54
Circle:      more than 33         less than 33
Tell how you know:
Answer:
My guitar will be less than 33 paper clips.

Explanation:
My guitar will be less than 33 paper clips. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be fewer paper clips than the color tiles.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
Your mailbox is 11 paper clips long. Is your mailbox more than or less than 11 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 55
Circle:       more than 11         less than 11
Tell how you know:
Answer:
My mailbox will have more than 11 color tiles long.

Explanation:
My mailbox will have more than 11 color tiles. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be more color tiles than the paper clips.

Measure More Lengths Practice 10.4

Measure

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 56
about __________ color tiles about __________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the rocket is about six colored tiles and the length of the pencil which is measured using a paper clip is three paper clips.

Explanation:
The rocket is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the rocket is six colored tiles, which means six units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the rocket with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the rocket using the paper clip is three paper clips, which means three units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the rocket will be six color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be three paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 2.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the marker is more color tiles long than paper clips. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 57
Answer:
Yes, the marker has more color tiles long than paper clips. So my friend is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, the marker has more color tiles long than paper clips. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be more color tiles than the paper clips for the marker. So my friend is correct.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Your folder is 15 color tiles long. Is your folder more than or less than 15 paper clips long?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 58
Circle:       more than 15         less than 15
Tell how you know:

Answer:
My folder will be less than 15 paper clips.

Explanation:
My folder will be less than 15 paper clips. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be fewer than 15 paper clips than the color tiles for my folder.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
8 tigers swim.
5 tigers leave.
How many tigers are left?
___________ – ___________ = ___________ tigers
Answer:
the number of tigers left is
8 – 5= 3 tigers.

Explanation:
The number of tigers swim is 8 and the number of tigers which leave is 5 tigers. So the number of tigers left is
8 – 5= 3 tigers.

Question 5.
You have 6 pencils.
You lose 2 pencils.
How many pencils are left?
___________ – ___________ = ___________ pencils
Answer:
the remaining pencils are
6 – 2= 4 pencils.

Explanation:
The number of pencils I have is 6 pencils, and the number of pencils lost is 2 pencils. So the remaining pencils are
6 – 2= 4 pencils.

Lesson 10.5 Solve Compare Problems Involving Length

Explore and Grow

Draw a line that is 2 color tiles longer than the pencil.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 59

Draw a line that is 2 color tiles shorter than the pencil.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 59
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Your lunch box is 6 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 3 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your lunch box?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 60
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 61
__________ paper clips
Answer:
My lunch box is three paper clips longer than my friend’s and my friend’s lunch box is three times shorter than my friend’s lunch box.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-84-1
Given that my lunch box is six paper clips long and my friend’s lunch box is three paper clips long. So there will be three paper clips longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s lunch box is three paper clips shorter than my lunch box.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Your scarf is 10 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 7 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your scarf?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 62
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 63
Answer:
Myscarf is three paper clips longer than my friend’s and my friend’s scarf is three times shorter than my friend’s scarf.

Eplanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-84-2
Given that my scarf is ten paper clips long and my friend’s scarf is seven paper clips long. So there will be three paper clips longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s scarf is three paper clips shorter than my scarf.

Question 3.
Your marker is 6 color tiles long. Your friend’s is 7 color tiles long. How many tiles shorter is your marker?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 64
Answer:
My marker is one tile shorter than my friend’s marker.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-64
Given that my marker is 6 color tiles long and my friend’s marker is 7 color tiles. So my marker is 7 – 6 which is one color tile shorter than my friend’s. And my friend’s marker is one color tile longer than mine.

Question 4.
MP Reasoning
Your pencil is 4 color tiles long. Your
friend’s is 2 color tiles long. Complete the sentences.

Your pencil is ________ color tiles ________ than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is ________ color tiles ________ than yours.
Answer:
Your pencil is two color tiles longer than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is two color tiles shorter than yours.

Explanation:
Given that my pencil is 4 color tiles long and my friend’s pencil is 2 color tiles. So my pencil is 4 – 2 which is two color tiles longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s pencil is two color tiles shorter than mine.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend’s paper chain is 6 paper clips shorter than yours. Your chain is 12 paper clips long. How long is your friend’s?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 65
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 66
Equation:

____________ paper clips long
Answer:
My paper chain is six color tiles longer than my friend’s.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-66
Given that my paper chain is 12 color tiles long and my friend’s paper chain is 6 color tiles. So my paper chain is 12 – 6 which is six color tile shorter than my friend’s. And my friend’s paper chain is six color tile longer than mine.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Your paper airplane is 9 color tiles shorter than your friend’s. Your friend’s paper airplane is 16 color tiles long. How long is yours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 67
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 68
Answer:
Equation:

____________ color titles long
Answer:
My airplane is seven color tiles longer than my friend.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-68
Given that my airplane is 9 color tiles long and my friend’s airplane is 16 color tiles. So my marker is 16 – 9 which is seven color tile shorter than my friend’s. And my friend’s airplane is seven color tile longer than mine.

Solve Compare Problems Involving Length Practice 10.5

Question 1.
Your backpack is 15 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 12 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your backpack?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 69
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 70
Answer:
Three paper clips longer than my friend’s

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-61
Given that my backpack is 15 paper clips long and my friend’s backpack is 12 paper clips long. So there will be three paper clips longer than my friend’s.

Question 2.
MP Reasoning
Your baseball miff is 8 paper clips long. Your friend’s is 7 paper clips long. Complete the sentences.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 71
Your friend’s baseball mitt is ________ paper clip _________ than yours.
Your baseball mitt is _________ paper clip _________ than your friends.
Answer:
Your friend’s baseball mitt is 1 paper clip shorter than yours.
Your baseball mitt is 1 paper clip longer than your friends.

Explanation:
Given that my baseball miff is 8 paper clips long and my friend’s baseball miff is 7 paper clips. So my baseball miff is 8 – 7 which is 1 paper clip longer than my friend’s. And my friend’s baseball miff is 1 paper clip shorter than mine.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Your desk is 7 paper clips longer than your friend’s. Your friend’s desk is 14 paper clips long. How long is yours?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 72
___________ paper clips long
Answer:
7 paper clips long.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-61-1
As my desk is 7 paper clips longer than my friend’s and my friend’s desk is 14 paper clips long. So my desk will be 14 – 7= 7 paper clips long.

Review & Refresh

Use the picture to complete the number bond.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 73
Answer:
By number bond, the total number of flowers is 5 + 3= 8 flowers.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-73
This number bond explains to us how the numbers are joined together and how they break down into a certain number of parts. In the above image, we can see that there are five yellow flowers and three red flowers. By number bond, we will add all the flowers. So the total number of flowers is 5 + 3= 8 flowers. Now they break down by five yellow flowers in one circle and three red flowers in another circle.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 74
Answer:
By number bond, the total number of cans is 3 + 3= 8 cans.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-74

This number bond explains to us how the numbers are joined together and how they break down into a certain number of parts. In the above image, we can see that there are three green cans and three red cans. By number bond, we will add all the cans. So the total number of cans is 3 + 3= 6 flowers. Now they break down by three green cans in one circle and three red cans in another circle.

Measure and Compare Lengths Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 75

Question 1.
Use a piece of string to compare the routes from your house to the library, the post office, and the school.Order the routes from shortest to longest.
____________, ____________, ____________
Answer:
The order from shortest to longest is the post office, the library, and the school.

Explanation:
The route from my house to the library is three meters and the route from my house to the post office is two meters and the route from my house to the school is four meters. So the order from shortest to longest is the post office, the library, and the school.

Question 2.
Use a piece of string to measure the different routes from your house to your friend’s house. Color the route you would use to ride your bike to your friend’s house.
Answer:

Question 3.
a. The bakery is farther from your house than the pool. The park is closer to your house than the pool. Which place is closest to your house?
Park             Bakery              Pool
Answer:

b. Label the park, bakery, and pool on the map.
Answer:

Measure and Compare Lengths Chapter Practice

Order Objects by Length Homework & Practice 10.1

Question 1.
Order from longest to shortest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 76
____________, _____________, ______________
Answer:
The order from longest to shortest is
Shark, Lobster, Fish.

Explanation:
In the above image, the longest is the shark, the largest is the lobster and the shortest is the fish.

Question 2.
MP Problem Solving
A green snake is shorter than a black snake. A brown snake is shorter than a black snake. Which snake is the longest?
green        block         brown
Answer:
The black snake is the longest.

Explanation:
Given that a green snake is shorter than a black snake and a brown snake is shorter than a black snake. So the longest snake is a black snake.

Compare Lengths Indirectly Homework & Practice 10.2

Question 3.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 77
Answer:
We will circle the second image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-77
In the above image, the longest object is the second image. So we will circle the second image.

Question 4.
Circle the longer Object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 78
Answer:
We will circle the second image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-78
In the above image, the longest object is the second image. So we will circle the second image.

Question 5.
Draw a line through the shorter object.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 79
Answer:
The first image is the shorter image.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-79
In the above image, the shorter object is the first image. So we will circle the first image.

Measure Lengths Homework & Practice 10.3

Measure

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 80
about ___________ color tiles
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 81
about ___________ color tiles
Answer:
The length of the object is about five colored tiles.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is about five colored tiles, which means five units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them.

Measure More Lengths Homework & Practice 10.4

Measure

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 82
about ___________ color tiles
about ___________ paper clips
Answer:
The length of the object is about four colored tiles and the length of the object which is measured using a paper clip is two paper clips.

Explanation:
The object is measured by using the colored tile. As each tile is equal to one unit. So the length of the object is four colored tiles, which means four units. We must take each tile without gaps or any overlaps between them. And to measure the object with the paper clip, we will place the paper clip without gaps or overlaps between them. And each paper clip is equal to about one unit. So the length of the object using the paper clip is two paper clips, which means two units. We have noticed that if we take a colored tile, then the length of the object will be four color tiles. And if we take a paper clip then the length of the pencil will be two paper clips. So the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Your hockey stick is 18 paper clips long. Is your hockey stick more than or less than 18 color tiles long?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 83
Circle: more than 18 less than 18
Tell how you know:
Answer:
My hockey stick has more than 18 color tiles.

Explanation:
My hockey stick has more than 18 color tiles. As we can see from the above problems that while measuring with the paper clip we need fewer paper clips than the color tiles. And the length is doubled while measuring with color tile than the paper clip. So there will be more than 18 color tiles than the paper clips for the hockey stick.

Solve Compare Problems Involving Length Homework & Practice 10.5

Question 10.
Your water bottle is 5 paper clips long. Your Friend’s is 4 paper clips long. How many paper clips longer is your water bottle?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 84
Answer:
One paper clip long.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-84
Given that my water bottle is 5 paper clips long and my friend’s water bottle is 4 paper clips long. So there will be one paper clip longer than my friend’s.

Question 11.
Your bookshelf is 19 color tiles long. Your friend’s is 15 color tiles long. How many tiles longer is your bookshelf?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 85
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths 86
Answer:
My bookshelf is four tiles longer.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-1st-Grade-1-Chapter-10-Measure-and-Compare-Lengths-86
Given that my bookshelf is 19 paper clips long and my friend’s bookshelf is 15 paper clips long. So there will be four paper clips longer than my friend’s.

Question 12.
MP Reasoning
Your pencil is 6 color tiles long. Your friend’s is 3 color tiles long. Complete the sentences.

Your pencil is ____________ color tiles ____________ than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is ____________ color tiles ____________ than yours.
Answer:
Your pencil is three color tiles longer than your friend’s.
Your friend’s pencil is three color tiles shorter than yours.

Explanation:
As my pencil is six color tiles long, and my friend’s pencil is three color tiles long. So my pencil will be three color tiles longer than my friend’s pencil. And my friend’s pencil is three color tiles shorter than my pencil.

Conclusion:

Hope the information regarding Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 10 Measure and Compare Lengths is beneficial for you. If you have any doubts please post the comments in the below-mentioned comment box. Share this pdf link with your friends and help them to overcome the difficulties in maths.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15

Find Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area Questions with Solutions here. The students can get the answer along with the detailed explanation in the following sections. This BIG Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area is helpful to complete the homework in time. Hence, download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area Solutions pdf for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade 15th Chapter Find Perimeter and Area Answer Key

Students have to prepare all the topics of Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade 15th Chapter Find Perimeter and Area to score good marks in the exam. The different topics included in BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area Answers are Understand Perimeter, Find Perimeters of Polygons, Find Unknown Side Lengths, Same Perimeter, Different Areas, and Same Area, Different Perimeters. After preparing these topics, check your skills at the performance task provided at the end.

The success criteria of Find Perimeter and Area is to understand the area and perimeter of polygons. The topic wise quick links to access Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area Answer Key is provided below. So, just tap on them and get the solutions easily.

Lesson 1 Understand Perimeter

Lesson 2 Find Perimeters of Polygons

Lesson 3 Find Unknown Side Lengths

Lesson 4 Same Perimeter, Different Areas

Lesson 5 Same Area, Different Perimeters

Performance Task

Lesson 15.1 Understand Perimeter

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Model a rectangle on your geoboard. Draw the rectangle and label its side lengths. What is the distance around the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 1
Answer:
The units around the rectangle are 15 units.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
In the above figure, the length of the rectangle is 4 units, and
the breadth of the rectangle is 3 units.
The units around the rectangle are 15 units.

Structure
Change the side lengths of the rectangle on your geoboard. What do you notice about the distance around your rectangle compared to the distance around the rectangle above? Explain

Answer:
The distance around the rectangle is 15 units

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
In the above figure, we can see the length of the rectangle is 3 units, and
the breadth of the rectangle is 4 units.
There is no change in the distance around the rectangle which is 15 units.

Think and Grow: Understand Perimeter
Perimeter is the distance around a figure. You can measure perimeter using standard units, such as inches, feet, centimeters, and meters.
Example
Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
Choose a unit to begin counting. Count each unit around the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 2
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle is 20 in.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the triangle, we need to know the length and the breadth of the rectangle.
Here, the length of the rectangle is 7 in,
and the breadth is 3 in,
So the perimeter of the rectangle is 2(Length + Breadth)
= 2(7+3)
= 2(10)
= 20 in.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the perimeter of the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 4
There are ___ units around the figure.
Answer:
There are 22 units around the figure.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the rectangle, we need to know the length and the breadth of the rectangle.
Here, the length of the rectangle is 6 m,
and the breadth is 5 m,
So the perimeter of the rectangle is 2(Length + Breadth)
= 2(6+5)
= 2(11)
= 22 m.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 5
There are ___ units around the figure.
So, the perimeter is ____ feet.
Answer:
The perimeter of the figure is 24 ft.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure
So the sides of the figure are 5,3,2,4,3,7.
and the perimeter of the figure is 5+3+2+4+3+7
= 24 ft.

Question 3.
Draw the figure that has a perimeter of 16 centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 6
Answer:
The sides of the figure are 4 cm.

Explanation:
As the perimeter of the figure is 16 cm,
So let the sides of the figure be 4 cm,
by that, we can get the perimeter as 16 cm, i.e
4+4+4+4= 16 cm.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 4.
Find the perimeter of the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 7
There are ___ units around the figure.
So, the perimeter is ___
Answer:
There are 20 units around the figure.
So, the perimeter is 20 cm.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure
So the sides of the figure are 3,3,2,2,5,5.
and the perimeter of the figure is 3+3+2+2+5+5
= 20 units,
So the perimeter is 20 cm.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 8
There are ___ units around the figure.
So, the perimeter is ___
Answer:
There are 26 units around the figure.
So, the perimeter is 26 ft.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure
So the sides of the figure is 5,5,2,3,1,3,2,5
and the perimeter of the figure is 5+5+2+3+1+3+2+5
= 26 units,
So the perimeter is 26 ft.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 9
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the figure is 22 in.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure
So the sides of the figure is 4,3,2,3,3,3,1,3
and the perimeter of the figure is 4+3+2+3+3+3+1+3
= 22 units,
So the perimeter is 22 in.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 10
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter is 24 m.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure
So the sides of the figure is 5,7,2,2,1,2,1,1,1,2
and the perimeter of the figure is 5+7+2+2+1+2+1+1+1+2
= 24 units,
So the perimeter is 24 m.

Question 8.
Draw a figure that has a perimeter likely measurement for the of 14 centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 11
Answer:
The length of the rectangle is 2 cm, and
the breadth is 5 cm.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
In the above figure, we can see the length of the rectangle is 2 cm
and the breadth of the rectangle is 5 cm
perimeter = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(5+2)
= 2(7)
= 14 cm.
so the perimeter of the rectangle is 14 cm.

Question 9.
Precision Which is the most likely measurement for the perimeter of a photo?
20 inches
100 meters
5 centimeters
2 inches
Answer:
2 inches.

Explanation:
The most likely measurement for the perimeter of a photo is 2 inches.

Question 10.
You be the teacher Your friend counts the units around the figure and says the perimeter is 12 units. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 12
Answer:
No, he is not correct.

Explanation:
No, he is not correct. As there are 2+2+1+1+4+1+1+2= 14 units, but not 12 units. So he is not correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Use a centimeter ruler to find the perimeter of the bookmark.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 13
The perimeter is ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the bookmark is 26 cm.

Explanation:
On measuring, the length of the sides of the bookmark are 4 cm, 9 cm, 2 cm, 2 cm, 9 cm
to find the perimeter of the bookmark, we will add all the length of the sides
so the perimeter of the bookmark is
p = 4 cm+ 9 cm+ 2 cm+ 2 cm+ 9 cm
= 26 cm.
The perimeter of the bookmark is 26 cm.

Show and Grow

Question 11.
Use an inch ruler to find the perimeter of the decal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 14
Answer:
The perimeter of the decal is 17 in.

Explanation:
On measuring, the length of the sides of the decal is 5in, 2in, 5in, 5in
to find the perimeter of the decal, we will add all the length of the sides
so the perimeter of the decal is
p= 5in+2in+5in+5in
= 17 in
The perimeter of the decal is 17 in.

Question 12.
How much greater is the perimeter of your friend’s desk than the perimeter of your desk?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 15
Answer:
Friend’s perimeter is 22-16= 6 times greater.

Explanation:
As we can see figure 1 is a square and the sides of the square are 4 ft.
So the perimeter of the square is a+a+a+a,
= 4+4+4+4
= 16 ft.
And now let’s find the perimeter of the friend’s figure,
So the sides of the figure is 2,6,5,2,3,4
and the perimeter is 2+6+5+2+3+4= 22 ft.
By this, we can see that the friend’s figure has a greater perimeter,
and friend’s perimeter is 22-16= 6 times greater.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Explain how you might use a centimeter ruler and string to estimate the perimeter of the photo of the window.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 16
Answer:
Here, we will use the ruler to find the length of the bottom part of the window and the sides which are straight we can find the length using the ruler. And the curve sides we will measure using the string.

Understand Perimeter Homework & Practice 15.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 17
There are ___ units around the figure.
So, the perimeter is ___ inches.
Answer:
There are 20 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 20 in.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure,
As we can see the above image is a square,
and the perimeter of the square is s+s+s+s
= 5+5+5+5
= 20 in.
As there are 20 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 20 in.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 18
There are ___ units around the figure.
So, the perimeter is ___ feet.

Answer:
There are 32 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 32 ft.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure,
The sides of the above figure is 2,3,4,3,2,5,8,5
and the perimeter of the figure is 2+3+4+3+2+5+8+5
= 32 units.
As there are 32 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 32 ft.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 19
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
There are 26 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 26 cm.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure,
The sides of the above figure is 2,2,2,3,1,3,5,8
and the perimeter of the figure is 2+2+2+3+1+3+5+8
= 26 units.
As there are 26 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 26 cm.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 20
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
There are 38 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 38 m.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure,
The sides of the above figure is 2,8,2,3,1,3,2,8,2,3,1,3
and the perimeter of the figure is 2+8+2+3+1+3+2+8+2+3+1+3
= 38 units.
As there are 38 units around the figure,
So the perimeter is 38 m.

Question 5.
Draw a figure that has a perimeter of 18 inches.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 21
Answer:
The length of the rectangle is 5 in
and the breadth of the rectangle is 4 in.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
Let the length of the rectangle be 5 in
and the breadth of the rectangle be 4 in
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(5+4)
= 2(9)
= 18 in.

Question 6.
Reasoning
Which color represents the perimeter of the rectangle? What does the other color represent?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 22
Answer:
Blue color represents the perimeter of the rectangle and
the other color yellow represents the area of the figure.

Explanation:
In the above figure, the blue color represents the perimeter of the rectangle.
Because the perimeter represents the distance around the edge of the shape.
And the other color yellow represents the area of the figure,
as area represents the amount of space inside a shape.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
Use a centimeter ruler tofind the perimeter of the library card.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 24
Answer:
The perimeter of the library card is 24 cm.

Explanation:
On measuring, the length of the sides of the library card is 5cm, 7cm, 5cm, 7cm
to find the perimeter of the library card, we will add all the length of the sides
so the perimeter of the library card is
p= 5cm+7cm+5cm+7cm
= 24 cm
The perimeter of the library card is 24 cm.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
How much greater is the perimeter of your piece of fabric than the perimeter of your friend’ spiece of fabric?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 25
Answer:
My fabric is 4 inches greater than my friend’s fabric.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure 1, we will add all the sides of the figure,
The sides of the above figure is 2,1,1,2,2,2,8,2,2,2,1,1
and the perimeter of the figure is 2+1+1+2+2+2+8+2+2+2+1+1
= 26 in.
So the perimeter of the figure is 26 in.
And now let’s find the perimeter of the friend’s figure,
So the sides of the figure is 1,2,2,4,1,5,4,3
and the perimeter is 1+2+2+4+1+5+4+3
= 22 in.
By this, we can see that my fabric has the highest perimeter than the friend’s fabric
which is 26-22= 4 in greater.

Review & Refresh

Write two equivalent fractions for the whole number.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 26
Answer:
1= 4/4 = 6/6

Explanation:
Here, the equivalent fraction for the whole number means if the numerator was divided by the denominator without any reminder then the fraction is equivalent to a whole number. So 1= 4/4 = 6/6.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 27
Answer:
4= 4/1 = 8/2.

Explanation:
Here, the equivalent fraction for the whole number means if the numerator was divided by the denominator without any reminder then the fraction is equivalent to a whole number. So 4= 4/1 = 8/2.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 28
Answer:
6= 24/4 = 36/6.

Explanation:
Here, the equivalent fraction for the whole number means if the numerator was divided by the denominator without any reminder then the fraction is equivalent to a whole number. So 6= 24/4 = 36/6.

Find Perimeters of Polygons 15.2

Explore and Grow

Model a rectangle on your geoboard. Draw the rectangle and label its side lengths. Then find the perimeter in more than one way.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 29

Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle is 14 units.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
In  the above figure, we can see the length of the rectangle is 4 units
and the breadth of the rectangle is 3 units,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p =2(length + breadth)
= 2(4+3)
= 2(7)
= 14 units.
The perimeter of the rectangle is 14 units.
Critique the Reasoning of Others
Compare your methods of finding the perimeter to your partner’s methods. Explain how they are alike or different.
Answer:
There are two methods to find the perimeter explained below.

Explanation:
There are two ways to find the perimeter.
The first method is
Perimeter = 2(length + breadth)
here, we will add length and breadth, and then we will multiply the result by 2.
and the second method is
Perimeter = a+b+c+d
here, we will add all the sides of the figure.

Think and Grow: Find Perimeter

Example
Find the perimeter of the trapezoid.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 30
You can find the perimeter of a figure by adding all of the side lengths.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 31
Write an equation. The letter P represents the unknown perimeter. Add the side lengths.
So, the perimeter is ___.
Answer:
So, the perimeter is 36 in.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the trapezoid, we will add all the sides of the trapezoid,
so the sides of the trapezoid is 6 in,12 in,8 in,10 in
The perimeter is 6+12+8+10
= 36 in.

Example
Find the perimeter of the rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 33
Because a rectangle has two pairs of equal sides, you can also use multiplication to solve.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 34
One Way:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 35
Another Way:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 36
So, the perimeter is ___.

Answer:
Perimeter = 7+9+7+9
= 32 cm.
Perimeter= 2×9 + 2× 7
= 32 cm.
So, the perimeter is 32 cm.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of a rectangle, we have two ways,
One way is to add all the sides of the rectangle, which is
7+9+7+9= 32 cm.
And the other way is, as the two sides of the rectangle are equal, we wil use formula
Perimeter = 2( Length + Breadth)
= 2× Length + 2 × Breadth
= 2×9 + 2× 7
= 18+ 14
= 32 cm.

Show and Grow

Find the perimeter of the polygon.
Answer:

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the polygon, we will add the length of the all sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 37
The perimeter is ___.
Answer:
The perimeter is 12 m.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the polygon, we will add the length of all sides of the polygon.
So the length of the sides is 5 m, 3 m, 3 m, 2 m
The perimeter is 5+3+3+2
= 12 m.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 38
The perimeter is ___.

Answer:
The perimeter is 24 ft.

Explanation:
As we can see in the above figure which has all sides are equal,
so the perimeter of the square is 4s
= 4×6
= 24 ft.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the perimeter of the polygon.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 39
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the polygon is 28 m.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the polygon, we will add the length of the all sides of the polygon.
So the length of the sides is 4 m, 9 m, 10 m, 5 m
The perimeter is 4+9+10+5
= 28 m.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 40
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the figure is 40 in.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add the length of all sides of the figure.
So the length of the sides is 12 in, 4 in, 8 in, 7 in,9 in.
The perimeter is 12+4+8+7+9
= 40 in.

Question 5.
Rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 41
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle is 36 cm.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the rectangle, we need to know the length and the breadth of the rectangle.
Here, the length of the rectangle is 9 cm,
and the breadth is 10 cm,
So the perimeter of the rectangle is 2(Length + Breadth)
= 2(10+9)
= 2(19)
= 38 cm.

Question 6.
Rhombus
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 42
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the Rhombus is 4 in.

Explanation:
As all sides of the Rhombus are equal, so the formula of the Rhombus is 4a
and the side of the Rhombus is 1 in,
so the perimeter is 4a
= 4×1
= 4 in.

Question 7.
Parallelogram
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 43
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the parallelogram is 22 cm.

Explanation:
As the opposite sides of the parallelogram are equal,
so the perimeter of the parallelogram is 2(a+b)
the length of the parallelogram is 3 cm,
and the breadth of the parallelogram is 8 cm
So the perimeter of the parallelogram is
= 2(3+8)
= 2(11)
= 22 cm.

Question 8.
Square
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 44
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the square is 16 ft.

Explanation:
As we can see in the above figure which has all sides are equal,
so the perimeter of the square is 4s
= 4×4
= 16 ft.

Question 9.
You build a pentagon out of wire for a social studies project. Each side is 8 centimeters long. What is the perimeter of the pentagon?
Answer:
The perimeter of the pentagon is 40 cm.

Explanation:
The length of the pentagon is 8 cm,
so the perimeter of the pentagon is 5a,
which is 5×8
= 40 cm

Question 10.
Number Sense
The top length of the trapezoid is 4 feet. The bottom length is double the top. The left and right lengths are each 2 feet less than the bottom. Label the side lengths and find the perimeter of the trapezoid.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 45
Answer:
The sides of the trapezoid are 4ft, 6ft, 8ft, 6ft, and the perimeter is 24 ft.

Explanation:
As the top length of the trapezoid is 4 feet and the bottom length is double the top,
which is 4×2= 8 feet. And the left and right lengths are each 2 feet less than the bottom,
which means 8 – 2 = 6 ft each.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

So to find the perimeter of the trapezoid is we will add the length of all sides.
The perimeter of the trapezoid is 4+6+8+6= 24 ft.

Question 11.
Writing
Explain how finding the perimeter of a rectangle is different from finding its area.
Answer:
Perimeter= 2(length + breadth)
Area = length × breadth.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the rectangle,
we will add the length and breadth and will multiply the result with 2
Perimeter= 2(length + breadth)
and to find the area of the rectangle,
we will multiply the length and breadth of the rectangle.
Area = length × breadth.

Question 12.
Dig Deeper!
A rectangle has a perimeter of 12 feet. What could its side lengths be ?
Answer:
The length of the rectangle is 4 feet
and the breadth of the rectangle is 2 feet

Explanation:
Given the perimeter is 12 feet,
so the let the length be 4 feet
and the breadth be 2 feet
Let’s check on the length and breadth is correct are not
perimeter = 2( length + breadth)
= 2( 4+2)
= 2(6)
= 12 feet.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

The rectangular sign is 34 feet longer than it is wide. What is the perimeter of the sign?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 46
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:
Solve:
The perimeter is ___.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangular sign is 124 ft.

Explanation:
Given the rectangular sign is 34 feet longer than it’s wide
and the wide is 14 ft,
so the length is 34ft + 14ft= 48 ft.
the perimeter of the rectangular sign is
P= 2(48ft + 14ft)
= 2(62ft)
= 124 ft.
The perimeter of the rectangular sign is 124 ft.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
A city has a rectangular sidewalk in a park. The sidewalk is 4 feet wide and is 96 feet longer than it is wide. What is the perimeter of the sidewalk?
Answer:
The perimeter of the sidewalk is 208 feet.

Explanation:
As given the rectangular sidewalk’s wide is 4 feet and the length is 96 feet longer than it’s wide,
which means 96+4= 100 feet is the length of the rectangular sidewalk,
so the perimeter of the rectangular sidewalk is 2( length + breadth)
= 2( 4+100)
= 2(104)
= 208 feet.

Question 14.
A team jogs around a rectangular field three times. The field is 80 yards long and 60 yards wide. How many yards does the team jog?
Answer:
The number of yards does the team jog is 3×280= 840 yards.

Explanation:
The length of the rectangular field is 80 yards,
The breadth of the rectangular field is 60 yards,
So, the perimeter of the rectangular field is 2(length + breadth)
= 2(80+60)
= 2(140)
= 280 yards.
As the team jogs around a rectangular field three times,
so the number of yards does the team jog is 3×280= 840 yards.

Question 15.
Each side of the tiles is 8 centimeters long. What is the sum of the perimeters?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 47
You put the tiles together as shown. Is the perimeter of this new shape the same as the sum of the perimeters above? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 48
Answer:
The sum of the perimeters is 96 cm.
Yes, there will be a change in the perimeter of the new figure. The perimeter is 80 cm.

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see a hexagon that has six sides.
So the formula for the perimeter of a hexagon is 6a,
the perimeter of the tiles is 6×8
= 48 cm.
So the sum of the tiles 48+48= 96 cm.
Yes, there will be a change in the perimeter of the new figure. As there are ten sides in the new figure, so the perimeter of the new figure is 10×8= 80 cm.

Find Perimeters of Polygons Homework & Practice 15.2

Find the perimeter of the polygon

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 49
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the polygon is 29 in.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the polygon is the sum of the length of its sides,
So the sides of the polygon are 9 in, 4 in, 6 in, 10 in,
and the perimeter of the polygon is 9+4+6+10= 29 in.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 50
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the figure is 38 cm.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the figure is the sum of the length of its sides,
So the sides of the figure are 6 cm, 5 cm, 7 cm, 8 cm, 7 cm, 5 cm,
and the perimeter of the figure is 6+5+7+8+7+5= 38 cm.

Question 3.
Square
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 51
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the square is 8 ft.

Explanation:
The length of the square is 2 ft,
and the perimeter of the square is 4a
= 4×2
= 8 ft.
so the perimeter of the square is 8 ft.

Question 4.
Parallelogram
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 52
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the parallelogram is 8m.

Explanation:
The length of the parallelogram is 1 m,
and the breadth of the parallelogram is 3 m,
so the perimeter of the parallelogram is 2(length + breadth)
= 2(1+3)
= 2(4)
= 8 m.

Question 5.
Rhombus
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 53
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the rhombus is 40 ft.

Explanation:
The length of the side of the rhombus is 10 ft,
and the perimeter of the rhombus is 4a
= 4×10
= 40 ft.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 54
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle is 22 in.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the rectangle, we need to know the length and the breadth of the rectangle.
Here, the length of the rectangle is 7 in,
and the breadth is 4 in,
So the perimeter of the rectangle is 2(Length + Breadth)
= 2(7+4)
= 2(11)
= 22 in.

Question 7.
Each side of a triangle is 5 centimeters long. What is the perimeter of the triangle?
Answer:
The perimeter of the triangle is 15 cm.

Explanation:
Given the length of the side of the triangle is 5 cm,
and the perimeter of the triangle is 3a
= 3×5
= 15 cm.

Question 8.
You Be The Teacher
Descartes says that a square will always have a greater perimeter than a triangle because it has more sides. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, Descartes is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, Descartes is correct. As the square has four sides and the perimeter of the square is 4a.
Whereas the triangle has 3 sides and the perimeter of the triangle is 3a.
So the square will always have a greater perimeter than a triangle.

Question 9.
Structure
Draw a pentagon and label its sides so that it has the same perimeter as the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 55
Answer:
The length of the side of the pentagon is 4m.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 7 m,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 3 m,
So the perimeter of the rectangle is 2( length + breadth)
= 2(7+3)
= 2(10)
= 20 m.
Here we have the perimeter of the pentagon which is 20 m,
so we should find the sides of the pentagon,
As we know the perimeter of the pentagon is 5a
5a= 20
a= 20/5
= 4 m.
So the length of the side of the pentagon is 4m.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
An Olympic swimming pool is 82 feet longer than it is wide. What is the perimeter of the swimming pool?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 150
Answer:
The perimeter of the swimming pool is 492 ft.

Explanation:
Given the Olympic swimming pool is 82 feet longer than it’s wide
and the wide is 82 ft,
so the length of the swimming pool is 82+82= 164 ft
the perimeter of the swimming pool is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(164+82)
= 2(246)
= 492 ft.
The perimeter of the swimming pool is 492 ft.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You put painter’s tape around two rectangular windows. The windows are each 52 inches long and 28 inches wide. How much painter’s tape do you need?
Answer:
The painter’s tape 160 inches.

Explanation:
Given the length of the window is 52 inches
and the width of the window is 28 inches
so the perimeter of the window is
p= 2(length + breadth)
= 2(52+28)
= 2(80)
= 160 inches.
So the painter’s tape 160 inches.

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 56
Answer:
737.

Explanation:
On adding 590+147 we will get 737.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 57
Answer:
894.

Explanation:
On adding 636+258 we will get 894

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 58
Answer:
805.

Explanation:
On adding 476+329 we will get 805

Lesson 15.3 Find Unknown Side Lengths

Explore and Grow

You have a map with the three side lengths shown. The perimeter of the map is 20 feet. Describe how you can find the fourth side length of your map without measuring.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 59

Answer:
The fourth side of the map is 4ft.

Explanation:
We can find the value of the fourth side in two methods
First method:
Given the perimeter of the map is 20 feet,
and the sides of the map is 6 ft, 4 ft, 6ft, X ft.
As we know the perimeter of the rectangle is
6+4+6+X= 20 feet
16+X= 20
X= 20- 16
= 4 ft.
Second method:
As we know that the opposite sides of the rectangle are equal, as we know that the length of the side is 4 ft so the other side will also be 4 ft.

Repeated Reasoning
How is finding the unknown side length of a square different from finding the unknown side length of a rectangle?
Answer:
Refer below for a detailed explanation.

Explanation:
To find the unknown side length of the square
if we know the perimeter of the square then
the perimeter of the square is
p= 4a
we will substitute the value of p, on solving we will get the length of the square.
and to find the unknown side length of the rectangle,
we need to know the area or perimeter of the rectangle
and the other side of the rectangle.
so the formula of the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
we will substitute the perimeter value and the other side value
then we can find the length of the rectangle.

Think and Grow: Find Unknown Side Lengths
Example
The perimeter of the trapezoid is 26 feet. Find the unknown side length.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 60
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 61
Write an equation for the perimeter.
Add the known side lengths.
What number plus 16 equals 26?
The unknown side length is ___.
Answer:
K= 10,
The number 16+10 equals 26.
The unknown side length is 10.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the trapezoid is 26 ft,
So the perimeter of the trapezoid is
K+5+6+5= 26
K+16= 26
K= 10.
The number 16+10 equals 26.
The unknown side length is 10.

Example
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 62
The perimeter of the square is 32 centimeters. Find the length of each side of the square.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 63
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 64
Write an equation for the perimeter 4 times what number equals 32?
So, the length of each side is ___.
Answer:
n= 8.
The length of each side is 8 cm.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the square is 32 cm
So to find the sides of the square
4a= 32
a= 32/4
= 8 cm.
So, the length of each side is 8 cm.

Show and Grow

Find the unknown side length.

Question 1.
Perimeter = 34 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 65
y = ___
Answer:
y = 13 in.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter is 34 inches,
and the sides of the figure are 10 in, 7 in, 4 in, y in.
so the perimeter of the figure is
34 in = 10+7+4+y
34 = 21+ y
y = 34 – 21
y = 13.

Question 2.
Perimeter = 20 meters
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 66
j = ___
Answer:
The length of the sides of the square is 5 m.

Explanation:
As we can see the above figure is a square and the perimeter of the square 20 meters,
so the sides of the square are
perimeter = 4a
20 = 4 j
j= 5 m.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the unknown side length.

Question 3.
Perimeter = 19 feet
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 67
y = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the figure is 8 ft.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the figure is 19 feet,
and the length of the sides of the figure is 8 ft, 3 ft, y ft.
so perimeter = 8 ft + 3 ft + y ft
19= 11 ft + y ft
y= 19 ft – 11 ft
= 8 ft.

Question 4.
Perimeter = 26 centimeters
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 68
d = ___
Answer:
d= 4 cm.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the figure is 26 cm,
and the length of the sides of the figure is 10 cm, 5 cm, 7 cm, d cm.
so the perimeter of the figure is
p = 10+5+7+d
26 = 22 + d
d= 26-22
= 4

Question 5.
Perimeter = 30 feet
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 69
k = ___
Answer:
k = 11 ft.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the figure is 30 feet,
and the length of the sides is 5ft, 12 ft, 2 ft, k ft
So the perimeter of the figure is
p = 5 + 12 + 2 + k
30 ft = 19 ft + k
k = 11 ft.

Question 6.
Perimeter = 32 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 70
k = ___
Answer:
k= 4 in.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the figure is 32 inches,
and the lengths of all sides is 10 in, 4 in, 5 in, 4 in, 5 in, k in.
So the perimeter of the figure is
p= 10+4+5+4+5+k
32 in =  28 in + k
k= 4 in.

Question 7.
Perimeter = 8 meters
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 71
y = ___
Answer:
y = 2 m.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the rhombus is 8 feet,
and the length of the side is y m,
So the perimeter of the rhombus is
p = 4a
8 m = 4×y
y = 2 m.

Question 8.
Perimeter = 48 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 72
d = ___
Answer:
d = 8 in.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the Hexagon is 48 inches,
and the length of the sides is d in
So the perimeter of the hexagon is
p = 6 a
48 in = 6 × d in
d= 8 in.

Question 9.
Number Sense
A rectangle has a perimeter of 30 centimeters. The left side is 7 centimeters long. What is the length of the top side?
Answer:
The length of the top side is 8 cm.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the rectangle is 30 cm,
and the length of the left side of the rectangle is 7 cm,
So let the length of the top side be X,
Perimeter of the rectangle is
P = 2 (Length + breadth)
30 = 2 ( 7 cm + X cm)
30 / 2 = 7 cm + X cm
15 = 7 cm + X cm
X = 15 cm – 7 cm
X = 8 cm.
so, the length of the top side is 8 cm.

Question 10.
Writing
A triangle has three equal sides and a perimeter of 21 meters. Explain how to use division to find the side lengths.
Answer:
The length of the side is 7 m.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the triangle is 21 m,
and we need to find the side of the lengths,
so the perimeter of the triangle is
p = 3a
21 m = 3×a
a = 21/3
= 7 m
So the length of the side is 7 m.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton draws and labels the square and rectangle below. The perimeter of the combined shape is 36 feet. Find the unknown side length.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 73
Answer:
The unknown side of the length is 14 ft.

Explanation:
As the perimeter of the combined shape is 36 feet,
and the length of the side of the rectangle is 4 ft, and the other side be X ft
and the perimeter of the rectangle is 36 ft,
so perimeter = 2 (length + breadth)
36 ft  = 2( 4 ft + X ft)
36/2 = 4 ft + X ft
18 = 4 ft + X ft
X= 14 ft.
The unknown side of the length is 14 ft.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

The perimeter of the rectangular vegetable garden is 30 meters. What are the lengths of the other three sides?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 74
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:
Solve:
The lengths of the other three sides are ___, ___, and ___.
Answer:
The lengths of other three sides is 6 m, 9 m, 9 m.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the rectangular vegetable garden is 30 m
as it is in a rectangular shape, so the opposite sides are equal,
and the length of the side of the rectangular vegetable garden is 6m,
let the other side be X m
so the perimeter is
p = 2( length + breadth)
30 m = 2( 6 m+ X m)
30/2 = 6 + X
15 = 6 + X
X= 15 – 6
= 9 m.
So the lengths of other three sides is 6 m, 9 m, 9 m.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
The perimeter of the rectangular zoo enclosure is 34 meters. What are the lengths of the other three sides?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 75
Answer:
The lengths of the other three sides are 12 m, 11 m, 11 m.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the rectangular zoo is 34 m
as it is in rectangular shape, so the opposite sides are equal,
and the length of the side of the rectangular zoo is 12 m,
let the other side be X m
so the perimeter is
p = 2( length + breadth)
34 m = 2( 12 m+ X m)
34/2 = 12 + X
17 = 6 + X
X= 17 – 6
= 11 m.
So the lengths of the other three sides is 12 m, 11 m, 11 m.

Question 13.
The floor of an apartment is made of two rectangles. The Perimeter is 154 feet. What are the lengths of the other three sides?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 76
Answer:
The other length of the side of the small rectangle is 7 ft.
The other length of the side of the big rectangle is 30 ft.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the apartment is 154 feet,
first, we will take the big rectangle,
as the opposite sides of the rectangle are equal and the length of the big rectangle is 30 ft
so the other length is also 30 ft.
as the perimeter of the small rectangle is 38 ft
and the length of the one side of the rectangle is 12 ft
so the other length of the small rectangle is
p = 2(length+breadth)
38 = 2(12 + breadth)
38/2 = 12+ breadth
19= 12 + breadth
breadth= 19 – 12
= 7 ft.
The other length of the side is 7 ft.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You want to make a flower bed in the shape of a pentagon. Two sides of the flower bed are each 7 inches long, and two sides are each 16 inches long. The perimeter is 57 inches. Sketch the flower bed and label all of the side lengths.
Answer:
The length of the other side is 11 ft.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
Given the perimeter of the flower bed shaped pentagon is 57 inches
and the two sides of the flower bed each is 7 inches long
and the other two sides of the flower bed each is 16 inches long
the other side of the flower bed be X
the perimeter of the flower bed is
p = 7+7+16+16+X
57= 46+X
X= 11 in.
The length of the other side is 11 ft.

Find Unknown Side Lengths Homework & Practice 15.3

Find the unknown side length.

Question 1.
Perimeter = 24 feet
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 77
d = ___
Answer:
The length of the unknown side is 8 ft.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the triangle is 24 ft,
and the lengths of the sides is 10 ft, 6 ft, d ft
so the perimeter of the triangle is
p = 10+6+d
24 = 10+6+d
24 = 16+d
d = 24 – 16
=  8 ft.
The length of the unknown side is 8 ft.

Question 2.
Perimeter = 46 inches
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 78
k = ___
Answer:
The length of the unknown side is 15 in.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the figure is 46 inches,
and the lengths of the sides is 13 in, 5 in, 13 in, k in
so the perimeter of the figure is
p = 13+5+13+k
46 = 31+k
46-31 = k
k = 15
=  15 in.
The length of the unknown side is 15 in.

Question 3.
Perimeter = 21 centimeters
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 79
y = ___
Answer:
The length of the unknown side is 7 cm.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the figure is 21 cm,
and the lengths of the sides is 4 cm, 1 cm, 9 cm, y cm
so the perimeter of the figure is
p = 4 cm+ 1 cm+ 9 cm+ y cm
21 = 14+ y
y = 21 – 14
y = 7
=  7 cm.
The length of the unknown side is 7 cm.

Question 4.
Perimeter = 41 meters
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 80
y = ___
Answer:
The length of the unknown side is 8 m.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the figure is 41 m,
and the lengths of the sides is 3 m, 12 m, 10 m, 8 m, y m
so the perimeter of the figure is
p = 3+12+10+8+y
41 = 33 + y
y = 41-33
y = 8
=  8 m.
The length of the unknown side is 8 m.

Question 5.
Perimeter = 12 feet
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 81
d = ___
Answer:
The length of the sides of the triangle is 4 ft.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the triangle is 12 feet,
and the length of the side of the triangle is d ft,
so the perimeter of the triangle is
p = 3 a
12 = 3 × d
d = 12/3
= 4 ft.
The length of the sides of the triangle is 4 ft.

Question 6.
Perimeter = 50 inches
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 82
k = ___
Answer:
The length of the sides of the Hexagon is 4 in.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the Hexagon is 50 inches,
and the length of the side of the Hexagon is k in,
so the perimeter of the hexagon is
p = 5 a
50 = 5 × k
k = 50/5
= 10 in.
The length of the sides of the triangle is 10 in.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Each polygon has equal side lengths that are whole numbers. Which polygon could have a perimeter of 16 centimeters? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 83
Answer:
The length of the sides of the octagon is 2 cm.

Explanation:
In the above three polygons, the second figure is an octagon, which has eight sides.
and the perimeter of the octagon is
p = 8 a
16 cm = 8 a
a = 16 /8
= 2 cm.

Question 8.
Number Sense
The area of a square is 25 square inches. What is its perimeter?
Answer:
The perimeter of the square is 20 inches.

Explanation:
The area of the square is 25 square inches, so
area = s^2
25 = s^2
s= 5 inches
so the perimeter of the square is
p = 4s
= 4×5
= 20 inches.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
The perimeter of the rectangular side walk is 260 meters. What are the lengths of the other three sides?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 84
Answer:
The length of the other three sides is 10 m,10m,120 m.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the rectangular side walk is 260 meters,
and the length of the one side of the side walk is 120 m,
so the perimeter of the rectangular side walk is
p = 2( length + breadth)
260 = 2 ( 120 + breadth)
260/2 = 120 + breadth
130 = 120 + breadth
breadth = 130 – 120
= 10 m.
The length of the other three sides is 10 m,10m,120 m.

Question 10
Modeling Real Life
Two rectangular tables are pushed together. The perimeter is 40 feet. What are the lengths of the other three sides?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 85
Answer:
The other length of the side of the small rectangle is 3 ft.
The other length of the side of the big rectangle is 5 ft.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the apartment is 40 feet,
first, we will take the big rectangle,
as the opposite sides of the rectangle are equal
and the length of the big rectangle is 5 ft
so the other length is also 5 ft.
as the perimeter of the small rectangle is 10 ft
and the length of the one side of the rectangle is 2 ft
so the other length of the small rectangle is
p = 2(length+breadth)
10 = 2(2 + breadth)
10/2 = 2+ breadth
5= 2 + breadth
breadth= 5 – 2
= 3 ft.
The other length of the side is 3 ft.

Review & Refresh

Write the time. Write another way to say the time.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 86
Answer:
06: 48

Explanation:
Another way to say time is 06: 48

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 87
Answer:
03: 24

Explanation:
Another way to say time is 03: 24

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 88
Answer:

Explanation:
Another way to say the time is 11: 48

Lesson 15.4 Same Perimeter, Different Areas

Use color tiles to create two different rectangles that each have a perimeter of 16 units. Then draw your rectangles and label their dimensions. Do the rectangles have the same area? Explain how you know.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 89

Answer:
No, the area of rectangle 1 and rectangle 2 is not the same.

Explanation:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
Given the perimeter of the rectangle is 16 units
The length of rectangle 1 is 5 units
and the breadth of rectangle 1 is 3 units
so the area of rectangle 1 is
area = length × breadth
= 5×3
= 15 square units.
The length of rectangle 2 is 6 units
and the breadth of rectangle 2 is 2 units
so the area of rectangle 2 is
area = length × breadth
= 6×2
= 12 square units.
No, the area of rectangle 1 and rectangle 2 is not the same.

Repeated Reasoning
Draw another rectangle that has the same perimeter but different dimensions. Compare the area of the new rectangle to the rectangles above. What do you notice?
Answer:
No, the area of rectangle 1 and rectangle 2 is not the same.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
The length of rectangle 1 is 4 units
and the breadth of rectangle 1 is 3 units
the perimeter of rectangle 1 is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(4+3)
= 2(7)
= 14 units.
so the area of rectangle 1 is
area = length × breadth
= 4×3
= 12 square units.
The length of rectangle 2 is 5 units
and the breadth of rectangle 2 is 2 units
the perimeter of rectangle 1 is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(5+2)
= 2(7)
= 14 units.
so the area of rectangle 2 is
area = length × breadth
= 5×2
= 10 square units.
No, the area of rectangle 1 and rectangle 2 is not the same.

Think and Grow : Same Perimeter, Different Areas

Example :
Find the perimeter and the area of Rectangle A. Draw a different rectangle that has the same perimeter. Which rectangle has the greater area?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 90
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 91
Rectangle ___ has a greater area.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 20 m
and the area of the rectangle A is 24 m2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 20 m
and the area of the rectangle B is 16 m2
The rectangle A has a greater area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 6m
and the breadth of the rectangle is 4m,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(6 + 4)
= 2(10)
= 20 m.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 6 × 4
= 24 m2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure another rectangle with a length of 8m,
and the breadth is 2m,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(8 + 2)
= 2(10)
= 20 m.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 8×2
= 16 m2
So the rectangle A has a greater area.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the perimeter and area of Rectangle A. Draw a different rectangle that has the same perimeter. Which rectangle has the greater area?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 92
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 93
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___
Rectangle ___ has the greater area.
Answer:The perimeter of the rectangle A is 14 in
and the area of the rectangle A is 10 in2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 14 in
and the area of the rectangle B is 12 in2
The rectangle B has a greater area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 5 in
and the breadth of the rectangle is 2 in,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(5 + 2)
= 2(7)
= 14 in.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 5×2
= 10 in2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure another rectangle with a length of 4 in,
and the breadth is 3 in,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(4 + 3)
= 2(7)
= 14 in.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 4×3
= 12 in2
So the rectangle B has a greater area.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the perimeter and area of Rectangle A. Draw a different rectangle that has the same perimeter. Which rectangle has the greater area?

Question 2.
Rectangle A
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 94
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 95
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___
Rectangle ___ has the greater area.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 22 cm
and the area of the rectangle A is 11 cm2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 22 cm
and the area of the rectangle B is 30 cm2
The rectangle B has a greater area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 10 cm,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 1 cm,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(10 + 1)
= 2(11)
= 22 cm.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 11 × 1
= 11 cm2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure another rectangle with a length of 6 cm,
and the breadth is 5 cm,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(6 + 5)
= 2(11)
= 22 cm.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 6×5
= 30 cm2
So the rectangle B has a greater area.

Question 3.
Rectangle A
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 96
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___

Rectangle B
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 97
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___
Rectangle ___ has the greater area
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 20 m
and the area of the rectangle A is 21 m2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 20 m
and the area of the rectangle B is 24 m2
The rectangle B has a greater area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 7 m,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 3 m,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(7 + 3)
= 2(10)
= 20 m.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 7 × 3
= 21 m2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure another rectangle with a length of 6 m,
and the breadth is 4 m,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(6 + 4)
= 2(10)
= 20 m.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 6×4
= 24 m2
So the rectangle B has a greater area.

Question 4.
MP Structure
Draw a rectangle that has the same perimeter as the one shown, but with a lesser area. What is the area ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 98

Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 26 ft
and the area of the rectangle A is 40 ft2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 26 ft
and the area of the rectangle B is 30 ft2
The rectangle B has a greater area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 5 ft,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 8 ft,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(5 + 8)
= 2(13)
= 26 ft.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 5 × 8
= 40 ft

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure another rectangle with a length of 10 ft,
and the breadth is 3 ft,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(10 + 3)
= 2(13)
= 26 ft.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 10×3
= 30 ft2
So the rectangle A has a greater area.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A paleontologist has 12 meters of twine to rope off a rectangular section of the ground. How long and wide should she make the roped-off section so it has the greatest possible area?
Draw to show:
She should make the roped-off section ___ meters long and ___ meters wide.
Answer:
She should make the roped-off section 4 meters long and 2 meters wide.

Explanation:
Given that a paleontologist has 12 meters of twine to rope off a rectangular section,
so if we take the length as 4 m and width as 2 m then we can get the greatest possible area,
so the area of the rectangular section is
area = length × breadth
= 4 m ×2 m
= 8 m2

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Newton has 16 feet of wood to make a rectangular sandbox. How long and wide should he make the sandbox so it has the greatest possible area?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 99
Answer:
The greatest possible area of the rectangular sandbox is 15 ft2

Explanation:
As Newton has 16 feet of wood to make a rectangular sandbox,
so let the length be 5 ft and the wide be 3 ft to get the greatest possible area,
so the area of the rectangular sandbox is
area = length × breadth
= 5 ft × 3 ft
= 15 ft2
The greatest possible area of the rectangular sandbox is 15 ft2

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You and Newton are building forts. You each have the same length of rope to make a rectangular perimeter for the forton the ground. Your roped-off section is shown. Newton’s section has a greater area than yours. Draw one way Newton could rope off his fort.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 100

Descartes also builds a fort. He has the same length of rope as you to make a perimeter around his fort. Descartes’s roped-off section has a lesser area than yours. Draw one way Descartes could rope off his fort.

Answer:
Refer the below for detailed explanation.

Explanation:
The length of the rope is 7 ft
and the breadth of the rope is 3 ft
the perimeter is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(7+3)
= 2(10)
= 20 ft.
The area of the rectangle is
area= length×breadth
= 7×3
= 21 square feet.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
Let the length of the Newton’s rope is 6 ft
and the breadth of the Newton’s rope is 4 ft
the perimeter is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(6+4)
= 2(10)
= 20 ft.
The area of the rectangle is
area= length×breadth
= 6×4
= 24 square feet.
And here Newton’s area is greater.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

Let the length of the Descarte’s rope is 8 ft
and the breadth of the Descarte’s rope is 2 ft
the perimeter is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(8+2)
= 2(10)
= 20 ft.
The area of the rectangle is
area= length×breadth
= 8×2
= 16 square feet.
And here Descartes area is lesser.

Same Perimeter, Different Areas Homework & Practice 15.4

Question 1.
Find the perimeter and the area of Rectangle A. Draw a different rectangle that has the same perimeter? Which rectangle has the greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 101
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 102
Perimeter = ___
Area = ___
Rectangle __ has the greater area.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 7 cm
and the area of the rectangle A is 24 cm2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 26 ft
and the area of the rectangle B is 30 ft2
The rectangle B has a greater area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 7 cm,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 5 cm,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(7 + 5)
= 2(12)
= 24 cm.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 7 × 5
= 35 cm2.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure rectangle with a length of 6.5 cm,
and the breadth is 5.5 cm,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(6.5 + 5.5)
= 2(12)
= 24 ft.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 6.5×5.5
= 35.75 square feet
So the rectangle B has a greater area.

Question 2.
Patterns
Complete the pattern. Find the area of each rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 103
Each rectangle has the same perimeter. As the area increases, what do you notice about the shape of the rectangle?
Answer:
As the area increases the shape of the figure was changed, we can see the figure was changed from rectangle to square.

Explanation:
As we know that the perimeter of the above figure is the same,
so the perimeter of the above figures is
p = 2 (length + breadth)
= 2 (1 m+9 m)
= 2(10 m)
= 20 m.
So, the perimeter of the above figures is 20 m.
The area of figure 1 is
area = length × breadth
= 1 m × 9 m
= 9 m2.
The area of figure 2 is
= 8m × 2m
= 16 m2.
The area of figure 3 is
= 7m × 3m
= 21 m2.
Let the length of figure 4 be 6m and the breadth be 4m,
The area of figure 4 is
= 6m × 4m
= 24 m2.
Let the length of figure 5 be 5m and the breadth be 5m,
The area of figure 5 is
= 5m × 5m
= 25 m2.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You are making a card with a 36-centimeter ribbon border. How long and wide should you make the card so you have the greatest possible area to write?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 104
Answer:
The length and the breadth of the card is 9 cm.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the card with a ribbon border is 36 cm
so the length of the card is
p =4a
36 = 4a
a= 36/4
= 9 cm.
The length and the breadth of the card is 9 cm.
The area of the card is
a = length×breadth
= 9×9
= 81 square cm.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
A school has two rectangular playgrounds that each have the same perimeter. The first playground is shown. The second has a lesser area than the first. Draw one way the second playground could look.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 105

The school builds another playground. It has the same perimeter as the first. The third playground has a greater area than the first. Draw one way the third playground could look
Answer:

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
2 × 30 = ___
Answer:
60

Explanation:
On multiplying 2 × 30 we will get 60.

Question 6.
6 × 20 = ___
Answer:
120

Explanation:
On multiplying 6 × 20 we will get 120.

Question 7.
3 × 90 = ___
Answer:
270

Explanation:
On multiplying 3 × 90 we will get 270.

Lesson 15.5 Same Area, Different Perimeters

Explore and Grow

Use color tiles to create two different rectangles that each have an area of 18 square units. Then draw your rectangles and label their dimensions. Do the rectangles have the same perimeter? Explain how you know
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 106

Answer:
By comparing the perimeters of both rectangles, we can see that the perimeters are not the same.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
In the above figure, we can see two colored rectangles
the length of rectangle 1 is 6 units
and the breadth of rectangle 1 is 3 units
so the perimeter of rectangle 1 is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(6+3)
= 2(9)
= 18 units
and the area of rectangle 1 is
area= length×breadth
= 6×3
= 18 square units
The length of rectangle 2 is 9 units
and the breadth of rectangle 2 is 2 units
so the perimeter of rectangle 2 is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(9+2)
= 2(11)
= 22 units.
and the area of rectangle 2 is
area= length×breadth
= 9×2
= 18 square units.
By comparing the perimeters of both rectangles, we can see that the perimeters are not the same.

Repeated Reasoning
As the perimeter increases and the area stays the same, what do you notice about the shape of the rectangle?

Think and Grow : Same Area, Different Perimeters

Example
Find the area and the perimeter of Rectangle A. Draw a different rectangle that has the same area. Which rectangle has the lesser perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 107
Area = 2 × 6
= _____
Perimeter = 6 + 2 + 6 + 2
= ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 108
Area = ___ × ___
= ____
Perimeter = ___ + ___ + ___ + ___
= ____
Rectangle ___ has the lesser perimeter.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 16 ft
and the area of the rectangle A is 12 ft2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 14 ft
and the area of the rectangle B is 12 ft2
The rectangle A has a lesser area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 6 ft,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 2 ft,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(6 + 2)
= 2(8)
= 16 ft.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 6 × 2
= 12 ft2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
we can see in the above figure rectangle B and the length be 4 ft,
and the breadth be 3ft,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(4 + 3)
= 2(7)
= 14 ft.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 4×3
= 12 ft2
So the rectangle A has a lesser area.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the area and the perimeter of Rectangle A. Draw a different rectangle that has the same area. Which rectangle has the lesser perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 109
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 110
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Rectangle __ has the lesser perimeter.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 16 ft
and the area of the rectangle A is 12 ft2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 14 ft
and the area of the rectangle B is 12 ft2
The rectangle A has a lesser area.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 6 cm,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 6 cm,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(6 + 6)
= 2(12)
= 24 cm.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 6 × 6
= 36 cm2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure rectangle B and the length be 9 cm,
and the breadth be 4 cm,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(9 + 4)
= 2(13)
= 26 cm.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 9×4
= 36 cm2
So the rectangle A has a lesser perimeter.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area and the perimeter of Rectangle A. Drawa different rectangle that has the same area. Which rectangle has the lesser perimeter?
Answer:

Question 2.
Rectangle A
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 111
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Rectangle B
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 112
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Rectangle ___ has the lesser perimeter.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 24 in
and the area of the rectangle A is 20 in2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 18 in
and the area of the rectangle B is 20 in2
The rectangle B has a lesser perimeter.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 10 in,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 2 in,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(10 + 2)
= 2(12)
= 24 in.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 10 × 2
= 20 in2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure rectangle B and the length be 5 in,
and the breadth be 4 in,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(5 + 4)
= 2(9)
= 18 in.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 5×4
= 20 in2
So the rectangle B has a lesser perimeter.

Question 3.
Rectangle A
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 113
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Rectangle B
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 114
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Rectangle ___ has the lesser perimeter.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 12 m
and the area of the rectangle A is 8 m2
The perimeter of rectangle B is 18 m
and the area of the rectangle B is 8 m2
The rectangle A has a lesser perimeter.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 4 m,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 2 m,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(4 + 2)
= 2(6)
= 12 m.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 4 × 2
= 8 m2

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

we can see in the above figure rectangle B and the length be 8 m,
and the breadth be 1 m,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length + breadth)
= 2(8+ 1)
= 2(9)
= 18 m.
And the area of the rectangle is
area = length × breadth
= 8×1
= 8 m2
So the rectangle A has a lesser perimeter.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
The perimeter of a blue rectangle is 10 feet. The perimeter of a green rectangle is 14 feet. Both rectangles have the same area. Find the area and the dimensions of each rectangle.
Answer:

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the blue rectangle is 10 ft and
the perimeter of the green rectangle is 14 ft

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 40 square patio bricks that are each 1 foot long and 1 foot wide. You want to make a rectangular patio with all of the bricks. How long and wide should you make the patio so it has the least possible perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 115
Draw to show:
You should make the patio ___ feet long and ___ feet wide.
Answer:
You should make the patio 8 feet long and 5 feet wide.
The least possible perimeter is 26 feet.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area
As there are 40 square patio bricks and each brick is 1 foot long and 1 foot wide
so to make a rectangular patio we need
the length of the rectangular patio be 8 feet
and the breadth of the rectangular patio be 5 feet
so the perimeter of the rectangular patio is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(8+5)
= 2(13)
= 26 feet.
The least possible perimeter is 26 feet.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Your friend has 16 square foam tiles that are each 1 foot long and 1 foot wide. He wants to make a rectangular exercise space with all of the tiles. How long and wide should he make the exercise space so it has the least possible perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 116
Answer:
The least possible perimeter is 16 feet.

Explanation:
As there are 16 square foam tiles and each foam tile is 1 foot long and 1 foot wide
so to make an exercise space we need
the length of the exercise space be 4 feet
and the breadth of the exercise space be 4 feet
so the perimeter of the exercise space is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(4+4)
= 2(8)
= 16 feet.
The least possible perimeter is 16 feet.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friend each use fencing to make a rectangular playpen for a puppy. Each pen has the same area. Your pen is shown. Your friend’s pen uses less fencing than yours. Draw one way your friend could make her pen.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 117

Your cousin makes a playpen for a puppy. His pen has the same area as your pen. Your cousin’s pen uses more fencing than yours. Draw one way your cousin could make his pen.
Answer:

 

Same Area, Different Perimeters Homework & Practice 15.5

Question 1.
Find the area and the perimeter of Rectangle A. Drawa different rectangle that has the same area. Which rectangle has the lesser perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 118
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 119
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Rectangle __ has the lesser perimeter.
Answer:
The perimeter of rectangle A is 4 in
and the area of rectangle A is 20 square inches.
It is not possible to draw a rectangle that has the same area and different perimeter.

Explanation:
Given the length of the rectangle is 4 in,
and the breadth of the rectangle is 4 in,
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2(4+4)
= 2(8)
= 16 in.
And the area of the rectangle is
a = length × breadth
= 4 × 4
= 16 square inches.

Question 2.
Structure
The dimensions of a rectangle are 4 feet by 10 feet. Which shape has the same area, but a different perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 120
Answer:
The yellow shape rectangle has the same area and different perimeter.

Explanation:
Given the dimensions of the rectangle are 4 feet by 10 feet
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(4+10)
= 2(14)
= 28 feet.
The area of the rectangle is
area = length×breadth
= 10×4
= 40 square feet.
Here, we can see the yellow rectangle has a length of 8 feet
and the breadth of the rectangle is 5 feet
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2(length+beadth)
= 2(8+5)
= 2(13)
= 26 feet.
and the area of the rectangle is
area = length×breadth
= 8×5
= 40 square feet.

Question 3.
MP Reasoning
The two fields have the same area. Players run one lap around each field. At which field do the players run farther?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 121
Answer:
As the perimeter of field A is greater than field B so in field A the players run father.

Explanation:
Let the length of field A is 10m
and the breadth of field A is 2m
so the perimeter of field A is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(10+2)
= 2(12)
= 24 m.
and the area of field A is
area= length×breadth
= 10×2
= 20 square meters.
Let the length of field B is 5m
and the breadth of field B is 4m
so the perimeter of field B is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(5+4)
= 2(9)
= 18 m.
and the area of field A is
area= length×breadth
= 5×4
= 20 square meters.
As the perimeter of field A is greater than field B so in field A the players run father.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You have 24 square pieces of T-shirt that are each 1 foot long and 1 foot wide. You want to make a rectangular T-shirt quilt with all of the pieces. How long and wide should you make the quilt so it has the least possible perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 122
Answer:
The least possible perimeter is 20 feet.

Explanation:
As there are 24 square pieces of T-shirt and each was 1 foot long and 1 foot wide
so to make a rectangular T-shirt quilt with all of the pieces we need
the length of the rectangular T-shirt quilt be 6 feet
and the breadth of the rectangular T-shirt quilt be 4 feet
so the perimeter of the rectangular T-shirt quilt is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(6+4)
= 2(10)
= 20 feet.
The least possible perimeter is 20 feet.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
You and Descartes each have40 cobblestone tiles to arrange in to a rectangular pathway. Your pathway is shown. Descartes’s pathway has a lesser perimeter than yours. Draw one way Descartes could make his pathway.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 123
Newton also makes a rectangular pathway with 40 cobblestone tiles. His pathway has a greater perimeter than yours. Draw one way Newton could make his pathway.
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 124
Right angles: ___
Pairs of Parallel sides: ___
Answer:
Right angles: 1
Pairs of Parallel sides: 2.

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see there are the right angle is 1, and the pairs of parallel sides are 2.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 125
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ____
Answer:
Right angles: 4.
Pairs of Parallel sides: 2.

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see there are the right angle is 4, and the pairs of parallel sides are 2.

Find Perimeter and Area Performance Task

You and your cousin build a tree house.

Question 1.
The floor of the tree house is in the shape of a quadrilateral with parallel sides that are 4 feet long and 10 feet long. The other 2 sides are equal in length. The perimeter is 24 feet. Sketch the floor and label all of the side lengths.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 151
Answer:
The length of the sides is 6 feet.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the floor is 24 feet
so the length of the floor be 6 feet
as the two other sides are also equal
so the other side length also be 6 feet
and let’s check the perimeter
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(6+6)
= 2(12)
= 24 feet.

Question 2.
Each rectangular wall of the tree house is 5 feet tall. How many square feet of wood is needed for all of the walls?
Answer:

Explanation:

Question 3.
You cut out a door in the shape of a rectangle with sides that are whole numbers. Its area is 8 square feet. What is the height of the door?
Answer:
The height of the rectangular door is 4 feet.

Explanation:
The area of the rectangular shape door is 8 square feet
as the sides of the rectangular door are whole numbers
so the length rectangular door be 4 feet
and the breadth be 2 feet
then we can get the area 8 square feet
let’s check the area
area = length×breadth
= 4×2
= 8 square feet.
So the height of the rectangular door is 4 feet.

Question 4.
You want to paint the floor and walls on the inside of your tree house. The area of the floor is 28 square feet. Each quart of paint covers 100 square feet.
a. How many quarts of paint do you need to buy?
b. Do you have enough paint to paint the outside walls of the tree house? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 152
Answer:
a. 2,800 square feet quarts of paint we need to buy.

Explanation:
a. The area of the floor is 28 square feet and each quart of paint covers 100 square feet, so we need to buy
28×100= 2,800 square feet quarts of paint.

b.

Find Perimeter and Area Activity

Perimeter Roll and Conquer
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 153
Directions:
1. Players take turns rolling two dice.
2. On your turn, draw a rectangle on the board using the numbers on the dice as the side lengths. Your rectangle cannot cover another rectangle.
3. Write an equation tofind the perimeter of the rectangle.
4. If you cannot fit a rectangle on the board, then you lose your turn. Play 10 rounds, if possible.
5. Add all of your rectangles’ perimeters together. The player with the greatest sum wins!
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 154
Answer:

Explanation:

Find Perimeter and Area Chapter Practice

15.1 Understand Perimeter

Find the perimeter of the figure

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 156
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle is 18 cm.

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see the rectangle
with a length of 5 cm,
and the breadth of 4 cm
the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2 (length + breadth)
= 2 (5+4)
= 2(9)
= 18 cm.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 157
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the figure is 26 ft.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the above figure,
we will add the lengths of all sides of the figure
the sides of the above figure is 2 ft, 8 ft, 3 ft, 2 ft, 2 ft, 2 ft, 1 ft, 1 ft, 2 ft, 3 ft
the perimeter of the above figure is
p = 2+8+3+2+2+2+1+1+2+3
= 26 ft.

Question 3.
Draw a figure that has a perimeter of 10 inches.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 158
Answer:

15.2 Find Perimeter of Polygons

Find the perimeter of the polygon

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 159
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the polygon is 33 cm.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the polygon, we will add all the sides of the polygon
so the sides of the polygon are 9 cm, 6 cm, 8 cm, 10 cm
the perimeter of the polygon is
p = 9 cm +6 cm +8 cm +10 cm
= 33 cm.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 160
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the figure is 27 ft.

Explanation:
To find the perimeter of the figure, we will add all the sides of the figure
so the sides of the perimeter is 5 ft, 11 ft, 7 ft, 3 ft, 1 ft
the perimeter of the figure is
p = 5 ft+11 ft+ 7 ft+3 ft+1 ft
= 27 ft.

Question 6.
Parallelogram
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 161
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the parallelogram is 12 m.

Explanation:
Given the length of the parallelogram is 4 m
and the breadth of the parallelogram is 2 m
the perimeter of the parallelogram is
p = 2 (length + breadth)
= 2( 4 m+ 2 m)
= 2(6 m)
= 12 m

Find the perimeter of the polygon

Question 7.
Rhombus
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 162
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the rhombus is 36 cm.

Explanation:
Given the length of the side of the rhombus is 9 cm
and the perimeter of the rhombus is
p = 4a
= 4× 9 cm
= 36 cm.

Question 8.
Rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 163
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle is 26 in.

Explanation:
The length of the rectangle is 5 inch
and the breadth of the rectangle is 8  inch
the perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length + breadth)
= 2( 5 in+ 8 in)
= 2(13 in)
= 26 in.
So the perimeter of the rectangle is 26 in.

Question 9.
Square
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 164
Perimeter = ___
Answer:
The perimeter of the square is 28 ft.

Explanation:
The length of the square is 7 ft
so the perimeter of the square is
perimeter= 4a
= 4×7
= 28 ft.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life 
You want to put lace around the tops of the two rectangular lampshades. How many centimeters of lace do you need?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 165
Answer:
We need 1,120 square centimeters.

Explanation:
The length of the rectangular lampshades is 35 cm
The breadth of the rectangular lampshades is 32 cm
and the area of the rectangular lampshades is
area= length×breadth
= 32×35
= 1,120 square cm.
So 1,120 square centimeters of lace you need.

15.3 Find Unknown Side Lengths

Find the unknown side length.

Question 11.
Perimeter = 22 feet
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 166
d = ____
Answer:
The length of the other side is 9 ft.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the above figure is 22 feet
and the length of the sides of the figure is 6 ft, 7 ft, d ft
so the perimeter of the figure is
p = 6 ft+ 7 ft+ d ft
22  ft = 13 ft + d ft
d = 22 ft – 13 ft
= 9 ft.
So, the length of the other side is 9 ft.

Question 12.
Perimeter = 31 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 167
k = ___
Answer:
The length of the other side is 5 in.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the above figure is 31 inches
and the length of the sides of the figure is 10 in, 4 in, 12 in and k in.
so the perimeter of the figure is
p = 10 in+ 4 in+ 12 in+k in
31 in = 26 in + k in
k = 31 in – 26 in
= 5 in.
So, the length of the other side is 5 in.

Question 13.
Perimeter = 34 meters
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 168
y = ___
Answer:
The length of the other side is 7 m.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the above figure is 34 meters
and the length of the sides of the figure is 11 m, 8 m, 2 m, 1 m, 5 m, y m.
so the perimeter of the figure is
p = 11 m+ 8 m+ 2 m+ 1 m+ 5 m+ y m
34 m = 27 m + y m
y = 34 m – 27 m
= 7 m.
So, the length of the other side is 7 m.

Find the unknown side length.

Question 14.
Perimeter = 24 feet
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 169
k = ___
Answer:
The length of the sides of the triangle is 8 feet.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the triangle is 24 feet
and the perimeter of the triangle is
p = 3a
24 feet = 3a
a= 24/3
= 8 feet.
So, the length of the sides of the triangle is 8 feet.

Question 15.
Perimeter = 16 meters
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 170
y = ___
Answer:
The length of the sides of the square is 4 meters.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the triangle is 16 meters
and the perimeter of the triangle is
p = 4a
16 meters = 4a
a= 16/4
= 4 meters.
So, the length of the sides of the triangle is 4 meters.

Question 16.
Perimeter = 30 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 171
d = ___
Answer:
The length of the sides of the pentagon is 6 inches.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the pentagon is 30 inches
and the perimeter of the pentagon is
p = 5a
30 inches = 5a
d= 30/5
= 6 inches.
So, the length of the sides of the pentagon is 6 inches.

Question 17.

Number Sense
A rectangle has a perimeter of 38 centimeters. The left side length is 10 centimeters. What is the length of the top side?
Answer:
The length of the top side is 9 cm.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the rectangle is 38 cm and
the left side length is 10 cm
Let the length of the top side be X, so
perimeter of the rectangle is
p = 2( length +breadth)
38 = 2(10+X)
38/2 = 10 + X
19 = 10 + X
X = 19 – 10
= 9 cm.
So the length of the top side is 9 cm.

15.4 Same Perimeter, Different Area

Question 18.
Find the perimeter and area of Rectangle A. Drawa different rectangle that has the same perimeter. Which rectangle has the greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 172
Perimeter = ____
Area = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 173
Perimeter = ____
Area = ___
Rectangle ___ has the greater area.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 14 m
The area of the rectangle A is 10 square meters
The perimeter of the rectangle B is 14 m
The area of the rectangle B is 12 square meters
The rectangle B has greater area.

Explanation:
The length of the rectangle is 5m
and the breadth of the rectangle is 2m
the perimeter of the rectangle is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(5+2)
= 2(7)
= 14 m
and the area of the rectangle is
area = length×breadth
= 2×5
= 10 square meters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area img 27

In the above image, we can see the length of the rectangle is 4 m
and the breadth of the rectangle is 3 m
so the perimeter of the rectangle is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(4+3)
= 2(7)
= 14 m.
and the area of the rectangle is
area = length×breadth
= 4×3
= 12 square meters.
The rectangle B has greater area.

Question 19.
Patterns
Each Rectangle has the same perimeter. Are the areas increasing or decreasing ? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 174
Answer:
As we can see in the above images the length of the images was increasing one by one and the breadth is decreasing, so the areas increasing or decreasing will depend upon the breadth of the rectangle. So, if the breadth is also increasing then the area will also be increasing. And if the breadth was decreasing then the area will also be decreasing.

15.5 Same Area, Different Perimeters

Question 20.
Find the area and the perimeter of Rectangle A. Drawa different rectangle that has the same area. Which rectangle has the lesser perimeter?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 175
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 176
Area = ___
Perimeter = ___
Rectangle ___ has the lesser perimeter.
Answer:
The perimeter of the rectangle A is 14 m
The area of the rectangle A is 10 square meters
The perimeter of the rectangle B is 14 m
The area of the rectangle B is 12 square meters
The rectangle B has greater area.

Explanation:
The length of the rectangle is 10 in
and the breadth of the rectangle is 5 in
the perimeter of the rectangle is
p= 2(length+breadth)
= 2(10+5)
= 2(15)
= 30 in
and the area of the rectangle is
area = length×breadth
= 10×5
= 50 square inches.

Question 21.
Reasoning
The two dirt-bike parks have the same area. Kids ride dirt bikes around the outside of each park. At which park do the kids ride farther ? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 177
Answer:
As the length of the park B is longer, so at the park B kids rid farther than the park A.

Find Perimeter and Area Cumulative practice 1 – 15

Question 1.
A mango has a mass that is 369 grams greater than the apple. What is the mass of the mango?
A. 471 grams
B. 369 grams
C. 267 grams
D. 461 grams
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 178
Answer:
B.

Explanation:
The mass of the mango is 369 grams greater than apple

Question 2.
Which term describes two of the shapes shown, but all three of the shapes?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 179
A. polygon
B. rectangle
C. square
D. parallelogram
Answer:
B, C, D.

Explanation:
In the above figures, we can see the parallelogram and the square. As the square is also known as a rectangle so we will choose option B also.

Question 3.
A rectangular note card has an area of 35 square inches. The length of one of its sides is 7 inches. What is the perimeter of the note card?
A. 5 inches
B. 24 inches
C. 84 inches
D. 12 inches
Answer:
The breadth of the rectangular note card is 24 inches.

Explanation:
The area of the rectangular note card is 35 square inches and the length of one of its sides is 7 inches
so the breadth of the rectangular note card is
area = length × breadth
35 = 7 × breadth
breadth = 35/7
= 5 inches.
The perimeter of the rectangular note card is
p = 2(length+breadth)
= 2(7+5)
= 2(12)
= 24 inches.
The breadth of the rectangular note card is 24 inches.

Question 4.
How many minutes are equivalent to4 hours?
A. 400 minutes
B. 240 minutes
C. 24 minutes
D. 40 minutes
Answer:
B

Explanation:
The number of minutes is equivalent to 4 hours is
4× 60= 240 minutes.

Question 5.
A balloon artist has 108 balloons. He has 72 white balloons, and an equal number of red, blue, green, and purple balloons. How many purple balloons does he have?
A. 36
B. 180
C. 9
D. 32
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 180
Answer:
9 balloons.

Explanation:
As a balloon artist has 108 balloons and he has 72 white balloons
and the remaining balloons are 108 – 72= 36 balloons
and an equal number of red, blue, green, and purple balloons
which means 36 balloons are equally divided by 4 colors of balloons, so
36÷4 = 9 balloons.
So the purple balloons are 9.

Question 6.
Which statements about the figures are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 181
Answer:
The shapes have different perimeters.
The shapes have the same area.

Explanation:
The length of the side of the square is 6 in,
and the perimeter of the square is
p = 4a
= 4×6 in
= 24 in
The area of the square is a^2
= 6 in×6 in
36 in^2.

Question 7.
The graph show many students ordered each lunch option.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 182
Part A How many students ordered lunch?
Part B Choose a lesser value for the key. How will the graph change?
Answer:
Part A: 60 students ordered lunch.
Part B: Turkey hot dog has a lesser value.

Explanation:
Part A:
The number of students who ordered lunch is
the grilled chicken was ordered by 21 students
Turkey hot dog was ordered by 9 students
A peanut butter and jelly sandwich was ordered by 12 students
the salad bar was ordered by 18 students
so the number of students who ordered lunch is
21+9+12+18= 60 students.

Part B:
The turkey hot dog was ordered by 9 students which is a lesser value.

Question 8.
Find the sum
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 183
Answer:
935

Explanation:
The sum of the above given numbers is 935

Question 9.
What is the perimeter of the figure?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 184
A. 26 units
B. 22 units
C. 20 units
D. 16 unit
Answer:
B

Explanation:
The sides of the figure is 2,4,1,2,1,1,2,2,1,1,2,1,1,1
and the perimeter of the figure is
p = 2+4+1+2+1+1+2+2+1+1+2+1+1+1
= 22 units.

Question 10.
Which bar graph correctly shows the data?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 185
Answer:
Graph B.

Explanation:
Graph B shows the correct graph data.

Question 11.
Which polygons have at least one pair of parallel sides?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 186
Answer:
Red color polygon.

Explanation:
The red color polygon has one pair of parallel sides, as it is a trapezoid.

Question 12.
The perimeter of the polygon is 50 yards. What is the missing side length?
A. 41 yards
B. 10 yards
C. 91 yards
D. 9 yards
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 187
Answer:
The missing side length is 9 yards.

Explanation:
Given the perimeter of the polygon is 50 yards
Let the missing side length be X yd
and the lengths of the sides of the polygon is 15 yds, 6 yds, 13 yds, 7 yds, and X yd,
So the perimeter of the polygon is
p = 15 yd+6 yd+13 yd+ 7 yd+ X yd
50 yards = 41 yards + X Yards
X = 9 yards.
So the missing side length is 9 yards.

Question 13.
Which line plot correctly shows the data?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 188
Answer:
A

Explanation:
Option A line plot shows the correct data.

Question 14.
Your friend is asked to draw a quadrilateral with four right angles. She says it can only be a square. Is she correct?
A. Yes, there is no other shape it can be.
B. No, it could also be a rectangle.
C. No, it could also be a hexagon.
D. No, it could also be a trapezoid.
Answer:
Yes, there is no other shape it can be.

Explanation:
Yes, she is correct. There is no other shape than the square with four right angles.

Question 15.
Which numbers round to480 when rounded to the nearest ten?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 189
Answer:
484, 480, 478

Explanation:
The numbers that are rounded to 480 to the nearest ten is 484, 480, 478.

Find Perimeter and Area Cumulative Steam Performance Task 1 – 15

Question 1.
Use the Internet or some other resource to learn more about crested geckos.
a. Write three interesting facts about geckos.
b. Geckos need to drink water every day. Is this amount of water milliliters or liters? Explain.
c. Geckos can live in a terrarium. Is the capacity of this terrarium milliliters liters measured in or?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 190
Answer:
a) The three interesting facts about geckos are:
i) Geckos are a type of lizards and their toes help them to stick to any surface except Teflon.
ii) Gecko’s eyes are 350 times more sensitive than human eyes to light.
iii) Some of the pieces of Geckos have no legs and look more like snakes.

b) The number of water Geckos will have is in milliliters only as Geckos will not often drink water.

c)Yes, geckos can live in a terrarium and the capacity of this terrarium is between 120 liters to 200 liters.

Question 2.
Your class designs a terrarium for a gecko.
a. The base of the terrarium is a hexagon. Each side of the hexagon is 6 inches long. What is the perimeter of the base?
b. The terrarium is 20 inches tall. All of the side walls are made of glass. How many square inches of glass is needed for the terrarium?
c. Another class designs a terrarium with a rectangular base. All of its sides are equal in length. The base has the same perimeter as the base your class designs. What is the perimeter of the base? What is the area?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 191
Answer:
a. 36 inches.
b.

Explanation:

a.
Given the length of the sides of the hexagon is 6 inches, and
the perimeter of the hexagon is
p = 6a
= 6 × 6
= 36 inches.

Question 3.
An online store sells crested geckos. The store owner measures the length of each gecko in the store. The results are shown in the table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 192
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 193
a. Use the table to complete the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area 194
b. How many geckos did the store owner measure?
c. What is the difference in the lengths of the longest gecko and the shortest gecko?
d. How many geckos are shorter than 6\(\frac{1}{4}\) inches?
e.The length of a gecko’s tail is about 3 inches. How would the line plot change if the store owner measured the length of each gecko without its tail?
Answer:
b. The number of geckos the store owner measures is 24.

d. 12

Explanation:

a.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area

b. The number of geckos the store owner measures is 24.

d. The number of geckos shorter than 6\(\frac{1}{4}\) inches are 12.

Conclusion:

We hope that the details provided here regarding Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area is helpful to the students for better preparation. One who wants to become a pro in maths can download BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 15 Find Perimeter and Area Answers in pdf format. Bookmark our site to get the answers for other chapters of grade 3.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents

Download Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Percents Pdf for free of cost. If you are willing to be perfect in all concepts and math skills, then you must follow the syllabus given here. To score the best marks in the exam, students must learn all the conceptualized lessons on Simple Interest, Discounts, and also the Subject knowledge which will be helpful to improve practical skills.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents helps you to cross all the hurdle times while studying. You can easily grasp various concepts and problems on all the concepts given below. Get all the skills and different methods of solving problems easily and quickly. It helps to solve real-life calculations in a very dignified and smooth manner. Follow the below sections to get BIM Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents problems and solutions.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Percents

Big ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 percents pdf is given here. It gives the most accurate answers to all the problems which are related to the given chapter. This chapter of percents contains various topics like Fractions, Decimals and Percents, The Percent Proportion, The Percent Equation, Percents of Increase and Decrease, Discounts and Markups, Simple Interest, and so on.

With the help of Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Solution Key Chapter 6 Percents, you can prepare the timetable. With the help of the timetable prepared, you can easily manage your syllabus and include all the topics into it as per the time remaining. In the further sections, you will know all the concepts that are present in Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents. Check out all the information and kickstart your preparation.

STEAM Video/Performance Task

Getting Ready for Chapter 6

Lesson 1 : Fractions, Decimals, and Percents

Lesson 2 : The Percent Proportion

Lesson 3 : The Percent Equation

Lesson 4 : Percents of Increase and Decrease

Lesson 5 : Discounts and Markups

Lesson 6 : Simple Interest

Percents Connecting Concepts

STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Tornado!
More tornadoes occur each year in the United States than in any other country. How can you use a percent to describe the portion of tornadoes in the United States that occur in your state?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 1
Watch the STEAM Video “Tornado!” Then answer the following questions.
1. The map below shows the average annual number of tornadoes in each state. Which regions have the most tornadoes? the fewest tornadoes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 2
2. Robert says that only Alaska, Hawaii, and Rhode Island average less than 1 tornado per year. What percent of states average more than 1 tornado per year?

Performance Task

Tornado Alley
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given information about the average annual numbers of tornadoes in several states over a 25-year period. For example:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 3
You will be asked to solve various percent problems about tornadoes. Why is it helpful to know the percent of tornadoes that occur in each state?

Getting Ready for Chapter 6

Chapter Exploration
Work with a partner. Write the percent of the model that is shaded. Then write the percent as a decimal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 4

Answer : The Percent and decimal for the given models are
1. percent = 30%, decimal = 0.3
2. percent = 100%, decimal = 1
3. percent = 33%, decimal = 0.33
4. percent = 50%, decimal = 0.5
5. percent = 40%, decimal = 0.4
6. percent = 64%, decimal = 0.64
7. percent = 60%, decimal = 0.6

Explanation:
All the models given here are 10 by 10 grid forming a Square of 100 equal sections.
This entire square represents a whole and the shaded part is fraction.
Each of these shaded squares represents 1/100. So by using this data we have ,
1.    =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{30}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{30}{100}\) = 30%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.3

2.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{100}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{100}{100}\) = 100%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 1

3.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{33}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{33}{100}\) = 33%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.33

4.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{50}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{50}{100}\) = 50%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.5

5.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{40}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{40}{100}\) = 40%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.4

6.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{64}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{64}{100}\) = 64%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.64

7.  =
From the shaded part and the whole, we have the fraction of \(\frac{60}{100}\),
Then the percent will be \(\frac{60}{100}\) = 60%,
By rewriting it in decimal form we have 0.6

8. WRITE A PROCEDURE Work with a partner. Write a procedure for rewriting a percent as a decimal. Use examples to justify your procedure.

Answer:
Let us say that the fraction be \(\frac{44}{100}\),
Then its percentage will be 44%,
To rewrite it as decimal, we divide 44 by 100 we get 0.44 (a decimal number). So, to convert from percent to decimal divide by 100 and remove the “%” sign.
We get 0.44 as decimal of 44%.

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
percent of change
percent of decrease
discount
percent of increase
percent error
markup

Answer:
percent of change:
Percentage Change is all about comparing old values to new values.

percent of decrease:
percent of decrease is a measure of percent change, which is the extent to which something loses value. or
A negative percent of change indicates a decrease from the original value to the second value.

discount: A reduction of price  is known as discount .Sometimes discounts are in percent, such as a 10% discount, and then you need to do a calculation to find the price reduction.

percent of increase :
Percent increase is a measure of percent change, which is the extent to which something gains value. or
A positive percent of change indicates an increase from the original value to the second value.

percent error :
Percent error is the difference between estimated value and the actual value in comparison to the actual value and is expressed as a percentage.

markup:
Markup is all about how much a retailer increases the price over what they paid for it to buy the product or item in order to which is how they make money to pay for all their costs and hopefully make a profit.

Lesson 6.1 Fractions, Decimals, and Percents

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Numbers in Different Forms
Work with a partner. Determine which number is greater. Explain your method.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 1
Answer:
a. 7% sales tax is greater than 5% sales tax
b. 0.37 cup of flour is greater than 0.33 cup of flour
c. 0.625 inch wrench is greater than 0.375 inch wrench
d. 12.6 dollars are greater than 12.56 dollars
e. 5.83 fluid ounces is greater than 5.6 fluid ounces

Explanation:
a. 7% sales tax or \(\frac{1}{20}\) sales tax
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{20}\) as  0.05 in decimal form,
To get get the percent , multiply 100 to 0.05, then we get 5%.
So, \(\frac{1}{20}\) can be write as 5%,
Finally, by comparing two values 7% sales tax is greater than 5% sales tax

b. 0.37 cup of flour or \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup for flour
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{3}\) as  0.33 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 0.37 cup of flour is greater than 0.33 cup of flour.

c. \(\frac{5}{8}\) inch wrench or 0.375 inch wrench
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{8}\) by dividing 5 by 8, we have  0.625 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 0.625 inch wrench is greater than 0.375 inch wrench.

d. \(12\) \({\Large\frac{3}{5}}\) dollars or 12.56 dollars
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite fraction\(\frac{63}{5}\) by dividing 63 by 5, we have 12.6 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 12.6 dollars are greater than 12.56 dollars

e.  \(5\) \({\Large\frac{5}{6}}\) fluid ounces or 5.6 fluid ounces
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite fraction \(\frac{35}{6}\)  by dividing 35 by 6, we have 5.83 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 5.83 fluid ounces is greater than 5.6 fluid ounces

 

EXPLORATION 2

Work with a partner and follow the steps below.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 2

  • Write five different numbers on individual slips of paper. Include at least one decimal, one fraction, and one percent.
  • On a separate sheet of paper, create an answer key that shows your numbers written from least to greatest.
  • Exchange slips of paper with another group and race to order the numbers from least to greatest. Then exchange answer keys to check your orders.

Answer: 78%, 0.95, \(\frac{83}{45}\), 6, 21

Explanation:
Let the numbers be 6,  21, 0.95, \(\frac{83}{45}\), 78%
In order to put them in an ascending order we have to calculate the fraction, percent, decimal in their respective form, So Fraction \(\frac{83}{45}\) can be rewrite as 1.84 in decimal form
Then 78% can be rewrite as 0.78 in decimal form,
As we can see 0.78 is less than 0.95 , 0.95 is less than \(\frac{83}{45}\),\(\frac{83}{45}\) is less than 6, 6 is less than 21,
Finally, we have the ascending order as 78%, 0.95, \(\frac{83}{45}\), 6, 21.

Try It

Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 1.
39%
Answer: 0.39

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 39% in decimal form is 0.39

Question 2.
12. 6 %
Answer: 0.126

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 12.6% in decimal form is 0.126

Question 3.
0.05
Answer: 5%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.05 can be rewrite as 5%

Question 4.
1.25
Answer:  125%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 1.25 can be rewrite as 125%

Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 5.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)
Answer: 0.625 or 62.5%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{5}{8}\) we have to divide 5 by 8 ,
Then, we get 0.625,
To get the percent of 0.625 multiply by 100 , it will be 62.5%
So, \(\frac{5}{8}\) can be written as  0.625 or 62.5%

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{6}\)
Answer: 0.166 or 16.6%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{1}{6}\) we have to divide 1 by 6 ,
Then, we get 0.166,
To get the percent of 0.166 multiply by 100 , it will be 16.6%
So, \(\frac{1}{6}\) can be written as  0.166 or 16.6%

Question 7.
\(\frac{11}{3}\)
Answer:  3.66 or 366%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{11}{3}\) we have to divide 11 by 3 ,
Then, we get 3.66,
To get the percent of 3.66 multiply by 100 , it will be 366%
So, \(\frac{11}{3}\) can be written as  3.66 or 366%

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{1000}\)
Answer: 0.003 or 0.3%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{3}{1000}\) we have to divide 3 by 1000 ,
Then, we get 0.003,
To get the percent of 0.003 multiply by 100 , it will be 0.3%
So, \(\frac{3}{1000}\) can be written as  0.003 or 0.3%

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

CONVERTING BETWEEN PERCENTS AND DECIMALS Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 9.
46%
Answer: 0.46

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 46% in decimal form is 0.46

Question 10.
\(66 . \overline{6} \%\)
Answer: \(0 .66 \overline{6}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(66 . \overline{6} \%\) in decimal form is \(0 .66 \overline{6}\)

Question 11.
0.18
Answer: 18%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.18 can be rewrite as 18%

Question 12.
\(2 . \overline{3}\)
Answer: \(233 . \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, \(2 . \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(233 . \overline{3} \%\)

WRITING FRACTIONS AS DECIMALS AND PERCENTS Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 13.
\(\frac{7}{10}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.7, percent = 70%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{10}\) as  0.7 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.7 can be rewrite as 70%
So, \(\frac{7}{10}\) in decimal = 0.7, percent = 70%

Question 14.
\(\frac{5}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0 .\overline{5}\), percent = \(55 . \overline{5} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{9}\) as  \(0 .\overline{5}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(0 .\overline{5}\) can be rewrite as \(55 . \overline{5} \%\)
So, \(\frac{5}{9}\) in decimal = \(0 .\overline{5}\), percent = \(55 . \overline{5} \%\)

Question 15.
\(\frac{7}{2000}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.0035, percent = 0.35%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{2000}\) as  0.0035 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.0035 can be rewrite as 0.35%
So, \(\frac{7}{2000}\) in decimal = 0.0035, percent = 0.35%

Question 16.
\(\frac{17}{15}\)
Answer: decimal = \(1.1 \overline{3}\) , percent = \(113 . \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{17}{15}\) as \(1.1 \overline{3}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(1.1 \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(113 . \overline{3} \%\)
So, \(\frac{17}{15}\) in decimal = \(1.1 \overline{3}\), percent = \(113 . \overline{3} \%\)

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 17.
An astronaut spends 53% of the day working, 0.1 of the day eating, \(\frac{3}{10}\) of the day sleeping, and the rest of the day exercising. Order the events by duration from least to greatest. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 3
Answer:  An astronaut spends the day 7% by exercising, 10% by eating, 30% by sleeping, 53% by working.

Explanation:
An astronaut spends 53% of the day working,
0.1 of the day eating, in terms of percent we can write it as 10%,
\(\frac{3}{10}\) of the day sleeping, in decimals we ca rewrite as 0.3 and in percent it will be 30%,
Let us say that the whole day be 100% , The sum of the works he is doing in percent we get,
53% + 10% + 30% = 93%, and
Given that the rest of the day exercising, so 100% – 93% = 7%, A whole day is completed with these works.
To put them in Order the events by duration from least to greatest, we have , 7%, 10%, 30%, 53%.
An astronaut spends the day 7% by exercising, 10% by eating, 30% by sleeping, 53% by working.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
A band plays one concert in Arizona, one concert in California, and one concert in Georgia. In California, the band earned \(\frac{3}{2}\) the profit that they earned in Arizona. Of the total profit earned by the band, 32% is earned in Arizona. How many times more money did the band earn at the most profitable concert than at the least profitable concert? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Explanation:

Fractions, Decimals, and Percents Homework & Practice 6.1

Review & Refresh

Find the missing dimension. Use the scale 1 : 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 4
Answer: The model height of the Figure skater is 4.5inches and The Actual length of pipe is 75 feet .

Explanation:
Given , to use the scale oof 1 : 15 , Let the model height  be x
The model height of Figure skater is \(\frac{1}{15}\) = \(\frac{x}{67.5}\)
15x = 67.5
x = \(\frac{67.5}{15}\)
x = 4.5
So , The model height of the Figure skater is 4.5inches

Let the Actual length is y
The Actual length of pipe is \(\frac{1}{15}\) = \(\frac{5}{y}\)
y = 15 × 5 = 75
So , The Actual length of pipe is 75 feet .

Simplify the expression.
Question 3.
2(3p – 6) + 4p
Answer: p = 1.2

Explanation:
Let us say that whole expression is equal to 0
2(3p – 6) + 4p = 0
[2(3p) – 2(6)] + 4p = 0
6p – 12 + 4p = 0
10p – 12 = 0
p = 12/10 = 1.2
So, p = 1.2

Question 4.
5n – 3(4n + 1)
Answer: n = -0.42

Explanation:
Let us say that whole expression is equal to 0
5n – 3(4n + 1) = 0
5n – [ 3(4n) + 3(1) ] = 0
5n – 12n – 3 = 0
– 3 – 7n = 0
7n = – 3
n = -3/7 = -0.42
So, n = -0.42

Question 5.
What is the solution of 2n – 4 > – 12?
A. n < – 10
B. n < – 4
C. n > – 2
D. n > – 4
Answer:  D . n > -4

Explanation:
Given, 2n – 4 > – 12
add 4 in both sides,
2n – 4 + 4 > – 12 + 4
2n > – 8
divide both sides by 2
2n/2 > -8/2
n > – 4 .

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
COMPARING NUMBERS IN DIFFERENT FORMS Determine which number is greater. Explain your method. (See Exploration 1, p. 235.)
Question 6.
4\(\frac{2}{5}\) tons or 4.3 tons
Answer: 4\(\frac{2}{5}\) tons is greater than 4.3 tons

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite fraction \(\frac{22}{5}\)  by dividing 22 by 5, we have 4.4 in decimal form
Finally, by comparing two values 4\(\frac{2}{5}\) tons is greater than 4.3 tons

Question 7.
82% success rate or \(\frac{5}{6}\) success rate
Answer: \(\frac{5}{6}\) success rate is greater than 82% success rate

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\)  as  0.833 in decimal form,
To get get the percent , multiply 100 to 0.833, then we get 83.3%.
So, \(\frac{5}{6}\)  can be write as 83.3%,
Finally, by comparing two values \(\frac{5}{6}\) success rate is greater than 82% success rate

CONVERTING BETWEEN PERCENTS AND DECIMALS Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 8.
26%
Answer: 0.26

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 26% in decimal form is 0.26

Question 9.
0.63
Answer: 63%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.63 can be rewrite as 63%

Question 10.
9%
Answer: 0.09

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 9% in decimal form is 0.09

Question 11.
0.6
Answer: 60%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.6 can be rewrite as 60%

Question 12.
44.7%
Answer: 0.447

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 44.7% in decimal form is 0.447

Question 13.
55%
Answer: 0.55

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 55% in decimal form is 0.55

Question 14.
\(39 . \overline{2} \%\)
Answer: \(0.39 \overline{2}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(39 . \overline{2} \%\) in decimal form is \(0.39 \overline{2}\)

Question 15.
3.554
Answer: 355.4%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 3.554  can be rewrite as 355.4%

Question 16.
123%
Answer: 1.23

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 123% in decimal form is 1.23

Question 17.
0.041
Answer: 4.1%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.041 can be rewrite as 4.1%

Question 18.
0.122
Answer: 12.2%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.122 can be rewrite as 12.2%

Question 19.
\(49 . \overline{92} \%\)
Answer: \(0.49 \overline{92}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(49 . \overline{92} \%\) in decimal form is \(0.49 \overline{92}\)

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend writes \(49 . \overline{8} \%\) as a decimal. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 5
Answer: He wrote the decimal for \(4. \overline{8} \%\) instead of \(49 . \overline{8} \%\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(49 . \overline{8} \%\)  in decimal form is \(0.49 \overline{8}\)

WRITING FRACTIONS AS DECIMALS AND PERCENTS Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 21.
\(\frac{29}{100}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.29, percent = 29%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{29}{100}\) as  0.29 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.29 can be rewrite as 29%
So, \(\frac{29}{100}\) in decimal = 0.29, percent = 29%

Question 22.
\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.75, percent = 75%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite\(\frac{3}{4}\) as  0.75 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.75 can be rewrite as 75%
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) in decimal = 0.75, percent = 75%

Question 23.
\(\frac{7}{8}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.875, percent = 87.5%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{8}\) as  0.875 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.875 can be rewrite as 87.5%
So, \(\frac{7}{8}\) in decimal = 0.875, percent = 87.5%

Question 24.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0. \overline{6}\), percent = \(66. \overline{6} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{2}{3}\) as \(0. \overline{6}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then\(0. \overline{6}\) can be rewrite as \(66. \overline{6} \%\)
So, \(\frac{2}{3}\) in decimal =\(0. \overline{6}\), percent = \(66. \overline{6} \%\)

Question 25.
\(\frac{7}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.77, percent = 77.7%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite\(\frac{7}{9}\) as  0.77 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.77 can be rewrite as 77.7%
So, \(\frac{7}{9}\) in decimal = 0.77, percent = 77.7%

Question 26.
\(\frac{12}{5}\)
Answer: decimal = 2.4, percent = 240%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{12}{5}\) as  2.4 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 2.4 can be rewrite as 240%
So, \(\frac{12}{5}\) in decimal =2.4, percent = 240%

Question 27.
\(\frac{9}{2}\)
Answer: decimal = 4.5, percent = 450%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite\(\frac{9}{2}\) as 4.5 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 4.5 can be rewrite as 450%
So, \(\frac{9}{2}\) in decimal = 4.5, percent = 450%

Question 28.
\(\frac{1}{1000}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.0010, percent = 0.10%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{1000}\) as  0.0010 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.0010 can be rewrite as 0.10%
So, \(\frac{1}{1000}\) in decimal = 0.0010, percent = 0.10%

Question 29.
\(\frac{17}{6}\)
Answer: decimal = \(2.8 \overline{3}\), percent = \(283 . \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{17}{6}\) as \(2.8 \overline{3}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then\(2.8 \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(283 . \overline{3} \%\)
So, \(\frac{17}{6}\) in decimal = \(2.8 \overline{3}\), percent = \(283 . \overline{3} \%\)

Question 30.
\(\frac{3}{11}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.27, percent = 27%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{3}{11}\) as  0.27 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.27 can be rewrite as 27%
So, \(\frac{3}{11}\) in decimal = 0.27, percent = 27%

Question 31.
\(\frac{1}{750}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0.001 \overline{3}\), percent =\(0.1 \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{1}{750}\) as  \(0.001 \overline{3}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(0.001 \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(0.1 \overline{3} \%\)
So, \(\frac{1}{750}\) in decimal = \(0.001 \overline{3}\), percent = \(0.1 \overline{3} \%\)

Question 32.
\(\frac{22}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = \(2. \overline{4}\), percent = \(244 . \overline{4} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{22}{9}\) as  \(2. \overline{4}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(2. \overline{4}\) can be rewrite as \(244 . \overline{4} \%\)
So, \(\frac{22}{9}\) in decimal = \(2. \overline{4}\), percent = \(244 . \overline{4} \%\)

PRECISION Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 33.
66.1%, 0.66, \(\frac{2}{3}\), 0.667
Answer: 0.66, 66.1%, \(\frac{2}{3}\), 0.667

Explanation:
In order to put them in an ascending order we have to calculate the fraction, percent, decimal in their respective form, So Fraction \(\frac{2}{3}\) can be rewrite as \(0. \overline{6}\) in decimal form
Then 66.1% can be rewrite as 0.661 in decimal form,
As we can see 0.66 is less than 66.1% , 66.1% is less than \(\frac{2}{3}\), \(\frac{2}{3}\)  is less than 0.667,
Finally, we have the ascending order as 0.66, 66.1%, \(\frac{2}{3}\), 0.667.

Question 34.
\(\frac{2}{9}\), 21%, \(0.2 \overline{1}\), \(\frac{11}{50}\)
Answer: 21%, \(0.2 \overline{1}\), \(\frac{11}{50}\), \(\frac{2}{9}\)

Explanation:
In order to put them in an ascending order we have to calculate the fraction, percent, decimal in their respective form, So Fraction \(\frac{11}{50}\) can be rewrite as 0.22 in decimal form,
\(\frac{2}{9}\) can be rewrite as \(0.22 \overline{2}\)in decimal form,
Then 21% can be rewrite as 0.21 in decimal form,
As we can see 21%  is less than \(0.2 \overline{1}\) ,\(0.2 \overline{1}\) is less than \(\frac{11}{50}\),  \(\frac{11}{50}\)  is less than \(\frac{2}{9}\),
Finally, we have the ascending order as 21%, \(0.2 \overline{1}\), \(\frac{11}{50}\), \(\frac{2}{9}\)

MATCHING Tell which letter shows the graph of the number.
Question 35.
\(\frac{7}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.777 , it is in the graph at the point A

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{7}{9}\) as 0.777 in decimal form,
So, looking at the graph given, it is at point A.

Question 36.
0.812
Answer:  it is at the point C in the given graph.

Question 37.
\(\frac{5}{6}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.833 , it is in the graph at the point D

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\) as 0.833 in decimal form,
So, looking at the graph given, it is at point D.

Question 38.
79.5%
Answer: 0.795, it is in the graph at the point B

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 79.5% in decimal form is 0.795
0.795 is in the graph given , at the point B vb

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 6

Question 39.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows the portion of students in each grade that participate in School Spirit Week. Order the grades by portion of participation from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 7
Answer: The grades by portion of participation from least to greatest are 7 , 6 , 8.

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left. So, 65% in decimal form is 0.65.
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent  ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\) as 0.6 in decimal form,
Then grade 6 = 0.64 , grade 7 = 0.6 , grade 8 = 0.65 ,
So, The grades by portion of participation from least to greatest are 7 , 6 , 8.

Question 40.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the portion of gold medals that were won by the United States in five summer Olympic games. In what year did the United States win the least portion of gold medals? the greatest portion? Justify your answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 8
Answer: The United States win the least portion of gold medals in the year 2004 and the greatest portion of gold medals won in the year 2012

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into Percent and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{36}{301}\)  as  0.119 in decimal form,
\(\frac{23}{150}\) as 0.153 in decimal form,
\(\frac{46}{307}\) as 0.149 in decimal form,
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
\(12. \overline{3} \%\) as \(0.12 \overline{3}\) in decimal form.
So, according to their years and portions of gold medals we have ,
year 2000 – \(0.12 \overline{3}\),
year 2004 – 0.119,
year 2008 – \(0. \overline{12}\),
year 2012 – 0.153,
year 2016 – 0.149,
Finally, The United States win the least portion of gold medals in the year 2004 and the greatest portion of gold medals won in the year 2012.

Question 41.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You, your friend, and your cousin have a basketball competition where each person attempts the same number of shots. You make 70% of your shots, your friend makes of her shots, \(\frac{7}{9}\) and your cousin makes \(0.7 \overline{2}\) of his shots. How many times more shots are made by the first place finisher than the third place finisher?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 9
Answer: The first place finisher made 0.077 more shorts than the third place finisher.

Explanation:
The shorts made by 1st person are 70%, that is 0.7 in decimal,
The shorts made by 2nd person are \(\frac{7}{9}\) rewriting as 0.777 in decimal,
The shorts made by 3rd person are \(0.7 \overline{2}\)
The shorts made by  the first place finisher is  0.777 and by the Third place finisher is 0.7,
To know how many more shorts are made by first place finisher than third place finisher is the difference between 0.777 and 0.7 , that is 0.777 – 0.7 = 0.077.
So, the first place finisher made 0.077 more shorts than the third place finisher.

Question 42.
DIG DEEPER!
Three different mixtures contain small amounts of acetic acid. Mixture A is 0.036 acetic acid, Mixture B is 4.2% acetic acid, and Mixture C is \(\frac{1}{22}\) acetic acid. Explain how to use this information to determine which mixture contains the greatest amount of acetic acid.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 10
Answer: 0.045 , Mixture C has more amount of acetic acid as compared to Mixture A and Mixture B.

Explanation:
Mixture A is 0.036 acetic acid,
Mixture B is 4.2% acetic acid, in decimal we can write it as 0.042,
Mixture C is \(\frac{1}{22}\) acetic acid, rewriting as 0.045 in decimal form,
So, 0.036 is less than 0.042 , 0.042 is less than 0.045,
Finally,  0.045 Mixture c has the more amount of acetic acid as compared to Mixture A and Mixture B.

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Over 44% of the 30 students in a class read a book last month. What are the possible numbers of students in the class who read a book last month? Justify your answer.
Answer: 13 number of students in the class read the book last month.

Explanation:
Given, 44% of 30 students
=(44%) × 30
= \(\frac{44}{100}\) × 30
= \(\frac{44 × 30}{100}\)
= \(\frac{1320}{100}\)
=13.2
So, 13 number of students in the class read the book last month.

Question 44.
NUMBER SENSE
Fill in the blanks using each of the numbers 0 – 7 exactly once, so that the percent, decimal, and fraction below are ordered from least to greatest. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.1 11
Answer:  The percent, decimal, and fraction are ordered from least to greatest are 12.3%, 0.57, \(\frac{4}{6}\) by using 0 – 7 numbers only once .

Explanation:
Given , using each of the numbers 0 – 7 exactly once,
Estimating on the numbes
Using numbers 1 , 2 , 3 for percent gives 12.3% as shown and can be writen as 0.123
Using numbers 0 , 5 , 7 for decimal gives 0.57 as shown
Using numbers 4 and 6 for fraction gives \(\frac{4}{6}\) and can be writen as 0.66
The order from least to greatest is 0.123 , 0.57 , 0.66 .
So , The percent, decimal, and fraction are ordered from least to greatest are 12.3%, 0.57, \(\frac{4}{6}\)

Lesson 6.2 The Percent Proportion

EXPLORATION 1

Using Percent Models
Work with a partner.
a. Complete each model. Explain what each model represents.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 1
b. Use the models in part (a) to answer each question.

  • What number is 50% of 30?
  • 15 is what percent of 75?
  • 96 is 133\(\frac{1}{3}\)% of what number?

c. How can you use ratio tables to check your answers in part(b)? How can you use proportions? Provide examples to support your reasoning.
d. Write a question different from those in part (b) that can be answered using one of the models in part(a). Trade questions with another group and find the solution.
Answer: All the answers are given below the explanation.

Explanation:
a.
This model represents the number 30 which is divided in to two equal halves ,which can be represented in percent and numbers,
that is 50% of 30 is 15.
50 percent × 30 =
(50:100) × 30 =
(50 × 30):100 =
1500:100 = 15


This model represents the number 75 which is divided in to five equal halves, which can be represented in percent and numbers ,That is
20% of 75 is 15,
40% of 75 is 30,
60% of 75 is 45,
80% of 75 is 60.


This model represents the number 96 which is divided in to four equal halves, which can be represented in percent and numbers ,That is
33\(\frac{1}{3}\%\) of 96 is 24,
66\(\frac{2}{3}\%\) of 96 is 48,
100% of 96 is 72.

b. As shown in the models in part (a) 15 is the number which is 50% of 30,
From the figure 2 of part (a) we know, 15 is the number which is 20% of 75,
From the figure 3 of part (a) we know, 96 is the number which is 133\(\frac{1}{3}\%\) of 96.

c. The models provided in the part (a) are representing the each of the number individually which are divided in to equal number of parts in respective of their numbers , Also the divided parts can be represented as percent and number form
Since the divided equal parts are equally represents the whole number given ,So that the ratios of the parts can be easily combined in to the whole number .
Thus, the proportion can be used to calculate the percent of each ratio and have the unchanged output .
For example,

In the picture shown The number 30 is divided into 1:1 ratio equally which is exactly the half of the number and percent that is 15 is 50% of 30.

d. From the figure 2 of part (a), we can assume the question as
What number is 80% of 75?

Answer: 60 is the number which is 80% of 75 , as shown in the model above.

Try It

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 1.
What percent of 5 is 3?
Answer: 60%

Explanation:
3 : 5 × 100 =
(3 × 100): 5
300 : 5 = 60
So, 5 is 60% of 3.

Question 2.
24 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 120%

Explanation:
24 : 20 × 100 =
(24 × 100) : 20 =
2400 : 20 = 120
So, 24 is the 120% of 20.

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 3.
What number is 80% of 60?
Answer:  48

Explanation:
80 % × 60 =
(80 :100) × 60 =
(80 × 60) :100 =
4800 : 100 = 48
So, 48 is 80% of 60.

Question 4.
10% of 40.5 is what number?
Answer: 4.05

Explanation:
10 % × 40.5 =
(10 : 100) × 40.5 =
(10 × 40.5) : 100 =
4.05 : 100 = 4.05
So, 4.05 is the 10% of 40.5

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 5.
0.1% of what number is 4?
Answer: 4,000

Explanation:
Let the number be X
0.1% × X = 4
X = 4 ÷ 0.1%
= 4 ÷ (0.1 ÷ 100)
= (100 × 4 ) ÷ 0.1
= 400 ÷ 0.1
=4,000
So, 4 is the 0.1% of 4,000.

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{2}\) is 25% of what number?
Answer:  2

Explanation:
To make calculation easier we can rewrite \(\frac{1}{2}\) as 0.5
let the number be X
25% × X = 0.5
X = 0.5 ÷ 25%
= 0.5 ÷ (25 ÷ 100)
= (100 × 0.5 ) ÷ 25
= 50 ÷ 25
=2
So, 0.5 is the 25% of 2.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
USING THE PERCENT PROPORTION
Write and solve a proportion to determine what percent of 120 is 54.
Answer:  45%

Explanation:
By using percent proportion, we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{54}{120}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{54 × 100}{120}\) = p
p = \(\frac{5400}{120}\)
p = 45%
so, 54 is the 45% of 120.

Question 8.
CHOOSE TOOLS
Use a model to find 60% of 30.
Answer: 18

Explanation:
60% × 30
= (60 : 100) × 30
= (60 × 30) : 100
= 1800 : 100
= 18
So, 60% of 30 is 18.

Question 9.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which proportion at the left does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 2
Answer: second proportion doesn’t belong to other three

Explanation:
second proportion: 15/50 = p /100
p = (15 × 100) ÷50
p = 150 ÷ 5
p = 30
Here we got 30% , as the p values of the other three proportions are 50%
So, second proportion does not fit in to the other three proportions.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
An arctic woolly-bear caterpillar lives for 7 years and spends 90% of its life frozen. How many days of its life is the arctic woolly-bear frozen?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 3
Answer: The arctic woolly-bear frozen for 6.3 years in their life time.

Explanation:
Given, An arctic woolly-bear caterpillar lives for 7 years and spends 90% of its life frozen
We have, 90% × 7
= (90 : 100 ) × 7
= (90 × 7) : 100
= 630 : 100
= 6.3 years
So, The arctic woolly-bear frozen for 6.3 years in their life time.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the numbers of pictures you upload to a social media website for 5 days in a row. How many total pictures do you upload during the week when 32% of the total pictures are uploaded on Saturday and Sunday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 4
Answer: The total pictures uploaded during the week are 53.

Explanation:
Given,  32% of the total pictures are uploaded on Saturday and Sunday
And adding the photos that we uploaded during the 5 days are 2 + 2 + 4 + 1 + 8 = 17
Let the number we should find be X
32% × X = 17
X = 17 ÷ 32%
= 17 ÷ (32 ÷ 100)
= (100 × 17 ) ÷ 32
= 1700 ÷ 32
= 53.12
So, 17 is the 32% of 53.
Finally we have, The total pictures uploaded during the week are 53.

The Percent Proportion Homework & Practice 6.2

Review & Refresh

Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 1.
\(\frac{42}{100}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.42 , percent = 42%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from fraction \(\frac{42}{100}\) we have to divide 42 by 100 ,
Then, we get 0.42,
To get the percent of 0.42 multiply by 100 , it will be 42%
So, \(\frac{42}{100}\) can be written as  0.42 or 42%

Question 2.
\(\frac{7}{1000}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.007 , percent = 0.7%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{7}{1000}\) we have to divide 7 by 1000 ,
Then, we get 0.007,
To get the percent of 0.007 multiply by 100 , it will be 0.7%
So, \(\frac{7}{1000}\) can be written as  0.007 or 0.7%

Question 3.
\(\frac{13}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = 1.444 , percent = 144.4%

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from \(\frac{13}{9}\)  fraction we have to divide 13 by 9 ,
Then, we get 1.444,
To get the percent of 1.444 multiply by 100 , it will be 144.4%
So, \(\frac{13}{9}\) can be written as  1.444 or 144.4%

Question 4.
\(\frac{41}{66}\)
Answer: decimal = \(0.62 \overline{12}\) , percent = \(62. \overline{12} \%\)

Explanation:
To get the percent or decimal from  fraction \(\frac{41}{66}\) we have to divide 41 by 66 ,
Then, we get \(0.62 \overline{12}\),
To get the percent of \(0.62 \overline{12}\) multiply by 100 , it will be \(62. \overline{12} \%\)
So, \(\frac{41}{66}\) can be written as  \(0.62 \overline{12}\) or \(62. \overline{12} \%\)

Evaluate the expression when a = – 15 and b = – 5.
Question 5.
a ÷ 5
Answer: -3

Explanation:
Given , a = – 15
Then , – 15 ÷ 5
= \(\frac{-15}{5}\)
= – 3.
so, a ÷ 5 = – 3.

Question 6.
\(\frac{b+14}{a}\)
Answer: \(\frac{9}{-15}\)

Explanation:
Given , a = -15 , b = -5 , by substituting the given values in the expression, we get
= \(\frac{(- 5)+14}{-15}\)
= \(\frac{9}{-15}\)
So, \(\frac{b+14}{a}\) = \(\frac{9}{-15}\)

Question 7.
\(\frac{b^{2}}{a+5}\)
Answer: \(\frac{25}{-10}\)

Explanation:
Given , a = -15 , b = -5, by substituting the given values in the expression, we get
= \(\frac{(-5)^{2}}{(-15)+5}\)
= \(\frac{25}{-10}\)
So, \(\frac{b^{2}}{a+5}\) = \(\frac{25}{-10}\)

What is the solution of 9x = 1.8?
A. x = – 5
B. x = – 0.2
C. x = 0.2
D. x = 5
Answer: C . x = 0.2

Explanation:
Given, 9x = 1.8
x = \(\frac{1.8}{9}\)
x = 0.2.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving

CHOOSE TOOLS Use a model to answer the question. Use a proportion to check your answer. (See Exploration 1, p. 241.)
Question 9.
What number is 20% of 80?
Answer: 16

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
a = \(\frac{80}{5}\)
a = 16.
So, 16 is 20% of 80.

Question 10.
10 is what percent of 40?
Answer: 25%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{10}{40}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{100}{4}\)
p = 25
So, 10 is 25% of 40.

Question 11.
15 is 30% of what number?
Answer: 50

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{15}{w}\)  = \(\frac{30}{100}\)
by cross multiplication we get,
30 × w = 15 × 100
w  = \(\frac{1500}{30}\)
w = \(\frac{150}{30}\)
w = 50.
So, 15 is 30% of 50.

Question 12.
What number is 120% of 70?
Answer: 84

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\)  = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\)  = \(\frac{6}{5}\)
a = \(\frac{70 × 6}{5}\)
a = \(\frac{420}{5}\)
a = 84
So, 84 is 120% of 70.

Question 13.
20 is what percent of 50?
Answer: 40%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{20}{50}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{20 × 100}{50}\)
p = \(\frac{200}{5}\)
p = 40
So, 20 is 40% of 50.

Question 14.
48 is 75% of what number?
Answer: 64

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{48}{w}\)  = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
w =\(\frac{48 × 100}{75}\)
w = \(\frac{4800}{75}\)
w = 64
So, 48 is 75% of 64.

USING THE PERCENT PROPORTION Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 15.
What percent of 25 is 12?
Answer: 48%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{12}{25}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{12 × 100}{25}\)
p = \(\frac{1200}{25}\)
p = 48
So, 12 is 48% of 25.

Question 16.
14 is what percent of 56?
Answer: 25%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{14}{56}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{14 × 100}{56}\)
p = \(\frac{1400}{56}\)
p = 25
So, 14 is 25% of 56.

Question 17.
25% of what number is 9?
Answer: 36

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
w = 9 × 4
w = 36.
So, 9 is 25% of 36.

Question 18.
36 is 0.9% of what number?
Answer: 4,000

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{36}{w}\) = \(\frac{0.9}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{36 × 100}{0.9}\)
w = \(\frac{3600}{0.9}\)
w = \(\frac{36,000}{9}\)
w = 4,000
So, 36 is 0.9% of 4,000.

Question 19.
75% of 124 is what number?
Answer: 93

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{124}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{75 × 124}{100}\)
a  = \(\frac{9,300}{100}\)
a = 93
So, 93 is 75% of 124.

Question 20.
110% of 90 is what number?
Answer: 99

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{90}\)  = \(\frac{110}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{110 × 90}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{9900}{100}\)
a = 99
So, 99 is 110% of 90.

Question 21.
What number is 0.4% of 40?
Answer: 0.16

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\)  = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{40}\)  = \(\frac{0.4}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{0.4 × 40}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{16}{100}\)
a = 0.16
So, 0.16 is 0.4% of 40.

Question 22.
72 is what percent of 45?
Answer:  160%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{72}{45}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{72 × 100}{45}\)
p = \(\frac{7200}{45}\)
p = 160
So, 72 is 160% of 45.

Question 23.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses the percent proportion to answer the question below. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
“40%of what number is 34?”
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 5
Answer:  yes, he used the correct percent proportion.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{34}{w}\) = \(\frac{40}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{34 × 100}{40}\)
w = \(\frac{3400}{40}\)
w = 85
So, 34 is 40% of 85.

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Of 140 seventh-grade students, 15% earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award. How many students earn the award?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 6
Answer: 21 students earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award.

Explanation:
Given, Of 140 seventh-grade students, 15% earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award.
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{140}\) = \(\frac{15}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{15 × 140}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2100}{100}\)
a = 21
So, 21 is 15% of 140.
Totally ,21 students earn the Presidential Youth Fitness Award.

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A salesperson receives a 3% commission on sales. The salesperson receives $180 in commission. What is the amount of sales?
Answer: The total amount of sale is $6,000.

Explanation:
Given, A salesperson receives a 3% commission on sales, The salesperson receives $180 in commission.
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{180}{w}\) = \(\frac{3}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{180 × 100}{3}\)
w = \(\frac{18,000}{3}\)
w = 6,000
So, $180 is 3% of $6,000.
Total amount of sale is $6,000.

USING THE PERCENT PROPORTION Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 26.
0.5 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 2.5%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{0.5}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{0.5 × 100}{20}\)
p = 0.5 × 5
p = 2.5
So, 0.5 is 2.5% of 20.

Question 27.
14.2 is 35.5% of what number?
Answer: 40

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{14.2}{w}\) = \(\frac{35.5}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{14.2 × 100}{35.5}\)
w = \(\frac{142 × 10}{35.5}\)
w = 40
So, 14.2 is 35.5% of 40.

Question 28.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) is 60% of what number?
Answer: 1.25

Explanation:
\(\frac{3}{4}\) can be rewrite as 0.75 in decimal,
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{0.75}{w}\) = \(\frac{60}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{0.75 × 100}{60}\)
w = \(\frac{75}{60}\)
w = 1.25
So, 0.75 is 60% of 1.25.

Question 29.
What number is 25% of \(\frac{7}{8}\)?
Answer: 0.218

Explanation:
\(\frac{7}{8}\) can be rewrite as 0.875 in decimal,
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{0.875}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{0.875 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{21.87}{100}\)
a = 0.218
So, 0.218 is 25% of 0.875.

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You are assigned 32 math exercises for homework. You complete 75% of the exercises before dinner. How many exercises do you have left to do after dinner?
Answer: 24 exercises are left .

Explanation:
You are assigned 32 math exercises for homework. You complete 75% of the exercises before dinner.
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{32}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{32 × 75}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2,400}{100}\)
a = 24
So, 24 is 75% of 32.
Totally, 24 exercise are left .

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your friend earns $10.50 per hour, which is 125% of her hourly wage last year. How much did your friend earn per hour last year?
Answer: Friend earned $8.4 per hour last year

Explanation:
Your friend earns $10.50 per hour, which is 125% of her hourly wage last year,
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{10.5}{w}\) = \(\frac{125}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{10.5 × 100}{125}\)
w = \(\frac{1050}{125}\)
w = 8.4
So, 8.4 is 125% of 10.5.

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The bar graph shows the numbers of reserved campsites at a campground for one week. What percent of the reservations were for Friday or Saturday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 7
Answer: The percent of reservations For Friday is 74.2% and for Saturday is  85%

Explanation:
As per the graph shown, The reservations made for the week are 35 ,
Friday reservations are 26, so
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{26}{35}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{26 × 100}{35}\)
p = \(\frac{2600}{35}\)
p = 74.2
So, 26 is 74.2% of 35.

Saturday reservations are 30, so
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{30}{35}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{30 × 100}{35}\)
p = \(\frac{3,000}{35}\)
p = 85
So, 30 is 85% of 35.

Totally, The percent of reservations For Friday is 74.2% and for Saturday is  85%.

Question 33.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Your friend displays the results of a survey that asks several people to vote on a new school mascot.
a. What is missing from the bar graph?
b. What percent of the votes does the least popular mascot receive? Explain your reasoning.
c. There are 124 votes total. How many votes does tiger receive?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 8
Answer: a. The numerical values for the votes are missing from the graph

b. In order to calculate the percent of the votes does the least popular mascot received will be halted due to lack of clear mentioning of of the proportion of the votes or the ratio of the votes.

c. The votes acquired by the tiger are cannot be determined because of figure which does not contain proper information.

Question 34.
DIG DEEPER!
A quarterback completes 18 of 33 passes during the first three quarters of a football game. He completes every pass in the fourth quarter and 62.5% of his passes for the entire game. How many passes does the quarterback throw in the fourth quarter? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.2 9
Answer: Quarterback throw 20.6 passes in the fourth quarter

Explanation:
A quarterback completes 18 of 33 passes during the first three quarters of a football game,
He completes every pass in the fourth quarter and 62.5% of his passes for the entire game.
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{33}\) = \(\frac{62.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{33 × 62.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2,062.5}{100}\)
a = 20.6
So, 20.6 is 62.5% of 33.

Hence, Quarterback thrown 20.6 passes in the fourth quarter

Question 35.
REASONING
20% of a number is x. What is 100% of the number? Assume x > 0.
Answer: 5x

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
substitute a = x and p = 20
\(\frac{x}{w}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
by cross multiplication , we get
w × 20 = x × 100
20w = 100x
Divide both sides by 20,
\(\frac{20w}{20}\) = \(\frac{100x}{20}\)
w = 5x
So, 100% of the number is 5x.

Question 36.
STRUCTURE
Answer each question. Assume x > 0.
a. What percent of 8x is 5x?
b. What is 65% of 80x?
Answer: a. 62.5% , b. 52x

Explanation:
a. percent of 8x is 5x
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{5x}{8x}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
by cross multiplying
8p = 500
p = \(\frac{500}{8}\)
p = 62.5
So, 5x is 62.5% of 8x.

b. By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{8x}\) = \(\frac{65}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{8x × 65}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{520x}{100}\)
a = 52x
So, 52x is 65% of 80x.

Lesson 6.3 The Percent Equation

EXPLORATION 1

Using Percent Equations
Work with a partner.
a. The circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election. So far, only half of the students have voted. Find the percent of students who voted for each candidate. Explain your method.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 1
c. The circle graph shows the final results of the election after every student voted. Use the equation you wrote in part(b) to find the number of students who voted for each candidate.
d. Use a different method to check your answers in part(c). Which method do you prefer? Explain.
Answer:
a. The percent of students who voted for each candidate are
For Person A = 20% ,
For Person B = 25%
For Person C = 15%
For Person D = 40%

b. The equation is a = \(\frac{w × p}{100}\)

c. The number of students who voted for each candidate are
For Person A = 30
For Person B = 24
For Person C = 24
For Person D = 42

d. ratio proportion is used as another method.

Explanation:
a. Given, The circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election. So far, only half of the students have voted.
The number of votes received till now are 12 + 15 + 9 + 24 = 60,
To know the percent of students who voted for each candidate we have ,
For person A, w = 60 , a = 12 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{12}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{12 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{1200}{60}\)
p = 20
So, 12 is 20% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person A is 20%

For person B , w = 60 , a = 15 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{15}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{15 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{1500}{60}\)
p = 25
So, 15 is 25% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person B is 25%

For person C , w = 60 , a = 9 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{9 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{900}{60}\)
p = 15
So, 9 is 15% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person C is 15%

For person D , w = 60 , a = 24 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{24}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{24 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{2400}{60}\)
p = 40
So, 24 is 40% of 60.
The percent of  students who voted for person D is 40%

b. we know that percent proportion is \(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
where as a = part , w= whole , p = percent ,
To solve for a , we can write it as a = \(\frac{w × p}{100}\)

c. The figure showing the percent of all the candidates individually are after the final results ,
as shown in part (a)  half of the students are 60 ,
The half of the students voted in all the students are 60 and total strength of students are 60 + 60 = 120
To calculate the number of voting acquired by each candidate we have,
For person A , w  = 120 , p = 25 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{120}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120}{4}\)
a = 30
So, 30 is 25% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person A after final results are 30

For person B , w  = 120 , p = 20 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{120}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120 × 20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120}{5}\)
a = 24
So, 24 is 20% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person B after final results are 24

For person C , w  = 120 , p = 20 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
same as for person B ,
So, 24 is 20% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person C after final results are 24

For person D , w  = 120 , p = 35 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{120}\) = \(\frac{35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120 × 35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{4,200}{100}\)
a = 42
So, 42 is 35% of 120.
The number of students who voted for person D after final results are 42.

d. We are using ratio proportion method , To check the answers of  part (c),
For person A , 25 % × 120 =
(25 : 100) × 120 =
(25 × 120) : 100 =
3,000 : 100 = 30
So, 30 is the 25% of 120.

For person B , 20 % × 120 =
(20 : 100) × 120 =
(20 × 120) : 100 =
2,400 : 100 = 24
So, 24 is the 20% of 120.

For person C , 20% × 120 is same as person B
So, 24 is the 20% of 120.

For person D , 35 % × 120 =
(35 : 100) × 120 =
(35 × 120) : 100 =
4,200 : 100 = 42
So, 42 is the 35% of 120.
All the answers are verified with ratio proportion method.

Try It

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 1.
What number is 10% of 20?
Answer:  2

Explanation:
10 % × 20 =
(10 : 100) × 20 =
(10 × 20) : 100 =
200 : 100 = 2
So, 2 is the 10% of 20.

Question 2.
What number is 150% of 40?
Answer: 60

Explanation:
150 % × 40 =
(150 : 100) × 40 =
(150 × 40) : 100 =
6,000 : 100 = 60
So, 60 is the 150% of 40.

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 3.
3 is what percent of 600?
Answer: 0.5%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{3}{600}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{3 × 100}{600}\)
p = \(\frac{300}{600}\)
p = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
p = 0.5
So, 3 is 0.5% of 600.

Question 4.
18 is what percent of 20?
Answer:

By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{18 × 100}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{1800}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{180}{2}\)
p = 90
So, 18 is 90% of 20.

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 5.
8 is 80% of what number?
Answer: 10

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{8}{w}\) = \(\frac{80}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{8 × 100}{80}\)
w = \(\frac{800}{80}\)
w = 10
So, 8 is 80% of 10.

Question 6.
90 is 180% of what number?
Answer: 50

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{90}{w}\) = \(\frac{180}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{90 × 100}{180}\)
w = \(\frac{9,000}{180}\)
w = 50
So, 90 is 180% of 50.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
VOCABULARY
Write the percent equation in words.
Answer:
Percent Equation:
In this equation, the whole is the number of which we are taking a percentage and the part is the value that results from taking the percent of the whole. This means that in any percent problem, there are three basic values to be concerned about: the percent, the whole, and the resulting part.
we can represent percent = p , whole = w , part = a
So, we have the percent equation as,
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\).

USING THE PERCENT EQUATION Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 8.
14 is what percent of 70?
Answer: 20%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{14}{70}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{14 × 100}{70}\)
p = \(\frac{1400}{70}\)
p = 20
So, 14 is 20% of 70.

Question 9.
What number is 36% of 85?
Answer: 30.6

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{85}\) = \(\frac{36}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{85 × 36}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{3,060}{100}\)
a = 30.6
So, 30.6 is 36% of 85.

Question 10.
9 is 12% of what number?
Answer: 75

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{12}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{9 × 100}{12}\)
w = \(\frac{900}{12}\)
w = 75
So, 9 is 12% of 75.

Question 11.
108 is what percent of 72?
Answer: 150%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{108}{72}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{108 × 100}{72}\)
p = \(\frac{10,800}{72}\)
p = 150
So, 108 is 150% of 72.

Question 12.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 2
Answer: 55 is 20% of what number ? , is different  from other three questions.

Explanation:
Given , 20% of 55 , we have to find the part of whole number
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{55}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{55 × 20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1,100}{100}\)
a = 11
So, 11 is 20% of 55.

But this 55 is 20% of what number ? is different  from other three, because here we have to find out the whole number
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{55}{w}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{55 × 100}{20}\)
w = \(\frac{5500}{20}\)
w = 275
So, 55 is 20% of 275.
Hence , 55 is 20% of what number ? , is different  from other three questions.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
A school offers band and chorus classes. The table shows the percents of the 1200 students in the school who are enrolled in band, chorus, or neither class. How many students are enrolled in both classes? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 3
Answer: The total number of students enrolled for both classes  are 744.

Explanation:
Given, The table shows the percent of the 1200 students in the school who are enrolled in band, chorus, or neither class.
For Band , w = 1200 , p = 34 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{1200}\) = \(\frac{34}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1200 × 34}{100}\)
a = 12 × 34
a = 408
So, 408 is 34% of 1200.
The number of students enrolled for the Band are 408.

For Band , w = 1200 , p = 28 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{1200}\) = \(\frac{28}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1200 × 28}{100}\)
a = 12 × 28
a = 336
So, 336 is 28% of 1200.
The number of students enrolled for the chorus are 336.

The total number of students enrolled for both classes  are 408 + 336 = 744.

Question 14.
Water Tank A has a capacity of 550 gallons and is 66% full. Water Tank B is 53% full. The ratio of the capacity of Water Tank A to Water Tank B is 11:15.
a. How much water is in each tank?
b. What percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water?
Answer:
a. The water tank A is filled with 363 gallons of water.
The water tank B is filled with 397.5 gallons of water.

b. The percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water is 58.5%.

Explanation:
a.  Given , Water Tank A has a capacity of 550 gallons and is 66% full.
w = 550 gallons , p = 66% , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{550}\) = \(\frac{66}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{550 × 66}{100}\)
a = 550 × 0.66
a = 363
So, 363 is 66% of 550.
The water tank A is filled with 363 gallons of water.

Given, Water Tank B is 53% full.
The ratio of the capacity of Water Tank A to Water Tank B is 11:15.
The capacity of Water Tank A is 550 gallons
Let the capacity of tank B is x gallons
\(\frac{550}{x}\) = \(\frac{11}{15}\)
x = \(\frac{550 × 15}{11}\)
x =  \(\frac{8,250}{11}\)
x = 750.
The capacity of the water Tank B is 750 gallons,
To know the amount of water filled in the tank we have,
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{750}\) = \(\frac{53}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{750 × 53}{100}\)
a = 7.5 × 53
a = 397.5
So, 397.5 is 53% of 750.
The water tank B is filled with 397.5 gallons of water.

b. To know the percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water, we have
The total capacity of Water tank A and Water tank B = 550 + 750 = 1,300 gallons
The total amount of water filled in both tanks are 363 + 397.5 =  760.5 gallons
So, w = 1,300 , a = 760.5 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{760.5}{1,300}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{760.5 × 100}{1,300}\)
p = \(\frac{760.5}{13}\)
p = 58.5
So, 760.5 is 58.5% of 1,300.
The percent of the total volume of both tanks is filled with water is 58.5%.

The Percent Equation Homework & Practice 6.3

Review & Refresh

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 1.
30% of what number is 9?
Answer: 30

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{w}\) = \(\frac{30}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{9 × 100}{30}\)
w = \(\frac{900}{30}\)
w = 30
So, 9 is 30% of 30.

Question 2.
42 is what percent of 80?
Answer:  52.5%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{42}{80}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{42 × 100}{80}\)
p = \(\frac{420}{8}\)
p = 52.5
So, 42 is 52.5% of 80.

Question 3.
What percent of 36 is 20?
Answer:

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{20}{36}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{20 × 100}{36}\)
p = \(\frac{2,000}{36}\)
p = 5.55
So, 20 is55.5% of 36.

Question 4.
What number is 120% of 80?
Answer: 96

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{80 × 120}{100}\)
a =  8 × 12
a = 96
So, 96 is 120% of 80.

Find the distance between the two numbers on a number line.
Question 5.
– 4 and 10
Answer: The distance between the two numbers  – 4 and 10  on a number line is 14 .

Explanation: 
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers  – 4 and 10  on a number line is 14 .

Question 6.
–\(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\)
Answer: The distance between the two numbers –\(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\) on a number line is 6 .

Explanation:
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers –\(\frac{2}{3}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\) on a number line is 6 .

Question 7.
– 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Answer: The distance between the two numbers  – 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\) on a number line is 6.

Explanation:
Given , – 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\)
can be written as \(\frac{-13}{3}\) and  \(\frac{-7}{10}\)
converting into decimal form we get , -4.3 and -0.7
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers  – 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) and – 1 \(\frac{3}{10}\) on a number line is 6.

Question 8.
– 4.3 and 7.5
Answer: The distance between the two numbers  – 4.3 and 7.5  on a number line is 8 .

Explanation:
For the number line above we have divided each segment in to equal parts ,
So, The distance between the two numbers  – 4.3 and 7.5  on a number line is 8 .

Question 9.
There are 160 people in a grade. The ratio of boys to girls is 3 to 5. Which proportion can you use to find the number x of boys?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 4
Answer:  A. \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{x}{160}\)

Explanation:
Given, The ratio of boys to girls is\(\frac{3}{5}\)
The ratio of boys to the grade is \(\frac{3}{8}\)
to find the number of x boys, we have to
\(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{x}{160}\)
x = \(\frac{3 × 160}{8}\)
x = \(\frac{480}{8}\)
x = 60.
So, A =  \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{x}{160}\) is the correct answer.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING PERCENT EQUATIONS The circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election. Find the percent of students who voted for the indicated candidate. Each Candidate(See Exploration 1, p. 247.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 5
Question 10.
Candidate A
Answer: The percent of students who voted for the candidate A is  36%

Explanation:
Given, the circle graph shows the number of votes received by each candidate during a school election.
The total number of students voted are 54 + 60 + 36 = 150
For candidate A we have , w = 150 , a = 54 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{54}{150}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{54 × 100}{150}\)
p = \(\frac{540}{15}\)
p = 36
So, 54 is 36% of 150.
The percent of students who voted for the candidate A is 36%.

Question 11.
Candidate B
Answer: The percent of students who voted for the candidate B is 40%.

Explanation:
For candidate B we have , w = 150 , a = 60 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{60}{150}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{60 × 100}{150}\)
p = \(\frac{600}{15}\)
p = 40
So, 60 is 40% of 150.
The percent of students who voted for the candidate B is 40%.

Question 12.
Candidate C
Answer: The percent of students who voted for the candidate C is 24%.

Explanation:
For candidate C we have , w = 150 , a = 36 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{36}{150}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{36 × 100}{150}\)
p = \(\frac{360}{15}\)
p = 24
So, 36 is 24% of 150.
The percent of students who voted for the candidate C is 24%.

USING THE PERCENT EQUATION Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 13.
20% of 150 is what number?
Answer:  30

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{150}\) = \(\frac{20}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{150 × 20}{100}\)
a = 15 × 2
a = 30
So, 30 is 20% of 150.

Question 14.
45 is what percent of 60?
Answer: 75%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{45}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{45 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{4,500}{60}\)
p = 75
So, 45 is 75% of 60.

Question 15.
35% of what number is 35?
Answer: 35 is 35% of 100.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{35}{w}\) = \(\frac{35}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{35 × 100}{35}\)
w = \(\frac{3500}{35}\)
w = 100
So, 35 is 35% of 100.

Question 16.
0.8% of 150 is what number?
Answer: 1.2 .

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{150}\) = \(\frac{0.8}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{150 × 0.8}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
a = 1.2
So, 1.2 is 0.8% of 150.

Question 17.
29 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 145%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{29}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{29 × 100}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{2,900}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{2,90}{2}\)
p = 145
So, 29 is 145% of 20.

Question 18.
0.5% of what number is 12?
Answer:

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{12}{w}\) = \(\frac{0.5}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{12 × 100}{0.5}\)
w = \(\frac{1200}{0.5}\)
w = 2,400.
So, 12 is 0.5% of 2,400.

Question 19.
What percent of 300 is 51?
Answer: 17%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{51}{300}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{51 × 100}{300}\)
p = \(\frac{51}{3}\)
p = 17
So, 51 is 17% of 300.

Question 20.
120% of what number is 102?
Answer: 85

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{102}{w}\) = \(\frac{120}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{102 × 100}{120}\)
w = \(\frac{1020}{12}\)
w = 85
So, 102 is 120% of 85.

YOU BE THE TEACHER Your friend uses the percent equation to answer the question. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Question 21.
What number is 35% of 20?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 6
Answer: yes , He is correct .

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{20}\) = \(\frac{35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{20 × 35}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{700}{100}\)
a = 7
So, 7 is 35% of 20.

Question 22.
30 is 60% of what number?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 7
Answer: 30 is 60% of 50.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{30}{w}\) = \(\frac{60}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{30 × 100}{60}\)
w = \(\frac{300}{6}\)
w = 50
So, 30 is 60% of 50.

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A salesperson receives a 2.5% commission on sales. What commission does the salesperson receive for $8000 in sales?
Answer: He receives $200 for commission of the sale.

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{8000}\) = \(\frac{2.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{8000 × 2.5}{100}\)
a = 80 × 2.5
a = $200
So, $200 is 2.5% of $8000.
He receives $200 for commission of the sale.

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your school raised 125% of its fundraising goal. The school raised $6750. What was the goal?
Answer: The fundraising goal of the school is $5,400.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{6750}{w}\) = \(\frac{125}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{6750 × 100}{125}\)
w =54 × 100
w = $5,400
So, $6750 is 125% of $5,400.
The fundraising goal of the school is $5,400.

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The sales tax on the model rocket shown is $1.92. What is the percent of sales tax?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 8
Answer: The percent of sales tax on the rocket model  is 8%.

Explanation:
Given, The sales tax on the model rocket shown is $1.92.
The tax on the rocket is $24 , we have ,
w = 24 , a = 1.92 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{1.92}{24}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{1.92 × 100}{24}\)
p = \(\frac{192}{24}\)
p = 8
So, $1.92 is 8% of $24.
The percent of sales tax on the rocket model  is 8%.

PUZZLE There were n signers of the Declaration of Independence. The youngest was Edward Rutledge, who was x years old. The oldest was Benjamin Franklin, who was y years old.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 9
Question 26.
x is 25% of 104. What was Rutledge’s age?
Answer: The age of Rutledge is 26.

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{104}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{104 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{104}{4}\)
a = 26
x = 26.
So, 26 is 25% of 104.

Question 27.
7 is 10% of y. What was Franklin’s age?
Answer: The Franklin’s age is 70.

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{7}{w}\) = \(\frac{10}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{7 × 100}{10}\)
w = \(\frac{700}{10}\)
w = 70
y = 70.
So, 7 is 10% of 70.
The Franklin’s age is 70.

Question 28.
n is 80% of y. How many signers were there?
Answer: There are n = 56 members signers.

Explanation:
y = 70 , p = 80 ,
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\) = \(\frac{80}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{70 × 80}{100}\)
a = 7 × 8
a =56
n = 56
So, 56 is 80% of 70.
There are n = 56 members signers.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 10

Question 29.
LOGIC
How can you tell whether a percent of a number will be greater than, less than, or equal to the number? Give examples to support your answer.
Answer: The percent of a number is less than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be less than the number.
The percent of a number is 100% , Then the percent of the number will be equal the number.
The percent of a number is greater than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be greater than the number.

Explanation:
If the percent of a number is less than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be less than the number.
For example , 80% of 50
= 0.8 × 50
= 40
80% < 100% ,  so 40 < 50.

If the percent of a number is 100% , Then the percent of the number will be equal the number.
For example , 100% of 50
= 1 × 50
= 50.
100% = 100% , So, 50 = 50.

If the percent of a number is greater than 100% , Then the percent of the number will be greater than the number.
For example , 120% of 50
= 1.2 × 50
= 60.
120% > 100% , So, 60 > 50.

Question 30.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In a survey, a group of students is asked their favorite sport. Eighteen students choose “other” sports.
a. How many students participate in the survey?
b. How many choose football?
Answer:  a. The number of students participated  are 80.
b. The number of students chose football are 30.

Explanation:
a. 18 students chose ” other” sports So, a = 18 ,
The percent of the “other” sport = 100% – (40% + 37.5%) = 22.5%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{w}\) = \(\frac{22.5}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{18 × 100}{22.5}\)
w = \(\frac{1800}{22.5}\)
w =  80
So, 18 is 22.5% of 80.
The number of students participated  are 80.

b. 80 students are participated , so w = 80
The percent of the students who chose football is 37.5%
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{80}\) = \(\frac{37.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{80 × 37.5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{3,000}{100}\)
a = 30
So, 30 is 37.5% of 80.
The number of students chose football are 30.

Question 31.
TRUE OR FALSE?
Tell whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.
If W is 25% of Z, then Z : W is 75 : 25.
Answer: The statement is False.

Explanation:
Given , W is 25% of Z
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{W}{Z}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
So, \(\frac{Z}{W}\) = \(\frac{100}{25}\)
But given that Z : W is 75 : 25
So, The statement is False.

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
At a restaurant, the amount of your bill before taxes and tip is $19.83. A 6% sales tax is applied to your bill, and you leave a tip equal to 19% of the original amount. Use mental math to estimate the total amount of money you pay. Explain your reasoning. (Hint: Use 10% of the original amount.)
Answer: The total amount of the money to be paid is $22.18.

Explanation:
Given ,The amount of your bill before taxes and tip is $19.83.
A 6% sales tax is applied to your bill, and you leave a tip equal to 19% of the original amount.
bill before the tax = $19.83
sales tax = 6%
So, $19.83 – 6%
= $19.83 – 0.06
= $18.64
Tip = 19%
So, $18.64 + 19%
= $18.64 + 0.19
= $22.18
The total amount of the money to be paid is $22.18.

Question 33
REASONING
The table shows your test results in a math class. What score do you need on the last test to earn 90% of the total points on the tests?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.3 11
Answer: Of all the total test points you need 720 points to earn 90%

Explanation:
Total point value = 100 + 250 + 150 + 300 = 800
Given p = 90% , w = 800 , a= ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{800}\) = \(\frac{90}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{800 × 90}{100}\)
a = 8 × 90
a = 720
So, 720 is 90% of 800.
Finally, of all the total test points you need 720 points to earn 90%

Lesson 6.4 Percents of Increase and Decrease

EXPLORATION 1

Exploring Percent of Change
Work with a partner. Each year in the Columbia River Basin, adult salmon swim upriver to streams to lay eggs.
To go up the river, the adult salmon use fish ladders. But to go down the river, the young salmon must pass through several dams.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 1
At one time, there were electric turbines at each of the eight dams on the main stem of the Columbia and Snake Rivers. About 88% of the young salmon pass through a single dam unharmed.
a. One thousand young salmon pass through a dam. How many pass through unharmed?
b. One thousand young salmon pass through the river basin. How many pass through all 8 dams unharmed?
c. By what percent does the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam?
d. Describe a similar real-life situation in which a quantity increases by a constant percent each time an event occurs.
Answer: a. 880 salmon passed through single dam unharmed.
b. Totally , 358 salmon pass through all 8 dams unharmed.
c. The percent of the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 12%
d. An example for, real-life situation in which a quantity increases by a constant percent each time an event occurs. is given below in explanation.

Explanation:
a. Given , One thousand young salmon pass through a dam. 88% of the young salmon pass through a single dam unharmed.
To know the number of salmon passed through unharmed we have,
88% of 1,000
= 88% × 1,000
= 0.88 × 1,000
= 880.
So, 880 salmon passed through single dam unharmed.

b. Given , One thousand young salmon pass through a dam. 88% of the young salmon pass through a single dam unharmed. To calculate number of salmon pass through all 8 dams unharmed are
number of  salmon passed through dam 1 , unharmed are 880 (as shown in part a)
number of  salmon passed through dam 2 , unharmed =  88%  of  880
= 0.88 × 880
= 774
number of  salmon passed through dam 3 , unharmed =  88%  of  774
= 0.88 × 774
= 681
number of  salmon passed through dam 4 , unharmed =  88%  of  681
= 0.88 × 681
= 599
number of  salmon passed through dam 5 , unharmed =  88%  of  599
= 0.88 × 599
= 527
number of  salmon passed through dam 6 , unharmed =  88%  of  527
= 0.88 × 527
= 463
number of  salmon passed through dam 7 , unharmed =  88%  of  463
= 0.88 × 463
= 407
number of  salmon passed through dam 8 , unharmed =  88%  of  407
= 0.88 × 407
= 358
Totally , 358 salmon pass through all 8 dams unharmed.

c. To calculate The percent of the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
The total percent of salmon is 100%, The percent of salmon pass through a single dam is 88%
So, 100% – 88% = 12%
Finally , The percent of the number of young salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 12%

d.  An Example of real-life situation in which a quantity increases by a constant percent each time an event occurs.  is ,  while we are filling the tank with water , The amount of water ingoing increases constantly with the speed of the motor power running the water , water levels in the tank increases by a constant percent each time until the tank is filled up with the water fully.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 2

Try It

Find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 1.
10 inches to 25 inches
Answer:  percent of change is 150%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 25 and old value = 10 , because a change of 10 to 25 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{25 – 10}{10}\)
= \(\frac{15}{10}\)
= \(\frac{15}{10}\) × 100
= 150%
So, percent of change is 150%

Question 2.
57 people to 65 people
Answer:  percent of change is 14%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 65 and old value = 57 , because a change of 57 to 65 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{65 – 57}{57}\)
= \(\frac{8}{57}\)
= \(\frac{8}{57}\) × 100
= 14.03 %
Approximately We can write it as 14 %
So, percent of change is 14%

Question 3.
In Example 2, what was the percent of change from 2014 to 2015?
Answer: percent of change is  – 44%

Explanation:
In Example 2, change from 2014 to 2015 , that is 18 to 10
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New  value – old  value}{old  value}\)
where New value = 10 and old value = 18 , because a change of 18 to 10 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{10 – 18}{18}\)
= \(\frac{-8}{18}\)
= – 0.444
=  – 0.444 × 100
=  – 44.4 %
Approximately We can write it as  – 44 %
So, percent of change is  – 44%

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
VOCABULARY
What does it mean for a quantity to change by n%?
Answer: The meaning of a quantity to change is given by, which the amount of quantity increases or decreases of its original value to new value is called percent of change,
Then percent of change can be in positive or negative depending on the value of change , if it is for n% then it can be increase or decrease in the quantity of change.

Question 5.
NUMBER SENSE
Without calculating, determine which situation has a greater percent of change. Explain.

  • 5 bonus points added to 50 points
  • 5 bonus points added to 100 points

Answer: 5 bonus points added to 50 points has the greater percent of change.

Explanation:
5 bonus points added to 50 points
Then 50 points to 55 points
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 55 and old value = 50 , because a change of 50 to 55 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{55 – 50}{50}\)
= \(\frac{5}{50}\)
= \(\frac{1}{10}\) × 100
= 10%
So, percent of change is 10%

5 bonus points added to 100 points
Then 100 points to 105 points
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 105 and old value = 100 , because a change of 100 to 105 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{105 – 100}{100}\)
= \(\frac{5}{100}\)
= \(\frac{1}{20}\) × 100
= 5%
So, percent of change is 5%

Percent of change of 5 bonus points added to 50 points is 10%
Percent of change of 5 bonus points added to 100 points is 5%
So, 5 bonus points added to 50 points has the greater percent of change.

FINDING A PERCENT OF CHANGE Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change.
Question 6.
8 feet to 24 feet
Answer: percent of change is increased that is 200%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 24 and old value = 8 , because a change of 8 to 24 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{24 -8}{8}\)
= \(\frac{16}{8}\)
= 2 × 100
= 200%
So, percent of change is 200%

Question 7.
300 miles to 210 miles
Answer: percent of change is decreased that is -30%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 210 and old value = 300 , because a change of300 to 210 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{210 – 300}{300}\)
= \(\frac{-90}{300}\)
= \(\frac{-9}{30}\) × 100
= -0.3 × 100
= -30%
So, percent of change is -30%

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
In one round of a game, you are asked how many bones are in a human body. If the percent error of your answer is at most 5%, you earn two points. If the percent error is at most 10%, but greater than 5%, you earn one point. You guess 195 bones. The correct answer is 206 bones. How many points do you earn?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 3
Answer: The percent Error we calculated  is at most of 5% so points we earned is 2 points

Explanation:
Given, You guess 195 bones. The correct answer is 206 bones.
The amount of error is 206 – 195 = 11
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 11 and Actual value = 206 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{11}{206}\)
= 0.053
= 0.053 × 100
=  5.3%
Approximately we can write as 5%
So, percent Error is 5%
Then , the percent Error we calculated  is at most of 5% so points we earned is 2 points

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
The manager of a restaurant offers a 20% decrease in price to tennis teams. A cashier applies a 10% decrease and then another 10% decrease. Is this the same as applying a 20% decrease? Justify your answer.
Answer: There is slight difference between these two methods but are approximately equal.

Explanation:
Given, The manager of a restaurant offers a 20% decrease in price to tennis teams.
Let the total price be 100
So, 100 decrease 20%
= 100 × (1 – 20%)
= 100 × (1 – 0.2)
= 80.

Given, A cashier applies a 10% decrease and then another 10% decrease.
Let the total price be 100
So, 100 decrease 10%
= 100 × (1 – 10%)
= 100 × (1 – 0.1)
= 90.

Again applying 10% decrease
90 decrease 10%
= 90 × (1 – 10%)
= 90 × (1 – 0.1)
= 81.

So, There is slight difference between these two methods but are approximately equal

Percents of Increase and Decrease Homework & Practice 6.4

Review & Refresh

Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 1.
What number is 25% of 64?
Answer:  16

Explanation:
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{64}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{64 × 25}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{64}{4}\)
a = 16
So, 16 is 25% of 64.

Question 2.
39.2 is what percent of 112?
Answer: 35%

Explanation:
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{39.2}{112}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{39.2 × 100}{112}\)
p = \(\frac{3,920}{112}\)
p = 35
So, 39.2 is 35% of 112.

Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{7}\) + (- \(\frac{6}{7}\))
Answer:  – \(\frac{2}{7}\)

Explanation:
To find the sum of the fractions given, we have to do addition, that is
\(\frac{4}{7}\) + (- \(\frac{6}{7}\))
= \(\frac{4 – 6}{7}\)
= – \(\frac{2}{7}\)
So, The sum of \(\frac{4}{7}\) + (- \(\frac{6}{7}\)) is – \(\frac{2}{7}\)

Question 6.
– 4.621 + 3.925
Answer: – 0.696

Explanation:
To find the sum we have to add the given numbers , that is
– 4.621 + 3.925
=  3.925 – 4.621
= – 0.696
So, the sum of – 4.621 + 3.925 is – 0.696.

Question 7.
–\(\frac{5}{12}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
To find the sum of the fractions given, we have to do addition, that is
Given , –\(\frac{5}{12}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{5}{12}\)
Expand the fraction , multilpy the numerator and denominator by 3
We get , \(\frac{3 × 3}{3 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{3 × 3}{3 × 4}\) – \(\frac{5}{12}\)
= \(\frac{9}{12}\) – \(\frac{5}{12}\)
= \(\frac{9 – 5}{12}\)
= \(\frac{4}{12}\)
The simplest form of \(\frac{4}{12}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
So, The sum of –\(\frac{5}{12}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

EXPLORING PERCENT CHANGE You are given the percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed. By what percent does the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam? (See Exploration 1, p. 253.)
Question 8.
75%
Answer:  The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 25%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 75%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 75% = 25%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 25%

Question 9.
80%
Answer: The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 20%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 80%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 80% = 20%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 20%

Question 10.
62%
Answer: The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 38%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 62%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 62% = 38%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 38%

Question 11.
94%
Answer: The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 6%

Explanation:
The percent of salmon that pass through a single dam unharmed is 94%
Let the percent of salmon coming to the dam are 100%
The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is
100% – 94% = 6%
So, The percent of the number of salmon decrease when passing through a single dam is 6%

FINDING A PERCENT OF CHANGE Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 12.
12 inches to 36 inches
Answer: percent of change is 200%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 36 and old value = 12 , because a change of 12 to 36 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{36 – 12}{12}\)
= \(\frac{24}{12}\)
= 2 × 100
= 200%
So, percent of change is 200%

Question 13.
75 people to 25 people
Answer: percent of change is 66%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 25 and old value = 75 , because a change of 75 to 25 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{25 – 75}{75}\)
= \(\frac{- 50}{75}\)
=  – 0.666
= – 0.666 × 100
= – 66.6%
Approximately we can write it as – 66%
So, percent of change is – 66%

Question 14.
50 pounds to 35 pounds
Answer: percent of change is – 30%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 35 and old value = 50 , because a change of 35 to 50 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{35 – 50}{50}\)
= \(\frac{- 15}{50}\)
= – 0.3
= – 0.3 × 100
= – 30%
So, percent of change is – 30%

Question 15.
24 songs to 78 songs
Answer: percent of change is 225%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 78 and old value = 24 , because a change of 24 to 78 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{78 – 24}{24}\)
= \(\frac{54}{24}\)
= 2.25 × 100
= 225%
So, percent of change is 225%

Question 16.
10 gallons to 24 gallons
Answer: percent of change is 140%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 24 and old value = 10 , because a change of 10 to 24 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{24 – 10}{10}\)
= \(\frac{14}{10}\)
= 1.4
= 1.4 × 100
= 140%
So, percent of change is 140%

Question 17.
72 paper clips to 63 paper clips
Answer: percent of change is – 12.5%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 63 and old value = 72 , because a change of 72 to 63 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{63 – 72}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 9}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{8}\)
= – 0.125
= – 0.125 × 100
= – 12.5%
So, percent of change is – 12.5%

Question 18.
16 centimeters to 44.2 centimeters
Answer: percent of change is 176%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 44.2 and old value = 16 , because a change of 16 to 44.2 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{44.2 – 16}{16}\)
= \(\frac{28.2}{16}\)
= 1.76
= 1.76 × 100
= 176%
So, percent of change is 176%

Question 19.
68 miles to 42.5 miles
Answer: percent of change is – 37.5%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 42.5 and old value = 68 , because a change of 68 to 42.5 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{42.5 – 68}{68}\)
= \(\frac{- 25.5}{68}\)
= – 0.375
= – 0.375 × 100
= – 37.5%
So, percent of change is – 37.5%

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the percent increase from 18 to 26. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 4
Answer: No , The percent of change of 18 to 26 is positive (increase) that is 44.4%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 26 and old value = 18 , because a change of 18 to 26 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{26 – 18}{18}\)
= \(\frac{8}{18}\)
= 0.444
= 0.444 × 100
= 44.4%
So, percent of change is 44.4%

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Last week, you finished Level 2 of a video game in 32 minutes. Today, you finish Level 2 in 28 minutes. What is the percent of change?
Answer: The percent of change from last week to today is – 12.5%

Explanation:
Given, you finished Level 2 of a video game in 32 minutes. Today, you finish Level 2 in 28 minutes.
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 28 and old value = 32 , because a change of 32 to 28 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{28 – 32}{32}\)
= \(\frac{- 4}{32}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{8}\)
= – 0.125
= – 0.125 × 100
= – 12.5%
So, percent of change is – 12.5%

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You estimate that a baby pig weighs 20 pounds. The actual weight of the baby pig is 16 pounds. Find the percent error.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 5
Answer: The percent Error is 20%.

Explanation:
Given , You estimate that a baby pig weighs 20 pounds. The actual weight of the baby pig is 16 pounds.
The amount of error is 20 – 16 = 4
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 4 and Actual value = 20 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{4}{20}\)
= \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 0.2
= 0.2 × 100
=  20%
So, percent Error is 20% .

Question 23.
PRECISION
A researcher estimates that a fossil is 3200 years old. Using carbon-14 dating, a procedure used to determine the age of an object, the researcher discovers that the fossil is 3600 years old.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 6.1
a. Find the percent error.
b. What other estimate gives the same percent error? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a. The percent Error is 11.1%
b. The other estimate that gives the same percent error is 3,199 years old.

Explanation:
a. Given, A researcher estimates that a fossil is 3200 years old  the researcher discovers that the fossil is 3600 years old.
The amount of error is 3600 – 3200 = 400
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 400 and Actual value = 3600 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{400}{3600}\)
= \(\frac{1}{9}\)
= 0.111
= 0.111 × 100
=  11.1%
So, percent Error is 11.1% .

b. If The other estimate that gives the same percent error is 3,199 years old.
The amount of error is 3600 – 3199 = 401
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 401 and Actual value = 3600 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{401}{3600}\)
= 0.111
= 0.111 × 100
=  11.1%
So, percent Error is 11.1% .
So , The other estimate that gives the same percent error is 3,199 years old.

FINDING A PERCENT OF CHANGE Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 24.
\(\frac{1}{4}\) to \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer: percent of change is 100%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) as 0.25
\(\frac{1}{2}\) as  0.5 , so , 0.25 to 0.5
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.5 and old value = 0.25 , because a change of 0.25 to 0.5 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.5 – 0.25}{0.25}\)
= \(\frac{0.25}{0.25}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
So, percent of change is 100%

Question 25.
\(\frac{4}{5}\) to \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Answer: percent of change is – 25%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{4}{5}\) as 0.8
\(\frac{3}{5}\) as 0.6 , so , 0.8 to 0.6
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.6 and old value = 0.8 , because a change of 0.8 to 0.6 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.6 – 0.8}{0.8}\)
= \(\frac{-0.2}{0.8}\)
= – 0.25
= – 0.25 × 100
= – 25%
So, percent of change is – 25%

Question 26.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) to \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Answer: percent of change is 135%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{3}{8}\) as 0.37
\(\frac{7}{8}\) as 0.87 , So 0.37 to 0.87
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.87 and old value = 0.37 , because a change of 0.37 to 0.87 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.87 – 0.37}{0.37}\)
= \(\frac{0.5}{0.37}\)
= 1.35
= 1.35 × 100
= 135%
So, percent of change is 135%

Question 27.
\(\frac{5}{4}\) to \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Answer: percent of change is – 70.4%

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{5}{4}\) as 1.25
\(\frac{3}{8}\) as 0.37 , So, 1.25 to 0.37
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 0.37 and old value = 1.25 , because a change of 1.25 to 0.37 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{0.37 – 1.25}{1.25}\)
= \(\frac{- 0.88}{1.25}\)
= – 0.704
= – 0.704 × 100
= – 70.4%
So, percent of change is – 70.4%

Question 28.
CRITICAL THINKING
Explain why a change from 20 to 40 is a 100% increase, but a change from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease.
Answer: From 20 to 40 is a 100% increase because of increase in number value and from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease because of decrease in number value.

Explanation:
Given , 20 to 40
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 40 and old value = 20 , because a change of 20 to 40 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{40 – 20}{20}\)
= \(\frac{20}{20}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
Then , percent of change is 100%
So, The percent of change from 20 to 40 is a 100% increase

Given , 40 to 20
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 20 and old value = 40 , because a change of 40 to 20 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{20 – 40}{40}\)
= \(\frac{- 20}{40}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{2}\)
= – 0.5
= – 0.5 × 100
= – 50%
Then , percent of change is – 50%
So , The percent of  change from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease.

Finally , From 20 to 40 is a 100% increase because of increase in number value and from 40 to 20 is a 50% decrease because of decrease in number value.

Question 29.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows population data for a community.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 6
a. What is the percent of change from 2011 to 2017?
b. Predict the population in 2023. Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a.  The percent of change from 2011 to 2017  is 169%
b. The estimated population of 2023 will be 158,000.

Explanation:
a. Given 2011 to 2017 , so from the table we know it as , 118,000 to 138,000
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 138,000  and old value = 118,000 , because a change of 118,000 to 138,000 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{138,000 – 118,000}{118,000}\)
= \(\frac{20,000}{118,000\)
= 0.169
=0.169 × 100
= 169%
So, percent of change is 169%

b. The population from 2011 to 2017 increased from 118,000 to 138,000,
The difference between 2011 to 2017 is 6 years ,So the population increase in numbers are
138,000 – 118,000 = 20,000.
If the population in 6 years is increased by 20,000.
Then from 2017 to 2023 is 6 years , So increase in population is 20,000
Then for 2023 The population will be 138,000 + 20,000 = 158,000
finally, The estimated population of 2023 will be 158,000.

Question 30.
GEOMETRY
Suppose the length and the width of the sandbox are doubled.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 7
a. Find the percent of change in the perimeter.
b. Find the percent of change in the area.
Answer: a. the percent of change in the perimeter of sandbox is 100%
b. the percent of change in the area of sandbox is

Explanation:
a. Given , length of sandbox = 10 ft , width of sandbox = 6 ft
The sandbox is in the form of a rectangle , So the perimeter of a rectangle is P = 2 ( l + w) , where l = length of the rectangle and  w = width of the rectangle,
Then P = 2( l + w )
= 2 ( 10 + 6 )
= 2 × 16
=18
So, the perimeter of sandbox is 32 ft

Given that , the length and the width of the sandbox are doubled.
Then l = 20 ft and w = 12 ft ,
P = 2( l + w )
= 2 ( 20 + 12 )
= 2 × 32
= 64
So, the perimeter of sandbox after the length and the width are doubled. is 64 ft .
The perimeter of sandbox changed  from 32 ft to 64 ft , Then
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 64 and old value = 32 , because a change of 32 to 64 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{64 – 32}{32}\)
= \(\frac{32}{32}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
So, percent of change is 100%
Finally , the percent of change in the perimeter of sandbox is 100%

b. Given , length of sandbox = 10 ft , width of sandbox = 6 ft
The sandbox is in the form of a rectangle , So the area of a rectangle is A = l × w ,
Then A = l × w
= 10 × 6 = 60
So , The Area of Sandbox is 60 ft

Given that , the length and the width of the sandbox are doubled.
Then , l = 20 ft and w = 12 ft ,
Then A = l × w
= 20 × 12 = 240
So , The Area of Sandbox after the length and the width are doubled is 240 ft
The area of sandbox changed from 60 ft to 240 ft
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 240 and old value = 60 , because a change of 60 to 240 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{240 – 60}{60}\)
= \(\frac{180}{60}\)
= 3
= 3 × 100
= 300%
So, percent of change is 300%
Finally , the percent of change in the area of sandbox is 300%.

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A company fills boxes with about 21 ounces of cereal. The acceptable percent error in filling a box is 2.5%. Box A contains 20.4 ounces of cereal and Box B contains 21.5 ounces of cereal. Tell whether each box is an acceptable weight.
Answer: The percent error of Box A is greater than acceptable percent error that is 2.8% and The percent error of Box B is less than acceptable percent error that is 2.3%.

Explanation:
For Box A , Given , A company fills boxes with about 21 ounces of cereal and Box A contains 20.4 ounces of cereal
The amount of error is 21 – 20.4 = 0.6
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 0.6 and Actual value = 21 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{0.6}{21}\)
= 0.028
= 0.028 × 100
=  2.8%
So, percent Error is 2.8%
The percent error of Box A is greater than acceptable percent error that is 2.8%

For Box B A company fills boxes with about 21 ounces of cereal and  Box B contains 21.5 ounces of cereal.
The amount of error is 21.5 – 21 = 0.5
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 0.5 and Actual value = 21 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{0.5}{21}\)
= 0.023
= 0.023 × 100
=  2.3%
So, percent Error is 2.3%
The percent error of Box B is less than acceptable percent error that is 2.3%

Question 32.
PRECISION
Find the percent of change from June to September in the mile-run times shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.4 8
Answer: The percent of change from June to September in the mile-run times is -26%.

Explanation:
Given , change from 7.45 to 5.51
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 5.51 and old value = 7.45 , because a change of 7.45 to 5.51 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{5.51 – 7.45}{7.45}\)
= \(\frac{- 1.94}{7.45}\)
= – 0.26
= – 0.26 × 100
= – 26%
So, percent of change is – 26%
Finally , The percent of change from June to September in the mile-run times is -26%.

Question 33.
CRITICAL THINKING
A number increases by 10% and then decreases by 10%. Will the result be greater than, less than or equal to, the original number? Explain.
Answer: A number increases by 10% and then decreases by 10% , the result will be less than the original number.

Explanation:
Let original number is 100
Given ,The original number increases by 10%
The new number = original number + The original number increases by 10%
= 100 + ( 100 × 10%)
= 100 + ( 100 × 0.1)
= 100 + 10
= 110
So, The new number is 110.

Let the original number is 110
Given ,The original number decreases by 10%
The new number = original number – The original number decreases by 10%
= 110 – ( 110 × 10%)
= 110 – ( 110 × 0.1)
= 110 – 11
= 99
So, The new number is 99

99 < 100 .
So , A number increases by 10% and then decreases by 10% , the result will be less than the original number.

Question 34.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You want to reduce your daily calorie consumption by about 9%. You currently consume about 2100 calories per day. Use mental math to estimate the number of calories you should consume in one week to meet your goal. Explain.
Answer: The estimated calories you should consume per week is 13,377.

Explanation:
Given ,You currently consume about 2100 calories per day, reduce your daily calorie consumption by about 9%.
so, The calories you have to consume after reduction of 9% is
The new number = original number – The original number decreases by 9%
= 2100 – ( 2100 × 9%)
= 2100 – (2100 × 0.09)
= 2100 – 189
= 1,911 .
The calories you have to consume after reduction of 9% is 1,911

The calories you should consume per day is 1,911.
The calories you should consume per week (7 days) = 1,911 × 7 = 13,377.

Finally , The estimated calories you should consume per week is 13,377.

Question 35.
DIG DEEPER!
Donations to an annual fundraiser are 15% greater this year than last year. Last year, donations were10% greater than the year before. The amount raised this year is $10,120. How much was raised two years ago?
Answer: The amount raised 2 years ago is $7,741.8.

Explanation:
Given , The amount raised this year is $10,120.
Let the amount raised last year = x
Donations are 15% greater than last year
The amount raised last year = The amount raised this year – ((The amount raised this year .15%)
x = 10,120 – ( 10,120 × 0.15)
x = 10,120 – 1,518
x = 8,602
The amount raised last year = $8,602.

We know that , The amount raised last year = $8,602.
Let the amount raised the year before = x
Donations are 10% greater than the year before
The amount raised the year before = The amount raised last year – ((The amount raised last year .10%)
x = 8,602 – ( 8,602 × 0.1)
x = 8,602 – 860.2
x = 7,741.8
The amount raised the year before = $7,741.8.

So, The amount raised 2 years ago is $7,741.8.

Question 36.
REASONING
Forty students are in the science club. Of those, 45% are girls. This percent increases to 56% after more girls join the club. How many more girls join?
Answer:  The number of new girls join the club is 10.

Explanation:
Let the number of new girls = x
The number of girls = x + 18
The number of students = x + 40
So, the number of girls = 56% The number of students
x + 18 = 0.56( x + 40 )
x + 18  = 0.56x + 22.4
0.56x – x = 22.4 – 18
0.44x = 4.4
x = \(\frac{4.4}{0.44}\)
x = 10.
So , The number of new girls is 10.

Lesson 6.5 Discounts and Markups

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Discounts
Work with a partner.
a. The same pair of earrings is on sale at three stores. Which store has the best price? Use the percent models to justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 1
b. You buy the earrings on sale for 30% off at a different store. You pay $22.40. What was the original price of the earrings? Use the percent model to justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 2
c. You sell the earrings in part(b) to a friend for 60% more than what you paid. What is the selling price? Use a percent model to justify your answer.
Answer:
a. For store A ,The sales price is $27
For store B  ,The sales price is $24.5
For store C ,The sales price is $31.2

b. the original price  of the earrings is $32

c. the selling price is $35.84.

Explanation:
a. Given store A = $45 with 40% off

We know , The sales price be 100% – 40% = 60% of the original price
sales price = 60% of 45
= 0.6 × 45 = 27
So, The sales price is $27

For store B = $49 with 50% off

We know , The sales price be 100% – 50% = 50% of the original price
sales price = 50% of 49
= 0.5 × 49 = 24.5
So, The sales price is $24.5

For store c = $39 with 20% off

We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 39
= 0.8 × 39 = 31.2
So, The sales price is $31.2

b. Given , You buy the earrings on sale for 30% off at a different store. You pay $22.40
The saples price = 100% – 30% = 70%

we know  a = 22.4 , p = 70% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
22.4 = 0.7 × w
w = \(\frac{22.4}{0.7}\)
w = 32.
So , the original price of the earrings is $32

c. Given , You sell the earrings in part(b) to a friend for 60% more than what you paid.
If the selling price is more than the buying price then it is called markup


Here , the markup is 60% of $22.4
a = p% × w
a = 0.6 × 22.4
a = 13.44
So, the markup is  $13.44
We know that selling price = cost of buying + markup
= 22.4 + 13.44
= 35.84
So , the selling price is $35.84.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 3

Try It

Question 1.
The original price of a skateboard is $50. The skateboard is on sale for 20% off. What is the sale price?
Answer: The sales price of skateboard is $40

Explanation:
Given , skateboard is $50 with 20% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 50
= 0.8 × 50 = 40
So, The sales price is $40

Question 2.
The discount on a DVD is 50%. It is on sale for $10. What is the original price of the DVD?
Answer: The original price of DVD is $20.

Explanation:
Given , discount on a DVD is 50%. , It is on sale for $10
We know , The sales price be 100% – 50% = 50%
a = p% × w
10 = 0.5 × w
w = \(\frac{10}{0.5}\)
w = 20
So, The original price is $20.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
WRITING
Describe how to find the sale price of an item that has a 15% discount.
Answer: To get the sales price , The discount percent must be cleared from the total percent of sales price , it gives the sales percentage of the original price , which is used to find the sales price.
So, The sales price = original price minus discount.

Explanation:
Let the original price be $50 with 15% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85% of the original price
sales price = 85% of 50
= 0.85 × 50 = 42.5
So, The sales price is $42.5

FINDING A SALE PRICE Find the sale price. Use a percent model to check your answer.
Question 4.
A portable table tennis set costs $30 before a 30% discount.
Answer: The sales price of portable table tennis set is $21.

Explanation:
Given , tennis set is $30 with 30% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70% of the original price
sales price = 70% of 30
= 0.7 × 30 = 21
So, The sales price is $21.

Question 5.
The original price of an easel is $70. The easel is on sale for 20% off.
Answer: The sales price  of an easel is $56.

Explanation:
Given , easel is $70 with 20% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 70
= 0.8 × 70 = 56
So, The sales price is $56.

FINDING AN ORIGINAL PRICE Find the original price. Use a percent model to check your answer.
Question 6.
A bracelet costs $36 after a 25% discount.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 4
Answer: The original price of bracelet is $48.

Explanation: 
Given , discount on a bracelet is 25%. , It is cost  $36  after discount
We know , The sales price be 100% – 25% = 75%
a = p% × w
36 = 0.75 × w
w = \(\frac{36}{0.75}\)
w = 48
So, The original price is $48.

Question 7.
The discount on a toy robot is 40%. The toy robot is on sale for $54.
Answer: The sale price toy robot is $32.4 .

Explanation: 
Given , discount on a toy robot is 40%. The toy robot is on sale for $54.
We know , The sales price be 100% – 40% = 60%
a = p% × w
a = 0.6 × 54
a = 32.4
So, The sale price is $32.4 .

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You have two coupons for a store. The first coupon applies a $15 discount to a single purchase, and the second coupon applies a 10% discount to a single purchase. You can only use one coupon on a purchase. When should you use each coupon? Explain.
Answer: The first coupon of $15 discount is to be used on your highest cost of purchase  and the second coupon with 10% off is to be used on your least cost of purchase .

Explanation:
Given , The first coupon applies a $15 discount to a single purchase,
Let the purchase be $50
Then the first coupon applies = $50 – $15 = $35.
So, when the first coupon applies price will be $35.

Given , the second coupon applies a 10% discount to a single purchase
Let the original price be $50 and with 10% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 10% = 90% of the original price
sales price = 90% of 50
= 0.9 × 50 = 45
So, The sales price is $45.
Here , we can see that $15 discount is offering the reduction of the original price and  discount with 10% of is offering to pay the 90% of its original price.

Finally , The first coupon of $15 discount is to be used on your highest cost of purchase  and the second coupon with 10% off is to be used on your least cost of purchase .

Question 9.
A store sells memory cards for $25 each.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 5
a. The markup for each memory card is 25%. How much did the store pay for 50 memory cards?
b. The store offers a discount when a customer buys two or more memory cards. A customer pays $47.50 for two memory cards. What is the percent of discount?
c. How much does a customer pay for three memory cards if the store increases the percent of discount in part (b) by 2%?
Answer: a. The store pay $937.5 for 50 memory cards
b. The discount offered by the store is 5%
c. The customer paid $69.75 for 3 memory cards.

Explanation:
a. The markup is 25% of $25
a = p% × w
= 25% × 25
= 0.25 × 25
= 6.25
So , the markup is $6.25.
To , find the cost to store , we have
cost to store = selling price – markup
= $25 – $6.25
= $18.75.
The cost to store for each memory card is $18.75.
Then for 50 memory cards = 50 × $18.75 = $937.5

b. A customer pays $47.50 for two memory cards.
Then for one memory card \(\frac{47.5}{2}\) = $23.75
we have , a = $23.75 , w = $25 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{23.75}{25}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{23.75 × 100}{25}\)
p = \(\frac{2375}{25}\)
p = 95
So, 23.75 is 95% of 25.
To find the discount , = The percent of original price – the percent of selling price
=  100% – 95% = 5%
So, The discount offered by the store is 5%

c. If the discount is increased by 2% , Then the discount offered by store is 5% + 2% = 7%
The amount of selling price = 100% – 7% = 93%
So , 93% of $25
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{25}\) = \(\frac{93}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{25 × 93}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2325}{100}\)
a = 23.25
So, The amount after  the discount is $23.25
Then for 3 memory cards = $23.25 × 3 = $69.75

The customer paid $69.75 for 3 memory cards.

Discounts and Markups Homework & Practice 6.5

Review & Refresh

Identify the percent of change as an increase or decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 1.
16 meters to 20 meters
Answer: The percent of change is 25%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 20 and old value = 16 , because a change of 16 to 20 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{20 – 16}{16}\)
= \(\frac{4}{16}\)
= \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 0.25
= 0.25 × 100
= 25%
So, percent of change is 25%

Question 2.
9 points to 4 points
Answer: The percent of change is – 55.5%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 4 and old value = 9 , because a change of 9 to 4 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{4 – 9}{9}\)
= \(\frac{- 5}{9}\)
= – 0.555
= – 0.555 × 100
= – 55.5%
So, percent of change is – 55.5%

Question 3.
15 ounces to 5 ounces
Answer: The percent of change is – 66.6%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 5 and old value = 15 , because a change of 15 to 5 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{5 – 15}{15}\)
= \(\frac{- 10}{15}\)
= – 0.666
= – 0.666 × 100
= – 66.6%
So, percent of change is – 66.6%

Question 4.
38 staples to 55 staples
Answer:

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 55 and old value = 38 , because a change of 38 to 55 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{55 – 38}{38}\)
= \(\frac{17}{38}\)
= 0.447
= 0.447 × 100
= 44.7%
So, percent of change is 44.7%

Find the product. Write fractions in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\)
Answer: The product of  \(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\) is 0.094.

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
\(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\) as 0.571 ( – 0.166)
To find the product we have to multiply the two numbers
= 0.571 × ( – 0.166)
= 0.094
So, The product of  \(\frac{4}{7}\left(-\frac{1}{6}\right)\) is 0.094.

Question 6.
– 1.58(6.02)
Answer: The product of – 1.58(6.02) is  – 9.51.

Explanation:
To find the product we have to multiply the two numbers
= – 1.58 × (6.02)
=  – 9.51
So, The product of – 1.58(6.02) is  – 9.51.

Question 7.
– 3(- 2\(\frac{1}{8}\))
Answer:

Explanation:
The given fractions can be written in decimal form then we have,
– 3(- 2\(\frac{1}{8}\)) as – 3 ( – 2.12)
To find the product we have to multiply the two numbers
= – 3 × ( – 2.12)
=  6.36
So, The product of  – 3 ( – 2.12) is 6.36

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING DISCOUNTS The same item is on sale at two stores. Which one is the better price? Use percent models to justify your answer. (See Exploration 1, p. 259.)
Question 8.
60% off $60 or 55% off $50
Answer: The item has better price at 55% off $50 .

Explanation:
a. Given , 60% off $60.
We know , The sales price be 100% – 60% = 40% of the original price
sales price = 40% of 60
= 0.4 × 60 = 24
So, The sales price is $24

b. Given , 55% off $50

We know , The sales price be 100% – 55% = 45% of the original price
sales price = 45% of 50
= 0.45 × 50 = 22.5
So, The sales price is $22.5

Question 9.
85% off $90 or 70% off $65
Answer: The item has better price at 85% off $90 .

Explanation:

a. Given , 85% off $90
We know , The sales price be 100% –85% = 15% of the original price
sales price = 15% of 90
= 0.15 × 90 = 13.5
So, The sales price is $13.5 .

b. Given , 70% off $65

We know , The sales price be 100% –70% = 30% of the original price
sales price = 30% of 65
= 0.3 × 65 = 19.5
So, The sales price is $19.5.

USING TOOLS Copy and complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 6
Answer:
10. Given , Original price of the item is $ 80 , percent of discount is 20% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $64.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 80
= 0.8 × 80 = 64
So, The sales price is $64.

11. Given , Original price of the item is $42 , percent of discount is 15% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $35.7.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85% of the original price
sales price = 85% of 42
= 0.85 × 42 = 35.7
So, The sales price is $35.7.

12. Given , Original price of the item is $120 , percent of discount is 80% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $24.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 80% = 20% of the original price
sales price = 20% of 120
= 0.2 × 120 = 24
So, The sales price is $24.

13. Given , Original price of the item is $112 , percent of discount is 32% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $76.16.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 32% = 68% of the original price
sales price = 68% of 112
= 0.68 × 112 = 76.16
So, The sales price is $76.16.

14. Given , Original price of the item is $69.8 , percent of discount is 60% , Find sales price ?
Answer: The sales price of the is $27.92.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 60% = 40% of the original price
sales price = 40% of 69.8
= 0.4 × 69.8 = 27.92
So, The sales price is $27.92.

15. Given , sales price of the item is $40 , percent of discount is 25% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $53.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 25% = 75%
we know  a = 40 , p = 75% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 75% × w
40 = 0.75 × w
w = \(\frac{40}{0.75}\)
w = 53
So , the original price of the earrings is $53.

16. Given , sales price of the item is $57 , percent of discount is 5% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $60.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 5% = 95%
we know  a = 57 , p = 95% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 95% × w
57 = 0.95 × w
w = \(\frac{57}{0.95}\)
w = 60
So , the original price of the earrings is $60.

17. Given , sales price of the item is $90 , percent of discount is 80% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $450.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 80% = 20%
we know  a = 90 , p = 20% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 20% × w
90 = 0.2 × w
w = \(\frac{90}{0.2}\)
w = 450
So , the original price of the earrings is $450.

18. Given , sales price of the item is $72 , percent of discount is 64% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $200.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 64% = 36%
we know  a = 72 , p = 36% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 36% × w
72 = 0.36 × w
w = \(\frac{72}{0.36}\)
w = 200
So , the original price of the earrings is $200.

19. Given , sales price of the item is $146.54 , percent of discount is 15% , Find original price ?
Answer: The Original price of the is $172.4.

Explanation:
The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85%
we know  a = 146.54 , p = 85% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 85% × w
146.54 = 0.85 × w
w = \(\frac{146.54}{0.85}\)
w = 172.4
So , the original price of the earrings is $172.4.

20. Given , original price  of the item is $60 , sales price of the item is $45 , Find percent of discount ?
Answer: The percent of discount is 25% .

Explanation:
We have a = 45 , w = 60 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{45}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{45 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{4,500}{60}\)
p = 75
So, 45 is 75% of 60.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 75%
= 25%.
So, The percent of discount is 25% .

21. Given , original price  of the item is $82 , sales price of the item is $65.6 , Find percent of discount ?
Answer: The percent of discount is 20% .

Explanation:
We have a = 65.6 , w = 82 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{65.6}{82}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{65.6 × 100}{82}\)
p = \(\frac{6,560}{82}\)
p = 80
So, 65.6 is 80% of 82.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 80%
= 20%.
So, The percent of discount is 20% .

22. Given , original price  of the item is $95 , sales price of the item is $61.75 , Find percent of discount ?
Answer: The percent of discount is 35% .

Explanation:
We have a = 61.75 , w = 95 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{61.75}{95}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{61.75 × 100}{95}\)
p = \(\frac{6,175}{95}\)
p = 65
So, 61.75 is 65% of 90.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 65%
= 35%.
So, The percent of discount is 35% .

FINDING A SELLING PRICE .

Question 23.
Cost to store: $50
Markup: 10%
Answer:  The selling price is $55.

Explanation:
The markup is 10% of $50
a = p% × w
= 10% × 50
= 0.1 × 50
= 5
So , the markup is $5.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $50 + $5
= $55.
The selling price is $55.

Question 24.
Cost to store: $80
Markup: 60%
Answer: The selling price is $128.

Explanation:
The markup is 60% of $80
a = p% × w
= 60% × 80
= 0.6 × 80
= 48
So , the markup is $48.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $80 + $48
= $128.
The selling price is $128.

Question 25.
Cost to store: $140
Markup: 25%
Answer: The selling price is $175.

Explanation:
The markup is 25% of $140
a = p% × w
= 25% × 140
= 0.25 × 140
= 35
So , the markup is $35.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $140 + $35
= $175.
The selling price is $175.

Question 26.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
A store pays $60 for an item. Your friend finds the selling price when the markup is 20%. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 7
Answer: No , The selling price is $72.

Explanation:
Given , The markup is 20% of $60
a = p% × w
= 20% × 60
= 0.2 × 60
= 12
So , the markup is $12.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $60 + $12
= $72.
The selling price is $72.

Question 27.
STRUCTURE
The scooter is being sold at a 10% discount. The original price is shown. Which methods can you use to find the new sale price? Which method do you prefer? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 8
Answer: The sales price is $37.8. Used the method of Multiplying $42 by 0.9.

Explanation:
By Using the method of Multiplying $42 by 0.9
We know , The sales price be 100% – 10% = 90% of the original price
sales price = 90% of 42
= 0.9 × 42 = 37.8
So, The sales price is $37.8.

Question 28.
NUMBER SENSE
The original price of an item is P dollars. Is the price of the item with an 18% markup the same as multiplying the original price by 1.18? Use two expressions to justify your answer.
Answer: The selling price is $1.18P and it is same as multiplying the original price by 1.18 .

Explanation:
Given , The original price of an item is P dollars.
The markup is 18% of $P
a = p% × w
= 18% × P
= 0.18 × P
= $0.18P
So , the markup is $0.18P.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $P + $0.18P
= $P ( 1 + 0.18 )
= $1.18P.
The selling price is $1.18P.

The given method is multiplying the original price by 1.18,
The original price is $P = $P × 1018.
So , The selling price is $1.18P.

Finally , The selling price is $1.18P and it is same as multiplying the original price by 1.18 .

Question 29.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are shopping for a video game system.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 9
a. At which store should you buy the system?
b. Store A has a weekend sale. What discount must Store A offer for you to buy the system there?
Answer: a. you should buy the system at store C has The selling price is $200.
b. To buy the system at store A  , it should have the discount of  28.6%.

a. Given , For store A cost to store is $162 , Markup is 40%
Then , The markup is 40% of $162
a = p% × w
= 40% × 162
= 0.4 × 162
= 64.8
So , the markup is $64.8.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $162 + $64.8
= $226.8.
So , For store A , The selling price is $226.8.

Given , For store B cost to store is $155 , Markup is 30%
Then , The markup is 30% of $155
a = p% × w
= 30% × 155
= 0.3 × 155
= 46.5
So , the markup is $46.5.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $155 + $46.5
= $201.5.
So , For store B , The selling price is $201.5.

Given , For store C cost to store is $160 , Markup is 25%
Then , The markup is 25% of $160
a = p% × w
= 25% × 160
= 0.25 × 160
= 40
So , the markup is $40.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $160 + $40
= $200.
So , For store C , The selling price is $200.

you should buy the system at store C has The selling price is $200.

b. Given , Store A has a weekend sale, to buy the system there , it should have the discount of ,
For store A , The selling price is $226.8 , cost to store is $162
We know a = $162 , w = $226.8
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{162}{226.8}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{162 × 100}{226.8}\)
p = \(\frac{16,200}{226.8}\)
p = 71.4%
So, 162 is 71.4% of 226.8.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 71.4%
= 28.6%.
So, The percent of discount is 28.6% .
Hence , To buy the system at store A  , it should have the discount of  28.6%.

Question 30.
DIG DEEPER!
A pool manager balances the pH level of a pool. The price of a bucket of chlorine tablets is $90, and the price of a pH test kit is $11. The manager uses a coupon that applies a 40% discount to the total cost of the two items. How much money does the pool manager pay for each item?
Answer: The pool manager pays for each item $60.6.

Explanation:
Now, to find the money the pool manager pay for each item
The price of a bucket of  chlorine tablets is = $90.
The price of a pH test kit = $11.
So, to get the total price of both items we add both prices:
$90 + $11 = $101.
Total cost of two items = $101.
As, given a coupon that applies a 40% discount to the total cost of the two items.
Now, to get the total cost by applying discount:
101 – (40%  of 101)
= 101 – (0.4 × 101)
= 101 – 40.4
= 60.6
So, The pool manager pays for each item $60.6

 

 

Question 31.
PRECISION
You buy a pair of jeans at a department store.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents 6.5 10
a. What is the percent of discount to the nearest percent?
b. What is the percent of sales tax to the nearest tenth of a percent?
c. The price of the jeans includes a 60% markup. After the discount, what is the percent of markup to the nearest percent?
Answer: a. The percent of discount is to the nearest percent 25% .
b. The percent of sales tax to the nearest percent is 7%.
c. The percent of markup to the nearest percent is 54%

Explanation:
a. To find the percent of discount to the nearest percent , we have
a = 29.99 , w = 39.99 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{29.99}{39.99}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{29.99 × 100}{39.99}\)
p = 0.749 × 100
p = 74.9
So, 29.99 is 74.9% of 39.99.
To get the percent of discount we have ,
The percent of discount = The percent of original price – the percent of sales price
= 100% – 74.9%
= 24.9%.
So, The percent of discount is 25% .

b. To find the percent of sales tax to the nearest tenth of a percent we have
sales tax = 1.95 , price = 29.99 , so , a = 1.95 , w = 29.99 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{1.95}{29.99}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{1.95 × 100}{29.99}\)
p = 0.065 × 100
p = 6.5
So, 1.95 is 6.5% of 29.99.
Thus , The percent of sales tax is 7%

c. Given , The price of the jeans includes a 60% markup.
The markup is 60% of $39.99
a = p% × w
= 60% × 39.99
= 0.6 × 39.99
= 23.99
So , the markup is $23.99.
To , find the original price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
cost to store = selling price – markup
= $39.99 – $23.99
= $15.99.
The selling price is $15.99.
After the discount, The amount is $29.99
To know the mark up we have , a = 15.99 , w = 29.99
a = p% × w
p% = \(\frac{a}{w}\)
p% = \(\frac{15.99}{29.99}\)
p% = 0.533
p = 0.533 × 100
p = 53.3 .%
So , The percent of markup to the nearest percent is 54%

Question 32.
CRITICAL THINKING
You buy a bicycle helmet for $22.26, which includes 6% sales tax. The helmet is discounted 30% off the selling price. What is the original price?
Answer: The original price of the helmet is $30.

Explanation:
Given , You buy a bicycle helmet for $22.26, which includes 6% sales tax.
Then , 6% of $22.26 is $1.33 , by decreasing the tax amount from the buying price  we get $20.93
The helmet is discounted 30% off the selling price.
The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70%
we know  a = 20.93 , p = 70% , w = ?
a  =  p% × w
a = 70% × w
20.93 = 0.7 × w
w = \(\frac{20.93}{0.7}\)
w = 29.9 , approximately equal to 30
So , the original price of the helmet is $30.

Question 33.
REASONING
A drone that costs $129.50 is discounted 40%. The next month, the sale price is discounted an additional 60%. Is the drone now “free”? If so, explain. If not, find the sale price.
Answer: The sales price of the next month is $31.8 , The drone not for free.

Explanation:
Given , A drone that costs $129.50 is discounted 40%.
We know , The sales price be 100% – 40% = 60% of the original price
sales price = 60% of 129.50
= 0.6 × 129.5 = $77.7
So, The sales price is $77.7.

Given , The next month, the sale price is discounted an additional 60%.
The original price this time is $77.7
We know , The sales price be 100% – 60% = 40% of the original price
sales price = 40% of 77.7
= 0.4 × 77.7 = $31.8
So, The sales price of the next month is $31.8 .

Thus , The drone not for free.

Lesson 6.6 Simple Interest

EXPLORATION 1

Understanding Simple Interest
Work with a partner. You deposit $150 in an account that earns 6% simple interest per year. You do not make any other deposits or withdrawals. The table shows the balance of the account at the end of each year.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 1
a. Describe any patterns you see in the account balance.
b. How is the amount of interest determined each year?
c. How can you find the amount of simple interest earned when you are given an initial amount, an interest rate, and a period of time?
d. You deposit $150 in a different account that earns simple interest. The table shows the balance of the account each year. What is the interest rate of the account? What is the balance after 10 years?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 2
Answer: a. we observe the pattern of $9 increment in each year of the deposited amount.
b. the amount of interest each year is ,
For 0 years = $0
For 1 years  I = $9.54
For 2 years  I = $20.16
For 3 years  I = $31.86
For 4 years  I = $44.64
For 5 years  I = $58.5
For 6 years  I = $73.44
c. Formula for simple interest is I = Prt
d. The annual rate of interest is $ 2.60 .

Explanation:
a. As the table shows , we have a series of pattern among the years of amount deposited.
that is , For 0 years = $150
For 1 years = $150 + $9 = $159
For 2 years = $159 + $9 = $168
For 3 years = $168 + $9 = $177
For 4 years = $177 + $9 = $186
For 5 years = $186 + $9 = $195
For 6 years = $195 + $9 = $204 ,
Here, we observe the pattern of $9 increment in each year of the deposited amount.

b. From the table, we have , simple interest for each year as,
Principal = P , t = time in years , r = Annual interest rate
That is P = $150 , t = 0 years , r = 0.06
To find the simple interest  I  we know , I = Prt ,
For 0 years  I = 150 × 0 × 0.06 = $0 .
For 1 years , P = $159 , t = 1 year , r = 0.06
I = 159 × 1 × 0.06 = $9.54
For 2 years , P = $168 , t = 2 year , r = 0.06
I = 168 × 2 × 0.06 = $20.16
For 3 years , P = $177 , t = 3 year , r = 0.06
I = 177 × 3 × 0.06 = $31.86
For 4 years , P = $186 , t = 4 year , r = 0.06
I = 186 × 4 × 0.06 = $44.64
For 5 years , P = $195 , t = 5 year , r = 0.06
I = 195 × 5 × 0.06 = $58.5
For 6 years , P = $204 , t = 6 year , r = 0.06
I = 204 × 6 × 0.06 = $73.44

C. To find the simple interest , we have Principal = P , t = time in years , r = Annual interest rate ,
Formula for simple interest is I = Prt , So by using this formula we can find the simple interest of the deposit .

d. From the table given , we have the pattern of increment of $5 in each year ,
in this case the deposit in the 10 year will be $230 .
To find the interest rate of the account ,
r = \(\frac{I}{pt}\)
r = \(\frac{0.06}{230 × 10}\)
r = 2.60
So , the annual rate of interest is $ 2.60 .

Interest principal is money paid or earned for using or lending money. The is the amount of money borrowed or deposited.

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 3

Try It

Question 1.
What is the balance of the account after 9 months?
Answer: The balance after 9 months = $500 + $1.66 = $501.66 .

Explanation:
From the example given , we know P = $500 , r = 0.03 , t =  9 months
I = prt
I = \(\frac{500 × 0.03}{9}\)
I = \(\frac{15}{9}\)
I = 1.66
The interest earned is $1.66 after 9 months ,
The balance after 9 months = $500 + $1.66 = $501.66 .

Question 2.
You deposit $350 in an account. The account earns $17.50 simple interest in 2.5 years. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 2%

Explanation:
Given , P = $350 , I = $17.5 , t = 2.5 ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{17.5}{350 × 2.5}\)
= \(\frac{17.5}{875}\)
= 0.02
we can write in percent as 2%
So , The annual interest rate is 2% .

Question 3.
In Example 3, how long does it take an account with a principal of $10,000 to earn $750 in interest?
Answer: It takes 3.75years to an account with a principal of $10,000 to earn $750 in interest .

Explanation:
Given , P = $10,000 , I = $750 , r = 0.02 , t = ? ,
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{750}{10,000 × 0.02}\)
= \(\frac{750}{200}\)
= 3.75
So, It takes 3.75years to an account with a principal of $10,000 to earn $750 in interest .

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
VOCABULARY
Explain the meaning of simple interest.
Answer:
Simple interest is interest calculated on the principal portion of a loan or the original contribution to a savings account. Simple interest does not compound, meaning that an account holder will only gain interest on the principal, and a borrower will never have to pay interest on interest already accrued.
So , To put in simplest form we can say that ,  simple interest money paid or earned only on the principal .

USING THE SIMPLE INTEREST FORMULA Use the simple interest formula.
Question 5.
You deposit $20 in a savings account. The account earns 4% simple interest per year. What is the balance after 4 years?
Answer: The balance of after 4 years is $23.2 .

Explanation:
To fin the principal , Given , P = $20 , r = 0.04 , t = 4 ,
We know that  I = Prt
I = 20 × 0.04 × 4
= 3.2
Simple interest I = $3.2
To find the balance after 4 years we have to add the simple interest to principal amount = $20 + $3.2 = $23.2 .
The balance of after 4 years is $23.2 .

Question 6.
You deposit $800 in an account. The account earns $360 simple interest in 3 years. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 15% .

Explanation:
Given , P = $800 , I = $360 , t = 3 years ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{360}{800 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{360}{2400}\)
= 0.15
we can write in percent as 15%
So , The annual interest rate is 15% .

Question 7.
You deposit $650 in a savings account. How long does it take an account with an annual interest rate of 5% to earn $178.25 in interest?
Answer: It takes 7.13 years an account with an annual interest rate of 5% to earn $178.25 in interest .

Explanation:
Given , P = $650 , I = $178.25 , r = 0.05 , t = ? ,
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{178.25}{650 × 0.05}\)
= \(\frac{178.25}{32.5}\)
= 7.13
So, It takes 7.13 years an account with an annual interest rate of 5% to earn $178.25 in interest .

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
You want to deposit $1000 in a savings account for 3 years. One bank adds a $100 bonus to your principal and offers a 2% simple annual interest rate. Another bank does not add a bonus, but offers 6% simple interest per year. Which bank should you choose? Explain.
Answer: Second bank offers the best deal .

Explanation:
Given , we know P = $1000 , t =  3 years ,
And one bank adds $100 bonus and offers  a 2% simple annual interest rate.
Then p = $1000 + $100 = $1100 , r = 0.02 ,
I = Prt
I = 1100 × 0.02 × 3
I = 11 × 2 × 3
I = 66
The simple interest of one bank = $66 .
The balance of the account will be = $1100 + $66 = $1166 .

Another bank offers no bonus, but  6% simple interest per year , r = 0.06  , p = $1000 , t = 3 years
I = prt
I = 1000 × 0.06 × 3
I = 10 × 6 × 3
I = 180
The simple interest of Another bank = $180 .
The balance of the account will be = $1000 + $180 = $1180 .

So, Second bank offers the best deal .

Question 9.
Your cousin borrows $1125 to repair her car. The simple annual interest rate is 10%. She makes equal monthly payments of $25. How many years will it take to pay off the loan?
Answer: It takes 2.2 years to pay off the loan.

Explanation:
Given , P = $1125 , r = 0.01 , I = $25 , t = ?
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{25}{1125 × 0.01}\)
= \(\frac{25}{11.25}\)
= 2.2
So, It takes 2.2 years to pay off the loan.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You borrow$900 to buy a laptop. You plan to pay off the loan after 5 years of equal monthly payments. After 10 payments, you have $1200 left to pay. What is the simple annual interest rate of your loan?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 15% .

Explanation:
Given , P = $900 , I = $1200 , t = 5 years ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{900}{1200 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{900}{6000}\)
= 0.15
we can write in percent as 15%
So , The annual interest rate is 15% .

Simple Interest Homework & Practice 6.6

Review & Refresh

Find the selling price.
Question 1.
A store pays $8 for a pool noodle. The markup is 20%.
Answer: The selling price is $9.6

Explanation:
Then , The markup is 20% of $8
a = p% × w
= 20% × 8
= 0.2 × 8
= 1.6
So , the markup is $1.6 .
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $8 + $1.6
= $9.6.
So ,The selling price is $9.6 .

Question 2.
A store pays $3 for a magazine. The markup is 5%.
Answer: The selling price is $3.15

Explanation:
Then , The markup is 5% of $3
a = p% × w
= 5% × 3
= 0.05 × 3
= 0.15
So , the markup is $0.15 .
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $3 + $0.15
= $3.15.
So ,The selling price is $3.15 .

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 3.
x + 5 < 2
Answer:  x  < -3

Explanation:
Given , x + 5 < 2
add  – 5 on both sides ,
x + 5 – 5 < 2 – 5
x  < -3

Question 4.
b – 2 ≥ – 1
Answer: b  ≥ 1

Explanation:
Given , b – 2 ≥ – 1
add  2 on both sides
b – 2 + 2  ≥ – 1 + 2
b  ≥ 1

Question 5.
w + 6 ≤ – 3
Answer: w  ≤ – 9

Explanation:
Given , w + 6 ≤ – 3
add -6 on both sides
w + 6 – 6  ≤ – 3 – 6
w  ≤ – 9

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

UNDERSTANDING SIMPLE INTEREST The table shows the balance of an account each year. What is the interest rate of the account? What is the balance after 10 years? (See Exploration 1, p. 265.)
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 4
Answer: The annual interest rate is 3% .

Explanation:
Given , There is an increment of $2 each year , for 10 years it will be $60 .
Now we have , P = $60 , t = 10 years , I = $2 , r = ?
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{2}{60 × 10}\)
= \(\frac{2}{60}\)
= 0.03
we can write in percent as 3%
So , The annual interest rate is 3% .

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 5
Answer: The annual interest rate is 0.4% .

Explanation:
Given , There is an increment of $14 each year , for 10 years it will be $315 .
Now we have , P = $315 , t = 10 years , I = $14 , r = ?
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{14}{315 × 10}\)
= 0.004
we can write in percent as 0.4%
So , The annual interest rate is 0.4% .

FINDING INTEREST EARNED An account earns simple annual interest. (a) Find the interest earned. (b) Find the balance of the account.
Question 8.
$600 at 5% for 2 years
Answer: The simple interest of  bank is $60 .
The balance of the account will be $660 .

Explanation:
Given ,  P = $600 , t =  2 years , r = 0.05
I = prt
I = 600 × 0.05 × 2
I = 6 × 5 × 2
I = 60
The simple interest of bank is $60 .
The balance of the account will be = $600 + $60 = $660 .

Question 9.
$1500 at 4% for 5 years
Answer: The simple interest  is $300 .
The balance of the account will be  $1800 .

Explanation:
Given ,  P = $1500 , t =  5 years , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 1500 × 0.04 × 5
I = 15 × 4 × 5
I = 300
The simple interest of  bank = $300 .
The balance of the account will be $1500 + $300 = $1800 .

Question 10.
$350 at 3 % for 10 years
Answer: The simple interest of  bank is $105 .
The balance of the account will be $455 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $350 , t =  10 years , r = 0.03
I = prt
I = 350 × 0.03 × 10
I = 35 × 3
I = 105
The simple interest of  bank is $105 .
The balance of the account will be $350 + $105 = $455 .

Question 11.
$1800 at 6.5% for 30 months
Answer:  The interest earned is $3.9 ,
The balance of the account will be $1,803.9 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1800 , t =  30 months , r = 0.065
I = prt
I = \(\frac{1800 × 0.065}{30}\)
I = \(\frac{117}{30}\)
I = 3.9
The interest earned is $3.9 ,
The balance of the account will be $1800 + $3.9 = $1,803.9 .

Question 12.
$925 at2.3% for 2.4 years
Answer: The interest earned is $638.1 ,
The balance of the account will be $1,563.1 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $925 , t =  28 months , r = 0.023
I = prt
I = \(\frac{925 × 0.023}{28}\)
I = \(\frac{21.27}{30}\)
I = 638.1
The interest earned is $638.1 ,
The balance of the account will be $925 + $638.1 = $1,563.1 .

Question 13.
$5200 at 7.36% for 54 months
Answer: The interest earned is $7.08 ,
The balance of the account will be $5,207.

Explanation:
Given , P = $5200 , t = 54 months , r = 0.0736
I = prt
I = \(\frac{5200 × 0.0736}{54}\)
I = \(\frac{382.72}{54}\)
I = 7.08
The interest earned is $7.08 ,
The balance of the account will be $5200 + $7.08 = $5,207.

Question 14.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the simple interest earned on $500 at 6% for 18 months. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 6
Answer: No , The simple interest is $1.6 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $500 , t =  18 months , r = 0.06
I = prt
I = \(\frac{500 × 0.06}{18}\)
I = \(\frac{30}{18}\)
I = 1.6
The simple interest is $1.6 .

FINDING AN ANNUAL INTEREST RATE Find the annual interest rate.
Question 15.
I = $24, P = $400, t = 2 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 3% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{24}{400 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{24}{800}\)
= 0.03
we can write in percent as 3%
So , The annual interest rate is 3% .

Question 16.
I = $562.50, P = $1500, t = 5 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 7.5% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{562.5}{1500 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{562.5}{7500}\)
= 0.075
we can write in percent as 7.5%
So , The annual interest rate is 7.5% .

Question 17.
I = $54, P = $900, t = 18 months
Answer: The annual interest rate is 108% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{54 × 18 }{900 }\)
= \(\frac{972}{900}\)
= 1.08
we can write in percent as 108%
So , The annual interest rate is 108% .

Question 18.
I = $160, P = $2000, t = 8 months
Answer: The annual interest rate is 64% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{160 × 8 }{2000 }\)
= \(\frac{1,280}{2,000}\)
= 0.64
we can write in percent as 64%
So , The annual interest rate is 64% .

FINDING AN AMOUNT OF TIME Find the amount of time.
Question 19.
I $30, P = $500, r = 3%
Answer: The amount of time is 1.6 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac30}{500 × 0.03}\)
= \(\frac{30}{18}\)
=1.6
So , The amount of time is 1.6 years .

Question 20.
I = $720, P = $1000, r = 9%
Answer: The amount of time is 8 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{720}{1000 × 0.09}\)
= \(\frac{720}{90}\)
= 8
So , The amount of time is 8 years .

Question 21.
I = $54, P = $800, r = 4.5%
Answer: The amount of time is 1.5 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{54}{800 × 0.045}\)
= \(\frac{54}{36}\)
= 1.5
So , The amount of time is 1.5 years .

Question 22.
I = $450, P = $2400, r = 7.5%
Answer:  The amount of time is 2.5 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{450}{2400 × 0.075}\)
= \(\frac{450}{180}\)
= 2.5
So , The amount of time is 2.5 years .

Question 23.
FINDING AN ACCOUNT BALANCE
A savings account earns 5% simple interest per year. The principal is $1200. What is the balance after 4 years?
Answer: The bank balance is $1440 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1200 , t =  4 years , r = 0.05
I = prt
I = 1200 × 0.05 × 4
I = 12 × 5 × 4
I = 240
The simple interest of  bank is $240 .
The bank balance is $1200 + $240 = $1440 .

Question 24.
FINDING AN ANNUAL INTEREST RATE
You deposit $400 in an account. The account earns $18 simple interest in 9 months. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 40.5% .

Explanation:
Given , P = $400 , I = $18 , t = 9 months ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{18 × 9}{400}\)
= \(\frac{162}{400}\)
= 0.405
we can write in percent as 40.5%
So , The annual interest rate is 40.5% .

Question 25.
FINDING AN AMOUNT OF TIME
You deposit $3000 in a CD (certificate of deposit) that earns 5.6% simple annual interest. How long will it take to earn $336 in interest?
Answer: It takes 2 years to earn $336 in interest .

Explanation:
Given , P = $3000  , r = 0.056 , I = $336
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{336}{3000 × 0.056}\)
= \(\frac{336}{168}\)
= 2
So , It takes 2 years to earn $336 in interest .

FINDING AN AMOUNT PAID Find the amount paid for the loan.
Question 26.
$1500 at 9% for 2 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $270 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1500 , t =  2 years , r = 0.09
I = prt
I = 1500 × 0.09 × 2
I = 15 × 9 × 2
I = 270
So , The amount paid for the loan is $270 .

Question 27.
$2000 at 12% for 3 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $72 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $2000 , t =  3 years , r = 0.012
I = prt
I = 2000 × 0.012 × 3
I = 2 × 12 × 3
I = 72
So , The amount paid for the loan is $72 .

Question 28.
$2400 at 10.5% for 5 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $1,260 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $2400 , t =  5 years , r = 0.105
I = prt
I = 2400 × 0.105 × 5
I = 252 × 5
I = 1,260
So , The amount paid for the loan is $1,260 .

Question 29.
$4800 at 9.9% for 4 years
Answer: The amount paid for the loan is $1,900 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $4800 , t =  4 years , r = 0.099
I = prt
I = 4800 × 0.099 × 4
I = 475.2 × 4
I = 1,900
So , The amount paid for the loan is $1,900 .

USING THE SIMPLE INTEREST FORMULA Copy and complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 7
Answer: 
30. The simple interest  is $1,530 .
31. The principal amount is $2,29,491 .
32. The time required is 4 years .
33. The annual interest rate is 1,275% .

30.  Explanation:
Given , P = $12,000 , t =  5 years , r = 0.0425
I = prt
I = 12,000 × 0.0425 × 5
I = 510 ×
I = 1,530
So , The simple interest  is $1,530 .

31.  Explanation:
Given , I = $828.75 , t =  18 months , r = 0.065
I = Prt
P = \(\frac{I}{rt}\)
= \(\frac{828.75 × 18}{0.065}\)
= \(\frac{14,916.96}{0.065}\)
= 2,29,491
So , The principal amount is $2,29,491 .

32. Explanation:
Given , P = $15,500 , I = $5425 , r = 0.0875
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{5425}{15,500 × 0.0875}\)
= \(\frac{5425}{1,356.25}\)
= 4
So , The time required is 4 years .

33. Explanation:
Given , P = $18,000 , I = $4252.5 , t = 54 months ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{4252.5 × 54}{18,000}\)
= \(\frac{2,29,635}{18,000}\)
= 12.75
we can write in percent as 1,275%
So , The annual interest rate is 1,275% .

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A family borrows money for a rainforest tour. The simple annual interest rate is 12%. The loan is paid after 3 months. What is the total amount paid for the tour?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 8
Answer: The total amount paid for the tour will be $1,230 + $49.2 = $1,279.2 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $940 + $170 + $120 = 1,230
P = $1,230 , t =  3 months , r = 0.12
I = prt
I = \(\frac{1,230 × 0.12}{3}\)
I = \(\frac{147.6}{3}\)
I = 49.2
The simple interest  is $49.2 .
So , The total amount paid for the tour will be $1,230 + $49.2 = $1,279.2 .

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You deposit $5000 in an account earning 7.5% simple interest per year. How long will it take for the balance of the account to be $6500?
Answer: It takes 4 years for the balance of the account to be $6500.

Explanation:
Given , the balance of the account  be $6500 ,  You deposit $5000
We know that . The total balance = deposit + simple interest
So, To get simple interest we have = The total balance – deposit = $6500 – $5000 = $1500 ,
P = $5000 , r = 0.075 , I = $1500 , t = ?
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{1500}{5000 × 0.075}\)
= \(\frac{1500}{375}\)
= 4
So , It takes 4 years for the balance of the account to be $6500.

Question 36.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You borrow$1300 to buy a telescope. What is the monthly payment?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 6 Percents 6.6 9
Answer: The monthly payment is $66.95 .

Explanation:
Given , P = $1300 , t =  2 years , r = 0.118
I = prt
I = 1300 × 0.118 × 2
I = 153.4 × 2
I = 306.8
The simple interest of  bank is $306.8 .
The balance of the account will be $1300 + $306.8 = $1,606.8 .
To get the monthly payment ,  convert 2 years into 24 months then , \(\frac{1,606.8}{24}\) = 66.95
So , The monthly payment is $66.95 .

Question 37.
REASONING
How many years will it take for $2000 to double at a simple annual interest rate of 8%? Explain how you found your answer.
Answer: It will take 12.5 years to make the principal amount double .

Explanation:
Given , it take for $2000 to double  , so the total balance will be $2000 + $2000 = $4000
We know that . The total balance = deposit + simple interest
So, To get simple interest we have = The total balance – deposit = $4000 – $2000 = $2000
P = $2000 , r = 0.08 , I = $2000 , t = ?
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{2000}{2000 × 0.08}\)
= \(\frac{2000}{160}\)
= 12.5
So , It will take 12.5 years to make the principal amount double .

Question 38.
DIG DEEPER!
You take out two loans. After 2 years, the total interest for the loans is $138. On the first loan, you pay 7.5% simple annual interest on a principal of $800. On the second loan, you pay 3% simple annual interest. What is the principal for the second loan?
Answer: The principal amount of the second loan is $300 .

Explanation:
Given , For first loan , P = $800 , t =  2 years , r = 0.075
I = prt
I = 800 × 0.075 × 2
I = 120
The simple interest of  bank is $120 .

For Second loan , Given , the total interest for the loans is $138
So , I = $138 – $120 = $18 ,
Given r = 0.03 , t = 2 years , I = $18
I = Prt
p = \(\frac{I}{rt}\)
= \(\frac{18}{0.03 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{18}{0.06}\)
= 300
So, The principal amount of the second loan is $300 .

Question 39.
REPEATED REASONING
You deposit $500 in an account that earns 4% simple annual interest. The interest earned each year is added to the principal to create a new principal. Find the total amount in your account after each year for 3 years.
Answer:  The balance of the account for the first year will be $500 + $20 = $520
The balance of the account for the 2 year will be $520 + $41.6 = $561.6 .
The balance of the account for the 3 year will be $561.6 + $67.3 = $5683.9.

Explanation:
Given , P = $500 , t =  1 years , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 500 × 0.04 × 1
I = 5 × 4
I = 20
The simple interest of  bank is $20 .
The balance of the account for the first year will be $500 + $20 = $520 .

For 2 years , p = $520 , t = 2 , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 520 × 0.04 × 2
I = 20.8 × 2
I = 41.6
The simple interest of  bank is $41.6 .
The balance of the account for the 2 year will be $520 + $41.6 = $561.6 .

For 3 years , p = $561.6 , t = 3 , r = 0.04
I = prt
I = 561.6 × 0.04 × 3
I = 22.46× 3
I = 67.3
The simple interest of  bank is $67.3 .
The balance of the account for the 3 year will be $561.6 + $67.3 = $5683.9.

Question 40.
NUMBER SENSE
An account earns r% simple interest per year. Does doubling the initial principal have the same effect on the total interest earned as doubling the amount of time? Justify your answer.
Answer: Yes ,Doubling the initial principal have the same effect on the total interest earned as doubling the amount of time

Explanation:
Given , An account earns r% simple interest per year. Does doubling the initial principal
Let us say P = 2P , t = t years , r = r%
we know I = Prt ,
I = 2P × t × r
I = 2Prt
The simple interest of the doubling initial principal is 2Prt .

Now , doubling the amount of time , t = 2t years
we know I = Prt ,
I = P × 2t × r
I = 2Prt
The simple interest of the doubling the amount  is 2Prt .
So, Doubling the initial principal have the same effect on the total interest earned as doubling the amount of time

Percents Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan
Question 1.
The table shows the percent of successful shots for each team in a hockey game. A total of 55 shots are taken in the game. The ratio of shots taken by the Blazers to shots taken by the Hawks is 6 : 5. How many goals does each team score?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 1
Understand the problem.
You know that 55 shots are taken in a hockey game and that the Blazers take 6 shots for every 5 shots taken by the Hawks. You also know the percent of successful shots for each team.
Make a plan.
Use a ratio table to determine the number of shots taken by each team. Then use the percent equation to determine the number of successful shots for each team.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer: The goals made by Hawks are 50. and The goals made by Blazers are 60

Explanation:
Given , The ratio of shots taken by the Blazers to shots taken by the Hawks is 6 : 5
the percent of successful shots for each team in a hockey game is  Blazers is 10% , Hawks is 16% ,
The goals made by Blazers are w = ? , a = 6 , p = 10%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{6}{w}\) = \(\frac{10}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{6 × 100}{10}\)
w = \(\frac{600}{10}\)
w = 60
So, The goals made by Blazers are 60
The goals made by Hawks  are w= ? , a = 5 , p = 16%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{5}{w}\) = \(\frac{10}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{5 × 100}{10}\)
w = \(\frac{500}{10}\)
w = 50
So , The goals made by Hawks are 50.

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks with positive numbers so that the sum of the fractions is 37.5% of the first fraction. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 2
Answer:  \(\frac{2}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{0.1}{4}\)) = 37.5%

Explanation:
Let us say that missing values be x and y
we have ,\(\frac{x}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{y}{4}\))
To get the simplified answer cross check the values of x and y
If x = 2 and y = 0.1 ,then
\(\frac{2}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{0.1}{4}\))
0.4 – 0.025 = 0.375
0.375 can be written as 37.5%
So ,  \(\frac{2}{5}\) + (- \(\frac{0.1}{4}\)) = 37.5%

Question 3.
The graph shows the distance traveled by a motorcycle on a dirt road. After turning onto a paved road, the motorcycle travels \(\frac{1}{5}\) mile every \(\frac{1}{4}\) minute. Find the percent of change in the speed of the motorcycle. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 3
Answer: The percent of change in the speed of the bike is 38%

Explanation:
speed of the bike on the dirty road  is  \(\frac{2.33}{4}\) = 0.58
speed of the bike on the paved road is \(\frac{0.2}{0.25}\) = 0.8
old value = 0.58 , new value = 0.8 ,
The amount of change = 0.8 – 0.58  = 0.22
So , percent of change is \(\frac{amount of change }{original amount}\)
= \(\frac{ 0.22}{0.58}\)
= 0.379
= 0.379 × 100
= 37.9 = 38%
So, the percent of change is 38%

Performance Task

Tornado Alley
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Tornado!” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cc 4
Answer:

Percents Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 1
percent of change : It is the percent that a quantity changes from the original amount =  \(\frac{amount of change }{original amount}\)
Example:
2 feet to 6 feet
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 6 and old value = 2 , because a change of 2 to 6 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{6 – 2}{2}\)
= \(\frac{4}{2}\)
= 2 × 100
= 200%
So, percent of change is 200%

percent of increase: When the original amount increases then the percent of change is called percent of increase = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
Example:
5 cups to 10 cups
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 10 and old value = 5 , because a change of 5 to 10 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{10 – 5}{5}\)
= \(\frac{5}{5}\)
= 1 × 100
= 100%
So, percent of increase is 100%

percent of decrease:  When the original amount decrease then the percent of change is called percent of decrease =\(\frac{old value – New value}{old value}\)
Example:
15 inches to 12 inches
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{old value – new value}{old value}\)
where New value = 12 and old value = 15 , because a change of 15 to 12 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{15 – 12}{15}\)
= \(\frac{3}{15}\)
= 0.2 × 100
= 20%
So, percent of decrease is 20%

percent error: It is the percent that estimated value differs from Actual value \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
Example:
Estimated value = 40 , Actual value = 30
The amount of error is  40 – 30 = 10
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 10 and Actual value = 30 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{10}{30}\)
= 0.333
= 0.333 × 100
=  33.3%
So, percent Error is 33.3%

Discount:  It is a decrease in amount of original price of an item
Example:
A box is $5 with 20% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80% of the original price
sales price = 80% of 5
= 0.8 × 5 = 4
So, The sales price is $4.

Markup: The increase from what the stores pays to the selling price is called as Markup
Example:
The markup is 15% of $40
a = p% × w
= 15% × 40
= 0.15 × 40
= 6
So , the markup is $6.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $40 + $6
= $46.
The selling price is $46.

Interest: A money paid or earned for using or lending money is called interest
Example:
A bank offers a loan of $500 with an interest of $10 .
Here $10 is the interest amount to be paid for the loan

Principal: The amount of money borrowed or deposited
Example:
A bank offers a loan of $500 with an interest of $10 .
here the loan amount is the principal amount

Simple Interest: It is the money paid or earned only on the principal I = Prt , where I = simple interest , P = principal , r = rate of interest , t = time in years
Example:
A bank offers a loan of $500 with an interest rate of 3% for 2 years  . the simple interest is
p = $500 , r  = 0.03 , t = 2
I = 500 × 0.03 × 2
I = 30
So , The simple interest is $15 .

Graphic Organizers
You can use a Summary Triangle to explain a concept. Here is an example of writing a percent as a decimal a Summary Triangle for Writing a percent as a decimal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 2

Answer: Summary triangle for writing a decimal into percent is 
Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 3
1. writing a decimal as a percent
2. comparing and ordering fractions, decimals, and percents
3. the percent proportion
4. the percent equation
5. percent of change
6. discount
7. markup

Writing a decimal as a percent

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 4

6.1 Fractions, Decimals, and Percents (pp. 235–240)
Learning Target: Rewrite fractions, decimals, and percents using different representations.

Write the percent as a decimal or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 1.
74%
Answer: decimal form is 0.74

Explanation: 
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 74% in decimal form is 0.74

Question 2.
2%
Answer: decimal form is 0.02

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 2% in decimal form is 0.02

Question 3.
221%
Answer: decimal form is 2.21

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 221% in decimal form is 2.21

Question 4.
0.17
Answer: 17%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.17 can be rewrite as 17%

Question 5.
\(4 . \overline{3}\)
Answer: \(433. \overline{3} \%\)

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, \(4 . \overline{3}\) can be rewrite as \(433. \overline{3} \%\)

Question 6.
0.079
Answer: 7.9%

Explanation:
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.079  can be rewrite as 7.9%

Write the fraction as a decimal and a percent.
Question 7.
\(\frac{17}{20}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.85, percent = 85%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{17}{20}\) as  0.85 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.85 can be rewrite as 85%
So,\(\frac{17}{20}\) in decimal = 0.85, percent = 85%

Question 8.
\(\frac{3}{8}\)
Answer: decimal = 0.375, percent = 37.5%

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{3}{8}\) as  0.375 in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then 0.375 can be rewrite as 37.5%
So, \(\frac{3}{8}\) in decimal = 0.375, percent = 37.5%

Question 9.
\(\frac{14}{9}\)
Answer: decimal = \(1 . \overline{5}\), percent = \(155. \overline{5} \%\)

Explanation:
By using the method of converting fraction into decimal and comparing ,
We can rewrite \(\frac{14}{9}\) as  \(1. \overline{5}\) in decimal form,
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol , then \(1 . \overline{5}\)can be rewrite as \(155. \overline{5} \%\)
So, \(\frac{14}{9}\) in decimal = \(1 . \overline{5}\), percent = \(155. \overline{5} \%\)

Question 10.
For school spirit day, 11.875% of your class wears orange shirts, \(\frac{5}{8}\) of your class wears blue shirts, 0.15625 of your class wears white shirts, and the rest of your class wears gold shirts. Order the portions of shirts of each color from least to greatest. Justify your answer.
Answer:  In ascending order we have 10.1% , 15.6% , 62.5% , 11.875%

Explanation:
Given , 11.875% of your class wears orange shirts,
\(\frac{5}{8}\) of your class wears blue shirts,
It can be written as 0.625 in decimals and 62.5% in percent
0.15625 of your class wears white shirts,
it can be written as 15.6%
And the rest of your class wears gold shirts.
Let the total be 100% , The percent in all colors is 11.875% + 62.5% +  15.6%  = 89.9%
So , the rest of the girls wears 100% – 89.9% = 10.1% ,
In ascending order we have 10.1% , 15.6% , 62.5% , 11.875%

6.2 The Percent Proportion (pp. 241–246)
Learning Target: Use the percent proportion to find missing quantities.

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 11.
What percent of 60 is 18?
Answer: 18 is 30% of 60.

Explanation:
Given , a = 18 , w = 60 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{60}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{18 × 100}{60}\)
p = \(\frac{1800}{60}\)
p = 30
So, 18 is 30% of 60.

Question 12.
40 is what percent of 32?
Answer: 40 is 125% of 32.

Explanation:
Given , a = 40 , w = 32 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{40}{32}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{40 × 100}{32}\)
p = \(\frac{4,000}{32}\)
p = 125
So, 40 is 125% of 32.

Question 13.
What number is 70% of 70?
Answer: 49 is 70% of 70.

Explanation:
Given , a = ? , w = 70 , p = 70%
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{70}\) = \(\frac{70}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{70 × 70}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{4900}{100}\)
a = 49
So, 49 is 70% of 70.

Question 14.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) is 75% of what number?
Answer: 0.75 is 755% of 1.

Explanation:
we can write \(\frac{3}{4}\) as 0.75 in decimal
Given , a = 0.75 , w = ? , p = 75%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{0.75}{w}\) = \(\frac{75}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{0.75 × 100}{75}\)
w = \(\frac{75}{755}\)
w = 1
So, 0.75 is 755% of 1.

Question 15.
About 29% of the Earth’s surface is covered by land. The total surface area of the Earth is about 510 million square kilometers. What is the area of the Earth’s surface covered by land?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 15
Answer: The area of the Earth’s surface covered by land is 147.9 million square kilometers .

Explanation:
Given , p = 29% , w = 510 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{510}\) = \(\frac{29}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{510 × 29}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{14,790}{100}\)
a = 147.9
So, 147.9 is 29% of 510.
The area of the Earth’s surface covered by land is 147.9 million square kilometers .

6.3 The Percent Equation (pp. 247–252)
Learning Target: Use the percent equation to find missing quantities. Write and solve an equation to answer the question.
Question 16.
What number is 24% of 25?
Answer: 6 is 24% of 25.

Explanation:
Given p = 24% , w = 25 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{25}\) = \(\frac{24}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{25 × 24}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{600}{100}\)
a = 6
So, 6 is 24% of 25.

Question 17.
9 is what percent of 20?
Answer: 9 is 45% of 20.

Explanation:
Given p = ? , w = 20 , a = 9
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{9}{20}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{9 × 100}{20}\)
p = \(\frac{900}{20}\)
p = 45
So, 9 is 45% of 20.

Question 18.
60.8 is what percent of 32?
Answer: 60.8 is 190% of 32.

Explanation:
Given p = ? , w = 32, a = 60.8
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{60.8}{32}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{60.8 × 100}{32}\)
p = \(\frac{6080}{32}\)
p = 190
So, 60.8 is 190% of 32.

Question 19.
91 is 130% of what number?
Answer: 91 is 130% of 70.

Explanation:
Given p = 130% , w = ? , a = 91
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{91}{w}\) = \(\frac{130}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{91 × 100}{130}\)
w = \(\frac{9100{130}\)
w = 70
So, 91 is 130% of 70.

Question 20.
85% of what number is 10.2?
Answer: 10.2 is 85% of 12.

Explanation:
Given p = 85% , w = ? , a = 10.2
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{10.2}{w}\) = \(\frac{85}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{10.2 × 100}{85}\)
w = \(\frac{1020}{85}\)
w = 12
So, 10.2 is 85% of 12.

Question 21.
83% of 20 is what number?
Answer: 16.6 is 83% of 20.

Explanation:
Given p = 83% , w = 20 , a = ?
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{20}\) = \(\frac{83}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{20 × 83}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1,660}{100}\)
a = 16.6
So, 16.6 is 83% of 20.

Question 22.
15% of the parking spaces at a school are handicap spaces. The school has 18 handicap spaces. How many parking spaces are there in total?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 22
Answer: Totally , there are 120 parking spaces .

Explanation:
Given , p = 15% , a = 18 , w = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{18}{w}\) = \(\frac{15}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{18 × 100}{15}\)
w = \(\frac{1800}{15}\)
w = 120
So, 18 is 15% of 120.
Totally , there are 120 parking spaces .

Question 23.
Of the 25 students on a field trip, 16 bring cameras. What percent of the students bring cameras?
Answer: 64% of students brought the cameras .

Explanation:
Given , a = 16 , w = 25 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{16}{25}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{16 × 100}{25}\)
p = \(\frac{1600}{25}\)
p = 64
So, 16 is 64% of 25.
Thus, 64% of students brought the cameras .

6.4 Percents of Increase and Decrease (pp. 253–258)
Learning Target: Find percents of change in quantities.

Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 24.
6 yards to 36 yards
Answer: percent of change is 500%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 36 and old value = 6 , because a change of 6 to 36 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{36 – 6}{6}\)
= \(\frac{30}{6}\)
= 5× 100
= 500%
So, percent of change is 500%

Question 25.
120 meals to 52 meals
Answer: percent of change is – 56.6%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 52 and old value = 120 , because a change of 120 to 52 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{52 – 120}{120}\)
= \(\frac{- 68}{120}\)
= – 0.566
= – 0.566 × 100
= – 56.6%
So, percent of change is – 56.6%

Question 26.
You estimate that a jar contains 68 marbles. The actual number of marbles is 60. Find the percent error.
Answer: percent Error is 13%

Explanation:
The amount of error is 68 – 60 = 8
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 8 and Actual value = 60 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{8}{60}\)
= 0.133
= 0.133 × 100
=  13.3%
Approximately we can write as 13%
So, percent Error is 13%

Question 27.
The table shows the numbers of skim boarders at a beach on Saturday and Sunday. What was the percent of change in boarders from Saturday to Sunday?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 27
Answer: percent of change is – 12.5%

Explanation:
Given , 12 to 9
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 63 and old value = 72 , because a change of 72 to 63 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{63 – 72}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 9}{72}\)
= \(\frac{- 1}{8}\)
= – 0.125
= – 0.125 × 100
= – 12.5%
So, percent of change is – 12.5%

6.5 Discounts and Markups (pp. 259–264)
Learning Target: Solve percent problems involving discounts and markups.

Find the sale price or original price.
Question 28.
Original price: $50
Discount: 15%
Sale price: ?
Answer: The sales price is $42.5

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 15% = 85% of the original price
sales price = 85% of 50
= 0.85 × 50 = 42.5
So, The sales price is $42.5

Question 29.
Original price: ?
Discount: 20%
Sale price: $75
Answer: The original price is $93.75.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 20% = 80%
a = p% × w
75 = 0.8 × w
w = \(\frac{75}{0.8}\)
w = 93.75
So, The original price is $93.75.

Question 30.
What is the original price of the tennis racquet?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 30
Answer: The original price is $30.

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70%
a = p% × w
21 = 0.7 × w
w = \(\frac{21}{0.7}\)
w = 30
So, The original price is $30.

Question 31.
A store pays $50 for a pair of shoes. The markup is 25%.
a. What is the selling price for the shoes?
b. What is the total cost for a person to buy the shoes including a 6% sales tax?
Answer: a. The selling price is $62.5.
b. Total cost for a person is  $66.25 .

Explanation:
The markup is 25% of $50
a = p% × w
= 25% × 50
= 0.25 × 50
= 12.5
So , the markup is $12.5.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $50 + $12.5
= $62.5.
The selling price is $62.5.

b. with 6% sales tax we have ,
6% of $62.5
= 0.06 × 62.5
= 3.75 , it is the tax rate
So , total cost for a person is $62.5 + $3.75 = $66.25

6.6 Simple Interest (pp. 265–270)
Learning Target: Understand and apply the simple interest formula.

An account earns simple interest. (a) Find the interest earned. (b) Find the balance of the account.
Question 32.
$300 at 4% for 3 years
Answer: a. The interest earned is $36
b. The balance of the account is $336 .

Explanation:
we know P = $300 , r = 0.04 , t = 3 years
I = prt
I = 300 × 0.04 × 3
I = 3 × 4 × 3
I = $36
The interest earned is $36
The balance of the account  = $300 + $36 = $336 .

Question 33.
$2000 at 3.5% for 4 years
Answer: a. The interest earned is $280
b. The balance of the account  is $2,280 .

Explanation:
we know P = $2000 , r = 0.035 , t = 4 years
I = prt
I = 2000 × 0.035 × 4
I = 2 × 35 × 4
I = $280
The interest earned is $280
The balance of the account  = $2000 + $280 = $2,280 .

Find the annual interest rate.
Question 34.
I = $17, P = $500, t = 2 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 1.7% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{17}{500 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{17}{1000}\)
= 0.017
we can write in percent as 1.7%
So , The annual interest rate is 1.7% .

Question 35.
I = $426, P = $1200, t = 5 years
Answer: The annual interest rate is 7.1% .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{426}{1200 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{426}{6000}\)
= 0.071
we can write in percent as 7.1%
So , The annual interest rate is 7.1% .

Find the amount of time.
Question 36.
I = $60, P = $400, r = 5%
Answer: The amount of time is 3 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{60}{400 × 0.05}\)
= \(\frac{60}{20}\)
= 3
So, The amount of time is 3 years .

Question 37.
I = $237.90, P = $1525, r = 2.6%
Answer: The amount of time is 6 years .

Explanation:
We know that  I = Prt
t = \(\frac{I}{Pr}\)
= \(\frac{237.9}{1525 × 0.026}\)
= \(\frac{237.9}{39.65}\)
= 6
So, The amount of time is 6 years .

Question 38.
You deposit $100 in an account. The account earns $2 simple interest in 6 months. What is the annual interest rate?
Answer: The annual interest rate is 12%

Explanation:
Given , p = $100 , I = $2 , t = 6 months ,
We know that  I = Prt
So , r = \(\frac{I}{Pt}\)
r = \(\frac{2 × 6}{100}\)
= \(\frac{12}{100}\)
= 0.12
we can write in percent as 12%
So , The annual interest rate is 12%

Question 39.
Bank A is offering a loan with a simple interest rate of 8% for 2 years. Bank B is offering a loan with a simple interest rate of 6.5% for 3 years.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cr 39
a. Assuming the monthly payments are equal, what is the monthly payment for the four wheeler from Bank A? from Bank B?
b. Give reasons for why a person might choose Bank A and why a person might choose Bank B for a loan to buy the four wheeler. Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a. The monthly payment for bank A is $261 and for Bank B is $179.25 .
b. If a person chooses Bank A , it will be high in monthly payment but within 2 years loan will be cleared .
If a person chooses Bank B , it will be low monthly payment and can pay the loan a year extra in small amounts.

Explanation:
For bank A , Then p = $5400 , r = 0.08 , t = 2 years
I = Prt
I = 5400 × 0.08 × 2
I = 54 × 8 × 2
I = 864
The simple interest of one bank = $864 .
The balance of the account will be = $5400 + $864 = $6,264 .
The monthly payment = \(\frac{6,264}{24}\) = $261 .

For bank B,  Then p = $5400 , r = 0.065 , t = 3 years
I = Prt
I = 5400 × 0.065 × 3
I = 54 × 6.5 × 3
I = 1,053
The simple interest of one bank = $1,053 .
The balance of the account will be = $5400 + $1,053 = $6,453 .
The monthly payment = \(\frac{6,453}{36}\) = $179.25 .

b. If a person chooses Bank A , it will be high in monthly payment but within 2 years loan will be cleared .
If a person chooses Bank B , it will be low monthly payment and can pay the loan a year extra in small amounts.

Percents Practice Test

Write the percent as a decimal, or the decimal as a percent. Use a model to represent the number.
Question 1.
0.96%
Answer: 0.0096

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 0.96% in decimal form is 0.0096

Question 2.
3%
Answer: 0.03

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, 3% in decimal form is 0.03

Question 3.
\(25 . \overline{5} \%\)
Answer: \(0 .25 \overline{5}\)

Explanation:   
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(25 . \overline{5} \%\) in decimal form is \(0 .25 \overline{5}\)

Question 4.
\(0 . \overline{6} \%\)
Answer: \(0 .006\overline{6}\)

Explanation:
To write percent into decimal we have to remove percent symbol and divide by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the left.
So, \(0 . \overline{6} \%\)  in decimal form is\(0 .006 \overline{6}\)

Question 5.
7.88
Answer: 788%

Explanation: 
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 7.88 can be rewrite as 788%

Question 6.
0.58
Answer: 58%

Explanation: 
To write decimal into percent we should multiply the number by 100, which moves the decimal point two places to the right and add a percent symbol.
So, 0.58 can be rewrite as 58%

Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Question 7.
86%, \(\frac{15}{18}\), 0.84, \(\frac{8}{9}\), \(0 . \overline{86} \%\)
Answer: The numbers from least to greatest are  \(0 .00 \overline{86}\) , \(0 .8 \overline{3}\) , 0.84 , 0.86 , \(0 .\overline{8}\)

Explanation:
86%,  in decimals as 0.86
\(\frac{15}{18}\), can be \(0 .8 \overline{3}\)
\(\frac{8}{9}\),  can be \(0 .\overline{8}\)
\(0 . \overline{86} \%\) can be written as \(0 .00 \overline{86}\)
So, The numbers from least to greatest are  \(0 .00 \overline{86}\) , \(0 .8 \overline{3}\) , 0.84 , 0.86 , \(0 .\overline{8}\)

Question 8.
91.6%, 0.91, \(\frac{11}{12}\), 0.917, 9.2%
Answer:  The numbers from least to greatest are 0.092 , 0.91 , 0.916 , \(0 .91\overline{6}\) , 0.917 .

Explanation:
91.6%, can be written as 0.916
\(\frac{11}{12}\), ca be written as \(0 .91\overline{6}\)
9.2% can be written as 0.092
So, The numbers from least to greatest are 0.092 , 0.91 , 0.916 , \(0 .91\overline{6}\) , 0.917 .

Write and solve a proportion or equation to answer the question.
Question 9.
What percent of 28 is 21?
Answer:  21 is 75% of 28.

Explanation:
Given , a = 21 , w = 28 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{21}{28}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{21 × 100}{28}\)
p = \(\frac{2100}{28}\)
p = 75
So, 21 is 75% of 28.

Question 10.
64 is what percent of 40?
Answer: 64 is 160% of 40.

Explanation:
Given , a = 64 , w = 40 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{64}{40}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{64 × 100}{40}\)
p = \(\frac{6400}{40}\)
p = 160
So, 64 is 160% of 40.

Question 11.
What number is 80% of 45?
Answer: 36 is 80% of 45.

Explanation:
Given , a = ? , w = 45 , p = 80%
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{45}\) = \(\frac{80}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{45 × 80}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{3600}{100}\)
a = 36
So, 36 is 80% of 45.

Question 12.
0.8% of what number is 6?
Answer: 6 is 0.8% of 750.

Explanation:
Given , a = 6 , w = ? , p = 0.8%
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{6}{w}\) = \(\frac{0.8}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{6 × 100}{0.8}\)
w = \(\frac{600}{0.8}\)
w = 750
So, 6 is 0.8% of 750.

Identify the percent of change as an increase or a decrease. Then find the percent of change. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent if necessary.
Question 13.
4 strikeouts to 10 strikeouts
Answer: percent of change is 150%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 10 and old value = 4 , because a change of 4 to 10 is a positive (increase) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{10 – 4}{4}\)
= \(\frac{6}{4}\)
= 1.5 × 100
= 150%
So, percent of change is 150%

Question 14.
$24 to $18
Answer: percent of change is – 25%

Explanation:
We know that , formula for percent change = \(\frac{New value – old value}{old value}\)
where New value = 18 and old value = 24 , because a change of 24 to 18 is a negative (decrease) change
So, percent change = \(\frac{18 – 24}{24}\)
= \(\frac{- 6}{24}\)
= – 0.25
= – 0.25 × 100
= – 25%
So, percent of change is – 25%

Find the sale price or selling price.
Question 15.
Original price: $15
Discount: 5%
Sale price: ?
Answer: The sales price is $14.25

Explanation:
We know , The sales price be 100% – 5% = 95% of the original price
sales price = 95% of 15
= 0.95 × 15 = 14.25
So, The sales price is $14.25

Question 16.
Cost to store: $5.50
Markup: 75%
Selling price: ?
Answer: The selling price is $9.625.

Explanation:
The markup is 75% of $5.50
a = p% × w
= 75% × 5.5
= 0.75 × 5.5
= 4.125
So , the markup is $4.125.
To , find the selling price , we have
selling price = cost to store + markup
= $5.5 + $4.125
= $9.625.
The selling price is $9.625.

An account earns simple interest. Find the interest earned or the principal.
Question 17.
Interest earned: ?
Principal: $450
Interest rate: 6%
Time: 8 years
Answer: The interest earned is $216 .

Explanation:
we know P = $450 , r = 0.06 , t = 8 years
I = prt
I = 450 × 0.06 × 8
I = 27 × 8
I = $216
The interest earned is $216 .

Question 18.
Interest earned: $27
Principal: ?
Interest rate: 1.5%
Time: 2 years
Answer: The principal is $900 .

Explanation:
Given , P = ? , I = $27 , t = 2 years , r = 0.015
We know that  I = Prt
So , p = \(\frac{I}{rt}\)
p = \(\frac{27}{0.015 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{27}{0.03}\)
= 900
So, The principal is $900 .

Question 19.
You spend 8 hours each weekday at school. (a) Write the portion of a weekday spent at school as a fraction, a decimal, and a percent. (b) What percent of a week is spent at school if you go to school 4 days that week? Round to the nearest tenth.
Answer: a. the portion of a weekday spent at school is 33% , It can be written as \(\frac{100}{3}\) and in decimal as 0.333
b . The 9% of a week is spent at school if you go to school 4 days that week.

Explanation:
Given , You spend 8 hours each weekday at school.
a. In a day we have 24 hours so , The percent of 8 hours in 24 hours is
a = 8 , w = 24 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{8}{24}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{8 × 100}{24}\)
p = \(\frac{800}{24}\)
p = 33.3 %
It can be written as \(\frac{100}{3}\) and in decimal as 0.333
So, 8 is 33% of 24.

b. The number of hours in a week  , that is 7 days are 168 hours
The number of hours in 4 days to school are 32
So , we have a = 32 , w = 168 , p = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{32}{168}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
p = \(\frac{32 × 100}{168}\)
p = \(\frac{3200}{168}\)
p = 9.04 %
p = 9%
So , The 9% of a week is spent at school if you go to school 4 days that week.

Question 20.
Research indicates that90% of the volume of an iceberg is below water. The volume of the iceberg above the water is 160,000 cubic feet. What is the volume of the iceberg below water?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents pt 20
Answer: The volume of the iceberg below water is  1,77,777 cubic feet

Explanation:
Given , p = 90% , a = 160,000 , w = ?
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{160,000}{w}\) = \(\frac{90}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{160,000 × 100}{90}\)
w = \(\frac{1050}{125}\)
w = 1,77,777.7
So, the volume of the iceberg below water is  1,77,777 cubic feet

Question 21.
You estimate that there are 66 cars in a parking lot. The actual number of cars is 75.
a. Find the percent error.
b. What other estimate gives the same percent error? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: a. percent Error is 12%
b, If the estimated number is 66.1 then percent error will be 12%

Explanation:
The amount of error is 75 – 66 = 9
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 9 and Actual value = 75 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{9}{75}\)
= 0.12
= 0.12 × 100
=  12%
So, percent Error is 12%

b. if the estimation is 66.1
The amount of error is 75 – 66.1 = 8.9
We know that , formula for percent error = \(\frac{Error value}{Actual value}\)
where Error value = 8.9 and Actual value = 75 ,
So, percent Error = \(\frac{8.9}{75}\)
= 0.1198
= 0.1198 × 100
=  11.9%
Apporximately 12%
So, percent Error is 12%

Percents Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 1
Question 1.
A movie theater offers 30% a movie ticket to students from your school. The regular price of a movie ticket is $8.50. What is the discounted price that you pay for a ticket?
A. $2.55
B. $5.50
C. $5.95
D. $8.20
Answer:  C. $5.95

Explanation:
Given , original price = $8.5 , with 30% off
We know , The sales price be 100% – 30% = 70% of the original price
sales price = 70% of 8.5
= 0.7 × 8.5 = 5.95
So, The sales price is $5.95.

Question 2.
What is the least value of x for which the inequality is true?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 2
16 ≥ – 2x
Answer: x = 1

Explanation:
Let us say X = 1
16 ≥ – 2(1)
16 ≥ – 2
So , x = 1 , for 16 ≥ – 2x

Question 3.
You are building a scale model of a park that is planned for a city. The model uses the scale 1 centimeter = 2 meters. The park will have a rectangular reflecting pool with a length of 20 meters and a width of 12 meters. In your scale model, what will be the area of the reflecting pool?
F. 60 cm2
G. 120 cm2
H. 480 cm2
I. 960 cm2
Answer:  F .  60 cm2

Explanation:
Given ,actual  l = 20 meters , The model uses the scale 1 centimeter = 2 meters.  let the model length be x
The model length x will be , \(\frac{1cm}{2m}\) = \(\frac{x cm}{20m}\)
2x = 20
x = 10 ,
Let the model width be y , The model width y will be \(\frac{1 cm}{2m}\) = \(\frac{y}{12}\)
y= 6 ,
So The model area of the reflecting pool , Area of rectangle = l × w
l = 10 , y = 6 , then A = 10 × 6 = 60 cm2
The model area of the reflecting pool is 60 cm2

Question 4.
Which proportion represents the problem?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 4
Answer: D . \(\frac{43}{n}\) = \(\frac{17}{100}\)

Explanation:
Given ,  p = 17% , a = 43
By using proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{43}{w}\) = \(\frac{17}{100}\)
w = \(\frac{43 × 100}{17}\)
w = \(\frac{4300}{17}\)
w = 252.9
So, 43 is 17% of 252.9.

Question 5.
Which list of numbers is in order from least to greatest?
F. 0.8, \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.09
G. 0.09, \(\frac{5}{8}\), 0.8, 70%
H. \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.8, 0.09
I. 0.09, \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.8
Answer: H. \(\frac{5}{8}\), 70%, 0.8, 0.09

Explanation:
Given,
\(\frac{5}{8}\) can be written as 0.625 ,
70% can be written as 0.7
The order from least to greatest  is  \(\frac{5}{8}\) , 70% , 0.8 , 0.9

Question 6.
What is the value of \(\frac{9}{8}\) ÷ (-\(\frac{11}{4}\))?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 6
Answer: the value of \(\frac{9}{8}\) ÷ (-\(\frac{11}{4}\)) is – 0.413

Explanation:
\(\frac{9}{8}\)  can be written as  1.125
–\(\frac{11}{4}\) can be written as  – 2.75
then , \(\frac{1.125}{-2.75}\) = – 0.413

Question 7.
The number of calories you burn by playing basketball is proportional to the number of minutes you play. Which of the following is a valid interpretation of the graph?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 7
A. The unit rate is \(\frac{1}{9}\) calorie per minute.
B. You burn 5 calories by playing basketball for 45 minutes.
C. You do not burn any calories if you do not play basketball for at least 1 minute.
D. You burn an additional 9 calories for each minute of basketball you play.
Answer: C. You do not burn any calories if you do not play basketball for at least 1 minute.

Explanation:
As , the graph shows the coordinates of the minutes to calories by (0,0) at the initial stage of playing basketball for at least a minute .
So , the graph represents , You do not burn any calories if you do not play basketball for at least 1 minute.

Question 8.
A softball team is ordering uniforms. Each player receives one of each of the items shown in the table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 8
Which expression represents the total cost (in dollars) when there are 15 players on the team?
F. x + 24.86
G. 15x + 372.90
H. x + 372.90
I. x + 387.90
Answer: G. 15x + 372.90

Explanation:
Given , jersey = x
So , the only option in the options with an x for 15 members is 15x ,
So, G. 15x + 372.90 is the correct option

Question 9.
Your friend solves the equation. What should your friend do to correct the error that he made?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 9
A. Multiply – 45 by – 3.
B. Add 3 to – 45.
C. Add 2 to – 15.
D. Divide – 45 by – 3.
Answer: A. Multiply – 45 by – 3.

Explanation:
Given , – 3(2 + w) = -45
By , Multiply – 45 by – 3.
we get 2 + w = 15
w = 15 – 2
w = 13.

Question 10.
You are comparing the costs of a certain model of ladder at a hardware store and at an online store.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 10
Part A What is the total cost of buying the ladder at each of the stores? Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Part B Suppose that the hardware store is offering 10% off the price of the ladder and that the online store is offering free shipping and handling. Which store offers the lower total cost for the ladder? by how much? Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Answer: Part A , The total cost at hardware store is $371 and The total cost at online store is $355.2
Part B ,The hardware store offers the best price $336 by $3.2 less than the online store $339.2

Explanation:
Part A , The ladder cost at hardware store is $350 , with 6% tax ,
So, 6% of 350
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{350}\) = \(\frac{6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{350 × 6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{2100}{100}\)
a = 21
So, 21 is 6% of 350.
The total cost at hardware store is $350 + $ 21 = $371

The ladder cost at online store is $320 , with 6% tax ,
So, 6% of 320
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{320}\) = \(\frac{6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{320 × 6}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1920}{100}\)
a = 19.2
So,19.2 is 6% of 320.
Additionally shipping cost is 5% of $320
By using percent proportion , we have
\(\frac{a}{w}\) = \(\frac{p}{100}\)
\(\frac{a}{320}\) = \(\frac{5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{320 × 5}{100}\)
a = \(\frac{1600}{100}\)
a = 16
So,16 is 5% of 320.
The total cost at online store is $320 + $ 19.2 + $16 = $355.2

Part B, If the hardware store offers 10% off
Then , We know , The sales price be 100% – 10% = 90% of the original price
sales price = 90% of 350
= 0.9 × 350 = 315
So, The sales price is $315 .
The 6% of 320  is  $21
The total cost in hardware store after 10% off is $315 + $ 21 = $336

The online store offers free shipping and handling then the price will be $320 and 6% tax
So , 6% of 320  is $19.2
The total cost online store is $320 + $ 19.2 = $339.2

The hardware store offers the best price $336 by $3.2 less than the online store $339.2

Question 11.
Which graph represents the inequality – 5 – 3x ≥ – 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents cp 11
Answer:

Explanation:11
Option F represents the x value from -4 to 2
So , if x = -4 ,
Then – 5 – 3(-4) ≥ – 11
-5 + 12 ≥ – 11
7 ≥ – 11
if x = 2
– 5 – 3(2) ≥ – 11
-5 – 6 ≥ – 11
-11 ≥ – 11
So, option F represents the inequality – 5 – 3x ≥ – 11.

Final Conclusion:

We have given Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 6 Percents Pdf free links here. Download BIM Grade 7 Chapter 6 Pdf from the direct links given in the above section. We wish you make use of the given information and score better marks in the exam. If you have any doubts you can easily clear them within the below-given comment section. All the best to all the candidates!!

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14

Follow the free study guide i.e Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data Answers available here. It has various topics that every student must know before going for the next chapter. This BIM Answers 3rd Grade 14th Chapter Represent and Interpret Data is useful to finish the homework in time and prepare for the exams. Hence, download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data pdf for free of cost and begin the preparation.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data Answers

To ease your learning, we have given Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 14th Chapter Represent and Interpret Data Solution Key which is designed by the subject experts. So, students and teachers are no need to worry if you have any doubts in questions. Make use of this Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data to score good marks in the exams.

The various topics covered in Represent and Interpret Data are Read and Interpret Picture Graphs, Make Picture Graphs, Read and Interpret Bar Graphs, Make Bar Graphs, Make Line Plots, Measure Lengths: Half Inch, and Measure Lengths: Quarter Inc. Practice questions from all these topics and attend performance task at the end to cross-check your learning skills. Students can also tap on the quick links provided below to get the solutions.

Lesson 1 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Lesson 2 Make Picture Graphs

Lesson 3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Lesson 4 Make Bar Graphs

 Lesson 5 Make Line Plots

Lesson 6 Measure Lengths: Half Inch

Lesson 7 Measure Lengths: Quarter Inch

Performance Task

Lesson 14.1 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Explore and Grow
You survey 14 students about their favorite type of party. The results are shown on the left picture graph. Use the key to represent the same data on the right picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 1

Answer:
In left side
the bounce house has 6 students
the costume has 2 students
the pool has 4 students
and skating has 2 students.
And on the right side
the bounce house was represented with 6 students as 1×6= 6
the costume was represented with 2 students as 1×2= 2
the pool was represented with 4 students as 1×4= 4
and skating was represented with 2 students as 1×2= 2.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 1
Here, we can see that the left side was given each emoji was equal to 2 students
so bounce house has three emojis which means 3×2= 6 students
the costume has one emoji which means 1×2= 2 students
the pool has two emojis which means 2×2= 4 students
and skating has one emoji which means 1×2= 2 students.
So to represent the same data on the right picture graph
here, we can see that in the right picture graph,
one emoji is equal to 1 student, so
the bounce house has  6 students which means 6×1= 6 emojis will be placed
the costume has 2 students which means 2×1= 2 emojis will be placed
the pool has 4 students which means 4×1= 4 emojis will be placed
and skating has 2 students which means 2×1= 2 emojis will be placed.

Structure
You ask one more student to name his favorite type of party. He chooses a pool party. How can you represent this on each graph? Explain.
Answer:
On the left side, we will add half emoji, and on the right side, we will add one emoji.

Explanation:
On the left side, we will represent the pool party by half emoji as on the left side one emoji is equal to 2 students, so to add one student we will place half emoji. And on the right side, we will represent the pool party by one emoji as on the right side one emoji is equal to 1 student, so to add one student we will place one emoji.

Think and Grow : Read and Interpret Picture Graphs
A picture graph shows data using pictures or symbols. The key of a picture graph gives the value of one picture or symbol. The value of one picture, or symbol, can be greater than 1.
Example
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 2

Answer:
There are 6 national forests in Arizona.
There are 5 national forests in Colorado.

Explanation:
Given that one full tree is equal to two forests, and the half tree is equal to 1 forest.
In Arizona, there are 3 full trees which means 3×2= 6 national forests
and in Colorado, there are 2 full trees which means 2×2= 4 national forests, and a half tree which means 1×1= 1 national forest. So the total number of national forests is 4+1= 5 national forests.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the graph to answer the questions. How many students chose dog? How many students chose fish?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 3
Answer:
The number of students who chose the dog is 30 students
The number of students who chose the fish is 15 students.

Explanation:
Given one emoji is equal to 10 students,
as we can see three emojis for the dog
so the number of students who chose the dog is
3×10= 30 students.
And we can see one emoji and a half emoji for the fish
so the number of students who chose the fish is
1×10= 10 students and 1×5= 5 students
so the total number of the students who chose fish are
10+5= 15 students.

Question 2.
Use the graph to answer the questions. What does the symbol Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 4 represent?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 5
How many more students did not choose sledding?
Answer:
The total number of students who didn’t choose sledding is 7+4+6= 17 students.

Explanation:
Here, each emoji represents 2 students, and to find the number of students who didn’t choose sledding
we will add all the students of the other three activities rather than sledding
so in the skiing activity, there are three emojis and half emoji
which is 3×2= 6 students and 1×1= 1 students,
so the total number of students who choose skiing is 6+1= 7 students.
and in the snowboarding activity, there are two emojis which are 2×2= 4 students.
so the total number of students who choose snowboarding is 4 students.
in the sledding activity, there are four emojis and half emoji
which is 4×2= 8 students and 1×1= 1 students,
so the total number of students who choose skiing is 8+1= 9 students.
And in the ice skating activity, there are three emojis,
which is 3×2= 6 students.
So the total number of students who choose skiing is 6 students.
And the total number of students who didn’t choose sledding are 7+4+6= 17 students.

Question 3.
Use the graph to answer the questions. How many mangoes were eaten in June?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 6
How many total mangoes were eaten in the months shown? Were more mangoes eaten in July or in June and August combined?
Answer:
The number of mangoes eaten in June is 21 mangoes.
The total number of mangoes eaten is 21+42+18= 81 mangoes.
Yes in the month of July more mangoes are eaten.

Explanation:
Given each emoji represents 6 mangoes,
so in the month of June, there are three emojis,
which means 3×6= 18 and a half emoji means 6/2= 3.
So the total number of mangoes eaten in June is 18+3= 21 mangoes.
in the month of July, there are seven emojis
which means 7×6= 42, so the total number of mangoes eaten in July is 42 mangoes.
in the month of August, there are three emojis,
which means 3×6= 18, so the total number of mangoes eaten in august is 18 mangoes.
The total number of mangoes eaten is 21+42+18= 81 mangoes.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 7 on a picture graph, then what value does Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 8 represent? Explain.

Answer:
10.

Explanation:
Let the single ball be 10 and then the half ball will be 5,
so 10+10+5= 25.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

During which two weeks were a total of 52 cans recycled?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 9
During ___ and ___ 52 cans were recycled.
Answer:
During week 3 and week 4 52 cans were recycled.

Explanation:
In week 1 the number of cans recycled is 8+8+8+4= 28 cans
In week 2 the number of cans recycled is 8+8+8+8= 32 cans
In week 3 the number of cans recycled is 8+4= 12 cans
In week 4 the number of cans recycled is 8+8+8+8+8= 40 cans
so during week 3 and week 4, 52 cans were recycled.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Which two origami animals did a total of 32 students choose?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 10
How many more students chose a frog or penguin than swan or butterfly?
Answer:
The two origami animals that did a total of 32 students are Swan and Penguin.

Explanation:
Given each emoji represents 4 students
The two origami animals did a total of 32 students are
Swan has three emojis and half emoji
which means 3×4= 12 and a half emoji means 4/2= 2
so the total number of students is 12+2= 14 students.
and Penguin has four emojis and half emoji
which means 4×4= 16 and a half emoji means 4/2= 2
so the total number of students is 16+2= 18 students.
The two origami animals that did a total of 32 students are Swan and Penguin.
How many more students chose frog or penguin than swan or butterfly
Butterfly has two emojis and half emoji
which means 2×4= 8 and a half emoji means 4/2= 2
so the total number of students is 8+2= 10 students.
and Frog has six emojis, which means 6×4= 24 students.
so the total number of students is 10+24= 34 students.
so there are 34-32= 2 more students who choose frog or penguin than Swan or Butterfly.

Read and Interpret Picture Graphs Homework & Practice 14.1

Question 1.
Use the graph to answer the questions. What value does the symbol Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 11 represent?
How many students chose pterodactyl?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 12
How many students chose stegosaurus or velociraptor?
How many students did choose tyrannosaur?
Answer:
The value of half emoji represents 5 students.
The total number of students who choose pterodactyl is 45 students.
The total number of students who chose stegosaurus or velociraptor is 60 students.
the total number of students who choose tyrannosaur is 20 students.

Explanation:
Given each emoji represent 10 students, and
In pterodactyl, there are four emojis and half emoji which means
4×10= 40 and a half emoji represents 10/2= 5
the total number of students who choose pterodactyl is 40+5= 45 students.
In stegosaurus, there are two emojis and half emoji which means
2×10= 20 and a half emoji represents 10/2= 5
the total number of students who choose stegosaurus is 20+5= 25 students.
In velociraptor, there are three emojis and half emoji which means
3×10= 30 and a half emoji represents 10/2= 5
the total number of students who choose velociraptor is 30+5= 35 students.
The total number of students who chose stegosaurus or velociraptor is 60 students.
In tyrannosaur, there are five emojis which means
2×10= 20 and the total number of students who choose tyrannosaur is 20 students.

Question 2.
Use the graph to answer the questions.
How many dogs participated in the survey?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 13
Which dog treat has more votes than biscuits, but fewer votes than peanut butter? How many dogs chose this treat?
Answer:
The total number of dogs that participated in the survey are 30 dogs.
Dog bone dog treat has more votes than biscuits and fewer votes than peanut butter. And 8 dogs choose this treat.

Explanation:
Given each emoji represent two dogs
so dog bone has four emojis which means 4×2= 8 dogs
Peanut butter has five emojis which means 5×2= 10 dogs
Cheese has two emojis and half emoji which means
2×2= 4 and a half emoji represents 1 dog
so the total number of dogs is 4+1= 5 dogs.
Biscuits have three emojis and half emoji which means
3×2= 6 and a half emoji represents 1 dog
so the total number of dogs is 6+1= 7 dogs.
So the total number of dogs who participated in the survey are
8+10+5+7= 30 dogs.
Dog bone dog treat has more votes than biscuits and fewer votes than peanut butter.
And 8 dogs choose this treat.

DIG DEEPER!
Why would it be difficult to use a key where the value of one symbol represents an odd number of dogs?
Answer:
It would be difficult to use a key where the value of one symbol represents an odd number of dogs because if the symbol is half then the value will be in decimals and we cannot divide the dog into decimals, so it’s difficult to represent an odd number.

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says that one more dog likes peanut butter than dog bones. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, Newton is correct

Explanation:
Yes, Newton is correct. We can see in the table that the number of dogs who likes peanut butter is more than the dogs who like a dog bone. So Newton is correct.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Which creature has 3 more eyes than the squid?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 14
Answer:
The creature which has 3 more eye images than the squid is the spider which has four eye images.

Explanation:
Given each eye image represents 2 eyes
as we can see squid contains one eye image, which means 2 eyes
the spider has four eye images, which means 4×2= 8 eyes
Praying mantis has three eye images and half eye image, which means
3×2= 6 eyes and half eye image represents 1 eye
so the total number of eyes is 6+1= 7 eyes.
Starfish has three eye images, which means
3×2= 6 eyes.
So the creature which has 3 more eye images than the squid is the spider which has four eye images
and the creature has 3 more eyes than the squid is the spid=r, praying mantis, and starfish.

Review & Refresh

Find the area of the shape.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 15
Area = ___
Answer:
The area of the shape is 20 square centimeters.

Explanation:
To find the area of the shape, we will divide the shape into parts, and then we will find the area of the shape.
So we will divide the shape into two rectangles,
the length of rectangle 1 is 7 cm, and
the breadth of rectangle 1 is 2 cm
so the area of rectangle 1 is
area= length×breadth
= 7×2
= 14 square centimeters.
the length of rectangle 2 is 3 cm, and
the breadth of rectangle 2 is 2 cm
so the area of rectangle 2 is
area= length×breadth
= 3×2
= 6 square centimeters.
So the total area of the shape is
14+6= 20 square centimeters.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 16
Area = ___
Answer:
The area of the rectangle is 15 square meters.

Explanation:
The length of the rectangle is 5 m, and
the breadth of the rectangle is 3 m
so the area of the rectangle is
area= length×breadth
= 5×3
= 15 square meters.
The area of the rectangle is 15 square meters.

Lesson 14.2 Make Picture Graphs

Explore and Grow

Flip a two-color counter 10 times. Record the results. Then complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 17
Reasoning
Why might you change the key if you flip the counter 100 times?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Make Picture Graphs

A frequency table is a table that gives the number of times something occurs.
Example
You survey students about their favorite planet. The frequency table shows the results. Use the table to complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 18
Step 1: Write the title at the top of the picture graph. Label a row for each category.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 19
Step 2: Look at the numbers Saturn in the table. Choose a value for the key.
Step 3: Use the key to decide how many symbols you need for each planet. Then draw the symbols.
Answer:
Earth needs five symbols,
Mars needs three symbols,
Saturn needs six symbols, and
Jupiter needs four symbols.

Explanation:
The number of students who chooses Saturn is 30 students and the value for the key is six symbols.
By using the key the planet Earth needs five symbols,
Mars needs three symbols,
Saturn needs six symbols, and
Jupiter needs four symbols.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 2

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the frequency table to complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 20
Answer:
Each circle represents three books

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 3
Each circle represents three books
To represent in a picture graph
June will be represented with two circles,
July will be represented with one circle,
August will be represented in three circles.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Use the frequency table to complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 21
How many symbols did you draw to represent 10 inches of snowfall in March?
How many inches do you think April would receive?
Answer:
Each circle represents 5 inches

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 4
Each circle represents 5 inches
To represent in a picture graph
January will be represented with six circles,
February will be represented with five circles,
March will be represented with two circles.

Question 3.
Use the frequency table to complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 22
Structure
Choose a different value for the key. How would the picture graph change?
Answer:
Each emoji represents 4 students.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 5
Each emoji represents 4 students
To represent in a picture graph
Flying will be represented with eight emojis,
Time travel will be represented with eight emojis,
Super strength will be represented with three emojis,
Invisibility will be represented with six emojis,
Super speed will be represented with seven emojis.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You survey 90 students about their favorite type of field trip. 35 students choose science center, 10 choose theater, and 20 choose zoo. The rest of the students choose museum. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 23
Answer:
Each emoji represents 5 students.
The total number of students who choose the Museum is 25 students.

Explanation:
Let’s take each emoji represents 5 students,
As the Science center was chosen by 35 students, which means we can represent with 35/5= 7 emojis,
The theater was chosen by 10 students, which means we can represent with 10/5= 2 emojis,
Zoo was chosen by 20 students, which means we can represent with 20/5= 4 emojis,
so to know how many students choose Museum, we will add all the three field students and then subtract from the total number of the students, so
The number of students from the three fields is 35+10+20= 65 students
and the number of students who choose the Museum is 90-65= 25 students.
And the Museum was chosen by 25 students, which means we can represent with 25/5= 5 emojis.

Show and Grow

Question 4.
You survey 48 students about their favorite type of movie. 8 students choose cartoon, 12 choose action, and 24 choose comedy. The rest of the students choose musical. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 24
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 25
All of the students who chose the musical go to see a movie. Each ticket costs $9.The students use two $20 bills to pay for all of the tickets. What is the change?
Answer:
Each emoji represent 4 students.
The remaining change will be $4.

Explanation:
Let’s take that each emoji represent 4 students.
The total number of students who participated in the survey are 48 students,
and in that eight students chooses cartoon, which means we can represent with 8/4= 2 emojis,
and 12 students choose an action, which means we can represent with 12/4= 3 emojis,
and 24 students choose comedy, which means we can represent with 24/4= 6 emojis,
so to know how many students choose Musical, we will add all the three type of movie students and then subtract from the total number of the students, so
The number of students from three types of movies is 8+12+24= 44 students
and the number of students who choose the Musical are 48-44= 4 students.
And the Musical was chosen by 4 students, which means we can represent with 4/4= 1 emoji.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 7
The total number of students who choose a musical type of movie is 4 students and each ticket costs $9. So for a total of 4 students, it will cost 4×$9= $36. As two students use $20 bills and four students, it will take $40 bill for all of the tickets. So the remaining change will be $40-$36= $4.

Make Picture Graphs Homework & Practice 14.2

Question 1.
Use the frequency table to complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 27
Which type of art has more votes than painting, but fewer votes than crafts? How many students chose that type of art?
Answer:
Ceramic has more votes than painting and fewer votes than Crafts. So the total number of students who choose Ceramic is 25 students.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 8
Each emoji represents 5 students
To represent in a picture graph
Drawing will be represented with two emojis,
Ceramics will be represented with five emojis,
The painting will be represented with three emojis,
Crafts will be represented with six emojis.
Ceramic has more votes than painting and fewer votes than Crafts. So the total number of students who choose Ceramic is 25 students.

Question 2.
Use the frequency table to complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 28
Answer:
Each circle represents 3 insects.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 9
Each circle represents 3 insects.
To represent in a picture graph
Ant will be represented with eight circles,
Bee will be represented with one circle,
Ladybug will be represented with four circles.
DIG DEEPER!
You see 1 more bee and 4 more ladybugs. How might you change the key?
Answer:
We might change the key by each circle with 4 insects

Explanation:
In the above, we can see Bee has three insects and if we add one more bee then the number of insects will be
3+1= 4 insects.
And in the above, we can see ladybugs have 12 insects and if we add four more ladybugs then the number of insects will be 12+4= 16 insects.
So we might change the key by each circle with 4 insects,
so that bee will be represented with one circle,
and the ladybug will be represented with 16/4= 4 circles.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You survey 72 students about their favorite carnival ride. 12 choose Ferris wheel, 24 choose swings, and 6 choose bumper cars. The rest of the students choose roller coaster. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 29

Answer:
Let’s take that each emoji represent 6 students.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 10
Let’s take that each emoji represent 6 students.
The total number of students who participated in the favorite carnival ride survey are 72 students,
and in that twelve students chooses Ferris wheel, which means we can represent with 12/6= 2 emojis,
and 24 students choose swings, which means we can represent with 24/6= 4 emojis,
and 6 students choose bumper cars, which means we can represent with 6/6= 1 emoji,
so to know how many students choose roller coaster, we will add all the three types of carnival ride students and then subtract from the total number of the students, so
The number of students from three types of carnival rides is 12+24+6= 42 students
and the number of students who choose the roller coaster is 72-42= 30 students.
And the roller coaster was chosen by 30 students, which means we can represent with 30/6= 5 emojis.

Modeling Real Life
All of the students who chose roller coaster want to ride together. Each ride ticket costs $2. The students have three $10 bills and four $5 bills. Will they have enough to ride the roller coaster together?
Answer:
No. they don’t have enough money.

Explanation:
As there are a total number of students who choose roller coaster ride are 30 students, so ride ticket costs for 30 students is 30×$2= $60. As three students have a $10 bill which means $10×3= $30 and four students have a $5 bill which means $5×4= $20. So together the students have $30+$20= $50, and they need $60. So they don’t have enough money.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
532 + 54 = ___
Answer:
532 + 54 = 586.

Explanation:
On adding 532 and 54 we will get 586.

Question 5.
718 + 226 = ___
Answer:
718+226= 944.

Explanation:
On adding 718 and 226 we will get 944.

Question 6.
81 + 647 = ___
Answer:
81+647= 728.

Explanation:
On adding 81 and 647 we will get 728.

Lesson 14.3 Name Read and Interpret Graphs

Explore and Grow

You survey 12 students about their favorite school club. The results are shown on the picture graph. Represent the same data on the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 30

Answer:
The drama was chosen by 4 students,
Math was chosen by 2 students,
Robotics was chosen by 6 students.

Explanation:
Given each emoji represents two students,
To represent in a bar graph
Drama is represented with two emojis, which is 2×2= 4 students
Math is represented with one emoji, which is 1×2= 2 students
Robotics is represented with three emojis, which is 3×2= 6 students.
and represented in the graph as shown below.

Structure
How would you change the scale of the bar graph to match the picture graph?
Answer:
The number of students will be represented with 2,4,6,8, etc., and change the scale of the bar graph to match the picture graph.

Think and Grow:
A bar graph shows data using bars. The scale of a bar graph is the group of labels that shows the values at equally spaced grid lines.
Example
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 31
How many gold medals did Jamaica win?
Jamaica won ___ gold medals.
Which country won the fewest gold medals?
__ won the fewest gold medals.
Answer:
Jamaica won 6 gold medals.
Sweden won the fewest gold medals.

Explanation:
In the above graph, we can see Jamaica won 6 gold medals and Sweden won the fewest gold medals.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 32
How many students chose grapes? Which fruit is the most favorite?
Answer:
Grapes were chosen by 10 students and the most favorite fruit is Apples.

Explanation:
In the above bar graph, we can see the number of students who chosen grapes are 10 students, and the most favorite fruit apples and the number of students who choose are 45 students.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 33
How many students does each grid line represent? How many students chose fall? Which season is the least favorite?
Answer:
Each grid line represents four students and the fall was chosen by 18 students and the least favorite season is winter.

Explanation:
In the above bar graph, we can see that each grid line represents four students and we can see that the fall was chosen by 18 students. And the least favorite season is winter because winter was chosen by 10 students.

Question 3.
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 34
How many vegetable seeds did the farmer plant in all? The farmer wants to plant green bean seeds. She plants more green bean seeds than zucchini seeds, but fewer than carrot seeds. How many green bean seeds could the farmer have planted? The farmer plants 30 more potato seeds. Will the farmer have more potatoes or more corn?
Answer:
The number of vegetable seeds did the farmer plant in all is four vegetables.
The number of green bean seeds that the farmer can plant is between 61 to 79 seeds.
The farmer will have more corn seeds than potato seeds.

Explanation:
As we can see in the bar graph the number of vegetable seeds is four. As we can see the number of zucchini seeds planted is 60 seeds and the number of carrot seeds planted is 80 seeds. As she planted more green bean seeds than zucchini seeds and fewer than carrot seeds, so the green bean seeds can be in between 61 to 79 seeds.
As we can see in the bar graph, the corn seeds are 95 seeds and the potato seeds are 45 seeds, so if 30 more seeds are added then the total potato seeds will be 45+30= 75 seeds. So farmers will have more corn seeds than potato seeds.

Question 4.
Writing
Do you think a bar graph or a picture graph is easier to read? Explain.
Answer:
A picture graph is easier to read than a Bar graph.

Explanation:
A picture graph was represented using pictures or symbols and a bar graph was represented using bars and compares the data in each category using bars. So the picture graph is easier than a bar graph because in a picture graph we can easily calculate the values than in the bar graph.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

How many more students need to choose the strategy app so that strategy is the most favorite?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 35
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:
Solve:
___ more students need to choose the strategy app so it is the most favorite.
Answer:
22 more students need to choose the strategy app so it is the most favorite.

Explanation:
As we can see in the above bar graph the strategy app was chosen by 20 numbers and if this strategy app needs to be the most favorite, then 22 more students needed to be chosen.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Each grade needs to plant 20 trees. How many more trees does second grade need to plant to complete the goal?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 36
How many more trees did fourth-grade plant than first grade and third grade combined?
Answer:
Second grade needs 6 more trees to plant to complete the goal.
The number of more trees that fourth-grade plant than first grade and third grade are 2 trees.

Explanation:
As we can see in the above bar graph, the second-grade students planted 14 trees and each grade needs to plant 20 trees. So second-grade needs 20-14= 6 more trees to plant to complete the goal.
The fourth grade planted 20 trees and first grade planted 8 trees and the third grade planted 10 plants,
so the total combined trees of first grade and third grade are 8+10= 18 trees. So the number of more trees that fourth-grade plant than first grade and third grade are 20-18= 2 trees.

Name Read and Interpret Graphs Homework & Practice 14.3

Question 1.
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 37
How many students does each grid line represent? Which type of exercise is the least favorite? How many fewer students chose running than swimming? How many students chose walking or biking?
Answer:
Each grid line represents 10 students.
The 5 fewer students choose running than swimming.
Walking was chosen by 15 students and biking was chosen by 45 students.

Explanation:
As we can see in the bar graph that each grid line represents 10 students. And in the bar graph, we can see the skating contains 10 number of students which is the least favorite. The number of students who choose running is 30 students and the number of students who choose swimming is 35 students. So the 5 fewer students choose running than swimming. In the bar graph, we can see that walking was chosen by the 15 number of students, and biking was chosen by 45 students.

Question 2.
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 38
Which sunflowers are taller than 11 feet? Sunflower E has a height of 15 feet. How much taller is Sunflower A than Sunflower E?
Writing
Which sunflower is the shortest? Explain.
Answer:
The sunflowers which are taller than 11 feet are Sunflower A and Sunflower D.
Sunflower A is 11 feet taller than Sunflower E.
Sunflower C is the shortest.

Explanation:
As we can see in the bar graph that the Sunflower A is 26 feet and Sunflower D is 16 feet, and Sunflower B is 10 feet, Sunflower C is 10 feet. So Sunflower A and Sunflower D are taller than 11 feet. Sunflower A is 26 feet and Sunflower E is 15 feet. So the Sunflower A is 26-15= 11 feet taller than Sunflower E. Sunflower C is the shortest, because Sunflower C has the least number of feet.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the graph to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 40
How many more students need to choose chameleon so that chameleon is the most favorite? You survey 10 more students and they all choose snake. What is the new total number of students who chose snake? How many more students chose turtle than bearded dragon and lizard combined?
Answer:
There must be 9 more number of students needed to choose Chameleon to be the most favorite.
The new total number of students who choose the snake is 19 students.
There are 3 students more students who choose turtle than bearded dragon and lizard.

Explanation:
As we can see in the bar graph that the total number of students is 30 and in that Chameleon was chosen by 21 number of students. So to choose chameleon as a most favorite then the total number should choose are 30-21=9 students. As we can see in the bar graph the total number of students who choose a snake is 9 students and if 10 more students choose a snake, then the total number of students who choose a snake will be 9+10=19 students. As we can see in the bar graph that the turtle was chosen by 27 students and the bearded dragon was chosen by 18 students and the lizard was chosen by 6 students. So the total number of students who choose bearded dragon and lizard are 18+6= 24 students and the turtle was chosen by 27 students, so there are 27-24= 3 students more students chooses turtle than bearded dragon and lizard.

Review & Refresh

Estimate the difference.

Question 4.
96 – 47 = __
Answer:
96-47= 49.
Explanation:
The difference between 96 and 47 is 49.

Question 5.
678 – 142 = ___
Answer:
678-142= 536.
Explanation:
The difference between 678 and 142 is 536.

Lesson 14.4 Make Bar Graphs

Explore and Grow

Spin the Color Spinner 10 times. Record the results. Then complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 41
Answer:
Reasoning
Explain how you would change the scale if you spin the spinner 100 times.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Make Bar Graphs

Example
You record the number of times each baseball team wins. The frequency table shows the results. Use the table to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 42
Step 1: Write the title at the top of the bar graph. Label a row for each category. Label the categories.
Step 2: Look at the numbers in the table. Use a scale so that most of the bars end on a grid line. Label the scale.
Step 3: Draw and shade a bar for each team.
Answer:
Each grid line represents three wins.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 13
As given the values of the number of wins are the multiples of 3, so we will represent the number of wins with the multiples of 3. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents three wins.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the frequency table to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 43
Answer:
Each grid line represents two number of students.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 12
In the given frequency table, we can see most of the values are multiplies of 2. So we represent the number of students by the multiplies of 2. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents two number of students.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Use the frequency table to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 44
How would you use the graph to decide which type of fingerprint is the most common?
Answer:
To decide which type of fingerprint is used most commonly, we will compare the heights of the bars, and then we will choose the most common fingerprint.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 14
In the given frequency table, we can see most of the values are multiplied by 25. So we represent the number of students by the multiplies of 25. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents twenty-five number of students.

Question 3.
Use the frequency table to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 45
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 46
How many fewer students chose the least favorite type of food than the most favorite type of food?
Answer:
The least favorite type of food chosen by vegetarians and the most favorite type of food was chosen by Mexican.
And each grid line represents four number of students.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 15

In the given frequency table, we can see most of the values are multiplies of 4. So we represent the number of students by the multiplies of 4. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents four number of students.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You survey 27 students about their favorite subject. Nine students choose science. Six fewer students choose English than science. The rest of the students choose math. Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 47
Answer:
Each grid line represents three number of students.
The total number of students who choose math is 15 students.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 16
In the given frequency table, we can see most of the values are multiplies of 3. So we represent the number of students by the multiplies of 3. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents three number of students.
As the total number of students for the survey is 27 students in that nine students choose science, and six fewer students choose English than Science, which means 9-6= 3. So 3 students choose Science. And the rest of the students chooses math, which means we add the two subjects and then subtract from the total number of students, then we can get the value of the students who choose math. So the total number of students who choose English and Science are 9+3= 12 and then subtract with the total number of students, which means 27-12= 15. So the total number of students who choose math is 15 students.

Show and Grow

Question 4.
You survey 22 students about their favorite camp activity. Eight students choose archery. Four more students choose swimming than archery. The rest of the students choose hiking. Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 48
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 49
How many fewer students chose archery than swimming and hiking combined?
Answer:
Six fewer students chose archery than swimming and hiking combined.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 17
In the given frequency table, we can see most of the values are multiplies of 2. So we represent the number of students by the multiplies of 2. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents three number of students.
The number of students who choose archery is eight students and in that four more students choose swimming than archery, which means 8+4= 12 students choose swimming. And the rest choose hiking, which means we will add the number of students who choose archery and swimming and then subtract the value with the total number of students. So the number of students who choose archery and swimming is 8+12= 20, and the number of students who choose hiking is 22-20= 2. The total number of students who choose swimming and hiking combined is 12+2= 14 students, and archery was chosen by 8 students. So 14-8= 6 fewer students choose archery than swimming and hiking combined.

Make Bar Graphs Homework & Practice 14.4

Question 1.
Use the frequency table to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 50
How many students does each grid line represent? How would you use the graph to find the most favorite type of music?
Answer:
Each grid line represents five number of students. By using the graph, we will compare the heights of the graphs and pick the most favorite music.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 18

As given the values of the number of students are the multiples of 5, so we will represent the number of students with the multiples of 5. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents five number of students. By using the graph, we will compare the heights of the graphs and pick the most favorite music.

Question 2.
Use the frequency table to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 51
Structure
On the last day of school, each backpack weighs less than 5 pounds. How could the scale of the bar graph change?
Answer:
We will subtract the given values by 5 pounds and then we will represent those values in a graph.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 19

As given the values of the number of pounds are the multiples of 4, so we will represent the number of pounds with the multiples of 4. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents four pounds. As on the last day, each backpack weighs less than 5 pounds, which means we will subtract the given values by 5, and then we will represent those values in a graph.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You survey 26 teachers about their favorite vacation spot. Six teachers choose amusement park. Two more teachers choose camping than amusement park. The rest of the teachers choose beach. Complete the bar graph.
How many fewer teachers chose camping than amusement park and beach combined?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 52
Answer:
The beaches were chosen by 12 teachers.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 20
As given the values of the number of teachers are most of them are multiples of 2, so we will represent the number of teachers with the multiples of 2. To represent these values in a bar graph, we will represent those data with rectangular bars with proper heights and lengths by the given values. And those bars are plotted vertically or horizontally. In the above bar graph, we can see each grid line represents five number of students. By using the graph, we will compare the heights of the graphs and pick the most favorite music. As amusement park was chosen by six teachers and two more teachers choose camping than the amusement park, so camping was chosen by 6+2= 8 teachers. And the rest of the teachers choose the beach, which means we will add both the vacation amusement park and camping and then subtract by the total number of teachers. So the total number of teachers who choose both amusement parks and camping is 6+8= 14 teachers, so the teachers who choose the beach are 26-14= 12 teachers.

Review & Refresh

Find the difference.

Question 4.
474 – 19 = ___
Answer:
474 – 19 = 455.

Explanation:
The difference between 474 and 19 is 455.

Question 5.
615 – 204 = ___
Answer:
615 – 204 = 411.

Explanation:
The difference between 615 and 204 is 411.

Question 6.
232 – 53 = ___
Answer:
232 – 53 =179.

Explanation:
The difference between 232 and 53 is 179.

Lesson 14.5 Make Line Plots

Explore and Grow

A teacher asks students to line up according to the number of siblings they have. The results are shown. Create a Line Plot for the number of siblings the students in your class have.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 53
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-14-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-55

Explanation:
The students that have 0 siblings in the line plot 1 is 2,
The students that have 1 sibling in the line plot 1 is 11,
The students that have 2 siblings in the line plot 1 is 5,
The students that have 3 siblings in the line plot 1 is 2,
The students that have 0 siblings in the line plot 2 is 1,
The students that have 1 sibling in the line plot 2 is 6,
The students that have 2 siblings in the line plot 2 is 3,
The students that have 3 siblings in the line plot 2 is 2.
Structure
Compare the two line plots. How are the line plots the same? How are they different?
Answer:
The line plots are the same in that each class has a maximum of 3 siblings and varies in the count of siblings.

Explanation:
Comparing the two-line plots we can see the count of siblings varies and the two number line plots are the same that the class has the maximum number of siblings is 3.

Think and Grow: Make Line Plots
A lion plot uses marks above a number line to show data values.
Example
The table shows the weights of 15 bald eagles. Use the table to complete the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 54
Step 1: write the title at the top of the line plot.
_____________
Step 2 : Look at the numbers in the table. Use a scale that shows all of the data values. Draw a number line using the scale. Label the scale.
Step 3 : Mark an X for each data value.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 55
Answer:
A line plot can be defined as a graph that displays the given data as a point above a number line.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-14-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-55
The eagles that weigh 3kgs are 2,
The eagles that weigh 4kgs are 6,
The eagles that weigh 5kgs are 4,
The eagles that weigh 6kgs are 2.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the table to complete the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 56
Answer:
A line plot can be defined as a graph that displays the given data as a point above a number line.

Explanation:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 21
A line plot can be defined as a graph that displays the given data as a point above a number line. As the given values are mostly are multiples of 3, so we will represent the number of inches by multiples of 3. And now we will place the check marks on the given values.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Use the table to complete the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 57
How many waves were 26 feet tall or taller?
Answer:
There are 11 waves that were 26 feet tall or taller.

Explanation:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 28

A line plot can be defined as a graph that displays the given data as a point above a number line. As the given values are mostly a series of numbers from 25 to 30, so we will represent the number of feet by a series of numbers from 25 to 30. And now we will place the check marks on the given values.

Question 3.
Use the table to complete the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 58
Which giraffe tongue length is the most common?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 59
Answer:
The most common giraffe tongue lengths are 20 inches.

Explanation:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 29

A line plot can be defined as a graph that displays the given data as a point above a number line. As the given values are mostly a series of numbers from 17 to 21, so we will represent the number of feet by a series of numbers from 17 to 21. And now we will place the check marks on the given values. The most common giraffe tongue lengths are 20 inches.

Precision
How many giraffe tongues are 19 inches long?
Answer:
The 19 inches long giraffe tongues are 3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

What is the difference in height of the tallest student and the shortest student?
Subtraction equation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 60
The difference in height is ___ inches.
Answer:
The difference in height is 6 inches.

Explanation:
As we can see in the above number plot, the height of the tallest student is 56 inches, and the height of the shortest student is 50 inches. And the difference between them is 56-50= 6 inches.

Show and Grow

Question 4.
What is the difference between the greatest number of floors and the least number of floors?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 61
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 62
How many fewer skyscrapers are there with over 50 floors than skyscrapers with under 50 floors?
Answer:
The fewer skyscrapers are there with over 50 floors than skyscrapers with under 50 floors are 11.

Explanation:
The greatest number of floors is 8 floors and the least number of floors are 2,
so the difference between the greatest number of floors and the least number of floors is 8-2= 6.
The skyscrapers over 50 floors are 32 and the skyscrapers with under 50 floors are 21,
The fewer skyscrapers are there with over 50 floors than skyscrapers with under 50 floors are 32-21= 11.

Make Line Plots Homework & Practice 14.5

Question 1.
Use the table to complete the line plot.
____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 63
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 64
How many snakes are longer than 10 feet?
Which snake length is the most common?
Answer:
The snakes which are longer than 10 feet are 1.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-14-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-55
The number of snakes which are 5 feet are 1,
The number of snakes which are 6 feet are 3,
The number of snakes which are 7 feet are 3,
The number of snakes which are 8 feet are 0,
The number of snakes which are 9 feet are 2,
The number of snakes which are 10 feet are 4,
The number of snakes which are 11 feet is 1.

Question 2.
Use the table to complete the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 66
Reasoning
Are most of the students able to complete 30 sit-ups? Explain.

Answer:
No, the students who completed 30 sit-ups are 1 student.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-14-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-55
The number of students who completed 27 sit-ups is 6 students.
The number of students who completed 28 sit-ups is 1 student.
The number of students who completed 29 sit-ups is 3 students.
The number of students who completed 30 sit-ups is 1 student.
The number of students who completed 32 sit-ups is 3 students.

DIG DEEPER!
Student H completed more sit-ups than Student F, but fewer sit-ups than Student B. How many sit-ups could Student H have completed?
Answer:

Explanation:

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
What is the difference of the most number of miles biked and the least number of miles biked?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 67
Answer:
The most number of miles biked and the least number of miles biked 5.

Explanation:
The most number of miles biked are 6 bikes and the least number of miles biked is 1 bike,
so the difference between the most number of miles biked and the least number of miles biked is 6-1= 5.

Review & Refresh

Find the sum or difference. Use the inverse operation to check.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 68
Answer:
760

Explanation:
On adding 523 and 237 we will get 760. Here, we will subtract 237 with 760 to check the inverse operation, so 760-237= 523.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 69
Answer:
151.

Explanation:
The difference between 403 and 252 is 151. Here we will add 151 and 252 to check the inverse operation, so 252+151= 403.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 70
Answer:
999.

Explanation:
On adding 612 and 387 we will get 999. Here, we will subtract 387 with 999 to check the inverse operation, so 999-387= 612.

Lesson 14.6 Measure Lengths: Half Inch

Explore and Grow

How much longer is the green ribbon than the yellow ribbon? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 71

Answer:
The green ribbon is 1 inch longer than the yellow ribbon.

Explanation:
The green ribbon is 1 inch longer than the yellow ribbon. By measuring the ribbons using a ruler we can know that the green ribbon is longer than the yellow ribbon.

How much longer is the purple ribbon than the orange ribbon? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 72

Answer:
The purple ribbon is 1 inch longer than the orange ribbon.

Explanation:
The purple ribbon is 1 inch longer than the orange ribbon. By measuring the ribbons using a ruler we can know that the purple ribbon is longer than the orange ribbon.
Structure
How can you use a ruler to measure an object to the nearest half inch?
Answer:
If the object is closer to the half-inch mark than the zero inches then it’s half-inch is measured.

Explanation:
We will use the ruler by marking the objects it’s starting pointing and ending point and then measure the length of that object. If the object is closer to the half-inch mark than the zero inches then it’s half-inch is measured.

Think and Grow: Measure Lengths: Half Inch

Not all objects are whole numbers of inches long. You can use a ruler to measure length to the nearest half inch. Remember to line up the end of the object with 0.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 73
Example
Measure the length of each string to the nearest half inch. The string is \(\frac{3}{2}\) inches long. You can also represent the length as 1 whole inch and one \(\frac{1}{2}\) inch, or 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) inches.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 74
The string is between \(\frac{1}{2}\) inch and 1 inch long. The half-inch marking that is closest to end of the string is \(\frac{3}{2}\). So, the string is about \(\frac{3}{2}\) inch long.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 75

Example
Measure the length of each line to the nearest half inch. Then record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 76
Answer:
The number of strings with half-inch length is 1.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-14-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-55
The number of strings with half-inch length is 1,
The number of strings with one and half-inch length  is 1,
The number of strings with two-inch length  is 2,

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Measure the length of each line to the nearest half-inch. Then record each length on the line plot above.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 77
Answer:

Explanation:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Measure the length of each line to the nearest half inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 78
How might the scale change if the length of the line below is recorded on the line plot?
___________
Answer:

Question 3.
Measure the length of each toy to the nearest half inch. Then record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 79
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Measure the lengths of 10 crayons to the nearest half inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 80
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Measure the lengths of 10 shoes to the nearest half inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 81
What is the length of the longest shoe? What is the length of the shortest shoe?
Answer:

Measure Lengths: Half Inch Homework & Practice 14.6

Question 1.
Measure the length of each ribbon to the nearest half inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 82
How many pretzel sticks are 1 inch?
Answer:

Question 2.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says the pencil is 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) inches long. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 83
Answer:

Question 3.
Reasoning
Your friend’s wrist measures \(\frac{13}{2}\) inches around. His friendship bracelet is 6\(\frac{1}{2}\) inches. Will the bracelet fit around his wrist?
Answer:

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Measure the lengths of 10 plant leaves to the nearest half inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 84
What is the length of the longest leaf? What is the length of the shortest leaf? What leaf length is the most common?
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the product.

Question 5.
5 × 30 = ___
Answer:
150.

Explanation:
The product of 5×30 is 150.

Question 6.
9 × 50 = ___
Answer:
450.

Explanation:
The product of 9×50 is 450.

Question 7.
6 × 70 = ___
Answer:
420.

Explanation:
The product of 6×70= 420.

Lesson 14.7 Measure Lengths: Quarter Inch

Explore and Grow

How much longer is the green ribbon than the yellow ribbon? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 85
How much longer is the purple ribbon than the orange ribbon? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 86

Reasoning
Measure the line to the nearest half inch and the nearest quarter inch. Which measurement is better? Why?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 87
Answer:

Think and Grow : Measure Lengths: Quarter Inch

You know how to use a ruler to measure lengths to the nearest half inch. You can also use a ruler to measure lengths to the nearest quarter-inch.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 88
Example
Measure the length of each string to the nearest quarter inch. The string is \(\frac{7}{4}\) inches long. You can also represent the length as 1 whole inch and three \(\frac{1}{4}\) inches or 1\(\frac{1}{3}\) inches.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 89

The string is between 1 inch and 1\(\frac{1}{4}\) inches long. The quarter-inch marking that is closest to the end of the string is 1\(\frac{1}{4}\). So, the string is about 1\(\frac{1}{4}\) inches long.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 90

Example
Measure the length of each line to the nearest quarter inch. Then record each length on the line plot
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 91
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Measure the length of each line to the nearest quarter inch. Then record each length on the line plot above.
____ ______ ______
Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Measure the length of each line to the nearest quarter inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 92
How might the scale change if the two lines below are recorded in the line plot?
___________
____
Answer:

Question 3.
Measure the length of each eraser to the nearest quarter inch. Then record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 94
Answer:

Question 4.
Precision
Draw a line that measures 5\(\frac{3}{4}\) inches long.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Measure the lengths of 10 pencils to the nearest quarter inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 95
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Measure the heights of 10 books to the nearest quarter inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 96
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 97
Write and answer a question about your line plot.
Answer:

Measure Lengths: Quarter Inch Homework & Practice 14.7

Question 1.
Measure the length of each celery stick to the nearest quarter inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 98
Which celery stick length is the most common?
Answer:

Question 2.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which does not belong with the other three ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 99
Answer:

Question 3.
Precision
Find the length of the caterpillar to the nearest quarter inch. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 100
Answer:

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Measure the lengths of your 10 fingers to the nearest quarter inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 101
Write and answer a question about your line plot.
Answer:

Review & Refresh

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 102
Answer:
5/6 is shaded.

Explanation:
As we can see in the above image the circle was divided into 6 parts and in that 5 parts are shaded. So the fraction of the whole shaded part is 5/6 part was shaded.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 103
Answer:
2/4= 1/2 part was shaded.

Explanation:
As we can see in the rectangle was divided into four parts, and in that two parts are shaded. So the fraction of the whole shaded part is 2/4= 1/2 part was shaded.

Represent and Interpret Data Performance Task

Question 1.
You plant 3 bamboo seeds during the first week. You measure and record the growth of your bamboo plants for the next 3 weeks.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 104
a. Find the height of each plant after the fourth week. Make a bar graph of the plant heights.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 105

Explanation:
The height of each plant after the fourth week is
Plant A 4 in,
Plant B 4 in,
Plant C 5 in.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 26
b. Do you think any of the plants will be taller than 15 inches after 5 weeks? Explain.
Answer:
No, I think that no plant will be taller than 15 inches after 5 weeks.

Explanation:
No plant will be taller than 15 inches after 5 weeks, because we can see that the growth of each plant takes a minimum of 1 or 2 weeks.

Question 2.
a. Measure and record the height of each bamboo plant on Bamboo Growth to the nearest quarter inch.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 106
b. Which height occurs the most?
Answer:

Roll and Graph

Directions:
1. Players take turns rolling a die.
2. Record each of your rolls on your line plot.
3. The first player to get 10 rolls of one number wins!
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 107
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 108
Answer:

Represent and Interpret Data Chapter Practice

14.1 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Question 1.
Use the graph to answer the questions. How many tickets were sold in August?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 109
How many more tickets were sold in July or August than in May, June, or September?
Which month had more ticket sales than June, but fewer ticket sales than July? How many tickets were sold this month?
Answer:
The number of tickets sold in August is 80+10= 90 tickets.
50 tickets more were sold in July or August than in May, June, or September.
In the month of August the ticket sale is more than June, but fewer ticket sales than July. The total number of tickets sold in the month of August is 90 tickets.

Explanation:
As each ticket image represents 20 tickets and the half ticket represents 10 tickets so
The number of tickets sold in August is 4×20= 80 and one-half ticket represents 10
the number of tickets sold in August is 80+10= 90 tickets.
The tickets sold in July are 5×20= 100 and tickets sold in august are 90,
so the total number of tickets sold in July and August is 100+90= 190 tickets.
And the tickets sold in the month of May are 2×20= 40 tickets,
the tickets sold in the month of June are 3×20= 60 tickets and one half ticket image which is 10 tickets,
so the total number of tickets sold is 60+10= 70 tickets.
the tickets sold in the month of September are 1×20= 20tickets and one half ticket image which is 10 tickets,
so the total number of tickets sold is 20+10= 30 tickets.
The total tickets sold in the month of May, June, or September is 40+70+30=140,
So the tickets were sold in July or August than in May, June or September is 190-140= 50.
In the month of August the ticket sale is more than June, but fewer ticket sales than July. The total number of tickets sold in the month of August is 90 tickets.

14.2 Make Picture Graphs

Question 2.
You collect supplies for an animal shelter. You receive 4 collars, 20 tennis balls, 18 dog bones, and 12 cat toys. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 110
Answer:
Each circle is 2 supplies.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 25

Let each circle be 2 supplies,
As there are 4 collars, so we will represent them with two circles,
and 20 tennis balls, so we will represent them with ten circles,
and  18 dog bones, so we will represent them with nine circles,
and 12 cat toys we will represent them with six circles.

Question 3.
A zookeeper takes care of 30 animals. There are 6 monkeys, 12 flamingos, and 9 kangaroos. The rest of the animals are giraffes. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 111
Answer:
The number of giraffes is 3.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 24
Let each circle be 3 animals,
The total number of animals is 30,
As there are 6 monkeys, so we will represent them with two circles,
and the Flamingos is 12, so we will represent them with four circles,
the kangaroos are 9, so we will represent them with three circles,
so to find giraffes we will add all the three types of animals and then subtract them with the total number of animals, so 6+12+9= 27, and the total number of animals are 30.
So the number of giraffes is 30-27= 3 we will represent them with one circle.

14.3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Question 4.
Use the graph to answer the questions. How many more fireflies does your friend catch on Thursday than on Monday?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 112
Patterns
What do you notice about the number of fireflies caught from Monday to Thursday?

On which two days did your friend catch 10 fireflies combined?
You catch 5 fireflies on Monday, 4 fireflies on Tuesday, 8 fireflies on Wednesday, and 7 fireflies on Thursday. Who caught more fireflies at camp?
Answer: 24
The number of fireflies does my friend catch on Thursday than on Monday is 8.
We can observe that the increase in the graph from Monday to Thursday.
My friend caught more fireflies at camp than I.

Explanation:
The fireflies caught on Monday are 3 and the fireflies caught on Thursday are 11, so
the number of fireflies does my friend catch on Thursday than on Monday are 11-3= 8 fireflies.
We can observe that the increase in the graph from Monday to Thursday.
The fireflies caught by me are 5+4+8+7= 24 and the fireflies caught by my friend is 3+4+7+11= 25 files,
so my friend caught more fireflies at camp than I.

14.4 Make Bar Graphs

Question 5.
Use the frequency table to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 113
Another student, Student E, has 45 trading cards. How would the bar graph change?

Answer:
The bar of student E will be the highest.

Explanation:
As student E has 45 trading cards, then the bar of student E will be the highest.

Modeling Real Life
Including the number of trading cards of Student E, order the numbers of cards from least to greatest.
Answer:
The number of trading cards of Student E, order the numbers of cards from least to greatest are
Student C, Student B, Student D, Student A, and the student E.

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 23
The order of the number of cards from least to greatest are
Students C who has 10 cards,
Student B who has 15 cards,
Student D who has 15 cards,
Student A who has 30 cards,
and Student E who has 45 cards.

14.5 Make Line Plots

Question 6.
Use the table to complete the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 114

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data img 22

The number of  trees with 19 meters is 4 trees,
The number of  trees with 21 meters is 3 trees,
The number of  trees with 22 meters is 1 tree,
The number of  trees with 23 meters is 1 tree,
The number of  trees with 24 meters is 3 trees,

14.6 Measure Lengths: Half Inch

Question 7.
Measure the length of each snail trail from a snail race to the nearest half inch. Record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 115

Explanation:
The lengths of each snail trail from a snail race to the nearest half-inch are
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-14-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-55

Modeling Real Life
What is the length of the longest snail trail? What is the length of the shortest snail trail?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 116
Answer:
The longest snail trail is 6 inches and the shortest is 1/2 inch.

Explanation:
The length of the longest snail trail is 6 inches and the length of the shortest snail trail 1/2 inch.

14.7 Measure the Lengths: Quarter Inch

Question 8.
Measure the length of each feather to the nearest quarter inch. Then record each length on the line plot.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data 117
Answer:
To measure the feathers to the nearest quarter inch, we will label the marks and then measure the length to the nearest quarter inch.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-14-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-55
To measure the feathers to the nearest quarter inch, we will label the marks and then measure the length to the nearest quarter inch.
The length of feather 1 is 4 1/4 inch,
The length of feather 2 is 1/4 inch,
The length of feather 3 is 2 2/4 inch,
The length of feather 4 is 1/4 inch,
The length of feather 5 is 2 3/4 inch.

Final Words:

Download Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade 14th Chapter Represent and Interpret Data Answers pdf and start your preparation for the exams. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 14 Represent and Interpret Data is the best answer key that helps to improve your math skills. If you have any queries or doubts about Big Ideas Math Answers then please leave a comment below. Stay connected with our site to get more answer keys of other grades and grade 3 other chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4

Are you looking everywhere to learn about Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade 4th Chapter Fluently Add within 100 Answers? The answer key included topics like related addition questions. Those who are preparing for the BIM Grade 2 Chapter 4 will get the answer key which is extremely useful. You can improve the problem-solving skills by solving all the questions from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100.

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100

The list of topics in the 2nd Grade 4th Chapter Fluently Add within 100 are given below. Have a look at the answers for topics like Fluently Add within 100 Vocabulary, Use Partial Sums to Add, More Partial Sums, Regroup to Add, Add Two-Digit Numbers, Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers, Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers, and Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers. after solving this chapter, you will be able to solve addition problems.

Students must have the best preparation strategy to score good marks in the exam. Solve all the problems by checking the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100. Download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 PDF for free of cost and practice the problems.

Vocabulary

Lesson 1 Use Partial Sums to Add

Lesson 2 More Partial Sums

Lesson 3 Regroup to Add

Lesson 4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson 5 Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson 6 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson 7 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Performance Task

Activity

Chapter Practice

Cumulative Practice

Fluently Add within 100 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 1

Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 2

Answer:
In the above image, the group of rows and columns is known as an array.
The horizontal dots are known as rows.
The vertical dots are known as columns.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-2
Array:
An array means arranging the group rows and columns in a group. Mostly the data will be the same such as integers or strings and these are used to store the collected data. In the above image, the group of rows and columns is known as an array.
Column:
A column is a group of values that are represented vertically and will be in multiple rows and they run from top to bottom.
Row:
A row is a group of values that are represented horizontally which will be lying side by side in a horizontal line. These rows usually arranged in a straight line.

Define it

Use your vocabulary cards to match.

Question 1.
partial sums
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 3

Question 2.
regroup
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 4

Chapter 4 Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 5

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 6

Lesson 4.1 Use Partial Sums to Add

Explore and Grow

Model the problem. Make a quick sketch to show how you solved.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 7

Answer:
The sum f 32 + 27 is 59.

Explanation:
To model the given problem 32 + 27 we will model with 50 blocks and 9 blocks, as the sum of 32 + 27 is 59. So we will model with 50 blocks and 9 blocks.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 8

Answer:
The partial sum of 73 + 12 will be 80 + 5= 85.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-8
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 73 + 12 which is 85. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 2 will be 5. So the total value of 73 + 12 will be 80 + 5= 85.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 9

Answer:
The partial sum of 32 + 24 will be 50 + 6= 56.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-9
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with a left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 32 + 24 which is 56. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 4 will be 6. So the total value of 32 + 24 will be 50 + 6= 56.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 10

Answer:
The partial sum of 37 + 42 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-10
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with a left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 37 + 42 which is 79. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 2 will be 9. So the total value of 37 + 42 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 11

Answer:
The partial sum of 63 + 5 will be 60 + 8= 68.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-11
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 63 + 5 which is 68. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 5 will be 8. So the total value of 63 + 5 will be 60 + 8= 68.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 12

Answer:
The partial sum of 16 + 72 will be 80 + 8= 88.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-12
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 16 + 72 which is 88. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 2 will be 8. So the total value of 16 + 72 will be 80 + 8= 88.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 13

Answer:
The partial sum of 33 + 43 will be 70 + 6= 76.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-13
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 33 + 43 which is 76. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 3 will be 6. So the total value of 33 + 43 will be 70 + 6= 76.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 14

Answer:
The partial sum of 91 + 7 will be 90 + 8= 98.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-14
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 91 + 7 which is 98. So here first we will add tens which are 90 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 7 will be 8. So the total value of 91 + 7 will be 90 + 8= 98.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 15

Answer:
The partial sum of 25 + 64 will be 80 + 9= 89.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-15
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 25 + 64 which is 89. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 60 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 4 will be 9. So the total value of 25 + 64 will be 80 + 9= 89.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 16

Answer:
The missing digits are 2, 4, 2.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-16
Here, the missing digits are 2, 4, 2. We had found those values by subtracting the given sum and the addend. So we can get the missing value. In the first image, we can see that the addition of two addends. So here we can see that one number is missing in the second addend. So here we will subtract the addend with the sum which is
46 – 14 and the result will be 32. So we have found out the missing digit which is 2. And we can see in the second addition that one number is missing in the second addend. So here we will subtract the addend with the sum which is 69 – 45 and the result will be 24. So we have found out the missing digit which is 4. And we can see in the third addition that one number is missing in the second addend. So here we will subtract the addend with the sum which is 61 – 87 and the result will be 26. So we have found out the missing digit which is 2.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You read 34 pages one day and 23 the next day. How many pages do you read in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 17

Answer:
The number of pages that were read is 57 pages.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-17
Given that 34 pages were read on one day and the other 23 pages were read on the next day. So to find the number of pages that were read, we will add the number of pages which was read on both days. So the number of pages that were read is 34 + 23 which is 57. And the number of pages that were read is 57 pages.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You have 57 common trading cards and 11 rare trading cards. How many trading cards do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 18

Answer:
The total number of trading cards do we have in all is 57 + 11= 68 cards.

Explanation:
The number of common trading cards is 57 and there are 11 rare trading cards. And the number of trading cards do we have in all is 57 + 11= 68 cards. So the total number of trading cards do we have in all is 57 + 11= 68 cards.

Question 11.
A florist has 7 roses, 6 daisies, and 15 tulips. How many flowers are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 19

Answer:
The total number of flowers are there in all is 28 flowers.

Explanation:
As the florist has 7 roses, 6 daisies, and 15 tulips. So the total number of flowers will be 7 + 6 + 15= 28 flowers. And the total number of flowers are there in all is 28 flowers.

Use Partial Sums to Add Homework & Practice 4.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 20

Answer:
The partial sum of 55 + 14 will be 60 + 9= 69.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-20
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 55 + 14 which is 69. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 4 will be 9. So the total value of 55 + 14 will be 60 + 9= 69.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 21

Answer:
The partial sum of 62 + 13 will be 70 + 5= 75.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-21
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 62 + 13 which is 75. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 3 will be 5. So the total value of 62 + 13 will be 70 + 5= 75.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 22

Answer:
The partial sum of 71 + 8 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-22
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 71 + 8 which is 79. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 8 will be 9. So the total value of 71 + 8 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 23

Answer:
The partial sum of 22 + 26 will be 40 + 8= 48.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-23
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 22 + 26 which is 48. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 6 will be 8. So the total value of 22 + 26 will be 40 + 8= 48.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 24

Answer:
The missing digits are 2, 5, and the sum of the given values is 39.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-24
In the above image, we can see the missing values and we can see the tens and ones. So the missing values will be 2 in the tens place and 5 in the ones place. As the sum is 20 + 10 and 4 + 5, so the missing digits will be 2 and 5. Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 24 + 15 which is 39. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 5 will be 9. So the total value of 24 + 15 will be 30 + 9= 39. So the sum of the given values will be 30 + 9= 39

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 45 balloons. Your friend has 31. How many balloons do you and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 25

Answer:
The total number of balloons do my friend and mine will be 76 balloons.

Explanation:
As I have 45 balloons and my friend has 31 balloons and the total number of balloons will be 45+31= 76 balloons. So the total number of balloons do my friend and mine will be 76 balloons.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You have 8 toy trains, 4 bouncy balls, and 36 toy soldiers. How many toys do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 26

Answer:
The total number of toys do we all have in all will be 48 toys.

Explanation:
As there are 8 toy trains and 4 bouncy balls and 36 toy soldiers. So the number of toys will be 8 + 4 + 36= 48 toys. So the total number of toys do we all have in all will be 48 toys.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
16 + 10 = ___

Answer:
The addition of 16 and 10 is 26.

Explanation:
On adding 16 and 10 we will get the result as 26.

Question 9.
45 – 10 = ___

Answer:
The difference of 45 – 10 is 35.

Explanation:
On subtracting 10 with 45 we will get the result as 35.

Question 10.
50 – 10 = ___

Answer:
The difference of 50 – 10 is 40.

Explanation:
On subtracting 10 with 50 we will get the result as 40.

Question 11.
63 + 10 = ___

Answer:
The sum of 63 + 10 is 73.

Explanation:
On adding 63 and 10 we will get the result as 73.

Lesson 4.2 More Partial Sums

Make a quick sketch to find 38 + 19.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 27

Answer:
The partial sum of 38 + 19 will be 40 +17= 57.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-27

Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 38 + 19 which is 57. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 9 will be 17. So the total value of 38 + 19 will be 40 + 17= 57.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
25 + 19 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 28

Answer:
The partial sum of 25 + 19 will be 30 +14= 44.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-28
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 25 + 19 which is 44. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 9 will be 14. So the total value of 25 + 19 will be 30 + 14= 44.

Question 2.
48 + 33 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 29

Answer:
The partial sum of 48 + 33 will be 70 +11= 81.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-29
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 48 + 33 which is 81. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 3 it will be 11. So the total value of 48 + 33 will be 70 + 11= 81.

Question 3.
57 + 35 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 30

Answer:
The partial sum of 57 + 35 will be 80 +12= 92.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-30
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 57 + 35 which is 92. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 5 it will be 12. So the total value of 57 + 35 will be 80 + 12= 92.

Question 4.
34 + 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 31

Answer:
The partial sum of 34 + 28 will be 50 +12= 62.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-31
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 34 + 28 which is 62. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 8 it will be 12. So the total value of 34 + 28 will be 50 + 12= 62.

Question 5.
15 + 76 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 32

Answer:
The partial sum of 15 + 76 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-32
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 15 + 76 which is 91. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 70 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 6 it will be 11. So the total value of 15 + 76 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Question 6.
29 + 62 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 33

Answer:
The partial sum of 29 + 62 will be 80 +11= 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-33
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 29 + 62 which is 91. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 60 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 2 it will be 11. So the total value of 29 + 62 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Question 7.
Number Sense
Which choices are equal to 35 + 27?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 34

Answer:
The choices which are equal to 35 + 27 is 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and 50 + 12 and 62.

Explanation:
The choices which are equal to 35 + 27 is 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and 50 + 12 and 62.
As 35 + 27 was divided into tens and ones so the result will be 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and after adding tens separately and ones separately we will get 50 + 12 by adding both the numbers we will get the result as 62. So the choices which are equal to 35 + 27 is 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and 50 + 12 and 62.

Question 8.
A giraffe eats 37 pounds of food in the morning and 38 pounds of food in the afternoon. How many pounds of food does the giraffe eat in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 35

Answer:
The total number of pounds did the giraffe ate in all is 75 pounds.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-35
Given that the Giraffe eats 37 pounds of food in the morning and 38 pounds of food in the afternoon. So to find the total number of pounds did the giraffe ate in all we will add the food that the giraffe had in the morning and the evening. So here we will perform a partial sum which is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 37 + 38 which is 75. So here first we will add tens which are
30 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 8 it will be 15. So the total value of 37 + 38 will be 60 + 15= 75. So the total number of pounds did the giraffe ate in all is 75 pounds.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You find 29 items on a scavenger hunt. Your friend finds 17 more than you. How many items does your friend find?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 36
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 37

Answer:
The number of items does my friend finds is 46 items.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-37
Given that there are 29 items on a scavenger hunt and my friend finds 17 more than me. So to find how many items my friend finds in the hunt, we will add those items which are 29 + 17= 46 items. So the number of items does my friend finds is 46 items.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Your friend climbs 48 stairs. You climb 36 more than your friend. How many stairs do you climb?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 38

Answer:
The number of stairs does I climb is 48 + 36= 84 stairs.

Explanation:
Given that my friend climbs 48 stairs and I climb 36 stairs more than my friend. So to find how many stairs did I climb we will add the stairs that my friend climbed and the stairs that I have climbed more stairs. So the number of stairs does I climb is 48 + 36= 84 stairs.

Question 10.
You write 13 fewer words than your friend. You write 39 words. How many words does your friend write?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 39

Answer:
The number of words written by my friend is 26 words.

Explanation:
Given that the number of words written by me is 39 words and my friend wrote 13 fewer words than me so to find that how many words my friend wrote we will subtract the number of words written by me and the fewer words that my friend has written. So the number of words written by my friend is 39 – 13= 26 words.

More Partial Sums Homework & Practice 4.2

Question 1.
27 + 46 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 40

Answer:
The partial sum of 27 + 46 will be 60 +13= 73.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-40
Here we will perform partial sum, the partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 27 + 46 which is 73. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 6 it will be 13. So the total value of 27 + 46 will be 60 + 13= 73.

Question 2.
54 + 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 41

Answer:
The partial sum of 54 + 28 will be 70 +12= 82.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-41
Here we will perform partial sum, the partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 54 + 28 which is 82. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 8 it will be 12. So the total value of 54 + 28 will be 70 + 12= 82.

Question 3.
18 + 72 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 42

Answer:
The partial sum of 18 + 72 will be 80 +10= 90.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-42
Here we will perform partial sum, the partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 18 + 72 which is 90. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 70 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 2 it will be 10. So the total value of 18 + 72 will be 80 + 10= 90.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Write the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 43

Answer:
The missing digits are 7,3,1 and 3,7,8.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-43

As in the above image, we can see that some of the digits are missing. So to find the missing digits we will parallel check with the result. As we can see that 5 in ones place and 8 in the addend, so by adding 7 we can get the value as 15. So we have got the digit 5 in ones place of the result. Now as we know the value of the addend, we will subtract the addend with the result, so that we can get the other addend. So 75 – 37= 38. So the other missing digit is 3. And the missing value in ones place is 1. Now we will repeat the same process to find the other values. As we can see that 6 in ones place and 9 in the addend, so by adding 7 we can get the value as 16. So we have got the digit 7 in ones place of the result. Now as we know the value of the addend, we will subtract the addend with the result, so that we can get the other addend. So 96 – 57= 39. So the other missing digit is 3. And the missing value in tens place is 8.

Question 5.
You recycle 42 cans and 29 jars. How many items do you recycle in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 44

Answer:
The total number of items recycled is 71 items.

Explanation:
Given that 42 cans and 29 jars are recycled and to know that how many items are recycled we will perform the addition, we will add both the cans and jars that are recycled. So 42 cans + 29 jars= 71 items. So the total number of items recycled is 71 items.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Newton plants 63 seeds. Descartes plants 18 more than Newton. How many seeds does Descartes plant?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 45

Answer:
Descartes has planted 81 seeds.

Explanation:
Given that Newton has planted 63 seeds and Descartes has planted 18 more trees than the Newton. That means Descartes has planted 63 + 18 which is 81 seeds. So Descartes has planted 81 seeds.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 46

Answer:
The most favorite instrument is the Drum.

Explanation:
As each emoji represents one student,
so the Drum has six emojis which means 6 × 1= 6 students and
the Triangle has four emojis which means 4 × 1= 4 students.
So the most favorite instrument is the drum as the drum has more number of students which is 6.

Lesson 4.3 Regroup to Add

Explore and Grow

Model the problem. Make a quick sketch to show how you solved.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 47

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 48

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 46 + 26 is 72.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-48
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 46 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 46 + 26 is 72.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 49

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 15 + 37 is 52.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-49

Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 15 and 37. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 15 + 37 is 52.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 50

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 39 + 32 is 71.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-50
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 39 and 32. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 39 + 32 is 71.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
When do you need to regroup to add two numbers?
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________

Answer:
We need to regroup for the addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You must spell 60 words correctly to win a spelling game. You spell 19 words correctly in Round 1 and36 in Round 2. Do you win?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 51

Answer:
As I spell 55 words correctly, so didn’t win the game.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-51

Given that to spell 60 words correctly to win in a spelling game. I spell out 19 words correctly in Round 1 and 36 words in Round 2. So to find that I had won in the spelling game we will perform regrouping addition. We need to regroup for the addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers.
So the regrouping addition of 19 and 36 is 55, as to win the game we should spell 60 words correctly. So I did not win the spelling game.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You want to do 80 jumping jacks. You do 45 in the morning and 39 in the evening. Do you reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 52

Answer:
As the goal is to reach 80 jumping jacks and I have reached 84 jumping jacks, so I reach the goal.

Explanation:
As the goal is to reach 80 jumping jacks and I did 45 jumping jacks in the morning and 39 jumping jacks in the evening. So the total number of jumping jacks is 45 + 39= 84 jumping jacks. As the goal is to reach 80 jumping jacks and I have reached 84 jumping jacks, so I reach the goal.

Question 6.
You raise $38 selling ham sandwiches and $43 selling turkey sandwiches. Your friend raises $72. Who raises more money?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 53

Answer:
I have raised more money.

Explanation:
As my friend raises $72  money and I raise $38 by selling ham sandwiches and $43 by selling turkey sandwiches, so the total money raised by me by selling the sandwiches is 43 + 38= 81. So I have raised more money.

Regroup to Add Homework & Practice 4.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 54

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 36 + 16 is 52.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-54
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 36 and 16. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 36 + 16 is 52.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 55

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 47 + 39 is 86.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-55
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 47 and 39. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 47 + 39 is 86.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Do you have to regroup to add?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 56

Answer:
43 + 29= 72  yes, we have to regroup to add.
54 + 32= 86 no, we can add normally without performing regroup.
33 + 64= 97 no, we can add normally without performing regroup.
17 + 25= 42 yes, we have to regroup to add.

Explanation:
43 + 29= 72  yes, we have to regroup to add. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 43 and 29. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 43 + 29 is 72.
54 + 32= 86 no, we can add normally without performing regroup. As the place value column is not greater than nine. So here we cannot perform regrouping of addition.
33 + 64= 97 no, we can add normally without performing regroup. As the place value column is not greater than nine. So here we cannot perform regrouping of addition.
17 + 25= 42 yes, we have to regroup to add. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 43 and 29. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 43 + 29 is 72.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
There are 50 words in a word search. You find 25 words in rows and 18 words in columns. Did you find all of the words?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 57

Answer:
No, I have not found all the 50 words.

Explanation:
As there are 50 words in the word search and I have found 25 words in rows and 18 words in columns, so the total number of words did I had found is 25 + 18 which is 43. So I have not found all the 50 words.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You find 15 white shells and 17 spotted shells. Your friend finds 34 shells. Who finds more shells?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 58

Answer:
My friend finds more shells than me.

Explanation:
As I had found 15 white shells and 17 spotted shells, so the total number of shells did I have found is 15 + 17= 32 shells. And my friend finds 34 shells, so my friend finds more shells than me.

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 59

Answer:
We will use the “<” sign which is 34 < 80.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that 34 is less than 80. So we can represent with < sign as one value is smaller than another we will use < lesser than sign, so 34 < 80.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 60

Answer:
We will use the “>” sign which is 15 > 8.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that 15 is less than 8. So we can represent with > sign as one value is greater than another we will use > greater than sign, so 15 > 8.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 61

Answer:
We will use the “=” sign which is 67 = 67.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that 67 and the opposite number also 67 which are equal to each other. So we can represent with = sign as one value is equal to each other so we will use = equal to sign, so 67 = 67.

Lesson 4.4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Make a quick sketch to find 38 +24

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 62

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 38 and 24 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-62

Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 38 and 24. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 38 + 24 is 62.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
69 + 22 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 63

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 69 and 22 we will get the result as 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 69 and 22. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 69 + 22 is 91.

Question 2.
25 +37 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 64

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 25 and 37 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-1
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 25 and 37. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 25 + 37 is 62.

Question 3.
31 + 26 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 65

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 31 and 26 we will get the result as 57.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-2
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 31 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 31 + 26 is 57.

Question 4.
15 + 38 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 66

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 15 and 38 we will get the result as 53.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-3
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 15 and 38. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 15 + 38 is 53.

Question 5.
62 + 13 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 67

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 62 and 13 we will get the result as 75.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-5
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 62 and 13. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 62 + 13 is 75.

Question 6.
46 + 49 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 68

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 46 and 49 we will get the result as 95.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-6
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 46 and 49. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 46 + 49 is 95.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 7.
33 + 39 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 69

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 33 and 39 we will get the result as 72.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-7
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 33 and 39. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 33 + 39 is 72.

Question 8.
23 + 71 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 70

By regrouping addition of 23 and 71 we will get the result as 94.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-8
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 23 and 71. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 23 + 71 is 94.

Question 9.
17 + 64 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 71

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 17 and 64 we will get the result as 81.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-9
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 17 and 64. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 17 + 64 is 81.

Question 10.
54 + 25 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 72

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 54 and 25 we will get the result as 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-10
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 54 and 25. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 54 + 25 is 79.

Question 11.
47 + 39 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 73

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 47 and 39 we will get the result as 86.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-11
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 47 and 39. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 47 + 39 is 86.

Question 12.
28 + 26 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 74

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 28 and 26 we will get the result as 54.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-12
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 28 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 28 + 26 is 54.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton finds 26 + 36. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 75

Answer:
No, Newton is not correct.

Explanation:
No, Newton is not correct. Newton has performed only addition but he did not perform any regroup. So he got the wrong answer. If he perform regrouping, and regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 2 and 36. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 26 + 36 is 62.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 24 gel pens and you buy 36 more. Your friend has 48 and buys 18 more. Who has more gel pens?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 76

Answer:
I have more pens than my friend as 66 is greater than 60.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-76
As I have 24 gel pens and I bought 36 more gel pens so the total number of pens I have bought is 24 + 36= 60 pens and my friend has 48 and buys 18 more, so the total number of pens my friend has bought is 48 + 18= 66 pens. So by comparing we can see that I have more pens than my friend as 66 is greater than 60.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You have 32 stencils and you buy 16 more. Your friend has 14 and buys 28 more. Who has more stencils?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 77

Answer:
I had more stencils than my friend.

Explanation:
As I have 32 stencils and bought 16 more stencils, so the total number of stencils I had is 32 + 16= 48 stencils. And my friend has 14 stencils and bought 28 stencils, so the total number of stencils my friend had is 14 + 28= 42 stencils. So I had more stencils than my friend.

Question 15.
You have 22 green stars and 17 orange stars. Your friend has 26 blue stars and 12 pink stars. How many stars do you and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 78

Answer:
The total number of stars I and my friend had is 77 stars.

Explanation:
As I have 22 green stars and 17 orange stars, so the total number of stars I had is 22 + 17= 39 stars. And my friend has 26 blue stars and 12 pink stars, so the total number of stars my friend had is 26 + 12= 38 stars. So the total number of stars I and my friend had is 39 +38= 77 stars.

Add Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 4.4

Question 1.
47 + 36 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 79

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 28 and 26 we will get the result as 54.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 28 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 28 + 26 is 54.

Question 2.
51 + 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 80

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 51 and 28 we will get the result as 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-1
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 51 and 28. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 51 + 28 is 79.

Question 3.
13 + 79 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 81

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 13 and 79 we will get the result as 92.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-2
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 13 and 79. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 13 + 79 is 92.

Question 4.
54 + 42 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 82

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 54 and 42 we will get the result as 96.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-3
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 54 and 42. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 54 + 42 is 96.

Question 5.
38 + 23 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 83

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 38 and 23 we will get the result as 61.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-4
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 38 and 23. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 38 + 23 is 61.

Question 6.
45 + 44 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 84

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 45 and 44 we will get the result as 89.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-5
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 45 and 44. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 45 + 44 is 89.

Question 7.
Writing
Find the sum. Write an addition story to match.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 85

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 26 and 35 we will get the result as 89.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-6
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 26 and 35. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 26 + 35 is 89.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 35 dimes and you find 17 more. Your friend has 42 and finds 11 more. Who has more dimes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 86

Answer:
My friend has more dimes than me

Explanation:
Given that I have 35 dimes and then I found 17 more, so the total number of I had is 52 dimes, and my friend has 42 dimes and then finds 11 more so the total number of dimes my friend had is 42 + 11= 53 dimes. So on comparing, my friend has more dimes than me.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Newton plants 14 red flowers and 14 purple flowers. Descartes plants 26 pink flowers and 26 yellow flowers. How many flowers do Newton and Descartes plant in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 87

Answer:
The total number of flowers planted by both Newton and Descartes is 80 flowers.

Explanation:
Given that Newton has planted 14 red flowers and 14 purple flowers, so the total number of plants that was planted by Newton is 14 + 14= 28 flowers. And Descartes has planted 26 pink flowers and 26 yellow flowers so the total number of plants that were planted by Descartes is 26 + 26= 52 flowers. So the total number of flowers planted by both Newton and Descartes is 52 + 28= 80 flowers.

Question 10.
Model 56 two ways.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 88

Answer:
The two models of 56 is 5 tens and 6 six and the other model is 4 tens and 16 ones

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-88
To model 56 in two ways we will divide the 56 as 5 tens and 6 ones, and in another way, we will divide the 56 as 4 tens and 16 ones.

Lesson 4.5 Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers

Use any strategy to find 17 + 23.

Compare your strategy to your partner’s strategy. Are they the same or different? Explain.
_________________________________
_________________________________

Answer:
I have used the partial sum procedure and my friend has used the regrouping of addition procedure. So here the answer will be the same but the procedure is different.

Explanation:
To find 17 + 23 I have used partial sum, here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 17 + 23 which is 40. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 3 it will be 10. So the total value of 17 + 23 will be 30 + 10= 40. And my friend used regrouping of addition, here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two-digit numbers or larger than the two-digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 17 and 23. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 17 + 23 is 40. So here the answer will be the same but the procedure is different.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 89

Answer:
The partial sum of 43 and 17 is 60.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 43 + 17 which is 60. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 3 it will be 10. So the total value of 43 + 17 will be 50 + 10= 60.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 90

Answer:
The partial sum of 56 and 25 is 81.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 56 + 25 which is 81. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 5 it will be 11. So the total value of 56 + 25 will be 70 + 11= 81.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 91

Answer:
The partial sum of 19 and 55 is 74.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 19 + 55 which is 74. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 5 it will be 14. So the total value of 19 + 55 will be 60 + 14= 74.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 92

Answer:
The partial sum of 41 and 52 is 93.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 41 + 52 which is 93. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 2 it will be 3. So the total value of 41 + 52 will be 90 + 3= 93.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 93

Answer:
The partial sum of 47 and 26 is 73.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 47 + 26 which is 73. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 6 it will be 13. So the total value of 47 + 26 will be 60 + 13= 73.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 94

Answer:
The partial sum of 33 and 49 is 82.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 33 + 49 which is 82. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 9 it will be 12. So the total value of 33 + 49 will be 70 + 12= 82.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 95

Answer:
The partial sum of 29 and 22 is 51.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 29 + 22 which is 51. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 2 it will be 11. So the total value of 29 + 22 will be 40 + 11= 51.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 96

Answer:
The partial sum of 54 and 44 is 98.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 54 + 44 which is 98. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 4 it will be 8. So the total value of 54 + 44 will be 90 + 8= 98.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 97

Answer:
The partial sum of 36 and 45 is 81.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 36 + 45 which is 81. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 5 it will be 11. So the total value of 36 + 45 will be 70 + 11= 81.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 98

Answer:
The partial sum of 24 and 16 is 40.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 24 + 16 which is 40. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 6 it will be 10. So the total value of 30 + 10 will be 30 + 10= 40.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 99

Answer:
The partial sum of 37 and 46 is 83.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 37 + 46 which is 83. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 6 it will be 13. So the total value of 70 + 13 will be 70 + 13= 83.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 100

Answer:
The partial sum of 18 and 59 is 77.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 18 + 59 which is 77. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 9 it will be 17. So the total value of 18 + 59 will be 60 + 17= 77.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 101

Answer:
The partial sum of 61 and 34 is 95.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 61 + 34 which is 95. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 4 it will be 5. So the total value of 61 + 34 will be 90 + 5= 95.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 102

Answer:
The partial sum of 23 and 28 is 51.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 23 + 28 which is 51. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 8 it will be 11. So the total value of 23 + 28 will be 40 + 11= 51.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 103

Answer:
The partial sum of 42 and 57 is 99.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 42 + 57 which is 99. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 7 it will be 9. So the total value of 42 + 57 will be 90 + 9= 99.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 104

Answer:
The partial sum of 73 and 17 is 90.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 73 + 17 which is 60. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 3 it will be 10. So the total value of 73 + 17 will be 80 + 10= 90.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 105

Answer:
The partial sum of 82 and 12 is 94.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 82 + 12 which is 94. So here first we will add tens which are 80 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 2 it will be 10. So the total value of 82 + 12 will be 90 + 4= 94.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 106

Answer:
The partial sum of 15 and 77 is 92.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 15 + 77 which is 92. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 70 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 7 it will be 12. So the total value of 15 + 77 will be 80 + 12= 92.

Question 19.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes finds 38 + 53. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 107

Answer:
No, Descartes is not correct.

Explanation:
No, Descartes is not correct. As Descartes just performed the addition and he placed the carry forward in the result. Descartes should not place the carry forward into the result, it should be added to the next addend. So Descartes was not correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Are there more state parks in North Carolina and Kentucky or in Kentucky and South Carolina?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 108
There are more state parks in ___ and ___.

Answer:
There are more state parks in South Carolina and Kentucky.

Explanation:
Given that the state of North Carolina has 29 state parks and 38 state parks in the state of Kentucky, so the total number of state parks in both North Carlina and Kentucky is 29 + 38= 67 state parks. And the number of state parks in the state of South Carolina is 43, so the total number of state parks in both South Carlina and Kentucky is 43 + 38= 81 state parks. So there are more state parks in South Carolina and Kentucky. On comparing 81 is greater than 67.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
Are there more students in first and second grade or in first and third grade?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 109
There are more students in ___ and __ grade.

Explanation:
Given that the state first grade has 37 students and 53 students in the second grade, so the total number of students in both first grade and second grade is 37 + 53= 90 students. And the number of students in the third grade 49, so the total number of students in both first grade and third grade is 37 + 49= 86. So there are more students in first grade and second grade than first grade and third grade.

Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 4.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 110

Answer:
The partial sum of 63 and 12 is 75.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 63 + 12 which is 75. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 2 it will be 5. So the total value of 63 + 12 will be 60 + 5= 65.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 111

Answer:
The partial sum of 32 and 58 is 90.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 32 + 58 which is 90. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 8 it will be 10. So the total value of 32 + 58 will be 32 + 58= 90.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 112

Answer:
The partial sum of 53 and 38 is 91.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 53 + 38 which is 91. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 8 it will be 11. So the total value of 53 + 38 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 114

Answer:
The partial sum of 13 and 39 is 52.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 13 + 39 which is 52. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 9 it will be 12. So the total value of 13 + 39 will be 40 + 12= 52.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 115

Answer:
The partial sum of 62 and 18 is 80.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 62 + 18 which is 80. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 8 it will be 10. So the total value of 62 + 18 will be 70 + 10= 80.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 116

Answer:
The partial sum of 48 and 16 is 64.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 48 + 16 which is 64. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 6 it will be 14. So the total value of 48 + 16 will be 50 + 14= 64.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 117

Answer:
The partial sum of 11 and 66 is 77.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 11 + 66 which is 77. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 60 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 6 it will be 77. So the total value of 11 + 66 will be 70 + 7= 77.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 118

Answer:
The partial sum of 64 and 21 is 85.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 64 + 21 which is 85. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 1 it will be 5. So the total value of 64 + 21 will be 80 + 5= 85.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 119

Answer:
The partial sum of 79 and 14 is 93.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 79 + 14 which is 93. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 4 it will be 13. So the total value of 79 + 14 will be 80 + 13= 93.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 120

Answer:
The missing digits are 6, 8, 6, 2, 2, 2.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-120
To find the missing digits, in the first image we can see that the sum is 1 and one of the addends is 5 so to get the sum as 1 we will place 6, so the sum will be 81 and the addend will be 36. And in the second image, we can see that the sum is 97, and the other addend is 5 so let’s take the other addend to be 2 so the missing digit is 2 and to find the other addend we will subtract the 32 with the sum 97 which is 97 – 32= 65. And in the third image, we can see that the addend is 48 and the other addend with digit 4 so by adding the sum will be 72 so to find the other addend we will subtract the addend 48 with the result 72 so the other addend will be 72 – 48= 24.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Do more people attend the show on Monday and Tuesday or on Tuesday and Wednesday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 121

Answer:
More people attended the show on Tuesday and Wednesday.

Explanation:
Given that the number of people on Monday is 48 people and the number of people on Tuesday is 26 people, so the number of people on Monday and Tuesday is 48 + 26= 74 people. And the number of people on Wednesday is 56 people, so the number of people on Tuesday and Wednesday is 26 + 56= 82 people. So more people attended the show on Tuesday and Wednesday than Monday and Tuesday.

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 122

Answer:
Purple is Shortest,
Red is Longer,
Purple is Longest.

Explanation:
In the above, we can see that the purple crayon is the shortest crayon and red crayon is a longer crayon and the green crayon is the longest crayon.

Lesson 4.6 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Add the circled numbers first. Then find the sum of all three numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 123

Answer:
In the first image, the sum of the circled numbers is 60,
In the second image, the sum of the circled numbers is 50,
In the third image, the sum of the circled numbers is 58,

Explanation:
In the first image, we can see that 34 and 26 are circled, so the sum of circled numbers is 34 + 26= 60. And the number which is not circled is 24, so the sum of all three numbers is 60 + 24= 84.
In the second image, we can see that 26 and 24 are circled, so the sum of circled numbers is 24 + 26= 50. And the number which is not circled is 34, so the sum of all three numbers is 50 + 34= 84.
In the third image, we can see that 34 and 24 are circled, so the sum of circled numbers is 34 + 24= 58. And the number which is not circled is 26, so the sum of all three numbers is 58 + 26= 84.

What is the same? What is different?
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________

Answer:
In the above problem, the result is the same and the circled numbers are different and the sum of circles numbers is different.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 125

Answer:
On adding 16 + 34 + 21 we will get the result as  71.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 6 + 4 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 10 + 1= 11. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 16 + 34 + 21= 71.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 126

Answer:
On adding 33 + 15 + 17 we will get the result as  65.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 5, so 10 + 5= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 33 + 15 + 17= 65.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 127

Answer:
On adding 31 + 12 + 24 we will get the result as  67.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, so first, we will add 31 + 12 and the result is 43. Now we will perform the addition for all three numbers and the result will be 31 + 12 + 24= 67.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 128

Answer:
On adding 25 + 15 + 13 we will get the result as  53.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 5 + 5 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 10 + 3= 13. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 25 + 15 + 13= 53.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 129

Answer:
On adding 29 + 22 + 23 we will get the result as 74.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 11 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 2 which makes 11 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 11 + 3= 14. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 29 + 22 + 23= 74.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 130

Answer:
On adding 19 + 32 + 11 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 1 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 12. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 19 + 32 + 11= 62.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 131

Answer:
On adding 18 + 28 + 42 we will get the result as  88.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 8, so 10 + 8= 18. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 18 + 28 + 42= 88.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 132

Answer:
On adding 53 + 13 + 19 we will get the result as  85.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 3 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 53 + 13 + 19= 85.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 133

Answer:
On adding 27 + 27 + 25 we will get the result as 79.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 5 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 7, so 12 + 7= 19. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 27 + 27 + 25= 79.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 134

Answer:
On adding 23 + 42 + 17 we will get the result as 82.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 12. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 23 + 42 + 17= 82.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 135

Answer:
On adding 18 + 34 + 26 we will get the result as 78.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 3 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 53 + 13 + 19= 85.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 136

Answer:
On adding 51 + 22 + 26 we will get the result as 99.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum by adding two addends which help us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 2 + 6 which makes 8 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 8 + 1= 9. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 51 + 22 + 26= 99.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 137

Answer:
On adding 30 + 45 + 19 we will get the result as 94.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 14 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 5 which makes 14 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 14 + 0= 14. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 30 + 45 + 19= 94.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 138

Answer:
On adding 24 + 21 + 28 we will get the result as 73.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 4 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 12 + 1= 13. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 24 + 21 + 28= 73.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 139

Answer:
On adding 39 + 12 + 31 we will get the result as 82.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 1 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 13. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 39 + 12 + 31= 82.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 140

Answer:
On adding 14 + 20 + 35 we will get the result as 69.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 9 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 4 + 5 which makes 9 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 9 + 0= 9. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 14 + 20 + 35= 69.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 141

Answer:
On adding 46 + 11 +32 we will get the result as 89.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 8 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 6 + 2 which makes 8 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 8 + 1= 9. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 46 + 11 +32= 89.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 142

Answer:
On adding 35 + 33 + 29 we will get the result as 97.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 11 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 +3 which makes 11 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 11, so 11 + 5= 16. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 35 + 33 + 29= 97.

Question 19.
Reasoning
You make a 10 to add 16, 38, and 24. Which digits do you add first? Explain.
________________________

________________________

________________________

Answer:

Explanation:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton buys the items shown. How much money does he spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 143

Answer:
The total amount spent by the Newton is $51.

Explanation:
Given the cost the items that Newton has bought is, the cost of the first item is $12, the cost of second item is $21 and the cost of third item is $18. So the total money spent by the Newton is 12 + 21 + 18= $51. The total amount spent by the Newton is $51.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
Descartes buys the items shown. How much money does he spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 144

Answer:
The total amount spent by the Descartes is $47.

Explanation:
Given of the cost the items that Descartes has bought is, the cost of the first item is $19, the cost of second item is $15 and the cost of third item is $13. So the total money spent by the Descartes is 19 + 15 + 13= $47. The total amount spent by the Descartes is $47.

Question 21.
Newton sells 2 large candles and 1 small candle. How much money does he earn?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 145

Answer:
The total amount earn by the Newton is $66.

Explanation:
Given the cost the large candle that Newton has bought is $26, and the cost of the small candle is $14, so Newton sells two large candles which is 2 × 26= $52 and one small candle which is 1 × 14= $14  . So the total money earn by the Newton is 52 + 14= $66. The total amount earn by the Newton is $66.

Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 4.6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 146

Answer:
On adding 11 + 23 + 47 we will get the result as 81.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 +3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 1= 11. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 11 + 23 + 47= 81.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 147

Answer:
On adding 32 + 14 + 28 we will get the result as 74.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 +2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 4= 14. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 32 + 14 + 28= 74.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 148

Answer:
On adding 16 + 37 + 33 we will get the result as 86.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 6= 16. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 16 + 37 + 33= 86.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 149

Answer:
On adding 43 + 17 + 37 we will get the result as 97.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 7= 16. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 43 + 17 + 37= 97.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 150

Answer:
On adding 15 + 44 + 11 we will get the result as 70.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 9 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 5 + 4 which makes 9 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 9, so 9 + 1= 10. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 15 + 44 + 11= 70.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 151

Answer:
On adding 16 + 29 + 38 we will get the result as 83.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 15 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 6 which makes 15 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 8, so 15 + 8= 23. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 16 + 29 + 38= 83.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 152

Answer:
On adding 31 + 28 + 12 we will get the result as 71.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 10 + 1= 11. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 31 + 28 + 12= 71.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 153

Answer:
On adding 56 + 26 + 13 we will get the result as 95.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 6 + 6 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 56 + 26 + 13= 95.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 154

Answer:
On adding 35 + 23 + 29 we will get the result as 87.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 3 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 5, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 35 + 23 + 29= 87.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Solve two different ways.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 155

Answer:
The sum of the three numbers is 38 + 36 + 22= 96.

Explanation:
The two different ways to add the above problem is, the first method is we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 6, so 10 + 6= 16. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 38 + 36 + 22= 96. The other way to find the addition of the numbers is we will add the numbers in any order, first we will add 8 + 6 which is 14 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 14 + 2= 16 and the regrouping of addition and the result will be 38 + 36 + 22= 96.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes buys the items shown. How much money does he spend?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 156

Answer:
The total amount spent by the Descartes is $81.

Explanation:
Given the cost the items that Descartes has bought is, the cost of the first item is $41, the cost of second item is $27 and the cost of third item is $13. So the total money spent by the Descartes is 41 + 27 + 13= $81. The total amount spent by the Descartes is $81.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Your cousin buys the items shown. How much money does she spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 157

Answer:
The total amount spent by the my cousin is $67.

Explanation:
Given of the cost the items that my cousin has bought is, the cost of the first item is $24, the cost of second item is $7 and the cost of third item is $36. So the total money spent by my cousin is 24 + 7 + 36= $67. The total amount spent by mu cousin is $67.

Review & Refresh

Is the number even or odd?

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 158

Answer:
The number 18 is even number.

Explanation:
The number 18 is even number as the number 18 has two pairs of 9 and the number is divided by 2 and if the number is not divisible by 2 then it will be odd number. As 18 is divisible by 2 so the number 18 is a even number.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 159

Answer:
The number 17 is odd number.

Explanation:
The number 17 is even number as the number 17 is not divisible by 2 and if the number is not divisible by 2 then it will be odd number. As the number 17 is not divisible by 2 so the number 17 is odd number.

Lesson 4.7 More Problem Solving: Addition

Explore and Grow

Model the story.

There are 11 red ants and 14 black ants. 15 more black ants join them. How many ants are there now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 160
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 160.1

Answer:
The total number of ants is 40 ants.

Explannation:
Given that there are 11 red ants and 14 black ants and 15 more black ants join with them, so to find the number of ants in total we will add the given number of ants, so the total number of ants is 11 + 14 + 15= 40 ants.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have 66 marbles. You have 26 fewer marbles than your friend. How many marbles does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 161

Answer:
My friend has 40 marbles.

Explanation:
As I have 66 marbles and my friend has 26 fewer marbles than me, so to find how many marbles does my friend had we will subtract 66 – 26= 40 marbles. So my friend has 40 marbles.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
You collect 16 red leaves, 21 orange leaves, and 14 yellow leaves. How many leaves do you collect in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 162

Answer:
The number of leaves collected by me is 16 + 21 + 14= 51 leaves.

Explanation:
As I have collected 16 red leaves, 21 orange leaves and 14 yellow leaves, so the number of leaves collected by me is 16 + 21 + 14= 51 leaves.

Question 3.
A dentist has 41 toothbrushes. She buys some more. Now she has 85. How many toothbrushes did the dentist buy?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 163

Answer:
The number of toothbrushes did the dentist bought is 85 – 41= 44 toothbrushes.

Explanation:
As dentist has 41 toothbrushes and she bought some more, so now she had 85. So the number of toothbrushes did the dentist bought is 85 – 41= 44 toothbrushes.

Question 4.
You make 17 origami dogs and 13 origami fish. Your friend makes 12 more origami animals than you. How many origami animals does your friend make?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 164
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 165

Answer:
The number of origami animals does my friend make is 42 animals.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-165
As I make 17 origami dogs and 13 origami fish so the total origami animals do I make is 17 + 13= 30 animals. And my friend makes 12 more origami animals than me, so the number of origami animals does my friend make is
30 + 12= 42 animals.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You make a paper chain. Your friend adds 24 links to your chain. Now there are 57. How many links were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 166

Answer:
The number of links is 33 links.

Explanation:
As I make a paper chain and my friend adds 24 links to my chain. Now there are 57 paper chains, so the number of links there to start is 57 – 24= 33 links.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You have some stickers. Your friend gives you 32 more stickers. Now you have 58. How many stickers did you have to start? Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 167

Answer:
The number of stickers I have to start is 58 – 32 = 26 stickers.

Explanation:
As I have some stickers and my friend gives me 32 more stickers. Now I have 58, so the number of stickers I have to start is 58 – 32 = 26 stickers.

Question 6.
There are 3 buses. There are 29 students on each of the first 2 buses. There are 88 students in all. How many students are on the third bus?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 168

Answer:
The number of students are on the third bus is 30 students.

Explanation:
As there are 3 buses and there are 29 students on each of the first 2 buses so the students in the two buses is
2 × 29= 58 students and there are 88 students in all so the number of students are on the third bus is
88 – 58= 30 students.

More Problem Solving: Addition Homework & Practice 4.7

Question 1.
You study for 31 minutes. You study 11 fewer minutes than your friend. How long does your friend study?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 169

Answer:
My friend studied 20 minutes longer.

Explanation:
As I have studied for 31 minutes and  studied 11 fewer minutes than my friend so how long does your friend studied is 31 – 11= 20 minutes.

Question 2.

You see 23 red cars, 25 black cars, and 15 blue cars. How many cars do you see in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 170

Answer:
The number of cars I have seen is 63 cars.

Explanation:
As I saw 23 red cars, 25 black cars, and 15 blue cars, so the number of cars I have seen is 23 + 25 + 15= 63 cars. The number of cars I have seen is 63 cars.

Question 3.
Number Sense
Your friend scores 29 points. You score 16 more points than your friend. Use the given numbers to find how many points you and your friend score in all.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 171
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 172

Answer:
The total points I have scored is 45 points and the total points scored by me and my friend is 74 points.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-172

As my friend scores 29 points and I score 16 more points than your friend. So the total points I have scored is
29 + 16= 45 points. And the total points scored by me and my friend is 74 points.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You have some plastic bugs. Your friend gives you 37 more plastic bugs. Now you have 59. How many plastic bugs did you have to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 173

Answer:
The number of plastic bugs I do have to start is 22 plastic bugs.

Explanation:
As I have some plastic bugs and my friend gives me 37 more plastic bugs. So now I have 59 plastic bugs, so the number of plastic bugs I do have to start is 59 – 37= 22 plastic bugs.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
There are 3 subway cars. There are 36 people on each of the first 2 subway cars. There are 92 people in all. How many people are on the third subway car?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 174

Answer:
The number of people in the third subway car is 20 people.

Explanation:
As there are 3 subway cars and there are 36 people on each of the first 2 subway cars, so the number of people in the 2 subway cars is 2 × 36= 72 people. There are 92 people in all and the number of people in the third subway car is 92 – 72= 20 people.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
50 – 10 = ___

Answer:
The difference between 50 and 10 is 40.

Explanation:
On subtracting 50 – 10 we will get the result as 40.

Question 7.
90 – 40 = ___

Answer:
The difference between 90 and 40 is 50.

Explanation:
On subtracting 90 – 40 we will get the result as 50.

Fluently Add within 100 Performance Task 4

Question 1.
a. You swim for 37 minutes on Monday. You swim 12 more minutes on Tuesday than on Monday. How many minutes do you swim in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 175
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 176

Answer:
The total number of minutes do I swim in all is 86 minutes.

Explanation:
As I swim for 37 minutes on Monday and again swim for 12 more minutes on Tuesday than on Monday, so the number of minutes I have a swim on Tuesday is 37 + 12= 49 minutes. And the total number of minutes do I swim in all is 37 + 49= 86 minutes.

b. Do you swim an even or odd number of minutes in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 177

Answer:
The number of minutes 86 is an even number.

Explanation:
As the total number of minutes do I swim in all is 86 minutes and 86 is divisible by 2 so the number of minutes 86 is an even number.

Question 2.
a. There are 35 girls and some boys signed up for swim lessons this year. There are 83 kids signed up in all. Then some more boys sign up. Now there are 56 boys signed up. How many more boys signed up for swim lessons?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 178

Answer:
The number of more boys signed up is 8 more boys.

Explanation:
As there are 35 girls and some boys signed up for swim lessons this year. And there are 83 kids signed up in all, so the number of boys is 83 – 35= 48 boys and then some more boys sign up. Now there are 56 boys signed up, so the number of more boys signed up is 56 – 48= 8 more boys.

b. Last year there were 95 kids signed up for swim lessons. 45 were girls. Are there more boys signed up for swim lessons this year or last year?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 179

Answer:
The more boys signed up for swimming is last year than this year.

Explanation:
As in the last year, there were 95 kids signed up for swim lessons and in that 45 were girls and the number of boys is 95 – 45= 50  boys. And the more boys signed up for swimming is last year as the total number of boys in the last year is 56 boys.

Fluently Add within 100 Activity

Solve and Cover: Addition

To Play: Place a Solve and Cover: Addition Sum Card on each box. Players take turns. On your turn, flip over a Solve and Cover: Addition Problem Card. Solve the problem. Place the problem card on the sum. Play until all sums are covered.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 180

Fluently Add within 100 Chapter Practice

4.1 Use Partial Sums to Add

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 181

Answer:
The partial sum of 35 + 22 will be 50 + 7= 57.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-181
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 35 + 22 which is 57. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 2 will be 7. So the total value of 35 + 22 will be 50 + 7= 57.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 182

Answer:
The partial sum of 81 + 8 will be 80 + 9= 89.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-182
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 81 + 8 which is 89. So here first we will add tens which are 80 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 8 will be 9. So the total value of 81 + 8 will be 81 + 8= 89.

4.2 More Partial Sums

Question 3.
26 + 43 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 183

Answer:
The partial sum of 26 + 43 will be 60 + 9= 69.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-183
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 26 + 43 which is 69. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 3 will be 69. So the total value of 26 + 43 will be 26 + 43= 69.

Question 4.
64 + 19 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 184

Answer:
The partial sum of 64 + 19 will be 70 + 13= 83.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-184
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 64 + 19 which is 83. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 9 will be 13. So the total value of 64 + 19 will be 70 + 13= 83.

4.3 Regroup to Add

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You want to complete 40 hours of volunteer work this year. You complete 28 hours during the school year and 13 during the summer. Do you reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 185
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 186

Answer:
Yes, I have reached my goal.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-186
As I want to complete 40 hours of volunteer work this year and I have complete 28 hours during the school year and 13 during the summer so the total number of hours I have completed is 28 + 13= 41 hours. And I have reached my goal.

4.4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 187

Answer:
By regrouping the addition of 14 and 77 we will get the result as 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-187
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 14 and 77. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 14 + 77 is 91.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 188

Answer:
By regrouping the addition of 35 and 35 we will get the result as 70.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-187
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 35 and 35. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 35 + 35 is 70.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 189

Answer:
By regrouping the addition of 43 and 49 we will get the result as 92.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-187
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 43 and 49. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 43 + 49 is 92.

4.5 Practice Adding Two-Digit numbers

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 190

Answer:
The sum of 36 + 38 is 74.

Explanation:
The addition of the two numbers is 36 + 38 is 74.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 191

Answer:
The sum of 62 + 29 is 91.

Explanation:
The addition of the two numbers is 62 + 29 is 91.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 192

Answer:
The sum of 25 + 45 is 70.

Explanation:
The addition of the two numbers is 25 + 45 is 70.

Question 12.
Number Sense
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 193

Answer:
The missing digits are 1, 4, 8, 7, 5, 0.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-193
To find the missing digits, in the first image we can see that the sum is 9 and one of the addends is 5 so to get the sum as 9 we will place 4 and place the 1 to get the sum as 4, so the sum will be 49 and the addend will be 34 and 15. And in the second image, we can see that the sum is 6, and the other addend is 8 so let’s take the other addend to be 8 so the missing digit is 8 and by the regrouping of addition we will get the result as 76, so the missing digit is 7. And in the third image, we can see that the addend is 14 and the other addend with digit 6 so by placing the digit as 5 the sum will be 70 and the missing digits will be 5 and 0.

4.6 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 194

Answer:
On adding 12 + 32+ 18 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 12. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 12 + 32+ 18= 62.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 195

Answer:
On adding 50 + 28 + 18 we will get the result as 96.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 16 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 8 which makes 16 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 16 + 0= 16. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 50 + 28 + 18= 96.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 196

Answer:
On adding 50 + 28 + 18 we will get the result as 96.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 16 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 8 which makes 16 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 16 + 0= 16. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 50 + 28 + 18= 96.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 197

Answer:
On adding 17 + 26 + 12 we will get the result as 55.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 9 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 2 which makes 9 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 6, so 9+ 6= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 17 + 26 + 12= 55.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 198

Answer:
On adding 27 + 33 + 18 we will get the result as 78.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7+ 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 8, so 10 + 8= 18. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 27 + 33 + 18= 78.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 199

Answer:
On adding 15 + 18 + 16 we will get the result as 49.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 14 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 6 which makes 14 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 5, so 14 + 0= 14. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 15 + 18 + 16= 49.

Question 19.
Modeling Real Life
You, Newton, and Descartes play paddle ball. You record how many times each of you hits the ball in a row. How many times is the ball hit in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 200
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 201

4.7 More Problem Solving: Addition

Question 20.
Modeling Real Life
You pick 11 berries and 23 apples. Your friend picks 18 more pieces of fruit than you. How many pieces does your friend pick?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 202
Step 1: How many pieces of fruit do you pick?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 203

Answer:
The number of pieces of fruits does I have is 34 fruits.

Explanation:
As I pick 11 berries and 23 apples, so the number of fruits I have picked is 11 + 23= 34 fruits.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-203
Step 2: How many pieces of fruit does your friend pick?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 204

Answer:
The number of fruits that my friend picked is 52 fruits.

Explanation:
As I pick 11 berries and 23 apples and my friend picks 18 more pieces of fruit than me, so the number of fruits that my friend picked is 34 + 18= 52 fruits.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-203

Fluently Add within 100 Cumulative Practice 1-4

Question 1.
Which equation represents the array?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 205

Answer:
The equation that represents the array is 3 + 3 + 3 + 3= 12.

Explanation:
The equation that represents the array is 3 + 3 + 3 + 3= 12 as the array has three rows and four columns, so the equation is 3 + 3+ 3 +3 = 12.

Question 2.
Which expressions are equal to 62 + 24?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 206

Answer:
The expressions which are equal to 62 + 24 is 60 + 20 + 2 + 4, 60 + 26, 80 + 6.

Explanation:
The expressions which are equal to 62 + 24 and the result is 86 so the expressions which are equal to the sum of 86 is 60 + 20 + 2 + 4 and the result is 86, 60 + 26 the result is 86, 80 + 6 the result is 6.

Question 3.
Is each sum equal to 7 + 4?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 207

Answer:
The equation which is equal to 7 + 4 is 10 + 1.

Explanation:
The sum which is equal to 7 + 4 is 10 + 1 as the sum of both equations is 11 so they both are equal.

Question 4.
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 208

Answer:
The number line equation is 10 + 40= 50.

Explanation:
The equation that matches the number line is 10 + 40 and the result is 50. As we start from 10 and then jump from 10 and the size of the jump is 10 and we will take up to 50 jumps. So the equation of the number line is
10 + 40= 50.

Question 5.
Which expressions do you need to regroup to solve?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 209

Answer:
The expressions which we need to regroup is 54 + 38 and the result is 92 and the other expression is 62 + 28 and the result is 90.

Explanation:
The expressions do we need to regroup and is 54 + 38 as by adding 8 + 4 we will get the result as 12, so we will regroup and add 54 + 38 and the result will be 92. And the other expression is 62 + 88 as by adding 2 + 8 we will get the result as 10, so we will regroup and add 62 + 28 and the result will be 90.

Question 6.
Which equation has an even sum greater than 14?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 210

Answer:
The equation that has an even sum whihc is greater than 14 is 8 + 8 which is 16.

Explanation:
In the above, we can see that even sum greater than 14 is 8 + 8 as the sum of 8 + 8 is 16 and 16 is divisible by 2 which is an even number and the number 16 is greater than 14.

Question 7.
There are 4 rows of trees. Each row has 5 trees. How many trees are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 211

Answer:
The number of trees there in all is 20 trees.

Explanation:
As there are 4 rows of trees and each row has 5 trees, so the number of trees is 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 4= 20 trees. So the number of trees is 20 trees.

Question 8.
You have 16 oranges. You give 7 away. How many oranges do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 212

Answer:
The number of oranges does I have left is 11 oranges.

Explanation:
As I have 16 oranges and I gave 7 away, so the total number of oranges does I have left is 16 – 7= 11 oranges.

Question 9.
Find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 213

Answer:
The result of the first image is 71 and the result of the second image is 87.

Explanation:
The sum of the first image is 24 + 12 + 35 and the result is 71 and the sum of the second image is 31 + 14 + 42 and the result is 87.

Question 10.
Find the sum. Write the double you used.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 215

Answer:
The sum of the double of the addends is 30.

Explanation:
The sum of 7 + 8 is 15, so the double of the addends is 14 + 16, and the sum of the addends is 14 + 16= 30.

Question 11.
Break apart the addends to find 42 + 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 216

Answer:
The Break apart of the addend is 42 + 37= 79.

Explanation:
Here to break apart the addends of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 42 + 37 which is 79. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 7 will be 9. So the total value of 70 + 9 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Question 12.
You have 64 craft sticks for a project. 22 are red. The rest are yellow. You buy 39 more yellow craft sticks. How many yellow craft sticks do you have now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 217
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 218

Answer:
The total number of yellow craft sticks do I have is 81 sticks.

Explanation:
As I have 64 craft sticks for a project and there are 22 red sticks so the number of yellow sticks is 64 – 22= 42 yellow sticks and I bought 39 more yellow craft sticks, so the number of yellow sticks is 42 + 39= 81 yellow craft sticks.

Conclusion:

I wish that the useful data of Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 Answer Key is provided here. This BIM Book Solutions of Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 is prepared by the experts. Get the detailed solution for each and every topic of Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 chapter. If you have any queries, leave a comment below. Please share this Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 with your friends for helping them to complete homework in time.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1

Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division: Get the solutions for all the questions in BIM Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Textbook. This answer key is useful for the students while preparing for the exam or practice test. In the Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 1st Chapter Solutions PDF, students can see the detailed explanation for each problem that helps them to understand the concept easily.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Download Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 1st Chapter Understand Multiplication and Division Answer Key PDF for free of cost. The different lessons in Grade 3 Chapter 1 are Use Equal Groups to Multiply, Use Number Lines to Multiply, Use Arrays to Multiply, Multiply in Any Order, Divide: Size of Equal Groups, Divide: Number of Equal Groups, and Use Number Lines to Divide.

Here, you can get the different methods of solving multiplication and division problems. Solve all the questions from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division. Tap on the links mentioned below to get help while solving multiplication and division problems.

Lesson 1 Use Equal Groups to Multiply

Lesson 2 Use Number Lines to Multiply

Lesson 3 Use Arrays to Multiply

Lesson 4 Multiply in Any Order

Lesson 5 Divide: Size of Equal Groups

Lesson 6 Divide: Number of Equal Groups

Lesson 7 Use Number Lines to Divide

Performance Task

Lesson 1.1 Use Equal Groups to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Put 24 counters into equal groups. Draw to show your groups.
Answer:
24 counters in four equal groups

Explanation:
To keep 24 counters into an equal group, we will find the factors of 24 and then we can put 24 counters into equal groups. The factors of 24 are 2,3,4,6,8,12. Now we can pick any of the numbers from the factors of 24 and then put these 24 counters in equal groups. Let’s take four equal groups and arrange 24 counters in four equal groups as shown in the below image.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 24 counters into a different number of equal groups. Draw to show your groups.
Answer:
7 counters in the first group, 8 counters in the second group, 6 counters in the third group, and 4 counters in the fourth group.

Explanation:
In this, we will take some number of groups and in that, we will place some different number of counters in that group. In the given image, we will take four groups, and we will place 7 counters in the first group, 8 counters in the second group, 6 counters in the third group, and 4 counters in the fourth group.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
Structure
Compare your models. How are the models the same? How are they different?
Answer:
In the first model, we can see that there is an equal number of counters in each group, and in the second model, we can see the different number of counters in each group. They are the same with an equal number of groups.

Show and Grow

Use the model to complete the statements.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 1
____ groups of ____
____ + ____ +____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
4 groups of 5,
5+5+5+5= 20,
4×5= 20.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 groups and in each group, 5 counters are there, and the product is 4×5= 20. And we can also write by adding 5+5+5+5= 20. There are 4 groups of 5.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 2
____ groups of ____
____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
2 groups of 6,
6+6= 12,
2×6= 12.

Explanation:
As we can see there are 2 groups of 6 which are two groups with the number 6 in the box. So the product of the two groups is 2×6= 12 and the sum of the two groups is 6+6= 12.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Use the model to complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 3
____ groups of ____
____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
2 groups of 9
9+9= 18,
2×9= 18.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 2 groups with 9 counters in each group, and the product is 2×9= 18. By adding these two groups we will get 18, which is 9+9= 18.

Draw equal groups. Then complete the equations.
Question 4.
4 groups of 2
____ + ____ + ____ + ____ =____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
4 groups of 2
2+2+2+2= 8,
4×2= 8.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 groups with 2 counters in each group, and the product is 4×2= 8. By adding these four groups we will get 8, which is 2+2+2+2= 18.

Question 5.
3 groups of 5
____ + ____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
3 groups of 5,
5+5+5= 15,
3×5= 15.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 3 groups with 5 counters in each group, and the product is 3×5= 15. By adding these three groups we will get 15, which is 5+5+5= 15.

Write the addition equation as a multiplication equation.
Question 6.
8 + 8 + 8 = 24
Answer:
3×8= 24.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 3 times 8 which can be written as 3×8= 24.

Question 7.
7 + 7 + 7 + 7 + 7 = 35

Answer:
5×7= 35.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 5 times 7 which can be written as 5×7= 35.

Question 8.
You Be The Teacher
Newton says he circled 3 groups of 4 counters. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 4
Answer:
No, Newton is not correct.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 groups of 3 counters. So Newton is not correct.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
You wash 5 cars. How many times do you wash?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 5
Answer: 20 tires.

Explanation:
As the car has 4 tires and there are 5 cars to wash, so there are 5 groups of 4. The number of tires to wash is
5×4= 20. So there are 20 tires to wash.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Question 1.
You buy 6 packs of 10 trading cards. How many cards do you buy in all?
Complete the statement: ______ groups of ________
Repeated addition equation:
Multiplication equation:
You buy _____ cards in all.

Answer:
6 groups of 10
6×10= 60.

Explanation:
As there are 6 packs of 10 trading cards, which means 6 groups of 10. So 6×10= 60 cards can we buy in all.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You buy 8 packs of 4 highlighters. How many highlighters do you buy in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 6
Answer:
8 groups of 4
8×4= 32

Explanation:
As there 8 packs of 4 highlighters, which means 8 groups of 4. The number of highlighters bought is 8×4= 32.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You make 5 bracelets. Each of your bracelets has 3 beads. Your friend makes 6 bracelets. Each of your friend’s bracelets has 2 beads. How many beads do you and your friend use in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 7
Answer:
27 beads.

Explanation:
In this query, we can see 5 bracelets have 3 beads which are 5×3= 15, and a friend makes 6 bracelets that have 2 beads which are 6×2= 12. So the total number of beads used in all is 15+12= 27 beads.

Use Equal Groups to Multiply Homework & Practice 1.1

Question 1.
Use the model to complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 8
___ groups of ____
___ + ___ + ___ = ___
___ × ___ = ___
Answer:
3 groups of 4,
4+4+4= 12,
4×3= 12.

Explanation:
We can see in the above image there are 3 groups with 4 counter in each group, which means 3 groups of 4.
The sum is 4+4+4= 12 and the product is 4×3= 12.

Draw equal groups. Then complete the equations.
Question 2.
2 groups of 8
___ + ___ = ___
___ × ___ = ___
Answer:
8+8= 16
2×8= 16.

Explanation:
2 groups of 8 means, there are 2 groups with 8 counters in each group. So the sum is 8+8= 16 and the product is 2×8= 16.

Question 3.
5 groups of 3
___ + ___ + ___ + ___ + ___ = ___
___ × ___ = ___

Answer:
3+3+3+3+3= 15,
5×3= 15.

Explanation:
5 groups of 3 means, there are 5 groups with 3 counters in each group. So the sum is 3+3+3+3+3= 15, and the product is 5×3= 15.

Write the addition equation as a multiplication equation.
Question 4.
3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 = 18
Answer:
6×3= 18.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 6 times 3, which can be written as 6×3= 18.

Question 5.
2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 14
Answer:
7×2= 14.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 7 times 2, which can be written as 7×2= 14.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 16 action figures. Can you put an equal number of figures on 3 shelves? Explain
Answer:
No, we cannot put an equal number of figures on 3 shelves.

Explanation:
As given that we have 16 action figures and asked to determine whether it is possible to an equal number of figures on 3 shelves. As factors of 16 are 1,2,4,8,16 as 16 is not divisible by 3, so we cannot put an equal number of figures on 3 shelves.

Question 7.
Which One Doesn’tBelong?
Which one does not belong with the other two?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 9
Answer:
2 groups of 3 don’t belong with the other two.

Explanation:
As 2 groups of 3 means in 2 groups, there will be 3 counters, which does not belong to the other two. Because in the above image we can see 3 groups of 2, which means 3 groups with 2 counters in each group which is equal to 2+2+2= 6.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You make 7 gift bags for your friends. Each gift bag has 3 pom-pom pets. How many pom-pom pets are there in all?
Answer:
21 pom-pom pets.

Explanation:
As there are 7 gift bags and each gift bag has 3 pom-pom pets, so the number of pom-pom pets are 7×3= 21.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER
Newton has 2 stacks of 5 books. Descartes has 3 stacks of 4 books. How many books do they have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 10
Answer:
22 books.

Explanation:
As Newton has 2 stacks of 5 books, which is 2×5= 10 books and Descartes has 3 stacks of 4 books which is 3×4= 12 books. So the number of books is 10+12= 22books.

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
50 + 30 = ____

Answer:
80

Explanation:
By adding 50+30 we will get 80.

Question 11.
27 + 40 = ______

Answer:
67

Explanation:
By adding 27+40 we will get 67.

Question 12.
19 + 20 = _____

Answer:
39

Explanation:
By adding 19+20 we will get 39.

Lesson 1.2 Use Number Lines to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Find the sums. Use each sum as the missing addend in the next equation. Model the problems on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 1
Answer:
0+3= 3,
3+3= 6,
6+3= 9,
9+3= 12.

Explanation:
First, we must begin at 0 and then skip the count by 3’s then make jumps until you get 12.
So 3 x 4 = 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Reasoning
How can you use a number line to help you find 4 × 3?

Answer:
4×3= 12.

Explanation:
To find 4×3 using the number line, we will make a jump from 0 to 4 for 3 times.

Think and Grow: Multiplication and Number Lines

Example Find 3 × 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 2
3 × 4 means 3 groups of 4.
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Start at 0. Skip count by 4s three times.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 3
3 × 4 ____

Answer:
3 × 4 = 12
Number of jumps: 3
Size of each jump: 4.

Explanation:
To represent the given value in the number line, we will start from 0 and skip the count by 4 three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of each jump is 4.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find 2 × 4
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 4
2 × 4 = _____
Answer:
2 × 4 = 8,
Number of jumps: 2
Size of each jump: 4

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

To find the product of 2×4 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 4s two times. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of each jump is 4.

Question 2.
Fing 6 × 3
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 5
6 × 3 = _____
Answer:
6 × 3= 18
Number of jumps: 6
Size of each jump: 3

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 6 × 3 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 3s six times. So the number of jumps is 6 and the size of each jump is 3.

Apply and Grow: Practice
Question 3.
Find 3 × 5
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 6
3 × 5 = _____
Answer:
3 × 5= 15
Number of jumps: 3
Size of each jump: 5

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 3 × 5 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 5s three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of each jump is 5.

Question 4.
Fing 5 × 4
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 7
5 × 4 = _____
Answer:
5 × 4= 20
Number of jumps: 5
Size of each jump: 4

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 5 × 4 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 4s five times. So the number of jumps is 5 and the size of each jump is 4.

Question 5.
Find 3 × 8
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 8
Answer:
3 × 8= 24
Number of jumps: 8
Size of each jump: 3

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 3 × 8 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 3s eight times. So the number of jumps is 8 and the size of each jump is 3.

Question 6.
Structure
Draw jumps to show 4 groups of 6 and 6 groups of 4. Think: How are they the same? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 9

Answer:
4 groups of 6
4×6= 24
Number of jumps: 6
Size of each jump: 4
6 groups of 4
6×4= 24
Number of jumps: 4
Size of each jump: 6
The product of 4 groups of 6 and 6 groups of 4 is 24 this is the same in 4 groups of 6 and 6 groups of 4. The number of jumps and the size of the jumps is different.

Explanation:
To find the product of 4 × 6 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 4s six times. So the number of jumps is 6 and the size of each jump is 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 6 × 4 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 6s four times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of each jump is 6.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
A group of lions is called a pride. There are 2 prides in a savanna. Each pride has 9 lions. How many lions are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 10
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 11
There are ____ lions in all.

Answer:
2×9= 18 lions.

Explanation:
As there are 2 prides in the savanna and each pride has 9 lions, the total number of lions is 2×9= 18 lions.
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 9 twice. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Show and Grow

Question 7.
There are 3 bike racks at a park. Each bike rack has 4 bikes. How many bikes are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 12
Answer:
3×4= 12 bikes.

Explanation:
As there are 3 bike racks and each rack has 4 bikes, so the number of bikes are there is 3×4= 12.
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 4 three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 4.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You dig 8 holes. You plant 2 flower bulbs in each hole. You have5 bulbs left. How many flower bulbs did you have to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 13
Answer:
3×5= 15 flower bulbs.

Explanation:
The number of holes dug is 8 and in each hole, 2 flower bulbs are planted, so the number of flower bulbs planted is 2×5= 10 and still, there are 5 bulbs left. So the total number of flower bulbs is 10+5= 15. To represent this in the number line, as there are 5 bulbs added then it will be 3 groups of 5 which is 3×5= 15. So we will start from 0 then skip the count by 5 three times and the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 5.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use Number Lines to Multiply Homework & Practice 1.2

Question 1.
Find 3 × 6
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 14
3 × 6 = _____
Answer:
3 × 6= 18
Number of jumps: 3
Size of each jump: 6.

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 6 three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 6.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Find 4 × 5
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 15
4 × 5 = _____
Answer:
4 × 5= 20
Number of jumps: 4
Size of each jump: 5.

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 5 four times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
Structure
Complete the multiplication equations in two different ways. Model each equation on the number line.
____ × ____ = 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 16
Answer:
2×6= 12

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 6 two times. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

____ × ____ = 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 17
Answer:
4×3= 12

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 3 four times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
Writing
Explain how you can use a number line to find 5 × 3.
Answer:
5×3= 15.

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 3 five times. So the number of jumps is 5 and the size of the jump is 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have6 boxes of blueberry muffins. Each box has 4 muffins. How many muffins do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 18
Answer:
6×4= 24.

Explanation:
As we have 6 boxes of blueberry muffins with 4  muffins in each box, which means 6×4 = 24 muffins do we have it all.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You fill 8 pages of a photo album. Each page has 3 photos. You have one photo left. How many photos did you have to start?
Answer:
25 photos.

Explanation:
The total number of pages in a photo album is 8 and each page contains 3 photos, which means 8×3= 24, so there will be a total of 24 photos. Now 1 photo left, which means 24+1= 25. So there will be a total of 25 photos.

Review & Refresh
Question 7.
9 + 8 + 2 = _____

Answer:
19.

Explanation:
On adding 9+8+2 we will get the sum as 19.

Question 8.
6 + 5 + 3 = _____

Answer:
14.

Explanation:
On adding 6+5+3 we will get the sum as 14.

Question 9.
7 + 4 + 7 = ______

Lesson 1.3 Use Arrays to Multiply

Explore and Grow
Question 1.
Put 24 counters into equal rows. Draw your model.
Answer:
6×4= 24.
rows and 4 columns.

Explanation:
To keep 24 counters into equal rows, we will find the factors of 24 and then we can put 24 counters into equal rows. The factors of 24 are 2,3,4,6,8,12. Now we can pick any of the numbers from the factors of 24 and then put these 24 counters in equal groups. Let’s take six equal rows and arrange 24 counters in four equal rows as shown in the below image.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 24 counters into a different number of equal rows. Draw your model.
Answer:

Question 3.
Structure Compare your models. How are the models the same? How are they different?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Multiplication and Arrays

An array is a group of objects organized into rows and columns. Each row has the same number of objects.
Example
How many counters are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 1

Show and Grow

Question 1.
How many counters are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 2
Answer:
5 rows and 4 columns,
5+5+5+5= 20,
5×4= 20.
The total number of counters is 20.

Explanation:
From the above image, we can see there are 5 rows and 4 columns. The product is 5×4= 20 and the sum is 5+5+5+5= 20.

Question 2.
Draw an array to multiply 6 × 3.
6 × 3 = ______
Answer:
6 × 3 = 18

Explanation:
To draw an array of  6 × 3, we will place 6 rows and 3 columns. By that, we can form an array of 6×3 which is 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw an array to multiply.
Question 3.
4 × 8 = _____
Answer:
4 × 8 = 32

Explanation:
To draw an array of  4 × 8, we will place 4 rows and 8 columns. By that, we can form an array of 4×8 which is 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
3 × 9 = ____
Answer:
3×9= 27

Explanation:
To draw an array of  3×9, we will place 3 rows and 9 columns. By that, we can form an array of 3×9 which is 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 5.
7 × 3 = _____
Answer:
7 × 3 = 21

Explanation:
To draw an array of  7×3, we will place 7 rows and 3 columns. By that, we can form an array of 7×3 which is 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 6.
6 × 5 = _____
Answer:
6×5= 30

Explanation:
To draw an array of  6×5, we will place 6 rows and 5 columns. By that, we can form an array of 6×5 which is 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 7.
Number Sense
Newton has a 2 × 10 array of baseballs. He adds another row. How many baseballs does he add? Write a multiplication equation for his new array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 3
He adds ______ baseballs
____ × _____ = _____
Answer:
Newton adds 30 baseballs.
3×10= 30.

Explanation:
As Newton has an array of 2 × 10 of baseballs which are 20 baseballs as he adds another row, which means 3×10 of baseballs which are 30 baseballs. So he adds 30 and 20 which is 10 baseballs Newton was added and the multiplication equation for his new array is 3×10 which is 30 baseballs.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Use 6 counters to make as many different arrays as possible using all of the counters. Draw the arrays. Then write a multiplication equation for each array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 4
Answer:
2×3= 6,
3×2= 6.

Explanation:
The different possible arrays for 6 counters are 2×3= 6 which has 2 rows and 3 columns and 3×2= 6 which has 3 rows and 2 columns.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division This array consists of 2 rows and 3 columns

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division  This array consists of 3 rows and 2 columns.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A phone has 6 rows of apps with 4 apps in each row. How many apps are on the phone?
Draw:
Equation:
There are _____ apps on the phone.

Answer:
6×4= 24

Explanation:
As a phone has 6 rows of apps with 4 apps in each row, The number of apps on the phone are 6×4= 24.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Your classroom has 3 rows of desks with 10 desks in each row. How many desks are in your classroom?
Answer:
3×10= 30 desks.

Explanation:
The number of rows in the classroom is 3 rows with 10 desks in each row, which means 3×10= 30 desks in the classroom.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
A square array has an equal number of rows and columns. A farmer has 9 corn seeds to plant in a square array. Draw the square array the farmer can use to plant all of the seeds. How many rows and columns are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 5
Answer:
3×3= 9.

Explanation:
As the farmer has 9 corn seed to plant in a square array, so the possible square array is with 3 rows and 3 columns, which is 3×3= 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use Arrays to Multiply Homework & Practice 1.3

Question 1.
How many counters are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 6
Answer:
4×9= 36 counters.
4 rows, 9 columns.
9+9+9+9= 36.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 rows and 9 columns which makes 36 counters. The product is 4×9= 36 and the sum is 9+9+9+9= 36.

Draw an array to multiply.
Question 2.
9 × 2 = _____
Answer:
9×2= 18.

Explanation:
This array contains 9 rows and 2 columns which makes 18 counters. The product is 9×2= 18 and the sum is
9+9= 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
4 × 5 = _____
Answer:
4×5= 20.

Explanation:
This array contains 4 rows and 5 columns which makes 20 counters. The product is 4×5= 20 and the sum is
5+5+5+5= 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes has 24 counters. He says he can use all the counters to make an array with 3 rows. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 7
Answer:
With 3 rows and 8 columns, 24 counters can be made.

Explanation:
Yes, he is correct. With 3 rows and 8 columns, he can make 24 counters. The product of the array is 3×8= 24 and the sum of the array is 8+8+8= 24.

Question 5.
Number Sense
Newton has a 4 × 8 array of dominoes. He adds 2 more rows. How many dominoes does he add? Write a multiplication equation for his new array.
He adds _____ dominoes
_____ × ____ = _____
Answer:
Newton adds 16 dominoes,
6×8= 48.

Explanation:
As Newton has a 4×8 array of dominoes which is 32 dominoes and he adds 2 more rows, which is 4+2= 6. Then the dominoes will be a 6×8 array. And the multiplication equation for Newton’s new array is 6×8= 48. So the number of dominoes added is 48-32 which is 16 dominoes he was added.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
An art teacher hangs 2 rows of paintings with 10 paintings in each row. How many paintings does she hang?
Answer:
20 paintings.

Explanation:
As an art teacher hangs 2 rows of paintings in each row, so the number of paintings is 2×10= 20 paintings.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
A museum has 16 shark teeth to display in a square array. Draw the square array the museum can use to display all of the teeth. How many rows and columns are there?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 8
Answer:
There are 4 rows and 4 columns.

Explanation:
As the museum has 16 shark teeth to display in a square array, so the array can be written as 4×4= 16 which has 4 rows and 4 columns.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Review & Refresh

Complete the equation
Question 8.
3 + 8 = 8 + ____
Answer:
3+8= 8+3

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 3+8= 8+3.

Question 9.
10 + 0 = ____ + 10
Answer:
10+0= 0+10.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 10+0= 0+10.

Question 10.
6 + ____ = 7 + 6
Answer:
6+7= 7+6.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 6+7= 7+6.

Question 11.
____ + 8 = 8 + 9
Answer:
9+8= 8+9.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 9+8= 8+9.

Lesson 1.4 Multiply in Any Order

Explore and Grow
Question 1.
Write the multiplication equation for the array. Turn your paper and write the equation for the array.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 1
Answer:
5×3= 15.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 5 rows and 3 columns. So the product of the array is 5×3= 15.

Structure
Compare the equations. How are they the same? How are they different?

Think and Grow: Commutative Property of Multiplication

Ina multiplication equation, the numbers that are multiplied are called factors. The answer is called the product.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 2
Commutative Property of Multiplication: Changing the order of factors does not change the product.
Example
Complete the statements
Selina Concise Mathematics Class 6 ICSE Solutions Chapter 2 Estimation 1Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 3

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the statements
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 4
Answer:
5×2= 2×5.

Explanation:
In the first image, we can see 5 rows and 2 columns, this means 5 rows of 2. And in the second image, we can 2 rows and 5 columns, this means 2 rows of 5. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 5×2= 2×5.

Question 2.
Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 5
____ × ____ = _____
_____ × ____ = _____
So, ____ × _____ = ____ × ____
Answer:
2×3= 6,
3×2= 6.
So, 2×3= 3×2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 2 rows and 3 columns, this means 2 rows of 3. And we can also write as 3 rows and 2 columns as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 2×3= 3×2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 6
Answer:
1×4= 4,
4×1= 4.
So, 1×4= 4×1.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 1 row and 4 columns. Which makes 1 row of 4. And we can also write as 4 rows and 1 column as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 1×4= 4×1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 7
Answer:
2×6= 12,
6×2= 12,
2×6= 6×2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 2 rows and 6 columns. Which makes 2 rows of 6. And we can also write as 6 rows and 2 columns as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 2×6= 6×2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 8
Answer:
4×5= 20,
5×4= 20.
So, 4×5= 5×4.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 rows and 5 columns. Which makes 4 rows of 5. And we can also write as 5 rows and 4 columns as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 4×5= 5×4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Complete the equation.
Question 6.
8 × 3 = 3 × ____
Answer:
8×3= 24,
3×8= 24.
So, 8×3= 3×8.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can also write as 3 rows and 8 columns as we can see in the given below image which is 8×3= 3×8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 7.
10 × 2 = ____ × 10
Answer:
10×2 = 20,
2×10= 20.
So, 10×2= 2×10.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can also write as 2 rows and 10 columns as we can see in the given below image which is 10×2= 2×10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 8.
1 × ____ = 9 × 1
Answer:
1×9= 9,
9×1= 9.
So, 1×9= 9×1.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can also write as 9 rows and 1 column which is 1×9= 9×1.

Question 9.
Structure
Which shape completes the equation?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 9
Answer:
Moon shape.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, the missing shape is the moon.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend makes 7 rows of 6 stickers. You want to put the same number of stickers into 6 rows. How many stickers do you put in each row? Explain.
You put ____ stickers in each row.
Explain.

Answer:
7×6= 42,
6×7= 42.
So, 7×6= 6×7.
You can put 7 stickers in each row.

Explanation:
The number of stickers made is 7 rows of 6 stickers and want to put the same number of stickers into 6 rows. So, by the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can make 6 rows of 7 stickers, which has 6 rows and 7 columns.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Your friend makes 9 rows of 4 award ribbons. You want to put the same number of award ribbons into 4 rows. How many award ribbons do you put in each row? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 10
Answer:
9×4= 36,
4×9= 36.
So, 9×4= 4×9.
So 9 award ribbons can be put in each row.

Explanation:
Given, 9 rows of 4 award ribbons and we need to put the same number of award ribbons into 4 rows. So by the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can make 4 rows of 9 award ribbons, which has 4 rows and 9 columns and 9 award ribbons can be put in each row.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 2 rows of 8 toy cars. Your friend has 5 rows of 2 toy cars. How can you use the Commutative Property of Multiplication to find how many rows your friend needs to add so that you both have the same number of toy cars?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 11
Answer:

Explanation:

Multiply in Any Order Homework & Practice 1.4

Question 1.
Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 12
Answer:
3 rows of 6,
3×6= 18.
6 rows of 3
6×3= 18,
So, 3×6= 6×3.

Explanation:
In the first image, we can see 3 rows and 6 columns, this means 3 rows of 6. And in the second image, we can 6 rows and 3 columns, this means 6 rows of 3. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 3×6= 6×3.

Question 2.
Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 13
Answer:
7×4= 28,
4×7= 28.
So, 7×4= 4×7

Explanation:
In the image, we can see 7 rows and 4 columns, this means 7 rows of 4. And by the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. To draw an array by the Commutative Property of Multiplication, we will take 4 rows of 7, which means 4 rows and 7 columns as in the below image. So, 7×4= 4×7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Which two arrays can you use to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 14
Answer:
The first image and third image shows the commutative property of multiplication.

Explanation:
From the above image, the first and third arrays show the Commutative property of multiplication. Which states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. As in the first image, we can see 4 rows of 3 which have 4 rows and 3 columns and in the third image, we can see 3 rows of 4 which has 3 rows and 4 columns.

Question 4.
Precision
Write two equations that show the Commutative Property of Multiplication.
____ × ____ = ____ × _____
____ × _____ = ____ × ____
Answer:
5×6= 6×5,
2×3= 3×2.

Explanation:
The Commutative property of multiplication states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. For example, if we take 5×6= 30 then the commutative property is 6×5= 30.
So 5×6= 6×5.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A computer lab has 6 rows of 5 computers. A technology teacher wants to rearrange the computers into5 rows. How many computers does the teacher put in each row? Explain.
Answer:
6 computers do the teacher put in each row.

Explanation:
As a computer lab has 6 rows of 5 computers, and the technology teacher rearranged the computers into 5 rows, so the teacher will put 6 computers by commutative property as it states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 6×5= 5×6.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 6 rows of 4 pennies. Your friend has 2 rows of 6 pennies. How many rows does your friend need to add so that you both have the same number of pennies?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 15
Answer:
So, a friend needs 2 rows to add then both will have the same number of pennies.

Explanation:
There are 6 rows of 4 pennies, which is 6 rows and 4 columns and the friend has 2 rows of 6 pennies which is 2 rows and 6 columns. So my friend needs to add 2 rows and then it will be 2 rows+2 rows= 4 rows and there will be 6 columns. So, by the commutative property, as it states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, 6×4= 4×6.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Newton hits a ball 5 fewer times than Descartes does. Newton hits the ball 9 times. How many times does Descartes hit the ball?

Answer:

Explanation:

Lesson 1.5 Divide: Size of Equal Groups

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Put 18 counters in 6 equal groups. Draw to show your groups
Number of counters in each group: _____
Answer:
The number of counters in each group is 3 counters.

Explanation:
To put 18 counters in 6 equal groups, we will divide 18 by 6 then the result is 3. So, we can put counters in 3 counters in 6 equal groups as shown in the given below image.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 18 counters in 3 equal groups. Draw to show your groups
Number of counters in each group: _____
Answer:
The number of counters in each group is 6.

Explanation:
To put 18 counters in 3 equal groups, we will divide 18 by 3 then the result is 6. So, we can put counters in 6 counters in 3 equal groups as shown in the given below image.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Structure
How does changing the number of equal groups change the number of counters in each group?
Answer:

Explanation:

Think and Grow: Using Equal Groups to Divide

Division is an operation that gives the size of equal groups or the number of equal groups. When you know the total number of objects and the number of equal groups, you can divide to find the size of each group.3 equal groups
Example
Divide 12 counters into. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 1

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Divide 15 counters into5 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 2
15 ÷ 5 = ____

Answer:
The number of counters placed in 5 equal groups is 3 counters.

Explanation:
There are 15 counters and we need to place those 15 counters in 5 equal groups. So we will divide 15 by 5, 15÷5= 3. So we will pace 3 counters in 5 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 3
Answer:
The number of counters placed in 5 equal groups is 3 counters.

Explanation:
There are 15 counters and we need to place those 15 counters in 5 equal groups. So we will divide 15 by 5, 15÷5= 3. So we will pace 3 counters in 5 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Divide 30 counters into 6 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 4
30 ÷ 6 = ____

Answer:
The number of counters placed in 6 equal groups is 5 counters. AS 30÷6= 5.

Explanation:
There are 30 counters and we need to place those 30 counters in 6 equal groups. So we will divide 30 by 6,
30÷6= 5. So we will pace 5 counters in 6 equal groups.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 5
Answer:
The number of counters placed in 6 equal groups is 5 counters. AS 30÷6= 5.

Explanation:
There are 30 counters and we need to place those 30 counters in 6 equal groups. So we will divide 30 by 6,
30÷6= 5. So we will pace 5 counters in 6 equal groups.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
Divide 16 counters into 2 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
16 ÷ 2 = ____
Answer:
16÷2= 8.

Explanation:
There are 16 counters and we need to place those 16 counters in 2 equal groups. So we will divide 16 by 2,
16÷2= 8. So we will pace 8 counters in 2 equal groups.

Question 4.
Divide 9 counters into 3 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
9 ÷ 3 = ____
Answer:
9 ÷ 3= 3.

Explanation:
There are 9 counters and we need to place those 9 counters in 3 equal groups. So we will divide 9 by 3,
9÷3= 3. So we will pace 3 counters in 3 equal groups.

Question 5.
Structure
Write the division equation that matches the tape diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 6
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
18÷2= 9.

Explanation:
There are 18 counters and we need to place those 18 counters in 2 equal groups. So we will divide 18 by 2,
18÷2= 9. So we will pace 9 counters in 2 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton has a tennis ball collection. He can divide the balls into3 equal groups with none left over. He can also divide the balls into4 equal groups with none left over. How many tennis balls does he have?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 30 seashells. You put an equal number of seashells in 5 bags. How many seashells are in each bag?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 7
Model:
Division equation:
There are _____ seashells in each bag.

Answer:
Division equation: 30÷5= 6.
There are 6 seashells in each bag.

Explanation:
As there are 30 seashells and we need to put an equal number of seashells in 5 bags, we will divide 30÷5= 6. So we will 6 seashells in each bag.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You have 28 rocks. You put an equal number of rocks in 4 piles. How many rocks are in each pile?
Answer:
28÷4= 7.

Explanation:
There are 28 rocks and we should put an equal number of rocks in 4 piles, we will divide 28 by 4. So 28÷4= 7. So there will be 7 rocks in each pile.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes each have40 quarters. Newton puts his quarters into5 equal groups. Descartes puts his quarters into4 equal groups. Who has more quarters in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 8
Answer:
Descartes has more quarters than Newton.

Explanation:
As both Newton and Descartes have 40 quarters and Newton puts his quarters into 5 equal groups, which means 40÷5= 8. Newton put his 8 quarters into 5 equal groups and Descartes puts his quarters into 4 equal groups, which means 40÷4= 10. Descartes put his 10 quarters into 4 equal groups. So, Descartes has more quarters than Newton.

Divide: Size of Equal Groups Homework & Practice 1.5

Question 1.
Divide 16 counters into 4 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 9
16 ÷ 4 = ____

Answer:
16÷4= 4.

Explanation:
There are 16 counters and we need to place those 16 counters in 4 equal groups. So we will divide 16 by 4,
16÷4= 4. So we will pace 4 counters in 4 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 10
Answer:
16÷4= 4.

Explanation:
There are 16 counters and we need to place those 16 counters in 4 equal groups. So we will divide 16 by 4,
16÷4= 4. So we will pace 4 counters in 4 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Divide 28 counters into 7 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
28 ÷ 7 = ____
Answer:
28 ÷ 7= 4.

Explanation:
There are 28 counters and we need to place those 28 counters in 7 equal groups. So we will divide 28 by 7,
28 ÷ 7= 4. So we will pace 4 counters in 7 equal groups.

Question 3.
Divide 27 counters into 3 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
27 ÷ 3 = ____
Answer:
27 ÷ 3 = 9.

Explanation:
There are 27 counters and we need to place those 27 counters in 3 equal groups. So we will divide 27 by 3,
27 ÷ 3= 9. So we will pace 9 counters in 3 equal groups.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says you divide 18 counters into 3 equal groups. Is he correct?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 11
Answer:
Yes, Newton is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, Newton is correct. As we can see in the above image he divided 18 counters into 3 equal groups with different numbers of counters in each group.

Question 5.
Precision
A class has 14 boys and 18 girls. Can the teacher divide the class equally into 4 groups with no students remaining? Explain.
Answer:
The teacher places 8 students in 4 equal groups with no students remaining.

Explanation:
As a class has 14 boys and 18 girls, so the total number of students is 14+18= 32 students. As the teacher divided the class equally into 4 groups, 32÷4= 8. So the teacher places 8 students in each group with no students remaining.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 14 erasers. You and your friend share them equally. How many erasers do you and your friend each get?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 12
Answer:
7 erasers will get each.

Explanation:
There are 14 erasers and those erasers are shared equally among two of them, so we will divide 14 by 2 which is 14÷2= 7. So 7 erasers will get each.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes each have 42 glow-in-the-dark stickers. Newton divides into 6 equal groups. Descartes divides his into7 equal groups. Who has more stickers in each group?
Answer:
Newton has more stickers than Descartes in each group.

Explanation:
As Newton and Descartes, each have 42 glow-in-the-dark stickers and Newton divides them into 6 equal groups, which is 42÷6= 7. So Newton has 7 glow-in-the-dark stickers in 6 equal groups. And Descartes divides his into7 equal groups which is 42÷7= 6. So Descartes has 6 glow-in-the-dark stickers in 7 equal groups. Newton has more stickers than Descartes in each group.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 13
Answer:
41

Explanation:
On adding 26+15 we will get 41.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 14
Answer:
87.

Explanation:
On adding 32+55 we will get 87.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 15
Answer:
61.

Explanation:
On adding 49+12 we will get 61.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 16
Answer:
92.

Explanation:
On adding 24+68 we will get 92.

Lesson 1.6 Divide: Number of Equal Groups

Explore and Grow
Question 1.
Put 24 counters in equal groups of 4. Draw to show your groups.
Number of groups: ______

Answer:
The number of groups is 6.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 24 by 4, 24÷4= 6. So we will put 4 counters in 6 equal number of group.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 24 counters in equal groups of 6. Draw to show your groups.
Number of groups: ______
Answer:
The number of groups is 4.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 6, we will divide 24 by 6, 24÷6= 4. So we will put 6 counters in 4 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Structure
How does changing the size of the groups change the number of equal groups?

Think and Grow: Using Equal Groups to Divide

When you know the total number of objects and the size of each group, you can divide to find the number of equal groups.
Example
Divide 12 counters into. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 1

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Divide 10 counters into groups of 2. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 2
10 ÷ 2 = ____

Answer:
10 ÷ 2 = 5.

Explanation:
To put 10 counters in equal groups of 2, we will divide 10 by 2, 10÷2= 5. So we will put 2 counters in 5 equal number of group.

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 3
Answer:
10÷2= 5.

Explanation:
To put 10 counters in equal groups of 2, we will divide 10 by 2, 10÷2= 5. So we will put 2 counters in 5 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Divide 24 counters into groups of 4. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 4
24 ÷ 4 = ____

Answer:
24÷4= 6.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 24 by 4, 24÷4= 6. So we will put 4 counters in 6 equal number of group.

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 5
Answer:
24÷4= 6.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 24 by 4, 24÷4= 6. So we will put 4 counters in 6 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Divide 30 counters into groups of 6. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 6
30÷6=

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 7
Answer:
30÷6= 5.

Explanation:
To put 30 counters in equal groups of 6, we will divide 30 by 6, 30÷6= 5. So we will put 5 counters in 6 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
Divide 15 counters into groups of 5. How many groups are there?
15 ÷ 5 = _____
Answer:
15÷5= 3.

Explanation:
To put 15 counters in equal groups of 5, we will divide 15 by 5, 15÷5= 3. So we will put 3 counters in 5 equal number of group.

Question 5.
Divide 16 counters into groups of 4. How many groups are there?
16 ÷ 4 = _____
Answer:
16÷4= 4.

Explanation:
To put 16 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 16 by 4, 16÷4= 4. So we will put 4 counters in 4 equal number of group.

Question 6.
Structure
You want to bake as many loaves of banana bread as possible with 12 eggs. Each loaf of bread requires 2 eggs. Which models can you use to find how many loaves of bread you can make?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 8
Answer:

Explanation:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real life
A florist uses 35 roses to make bouquets. Each bouquet has 7 roses. How many bouquets does the florist make?
Equation:
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 9
The florist makes ______ bouquets

Answer:
Equation: 35÷7= 5

Explanation:
As the florist has 35 roses to make bouquets and each bouquet has35 7 roses, so the florist can make 35÷7= 5 bouquets.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
A farmer puts 48 eggs into cartons. He puts 6 eggs in each carton. How many cartons does he use?
Answer:
8 cartons.

Explanation:
As the farmer puts 48 eggs into cartons and in each carton, there are 6 eggs. So the farmer uses 48÷6= 8 cartons.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton uses his subway pass 3 times each day. Descartes uses his pass 2 times each day. Who will use all of his rides first? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 10
Would your answer change if Newton and Descartes both use their passes 3 times each day? Explain.
Answer:
Newton will finish his rides first then Descartes.
Descartes will use all of his rides first if Descartes use passes 3 times each day.

Explanation:
As Newton has 24 subway rides left and he uses subway pass 3 times each day, so the number of rides left are
24-3= 21. Descartes has 18 subway rides and he uses his pass 2 times each day, so the number of rides left are
18-2= 16. By using repeated subtraction which starts from 24 as given and then we will subtract 3 until we get 0.
24-3= 21
21-3= 18
18-3= 15
15-3= 12
12-3= 9
9-3= 6
6-3= 3
3-3=0.
So, Newton will complete the subway pass by 8 times.
18-2= 16
16-2= 14
14-2= 12
12-2= 10
10-2= 8
8-2= 6
6-2= 4
4-2= 2
2-2= 0.
And Descartes will complete the subway pass by 9 times. So Newton will use all his rides first.
And if Descartes uses 3 times of his pass then
18-3= 15
15-3= 12
12-3= 9
9-3= 6
6-3= 3
3-3= 0.
Descartes will complete the subway pass by 6 times, So Descartes will complete his pass first.

Divide: Number of Equal Groups Homework & Practice 1.6

Question 1.
Divide 28 counters into groups of 4. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 11
28 ÷ 4 = ____

Answer:
28 ÷ 4 =7

Explanation:
To put 28 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 28 by 4, 28÷4= 7. So we will put 4 counters in 7 equal number of group.

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 12
Answer:
28÷4= 7.

Explanation:
To put 28 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 28 by 4, 28÷4= 7. So we will put 4 counters in 7 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
Question 2.
Divide 25 counters into groups of 5. How many groups are there?
25 ÷ 5 = _____
Answer:
25 ÷ 5 = 5.

Explanation:
To put 25 counters in equal groups of 5, we will divide 25 by 5, 25÷5= 5. So we will put 5 counters in 5 equal number of group.

Question 3.
Divide 12 counters into groups of 6. How many groups are there?
12 ÷ 6 = _____
Answer:
12 ÷ 6 = 2.

Explanation:
To put 12 counters in equal groups of 6, we will divide 12 by 6, 12÷6= 2. So we will put 2 counters in 6 equal number of group.

Question 4.
Writing
Write and solve a problem in which you need to find the number of equal groups.
Answer:
Divide 22 counters into groups of 11. How many groups are there?

Explanation:
To put 22 counters in equal groups of 11, we will divide 22 by 11, 22÷11= 2. So we will put 2 counters in 11 equal number of group.

Question 5.
Reasoning
Your classroom has 30 chairs that need to be stacked with 5 chairs in each stack. Your teacher already made 2 stacks. How many stacks of chairs still need to be made?
Answer:
The number of stacks of chairs that still need to be made is 4.

Explanation:
As a classroom has 30 chairs and that needed to be stacked with 5 chairs in each stack, so 30÷5= 6 stacks. And the teacher already made 2 stacks, which means 6-2= 4. So the number of stacks of chairs that still need to be made are 4 stacks.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have more than 30 and fewer than 40 piñata toys. You divide them into groups with 8 in each group. How many groups do you make?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 13
Answer:
There will be 4 groups with 8 pinata toys in each group.

Explanation: As there are more than 30 and fewer than 40 pinata toys, and we need to divide them into groups with 8 in each group. So we need to choose the number between 30-40. As we can see fewer than 40 and more than 30, so we will choose 32 as it will divide them into groups with 8 in each group, 32÷8= 4. So there will be 4 groups with 8 pinata toys in each group.

Question 7.
A street vendor puts 42 apples into baskets. She puts 6 apples in each basket. How many baskets does she use?
Answer:
7 baskets.

Explanation:
As a street vendor puts 42 apples into baskets and she puts 6 apples in each basket, so she needs 42÷6= 7 baskets.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes are at an amusement park. Newton uses 2 tickets to ride each roller coaster. Descartes uses 3 tickets to ride at the front of each roller coaster. Who runs out of tickets first? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 14
Newton Descartes, They run out of tickets at the same time

Answer:
Newton will run out of tickets first, as he has fewer tickets.

Explanation:
As Newton has 14 coaster tickets and uses 2 tickets to ride each roller coaster, so there will 14-2= 12 tickets remaining. And Descartes has 21 coaster tickets and uses 3 tickets to ride, so the remaining tickets are 21-3= 18 tickets. Newton will run out of tickets first, as he has fewer tickets.

Review & Refresh

Find the difference. Use addition to check your answer.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 15
Answer:
96-58= 38,
38+58= 96.

Explanation:
On subtracting 96-58 we will get 38 and by adding 58 and 38 we will get 96. So by adding we can check your answer.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 16
Answer:
48-32= 16,
16+32= 48.

Explanation:
On subtracting 48-32 we will get 16 and by adding 32 and 16 we will get 48. So by adding we can check your answer.

Lesson 1.7 Use Number Lines to Divide

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Find the difference. Use each difference as the starting number in the next equation. Model the problems on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 1
Answer:
12-3= 9,
9-3= 6,
6-3= 3,
3-3= 0.

Explanation:
To represent a number line, we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 12 as given and then we will subtract 3 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Structure
How can you use a number line to help you find 12 ÷ 3?
Answer:
12÷3= 4.

Explanation:
To use the number line for the given value 12÷3 which is 4, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 4 three times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 3. And we can also use the subtraction method, which starts with 12 and subtract 3 until we get 0.

Think and Grow: Number Lines and Repeated Subtraction

Example Find 20 ÷ 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 2

Another Way:
Use repeated subtraction. Start with 20. Subtract 4 until you reach 0.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 3

Show and Grow

Complete the equations.
Question 1.
24 ÷ 6 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 4
Answer:
24 ÷ 6 = 4.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 6s from 24 until we reach 0,
24÷6= 4, so there are 4 groups of 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
16 ÷ 8 = _____
16 – 8 = _____
____ – 8 = 0
Answer:
16 ÷ 8 = 3,
16-8= 8,
8-8= 0.

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts from 16 as given and then we will subtract 8 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 8.
16 ÷ 8 = 3,
16-8= 8,
8-8= 0.

Question 3.
27 ÷ 9 = _____
27 – 9 = _____
____ – 9 = ____
_____ – 9 = 0
Answer:
27 ÷ 9 = 3,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts from 27 as given and then we will subtract 9 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 9.
27 ÷ 9 = 3,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Complete the equations.
Question 4.
25 ÷ 5 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 5
Answer:
25 ÷ 5 = 5.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 5s from 25 until we reach 0,
25÷5= 5, so there are 5 groups of 5.

Question 5.
21 – 7 = _____
____ – 7 = _____
_____ – 7 = 0
____ ÷ _____ = ____
Answer:
21-7= 14,
14-7= 7,
7-7= 0,
21÷7= 3.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 21 as given and then we will subtract 7 until we get 0.
21-7= 14,
14-7= 7,
7-7= 0,
21÷7= 3.

Question 6.
36 – 9 = _____
____ – 9 = ____
____ – 9 = ____
_____ – 9 = 0
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
36-9= 27,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.
36÷9= 4.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 36 as given and then we will subtract 9 until we get 0.
36-9= 27,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.
36÷9= 4.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes uses a number line to find 18 ÷ 2. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 6

Explanation:
No, Descartes is not correct. As 18÷2= 9 and here the given result 8. So Descartes is incorrect.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real life

Each age group is divided into teams with 6 players on each team. Each team receives a trophy at the end of the season. How many trophies are needed?

Age GroupNumber of Players
 6 – 7 Years old18
8 – 9 Years old24

Division equations:
Addition equations:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 7
_____ trophies are needed

Answer:
7 trophies are needed.

Explanation:
As each age group is divided into teams with 6 players on each team and each team receives a trophy at the end of the season, so the number of trophies needed for age group 6-7 years old is 18÷6= 3 trophies. And for the age group 8-9 years old is 24÷6= 4 trophies.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Each age group is put into cabins with 8 campers in each cabin. How many cabins are needed?

Age GroupNumber of Campers
 5 – 7 Years old32
8 – 10 Years old24

The two age groups are combined into one group. Does the total number of cabins that are needed change? Explain
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 8
Answer:
The number of cabins needed for the age group of 5-7 years is 4 cabins and the number of cabins needed for the age group of 8-10 years old is 3 cabins. There will be no change in the total number of cabins.

Explanation:
For the age group of 5-7 years old number of cabins needed are 32÷8= 4 cabins. And for the age group 8- 10 years old number of cabins needed are 24÷8= 3 cabins. If two age groups are combined into one group then the total number of campers are 24+32= 56. So the total number of cabins needed are 56÷8= 7 cabins. So there will be no change.

Use Number Lines to Divide Homework & Practice 1.7

Complete the equations

Question 1.
9 ÷ 3 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 9
Answer:
9÷3= 3.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 3s from 9 until we reach 0,
9÷3= 3, so there are 3 groups of 3.

Question 2.
20 – 5 = ____
____ – 5 = ____
____ – 5 = ____
____ – 5 = 0
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
20-5= 15,
15-5= 10,
10-5= 5,
5-5= 0,
20÷5= 4.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 20 as given and then we will subtract 5 until we get 0.
20-5= 15,
15-5= 10,
10-5= 5,
5-5= 0,
20÷5= 4.

Question 3.
10 – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = 0
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
10-2 = 8,
8-2= 6,
6-2= 4,
4-2= 2,
2-2= 0,
10÷5= 5.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 10 as given and then we will subtract 2 until we get 0.
10-2 = 8,
8-2= 6,
6-2= 4,
4-2= 2,
2-2= 0,
10÷5= 5.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes uses repeated subtraction to find 15 ÷ 5. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 10
Answer: Yes, he is correct.

Explanation:
As Descartes uses repeated subtraction which starts from 15 as given and then we will subtract 5 until we get 0. So Descartes is correct.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Find Newton’s missing number. Explain how you solved.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 11
Answer:
18-6= 12,
12-6= 6,
6-6 = 0.

Explanation:
Here, given subtract 6 from a number 3 times, and reach 0, so we will multiply 6 by 3 and we will get a number,
which is 6×3= 18. So the number is 18 if we subtract 6, 3 times we will reach 0.
18-6= 12,
12-6= 6,
6-6 = 0.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Each age group is divided into groups of 7 swimmers. How many groups are there in each age group?

Age GroupNumber of Swimmers
 6 – 8 Years old28
9 – 11 Years old14

The two age groups are combined into one group. Does the total number of groups change? Explain.
Answer:
By combining two age groups into one group the total number of groups does not change, as the total number of groups and the combined two age group is equal.

Explanation:
As each age was divided into groups of 7 swimmers, so the number of groups in the 6-8 years old age group is 28÷7= 4 groups. And the number of groups in the 9-11 years old age group is 14÷7= 2 groups. And the total number of groups is 4+2= 6. As the two age groups are combined into one group, so 28+14= 42. So the total number of groups will be 42÷7= 6 groups.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Circle the values of the underlined digit.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 12
Answer:
8 tens.

Explanation:
The value of 8 in the digit 581 is 8 tens.

Understand Multiplication and Division Performance Task

Question 1.
a. Your science teacher gives you 71 picture cards to sort into categories, living and nonliving. You sort 11 cards into the nonliving category. How many cards do you sort into the living category?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 1
b. You sort the living cards into 2 categories, plants, and animals. The numbers of cards in each category are equal. How many cards are in the animal category?
c. You divide the animal cards into 6 equal groups. How many animal cards are in each group?
d. The animals in 5 of the groups have backbones, and the animals in the other group do not have backbones. How many more cards have animals with backbones? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 2
Answer:
a) 60.
b) 30 cards in the animal category.
c) 5 animal cards.
d)

Explanation:
a) As there are 71 picture cards and 11 of them are sorted into the non-living category, so the remaining cards in the living category are 71-11= 60.
b) As the living cards are 60 and those are divided into two equal categories 60÷2= 30, which is 30 plants and 30 animal cards. So there are 30 cards in the animal category.
c) To divide the animal cards into 6 equal groups, we will divide 30 by 6 and there will be 30÷6= 5  animal cards are in each group.
d)

Understand Multiplication and Division Activity

Hooray Array!

Getting Started: Fill in your board with each number from the Number List. You may write each number in any square. Each square can only have one number.
Directions:
1. Choose a player to be the caller. The caller selects a Hooray Array Equation Card and reads the equation.
2. All players solve the equation and place a counter on the answer. Cover only 1 number per turn.
3. Repeat the process with players taking turns as the caller.
4. The winner is the first player who creates a 3 × 3 array on the board and yells, “HOORAY ARRAY!”
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 3
Answer:

Understand Multiplication and Division Chapter practice

1.1 Use Equal Groups to Multiply

Question 1.
Use the model to complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 4
Answer:
2 groups of 3,
3+3= 6,
2×3= 6.

Explanation:
Here, we can see 2 groups with 3 counters in each group.
So, 2 groups of 3 which is 6, which means 2×3= 6.
And if we add 2 groups of the counter, we will get the  same result,
which is 3+3= 6.

Draw equal groups. Then complete the equations.

Question 2.
3 groups of 6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 5
Answer:
3 groups of 6,
2+2+2= 6,
3×6= 18.

Explanation:
Here, we can see 3 groups with 6 counters in each group.
So, 3 groups of 6 which are 18, which means 3×6= 18.
And if we add 3 groups of the counter, we will get the  same result,
which is 2+2+2= 6.

Question 3.
4 groups of 5
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 6
Answer:
4 groups of 5,
5+5+5+5= 20,
4×5= 20.

Explanation:
Here, we can see 4 groups with 5 counters in each group.
So, 4 groups of 5 which is 20, which means 4×5= 20.
And if we add 4 groups of the counter, we will get the  same result,
which is 5+5+5+5= 20.

1.2 Use Number Lines to Multiply

Question 4.
Find 8 × 3
Number of jumps: ___
Size of each jump: ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 7
8 × 3 = ____
Answer:
8×3= 24.

Explanation:
Here, we will start at 0 and then we will skip count by 3s eight times. So, the number of jumps is 8, and the size of each jump is 3. which is 8×3= 24.

1.3 Use Arrays to Multiply

Draw an array to multiply.

Question 5.
2 × 8 = ___

Answer:
2 × 8 = 16.

Explanation:
To draw an array of 2×8, we will take 2 rows and 8 columns to build an array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 6.
7 × 4 = ___
Answer:
7 × 4 = 28

Explanation:
To draw an array of 7×4, we will take 7 rows and 4 columns to build an array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton has 32 counters. He says that he can use all the counters to make an array with 6 rows. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 8
Answer: No, Newton is not correct.

Explanation:
No, as Newton has 32 counters which will not make an array with 6 rows. As 32 is not divisible 6, so he is not correct.

1.4 Multiply in Any Order

Question 8.
Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 9
____ × ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
So, ___ × ___ = ____ × ___

Answer:
9×5 = 45,
5×9 = 45,
So, 9×5 = 5×9.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 9 rows of 5,
which means 9×5 = 45,
so by the commutative property of multiplication,
9×5 = 5×9,
which is 45.

Complete the equation.

Question 9.
4 × 10 = 10 × ___
Answer: 4.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, which means changing the order of factors which does not change the product. So,
4 × 10 = 10 × 4.

Question 10.
3 × 9 = ____ × 3
Answer: 9

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, which means changing the order of factors which does not change the product. So,
3 × 9 = 9 × 3.

Question 11.
8 × ___ = 4 × 8.
Answer: 4

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, which means changing the order of factors which does not change the product. So,
8 × 4= 4 × 8.

1.5 Divide: Size of Equal Groups

Question 12.
Divide 27 counters into 3 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 10
Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 11
27 ÷ 3 = ___
Answer: 9 counters in each group.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 27,
now, we will divide 27 counters into groups of 3,
which means
27÷3= 9.
On dividing 27 counters by 3,
we will get the result as 9 groups.

Question 13
Divide 32 counters into4 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
32 ÷ 4 = ___
Answer: 8 counters in each group.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 32,
now, we will divide 32 counters into groups of 4,
which means
32÷4= 8.
On dividing 32 counters by 4,
we will get the result as 8 counters in each group.

Question 14.
Divide 12 counters into4 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
12 ÷ 4 = ___
Answer: 3 counters in each group.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 12,
now, we will divide 12 counters into groups of 4,
which means
12÷4= 3.
On dividing 12 counters by 4,
we will get the result as 3 counters in each group.

1.6 Divide: Number of Equal Groups

Question 15.
Divide 15 counters into groups of 3. How many groups are there?
15 ÷ 3 = ___
Answer: 5 groups.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 15,
now, we will divide 15 counters into groups of 3
which means
15÷3= 5.
On dividing 15 counters by 3,
we will get the result in 5 groups.

Question 16.
Divide 20 counters into groups of 2. How many groups are there?
20 ÷ 2 = __
Answer: 10 groups.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 20,
now, we will divide 20 counters into groups of 2,
which means
20÷2= 10.
On dividing 20 counters by 2,
we will get the result as 10 groups.

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
Newton and Descartes are trying a new music app. Newton uses 4 credits a day to hear songs without commercials. Descartes uses 2 credits a day to hear songs with commercials. Who runs out of credits first? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 12
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 13
Answer:
Newton will run out of credits first than Descartes. No, they will not run out of credits at the same time.

Explanation:
The total credits do Newton has in a new music app are 24 and he uses 4 credits a day to hear songs without commercials, so the remaining credits are 24-4= 20. And the total credits Descartes had are 14 and he uses 2 credits a day to hear songs with commercials, which is 14-2= 12. we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 24 as given and then we will subtract 4 until we get 0 which is
24-4= 20
20-4= 16
16-4= 12
12-4= 8
8-4= 4
4-4= 0
so, Newton will run out of credits by his 6 uses. And we will use repeated subtraction for Descartes’s credits, which is
14-2= 12
12-2= 10
10-2= 8
8-2= 6
6-2= 4
4-2= 2
2-2= 0
so, Descartes will run out of credits by his 7 uses. So Newton will run out of credits earlier than Descartes.

1.7 Use Number Lines to Divide

Complete the equations.

Question 18.
28 ÷ 7 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 14
Answer:
28 ÷ 7 = 4.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 7s from 28 until we reach 0,
28÷7= 4, so there are 4 groups of 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 19.
18 – 9 = ___
___ – 9 = 0
___ ÷ ___ = ___
Answer:
18-9= 0,
9-9= 0
18÷9= 2

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts with 18 as given and then we will subtract 9 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 9.

Question 20.
12 – 4 = ___
___ – 4 = ___
___ – 4 = 0
___ ÷ ___ = ___
Answer:
12-4= 8
8-4= 4
4-4= 0
12÷4= 3.

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts with 12 as given and then we will subtract 4 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 4.

Final Words:

The solutions seen in this chapter are as per the latest edition. The Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Answers are prepared by the math experts so you don’t worry about the solutions. I Hope the details prevailed in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division made you happy. Please share the Big Ideas Math Answer Key 3rd Grade 1st Chapter Understand Multiplication and Division with your friends and help them to overcome their difficulties in this chapter. Bookmark our site to get the solutions of all grade 3 chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3

Students who are searching Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers pdf can get them here. Big Ideas Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers includes all the important lessons which help to improve your math skills. If you wish to get good marks in the exam, then you must practice all the problems available on Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4. We have covered all the topics in this chapter with a brief explanation of every problem. Check out every problem along with the solution for a better understanding of concepts.

Big Ideas Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers

Before you begin practicing the problems, we request you go through all the topics included in this chapter. Students who really want to become a master in math must work hard from the basic level itself. So, Download Free Pdf Big Ideas Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers. This helps you to improve your math skills and become excel in that subject. Students can easily overcome the difficulties in maths and also their performance in the exam with the help of the Big Ideas Grade 4 Answer Key.

Lesson 1 Understand Multiplicative Comparisons
Lesson 2 Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands
Lesson 3 Estimate Products by Rounding
Lesson 4 Use the Distributive Property to Multiply
Lesson 5 Use Expanded Form to Multiply
Lesson 6 Use Partial Products to Multiply
Lesson 7 Multiply Two-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers
Lesson 8 Multiply Three- and Four-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers
Lesson 9 Use Properties to Multiply
Lesson 10 Problem Solving: Multiplication
Multiply by One-Digit Numbers Performance Task

Lesson 3.1 Understand Multiplicative Comparisons

Explore and Grow

Model the counters. Draw to show your model.

There are 20 counters. Five of the counters are yellow. The rest are red.

How many more red counters are there than yellow counters?
How many times as many red counters are there as yellow counters?
Answer: model

15 red counters, 3 times the yellow counters.

Explanation:
Totally there are 20 counters in which 5 of them are yellow counters and the remaining 15 of them are red counters.
So, red counters are three times the yellow counters.

Structure
Explain how you can use an addition equation or a multiplication equation to compare the numbers of yellow counters and red counters.
Answer:  Number of yellow counters = 5 and number of red counters =15,
There are red counters as 3 times of yellow counters that is,
3 × 5 = 15  or
5 + 5 + 5 = 15.

Explanation: Given the total number of yellow counters and the number of red counters so, simply we should use our basic addition rule and basic multiplication rule to explain the mathematical equation for the number of yellow counters and number of red counters.

Think and Grow: Understand Multiplicative Comparisons

You can use multiplication to compare two numbers.
Example
Write two comparison sentences for 24 = 4 × 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.1 2

You can compare two numbers using addition or multiplication.
• Use addition to find or how many more how many fewer
• Use multiplication to find as much. how many times

Answer : 24 is 6 times as many as 4 or 24 is 4 times as many as 6
Example
Write an equation for each comparison sentence.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.1 3
Answer: 12 = 8 + 4 ,  12 = 3 × 4

Show and Grow

Write two comparison sentences for the equation
Question 1.
15 = 3 × 5
Answer:  15 is 3 times as many as 5.
or
15 is 5 times as many as 3.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 3 and 5 ,
to get the multiplication result as 15.

Question 2.
32 = 4 × 8
Answer: 32 is 4 times as many as 8.
or
32 is 8 times as many as 4.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 4 and 8 ,
to get the multiplication result as 32.

Draw a model for the comparison sentence. Then write an equation.
Question 3.
21 is 14 more than 7.
Answer:

21 = 14 + 7.

Explanation: The term more than is referred  to addition ,
we should add the numbers 14 and 7,
to get the addition result as 21.

Question 4.
40 is 8 times as many as 5.
Answer:

40 = 8 × 5.

Explanation: The term as many as is referred  to multiplication ,
we should multiply the numbers 5and 8 ,
to get the multiplication result as 40.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write two comparison sentences for the equation.
Question 5.
48 = 6 × 8
Answer: 48 is 6 times as many as 8. or
48 is 8 times as many as 6.

Explanation: The term as many as is referred  to multiplication ,
we should multiply the numbers 6and 8 ,
to get the multiplication result as 48.

Question 6.
63 = 7 × 9
Answer:  63 is 7 as many as 9. or
63 is 9 as many as 7.

Explanation: The term as many as is referred  to multiplication ,
we should multiply the numbers 7and 9 ,
to get the multiplication result as 63.

Write an equation for the comparison sentence.
Question 7.
20 is 2 times as many as 10.
Answer: 20 = 2 × 10.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 2 and 10 ,
to get the multiplication result as 20.

Question 8.
18 is 10 more than 8.
Answer: 18 = 10 + 8.

Explanation: we should add the numbers 10 and 8,
to get the addition result as 18.

Question 9.
35 is 7 times as many as 5.
Answer: 35 = 7 × 5.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 7and 5 ,
to get the multiplication result as 35.

Question 10.
16 is 4 times as many as 4.
Answer: 16 = 4 × 4.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 4 and 4 ,
to get the multiplication result as 16.

Question 11.
Earthworms have four more hearts than humans. How many hearts do earth worms have?
Answer: 5.

Explanation: Humans have one heart and question implies that,
Earthworms have four more hearts than humans.
So 1 + 4 = 5.

Question 12.
Ants can lift 50 times their body weight. An ant weighs 5 milligrams. How much weight can the ant lift?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.1 4

Answer:  250 milligrams.

Explanation: Ant body weight = 5 milligrams and it can lift 50 times their body weight.
So, ant can lift 50 times the 5 milligrams,
that is 5 × 50 = 250 milligrams.

Question 13.
Writing
Explain how you know the statement “32 is 8 times as many as 4”is a comparison involving multiplication.
Answer:  Multiplication is used to find as  much or how many times,
and the two factors 8 &  4 gives the product of 32 .
So, 32  = 8 × 4.

Question 14.
Number Sense
Write an addition comparison statement and a multiplication comparison statement for the numbers 8 and 24.
Answer: Addition comparison statement  for 24 = 16 + 8  is ,
24 is 16 more than 8.
multiplication comparison statement for 24 = 3 × 8 is ,
24 is 3 times as many as 8.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You perform a science experiment and use4 times as much hydrogen peroxide as water. You use a total of 10 tablespoons of liquid. How many table spoons of hydrogen peroxide do you use?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.1 5
Draw a model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.1 6

Answer: tablespoons of liquid,
8 tablespoons of hydrogen peroxide is used in the solution.

Explanation: Given, hydrogen peroxide used in this solution is 4 times as many as water ,
so let us say that , Hydrogen peroxide is represented as H and water as W,
then we have H = 4W, from the model given we can say that
Hydrogen peroxide + water = 10 tablespoons of liquid,
we get H + W = 10
from above details we can write it as,
4W + W = 10
5W = 10
W = 10/5
w = 2. Replace this value in assumed equation H = 4W that is
H = 4(2)
H = 4 ×2
H = 8.
Hydrogen peroxide (H) = 8
Water (W) = 2, in total
8 + 2 = 10.
Given equation is balanced.
so here we are using 8 tablespoons of Hydrogen peroxide and 2 tablespoons of water to get the required 10 table spoons of liquid.

Find the number of tablespoons of water.
The model shows ______ equal parts. There are ______ tablespoons of liquid in all.
Answer: The model shows 2 tablespoons of water . There are 10 tablespoons of liquid in all.

5 × ? = 10 Think: 5 times what number equals 10?
Answer: 5 × 2 = 10.
Explanation: 10 is 5 times as many as 2.

You use _______ tablespoons of water.
Answer: we use 2 tablespoons of water in the liquid.

Find the number of tablespoons of hydrogen peroxide.
You use ________ times as much hydrogen peroxide as water.
Answer: we use 4 times as much Hydrogen peroxide as water.

2 × 4 = ______
Answer: 2 × 4 = 8. 8 is 2 times as many as 4.

So, you use _______ tablespoons of hydrogen peroxide.
Answer: we use 8 tablespoons of Hydrogen peroxide.

Show and Grow

Question 15.
A bicycle-sharing station on Main Street has 5 times as many bicycles as a station on Park Avenue. There are 24 bicycles at the two stations. How many bicycles are at the Main Street station?
Answer: 20

Explanation: Let us say ,Main street as M and Park Avenue as P,
Given that main street has 5 times as many bicycles as a station on Park Avenue so we get, M = 5P
And there are 24 bicycles at the two stations from that we have M + P = 24,
by replacing the M value in the equation M + P = 24 we get,
5P + P = 24
6P = 24
P = 24/6
P = 4. replace this P value in the above equation M = 5P to get M value, then
M = 5(4)
M = 5 × 4
M = 20.
so we have M = 20 and P = 4, in total
20 + 4 = 24. the given equation is balanced.
Finally, we have 20 bicycles at the Main street station and 4 bicycles at the Park Avenue station.

Question 16.
In the 2016 Olympics, Brazil won 6 silver medals. France won 3 times as many silver medals as Brazil. How many silver medals did France win?
Answer: 18 silver medals.

Explanation:
Brazil = 6 silver medals,
France = 3 times as many as brazil ,
so 3 × 6 = 18.
France has won 18 silver medals.

Question 17.
Of all the national flags in the world, there are 3 times as many red, white, and blue flags as there are red, white, and green flags. There are 40 flags with these color combinations. How many more flags are red, white, and blue than red, white, and green?
Answer:

Understand Multiplicative Comparisons Homework & Practice 3.1

Write two comparison sentences for the equation.
Question 1.
24 = 8 × 3
Answer: 24 is 8 times as many as 3. or
24 is 3 times as many as 8.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 8 and 3 ,
to get the multiplication result as 24.

Question 2.
14 = 7 × 2
Answer: 14 is 7 times as many as 2. or
14 is 2 times as many as 7.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 7 and 2 ,
to get the multiplication result as 14.

Write an equation for the comparison sentence.
Question 3.
30 is 6 times as many as 5.
Answer: 30 = 6 × 5

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 6 and 5,
to get the multiplication result as 30.

Question 4.
27 is 3 times as many as 9.
Answer: 27 = 3 × 9

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 3 and 9,
to get the multiplication result as 27.

Question 5.
12 is 7 more than 5.
Answer: 12 = 7 + 5

Explanation: we should add the numbers 7 and 5,
to get the Addition result as 12.

Question 6.
10 is 2 times as many as 5.
Answer: 10 = 2 × 5

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 2 and 5,
to get the multiplication result as 10.

Question 7.
The House of Representatives has 335 more members than the Senate. The Senate has 100 members. How many members does the House of Representatives have?
Answer: 435 members.

Explanation:
senate has 100 members so, 335 + 100 = 435 .
House of representatives have 435 members.

Question 8.
A lion’s roar can be heard 5 miles away. The vibrations from an elephant’s stomp can be felt 4 times as many miles away as the lion’s roar can be heard. How many miles away can the vibrations be felt?
Answer: 20 miles.

Explanation:
a lion’s roar can be heard from 5 miles away
Elephant’s stomp can be felt 4 times as many miles away from the lion’s roar ,
that is 4 × 5 = 20.

 

Question 9.
Reasoning
Newton says the equation 270 = 30 × 9 means 270 is 30 times as many as 9. Descartes says it means 270 is 9 times as many as 30. Explain how you know they are both correct.

Answer: Multiplication is used to find as much or how, many times.
Since the two numbers 30 and 9 are the  factors of  multiplication they remain constant,
Even their position in the factors place changes,
The result will be the same product , that is 270.

Question 10.
Precision Compare the door’s height to the desk’s height using multiplication and addition.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.1 7
Answer:  Multiplication comparison:
Door’s height is 4 times the height of the desk’s height,
4 × 2 = 8.
Explanation: by multiplying the 4 times the height of the desk  and 2 we get door’s height 8 feet.
Addition comparison:
Door’s height is 6 feet more than height of the desk,
6 + 2 = 8.
Explanation: by adding the 6 feet height of the desk and 2 we get the door’s height 8 feet.

 

Question 11.
Open-Ended
Write a comparison statement for a sum of 28.
Answer:  28 is  20 more than 8.
Explanation: 28  = 20 + 8 . The term sum here refers to addition of two number to get the total number.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
There are 12 shepherds and retrievers in all at a dog park. There are 2 times as many shepherds as retrievers. How many retrievers are there?
Answer: 8 retrievers.

Explanation:  Total count of dogs at a dog park is 12.
Let us say that shepherds as S and retrievers as R , Given that, S + R = 12.
There are 2 times as many shepherds as retrievers.
we have S = 2R,  by replacing this value in equation S + R = 12 we get,
2R + R = 12
3R = 12
R = 12/3
R = 4.  To get S value substitute this value in S = 2R then
S = 2(4)
S = 2 × 4
S = 8.
Finally we have 8 shepherds and 4 retrievers in the dog park.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Pythons sleep 6 times as long as horses. Horses sleep3 hours each day. How many hours do pythons sleep each day?
Answer: 18 hours.

Explanation: Horses sleep 3 hours  and
Python sleep 6 times as long as horses
, so 6 x 3 =  18.
therefore python sleeps 18 hours each day.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 8 times as many dimes as nickels. You have18 dimes and nickels altogether. How much money do you have in all?
Answer: I have 16 dimes and 2 nickels.

Explanation: You have 8 times as many dimes as nickels
You have18 dimes and nickels altogether
Let us say, dimes as D and nickels as N then we have, D = 8N,
so, D + N = 18
8N + N = 18
9N = 18
N = 18/9
N = 2. replace the value in D = 8N , we get  D = 8 × 2 = 16 .

So, I have 16 dimes and 2 nickels.

Review & Refresh

Find the missing factor.
Question 15.
7 × _____ = 280
Answer: 40

Explanation:    280 is 7 times as many as 40 ,
7 × 40 = 280.
we should multiply the numbers 7 and 40,
to get the multiplication result as 280.

Question 16.
____ × 30 = 270
Answer: 9

Explanation: 270 is 9 times as many as 30 ,
9 × 30 = 270.
we should multiply the numbers 30 and 9,
to get the multiplication result as 270.

Question 17.
8 × ____ = 640
Answer: 80

Explanation: 640 is 8 times as many as 80 ,
8 × 80 = 640.
we should multiply the numbers 8 and 80,
to get the multiplication result as 640.

Question 18.
____ × 90 = 540
Answer: 6

Explanation: 540 is 6 times as many as 90 ,
6 × 90 = 540.
we should multiply the numbers 6 and 90,
to get the multiplication result as 540.

Question 19.
2 × _____ = 40
Answer: 20

Explanation: 40 is 2 times as many as 20,
2 × 20 = 40.
we should multiply the numbers 2 and 20,
to get the multiplication result as 40.

Question 20.
_____ × 50 = 350
Answer:  7

Explanation: 350 is 7 times as many as 50 ,
7 × 50 = 350.
we should multiply the numbers 7 and 50,
to get the multiplication result as 350.

Lesson 3.2 Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Explore and Grow

Use models to find each product. Draw your models.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 1
What pattern do you notice?
Answer:   Model

The Place- value method. From the above pattern, we can conclude that the result has different place-values of 12

Explanation:
The position of 3 is different in the given 4 multiplications.
So,
4 × 3 = 12
4 × 30 = 120
4 × 300 = 1200
4 × 3000 = 12,000
From the above pattern, we can conclude that the result has different place-values of 12.

Repeated Reasoning
How does 3 × 7 help you to find 3 × 7,000? Explain.
Answer: 3× 7 = 21
3 × 7000 = 21000

Explanation:   When multiplying 3 by 7 we get 21 , same as that when we multiply 3 by 7000 we get 21000.
the number moves to the left and a zero is put in, ,
the number moves three places to the left and zeros are put in,
so the number would become 21000.

Think and Grow: Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

You can use place value to multiply by tens, hundreds, or thousands.
Example
Find each product.
7 × 200 = 7 × _____ hundreds
= _____ hundreds
= ______
So, 7 × 200 = _____.

Answer: 1400

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
7 × 200 = 7 × 2 hundreds
= 14 hundreds
= 1400
So, 7 × 200 = 1400.

 

3 × 4,000 = 3 × ______ thousands
= _____ thousands
= _____
So, 3 × 4,000 = ______.

Answer: 12000.

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
3 × 4,000 = 3 × 4 thousands
= 12 thousands
= 12000
So, 3 × 4,000 = 12000.

 

Example
Find each product.
8 × 5 = 40 Multiplication fact
8 × 50 = 400 Find 8 × 5; write 1 zero to show tens.
Answer: 8 × 5 = 40 .

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
8 × 50 = 8 × 5 tens
= 40 × tens
= 400
So,
8 × 50 = 400.

8 × 500 = _____ Find 8 × 5; write 2 zeros to show hundreds.
Answer: 8 × 5 = 40 , 8 × 500 = 4000.

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
8 × 500 = 8 × 50 tens
= 8 × 5 × tens ×  tens
= 40 × tens × tens
= 4000
So,
8 × 500 = 4000.

8 × 5,000= ______ Find 8 × 5; write 3 zeros to show thousands.
Answer : 8 × 5 = 40, 8 × 5,000 = 40,000.

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
8 × 5000 = 8 × 500 tens
= 8 × 5 × tens ×  tens ×tens
= 40 × tens × tens × tens
= 40,000
So,
8 × 5000 = 40,000.
Notice the Pattern: Write the multiplication fact and the same number of zeros that are in the second factor.

Show and Grow

Find each product.
Question 1.
6 × 9 = ____
6 × 90 = ____
6 × 900 = ______
6 × 9,000 = _____
Answer: 6 × 9 = 54
6 × 90 = 540
6 × 900 =5400
6 × 9,000 = 54,000

Explanation:  6 × 9 = 54

By using the place-value method,
6 × 90 = 6× 9 tens
= 6 × 9 × tens
= 54 × tens
= 540
So,
6 × 90= 540.

By using the place-value method,
6 × 900 = 6× 90 tens
= 6 × 9 × tens × tens
= 54 × tens × tens
= 5400
So,
6 × 900= 5400.

By using the place-value method,
6 × 9,000 = 6× 900 tens
= 6 × 90 × tens × tens
= 6 × 9 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 54 × tens × tens × tens
= 54,000
So,
6 × 9,000 = 54,000.

Question 2.
5 × 2 = ____
5 × 20 = ____
5 × 200 = ______
5 × 2,000 = _____
Answer: 5 × 2 = 10
5 × 20 = 100
5 × 200 = 1000
5 × 2,000 = 10,000.

Explanation: 5 × 2 = 10.

By using the place-value method,
5 × 20 = 5 × 2 tens
= 10 × tens
= 100
So,
5 × 20 = 100.

By using the place-value method,
5 × 200 = 5 × 20 tens
= 5 × 2 × tens × tens
= 10 ×  tens × tens
= 1000
So,
5 × 200 = 1000.

By using the place-value method,
5 × 2,000 = 5× 200 tens
= 5 × 20 × tens × tens
= 5 × 2 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 10× tens × tens × tens
= 10,000
So,
5 × 2,000 = 10,000.

Question 3.
2 × 3 = _____
2 × 300 = _____
Answer: 2 × 3 = 6
2 × 300 = 600

Explanation:  we should multiply 2 by 3 to get 6.

By using the place-value method,
2 × 300 = 2 × 30 tens
= 2 × 3 × tens × tens
= 6 ×  tens × tens
= 600
So,
2 × 300 = 600.

Question 4.
9 × 8 = _____
9 × 8,000 = _____
Answer: 9 × 8 = 72
9 × 8,000 = 72,000

Explanation: we should multiply 9 by 8 to get 72.

By using the place-value method,
9 × 8,000 = 9 × 800 tens
= 9 × 80 × tens × tens
= 9 × 8 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 72× tens × tens × tens
= 72,000
So,
9 × 8,000 = 72,000.

 

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product
Question 5.
7 × 700 = _____
Answer: 4900

Explanation:

By using the place-value method,
7 × 700 = 7 × 70 tens
= 7 × 7 × tens × tens
= 49 ×  tens × tens
= 4900
So,
7 × 700 = 4900.

 

Question 6.
3 × 100 = _____
Answer: 300

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
3 × 100 = 3 × 10 tens
= 3 × tens × tens
= 30× tens
= 300
So,
3 × 100 = 300.

 

Question 7.
8,000 × 3 = _____
Answer: 24,000

Explanation : By using the place-value method,
3 × 8,000 = 9 × 800 tens
= 3 × 80 × tens × tens
= 3 × 8 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 24× tens × tens × tens
= 24,000
So,
3 × 8,000 = 24,000.

Question 8.
60 × 2 = _____
Answer: 120

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
2 × 60 = 2 × 6 tens
= 12 × tens
= 120
So,
2 × 60 = 120.

Question 9.
4 × 4,000 = ______
Answer: 16,000.

Explanation : By using the place-value method,
4 × 4,000 = 4 × 400 tens
= 4 × 40 × tens × tens
= 4 × 4 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 16 × tens × tens × tens
= 16,000
So,
4 × 4,000 = 16,000.

Question 10.
700 × 5 = _____
Answer: 3500

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
5 × 700 = 5 ×70 tens
= 5 ×7 × tens × tens
= 350× tens
= 3500
So,
5 × 700 = 3500.

Question 11.
900 × 7 = _____
Answer: 6300

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
7 × 900 = 7 × 90 tens
= 7 × 9 × tens × tens
= 63 × tens × tens
= 6300
So,
7  × 900 = 6300.

Question 12.
50 × 3 = _____
Answer: 150

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
3 × 50 = 3 × 5 × tens
= 15 × tens
= 150
So,
3 × 50 = 150.

Question 13.
1,000 × 8 = ______
Answer: 8000

Explanation : By using the place-value method,
8 × 1,000 = 8 × 100 tens
= 8 × 10 × tens × tens
= 8 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 8,000
So,
8 × 1,000 = 8,000.

Find the missing factor
Question 14.
_____ × 6,000 = 24,000
Answer:  4 × 6,000 = 24,000

Explanation :Let the missing number be X
So, X × 6,000 = 24,000
X = 24,000 / 6,000 = 4
Hence, the value of X is: 4.

Question 15.
9 × ____ = 450
Answer: 9 × 50 = 450

Explanation :
Let the missing number be X
So, 9 × X = 450
X = 450 / 9 = 50
Hence, the value of X is: 50.

Question 16.
_____ × 30 = 210
Answer: 7 × 30 = 210

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, X × 30 = 210
X = 210 / 30 = 7
Hence, the value of X is: 7

Question 17.
2 × _____ = 800
Answer: 2 × 400 = 800

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, 2 × X = 800
X = 800 / 2 = 400
Hence, the value of X is: 400.

Question 18.
_____ × 1,000 = 9,000
Answer: 9 × 1,000 = 9,000

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, X × 1,000 = 9,000
X = 9,000 / 1,000 = 9
Hence, the value of X is: 9.

Question 19.
8 × ____ = 640
Answer: 8 × 80 = 640.

Explanation :
Let the missing number be X
So, 8 × X = 640
X = 640 / 8 = 80
Hence, the value of X is: 80

Compare
Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 2
Answer: 7 × 60 = 420

Explanation:
7 × 60 = 420
Given numbers are: 420 and 400
By comparing 2 values, we can conclude that 420 is greater than 400

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 3
Answer: 500 × 4 = 2,000.

Explanation:
500 × 4 = 2,000
Given numbers are: 2,000 and 2,000
By comparing 2 values, we can conclude that 2,000 is equal to 2,000

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 4
Answer: 3 × 9,000 = 27,000.

Explanation :
3 × 9,000 = 27,000
Given numbers are: 27,000 and 39,000
By comparing 2 values, we can conclude that 27,000 is less than 39,000.

Question 23.
The North Canadian River is 800 miles long. The Amazon River is 5 times longer than the North Canadian River. How many miles long is the Amazon River?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 5
Answer: 4,000 miles

Explanation: Let us say North Canadian river as N and Amazon river as A ,
Given that Amazon river is 5 times longer than North Canadian river so A = 5N
N = 800 miles, get this value into above equation then,
A = 5(800)
= 5 × 800
= 4,000.
so Amazon river is 4,000 miles long.

Question 24.
One reusable bag can prevent the use of 600 plastic bags. Six reusable bags can prevent the use of how many plastic bags?
Answer: 3600 plastic bags

Explanation:
Given that , One reusable bag can prevent the use of 600 plastic bags.
if one bag = 600 plastic bags then six bags  = ?
let us multiply the bags then we have 6 × 600 = 3600.
so, answer is 3600 plastic bags.

Question 25.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the product of 6 and 500 will have2 zeros. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer: NO

Explanation:  6 × 500 = 3,000.
they mentioned that result will have 2 zero’s,
but the actual product gives 3 zero’s.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
An aquarium has 7 bottle nose dolphins. Each dolphin eats 60 pounds of fish each day. The aquarium has510 pounds of fish. Does the aquarium have enough fish to feed the dolphins?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 6
Answer: YES

Explanation: Let us say Aquarium as A and Dolphins as D
Given that A = 7D, Aquarium has 510 pounds of fish
Each D = 60 pounds, we get
A = 7 (60)
= 7 × 60
= 420.
All the dolphins will eat 420 pounds of fish and the Aquarium has 510 pounds.510 is greater than 420

Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Step 1: How many pounds of fish do all of the dolphins eat?
7 × 60 = _____
Answer: 7 × 60 = 420.
All of the dolphins eat _______ pounds of fish.
Answer: 420 pounds.
Step 2: Compare the number of pounds of fish all of the dolphin seat to the number of pounds of fish the aquarium has.
Answer: Aquarium has 510 pounds of fish and all the dolphins will eat 420 pounds of fish
so, 510 is greater than 420
The aquarium _______ have enough fish to feed the dolphins.
Answer: 510 pounds of fish.

Show and Grow

Question 26.
Students want to make 400 dream catchers for a craft fair. Each dream catcher needs 8 feathers. The students have3,100 feathers. Do the students have enough feathers for all of the dream catchers?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 7
Answer: NO

Explanation: Let us say Dream catcher as D and Feathers as F, total Dream catchers we want are 400 and
Each Dream catcher needs 8 Feathers  so D = 8F, students have 3,100 Feathers
Then , by calculating , 3,100 /8 = 387.5.
to get up to the total count of required 400 Dream catchers Feathers are not sufficient as 400 is greater than 387.

Question 27.
A principal has 3 rolls of 800 raffle tickets each and 5 rolls of 9,000 raffle tickets each. How many raffle tickets does the principal have?
Answer: 47,400 raffle tickets are there with the principal.

Explanation: A principal has 3 rolls of 800 raffle tickets each and 5 rolls of 9,000 raffle tickets each.
Then we have 3 × 800 and 5 × 9,000
= 2,400 and 45,000
Totally , 45,000 + 2,400 = 47,400 .

So, 47,400 raffle tickets are there with the principal.

Question 28.
You have 2 sheets of 4 stickers each. Your friend has 20 times as many stickers as you. Your teacher has 700 times as many stickers as you. How many stickers do the three of you have in all?
Answer: Three of us have  5,768 stickers in all.

Explanation: You have 2 sheets of 4 stickers each. that is 2 × 4 = 8 stickers.
Your friend has 20 times as many stickers as you. that is 20 × 8 = 160 stickers.
Your teacher has 700 times as many stickers as you. that is 700 × 8 = 5,600 stickers.
Then 5,600 + 160 + 8 = 5,768 stickers.

So, Three of us have  5,768 stickers in all.

Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands Homework & Practice 3.2

Find each product
Question 1.
3 × 3 = ____
3 × 30 = ____
3× 300 = ______
3 × 3,000 = _____
Answer: 3 × 3 = 9
3 × 30 = 90
3× 300 = 900
3 × 3,000 = 9,000

Explanation:  3 × 3 = 9

By using the place-value method,
3 × 30 = 3× 3 × tens
= 9 × tens
= 90
So,
3 × 30= 90.

By using the place-value method,
3 × 300 = 3× 30 tens
= 3 × 3 × tens × tens
= 9 × tens × tens
= 900
So,
3 × 300= 900.

By using the place-value method,
3 × 3,000 = 3 × 300 tens
= 3 × 30 × tens × tens
= 3 × 3 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 9 × tens × tens × tens
= 9,000
So,
3 × 3,000 = 9,000.

Question 2.
8 × 7 = ____
8 × 70 = ____
8 × 700 = ______
8 × 7,000 = _____
Answer: 8 × 7 = 56
8 × 70 = 560
8 × 700 = 5600
8 × 7,000 = 56,000

Explanation:  8 × 7 = 56

By using the place-value method,
8 × 70 = 8 × 7 tens
= 8 × 7 × tens
= 56 × tens
= 560
So,
8 × 70= 560.

By using the place-value method,
8 × 700 = 8 × 70 tens
= 8 × 7 × tens × tens
= 56 × tens × tens
= 5600
So,
8 × 700= 5600.

By using the place-value method,
8 × 7,000 = 8 × 700 tens
= 8 × 70 × tens × tens
= 8 × 7 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 56 × tens × tens × tens
= 56,000
So,
8 × 7,000 = 56,000.

Find the product.
Question 3.
9 × 90 = ____
Answer: 9 × 90 = 810

Explanation:  we should multiply 9 by 9 to get 81 that implies 9 × 90 = 810.
By using the place-value method,
9 × 90 = 9 × 9 tens
= 81 × tens
= 810
So,
9 × 90 = 810.

Question 4.
6,000 × 1 = _____
Answer: 6,000 × 1 = 6,000.

Explanation : By using the place-value method,
1 × 6,000 = 1× 600 tens
= 1 × 60 × tens × tens
= 1 × 6 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 6 × tens × tens × tens
= 6,000
So,
1 × 6,000 = 6,000.

Question 5.
8 × 200 = _____
Answer: 8 × 200 = 1600.

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
8 × 200 = 8 ×20 tens
= 8 ×2 × tens × tens
= 160× tens
= 1600
So,
8 × 200 = 1600.

Question 6.
3,000 × 6 = _____
Answer: 3,000 × 6 = 18,000.

Explanation : By using the place-value method,
6 × 3,000 = 6 × 300 tens
= 6 × 30 × tens × tens
= 6 × 3 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 18 × tens × tens × tens
= 18,000
So,
6 × 3,000 = 18,000.

Question 7.
5 × 500 = _____
Answer: 5 × 500 = 2500.

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
5 × 500 = 5 ×50 tens
= 5 ×5 × tens × tens
= 250× tens
= 2500
So,
5 × 500 = 2500.

Question 8.
2 × 90 = ______
Answer: 2 × 90 = 180

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
2 × 90 = 2 × 9 × tens
= 18 × tens
= 180
So,
2 × 90 = 180.

Question 9.
7 × 300 = ______
Answer: 7 × 300 = 2100

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
7 × 300 = 7 × 30 tens
= 7 × 3 × tens × tens
= 21 × tens × tens
= 2100
So,
7  × 300 = 2100.

Question 10.
20 × 2 = _____
Answer:  20 × 2 = 40

Explanation: By using the place-value method,
2 × 20 = 2 × 2 × tens
= 4 × tens
= 40
So,
2 × 20 = 40.

Question 11.
6,000 × 5 = _____
Answer:  6,000 × 5 = 30,000.

Explanation : By using the place-value method,
5 × 6,000 = 5 × 600 tens
= 5 × 60 × tens × tens
= 5 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 30,000
So,
5 × 6,000 = 30,000.

Find the missing factor.
Question 12.
_____ × 400 = 3,200
Answer:  8 × 400 = 3,200

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, X × 400 = 3,200
X = 3,200 / 300 = 8
Hence, the value of X is: 8

Question 13.
1 × _____ = 500
Answer: 1 × 500 = 500.

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, 1 × X = 500
X = 500 / 1 = 500
Hence, the value of X is: 500

Question 14.
_____ × 300 = 1,200
Answer:  4 × 300 = 1,200

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, X × 300 = 1,200
X = 1,200 / 300 = 4
Hence, the value of X is: 4

Question 15.
8 × ____ = 720
Answer: 8 × 90 = 720

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, 8 × X = 720
X = 720 / 8 = 90
Hence, the value of X is: 90

Question 16.
_____ × 1,000 = 7,000
Answer:   7 × 1,000 = 7,000

Explanation :
Let the missing number be X
So, X × 1,000 = 7,000
X = 7,000 / 1,000 = 7
Hence, the value of X is: 7

Question 17.
8 × _____ = 4,800
Answer: 8 × 600 = 4,800

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X
So, 8 × X = 4,800
X = 4,800 / 8 = 600
Hence, the value of X is: 600

Compare.
Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 8
Answer: 9 × 400 is equal to 3,600

Explanation:
9 × 400 = 3,600
Given numbers are: 3,600 and 3,600
By comparing 2 values, we can conclude that 3,600 is equal to 3,600

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 9
Answer: 360 is less than 660

Explanation:
6 × 60 = 360
Given numbers are: 360 and 660
By comparing 2 values, we can conclude that 360 is less than 660.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 10
Answer: 16,000 is greater than 10,000

Explanation:
8,000 × 2 = 16,000
Given numbers are: 16,000 and 10,000
By comparing 2 values, we can conclude that 16,000 is greater than 10,000

Question 21.
Patterns
Describe and complete the pattern.
1 × 4 = _____
2 × 40 = _____
3 × 400 = ____
_____ × _____ = _____
_____ × _____ = ______
Answer:  1 × 4 = 4
2 × 40 = 80
3 × 400 = 1200
4 × 4,000 = 16,000
5 × 40,000 = 200,000
Explanation :  we should multiply the numbers 1 and 4 to get 4 .
By using the place-value method,
2 × 40 = 2 × 4 tens
= 8 × tens
= 80
So,
2 × 40 = 80.

By using the place-value method,
3 × 400 = 3 × 40 tens
= 3 × 4 × tens × tens
= 12 ×  tens × tens
= 120× tens
= 1200
So,
3 × 400 = 1200.

By using the place-value method,
4 × 4,000 = 4 × 4,000 tens
= 4 × 40 × tens × tens
= 4 × 4 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 16× tens × tens × tens
= 16,000
So,
4 × 4,000 = 16,000.

By using the place-value method,
5 × 40,000 = 5 × 4,000 tens
= 5 × 400 × tens × tens
= 5 × 40 × tens ×  tens × tens
= 5 × 4 × tens × tens × tens × tens
= 200,000
So,
5 × 40,000 = 200,000.

Question 22.
DIG DEEPER!
Without calculating, tell whether the product of 5 and 700 or the product of 5 and 7,000 is greater. Explain how you know.
Answer: The place value method.
This is a common method used to know how to multiply by ten: When multiplying 5 by ten, the number moves to the left and a zero is put in, so the number becomes 50. If you multiply 5 by 100, the number moves two places to the left and zeros are put in, so the number would become 500.

Explanation:
This shows that to know the greater value of the product of 5 and 700 or the product of 5 and 7,000 is determined by the place of the zero’s in the number.
So, product of 5 and 7,000 is greater than the product of 5 and 700.

Question 23.
Writing
How does 3 × 6 help you to find 3,000 × 6? Explain.
Answer: 3 × 6 = 18   so 3,000 × 6 = 18000.

Explanation: we should multiply the 3 and 6 to get 18 ,like wise
the zero’s value increases when they start to move left side adding another zero until  the thousands place is filled so we have
3,000 × 6 = 18,000.

Question 24.
Open-Ended
Write a multiplication equation with a product of 120.
Answer: 4 × 30 = 120 or 3 × 40 = 120

Explanation: the product of the two numbers 4 and 3 is 12 that implies
if the zero, is in tens place in any one of the number in multiplying
we get the same number as a product so, 4 × 30 = 120 or 3 × 40 = 120.

Question 25.
Modeling Real Life
A second grade student answers about 2,000 math problems each month. A fourth grade student answers about 7,000 math problems each month. How many total problems would 8 second grade students and 9 fourth grade students answer in one month?
Answer: Totally they both answer 79,000 math problems in one month.

Explanation: A second grade student answers about 2,000 math problems each month.
For 8 students to solve in 1 month we have, 8 × 2,000 = 16,000.

A fourth grade student answers about 7,000 math problems each month.
For 9 students to solve in 1 month we have, 9 × 7,000 = 63,000.

They both have answered, 63,000 + 16,000 = 79,000.
Totally they both answer 79,000 math problems in one month.

Question 26.
Modeling Real Life
A teacher has 5 boxes with 50 pencils in each box. He also has 3 boxes with 20 pens in each box. A student donates 25 pencils. How many pens and pencils does the teacher have now?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 11
Answer: He has 275 pencils and 60 pens.

Explanation: A teacher has 5 boxes with 50 pencils in each box.  so, 5 × 50 = 250 pencils
He also has 3 boxes with 20 pens in each box. so, 3 × 20 = 60 pens.
A student donates 25 pencils. so 250 + 25 = 275 pencils.

So, He has 275 pencils and 60 pens.

Review & Refresh

Complete the table.
Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 12
Answer:

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.2 13
Answer:

Lesson 3.3 Estimate Products of Rounding

Explore and Grow

There are 92 marbles in each jar.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 1
Estimate the total number of marbles in two ways.
Answer:  540 and 600
Explanation: 1 jar has 92 marbles, then 6 jars has  6 × 92 marbles
Round to the nearest tens.
92 is close to 90;
6 x 90 = 540.
and
Round to the nearest tens.
92 is close to 100;
6 x 100 = 600.
So the total number of marbles count is in between 540 and 600.

Round 92 to the nearest ten.
Answer:  90
Explanation: Round the nearest tens , so 92 is close to 90.

Round 92 to the nearest hundred.
Answer: 100
Explanation: Round the nearest tens , so 92 is close to 100.

Which estimate do you think is closer to the total number of marbles? Explain.
Answer:   540. The one 92 is closer to 90.
Because marbles in all jars are calculated as 552 by multiplying the 6 and 992.

Explanation: 1 jar has 92 marbles, then 6 jars has  6 × 92 marbles
Round to the nearest tens.
92 is close to 90;
6 x 90 = 540.
and
Round to the nearest tens.
92 is close to 100;
6 x 100 = 600.
So the total number of marbles count is in between 540 and 600.

Repeated Reasoning
Would your answer to the question above change if there were 192 marbles in each jar? Explain
Answer: Yes. 1,140 and 1200.

Explanation: 1 jar has 192 marbles, then 6 jars has  6 × 192 marbles
Round to the nearest tens.
192 is close to 190;
6 x 190 = 1,140.
and
Round to the nearest tens.
192 is close to 200;
6 x 200 = 1200.
So the total number of marbles count is in between 1,140 and 1200.

Think and Grow: Estimate Products

You can estimate a product by rounding.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 2
Example
Estimate 7 × 491
Round 491 to the nearest hundred. Then multiply.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 3
So, 7 × 491 is about ______.
Answer: 3,430
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
491 is close to 490; ;
7 x 490 = 3,430

When solving multiplication problems, you can check whether an answer is reasonable by finding two estimates that a product is between.
Example
Find two estimates that the product of 4 × 76 is between.
Think: 76 is between 70 and 80.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 4
So, the product is between _______ and ____.
Answer: 280 and 320.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
76 is close to 70;
4 x 70 = 280.
or
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
76 is close to 80;
80 x 4 = 320

Show and Grow

Estimate the product.
Question 1.
3 × 89
Answer: 270

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
89 is close to 90;
3 x 90 = 270

Question 2.
8 × 721
Answer: 5,760

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
721 is close to 720;
8 x 720 = 5,760

Question 3.
5 × 7,938
Answer: 39,700

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
7,938 is close to 7,940;
5  x  7,940 = 39,700

Find two estimates that the product is between
Question 4.
9 × 44
Answer: 360 and 450

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
44 is close to 40;
9 x 40 = 360
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
44 is close to 50;
9 x 50 = 450
The product is in between 360 and 450.

Question 5.
2 × 657
Answer:  1,300 and  1,320

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
657 is close to 650;
2 x 650 = 1,300
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
657 is close to 660;
2 x 660 = 1,320
The product is in between 1,300 and  1,320

Question 6.
6 × 4,243
Answer:  25,440 and 25,500

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
4,243 is close to 4,240;
6 x 4,240 = 25,440
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
4,243 is close to 4,250;
6 x 4,250 = 25,500
The product is in between 25,440 and 25,500

Apply and Grow: Practice

Estimate the product.
Question 7.
4 × 65
Answer: 240

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
65 is close to 60;
4 x 60 = 240

Question 8.
248 × 7
Answer:  1,750

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
248 is close to 250;
250 x 7 = 1,750

Question 9.
3 × 9,032
Answer: 27,090

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
9,032 is close to 9,030;
3 x 9,030 = 27,090

Find two estimates that the product is between.
Question 10.
32 × 9
Answer:  270 and  360

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
32 is close to 30;
9 x 30 = 270
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
32 is close to 40;
9 x 40 = 360
The product is in between 270 and 360

Question 11.
970 × 5
Answer: 4,850

Explanation:
There is no need to Round to the nearest tens. Because the number 970 is already has its tens value
970 x 5 = 4,850 .

Question 12.
6 × 5,328
Answer:  31,920 and 31,968

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
5,328 is close to 5,320;
6 x 5,320 = 31,920

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
5,328 is close to 5,330;
6 x 5,330 = 31,968

Question 13.
A sales representative sells 4 smart watches for $199 each. To determine whether the sales representative collects at least $1,000, can you use an estimate, or is an exact number required? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 5
Answer: $800

Explanation: if each watch cost $199, 4 × 199
then 4 watches costs $ 800
Round to the nearest tens.
199 is close to 200;
4 x 200 = 800
The estimated cost is $800.

YOU BE THE TEACHER
A student finds the product. Is her answer reasonable? Estimate to check.
Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 6
Answer:  The answer is not reasonable

Explanation: The given number is already at its tens place so,
There is no need to Round to the nearest tens.
480 x 8 = 3,840

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 7
Answer: 7,600
The product is equal to the result but the estimated result is different

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
1,904 is close to 1,900;
1,900 x 4 = 7,600

 

Number Sense
Use two of the numbers below to write an expression for a product that can be estimated as shown. You may use the numbers more than once.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 8
Question 16.
Estimate: 40,000
____ × _____
Answer:  5 and 8,932  are used here.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
8,932 is close to 8,930;
5 x 8,930 = 44,650
The product is estimated as the nearest to 40,000

Question 17.
Estimate: 9,000
_____ × ____
Answer:  3 and  2,842 are used here.
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
2,842 is close to 2,850;
3 x 2,850 = 8,550
The product is estimated as the nearest to 9,000

Question 18.
Estimate: 72,000
_____ × ______
Answer: 8 and 8,932  are used here.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
8,932 is close to 8,930;
8 x 8,930 = 71,440
The product is estimated as the nearest to 72,000.

Question 19.
Estimate: 45,000
_____ × ______
Answer:   5 and 8,932  are used here.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
8,932 is close to 8,930;
5 x 8,930 = 44,650
The product is estimated as the nearest to 45,000.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
About how much more money was earned from new release rentals than from top pick rentals?
Estimate the amount of money earned from new release rentals.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 9
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 10
So, about $ ______ more was earned from new release rentals.
Answer: Estimation of the amount of money earned from new release rentals is  $15,250,
Estimation of the amount of money earned from top pick rentals is $11,970,
Money was earned from new release rentals than from top pick rentals is $3,280

Explanation:
Estimation of the amount of money earned from new release rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
3,047 is close to 3,050;
$5 x 3,050 = $15,250

Estimation of the amount of money earned from top pick rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
3,986 is close to 3,990;
$3 x 3,990 = $11,970

Money was earned from new release rentals than from top pick rentals is
subtract  $11,970 from $15,250 then we get  $3,280..

Show and Grow

Use the graph above.
Question 20.
About how much more money was earned from top pick rentals than from television episode rentals?
Answer:  Estimation of the amount of money earned from top pick rentals is  $11,970
Estimation of the amount of money earned from to television episode rentals is $1,700
Money was earned from top pick rentals than from television episode rentals is $10,270

Explanation:   Estimation of the amount of money earned from top pick rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
3,986 is close to 3,990;
$3 x 3,990 = $11,970

Estimation of the amount of money earned from to television episode rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
849 is close to 850;
$2 x 850 = $1,700

Money was earned from top pick rentals than from television episode rentals is
subtract $1,700 from $11,970 we get  $10,270.

Question 21.
Your friend says that the number of top picks rented is about 5 times as many as the number of television episodes rented. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer: yes. The number of top picks rented is about 5 times as many as the number of television episodes rented.

Explanation:   Estimation of the amount of money earned from top pick rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
3,986 is close to 3,990;
$3 x 3,990 = $11,970

Estimation of the amount of money earned from to television episode rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
849 is close to 850;
$2 x 850 = $1,700

Money was earned from top pick rentals than from television episode rentals is
subtract $1,700 from $11,970 we get  $10,270.

The number of top picks rented is about 5 times as many as the number of television episodes rented.
5 × $1,700 = $8,500

Question 22.
An accountant says that the total amount of money earned from new release rentals is $11,958. Check whether the accountant’s answer is reasonable by finding two estimates that the total is between.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 11
Answer: The total amount of money earned from new release rentals is $11,958 is not reasonable .

Explanation:
Estimation of the amount of money earned from new release rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
3,047 is close to 3,040;
$5 x 3,040 = $15,200
Estimation of the amount of money earned from new release rentals is
Round to the nearest tens.
3,047 is close to 3,050;
$5 x 3,050 =  $15,250
The estimated product should be in between  $15,200 and $15,250

Estimate Products of Rounding Homework & Practice 3.3

Estimate the product
Question 1.
7 × 42
Answer: 280

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
42 is close to 40;
7 x 40 = 280

Question 2.
85 × 4
Answer: 320

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
85 is close to 80;
4 x 80 = 320

Question 3.
2 × 698
Answer: 1,400

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
698 is close to 700;
2 x 700 = 1,400

Question 4.
6 × 705
Answer: 4,200

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
705 is close to 700;
6 x 700 = 4,200

Question 5.
1,834 × 9
Answer: 16,470

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
1,834 is close to 1,830;
9 x 1,830 = 16,470

Question 6.
7,923 × 8
Answer: 63,360

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
7,923 is close to 7,920;
8 x 7,920 = 63,360

Find two estimates that the product is between
Question 7.
3 × 95
Answer: 270 and 300

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
95 is close to 90;
3 x 90 = 270
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
95 is close to 100;
3 x 100 = 300
The product is in between 270 and 300

Question 8.
23 × 5
Answer: 100 and 150

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
23 is close to 20;
20 x 5 = 100
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
23 is close to 30;
5 x 30 = 150
The product is in between 100 and 150

Question 9.
537 × 6
Answer: 3,240 and 3,180

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
537 is close to 530;
6 x 530 = 3,180
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
537 is close to 540;
6 x 540 = 3,240
The product is in between 3,240 and 3,180

Question 10.
8 × 309
Answer: 2,400 and 2,4800

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
309 is close to 300;
8 x 300 = 2,400
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
309 is close to 310;
8 x 310 = 2,480
The product is in between 2,400 and 2,4800

Question 11.
1,649 × 7
Answer:

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
1,649 is close to 1,640;
1,640 x 7 = 11,480
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
1,649 is close to 1,650;
1,650 x 7 = 11,550
The product is in between 11,480  and  11,550.

Question 12.
4 × 6,203
Answer: 24,800  and  24,840.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
6,203 is close to 6,200;
4 x 6,200 = 24,800

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
6,203 is close to 6,210;
4 x 6,210 = 24,840

The product is in between  24,800  and  24,840.

Question 13.
Construction workers build 54 feet of a bridge each day for 9 days. To determine whether the bridge is at least 490 feet long, can you use an estimate, or is an exact answer required? Explain.
Answer: exact answer is 9 × 54 = 486 feet long .which is close to the target of 490 feet long

Explanation: if 54 feet of a bridge  each day for 9 days, we get 9 × 54
Round to the nearest tens.
54 is close to 500;
9 x 50 = 450.
The estimated product 450 feet is close to given target of 490 feet long and an exact answer can also satisfies.

Question 14.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
A student finds the product. Is his answer reasonable? Estimate to check.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 12
Answer: Yes .The answer is reasonable  and The estimated product is 17,070.
Explanation:   5,692 × 3
Round to the nearest tens.
5,692 is close to 5,690;
3 x 5,690 = 17,070
The estimated product is 17,070

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
An astronaut earns $5,428 each month. You estimate that she will earn $35,000 in 7 months. Is the amount she earns in 7 months greater than or less than your estimate? Explain.
Answer: The estimated product  $38,010 is greater than the given $35,000.

Explanation:
if astronaut earns $5,428 each month then ,
Estimation of the amount of money earned for 7 months is $5,428 × 7
Round to the nearest tens.
5,428 is close to 5,430;
$5,430 x 7 = $38,010
The estimated product  $38,010 is greater than the given $35,000.

Question 16.
Writing
Explain how estimating by rounding can be helpful as a check when finding a product.
Answer:  sTo find the actual product of the two factors of numbers are quite hard for larger digit numbers so by rounding the higher digit numbers which have nearest to 10’s or 100’s. We will get the estimated product easily and fast . To get the actual product we have to use the normal method .

Modeling Real Life
Use the graph to answer the question.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.3 13
Question 17.
Which animal has a heart rate that is about 2 times as fast as a whale’s?
Answer: Horse

Explanation: whale has heart rate of 20 Bpm
Horse has around 40 Bpm as per the given details, so
Horse = 2(20) Bpm
Horse has a heart rate that is about 2 times as fast as a whale’s

Question 18.
About how many times does a giraffe’s heart beat in 5 minutes? Find two estimates that the answer is between.
Answer:  300 and 350 times
Explanation:
Giraffe’s heart beat is in between 60  and 70 as per the details so
to find for 5 min we have to multiply 5 × 60  and 5 × 70
so, 300 and 350 is the estimation times.

Review & Refresh

Use the Distributive Property to find the product.
Question 19.
9 × 6 = ____ × (5 + ____)
= (9 × 5) + (____ + _____)
= ____ + ____
= _____
Answer: 54

Explanation: by using Distributive property
9 × 6 = 9 × (5 + 1)
= (9 × 5) + (9 × 1)
= 45 + 9
= 54

Question 20.
7 × 7 = 7 × (5 + ____)
= (_____ × 5) + (7 × _____)
= _____ + _____
= _____
Answer: 49

Explanation: by using Distributive property
7 × 7 = 7 × (5 + 2)
= (7 × 5) + (7 × 2)
= 35 + 14
= 49

Lesson 3.4 Use the Distributive Property to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Use base ten blocks to model 4 × 16. Draw your model. Then find the area of the model.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 1
4 × 16 = _____
Break apart 16 to show two smaller models. Find the area of each model. What do you notice about the sum of the areas?
Area = _____ Area = ______
Answer:  64
Explanation: 4 × 16 = 4× (10 + 6)
= (4 × 10) + (4 × 6)
= 40 + 24
= 64

Reasoning
How does this strategy relate to the Distributive Property? Explain.
Answer: Because of the evenly distributed  numbering among the place – values of the numbers. This property helps to find the product in a easy way.

Think and Grow: Use the Distributive Property to Multiply

Think: One way to multiply a two-digit number is to first break apart the number. Then use the Distributive Property.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 2
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 3
Answer: 108

Show and Grow

Draw an area model. Then find the product.
Question 1.
7 × 11 = ____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 4
Answer: 77
Explanation:
by using Distributive property
7 × 11 = 7 × (7 + 4)
= (7 × 7) + (7 × 4)
= 49 + 28
= 77

Question 2.
2 × 15 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 5
Answer: 30

Explanation:
by using Distributive property
2 × 15 = 2 × 10 + 5)
= (2 × 10) + (2 × 5)
= 20 + 10
= 30

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw an area model. Then find the product.
Question 3.
4 × 16 = ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 6
Answer: 64

Explanation:
by using distributive property
4 × 16 = 4× (10 + 6)
= (4 × 10) + (4 × 6)
= 40 + 24
= 64

Question 4.
9 × 18 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 7
Answer: 162
Explanation:
by using distributive property
9 × 18 = 9× (10 + 8)
= (9 × 10) + (9 × 8)
= 90 + 72
= 162

Question 5.
6 × 27 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 8
Answer: 162

Explanation:
by using distributive property
6 × 27 = 6× (20 + 7)
= (6 × 20) + (6 × 7)
= 120 + 42
= 162

Find the product.
Question 6.
3 × 46 = _____
Answer: 129
Explanation: by using distributive property
3 × 43 = 3 × (40 + 3)
= (3 × 40) + (3 × 3)
= 120 + 9
= 129

Question 7.
8 × 35 = ____
Answer: 280

Explanation: by using distributive property
8 × 35 = 8× (30 + 5)
= (8 × 30) + (8 × 5)
= 240 + 40
= 280

Question 8.
5 × 72 = _____
Answer: 360

Explanation: by using distributive property
5 × 72 = 5 × (70 + 2)
= (5 × 70) + (5 × 2)
= 350 + 10
= 360

Question 9.
Number Sense
Use the area model to complete the equation
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 9
5 × ____ = _____
Answer: 5 × 34 = 170
Explanation: by using distributive property
5 × 34 = 5 × (30 + 4)
= (5 × 30) + (5 × 4)
= 150 + 20
= 170

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A parking garage has 9 floors. Each floor has 78 parking spaces. 705 cars are trying to park in the garage. Are there enough parking spaces? Explain.
Multiply the number of floors by the number of parking spaces on each floor.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 10
Answer:   Only 702 cars are able to park in the garage

Explanation: by using distributive property
9 × 78 = 9× (70 + 8)
= (9 × 70) + (9 × 8)
= 630 + 72
= 702
Compare the number of spaces to the number of cars trying to park in the garage.
There _____ enough parking spaces.
Explain:
Answer:  Total number of spaces in the garage are 702 but as per the given details 705 are trying to park in the garage .
There are not enough parking spaces.

 

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Your piano teacher wants you to practice playing the piano 160 minutes this month. So far, you have practiced 5 minutes each day for 24 days. Have you reached the goal your teacher set for you? Explain.
Answer: 150 minutes
Explanation : practice for 160 minutes in a month ,say that 30 days
So far, you have practiced 5 minutes each day for 24 days. then, 5 × 24, By using distributive property
= 5 × (20+ 4)
= (5 × 20) + (5 × 4)
= 100 + 20
= 120
Remaining 6 days have to be practiced so ,5 × 6, By using distributive property
= 5 × (4 + 2)
= (5 × 4) + (5 × 2)
= 20 +10
= 30
Totally we have 120 + 30
= 150

Question 11.
Newton has $150. He wants to buy a bicycle that costs 4 times as much as the helmet. Does he have enough money to buy the bicycle and the helmet? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 11
Answer: $112
Explanation: Helmet = $ 28 ,bicycle that costs 4 times as much as the helmet. so
Bicycle = 4 × $28, By using distributive property
= 4 × (20 + 8 )
= (4 × 20) + (4 × 8)
= 80 + 32
= 112. so ,The bicycle costs $112 and he has $150 so he can buy the Bicycle.

Question 12.
A baby orangutan weighs 3 pounds. The mother orangutan weighs 27 times as much as the baby. The father orangutan weighs 63 times as much as the baby. What are the weights of the mother and the father?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 12
Answer: The mother orangutan weighs  81 pounds
The father orangutan weighs 189 pounds

Explanation: Baby orangutan  = 3 pounds
Mother orangutan weighs 27 times as much as the baby , 27 × 3, By using distributive property
3 × 27 = 3 × (20 + 7)
= (3 × 20) + ( 3 × 7)
= 60+21
= 81.
father orangutan weighs 63 times as much as the baby, 63 × 3, By using distributive property
63 × 3 = 3 × (60 + 3)
= (3 × 60) + (3 × 3)
= 180 + 9
= 189.

Use the Distributive Property to Multiply Homework & Practice 3.4

Draw an model. Then find the product
Question 1.
3 × 12 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 13
Answer: 36
Explanation:
3×12= 3 ×(10+2)
=(3×10)+ (3×2)
=30+6
=36

Question 2.
5 × 16 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 14
Answer: 80

Explanation:
5×16= 5 ×(10+6)
=(5×10)+ (5×6)
=50+30
=80

Question 3.
4 × 34 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 15
Answer: 136

Explanation:
4 ×34 = 4 ×(30+4)
=(4×30)+ (4×4)
=120+ 16
=136

Find the product.
Question 4.
9 × 56 = ____
Answer: 504

Explanation: 9 × 56= 9 ×(50+6)
=(9×50)+ (9×6)
=450 + 54
=504

Question 5.
71 × 2 = _____
Answer:  142

Explanation:  71 × 2 = 2 × (70+ 1)
=(2×70)+ (2×1)
= 140+2
=142

Question 6.
3 × 77 = ____
Answer:  231

Explanation:  77 × 3 = 3 × (70+ 7)
=(3×70)+ (3×7)
= 210 + 21
=231

Question 7.
Writing
Explain how you can use the Distributive Property to find a product.
Answer:
The Distributive Property states that when you multiply the sum of two or more addends by a factor, the product  is the same as if you multiplied each addend by the factor and then added the partial products .

Question 8.
Structure
Use the Distributive Property to find 6 × 18 two different ways.
Answer: 108
Explanation: 6 ×18 = 6 ×(10+8)
=(6×10)+ (6×8)
=60 + 48
= 108
or
Explanation: 6 ×18= 6 ×(9 + 9)
=(6×9)+ (6 ×9)
=54 +54
= 108

Question 9.
Reasoning
To find 4 × 22, would you rather break apart the factor 22 as 20 + 2 or as 11 + 11? Explain.
Answer:  88. I would rather prefer to break apart the factor 22 as 20 + 2 . as it has zero’s in the tens place it would be easier to calculate and both of them are correct and anyone can use it on their
Explanation: 4× 22 = 4 ×(20+2)
= (4×20)+ (4×2)
= 80 + 8
= 88
or
Explanation: 4× 22 = 4 ×(11+11)
= (4×11)+ (4×11)
= 44 + 44
= 88

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
The diameter of a firework burst, in feet, is 45 times the height of the shell in inches. You have an 8-inch firework shell. Will the shell produce a firework burst that has a diameter greater than 375 feet? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 16
Answer: NO

Explanation: The diameter of a firework burst, in feet, is 45 times the height of the shell in inches
You have an 8-inch firework shell converting into feet e get 0.66 feet
so diameter = 45 × 0.66
=  29.7 feet
The shell  does not produce a firework burst that has a diameter greater than 375 feet

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
A juvenile bearded dragon should eat 48 crickets each day. You have150 crickets. Do you have enough crickets to feed 3 juvenile bearded dragons? Explain.?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 17
Answer: yes

Explanation:  juvenile bearded dragon should eat 48 crickets each day
To feed 3 juvenile bearded dragons , 3 × 48
= 3 × (40 + 8)
= ( 3 × 40) + (3 × 8)
= 120 + 24
= 144.
You have150 crickets , we can feed them by 144 crickets

Review & Refresh

Plot the fraction on a number line.
Question 12.
\(\ frac{7}{4}\)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 18
Answer:  7/4
Explanation:
To mark 7/4; move seven parts on the right-side of zero.

Question 13.
\(\frac{4}{3}\)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.4 19
Answer: 4/3

Explanation:
To mark 4/3 ; move four parts on the right-side of zero

Lesson 3.5 Use Expanded Form to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Write 128 in expanded form.
128 = _____ + _____ + _____
Answer: 100 + 20 + 8
Use expanded form to label the area model for 5 × 128. Find the area of each part.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 1
Answer: 640

Explanation: 5 × 128, by expanding we get
= 5 × (100 + 20 + 8), by using distributive property, we get
= (5 × 100) + ( 5 × 20) + ( 5 × 8)
Area model = 500 + 100 + 40
so the result of the partial products is 640
What is the sum of all of the parts? How does the sum relate to the product of 5 and 128?
Answer:  the sum of all of the parts is 640  the sum relate to the product of 5 and 128 because of their partial products.

Repeated Reasoning
Explain to your partner how you can use expanded form to find 364 × 8.
Answer:  2,912
Explanation: 364 × 8 , by expanding we get
= (300 + 60 + 4) × 8, by using distributive property, we get
= (8 × 300) + ( 8 × 60) + ( 8× 4),
Area model = 2400 + 360  + 32
The sum of the partial products is 2,912.

Think and Grow: Use Expanded Form to Multiply

You can use expanded form and the Distributive Property to multiply.
Example
Find 8 × 74.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 2
Answer:  592
Explanation: 8 × 74 , by expanding
= 8 × (70 + 4), by using distributive property,
= (8 × 70) + ( 8 × 4)
= 560 + 32
= 592.

Example
Find 2 × 5,607.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 3
Answer:  11,214
Explanation: 2 × 5,607, by expanding
= 2 × (5,000 + 600 + 7) by using distributive property we get,
= (2 × 5,000) + ( 2 × 600) +(2 × 7)
= 10,000 + 1200 + 14
= 11,214

Show and Grow

Find the product.
Question 1.
4 × 306 = 4 × (_____ + _____)
= (4 × _____) + (4 × _____)
= ____ + _____
= ______
Answer: 1,224
Explanation :  4 × 306 = 4 × ( 300 + 6 )
= (4 × 300 ) + (4 × 6 ) by using distributive property we get
= 1200 + 24
= 1,224

Question 2.
7 × 549
Answer:  3,843

Explanation :  7 × 549 = 4 × ( 500 + 40 + 9 )
= (7 × 500 ) + (7 × 40 ) + (7 × 9)  by using distributive property we get
= 3,500 + 280 + 63
= 3,843

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product.
Question 3.
6 × 85 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 4
Answer: 510

Explanation :  6 × 85 = 6 × ( 80 + 5 )
= (6 × 80 ) + (6 × 5 ) by using distributive property we get
= 480 + 30
= 510

Question 4.
2 × 932 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 5
Answer: 1,864

Explanation :  2 × 932 = 2 × ( 900 + 30 + 2 )
= (2 × 900 ) + (2 × 30 ) + ( 2 ×2)  by using distributive property we get
= 1800 + 60 + 4
= 1,864

Question 5.
4 × 690 = 4 × (_____ + ______)
= (4 × _____) + (4 × ____)
= _____ + _____
= _____
Answer: 2,760

Explanation: 4 × 690 = 4 × (600 + 90)
= (4 × 600) + (4 × 90)
= 2,400 + 360
= 2,760

Question 6.
1,027 × 9 = (_____ + _____ + ______) × 9
= (____ × 9) + (_____ × 9) + (_____ × 9)
= _____ + ______ + _____
= _____
Answer: 9,243

Explanation: 1,027 × 9 = (1000+ 20 + 7) × 9
= (1000 × 9) + (20 × 9) + (7 × 9)
= 9000 + 180 + 63
= 9,243

Question 7.
487 × 5 = _____
Answer: 2,435

Explanation :  5 × 487 = 5 × ( 400 + 80 + 7 )
= (5 × 400 ) + (5 × 80 ) + ( 5 ×7 )  by using distributive property we get
= 2000 + 400 + 35
= 2,435

Question 8.
8 × 2,483 = ______
Answer: 19,864

Explanation :  8 × 2,483 = 8 × (2000 + 400 + 80 + 3 )
= (8 × 2000 ) + (8 × 400 ) + ( 8 ×80) + (8 ×3)   by using distributive property we get
= 16,000 + 3200 + 640 +24
= 19,864

Question 9.
A basketball player made 269 three-point shots in a season. How many points did he score from three-point shots?
Answer:

Question 10.
Your cousin runs 6 miles each week. There are 5,280 feet in a mile. How many feet does your cousin run each week?
Answer: 6 × 5,280 = 31,680

Explanation :  cousin runs 6 miles each week. There are 5,280 feet in a mile.so
we have 6 × 5,280
6 × 5,280 = 6 × (5000 + 200 + 80 )
= (6 × 5000 ) + (6 × 200 ) + ( 6 ×80)  by using distributive property we get
= 30,000 + 1200 + 480
= 31,680.

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds 744 × 3. Is your friend correct? Explain.
744 × 3 = (700 + 40 + 4) × 3
= (700 × 3) + (40 × 3) + (4 × 3)
= 2,100 + 120 + 12
= 2,232
Answer: Yes

Explanation: By using expanding form and distributive property we get,
744 × 3 = (700 + 40 + 4) × 3
= (700 × 3) + (40 × 3) + (4 × 3)
= 2,100 + 120 + 12
= 2,232

 

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
What is the greatest possible product of a two-digit number and a one-digit number? Explain.
Answer:  891
The greatest two digit number is 99 and the greatest single digit number is 9. The products when the two are multiplied. Multiply 99 by 9 to get 891.

Explanation : 99 × 9 = 891

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A baby hippo is fed 77 fluid ounces of milk 5 times each day. There are 128 fluid ounces in 1 gallon. Are2 gallons of milk enough to feed the baby hippo for 1 day?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 6
Answer: 2 gallons of milk is not enough for baby hippo to feed
Explanation:
baby hippo is fed 77 fluid ounces of milk 5 times each day that is, 5 × 77
= 5 × (70 + 7 )
= (5 ×70) + (5 ×7)
= 350 + 35
= 385
There are 128 fluid ounces in 1 gallon , then for 2 gallons it will 256 fluid ounces

Find the number of fluid ounces of milk the baby hippo drinks in 1 day.
5 × 77 = 5 × (70 + 7)
= (5 × 70) + (5 × 7)
= _____ +____
= _____

Answer : 385
Explanation:
baby hippo is fed 77 fluid ounces of milk 5 times each day that is, 5 × 77
= 5 × (70 + 7 )
= (5 ×70) + (5 ×7)
= 350 + 35
= 385

Find the number of fluid ounces in 2 gallons
2 × 128 = 2 × (100 + 20 + 8)
= (2 × 100) + (2 × 20) + (2 × 8)
= ___ + _____ + _____
= _____
Answer: 256
Explanation: 2 × 128 = 2 × (100 + 20 + 8)
= (2 × 100) + (2 × 20) + (2 × 8)
= 200 +40 + 16
= 256.
Compare the products.
Answer: Baby hippo is fed 77 fluid ounces of milk 5 times each day that is, 5 × 77 is 385 ounces
There are 128 fluid ounces in 1 gallon , then for 2 gallons it will 256 fluid ounces
So, 385 ounces is greater than 256 ounces.

So, 2 gallons of milk ______ enough to feed the baby hippo for 1 day.
Answer: 2 gallons of milk is not enough to feed the baby hippo for 1 day.s

Show and Grow

Question 13.
A school with 6 grades goes on a field trip. There are 64 students in each grade. One bus holds 48 students. Will 8 buses hold all of the students?
Answer: YES , there are 384 students in total.

Explanation : A school with 6 grades goes on a field trip.
There are 64 students in each grade. so we have 6 × 64
= 6 × ( 60 + 4 )
= (6 × 60) + ( 6 × 4)
= 360 + 24
= 384.
There are 8 buses in total
One bus holds 48 students.so 8 × 48
= 8 × ( 40 + 8 )
= (8 × 40) + ( 8 × 8)
= 320 + 64
= 384.

So, 8 buses are enough to carry the 384 students of all 6 grades.

Question 14.
The average life span of a firefly is 61 days. The average life span of a Monarch butterfly is 4 times as long as that of a firefly. How many days longer is the average lifespan of a Monarch butterfly than a firefly?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 7
Answer: 183 days longer.

Explanation: The average life span of a firefly is 61 days.
The average life span of a Monarch butterfly is 4 times as long as that of a firefly. so, we have 4 × 61
= 4 × ( 60 + 1 )
= (4 × 60) + ( 4 × 1)
= 240 + 4
= 244.
Then 244 – 61 (The average life span of a firefly) is 183.
So 183 days longer is the average lifespan of a Monarch butterfly than a firefly.

Question 15.
A tourist is in Denver. His car can travel 337 miles using 1 tank of gasoline. He wants to travel to a city using no more than 3 tanks of gasoline. To which cities could the tourist travel?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 8
Answer: Los Angeles 1,016 miles

Explanation: His car can travel 337 miles using 1 tank of gasoline.
He wants to travel to a city using no more than 3 tanks of gasoline. we have 3 × 337
= 3 × (300 + 30 + 7)
= (3 × 300) + (3 × 30) + (3 × 7)
= 900 +90 + 21
= 1,011.
From the given details Los Angeles is the nearest one which he can drive with 3 tanks of gasoline  that is 1,016 miles.

Use Expanded Form to Multiply Homework & Practice 3.5

Find the product
Question 1.
7 × 803 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 9
Answer:  5,621

Explanation: 7 × 803 = 7 × (800 + 3)
= (7 × 800) + (7 × 3)
= 5600 + 21
= 5,621.

Question 2.
9 × 1,024 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 10
Answer:9,216

Explanation: 9 × 1,024 = 9 × (1000 + 20 + 4)
= (9 × 1000) + (9 × 20) + (9 × 4)
= 9000 +180 + 36
= 9,216.

Question 3.
43 × 8 = (40 + 3) × 8
= (____ × 8) + (____ × 8)
= ____ + ____
= _____
Answer: 344

Explanation: 8 × 43 = (40 + 3) × 8
= (40 × 8) + (3 × 8)
= 320 + 24
= 344.

Question 4.
4 × 742 = 4 × (____ + ____ + _____)
= (4 × ____) + (4 × _____) + (4 × _____)
= ____ + _____ + _____
= _____
Answer: 2,968

Explanation: 4 × 742 = 4 × (700 + 40 + 2)
= (4 × 700) + (4 × 40) + (4 × 2)
= 2800 +160 + 8
= 2,968.

Question 5.
3 × 482 = _____
Answer: 1,446

Explanation: 3 × 482 = 2 × (400 + 80 + 2)
= (3 × 400) + (3 × 80) + (3 × 2)
= 1200 + 240 + 6
= 1,446.

Question 6.
4,591 × 6 = _____
Answer: 27,546

Explanation: 6 × 4,591
= 6 × (4,000 + 500 + 90 + 1)
= (6 × 4,000) + ( 6 × 500) +(6 × 90) + ((6 × 1)
= 24,000 + 3,000 + 540 + 6
= 27,546.

Question 7.
Each lobe on a Venus flytrap has 6 trigger hairs that sense and capture insects. A Venus flytrap has 128 lobes. How many trigger hairs does it have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 11
Answer: 768 trigger hairs.

Explanation: A Venus flytrap has 128 lobes
Each lobe on a Venus flytrap has 6 trigger hairs, we have 6 × 128
= 6 × (120 + 8)
= (6 × 120) + (6 × 8)
= 720 + 48
= 768
So, it has 768 trigger hairs.

Question 8.
A human skeleton has 206 bones. How many bones do 4 skeletons have in all?
Answer: 824

Explanation:  A human skeleton has 206 bones
so 4 × 206 = 4 × ( 200 + 6)
= (4 × 200) + ( 4 × 6)
= 800 + 24
=824.
So, 4 skeletons have 824 bones.

Question 9.
Writing
Explain how you can find 5 × 7,303 using expanded form.
Answer: 36,515

Explanation: 5 × 7,303
= 5 × (7,000 + 300 + 3)
= (5 × 7,000) + ( 5 × 300) + (5 × 3)
= 35,000 + 15,000 + 15
= 36,515.

Question 10.
Structure
Rewrite the expression as a product of two factors.
(6,000 × 3) + (70 × 3) + (4 × 3)
Answer: 18,222

Explanation:
(6,000 × 3) + (70 × 3) + (4 × 3)
= (6,000 + 70 + 4) × 3
= 3 × 6,074
= 18,222.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
A summer camp has 8 different groups of students. There are 35 students in each group. There are 24 shirts in a box. Will 9 boxes be enough for each student to get one shirt?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 12
Answer: No, 9 boxes are not enough.

Explanation:  A summer camp has 8 different groups of students.
There are 35 students in each group, we have 8 × 35
= 8 × (30 + 5)
= (8 × 30) + ( 8 × 5)
= 240 + 40
=280.
There are 24 shirts in a box
for 9 boxes we have , 9 × 24
= 9 × (20 + 4)
= (9 × 20) + ( 9 × 4)
= 180 + 36
=216.
So, there are not enough shirts for all the students.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Firefighters respond to 65 calls in 1 week. Police officers respond to 8 times as many calls as firefighters in the same week. How many more calls do police officers respond to than firefighters in that week?
Answer: 455 calls.

Explanation: Firefighters respond to 65 calls in 1 week.
Police officers respond to 8 times as many calls as firefighters in the same week.
we have, 8 × 65
= 8 × (60 + 5)
= (8 × 60) + ( 8 × 5)
= 480 + 40
=520.
Then 520 – 65 (Firefighters respond to 65 calls in 1 week.) = 455.
So, 455 calls do police officers respond to than firefighters in that week.

Review & Refresh

Write the total mass shown.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 13
Answer:  913 g

Explanation: Total mass = 500 +100 + 100 + 100 +100 +1 + 1 + 1 +10
=500 + 400 + 3 + 10
=913g

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.5 14
Answer:  1,346

Explanation: 1 kg = 1000g
Total mass = 1000 + 5 + 100 +100 + 100 + 10 + 10 +10 + 1g
=1000 + 300 + 40 + 6
=1,346g

Lesson 3.6 Use Partial Products to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Use the area model to find 263 × 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 1
Answer:  1,052

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products = 800 + 240 +12 = 1,052

Repeated Reasoning
Does the product change if you multiply the ones first, then the tens and hundreds? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 2
Answer: product does not changes.

Explanation:  The product of the two numbers does not change as long as the factor numbers are same in the multiplication products that is (3 × 4 ) + ( 60 × 4) + ( 200 × 4)
= 12 + 240 + 800
= 1,052.

Think and Grow: Practice

Partial products are found by breaking apart a factor into ones, tens, hundreds, and so on, and multiplying each of these by the other factor.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 3

Answer: 194 × 3 = 582.

Explanation:
partial products = (3 × 100) + ( 3 × 90) + (3 × 4)
the sum of the partial products = 300 + 270 + 12 = 582
so, 194 × 3 = 582

Example 2
Answer: 3,190 × 2 = 6,380

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products = 6000 + 200 + 180 + 0 = 6,380
So, 3,190 × 2 = 6,380

Show and Grow

Find the product.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 4
Answer: 430

Explanation:
the sum of the partial products = 400 + 30 = 430
So, 86 × 5 = 430

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 5
Answer: 3,514

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products = 3500 + 14 = 3,514
So, 502 × 7 = 3,514

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 6
Answer: 21,468

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products is 20,000 + 1200 + 240 + 28 = 21,468
So, 5,367 × 4 = 21,468

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 7
Answer: 162

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 120 + 42 = 162
So, 27 × 6 = 162

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 8
Answer: 4,437

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are  3600 + 810 + 27 = 4,437
So, 493 × 9 = 4,437

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 9
Answer: 55,856

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 48000 + 7200 + 640 + 16 = 55,856
So, 6,982 × 8 = 55,856

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 10
Answer: 138

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 120 + 18 = 138
So, 69 × 2 = 138

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 11
Answer: 2,451

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 2400 + 30 + 21 = 2,451
So, 817 × 3 = 2,451

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 12
Answer: 19,810

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 15000 + 4500 + 300 + 10 = 19,810
So, 3,962 × 5 = 19,810

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 13
Answer: 5,096

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 4900 + 140 + 56 = 5,096
So, 728 × 7 = 5,096

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 14
Answer: 9,324

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 9000 + 2700 + 54 = 9,324
So, 1,036 × 9 = 9,324

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 15
Answer: 39,804

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 36,000 + 3600 + 200 + 4  = 39,804
So, 9,951 × 4 = 39,804

Question 13.
Descartes finds 472 × 3. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 16
Answer: 472 × 3 = 1,416

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 1200 + 210 + 6 = 1,416
So, 472 × 3 = 1,416

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Write the multiplication equation shown by the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 17
Answer: The given model is not according to the distributive property there is no proper place for tens, hundreds in the zeros place . so, it should be modified in order to get the correct answer.

Question 15.
Writing
Write a multiplication word problem using the numbers 506 and 8. Then solve.
Answer: 506 × 8 = 4,048

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 4000 + 48 = 4,048
So, 506 × 8 = 4,048

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The Grand Prismatic Spring at Yellowstone National Park is 121 feet deep. Its width is 7 feet more than3 times its depth. What is the width of the spring?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 18
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 19
So, the width of the Grand Prismatic Spring is ______ feet.
Answer: The depth of the Grand Prismatic Spring  is 363 feet and width of the Grand Prismatic Spring  is 370 feet.

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 360 + 3 = 363. The depth of the Grand Prismatic Spring  is 363 feet
So, the width of the Grand Prismatic Spring  is 363 + 7 = 370 feet.

Show and Grow

Question 16.
The mass of a giant squid is 202 kilograms. The mass of a beluga whale is 78 kilograms less than 6 times the mass of the giant squid. What is the mass of beluga whale?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 20
Answer: the mass of beluga whale is 1,134 kilograms.

Explanation : 6 times the mass of the giant squid. is 6 × 202  = 1,212
The sum of the partial products are 1200 + 12 = 1,212.
The mass of a beluga whale is 78 kilograms less than 6 times the mass of the giant squid = 1,212 – 78 = 1,134 kg
The mass of beluga whale is 1,134 kilograms

Question 17.
Newton replaces all 4 tires on his car and pays $159 for each tire. Descartes replaces all 4 tires on his truck and pays $227 for each tire. How much more does Descartes pay to replace his tires?
Answer:  $272 more has to pay to replace the tires.

Explanation: Newton replaces all 4 tires on his car and pays $159 for each tire
so, $159 × 4 =  $636
The sum of the partial products are 400 + 200 + 36 =  $636.

Descartes replaces all 4 tires on his truck and pays $227 for each tire.
so, $227 × 4 =  $908
The sum of the partial products are 800 + 80 + 28 = $908.
Then $908  – $636 = $272.
So,$272 more has to pay to replace the tires.

Question 18.
There are 52 weeks and 1 day in a year. There are 52 weeks and 2 days in a leap year. How many weeks are there in 6 years if one of the years is a leap year?
Answer: There are 313 weeks are there for 6 years .

Explanation: Apart from the leap year there are 5 years with 52 weeks and 1 day
then, 52 × 5 = 260 weeks and 5 × 1 = 5 days ( 5 years)
In a leap year we have 52 weeks and 2 days adding this to the total count above we have,
260 weeks + 52 weeks = 312 weeks and by adding days we have 5 + 2 = 7 that is  a week
Totally 312 weeks + 1 week = 313 weeks.
There are 313 weeks are there for 6 years .

Use Partial Products to Multiply Homework & Practice 3.6

Find the product
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 21
Answer: 185

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 150 + 35 = 185
So, 37 × 5 = 185

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 22
Answer: 7,029

Explanation :
The sum of the partial products are 6300 + 720 + 9 = 7,029
So, 781 × 9 = 7,029

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 23
Answer: 8,811

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 6000 + 2700 + 90 + 21 = 8,811
S0, 2,937 × 3 = 8,811

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 24
Answer: 4,692

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 4200 + 480 12 = 4,962
So, 782 × 6 = 4,962

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 25
Answer: 680

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 640 + 40 = 680
So, 85 × 8 = 680

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 26
Answer: 16,052

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 16,000 + 40 + 12 = 16,052
So, 8,026 × 2 = 16,052

Find the product
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 27
Answer: 2,793

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 2100 + 630 + 63 = 2,793
So, 399 × 7 = 2,793

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 28
Answer: 29,560

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 28,000 + 1200 + 360 = 29,560
So, 7,390 × 4 = 29,560

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 29
Answer: 46,430

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 45,000 + 1000 + 400 + 30 = 46,430
So, 9,286 × 5 = 46,430

Question 10.
Number Sense
Which four numbers are the partial products that you add to find the product of 3,472 and 6?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 30
Answer: 18,000 ; 24,00 ; 420 ; 12.

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 18,000 + 2400 + 420 + 12 = 20,832.
So, The partial products are 18,000 ; 24,00 ; 420 ; 12.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
The sum of a four-digit number and a one-digit number is 7,231. The product of the numbers is 28,908. What are the numbers?
Answer: 7227 and 4

Explanation:
The sum of a four-digit number and a one-digit number is 7,231. The product of the numbers is 28,908. so we have 7,227 + 4 = 7,231 and product is 7,227 × 4 = 28,908.
So, The numbers are 7,227 and 4

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
The height of the Eiffel Tower is 38 feet more than 3 times the height of Big Ben. What is the height of the Eiffel Tower?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 31
Answer: The height of the Eiffel Tower is 986 feet.

Explanation:
The height of the Eiffel Tower is 38 feet more than 3 times the height of Big Ben.
so, 316 × 3 = 948 feet,
The height of the Eiffel Tower is 38 feet more we get 948 + 38 = 986 feet.
So, The height of the Eiffel Tower is 986 feet.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
An animal shelter owner has 9 dogs and 4 cats ready for adoption. How much money will the owner collect when all of the animals are adopted?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 32
Answer:  $12,150 money is collect from the adoption.

Explanation:
Each cat is $450 , Then for 4 cats we get 4 × 450 = 1,800
Each dog is $1,150 ,Then for 9 dogs we get 9 × 1,150 = 10,350.

Total amount is $1800 + $10,350 = $ 12,150.
So, $12,150 money is collect from the adoption.

Review & Refresh

Write all of the names for the quadrilateral.
Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 33
Answer: Parallelogram, Square, Rectangle, Rhombus, Trapezoid.

Explanation: In geometry, a quadrilateral can be defined as a closed, two dimensional shape which has four straight sides.
We can find the shape of quadrilaterals in various things around us, like in a chess board, a deck of cards, a kite, a tub of popcorn, a sign board and in an arrow.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.6 34
Answer: square.

Explanation:
All sides are equal.
All angles are equal and measure 90°.

Lesson 3.7 Multiply Two-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Model 24 × 3. Draw to show your model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 1
24 × 3 = _____
How did you use regrouping to find the product?
Answer: 72

Precision
Use a model to find 15 × 8.
Answer: 120

Think and Grow: Use Regrouping to Multiply

Example
Find 32 × 6.
Estimate: 30 × 6 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 2
Check: Because ____ is close to the estimate, _____, the answer is reasonable.
Answer: 32 × 6 = 192 , Then 30 × 6 = 180.

Explanation: Because 192  is close to the estimate, 180 , the answer is reasonable.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the model to find the product.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 3
Answer: 132.

Explanation:

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 2.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 4
Answer: 96, the Estimate product is 80

Explanation:
8 × 2 ones = 16 ones
regroup 16 ones as
1 ten and 6 ones
Then 8 × 1 ten = 8 tens
8 tens + 1 ten = 9 tens , then we have 96

And the Estimate product is 80,
because 12 is close to 10 , we have 10 × 8 = 80
So, 12 × 8 = 96

Question 3.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 5
Answer: 235, the estimated product is 250

Explanation:

5 × 7 ones = 35 ones
regrouping 35 ones as 3 tens and 5 ones
5 × 4 tens = 20 tens
20 tens + 3 tens = 23 tens  or  2 hundreds and 3 tens ,Then we get 235

And the estimated product is 250
because 47 is close to 50,then 50 × 5 = 250
So, 47 × 5 = 235

Question 4.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 6
Answer:  138, he estimated product is 120

Explanation:
6 × 3 ones = 18 ones
regrouping 18 ones as 1 ten and 8 ones
6 × 2tens = 12 tens
12 tens + 1 ten = 13 tens or 1 hundred and 3 tens ,Then we have 138

And the estimated product is 120
because 23 is close to 20 , so 20 × 6 = 120
So, 23 × 6 = 138

 

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 5.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 7
Answer: 175 , the Estimate product is 140

Explanation:
7 × 5 ones = 35 ones
regrouping 35 ones as 3 tens and 5 ones
7 × 2tens = 14 tens
14 tens + 3 tens = 17 tens or 1 hundred and 7 tens ,Then we have 175

And the estimated product is 140
because 25 is close to 20 , so 20 × 7 = 120
So, 25 × 7 = 175

Question 6.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 8
Answer:  68 , the Estimate product is 60

Explanation:
2 × 4 ones = 8 ones
2 × 3tens = 6 tens
Then we have 68

And the estimated product is 60
because 34 is close to 30 , so 30 × 2 = 60
So, 34 × 2 = 68

 

Question 7.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 9
Answer: 504, the Estimate product is 540

Explanation:
9 × 6 = 54 ones
regrouping 54 ones as 5 tens and 4 ones
9 × 5 tens = 45 tens
45 tens + 5 tens = 50 tens or 5 hundreds ,Then we have 504

And the estimated product is 540
because 56 is close to 60 , so 60 × 9 = 540
So, 56 × 9 = 504

Question 8.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 10
Answer:  328, the Estimate product is 320

Explanation:   
8 × 1 ones = 8 ones
8 × 4 tens = 32 tens
Then we have 328

And the estimated product is 320
because 41 is close to 40 , so 40 × 8 = 320
So, 41 × 8 = 328

Question 9.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 11
Answer: 292, the Estimate product is 280

Explanation:
4 × 3 ones = 12 ones
regrouping 12 ones as 1 ten and 2 ones
4 × 7 tens = 28  tens
28 tens + 1 ten  = 29 tens or 2 hundred and 9 tens ,Then we have 292

And the estimated product is 280
because 73 is close to 70 , so 70 × 4 = 280
So, 73 × 4 = 292

Question 10.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 12
Answer:  534, the Estimate product is 540

Explanation:
6 × 9 ones = 54 ones
regrouping 54 ones as 5 tens and 4 ones
6 × 8 tens = 48 tens
48 tens + 5 tens = 53 tens or 5 hundred and 3 tens ,Then we have 534

And the estimated product is 540
because 89 is close to 90 , so 90 × 6 = 540
So, 89 × 6 = 534

Question 11.
Estimate: ______
65 × 7 = ______
Answer:  455, the Estimate product is 490

Explanation:
7 × 5 ones = 35 ones
regrouping 35 ones as 3 tens and 5 ones
7 × 2tens = 14 tens
14 tens + 3 tens = 17 tens or 1 hundred and 7 tens ,Then we have 175

And the estimated product is 140
because 25 is close to 20 , so 20 × 7 = 120
So, 25 × 7 = 175

Question 12.
Estimate: ____
3 × 92 = _____
Answer: 276, the Estimate product is 270

Explanation:

3 × 2 ones = 6 ones
3 × 9 tens = 27 tens
Then we get 235

And the estimated product is 270
because 92 is close to 90, then 90 × 3 = 270
So, 92 × 3 = 276

Question 4.

Question 13.
Estimate: _____
47 × 5 = ______
Answer:  235, the Estimate product is 250

Explanation:

5 × 7 ones = 35 ones
regrouping 35 ones as 3 tens and 5 ones
5 × 4 tens = 20 tens
20 tens + 3 tens = 23 tens  or  2 hundreds and 3 tens ,Then we get 235

And the estimated product is 250
because 47 is close to 50,then 50 × 5 = 250
So, 47 × 5 = 235

Question 14.
There are 8 questions during the first round of a game show. Each question is worth 15 points. What is the greatest number of points that a contestant can earn during the first round?
Answer: 120 is the greatest number of points that a contestant can earn during the first round

Explanation:

8 × 5 ones = 40 ones
regrouping 40 ones as 4 tens and 0 ones
1 × 8 tens = 8 tens
8 tens + 4 tens = 12 tens  or  1 hundred  and 2 tens ,Then we get 120
So, 120 is the greatest number of points that a contestant can earn during the first round.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 13
Answer:  1 , 7 and 1 , 9 and 7.

Explanation:

5 × 3 ones = 15 ones
regrouping 15 ones as 1 ten and 5 ones
5 × 1 ten = 5 tens
5 tens + 1 ten = 6 tens  ,Then we get  65

Explanation:

2 × 7 ones = 14 ones
regrouping 14 ones as 1 ten and 4 ones
2 × 3 tens = 6 tens
6 tens + 1 ten = 7 tens  Then we get  74

Explanation:

9 × 8 ones = 72 ones
regrouping 72 ones as 7 tens and 2 ones
9 × 8 tens = 72 tens
72 tens + 7 tens = 79 tens  or  7 hundreds and 9 tens ,Then we get  792
Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The fastest human on Earth can run up to 27 miles per hour. A pronghorn antelope can run up to 2 times as fast as the fastest human. A cheetah can run up to 61 miles per hour. Which animal can run faster?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 14
Find how fast a pronghorn antelope can run.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 15
Answer: 54 miles per hour

Explanation:
2 × 7 ones = 14 ones
regrouping 14 ones as 1 ten and 4 ones
2 × 2 tens = 4 tens
4 tens + 1 ten = 5 tens  Then we get  54.

A pronghorn antelope can run up to _____ miles per hour.
Answer: A pronghorn antelope can run up to 54 miles per hour.

Compare the fastest speeds of a pronghorn antelope and a cheetah.
So, a _______ can run faster.
Answer: A cheetah can run faster.

Show and Grow

Question 16.
A band’s goal is to produce 100 songs. The band has produced 6 albums with 13 songs on each album. Has the band reached its goal?
Answer: NO , 78 songs

Explanation:

6 × 3 ones = 18 ones
regrouping 18 ones as 1 ten and 8 ones
6 × 1 ten = 6 tens
6 tens + 1 ten = 7 ten Then we get  78
A band’s goal is to produce 100 songs but they had only 78 songs so they did not get to their goal.

Question 17.
A teenager must practice driving with an adult for 50 hours before taking a driver’s license test. A teenager practices driving with an adult 4 hours each week for14 weeks. Has the teenager practiced long enough to take the test?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 16
Answer: YES , 56 hours

Explanation:

4 × 4 ones = 16 ones
regrouping 16 ones as 1 ten and 6 ones
4 × 1 ten = 4 tens
4 tens + 1 ten = 5 tens Then we get  56
A teenager must practice driving with an adult for 50 hours So she has practiced enough to get a license.

Question 18.
How much more does it cost to rent a personal water craft for 3 hours than a motor boat for 3 hours?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 17
Answer: It cost $60 more to rent a personal water craft for 3 hours than a motor boat for 3 hours.

Explanation:
A Personal water craft cost $89 per hour then per 3 hours, $89 × 3 ,so
3 × 9 ones = 27 ones
regrouping 27 ones as 2 tens and 7 ones
3 × 8 tens = 24 tens
24 tens + 2 tens = 26 tens  or  2 hundreds and 6 tens ,Then we get  $267.

Explanation:
A Motor boat costs $69 per hour then for 3 hours,$69 × 3 ,so
3 × 9 ones = 27 ones
regrouping 27 ones as 2 tens and 7 ones
3 × 6 tens = 18 tens
18 tens + 2 tens = 20 tens or  2 hundreds ,Then we get  $207

Finally $267 – $ 207 = $60
It cost $60 more to rent a personal water craft for 3 hours than a motor boat for 3 hours.

Multiply Two-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 3.7

Question 1.
Use the model to find the product.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 18
Answer: 106

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 2.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 19
Answer: 72 , the Estimate product is 60,

Explanation: 
3 × 4 ones = 12 ones
regroup 12 ones as 1 ten and 2 ones
Then 3 × 2 tens = 6 tens
6 tens + 1 ten = 7 tens , then we have 72

And the Estimate product is 60,
because 24 is close to 20 , we have 20 × 3 = 60
So, 24 × 3 = 72.

Question 3.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 20
Answer: 126 ,the Estimate product is 140,

Explanation: 
7 × 8 ones = 56 ones
regroup 56 ones as
5 tens and 6 ones
Then 7 × 1 ten = 7 tens
7 tens + 5 tens = 12  tens , then we have 126

And the Estimate product is 140,
because 18 is close to 20 , we have 20 × 7 = 140
So, 18 × 7 = 126

Question 4.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 21
Answer: 198, the Estimate product is 180.

Explanation: 
6 × 3 ones = 18 ones
regroup 18 ones as 1 ten and 8 ones
Then 6 × 3 tens = 18 tens
18 tens + 1 ten = 19 tens , then we have  198

And the Estimate product is 180,
because 33 is close to 30 , we have 30 × 6 = 180
So, 33 × 6 = 198

Question 5.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 22
Answer: 423, the Estimate product is 450.

Explanation: 
9 × 7 ones = 63 ones
regroup 63 ones as 6 tens and  3 ones
Then 9 × 4 tens = 36 tens
36 tens + 6 ten = 42 tens , then we have 423

And the Estimate product is 450,
because 47 is close to 50 , we have 50 × 9 = 450
So, 47 × 9 = 423

Question 6.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 23
Answer: 260,the Estimate product is 240.

Explanation: 
4 × 5 ones = 20 ones
regroup 20 ones as 2 tens and 0 ones
Then 4 × 6 tens = 24 tens
24 tens + 2 tens = 26 tens , then we have 260

And the Estimate product is 240,
because 65 is close to 60 , we have 60 × 4 = 240
So, 65 × 4 = 260

Question 7.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 24
Answer:  576 ,the Estimate product is 560.

Explanation:
8 × 2 ones = 16 ones
regroup 16 ones as
1 ten and 6 ones
Then 8 × 7 tens = 56 tens
56 tens + 1 ten = 57 tens , then we have 576

And the Estimate product is 560,
because 72 is close to 70 , we have 70 × 8 = 560
So, 72 × 8 = 576.

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 8.
Estimate: ______
49 × 5 = _____
Answer: 245 , the Estimate product is 250,

Explanation: 
5 × 9 ones = 45 ones
regroup 45 ones as 4 tens and 5 ones
Then 5 × 4 tens = 20 tens
20 tens + 4 tens = 24 tens , then we have  245

And the Estimate product is 250,
because 49 is close to 50 , we have 50 × 5 = 250
So, 49 × 5 = 250.

Question 9.
Estimate: _______
7 × 86 = _______
Answer: 602, the Estimate product is 630,

Explanation: 
7 × 6 ones = 42 ones
regroup 42 ones as 4 tens and  2 ones
Then 7 × 8 tens = 56 tens
56 tens + 4 tens = 60 tens , then we have 602

And the Estimate product is 630,
because 86 is close to 90 , we have 90 × 7 = 630
So, 86 × 7 = 602.

Question 10.
Estimate: ______
93 × 3 = ______
Answer: 279 , the Estimate product is 270

Explanation: 
3 × 3 ones = 9 ones
Then 3 × 9 tens = 27 tens
then we have 279

And the Estimate product is 270,
because 93 is close to 90 , we have 90 × 3 = 270
So, 93 × 3 = 270.

Question 11.
You read 56 pages each week. How many pages do you read in 8 weeks?
Answer: 448 pages.

Explanation:
8 × 6 ones = 48 ones
regroup 48 ones as 4 tens and 8 ones
Then 8 × 5 tens = 40 tens
40 tens + 4 tens = 44 tens , then we have  448.
So, 448 pages for 8 weeks.

Question 12.
Number Sense
The sum of two numbers is 20. The product of the two numbers is 51. What are the two numbers?
Answer: 17 and 3  are the two numbers.

Explanation:
3 × 7 ones = 21 ones
regroup 21 ones as 2 tens and 1 ones
Then 3 × 1 ten = 3 tens
3 tens + 2 tens = 5 tens , then we have  51

Question 13.
Reasoning
Your friend multiplies 58 by6 and says that the product is 3,048. Is your friend’s answer reasonable? Explain.
Answer:  Correct answer is 348

Explanation:

6 × 8 ones = 48 ones
regroup 48 ones as 4 tens and 2 ones
Then 6 × 5 tens = 30 tens
30 tens + 4 tens = 34 tens , then we have  348
So, Correct answer is 348 .

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
How much greater is 4 × 26 than 3 × 26? Explain how you know without multiplying.
Answer:  4 × 26 is greater than 3 × 26 .
Explanation: The two factors of the given multiplication are 4 and 3 as 4 is greater than 3 , So , any same number multiplied by these two numbers individually will give the greatest number as a result for the number 4 .
So, 4 × 26 is greater than 3 × 26.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
A self-balancing scooter travels 12 miles per hour. An all-terrain vehicle can travel 6 times as fast as the scooter. A go-kart can travel 67 miles per hour. Which vehicle can travel the fastest?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 25
Answer: An all-terrain vehicle can travel faster that is 72 miles per hour

Explanation:
6 × 2 ones = 12 ones
regroup 12 ones as 1 ten and 2 ones
Then 6 × 1 tens = 6 tens
6 tens + 1 tens = 7 tens , then we have  72.
Given , A go-kart can travel 67 miles per hour.
An all-terrain vehicle can travel faster that is 72 miles per hour

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
It takes a spaceship 3 days to reach the moon from Earth. It takes a spaceship 14 times as many days to reach Mars from Earth. How long would it take the spaceship to travel from Earth to Mars and back?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.7 26
Answer: It takes 84 days for the spaceship to travel from Earth to Mars and back.

Explanation:
3 × 4 ones = 12 ones
regroup 12 ones as 1 ten and 2 ones
Then 3 × 1 ten = 3 tens
3 tens + 1 ten = 4 tens , then we have  42.
It takes 42 days to reach Mars from Earth.
And IT take 42 + 42  = 84 days
It takes 84 days to travel from Earth to Mars and back.

Review & Refresh

Question 17.
You spend 21 fewer minutes riding the bus to school than getting ready in the morning. You take 36 minutes to get ready. How long is the bus ride?
Answer: 15 minutes to ride the bus

Explanation:  You take 36 minutes to get ready.
You spend 21 fewer minutes riding the bus to school than getting ready in the morning
So, 36 – 21 = 15
It takes 15 minutes to ride the bus.

Lesson 3.8 Multiply Three-and Four-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Use any strategy to find each product.
7 × 39 = _____
7 × 439 = ______
Answer: 273 and 3,073

Explanation: by using distributive property
7 × 39 = 7 × ( 30 + 9)
= (7 × 30)+ (7 ×9)
=210  + 63
= 273.

Explanation:
7 × 439 = 7 × ( 400 + 30 + 9)
= ( 7 × 400) +(7 × 30)+ (7 ×9)
= 2800  + 210 + 63
= 3,073.

Structure
How are the equations the same? How are they different?
Answer: The equations are same when the numbers in the equation are in their standard position as ones, tens, hundreds etc. And at the same time the factors of the products must not change .
The equation is different when the two factor numbers are changing their position irrespective of their places.

Think and Grow: Use Regrouping to Multiply

Example
Find 795 × 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 1

Example
Find 6,084 × 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 2
Check: Because ____ is close to the estimate, _____, the answer is reasonable.
Answer: 6,000 × 2 = 12,000 and 6,084 × 2 = 12,168.

Explanation:
Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
2 × 4 ones = 8 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
2 × 8 tens = 16 tens
regroup as 1 ten and 6 ones

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
2 × 0 = 0

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
2 × 6 thousands = 12 thousands
Finally we have , 12,168.
So, 6,000 × 2 = 12,000 and 6,084 × 2 = 12,168.
Because 6,000  is close to the estimate, 12,000, the answer is reasonable.

Show and Grow

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 3
Answer: 615, the estimated product is 600

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
5 × 3 ones = 15 ones
Regroup as 1 ten and 5 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
5 × 2 tens = 10 tens
10 tens + 1 ten = 11 tens
regroup 11 tens  as 1 hundreds and 1 ten

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
5 × 1 hundreds  = 5 hundreds
5 hundreds + 1 hundred = 6 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 615 .

And the estimated product is 600
because 123 is close to 120, 120 × 5 = 600
So, 123 × 5 = 615 .

Question 2.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 4
Answer:  2,721 , the estimated product is 2,700

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 7 ones = 21 ones
Regroup 21 ones  as 2 tens and 1 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 0 tens = 0 tens
0 tens + 2 tens = 2 tens

 Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 9 hundreds  = 27 hundreds
Regroup 27 hundreds  as 2 thousands and 7 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 2,721 .

And the estimated product is 2,700
because 907 is close to 900, 900 × 3 = 2,700
So, 907 × 3 = 2,721 .

Question 3.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 5
Answer:  43,890, the estimated product is 43,800

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
6 × 5 ones = 30 ones
regroup 30 ones as 3 tens and 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
6 × 1 tens = 6 tens
6 tens + 3 tens = 9 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
6 × 3 hundreds  = 18 hundreds
regroup as 1 thousand and 8 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
6 × 7 thousands = 42 thousands
42 thousands + 1 thousand = 43 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 43,890

And the estimated product is 43,800
because 7,315 is close to 7300, 7300 × 6 = 43,800
So, 7,315 × 6  = 43,890 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 4.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 6
Answer:  840, the estimated product is also 840

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
7 × 0 ones = 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
7 × 2 tens = 14 tens
regroup 14 tens  as 1 hundred and 4 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
7 × 1 hundreds  = 7 hundreds
7 hundreds + 1 hundred = 8 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 840.

And the estimated product is 840
because 120 has a zero’s in ones place ,
so it is already close to the nearest 0’s so we don’t have to  estimate separately.

Question 5.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 7
Answer:  10,136, the estimated product is 10,000

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
4 × 4 ones = 16 ones
regroup as 1 ten and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
4 × 3 tens = 12 tens
12 tens + 1 ten = 13 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
4 × 5 hundreds  = 20 hundreds
20 hundreds +  1 hundred = 21 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 1 hundred

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
4 × 2 thousands = 8 thousands
8 thousands + 2 thousands = 10 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 10,136

And the estimated product is 10,000
because 2,534 is close to 2500, 2500 × 4 = 10,000
So, 2,534 × 4 = 10,136 .

Question 6.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 8
Answer: 15,234, the estimated product is 15,200

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
2 × 7 ones = 14 ones
regroup as 1 ten and 4 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
2 × 1 ten = 2 tens
2 tens + 1 ten = 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
2 × 6 hundreds  = 12 hundreds
regroup as 1 thousand  and 2 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
2 × 7 thousands = 14 thousands
14 thousands + 1 thousand = 15 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 15,234

And the estimated product is 15,200
because 7,617 is close to 7600, 7,600 × 2 = 15,200
So, 7,617 × 2 = 15,234 .

Question 7.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 9
Answer:  3,664, the estimated product is 3,680

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 8 ones = 64 ones
regroup as 6 tens and 4 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 5 tens = 40 tens
40 tens + 6 tens = 46 tens
regroup 46 tens  as 4 hundreds  and 6 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 4 hundreds  = 32 hundreds
32 hundreds + 4 hundreds = 36 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 3,664.

And the estimated product is 3,680
because 458 is close to 460, 460 × 8 = 36,80
So, 458 × 8 = 3,664 .

Question 8.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 10
Answer: 79,407, the estimated product is 79,200

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
9 × 3 ones = 27 ones
regroup 27 ones as 2 tens and 7 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
9 × 2 tens = 18 tens
18 tens + 2 tens = 20 tens
regroup as 2 hundreds and 0 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
9 × 8 hundreds  = 72 hundreds
72 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 74 hundreds
regroup as 7 thousands and 4 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
9 × 8 thousands = 72 thousands
72 thousands + 7 thousand = 79 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 79,407.

And the estimated product is 79,200
because 8,823 is close to 8,800, 8,800 × 9 = 79,200
So, 8,823 × 9  = 79,407 .

Question 9.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 11
Answer:  5,850, the estimated product is 5,820

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
6 × 5 ones = 30 ones
regroup as 3 tens and 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
6 × 7 tens = 42 tens
42 tens + 3 tens = 45 tens
regroup 45 tens  as 4 hundreds  and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
6 × 9 hundreds  = 54 hundreds
54 hundreds + 4 hundreds = 58 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 5,850.

And the estimated product is 5,820
because 975 is close to 970, 970 × 6 = 5,820
So, 975 × 6 = 5,850 .

Question 10.
Estimate: _____
1,762 × 3 = ______
Answer:  5,286, the estimated product is 5,100

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 2 ones = 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 6 tens = 18 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 8 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 7 hundreds  = 21 hundreds
21 hundreds + 1 hundred = 22 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 2 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
3 × 1 thousands = 3 thousands
3 thousands + 2 thousands = 5 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 5,286.

And the estimated product is 5,100
because 1,762 is close to 1,700, 1,700 × 3  = 5,100
So, 1,762 × 3  = 5,286 .

Question 11.
Estimate: ______
5 × 5,492 = ______
Answer:  27,460, the estimated product is 27,000

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
5 × 2 ones = 10 ones
regroup 10 ones as 1 ten and 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
5 × 9 tens = 45 tens
45 tens + 1 ten = 46 tens
regroup as 4 hundreds and 6 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
5 × 4 hundreds  = 20 hundreds
20 hundreds + 4 hundreds = 24 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 4 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
5 × 5 thousands = 25 thousands
25 thousands + 2 thousand = 27 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 27,460.

And the estimated product is 27,000
because 5,492 is close to 5,400, 5,400 × 5 = 27,000
So, 5,492  × 5  =  27,460.

Question 12.
Estimate: ______
347 × 7 = _____
Answer:   2,429, the estimated product is 2,380

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
7 × 7 ones = 49 ones
regroup as 4 tens and 9 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
7 × 4 tens = 28 tens
28 tens + 4 tens = 32 tens
regroup 32 tens  as 3 hundreds  and 2 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
7 × 3 hundreds  = 21 hundreds
21 hundreds + 3 hundreds = 24 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 2,429.

And the estimated product is 2,380
because 347 is close to 340, 340 × 7 = 2,380
So, 347 × 7 = 2,429 .

Compare
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 12
Answer: 6 × 2,843 is greater than 8 × 1,645
17,058  is greater than 13,160

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
6 × 3 ones = 18 ones
regroup 18 ones as 1 ten and 8 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
6 × 4 tens = 24 tens
24 tens + 1 ten = 25 tens
regroup as 2 hundreds and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
6 × 8 hundreds  = 48 hundreds
48 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 50 hundreds
regroup as 5 thousands and 0 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
6 × 2 thousands = 12 thousands
12 thousands + 5 thousands = 17 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 17,058
So, 2,843 × 6 = 17,058

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 5 ones = 40 ones
regroup 40 ones as 4 tens and 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 4 tens = 32 tens
32 tens + 4 tens = 36 tens
regroup as 3 hundreds and 6 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 6 hundreds  = 48 hundreds
48 hundreds + 3 hundreds = 51 hundreds
regroup as 5 thousands and 1 hundred

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
8 × 1 thousand = 8 thousands
8 thousands + 5 thousands = 13 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 13,160
So, 1,645 × 8 = 13,160

Finally , 17,058  is greater than 13,160.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 13
Answer: 6,582 × 3 is greater than 2,394 × 8
19,746  is greater than 19,152

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 2 ones = 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 8 tens = 24 tens
regroup as 2 hundreds and 4 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 5 hundreds  = 15 hundreds
15 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 17 hundreds
regroup as 1 thousand and 7 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
3 × 6 thousands = 18 thousands
18 thousands + 1 thousand = 19 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 19,746.
So, 6,582 × 3 = 19,746.

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 4 ones = 32 ones
regroup 32 ones as 3 tens and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 9 tens = 72 tens
72 tens + 3 tens = 75 tens
regroup as 7 hundreds and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 3 hundreds  = 24 hundreds
24 hundreds + 7 hundreds = 31 hundreds
regroup as 3 thousands and 1 hundred

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
8 × 2 thousands = 16 thousands
16 thousands + 3 thousands = 19 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 19,152
So, 2,394 × 8 =  19,152

Finally , 19,746  is greater than 19,152.

Question 15.
A roller coaster is twice as tall as a Ferris wheel that is 228 feet tall. How tall is the roller coaster?
Answer:  The roller coaster is 456 feet tall.

Explanation:
Given, A roller coaster is twice as tall as a Ferris wheel that is 228 feet tall.so , 228 × 2

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
2 × 8 ones = 16 ones
Regroup as 1 ten and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
2 × 2 tens = 4 tens
4 tens + 1 ten = 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
2 × 2 hundreds  = 4 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 456 .
The roller coaster is 456 feet tall.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
How can you estimate the number of digits in the product of 7 and 8,348?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 14
Answer:  58,436 , There are 7 digits i the product of the 7 and 8,348

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
7 × 8 ones = 56  ones
regroup 56 ones as 5 tens and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
7 × 4 tens = 28 tens
28 tens +  5 tens = 33 tens
regroup as 3 hundreds and 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
7 × 3 hundreds  = 21 hundreds
21 hundreds + 3 hundreds = 24 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 4 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
7 × 8 thousand = 56 thousands
56 thousands + 2 thousands = 58 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 58,436.
So, 8,348 × 7 = 58,436

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The lengths of time that a penguin and an elephant seal can hold their breaths are shown. A sea turtle can hold its breath 7 times as long as a penguin. Which animal can hold its breath the longest?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 15
Multiply to find how long a sea turtle can hold its breath.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 16
Answer : The sea turtle can hold its breath up to 84,00 seconds

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
0

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
0

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
7 × 2 hundreds  = 14 hundreds
regroup as 1 thousand and 4 hundreds

Step 4:  Multiply thousands and regroup
7 × 1 thousands = 7 thousands
7 thousands + 1 thousand  =  8 thousands

By holding all places together we get 8,400 .

Compare the lengths of time that each animal can hold its breath.
Answer:     Penguin can hold its breath by 1,200 seconds.
Elephant seal can hold its breath by 7,200 seconds.
Sea turtle can hold it breath by 8,400 seconds.

The _______ can hold its breath the longest.
Answer: Sea turtle can hold its breath the longest

Show and Grow

Question 17.
You have 796 baseball cards and 284 hockey cards. You have 3 times as many football cards as hockey cards. Which type of card do you have the greatest number of?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 17
Answer: 852 football cards are the greatest number of cards.

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 4 ones = 12 ones
Regroup as 1 ten and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 8 tens = 24 tens
24 tens + 1 ten = 25 tens
regroup 25 tens  as 2 hundreds and 5 ten

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 2 hundreds  = 6 hundreds
6 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 8 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 852.

So,852 football cards are the greatest number of cards.

Question 18.
A principal has $2,000 to spend on updating some of your school’s tablets. She buys 4 tablets that each cost $299. How much money does the principal have left?
Answer: $299 × 4 = $1,196 , the principal have left $804.

Explanation:
She buys 4 tablets that each cost $299

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
4 × 9 ones = 36 ones
Regroup as 3 tens and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
4 × 9 tens = 36 tens
36 tens + 3 tens = 39 tens
regroup 39 tens  as 3 hundreds and 9 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
4 × 2 hundreds  = 8 hundreds
8 hundreds + 3 hundreds = 11 hundreds
regroup as 1 thousand and 1 hundred.

By holding all places together we get 1,196
So, $299 × 4 = $1,196 ,
the principal have left $804.

Question 19.
A train ticket from New York City to Miami costs $152. A train ticket from New York City to Orlando costs $144. A group of 8 friends is in New York City. How much money can the group save by going to Orlando instead of going to Miami?
Answer: They can save $64.

Explanation:
A group of 8 friends is in New York City,
A train ticket from New York City to Miami costs $152.

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 2 ones = 16 ones
Regroup as 1 ten and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 5 tens = 40 tens
40 tens + 1 ten = 41 tens
regroup 41 tens  as 4 hundreds and 1 ten

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 1 hundreds  = 8 hundreds
8 hundreds + 4 hundred = 12 hundreds
regroup as 1 thousand and 2 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 1,216
So, $152 × 8 = $1,216.


A train ticket from New York City to Orlando costs $144,

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 4 ones = 32 ones
Regroup as 3 tens and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 4 tens = 32 tens
32 tens + 3 tens = 35 tens
regroup 35 tens  as 3 hundreds and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 1 hundreds  = 8 hundreds
8 hundreds + 3 hundred = 11 hundreds
regroup as 1 thousand and 1 hundred

By holding all places together we get 1,152
So, $144 × 8 = $1,152.

Finally , $1,216  – $1,152 = $ 64
They can save $64.

Multiply Three-and Four-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 3.8

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 18
Answer:  2,736, The estimated product is  2,700

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
9 × 4 ones = 36 ones
Regroup 36 ones  as 3 tens and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
9 × 0 tens = 0 tens
0 tens + 3 tens = 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
9 × 3 hundreds  = 27 hundreds
Regroup 27 hundreds  as 2 thousands and 7 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 2,736 .

And the estimated product is 2,700
because 304 is close to 300, 300 × 9 = 2,700
So, 304 × 9 = 2,736 .

Question 2.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 19
Answer:  4,936, The estimated product is 4,880

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 7 ones = 56 ones
Regroup 56 ones  as 5 tens and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 1 ten = 8 tens
8 tens + 5 tens = 10 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 0 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 6 hundreds  = 48 hundreds
48 hundreds + 1 hundred = 49 hundreds
Regroup 49 hundreds  as 4 thousands and 9 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 4,936 .

And the estimated product is 4,880
because 617 is close to 610, 610 × 8 = 4,880
So, 617 × 8 = 4,936 .

Question 3.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 20
Answer: 23,756, The estimated product is  23,760

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
4 × 9 ones = 36 ones
regroup 36 ones as 3 tens and 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
4 × 3 tens = 12 tens
12 tens + 3 tens = 15 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
4 × 9 hundreds  = 36 hundreds
36 hundreds + 1 hundred = 37 hundreds
regroup as 3 thousands and 7 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
4 × 5 thousands = 20 thousands
20 thousands + 3 thousands = 23 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 23,756.

And the estimated product is 23,760
because 5,939 is close to 5,940, 5,940 × 4 = 23,760
So, 5,939 × 4  = 23,756 .

Question 4.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 21
Answer:  8,262, The estimated product is  8,250.

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 4 ones = 12 ones
regroup 12 ones as 1 ten and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 5 tens = 15 tens
15 tens + 1 ten = 16 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 6 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 7 hundreds  = 21 hundreds
21 hundreds + 1 hundred = 22 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 2 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
3 × 2 thousands = 6 thousands
6 thousands + 2 thousands = 8 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 8,262

And the estimated product is 8,250
because 2,754 is close to 2,750, 2,750 × 3 = 8,250
So, 2,754 × 3  = 8,262 .

Question 5.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 22
Answer: 50,790, The estimated product is  50,760

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
6 × 5 ones = 30 ones
regroup 30 ones as 3 tens and 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
6 × 6 tens = 36 tens
36 tens + 3 tens = 39 tens
regroup as 3 hundreds and 9 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
6 × 4 hundreds  = 24 hundreds
24 hundreds + 3 hundreds = 27 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 7 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
6 × 8 thousands = 48 thousands
48 thousands + 2 thousands = 50 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 50,790.

And the estimated product is 50,760,
because 8,465 is close to 8,460, 8,460 × 6 = 50,760
So, 8,465 × 6  = 50,790.

Question 6.
Estimate: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 23
Answer: 5,754 ,The estimated product is  5,740

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
7 × 2 ones = 14 ones
Regroup 14 ones  as 1 tens and 4 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
7 × 2 tens = 14 tens
14 tens + 1 tens = 15 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
7 × 8 hundreds  = 56 hundreds
56 hundreds + 1 hundred = 57 hundreds
Regroup 57 hundreds  as 5 thousands and 7 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 5,754 .

And the estimated product is 5,740
because 822 is close to 820, 820 × 7 = 5,740
So, 822 × 7 = 5,754 .

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 7.
Estimate: _______
629 × 5 = ______
Answer: 3,145 , The estimated product is 3,150

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
5 × 9 ones = 45 ones
Regroup 45 ones  as 4 tens and 5 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
5 × 2 tens = 10 tens
10 tens + 4 tens = 14 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 4 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
5 × 6 hundreds  = 30 hundreds
30 hundreds + 1 hundred = 31 hundreds
Regroup 31 hundreds  as 3 thousands and 1 hundred

By holding all places together we get 3,145.

And the estimated product is 3,150.
because 629 is close to 630, 630 × 5 = 3,150.
So, 629 × 5 = 3,145 .

Question 8.
Estimate: _______
7 × 1,836 = ______
Answer:  12,852 , The estimated product is  12,880

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
7 × 6 ones = 42 ones
regroup 42 ones as 4 tens and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
7 × 3 tens = 21 tens
21 tens + 4 tens = 25 tens
regroup as 2 hundreds and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
7 × 8 hundreds  = 56 hundreds
56 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 58 hundreds
regroup as 5 thousands and 8 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
7 × 1 thousands = 7 thousands
7 thousands + 5 thousands = 12 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 12,852

And the estimated product is 12,880
because 1,836 is close to 1,840, 1,840 × 7 = 12,880
So, 1,836 × 7  = 12,852 .

Question 9.
Estimate: ______
453 × 3 = ______
Answer: 1,359 , The estimated product is  1,350

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 ×  ones = 9 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 5 tens = 15 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 4 hundreds  = 12 hundreds
12 hundreds + 1 hundred = 13 hundreds
Regroup 13 hundreds  as 1 thousand and 3 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 1,359 .

And the estimated product is 1,350
because 453 is close to 450, 450 × 3 = 1,350.
So, 453 × 3 = 1,359 .

Compare
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 24
Answer: 20,346 is greater than 6,782.

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 2 ones = 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 8 tens = 24 tens
regroup as 2 hundreds and 4 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 7 hundreds  = 21 hundreds
21 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 23 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 3 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
3 × 6 thousands = 18 thousands
18 thousands + 2 thousands = 20 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 20,346

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
2 × 1 ones = 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
2 × 9 tens = 18 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 8 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
2 × 3 hundreds  = 6 hundreds
6 hundreds + 1 hundred = 7 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
2 × 3 thousands = 6 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 6,782.
So, 20,346 is greater than 6,782.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 25
Answer: 12,528 is greater than 9,972.

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
9 × 2 ones = 18 ones
regroup 18 ones as 1 tens and 8 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
9 × 9 tens = 81 tens
81 tens + 1 tens = 82 tens
regroup as 8 hundreds and 2 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
9 × 3 hundreds  = 27 hundreds
27 hundreds + 8 hundreds = 35 hundreds
regroup as 3 thousands and 5 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
9 × 1 thousands = 9 thousands
9 thousands + 3 thousands = 12 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 12,528.

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
4 × 3 ones = 12 ones
regroup 12 ones as 1 tens and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
4 × 9 tens = 36 tens
36 tens + 1 tens = 37 tens
regroup as 3 hundreds and 7 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
4 × 4 hundreds  = 16 hundreds
16 hundreds + 3 hundreds = 19 thousands
regroup as 1 thousand and 9 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
4 × 2 thousands = 8 thousands
8 thousands + 1 thousand = 9 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 9,972.
So, 12,528 is greater than 9,972.

Question 12.
A backpacker hikes the Buckeye Trail 5 times. The trail is 1,444 miles long. How many miles has he hiked on the Buckeye Trail in all?
Answer: 7,220 miles has hiked on the Buckeye Trail.

Explanation:
The trail is 1,444 miles long,
A backpacker hikes the Buckeye Trail 5 times. Then 1,444 × 5 ,

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
5 × 4 ones = 20 ones
regroup 20 ones as 2 tens and 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
5 × 4 tens = 20 tens
20 tens + 2 tens = 22 tens
regroup as 2 hundreds and 2 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
5 × 4 hundreds  = 20 hundreds
20 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 22 hundreds
regroup as 2 thousands and 2 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
5 × 1 thousands = 5 thousands
5 thousands + 2 thousands  = 7 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 7,220.

Question 13.
Number Sense
What number is 980 more than the product of 6,029 and 8?
Answer: 49,212, The product of 6,029 and 8 is 48,232

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 9 ones = 72 ones
regroup 72 ones as 7 tens and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 2 tens = 16 tens
16 tens + 7 tens = 23 tens
regroup as 2 hundreds and 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 0 hundreds  = 0 hundreds
0 hundreds + 2 hundreds = 2 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
8 × 6 thousands = 48 thousands

By holding all the places together we get  48,232.

Given, The required number is 980 more than  48,232,
Then 48,232 + 980 = 49,212.
Finally the wanted number is 49,212.

Question 14.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says that the product of a three-digit number and a one-digit number is always a three-digit number. Is Newton correct? Explain.
Answer: NO

Explanation: The Assumption that the product of a three-digit number and a one-digit number is always a three-digit number is wrong because,
the the factor numbers of a product might vary in places .
The highest one digit number is multiplied by the highest 3 digit number will not be a 3 digit number as a output product .
So, Newton is wrong about his statement.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
The numbers of songs Newton and Descartes’s download are shown. You download 2 times as many songs as Descartes. Who downloads the most songs?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 26
Answer: I downloaded 334 songs and Newton has the most songs that is 351 songs .

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
2 × 7 ones = 14 ones
Regroup as 1 ten and 4 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
2 × 6 tens = 12 tens
12 tens + 1 ten = 13 tens
regroup 11 tens  as 1 hundreds and 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
2 × 1 hundreds  = 2 hundreds
2 hundreds + 1 hundred = 3 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 334 .
The songs that i downloaded are 334
Newton has 351 songs and Descartes has 167 songs and compared to all of us ,
Newton has more songs that is 315 songs.

Review & Refresh

Find the sum or difference. Use the inverse operation to check.
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 27
Answer: 685.

Explanation:
By subtracting 847 – 162 , we get 685
To check inverse operation :
Add 685 + 162  = 847.

So 847 – 162 = 685 .
Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 28
Answer:  901

Explanation:
By adding 612 + 289 , we get 901
To check inverse operation:
Subtract 901 – 289 ,we get  612

So, 612 + 289 = 901 .

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.8 29
Answer:  149

Explanation:

By subtracting 500 – 351 , we get 149
To check inverse operation :
Add 315 + 149  = 500 .

So 500 – 351 = 149 .

Lesson 3.9 Use Properties to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Use any strategy to find each product. Explain the strategy you used to find each product.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 1
Answer:  700 , 790, 45,009 , 44,991.

Explanation:  7 × 25 × 4
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 7 × ( 25 × 4)
=7 × 100
= 700
So, 7 × 25 × 4 = 700 .

5 × 79 × 2
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 79 × ( 5 × 2)
=79 × 10
= 790
So, 5 × 79 × 2 = 790 .

9 × 5,001
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 9 × (5,000 + 1)
= ( 9 × 5,000) + ( 9 × 1)
= 45,000 + 9
= 45,009
So,  9 × 5,001 = 45,009.

9 × 4,999
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 9 × (5,000 – 1)
= ( 9 × 5,000) – ( 9 × 1)
= 45,000 – 9
= 44,991
So,  9 × 4,999 = 44,991.

Construct Arguments
Compare your strategies with your partner’s. How are they alike? How are they different?
Answer:  All the strategies are correct that are used by my friend and me.
Using any method in multiplication is frequently used to find the product as fast as possible
some methods are long and some of them are really fast and easy .
Every method is correct unless you did not do any mistakes, so , all are alike.

Think and Grow: Use Properties to Multiply

You can use properties to multiply.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 2
Answer :  2,000 , 3,490 , 900

Explanation:
8 × 250
By using associative property of multiplication
=( 4 × 2 ) × 250
= 4 × ( 2 × 250)
= 4 × 500
= 2,000.
So, 8 × 250 = 2,000.

5 × 698
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 5 × ( 700 – 2)
= (5 × 700) – ( 5 × 2)
= 3,500 – 10
= 3,490
So,  5 × 698 = 3,490.

4 × 9 × 25
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 9 × ( 4 × 25)
= 9 × 100
= 900.
So, 4 × 9 × 25 = 900.

Show and Grow

Use properties to find the product. Explain your reasoning.
Question 1.
6 × 150
Answer: 900

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 6 × ( 100 + 50)
= (6 × 100) + ( 6 × 50)
= 600 + 300
= 900.
So, 6 × 150 = 900.

Question 2.
3 × 494
Answer: 1,482

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 3 × ( 500 – 6)
= (3 × 500) – ( 3 × 6)
= 1500 – 18
= 1,482.
So, 3 × 494 = 1,482.

Question 3.
25 × 7 × 4
Answer:  700

Explanation:
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 7 × ( 25 × 4 )
= 7 × 100
= 700.
So, 25 × 7 × 4 = 700.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use properties to find the product. Explain your reasoning.
Question 4.
7 × 798
Answer: 5,586

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 7 × ( 800 – 2)
= (7 × 800) – ( 7 × 2)
= 5,600 – 14
= 5,586
So,  7 × 798 = 5,586.

Question 5.
350 × 6
Answer:  2,100

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 6 × ( 300 + 50)
= (6 × 300) + ( 6 × 50)
= 1,800 + 300
= 2,100.
So, 6 × 350 = 2,100.

Question 6.
106 × 5
Answer: 530

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 5 × ( 100 + 6)
= (5 × 100) + ( 5 × 6)
= 500 + 30
= 530.
So, 5 × 106 = 530.

Question 7.
4 × 625
Answer:  2,500

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 4 × ( 600 + 25)
= (4 × 600) + ( 4 × 25)
= 2400 + 100
= 2,500.
So, 4 × 625 = 2,500.

Question 8.
395 × 8
Answer: 3,160.

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 8 × ( 400 – 5)
= (8 × 400) – ( 8 × 5)
= 3,200 – 40
= 3,160.
So, 8 × 395 = 3,160.

Question 9.
2 × 7 × 15
Answer: 210

Explanation:
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 7 × ( 15 × 2 )
= 7 × 30
= 210.
So, 2 × 7 × 15 = 210.

Question 10.
430 × 2
Answer:  860

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 2 × ( 400 + 30)
= (2 × 400) + ( 2 × 30)
= 800 + 60
= 860.
So, 2 × 430 = 860.

Question 11.
8 × 150
Answer: 1,200

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 8 × ( 100 + 50)
= (8 × 100) + ( 8 × 50)
= 800 + 400
= 1,200.
So, 8 × 150 = 1,200.

Question 12.
3 × 1,997
Answer: 5,991

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 3 × ( 2000 – 3)
= (3 × 2000) – ( 3 × 3)
= 6000 – 9
= 5,991.
So, 3 × 1,997 = 5,991.

Question 13.
25 × 9 × 2
Answer: 450

Explanation:
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 9 × ( 25 × 2 )
= 9 × 50
= 450.
So, 25 × 9 × 2 = 450.

Question 14.
404 × 6
Answer:  2,424

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 6 × ( 400 + 4)
= (6 × 400) + ( 6 × 4)
= 2400 + 24
= 2,424.
So, 6 × 404 = 2,424.

Question 15.
4 × 2,004
Answer:  8,016

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 4 × ( 2000 + 4)
= (4 × 2000) + ( 4 × 4)
= 8000 + 16
= 8,016.
So, 4 × 2,004 = 8,016.

Question 16.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which expression does not belong with the other three?
(3 × 30) + (3 × 7), (3 × 40) – (3 × 3)
3 × (30 + 7), 3 × 3 × 7
Answer: 3 × 3 × 7

Explanation:
(3 × 30) + (3 × 7)
(3 × 40) – (3 × 3)
3 × (30 + 7) ,
These 3 expressions are related to the distributive property of multiplication.
So, 3 × 3 × 7 this expression does not belong to the distributive property of multiplication.

Question 17.
Number Sense
Use properties to find each product
9 × 80 = 720, so 18 × 40 = _____.
5 × 70 = 350, so 5 × 72 = _____.
Answer: 720, 360.

Explanation:
By using associative property of multiplication
=( 6 × 3 ) × 40
= 6 × ( 3 × 40)
= 6 × 120
= 720.
So, 18 × 40 = 720.

5 × 72
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 5 × ( 70 + 2)
= (5 × 70) + ( 5 × 2)
= 350 + 10
= 360.
So, 5 × 72 = 360.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The fastest recorded speed of a dragster car in the United States was 31 miles per hour less than 3 times the top speed of the roller coaster. What was the speed of the car?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 3
Multiply to find 3 times the top speed of the roller coaster.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 4
Answer: 360 miles per hour.

Explanation:
3 × 120
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 3 × ( 100 + 20)
= (3 × 100) + ( 3 × 20)
= 300 + 60
= 360.
So, 3 × 120 = 360.

Subtract to find 31 miles per hour less
_____ – 31 = _______ miles per hour
Answer:  329 miles per hour

Explanation:
360 – 31 = 329 .

So, the speed of the car was ______ miles per hour.
Answer: the speed of the car was 329 miles per hour.

Show and Grow

Question 18.
In 2016, a theme park used 300 drones for a holiday show. In 2017, China used 200 fewer than 4 times as many drones for a lantern festival. How many drones did China use?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 5
Answer: China used  1,000 drones.

Explanation:
A theme park used 300 drones for a holiday show
China used 4 times as many drones for a lantern festival.
So, 4 × 300 = 1,200
Given, China used 200 fewer than 4 times as many drones for a lantern festival.
So 1,200 – 200 = 1,000.

China used 1,000 drones.

Question 19.
A subway train has 8 cars. Each car can hold 198 passengers. How many passengers can two subway trains hold?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 6
Answer: 3,168 passengers.

Explanation:
A subway train has 8 cars
Each car can hold 198 passengers.
So, 8 × 198
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 8 × ( 200 – 2)
= (8 × 200) – ( 8 × 2)
= 1600 – 16
= 1,584.
So, 8 × 198 = 1,584. 1,584 passengers for a subway train
For 2 subway trains , 1,584 + 1,584 = 3,168.
Two subway trains can hold 3,168 passengers.

Question 20.
You plant cucumbers, green beans, squash, and corn in a community garden. You plant 3 rows of each vegetable with 24 seeds in each row. How many seeds do you plant?
Answer: 288 seeds

Explanation:
plant 3 rows of each vegetable with 24 seeds in each row.
So, 3 × 24
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 3 × ( 20 + 4)
= (3 × 20) + ( 3 × 4)
= 60 + 12
= 72.
So, 3 × 24 = 72.

You plant cucumbers, green beans, squash, and corn in a community garden.
Total 4 various vegetables are planted
So, 4 × 72
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 4 × ( 70 + 2)
= (4 × 70) + ( 4 × 2)
= 280 + 8
= 288.
So, 4 × 72 = 288.

We have to plant 288 seeds.

Use Properties to Multiply Homework & Practice 3.9

Use properties to find the product. Explain your reasoning.
Question 1.
3 × 497
Answer: 1,491

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 3 × ( 500 – 3)
= (3 × 500) – ( 3 × 3)
= 1500 – 9
= 1,491.
So, 3 × 497 = 1,491.

Question 2.
36 × 9
Answer: 324

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 9 × ( 30 + 6)
= (9 × 30) + ( 9 × 6)
= 270 + 54
= 324.
So, 9 × 36 = 324.

Question 3.
8 × 350
Answer: 2,800

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 8 × ( 300 + 50)
= (8 × 300) + ( 8 × 50)
= 2400 + 400
= 2,800.
So, 8 × 350 = 2,800.

Question 4.
25 × 8 × 4
Answer: 800

Explanation:
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 8 × ( 25 × 4 )
= 8 × 100
= 800.
So, 25 × 8 × 4 = 800.

Question 5.
999 × 5
Answer:  4,995

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 5 × ( 1000 – 1)
= (5 × 1000) – ( 5 × 1)
= 5,000 –  5
= 4,995
So,  5 × 999 = 4,995.

Question 6.
9 × 402
Answer: 3,618

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 9 × ( 400 + 2)
= (9 × 400) + ( 9 × 2)
= 3600 + 18
= 3,618.
So, 9 × 402 = 3,618.

Question 7.
509 × 4
Answer: 2,036

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 4 × ( 500 + 9)
= (4 × 500) + ( 4 × 9)
= 2000 + 36
= 2,036 .
So, 4 × 509 = 2,036.

Question 8.
2 × 9 × 15
Answer: 270

Explanation:
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 9 × ( 15 × 2 )
= 9 × 30
= 270.
So, 2 × 9 × 15 = 270.

Question 9.
3,998 × 7
Answer: 27,986

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 7 × ( 4000 – 2)
= (7 × 4000) – ( 7 × 2)
= 28,000 – 14
= 27,986.
So, 3,998 × 7 = 27,986.

Question 10.
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 7
Answer: Descartes is not correct, 895 × 4 = 3,580.

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 4 × ( 900 – 5)
= (4 × 900) – ( 4 × 5)
= 3600 – 20
= 3,620.
So, 895 × 4 = 3,580.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Complete the square so that the product of each row and each column is 2,400.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 8
Answer:

Explanation: 
By using column 1 , we get 4 × 200 = 800,
To obtain the 2,400 the missing number should be 3 , Then 800 × 3  = 2,400.
By using column 3 , we get 2 × 2 = 4,
To obtain the 2,400 the missing number should be 600 , Then 600 × 4 = 2,400.
By using row 2 , we get 200 × 2 = 400,
To obtain the 2,400 the missing number should be 6 , Then 400 × 6 = 2,400.
By using row 1 , we get 4 × 600 = 2,400,
To obtain the 2,400 the missing number should be 1 , Then 2,400 × 1 = 2,400.
By using row 3 , we get 3 × 2 = 6,
To obtain the 2,400 the missing number should be 400 , Then 6 × 400 = 2,400.

The complete Square is .

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
The height of the Great Pyramid of Giza is 275 feet shorter than 2 times the height of the Luxor Hotel in Las Vegas. How tall is the Great Pyramid of Giza?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 9
Answer: The height of the Great Pyramid of Giza is 455 feet

Explanation:
The height of the Great Pyramid of Giza is 2 times the height of the Luxor Hotel in Las Vegas
The height of the Luxor Hotel in Las Vegas is 365 feet,
So, 2 × 365
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 2 × ( 300 + 60 + 5 )
= (2 × 300) + ( 2 × 60) + ( 2 × 5 )
= 600 + 120 + 10
= 730.
So, 2 × 365 = 730.

Given, The height of the Great Pyramid of Giza is 275 feet shorter than 2 times the height of the Luxor Hotel in Las Vegas. So, 730 -275 = 455

The height of the Great Pyramid of Giza is 455 feet.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Some firefighters are testing their equipment. Water from their firetruck hose hits the wall 12 feet higher than 7 times where the spray from a fire extinguisher hits the wall. How many feet high does the wall water from the hose hit the wall?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.9 10
Answer: 180 feet.

Explanation:
Water from their firetruck hose hits the wall 7 times where the spray from a fire extinguisher hits the wall.
The spray from a fire extinguisher hits the wall at 24 feet,
So, 7 × 24
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 7 × ( 20 + 4)
= (7 × 20) + ( 7 × 4)
= 140 + 28
= 168.
So, 7 × 24 = 168.
Water from their firetruck hose hits the wall 12 feet higher than 7 times where the spray from a fire extinguisher hits the wall. Then 168 + 12 = 180 feet

The wall water from the hose hit the wall is 180 feet.

Review & Refresh

Question 14.
You want to learn 95 new vocabulary words. You learn 5 words the first week and an equal number of words each week for the next 9 weeks. How many words do you learn in each of the 9 weeks?
Answer: 45 words.

Explanation:
You learn 5 words the first week
An equal number of words each week for the next 9 weeks
So, 5 × 9 = 45

We learn 45 words for 9 weeks.

Lesson 3.10 Problem Solving: Multiplication

Explore and Grow

Make a plan to solve the problem.
A group of sea otters that swim together is called a raft. There are 37 otters in a raft. Each otter eats about 16 pounds of food each day. About how many pounds of food does the raft eat in 1 week?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 1
Answer: A raft eats 4,144 pounds in 1 week.

Explanation:
Each otter eats about 16 pounds of food each day.
There are 37 otters in a raft,
The food eaten by a raft in a day is 37 × 16 = 592 pounds.

The food eaten by a raft in 7 days ( 1 week ) is 592 × 7
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 7 × ( 500 + 90 + 2 )
= (7 × 500) + ( 7 × 90) + ( 7 × 2 )
= 3500 + 630 + 14
= 4,144.
So, 592 × 7 = 4,144.

A raft eats 4,144 pounds in 1 week.

Critique Reasoning
Compare your plan to your partner’s. How are your plans alike? How are they different?
Answer: All the strategies are correct that are used by my friend and me.
Using any method in multiplication is frequently used to find the product as fast as possible
some methods are long and some of them are really fast and easy .
Every method is correct unless you did not do any mistakes, so , all are alike. in obtaining the correct answer.

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Multiplication

Example
A coach buys 6 cases of sports drinks and spends $60. Each case has 28 bottles. A team drinks 85 bottles at a tournament. How many bottles are left?
Understand the Problem
What do you know?
• The coach buys 6 cases.
• The coach spends $60.
• Each case has 28 bottles.
• The team drinks 85 bottles.

What do you need to find?
• You need to find how many bottles are left.

Make a Plan

How will you solve?
• Multiply 28 by6 to find the total number of bottles in 6 cases.
• Then subtract 85 bottles from the product to find how many bottles are left.
• The amount of money the coach spends is unnecessary information.

Solve
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 2
Answer: 28 × 6 = 168 , k = 168
The total bottles in 6 cases are 168
n = k – 85
= 168 – 85
= 83 .
The total bottles left are 83 .
There are ______ bottles left.
Answer: There are 83 bottles left.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Explain how you can check whether your answer above is reasonable.
Answer: Calculate the given information to get the result.

Explanation:
The coach buys 6 cases.
Each case has 28 bottles.
The team drinks 85 bottles
We need to find how many bottles are left.

So, by calculating these we obtain the result.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 3
Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Question 2.
A zookeeper has 4 boxes. There are137 grams of leaves in each box. A koala eats 483 grams of leaves in 1 day. The zookeeper wants to know how many grams of leaves are left.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 4
Answer: 65 grams of leaves are left.

By understanding the problem
We know that,
A zookeeper has 4 boxes.
There are137 grams of leaves in each box.
A koala eats 483 grams of leaves in 1 day

We need to find,
how many grams of leaves are left.

Explanation: A zookeeper has 4 boxes.
There are137 grams of leaves in each box.
So, 137 × 4
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 4 × ( 100 + 30 + 7 )
= (4 × 100) + ( 4 × 30) + ( 4 × 7 )
= 400 + 120 + 28
= 548.
So, 137 × 4 = 548.

A koala eats 483 grams of leaves in 1 day
The zookeeper wants to know how many grams of leaves are left.
Then 548 – 483 = 65
There are 65 leaves left.

Question 3.
A beekeeper has 2 hives. Hive A produces 14 pounds of honey. Hive B produces 4 times as much honey as Hive A. The beekeeper wants to know how many pounds of honey are produced in all.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 5
Answer: 70 pounds

By understanding the problem
We know that,
A beekeeper has 2 hives.
Hive A produces 14 pounds of honey.
Hive B produces 4 times as much honey as Hive A.

We should know ,
The beekeeper wants to know how many pounds of honey are produced in all.

Explanation: Hive A produces 14 pounds of honey.
Hive B produces 4 times as much honey as Hive A.
So, 4 × 14
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 4 × ( 10 + 4)
= (4 × 10) + ( 4 × 4)
= 40 + 16
= 56.
So, 4 × 14 = 56.
Hive B produces 56 pounds of honey

The honey produced by the 2 hives is 14  + 56 = 70  pounds.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 4.
A runner completes 12 races each year. He improves his time by 10 seconds each year. Each race is 5 kilometers long. The runner wants to know how many kilometers he runs in races in 3 years.
Answer: 180 kilometers.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
A runner completes 12 races each year.
Each race is 5 kilometers long.

We should know that,
how many kilometers he runs in races in 3 years.

Then, he completes 12 races each year. The races in 3 years. are
12  × 3 = 36 , 36 races in 3 years .

Each race is 5 kilometers long. Then for 36 races , we get
36 × 5 = 180 km.

So, The runner completes 180 km in 3 years.

Question 5.
A volunteer bikes 4 miles in all to travel from her home to a shelter and back. At the shelter, she walks a dog 1 mile. The volunteer wants to know how many miles she travels doing these tasks for 28 days.
Answer: 140 miles

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
A volunteer bikes 4 miles in all to travel from her home to a shelter and back.
At the shelter, she walks a dog 1 mile.

We should know that,
how many miles she travels doing these tasks for 28 days.

A volunteer bikes 4 miles in all to travel from her home to a shelter and back. For 28 days, we get
4 × 28 = 112, she bikes for 112 miles.
At the shelter, she walks a dog 1 mile. for 28 days, we get
1 × 28 = 28, she walks dog for 28 miles .

she travels doing these tasks for 28 days by covering  a total of 140 miles.

Question 6.
Cats have 32 muscles in each ear. Humans have 12 ear muscles in all. How many more muscles do cats have in both ears than humans have in both ears?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 6
Answer: 52 more muscles .

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
Cats have 32 muscles in each ear.
Humans have 12 ear muscles in all.

We should know that,
How many more muscles do cats have in both ears than humans have in both ears

Cats have 32 muscles in each ear, For 2 ears we get 32 +32 = 64 muscles
Humans have 12 ear muscles in all. Then 64 – 12 = 52 .

Cats have 52 more muscles than humans have in both the ears.

Question 7.
A school has 5 hallways. Each hallway has 124 lockers. 310 lockers are red. 586 lockers are in use. How many lockers not are in use?
Answer: 34 lockers are not in use.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
A school has 5 hallways.
Each hallway has 124 lockers
586 lockers are in use.

We should know that,
How many lockers not are in use.

Each hallway has 124 lockers , then for 5 hallways , we get 124 × 5 = 620.
620 lockers in the whole school
586 lockers are in use, to get the number of lockers that are not in use are 620 – 586 = 34.

34 lockers are not in use.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A group of scientists has $7,500 to spend on microscopes and balances. They buy 3 microscopes that each cost $1,642 and 6 balances that each cost $236. How much money do the scientists have left to spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 7
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 8
Answer : They have $1,160 left.

Explanation:
Step 1 : Scientists buy 3 microscopes and each costs $1,642 , then we have $1,642 × 3  = m,
we get m = $4,926,

Step 2 :
scientists buy 6 balances that each cost $236, then we have $236 × 6 = r, we get  r = $1,416.

Step 3 :
The total money spent is m + r = k ,we have , $4,926 + $1,416 = $ 6,340, we get k = $ 6,340.

Step 4 :
The money left J = $7,500 – $6,340, we get J = $ 1,160.

Totally scientists have $1,160 left.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
City A has 3,296 fourth graders. City B has 3 times as many fourth graders as City A. City C has 5 times as many fourth graders as City B. How many fourth graders are in all three cities?
Answer: Totally There are 62,624 fourth graders in all the three cities.

Explanation: City A has 3,296 fourth graders,

Step 1 :
City B has 3 times as many fourth graders as City A. we get , 3,296 × 3 = 9,888.

Step 2 :
City C has 5 times as many fourth graders as City B. we get , 9,888 × 5 = 49,440.

Step 3 :
Fourth graders in all the three cities are 3,296 + 9,888 + 49,440 = 62,624.

Fourth graders in all the three cities are 62,624.

Problem Solving: Multiplication Homework & Practice 3.10

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 1.
Raku is a Japanese-inspired art form. fires An artist, or bakes, a raku pot at1,409 degrees Fahrenheit. The artist fires a porcelain pot at 266 degrees Fahrenheit less than 2 times the temperature at which the raku pot is fired. You want to find the temperature at which the porcelain pot is fired.
Answer: The porcelain pot is fired at the temperature of 2,552 degrees Fahrenheit.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
Raku is a Japanese-inspired art form
bakes, a raku pot at1,409 degrees Fahrenheit.
The artist fires a porcelain pot at 266 degrees Fahrenheit less than 2 times the temperature at which, the raku pot is fired.

We should know that,
find the temperature at which the porcelain pot is fired.

Let us say porcelain pot as p and raku pot as r ,
Now, The artist fires a porcelain pot at 266 degrees Fahrenheit less than 2 times the temperature at which, the raku pot is fired. we have  p =  2r  – 266 degrees Fahrenheit
2r = 2 × 1,409
= 2,818.
Then  p = 2,818 – 266 = 2,552  degrees Fahrenheit

The temperature at which the porcelain pot is fired is  2,552  degrees Fahrenheit.

Question 2.
You practice basketball 6 times each week. Each basketball practice is 55 minutes long. You practice dance for 225 minutes altogether each week. You want to find how many minutes you practice basketball and dance in all each week.
Answer: you practice basketball and dance  in all  for 555 minutes each week.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
practice basketball 6 times each week.
Each basketball practice is 55 minutes long.
practice dance for 225 minutes altogether each week.

We should know that,
find how many minutes you practice basketball and dance in all each week.

So, practice basketball 6 times each week.
Each basketball practice is 55 minutes long. we have 6 × 55 = 330,
Basketball practice for a week is for 330 min.
Dance practice for a week is for 225 minutes. Then 330 + 225 = 555.

The basketball and dance practice for a whole week is for 555 minutes.

Question 3.
You buy 7 books of stamps. There are 35 stamps in each book. You give some away and have124 stamps left. How many stamps did you give away?
Answer: 121 stamps have left.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
You buy 7 books of stamps
There are 35 stamps in each book.
You give some away and have124 stamps left.

We should know that,
How many stamps did you give away?

So, You buy 7 books of stamps
There are 35 stamps in each book. we have 35 × 7 = 245 stamps. 245 stamps are gave away.

You give some away and have124 stamps left. we get , 245 – 124 = 121.

So, Totally 121 stamps have left.

Question 4.
Your neighbor fills his car’s gasoline tank with 9 gallons of gasoline. Each gallon of gasoline allows him to drive 23 miles. Can he drive for 210 miles without filling his gasoline tank? Explain.
Answer: No , He can only drive for 207 miles without filling his gasoline.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
Neighbor fills his car’s gasoline tank with 9 gallons of gasoline.
Each gallon of gasoline allows him to drive 23 miles.

We should know that,
Can he drive for 210 miles without filling his gasoline tank?

So, Neighbor fills his car’s gasoline tank with 9 gallons of gasoline.
Each gallon of gasoline allows him to drive 23 miles. we have 9 × 23 = 207.
He can travel for 207 miles for 9 gallons of gasoline.

So, he cannot drive for 210 miles without filling any extra gasoline.

Question 5.
Writing
Write and solve a two-step word problem that can be solved using multiplication as one step.
Answer:  David has 20 oranges.

Explanation:
Problem- Newton has 10 apples and David  has oranges 2 times as many as Newton’s apples. How many oranges does David have?
Solution:  Newton has 10 apples , David  has oranges 2 times as many as Newton’s apples, then we have
2 × 10 = 20 . So, David has 20 oranges.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
There are 1,203 pictures taken for a yearbook. There are 124 student pictures for each of the 6 grades. There are also 7 pictures for each of the 23 school clubs. The rest of the pictures are teacher or candid pictures. How many teacher or candid pictures are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 9
Answer: There are 298 pictures of teacher or candid pictures.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
There are 1,203 pictures taken for a yearbook.
There are 124 student pictures for each of the 6 grades.
There are also 7 pictures for each of the 23 school clubs.

We should know that,
How many teacher or candid pictures are there?

So, There are 124 student pictures for each of the 6 grades. , we have 6 × 124 = 744 . There are 744 pictures from all 6 grades students.
There are also 7 pictures for each of the 23 school clubs. we have, 7 × 23 = 161 .There are 161 pictures from 23 school club students.
Total number of students we calculated are 744 + 161 = 905.
Totally a  number of 1,203 pictures taken for a yearbook. Then 1,203 – 905 = 298.

Finally, There are 298 pictures of teacher or candid pictures.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
A construction worker earns $19 each hour she works. A supervisor earns $35 each hour she works. How much money do the construction worker and supervisor earn in all after 8 hours of work?
Answer: $432 are earned by the construction worker and supervisor earn in all after 8 hours of work.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
A construction worker earns $19 each hour she works.
A supervisor earns $35 each hour she works.

We should know that,
How much money do the construction worker and supervisor earn in all after 8 hours of work.

So, A construction worker earns $19 each hour she works. Then for 8 hours we get , $19 × 8 = $152.
Also A supervisor earns $35 each hour she works. Then for 8 hours we get , $35 × 8 = $280.
Total pay of both worker and supervisor is $152 + $280 = $432.

So,$432 are earned by the construction worker and supervisor earn in all after 8 hours of work.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A family of 8 has $1,934 to spend on a vacation that is 1,305 miles away. They buy a $217 plane ticket and an $8 shirt for each person. How much money does the family have left?
Answer: The Family  have $134 left.

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
A family of 8 has $1,934 to spend.
They buy a $217 plane ticket and an $8 shirt for each person.

We should know that,
How much money does the family have left.

So, They buy a $217 plane ticket for each person, Then for 8 members , we have , $217 × 8 = $1,736.
They buy an $8 shirt for each person ,Then for 8 members , we have , $8 × 8 = $64.
Total cost for plane tickets and shirts are $1,736 + $64 = $1,800.
The money they left is $1,934 – $1,800 = $134.

So, The Family  have $134 left.

Review & Refresh

What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 10
Answer: 5/8  is shaded.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3.10 11
Answer: 2/4 is shaded.

Multiply by One-Digit Numbers Performance Task

Sounds are vibrations that travel as waves through solids, liquids, and gases. Sound waves travel 1,125 feet per second through air.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 1
Question 1.
You see a flash of lightning 5 seconds before you hear the thunder. How far away is the storm?
Answer:  5625 feet

Explanation: As sound waves travel 1,125 feet per second through air. A flash of lightning 5 seconds before you hear the thunder, at a distance of 5625 feet.

Question 2.
Sound waves travel 22,572 feet per second faster through iron than through diamond. The speed of sound through the diamond is 39,370 feet per second.
a. Estimate the speed of sound through iron in feet per second.
b. What is the actual speed of sound through iron in feet per second?
c. Is your estimate close to the exact speed of sound through iron? Explain.
Answer:
a. 61,9412 feet per second
b. 61,9412 feet per second
c. yes

Explanation:
Sound waves travel 22,572 feet per second faster through iron than through diamond. The speed of sound through the diamond is 39,370 feet per second.
speed of iron is 22,572 + 39,370  = 61,9412.
So, we have the same answer for both of the questions because  estimated speed is the actual speed of sound through iron .

Question 3.
Sound waves travel about 4 times faster through water than through air.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 2
a. What is the speed of sound through the water in feet per second?
b. A horn blows underwater. A diver is about 9,000 feet away from the horn. About how many seconds does it take the diver to hear the sound of the horn?
Answer: a. 4,500 feet per second and  b. 8 seconds

Explanation:
a. speed of sound is 1,125 feet per second And sound travels 4 times faster in water than in air
So, 1,125 × 4 =  4,500.
b. We know that, time = distance / speed , Given distance is 9,000 feet and speed is 1,125 feet per second. so
time = 9,000 / 1,125 = 8 seconds.
So, Diver can hear the Horn sound from 8 seconds away.

Question 4.
Do sound waves travel the fastest through solids, liquids, or gases? Explain.
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
As the density of the materials high, sound waves travel faster. That is the reason for high speed in solids then liquids compare to gases.

Multiply by One-Digit Numbers Activity

Multiplication Quest
Directions:
1. Players take turns rolling a die. Players solve problems on their boards to race the knights to their castles.
2. On your turn, solve the next multiplication problem in the row of your roll.
3.The first player to get a knight to a castle wins
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers 3

Answer:




Multiply by One-Digit Numbers Chapter Test

3.1 Understand Multiplicative Comparisons

Write two comparison sentences for the equation.
Question 1.
72 = 8 × 9
Answer:  72 is 8 times as many as 9. or
72 is 9 times as many as 8.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 8 and 9 ,
to get the multiplication result as 72.

Question 2.
60 = 10 × 6
Answer: 60 is 10 times as many as 6. or
60 is 6 times as many as 10.

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 10 and 6 ,
to get the multiplication result as 60.

Write an equation for the comparison sentence.
Question 3.
28 is 4 times as many as 7.
Answer:  28 = 4 × 7

Explanation:  we should multiply the numbers 4 and 7,
to get the multiplication result as 28.

Question 4.
40 is 8 times as many as 5.
Answer:  40 = 8 × 5

Explanation: we should multiply the numbers 8 and 5,
to get the multiplication result as 40.

Question 5.
Newton saves $40. Descartes saves $25 more than Newton. How much money does Descartes save?
Answer: Descartes saves $65.

Explanation: Newton saves $40.
Descartes saves $25 more than Newton.,
So, $40 + $25 = $65.

Question 6.
Your friend is 10 years old. Your neighbor is 4 times as old as your friend. How old is your neighbor?
Answer: 40 years old.

Explanation: Your friend is 10 years old.
Your neighbor is 4 times as old as your friend.
So, 10 × 4 = 40.

3.2 Multiply Tens, Hundreds, and Thousands

Find the product
Question 7.
6 × 90 = _____
Answer:  540

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
6 × 90 = 6 × 9 tens
= 54 tens
= 540
So, 6 × 90 = 540.

Question 8.
3,000 × 1 = _____
Answer: 3000

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
1 × 3,000 = 1 × 3 thousands
= 3 thousands
= 3,000
So, 1 × 3,000 = 3,000.

Question 9.
4 × 200 = _____
Answer: 800

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
4 × 200 = 4 × 2 hundreds
= 8 hundreds
= 800
So, 4 × 200 = 800.

Question 10.
4,000 × 4 = _____
Answer: 16000

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
4 × 4,000 = 4 × 4 thousands
= 16 thousands
= 16,000
So, 4 × 4,000 = 16,000.

Question 11.
8 × 700 = _____
Answer: 5,600

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
8 × 700 = 8 × 7 hundreds
= 56 hundreds
= 5600
So, 8 × 700 = 5,600.

Question 12.
2 × 60 = _____
Answer: 120

Explanation: Using the Place-value method,
2 × 60 = 2 × 6 tens
= 12 tens
= 120
So, 2 × 60 = 120.

Find the missing factor.
Question 13.
____ × 200 = 1,000
Answer: 5

Explanation :Let the missing number be X
So, X × 200 = 1,000
X = 1,000 / 200 = 5
Hence, the value of X is: 5.

Question 14.
5 × _____ = 450
Answer: 90

Explanation :Let the missing number be X
So, 5 × X  = 450
X = 450 / 5 = 90
Hence, the value of X is: 90.

Question 15.
_____ × 800 = 6,400
Answer: 8

Explanation :Let the missing number be X
So, X × 800 = 6,400
X = 6,400 / 800 = 8
Hence, the value of X is: 8.

3.3 Estimate Products by Rounding

Estimate the product
Question 16.
5 × 65
Answer: 350.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
65 is close to 70;
5 x 70 = 350

Question 17.
2 × 903
Answer: 1,800

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
903 is close to 900;
2 x 900 = 1,800.

Question 18.
7 × 3,592
Answer:  25,130.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
3,592 is close to 3,590;
7 x 3,590 = 25,130.

Find two estimates that the product is between.
Question 19.
8 × 32
Answer: The product is in between 240 and 320.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
32 is close to 30;
8 × 30 = 240
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
32 is close to 40;
8 × 40 = 320
The product is in between 240 and 320.

Question 20.
4 × 284
Answer:

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
32 is close to 30;
8 × 30 = 240
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
32 is close to 40;
8 × 40 = 320
The product is in between 240 and 320.

Question 21.
6 × 5,945
Answer:  The product is in between 35,640 and 35,700.

Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
5,945 is close to 5,940;
6 × 5,940 = 35,640
and
Explanation:
Round to the nearest tens.
5,945 is close to 5,950;
6 × 5,950 = 35,700
The product is in between 35,640 and 35,700.

Question 22.
A charity organizer raises $9,154 each month for 6 months. To determine whether the charity raises $50,000, can you use an estimate, or is an exact answer required? Explain.
Answer: estimated raise is $54,900, The charity can raise above $50,000.

Explanation:  organizer raises $9,154 each month for 6 months.
$9,154 is close to $9,150;
So, $9,150 × 6 = $54,900.
The charity can raise above $50,000.

3.4 Use Distributive Property to Multiply

Find the product.
Question 23.
3 × 14 = _____
Answer: 42

Explanation: by using distributive property
3 × 14 = 3× (10 + 4)
= (3 × 10) + (3 × 4)
= 30 + 12
= 42

Question 24.
18 × 9 = _____
Answer: 162

Explanation: by using distributive property
9 × 18 = 9× (10 + 8)
= (9 × 10) + (9 × 8)
= 90 + 72
= 162

Question 25.
36 × 5 = _____
Answer:  180

Explanation: by using distributive property
5 × 36 = 5 × (30 + 6)
= (5 × 30) + (5 × 6)
= 150 + 30
= 180

Question 26.
8 × 56 = _____
Answer: 448

Explanation: by using distributive property
8 × 56 = 8 × (50 + 6)
= (8 × 50) + (8 × 6)
= 400 + 48
= 448

Question 27.
6 × 67 = ______
Answer: 402

Explanation: by using distributive property
6 × 67 = 6 × (60 + 7)
= (6 × 60) + (6 × 7)
= 360 + 42
= 402

Question 28.
83 × 2 = _____
Answer:  166

Explanation: by using distributive property
2 × 83 = 2 × (80 + 3)
= (2 × 80) + (2 × 3)
= 160 + 6
= 166

Question 29.
Structure
Use the Distributive Property to write an equation shown by the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 29
Answer: 4 × 23 =  92

Explanation: by using distributive property
4 × 23 = 4× (20 + 3)
= (4 × 20) + (4 × 3)
= 80 + 12
= 92

3.5 Use Expanded Form to Multiply

Find the product
Question 30.
487 × 3 = _____
Answer: 1,461

Explanation: 3 × 487, by expanding we get
= 3 × (400 + 80 + 7), by using distributive property, we get
= (3 × 400) + ( 3 × 80) + ( 3 × 7)
= 1,200 + 240 + 21
Area model = 1,200 + 240 + 21
so the result of the partial products is 1,461

Question 31.
5 × 7,402
Answer:  37,010

Explanation: 5 × 7,402 , by expanding we get
= 5 × (7,000 + 400 + 2), by using distributive property, we get
= (5 × 7,000) + ( 5 × 400) + ( 5 × 2)
= 3,500 + 2,000 + 10
Area model = 3,500 + 2,000 + 10
so the result of the partial products is 37,010.

Question 32.
8,395 × 7 = _____
Answer: 58,765

Explanation :  7 × 8,395 = 7 × (8,000 + 300 + 90 + 5 )
= (7 × 8,000 ) + (7 × 300 ) + ( 7 × 90) + (7 × 5)   by using Expanded form we get
= 56,000 + 2,100 + 630 + 35
Area model = 56,000 + 2,100 + 630 + 35
so the result of the partial products is 58,765

3.6 Use Partial Products of Multiply

Find the product
Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 33
Answer: 2,394.

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 1800 + 540 + 54 = 2,394
So, 266 × 9 = 2,3942.

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 34
Answer:  680

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 640 + 40 = 680
So, 85 × 8 = 680.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 35
Answer:  28,128

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 28,000 + 120 + 8 = 28,128
So, 7,032 × 4 = 28,128.

Question 36.
Number Sense
Which three numbers are the partial products that you add to find the product of 518 and 2?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 36
Answer: 518 × 2 = 1,036 , So,1,000 , 20 , 16 are the partial products .

Explanation:
The sum of the partial products are 1,000 + 20 + 16 = 1,036.
So, 518 × 2 = 1,036.

So, 1,000 , 20 , 16 are the partial products .

3.7 Multiply Two-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 37.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 37
Answer: 114 ,  the estimated product is 120.

Explanation: 

6 × 9 ones = 54 ones
regrouping 54 ones as 5 tens and 4 ones
6 × 1 tens = 6 tens
6 tens + 5 tens = 11 tens  or  1 hundreds and 1 tens ,Then we get 114

And the estimated product is 120
because 19 is close to 20,then 20 × 6 = 120
So, 19 × 6 = 114.

Question 38.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 38
Answer: 511 , the estimated product is 490.

Explanation:

7 × 3 ones = 21 ones
regrouping 21 ones as 2 tens and 1 ones
7 × 7 tens = 49 tens
49 tens + 2 tens = 51 tens  or  5 hundreds and 1 tens ,Then we get 511

And the estimated product is 490
because 73 is close to 70,then 70 × 7 = 490
So, 73 × 7 = 511.

Question 39.
Estimate: _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 39
Answer:  290, the estimated product is 300.

Explanation:

5 × 8 ones = 40 ones
regrouping 40 ones as 4 tens and 0 ones
5 × 5 tens = 25 tens
25 tens + 4 tens = 29 tens  or  2 hundreds and 9 tens ,Then we get 290.

And the estimated product is 300
because 58 is close to 70,then 60 × 7 = 300
So, 58 × 5 = 290.

3.8 Multiply Three – and Four-Digit Numbers by One-Digit Numbers

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable
Question 40.
Estimate: _____
402 × 3 = _____
Answer: 1,206, And the estimated product is 1,200

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 2 ones = 6 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 0 tens = 0 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 4 hundreds  = 12 hundreds
or 1 thousands and 2 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 1,206 .

And the estimated product is 1,200
because 402 is close to 400, 400 × 3 = 1,200
So, 402 × 3 =  1,206.

Question 41.
Estimate: _____
8 × 3,861 = _____
Answer: 30,888, And the estimated product is 30,880

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
8 × 1 ones = 8 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
8 × 6 tens = 48 tens
or 4 hundreds and 8 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
8 × 8 hundreds  = 64 hundreds
64 hundreds + 4 hundreds = 68 hundreds
regroup as 6 thousands and 8 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
8 × 3 thousands = 24 thousands
24 thousands + 6 thousands = 30 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 30,888.

And the estimated product is 30,880
because 3,861 is close to 3,860, 3,860 × 8 = 30,880
So, 3,861 × 8  = 30,888 .

Question 42.
Estimate: ______
977 × 2 = ______
Answer: 1,954 ,And the estimated product is 1,960

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
2 × 7 ones = 14 ones
Regroup 14 ones  as 1 tens and 4 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
2 × 7 tens = 14 tens
14 tens + 1 tens = 15 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
2 × 9 hundreds  = 18 hundreds
18 hundreds  + 1 hundreds = 19 hundreds
Regroup  as 1 thousands and 9 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 1,954 .

And the estimated product is 1,960
because 977 is close to 980, 980 × 2 = 1,960
So, 977 × 2 = 1,954 .

Compare.
Question 43
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 43
Answer: 306 × 6 = 1,848 is less than 408 × 5 = 2,040.

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
6 × 8 ones = 48 ones
Regroup 48 ones  as 4 tens and 8 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
6 × 0 tens = 0 tens
0 tens + 4 tens = 4 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
6 × 3 hundreds  = 18 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 1,848 .

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
5 × 8 ones = 40 ones
Regroup 40 ones  as 4 tens and 0 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
5 × 0 tens = 0 tens
0 tens + 4 tens = 4 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
5 × 4 hundreds  = 20 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 2,040 .

So, 306 × 6 = 1,848 is less than 408 × 5 = 2,040.

Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 44
Answer:  6 × 789 = 4,734 is equal to 2 × 2,367 = 4,734.

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
6 × 9 ones = 54 ones
regroup 54 ones as 5 tens and 4 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
6 × 8 tens = 48 tens
48 tens + 5 tens = 53 tens or regroup as 5 hundreds and 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
6 × 7 hundreds  = 42 hundreds
42 hundreds + 5 hundreds = 47 hundreds
regroup as 4 thousands and 7 hundreds

By holding all the places together we get 4,734.

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
2 × 7 ones = 14 ones
regroup 14 ones as 1 tens and 4 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
2 × 6 tens = 12 tens
12 tens + 1 tens = 13 tens
regroup as 1 hundred and 3 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
2 × 3 hundreds  = 6 hundreds
6 hundreds + 1 hundred =  7 hundreds

Step 4: Multiply thousands and regroup thousands
2 × 2 thousands = 4 thousands

By holding all the places together we get 4,734.
So, 6 × 789 = 4,734 is equal to 2 × 2,367 = 4,734.

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 45
Answer: 454 × 3 = 1,362 is grater than 313 × 4 = 1,252.

Explanation:

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
3 × 4 ones = 12 ones
regroup as 1 tens and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
3 × 5 tens = 15 tens
15 tens + 1 tens = 16 tens
regroup 16 tens  as 1 hundreds  and 6 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 4 hundreds  = 12 hundreds
12 hundreds + 1 hundreds = 13 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 1,362.

Step 1:  Multiply ones and regroup
4 × 3 ones = 12 ones
regroup as 1 tens and 2 ones

Step 2: Multiply tens and regroup tens
4 × 1 tens = 4 tens
4 tens + 1 tens = 5 tens

Step 3: Multiply hundreds and regroup hundreds
3 × 4 hundreds  = 12 hundreds

By holding all places together we get 1,252.

So, 454 × 3 = 1,362 is grater than 313 × 4 = 1,252.

3.9 Use Properties to Multiply

Use properties to find the product. Explain your reasoning.
Question 46.
25 × 9 × 4
Answer: 900

Explanation:
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 9 × ( 25 × 4)
=9 × 100
= 900
So,  25 × 9 × 4 = 900 .

Question 47.
8 × 250
Answer:  2,000.

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 8 × ( 200 + 50)
= (8 × 200) + ( 8 × 50)
= 1,600 + 400
= 2,000.
So, 8 × 250 = 2,000.

Question 48.
3 × 497
Answer: 1,491

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 3 × ( 400 + 90 + 7 )
= (3 × 400) + ( 3 × 90) + (3 × 7)
= 1,200 + 270 + 21
= 1,491.
So, 3 × 497 = 1,491.

Question 49.
2 × 8 × 15
Answer: 240

Explanation:
By using commutative property of multiplication
= 8 × ( 15 × 2)
= 8 × 30
= 240
So,  2 × 8 × 15 = 240 .

Question 50.
699 × 9
Answer: 6,291.

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 9 × ( 600 + 90 + 9 )
= (9 × 600) + ( 9 × 90) + (9 × 9)
= 5,400 + 810 + 81
= 6,291 .
So, 9 × 699 = 6,291.

Question 51.
1,003 × 6
Answer: 6,018.

Explanation:
By using Distributive property of multiplication
= 6 × ( 1000 + 3)
= (6 × 1000) + (6 × 3)
= 6000 + 18
= 6,018
So, 1,003 × 6 = 6,018.

3.10 Problem Solving: Multiplication

Question 52.
A musical cast sells 1,761 tickets for a big show. The cast needs to complete 36 days of rehearsal. Each rehearsal is 8 hours long. The cast has rehearsed for 102 hours so far. How many hours does the cast have left to rehearse?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers chp 52
Answer: 186 hours left to rehearse .

Explanation:
By understanding the problem
we know that,
A musical cast sells 1,761 tickets for a big show.
The cast needs to complete 36 days of rehearsal.
Each rehearsal is 8 hours long.
The cast has rehearsed for 102 hours so far.

We should know that,
How many hours does the cast have left to rehearse

The total number of hours to practice are 36 × 8 = 288 hours
They practiced for 102 hours so far then , to get the remaining hours 288 – 102 = 186 hours.

So, the cast has 186 hours left to rehearse .

Multiply by One-Digit Numbers Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Which number is greater than 884,592?
A. 89,621
B. 884,592
C. 805,592
D. 894,592
Answer: D. 894,592

Explanation: of all the given options , D is the greatest number .

Question 2.
What is the difference of 30,501 and 6,874?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 2
Answer:  23,627.

Explanation : To fin the difference between two numbers, we should subtract the lowest number from the largest number, Then, 30,501 – 6,874 = 23,627.

Question 3.
A teenager will send about 37,000 text messages within 1 year. Which numbers could be the exact number of text messages sent?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 3
Answer: 36.834

Explanation: Because this number is the closest number to the 37,000 from the given options.
so, 36,834 could be the exact number.

Question 4.
What is the product of 4,582 and 6?
A. 27,492
B. 24,082
C. 27,432
D. 42,117
Answer: 27,492.

Explanation: by using distributive property we get
6 × 4,582 = 6 × ( 4,000 + 500 + 80 + 2)
= (6 × 4,000) + ( 6 × 500)+ ( 6 × 80 ) + ( 6 × 2)
= 24,000 + 3,000 + 480 + 12
= 27,492.
So, 6 × 4,582 = 27,492.

Question 5.
Which expression is equal to 246,951 + 73,084?
A. 246,951 + 70,000 + 3,000 + 800 + 40
B. 246,951 + 7,000 + 300 + 80 + 4
C. 246,951 + 70,000 + 3,000 + 80 + 4
D. 246,951 + 70,000 + 3,000 + 800 + 4
Answer: C

Explanation:    246,951 + 73,084, 73,084 can be written as,
246,951 + 70,000 + 3,000 + 80 + 4.

Question 6.
Newton reads the number ”four hundred six thousand, twenty-nine” in a book. What is this number written in standard form?
A. 4,629
B. 406,029
C. 460,029
D. 406,290
Answer: B

Explanation: 406,029 can be written as four hundred six thousand, twenty-nine.

Question 7.
Which expressions have a product of 225?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 7
Answer: 9 × 25 , 75 × 3 , 5 × 45.

Explanation: all the above expressions give the product of 225,
9 × 25  = 225
75 × 3  = 225
5 × 45  = 225.

Question 8.
What is the greatest possible number you can make with the number cards below?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 8
Answer: B

Explanation: from the give numbers 6 ,1,8,4,2 , place the numbers in the descending order we get 86,421.

Question 9.
What is the sum of 62,671 and 48,396?
A. 111,067
B. 11,067
C. 100,967
D. 100,067
Answer:  A.1,11,067.

Explanation: Sum means Addition we should add the two numbers in order to get the result,
62,671  +  48,396 = 1,11,067.

Question 10.
Your friend drinks 8 glasses of water each day. He wants to know how many glasses of water he will drink in 1 year. Between which two estimates is the number of glasses he will drink in a year?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 10
A. 2,400 and 3,200
B. 240 and 320
C. 3,200 and 4,000
D. 320 and 400
Answer: He drinks 2, 920 glasses for 1 year , so it is in between 2,400 and 3,200 .

Explanation: He drinks 8 glasses of water each day so for 1 year that is for 365 days , we get 365 × 8 = 2,920.
So, He drinks 2, 920 glasses for 1 year , so it is in between 2,400 and 3,200.

Question 11.
Which statement about the number 420,933 is true?
A. The value of the 2 is 2,000.
B. The 4 is in the ten thousands place.
C. The value of the 3 in the tens place is ten times the value of the 3 in the ones place.
D. There are 9 tens.
Answer: C

Explanation: The number 420,933  has the value of the 3 in the tens place is ten times the value of the 3 in the ones place.

Question 12.
Descartes rounds to the nearest ten thousand and gets an estimate of 360,000. Which expressions could be the problem he estimated?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 12
Answer: 480,012 – 127,465.

Explanation: Because the number 360,000 should be in between the same range of the given numbers that is,
480,012 – 127,465.

Question 13.
There are 8 students in a book club. There are 5 times as many students in a drama club as the book club. How many students are in the drama club?
A. 13 students
B. 45 students
C. 3 students
D. 40 students
Answer: D . 40 students

Explanation: There are 8 students in a book club.
There are 5 times as many students in a drama club as the book club.
Then, 8 × 5 = 40.
So, There are 40 students in the drama club.

Question 14.
The force required to shatter concrete is 3 times the amount of force required to shatter plexiglass. The force required to shatter plexiglass is 72 pounds per square foot. What is the force required to shatter concrete?
A. 216 pounds per square foot
B. 69 pounds per square foot
C. 75 pounds per square foot
D. 2,106 pounds per square foot
Answer: A.216 pounds per square foot

Explanation: The force required to shatter plexiglass is 72 pounds per square foot.
The force required to shatter concrete is 3 times the amount of force required to shatter plexiglass.
Then, 72 × 3 = 216.

So, the force required to shatter concrete is 216 pounds per square foot.

Question 15.
Which number, when rounded to the nearest hundred thousand, is equal to 100,000?
A. 9,802
B. 83,016
C. 152,853
D. 46,921
Answer: B. 83,016

Explanation: it is  only number in the options which is close to 100,000 , All the other options are too far to roundoff .

Question 16.
You want to find 5,193 × 8. Which expressions show how to use the Distributive Property to find the product?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 16
Answer:  8 × (5,000 + 100 + 90 +3)

Explanation: To use distributive property we have to organize the largest number in the expression in equal distributions respectively. so,  5,193 × 8 = 8 × (5,000 + 100 + 90 +3).

Question 17.
Use the table to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 17
Part A Five friends each buy all of the items listed in the table. Use rounding to find about how much money they spend in all.
Part B An Ultimate Package costs $40 and includes all of the items listed in the table. About how much money would the 5 friends have saved in all if they would have bought an Ultimate Package instead of purchasing the items individually? Explain.
Answer:  part A = $250 , part B = $50 can be saved.

Explanation:
Part A: By rounding the money from the table , we have 90 – minute jump pass = $20
water bottle = $10 and T-shirt = $20 ,That total amount will be $50
For five friends we get, 5 × $50 = $250. for all of them.

Part B : An Ultimate Package costs $40 and includes all of the items listed in the table. if each of the 5 members buys the package then , $40  × 5 = $200.
So, from Part A and Part B we get to know that they would have save $50 if they bought the package , that is
$250 – $200 = $50.

Question 18.
A pair of walruses weigh 4,710 pounds together. The female weighs1,942 pounds. How much more does the male weigh than the female?
A. 826 pounds
B. 6,652 pounds
C. 2,768 pounds
D. 2,710 pounds
Answer: C. 2,768 pounds

Explanation: A pair of walruses weigh 4,710 pounds together.
The female weighs1,942 pounds. Then , to get the male walrus weight , we have ,
4,710 – 1,942 = 2,768

So, The weight of male walrus is 2,768 pounds.

Question 19.
You use compensation as shown. What is the final step?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers cp 19
Answer: D. There is no final step . You are finished.

Multiply by One-Digit Numbers STEAM Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers spt 1
Question 1.
A teacher visits the Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco, California. 1. Use the figure above to answer the questions.
a. The roadway is 8 times as wide as the width of both walkways combined. Each walkway has the same width. How wide is one of the walkways
b. What is the length of the bridge that is suspended above the water?
c. What is the length of the bridge that is not suspended above the water?
Answer:  a. each walk way is 5 feet,
b. 6,450 feet ,
c. 2,531 feet.

Explanation:
a. Given , in picture the whole roadway and walk way is 90 feet long in total
Considering 2 walkways and assuming walkway as W and roadway as R  we get
R + 2W = 90 feet and The roadway is 8 times as wide as the width of both walkways combined. can say as
R = 8(2W) then we have 8(2W) + 2W  = 90
16W + 2W = 90
18W = 90
W = 90 /8
W = 5 , so, each walk way is 5 feet long.

b. the length of the bridge that is suspended above the water is
from the picture we have 1,125 + 4,200 + 1,125 = 6,450. feet

c. the length of the bridge that is not  suspended above the water is
From the picture we have 8,981 – 6,450 = 2,531 feet.

Question 2.
The teacher wants to estimate the distance between the bridge and the water.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers spt 2
a. He rides in a ferry boat under the bridge. He says that the distance between the bridge and the water is about 5 times the height of the ferry boat. What is the distance between the bridge and the water?
b. The teacher estimates that the height of one tower is about three times the distance between the bridge and the water. What is the teacher’s estimate for the height of the tower?
c. You learn the exact height of the tower is 86 feet taller than the teacher’s estimate. How tall is the tower?
Answer:

a.220 ft.

b.660 ft.

c.746 ft.

Explanation:

a. 44 ft is the height of the boat as per the picture.so the distance between the water and the  bridge is 5 times the height of the ferry boat ,answer is 44 ft multiplied by 5 times i.e.220 ft. so 44 × 5 = 220 ft.

b. As per the teachers estimation height of tower is 3 times the distance between the bridge and the water, so 220ft is multiplied by 3, i.e.  660 ft.  so  220 × 3 = 660

c. learn the exact height of the tower is 86 feet taller than the teacher’s estimate.so 660 + 86 = 746 feet.

The teacher uses his fitness tracker to count the number of steps he walks on the Golden Gate Bridge each day for 1 week.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers spt 3
Question 3.
The table shows the numbers of steps taken on the first 3 days of the week. Use this information to complete the table.
a. He takes one thousand one hundred twenty-two more steps on Wednesday than on Monday.
b. On Thursday, he takes one hundred eighteen steps less than on Sunday.
c. He takes ten thousand fifty steps on Friday.
d. On Saturday, he takes twice as many steps as on Tuesday.
Answer:

a. 11,834 steps on Wednesday
b.  12,260 steps on Thursday
c. 10,050 steps on Friday
d.  15,978 steps on Saturday

Explanation:
a. He walks 1,122 more steps on Wednesday than on Monday = 10,712 + 1,122 = 11,834 steps.
b. He walks 118 steps less on Thursday than on Sunday =  12,378 – 118 = 12,260 steps.
c. He walks 10,050 steps on Friday
d. He walks 2 times as many steps on Saturday than on Tuesday = 2 × 7,989 = 15,978 steps.

Question 4.
The teacher’s goal is to take 11,500 steps each day.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 3 Multiply by One-Digit Numbers spt 4
a. What is his goal for the week?
b. Estimate the total number of steps he takes from Sunday to Saturday. Does he meet his goal for the week? Explain.
c. One mile is about two thousand steps. The teacher estimates that he walks 3 miles from one end of the Golden Gate Bridge to the other and back again. About how many steps does he walk?
Answer:
a. 80,500 steps
b. 81,200 steps are estimated. He reached his goal for the week.
c. 6,000 steps

Explanation:
a. He walks 11,500 steps each day , Then for 1 Week we have 7 days , so 7 × 11,500 = 80,500 steps for a week
b. By rounding the nearest numbers of all the steps he walked from Sunday to Saturday , we have,
12,380 + 10,710 + 7,990 + 11,830 + 12,260 + 10,050 + 15,980 = 81,200 steps.
81,200 steps are estimated. He reached his goal for the week.
c. 1 mile = 2,000 steps.
The teacher estimates that he walks 3 miles from one end of the Golden Gate Bridge to the other and back again.
So, 3 × 2,000  = 6,000 steps.
He walked 6,000 steps.

 

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions

Make your preparation perfect with the help of the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions PDF. Every student can become a math expert if they prepare with the Big Ideas Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions Math Answers. The concepts are explained clearly with real-time examples. Therefore, students can easily refer to all the topics and understand them with the help of examples. Check out the problems and also take the practice test to test your knowledge. If you feel lag in any concept, then prepare that topic more and get a grip on all topics.

Big Ideas 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions Math Book Answer Key

Follow the step-by-step procedure to learn the complete concept deeply. We have given an explanation for every problem below. Therefore, students also check out the explanation if they feel confused while solving the problems. Quickly, refer to available Big Ideas Numerical Expressions 5th Grade Chapter 2 Math Book Answer Key and finish your preparation as early as possible. Click on the links provided below and prepare every individual topic on this page. Also, in this chapter, we were given different topics on Numerical Expressions, Order of operations, Number properties, Evaluating numerical expressions, and practice questions.

Lesson 1 Number Properties

Lesson 2 Order of Operations

Lesson 3 Write Numerical Expressions

Lesson 4 Evaluate Expressions with Grouping Symbols

Performance Task

Lesson 2.1 Number Properties

Explore and Grow

Use all four numbers on the game card below to write an expression that has a value of 24. You can use any number of the four operations: addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 1

Answer:
We will use addition, multiplication, and division to get the value as 24.

Explanation:
In the game card, we can see that the four numbers are 2, 3, 9, 1. So to get the value as 24 we will add 9 + 3 which is 12 and then we will multiply the value 12 with 2  which is 12 × 2 = 24 and then we will divide the value with 1 which is 24 ÷ 1= 24. So here the operations used are addition, multiplication, and division to get the value 24.

Reasoning
Write another expression that has a value of 24 using the game card above.
Answer:
We will use addition and multiplication to get the value as 24.

Explanation:
In the game card, we can see that the four numbers are 2, 3, 9, 1. So to get the value as 24 we will add 9 + 3 which is 12 and then we will multiply the value 12 with 2  which is 12 × 2 = 24. So to use another expression we will multiply the value with 1 which is 24 × 1= 24. So here the operations used are addition and multiplication to get the value 24.

Think and Grow: Use Number Properties

Key Idea
Here are several number properties.
Commutative Properties: Changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product.
3 + 5 = 5 + 3
3 × 5 = 5 × 3
Associative Properties: Changing the grouping of addends or factors does not change the sum or product.
(2 + 4) + 1 = 2 + (4 + 1)
(2 × 4) × 1 = 2 × (4 × 1)
Addition Property of Zero: The sum of any number and 0 is that number.
8 + 0 = 8
Multiplication Properties of Zero and One:
The product of any number and 0 is 0. 5 × 0 = 0
The product of any number and 1 is that number. 7 × 1 = 7
Distributive Property: Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 2
Example
Complete the equation. Identify the property shown.
32 + 29 + 8 = 29 + ______ + 8
_______ Property of Addition
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 3

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the equation. Identify the property shown.
9 × 15 = 15 × ______
Answer:
The equation is 9 × 15 = 15 × 9. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The equation is 9 × 15 = 15 × 9. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.
Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation is 9 × 15 = 15  × 9.

Question 2.
Use the Distributive Property to find 8 × 49.
Answer:
The equation is (8 × 40) + (8 × 9) and the property used is Distributive property.

Explanation:
Given that 8 × 49, by distributive property the equation will be
= 8 × (40 + 9)
= (8 × 40) + (8 × 9)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Complete the equation. Identify the property shown.
Question 3.
1 × _____ = 17
Answer:
The equation is 1 × 17= 17 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of One.

Explanation:
The equation is 1 × 17 = 17.
The property used to complete this equation is Multiplication Properties of One which means the product of any number and 1 is that number. So the equation will be 1 × 17 = 17.

Question 4.
248 + 0 = ______
Answer:
The equation is 248 + 0= 248 and the property used is the Addition Property of Zero.

Explanation:
The equation is 248 + 0= 248.
The property used is the Addition Property of Zero which means the sum of any number and 0 is that number. So the equation will be 248 + 0= 248.

Question 5.
23 + 145 + 7 = 23 + 7 + _____
Answer:
The equation is 23 + 145 + 7= 23 + 7 + 145. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The equation is 23 + 145 + 7= 23 + 7 + 145. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.
Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation is 23 + 145 + 7= 23 + 7 + 145.

Question 6.
3 × (10 + 2) = (3 × 10) + (3 × ______)
Answer:
The equation is 3 × (10 + 2)= (3 × 10) + (3 × 2) and the property used is the Distributive Property.

Explanation:
The equation is 3 × (10 + 2)= (3 × 10) + (3 × 2)
The Distributive Property is a property in which Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the equation is 3 × (10 + 2)= (3 × 10) + (3 × 2).

Use the Distributive Property to find the product.
Question 7.
5 × 97
Answer:
The equation is
5 × 97 = 5 × (90 + 7)
= (5 × 90) + (5 × 7) and the property used is Distributive property.

Explanation:
Given that 5 × 97, by distributive property the equation will be
= 5 × (90 + 7)
= (5 × 90) + (5 × 7)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the equation is
5 × 97 = 5 × (90 + 7)
= (5 × 90) + (5 × 7).

Question 8.
83 × 7
Answer:
The equation is
83 × 7 = 7 × (80 + 3)
= (7 × 80) + (7 × 3) and the property used is Distributive property.

Explanation:
Given that 7 × 83, by distributive property the equation will be
= 7 × (80 + 3)
= (7× 80) + (7 × 3)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the equation is
7 × 83 = 7 × (80 + 3)
= (7 × 80) + (7 × 3)

Use a property to find the sum or product. Identify the property you used.
Question 9.
4 + (6 + 27)
Answer:
The sum of 4 + (6 + 27) is 37 and the property which is used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The sum of 4 + (6 + 27) is 37 and the property which is used is the Commutative property.
Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the sum is 37.

Question 10.
5 × 49 × 0
Answer:
The product of 5 × 49 × 0 is 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.

Explanation:
The product of 5 × 49 × 0 is 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.
Multiplication Properties of Zero is the product of any number and 0 is 0. So 5 × 49 × 0 is 0.

Question 11.
11 + 16 + 89
Answer:
The sum of 11 + 16 + 89 is 116 and the property which is used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The sum of 11 + 16 + 89 is 116 and the property which is used is the Commutative property.
Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the sum is 116.

Question 12.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses the Distributive Property to find 4 × 46. Is your friend correct? Explain.
4 × 46 = 4 × (50 – 4)
= (4 × 50) – (4 × 4)
= 200 – 16
= 184
Answer:
Yes, my friend is correct. He uses distributive property correctly.

Explanation:
Yes, my friend is correct. By distributive property, the equation will be
4 × 46 = 4 × (50 – 4)
= (4 × 50) – (4 × 4)
= 200 – 16
= 184.
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the equation is

Question 13.
Can you use the Associative Property with subtraction? Explain. Use an example to justify your answer.
Answer:
No, we cannot use the Associative Property with subtraction.

Explanation:
No, we cannot use the Associative Property with subtraction. As Associative property means changing the grouping of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So Associative property can only be used for addition or multiplication. And the subtraction doesn’t have the associative property because for example if we take 20 and10 and subtract the first two numbers 20 minus 10 then the result will be 10. So changing the way of associating the numbers in subtraction can change the result. So the subtraction doesn’t have the associative property.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
There are three types of animals at a shelter. How many animals are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 4
Find the number of each type of animal at the shelter.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 5
Add the numbers of dogs, cats, and rabbits.
16 + 22 + 4 = ____ + ____ + ____ Commutative Property of Addition
= _____ + _____ Add.
= _____ Add.
There are _____ animals in all.

Answer:
The total number of animals in the shelter is 42 animals.
Add the numbers of dogs, cats, and rabbits.
16 + 22 + 4 = 4 + 22 + 16 Commutative Property of Addition
= 26 + 16 Add.
= 42 Add.
There are 42 animals in all.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-5-Chapter-2-Numerical-Expressions-2.1-5
Given that each paw is equal to four pets. So the dog has four paws which means 4 × 4 = 16. The total number of dogs is 16 dogs. And cats have five paws and a half paw so the total number of cats is 5 × 4= 20 as one paw is equal to four so the half paw is two animals. So the total number of cats is 20 + 2= 22 cats. And rabbit has one paw so the total number of rabbits is 4 rabbits. So to find the total number of animals is we will add all the animals and add the numbers of dogs, cats, and rabbits. So
16 + 22 + 4 = 4 + 22 + 16 Commutative Property of Addition
= 26 + 16 Add.
= 42 Add.
There are 42 animals in all.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You play three different video games in an evening. How many minutes do you play video games in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 6
Answer:
The total number of minutes the video game is playing is 66 minutes.

Explanation:
Given that each clock is six minutes. And given that dancing has three clocks and a half clock. So the total number of minutes in playing dancing is 3 × 6= 18 minutes, as each clock is 6 minutes, so the half clock will be 3 minutes. So the total number of minutes in playing dancing is 18 + 3= 21 minutes. And given that puzzle has two clocks and a half clock, so the total number of minutes in playing puzzle is 1 × 6= 6 as each clock is 6 minutes, so the half clock will be 3 minutes. So the total number of minutes in playing dancing is 6 + 3= 9 minutes. And given that racing has six clocks. So the total number of minutes in playing racing is 6 × 6= 36 minutes. So the total number of minutes in playing dancing is 18 + 3= 21 minutes. So the total number of minutes the video game is playing is
21 minutes + 9 minutes + 36 minutes which is 66 minutes.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Tickets for a school play are sold out. The auditorium has 4 sections. Each section has 25 rows with 15 seats in each row. Each ticket costs $2. How much money is raised in ticket sales?
Answer:
The total amount raised in the ticket sale is $3,000.

Explanation:
As there are four sections in the auditorium and each section has 25 rows with 15 seats in each row and each ticket costs $2. So first we need to find the total number of seats. For that, we should multiple numbers of rows and the seats which are 25 × 15= 375 seats. And there are four sections, so 4 × 375= 1,500. So there are 1500 total seats. And each ticket costs $2, for 1500 seats it will be 1500 × 2= 3,000. So the total amount raised in the ticket sale is $3,000.

Number Properties Homework & Practice 2.1

Complete the equation. Identify the property shown.
Question 1.
687 × ____ = 0
Answer:
The equation is 687 × 0 = 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.

Explanation:
The equation is 687 × 0 = 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.
As Multiplication Properties of Zero is the product of any number and 0 is 0. So 687 × 0 is 0.

Question 2.
15 + 13 = 13 + _____
Answer:
The equation is 15 + 13 = 13 + 15 and the property which is used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The equation is 15 + 13 = 13 + 15 and the property which is used is the Commutative property.
As the Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation will be 15 + 13 = 13 + 15.

Question 3.
4 × 7 × 25 = 4 × _____ × 7
Answer:
The equation is 4 × 7 × 25 = 4 × 25 × 7 and the property used is Associative Property.

Explanation:
The equation is 4 × 7 × 25 = 4 × 25 × 7 and the property used is Associative Property.
As Associative Property means changing the grouping of addends or factors does not change the sum or product.
4 × 7 × 25 = 4 × 25 × 7

Question 4.
6 × (20 – 3) = (6 × 20) – (6 × _____)
Answer:
The equation is 6 × (20 – 3) = (6 × 20) – (6 × 3) and the property used is Distributive property.

Explanation:
The equation is 6 × (20 – 3) = (6 × 20) – (6 × 3) and the property used is Distributive property.
Distributive Property is a property of Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products.

Use the Distributive Property to find the product.
Question 5.
4 × 78
Answer:
The product is
4 × 78 = 4 × (70 + 8)
= (4 × 70) + (4 × 8)
= 280 + 32
= 312
and the property used is the Distributive Property.

Explanation:
The product is
4 × 78 = 4 × (70 + 8)
= (4 × 70) + (4 × 8)
= 280 + 32
= 312
The Distributive Property is a property in which Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the product of 4 × 78 is
= 4 × (70 + 8)
= (4 × 70) + (4 × 8)
= 280 + 32
= 312.

Question 6.
23 × 8
Answer:
The product is
23 × 8 = 8 × (20 + 3)
= (8 × 20) + (8 × 3)
= 160 + 24
= 184
and the property used is the Distributive Property.

Explanation:
The product is
23 × 8 = 8 × (20 + 3)
= (8 × 20) + (8 × 3)
= 160 + 24
= 184
The Distributive Property is a property in which Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the product of 23 × 8 is
= 8 × (20 + 3)
= (8 × 20) + (8 × 3)
= 160 + 24
= 184.

Use a property to find the sum or product. Identify the property you used.
Question 7.
6 × 43
Answer:
The product is
6 × 43 = 6 × (40 + 3)
= (6 × 40) + (6 × 3)
= 240 + 18
= 258.
and the property used is the Distributive Property.

Explanation:
The product is
6 × 43 = 6 × (40 + 3)
= (6 × 40) + (6 × 3)
= 240 + 18
= 258.
The Distributive Property is a property in which Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the product of 6 × 43 is
= 6 × (40 + 3)
= (6 × 40) + (6 × 3)
= 240 + 18
= 258.

Question 8.
339 + 0 + 54
Answer:
The equation is 23 + 145 + 7= 23 + 7 + 145. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The sum is 339 + 0 + 54 = 393. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.
Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation is 339 + 0 + 54 = 54 + 339 + 0.

Question 9.
25 × 8 × 2
Answer:
The equation is 25 × 8 × 2 = 400. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The product is 25 × 8 × 2 = 400. And the property which is used is the Commutative property.
Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation is 25 × 8 × 2 = 25 × 8 × 2.

Question 10.
Number Sense
To find 29 + (11 + 16), your friend adds 29 and 11. Then he adds 16 to the sum. Which property did he use and why?
Answer:
The property which is used is the Commutative property. And the equation can be written as
29 + 11 + 16 = 29 + 11 + 16.

Explanation:
Given equation is 29 + (11 + 16) and my friend adds 29 and 11 after that he adds 16 to find the sum. And the property which is used is the Commutative property. And Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation can be written as
29 + 11 + 16 = 29 + 11 + 16.

Question 11.
Writing
Explain how using properties can help you mentally find answers to problems.
Answer:
Using the properties like Commutative property, Distributive property, Associative Properties, Addition Property of Zero, Multiplication Properties of Zero & One helps us mentally in finding answers to problems by this process and we can solve the problems easily by these properties and everyone can identify this property. With these properties, we can write the equivalent expressions which help us to solve mental problems.

Question 12.
Number Sense
Newton uses two properties to rewrite the expression (4 × 23) × 25. Identify the properties he uses. Why would Newton use these properties?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 7
Answer:
The property Newton used is the Commutative property.

Explanation:
The property Newton used is the Commutative property. Newton uses Commutative Property because by Commutative property changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation can be written as 4 × 23 × 25. = 25 × 4 × 23.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Before performing an experiment, students are asked to predict which substance will melt an ice cube the fastest. How many students make a prediction? Identify the property you used.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 8
Answer:
The total number of students who have participated in the prediction is 76 students and the property used is commutative property.

Explanation:
Given that each emoji is 8 students, so the salt has two emojis that mean 2 × 8= 16 students. So the students who have predicted the salt are 16 students. And the sugar has three emojis and a half emoji that means 3 × 8= 24 students and a half emoji means, as each emoji is 8 students, so half emoji is 4 students and the total number of students is 24 + 4= 28 students. So the students who have predicted the sugar are 28 students. And the water has four emojis that means 4 × 8= 32 students. So the students who have predicted the water are 32 students.
The total number of students who have participated in the prediction is
16 students + 28 students + 32 students = 76 students. So the total number of students who have participated in the prediction is 76 students. And the property used is commutative property. And Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the equation can be written as
16 + 28 + 32= 32 + 16 +28.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
An apartment building has 35 floors with 12 apartments on each floor. There are 300 apartments that have 2 bedrooms. The rest of the apartments have 1 bedroom. How many 1-bedroom apartments are in the building? How can you use the Distributive Property to help solve this problem mentally?
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 9
Answer:
By adding 8,968 and 4,683 we will get the sum of 13,651.

Explanation:
By adding 8,968 and 4,683 we will get the sum of 13,651. To check whether the answer is reasonable we will subtract 4,683 with 13,651 the difference will be 8,968. So the answer is reasonable.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 10
Answer:
By adding 75,310 and 8,596 we will get the sum of 83,906.

Explanation:
By adding 75,310 and 8,596 we will get the sum of 83,906. To check whether the answer is reasonable we will subtract8,596 with 83,906 the difference will be 75,310. So the answer is reasonable.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.1 11
Answer:
By adding 90,583 and 19,877 we will get the sum of 110,460.

Explanation:
By adding 90,583 and 19,877 we will get the sum of 110,460. To check whether the answer is reasonable we will subtract 19,877 with 110,460 the difference will be 90,583. So the answer is reasonable.

Lesson 2.2 Order of Operations

Explore and Grow

Two students were asked to find the value of the expression below and they got different answers. Only one student has the correct answer. The students did not make any mistakes in their calculations. How did they get different answers?
24 + 16 ÷ 4 – 2
Answer:
The other student did not use the BODMAS rule so the other student calculation is not correct.

Explanation:
To find the value of the expression 24 + 16 ÷ 4 – 2 first we will divide 16 by 4 then the result will be 4. Now we will add result 4 with the number 24 which is 24 + 4= 28. And now we will subtract the number 2 with 28 which is
28 – 2= 26. This expression was done by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. And this was done by one student. Now the other student has done the same expression in a different way. The expression is 24 + 16 ÷ 4 – 2, so the other student solves the expression by first adding 24 and 16 which is 24 + 16= 40, and then we will divide 40 by 4, so the result will be 10. And now we will subtract 2 with 10 and the result will be 10 – 2= 8. So the other student’s answer will be 8 which is not correct because the other student did not use the BODMAS rule so the other student’s calculation is not correct.

Structure
Why is it important to have rules when finding values of expressions that contain more than one operation?
Answer:
It is important to have the rules when finding the values of expressions that contain more than one operation because the rules tell that the right order in which we will solve different parts of a math problem. And the order of operations is very important because it guarantees that we can all read and solve the problem in the same way.

Think and Grow: Use Order of Operations

Key Idea
A numerical expression is an expression that contains numbers and operations. When you evaluate a numerical expression, you find the value of the expression.
When evaluating a numerical expression, use a set of rules called the order of operations. These rules tell you the order in which to perform the operations.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 1
Order of Operations
1. Perform operations in parentheses
2. Multiply and divide from left to right
3. Add and subtract from left to right

Example
Evaluate 19 – 18 ÷ 6.
Using the order of operations, divide first. Then subtract.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 2
So, 19 – 18 ÷ 6 = _______.

Example
Evaluate 30 ÷ (3 + 7) × 2.
Using the order of operations, perform the addition in the parentheses first. Then multiply and divide from left to right.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 3
So, 30 ÷ (3 + 7) × 2 = ______.

Show and Grow

Evaluate the expression.
Question 1.
24 + 4 ÷ 2
Answer:
The value of the expression 24 + 4 ÷ 2 is 26.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right.  And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the division part of the expression which is 4 ÷ 2 = 2 and the result will be 2. Now we solve the addition part, we will add the result with 24 which is 24 + 2 = 26. So the value of the expression is 26.

Question 2.
12 + (10 – 3) × 8
Answer:
The value of the expression 12 + (10 – 3) × 8 is 68.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses part which is (10 – 3)= 7 and the result will be 7. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 7 × 8= 56 and the result will be 56. And now we will solve the addition part which is 12 + 56= 68. So the value of the expression is 68.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Evaluate the expression.
Question 3.
25 + (10 ÷ 5)
Answer:
The value of the expression is 27.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses part which is (10 ÷ 5)= 2 and the result will be 2. Now we will add the result with 25 which is 25 + 2= 27. So the value of the expression is 27.

Question 4.
10 + 10 + 7
Answer:
The sum of the expression 10 + 10 +7 is 27.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. As there are no other expressions rather than addition we will perform addition to the given expression 10 + 10 + 7 and the sum of the expression
10 + 10 +7 is 27.

Question 5.
48 ÷ (8 – 2)
Answer:
The value of the expression 48 ÷ (8 – 2) is 8.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses which is (8 – 2)= 6. Now we will perform division operation for 48 by 6 and the result will be 8. So the value of the expression 48 ÷ (8 – 2) is 8.

Question 6.
(45 + 25) ÷ 10
Answer:
The value of the expression (45 + 25) ÷ 10 is 7.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition and Subtraction. So first will solve the parentheses part which is (45 + 25)= 70 and now we will perform division 70 ÷ 10 and the result will be 7. So the value of the expression (45 + 25) ÷ 10 is 7.

Question 7.
63 – 54 ÷ 9
Answer:
The value of the expression 63 – 54 ÷ 9 is 57.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the division part which is 54 ÷ 9= 6 and the result is 6. Now we will subtract the result with 63 which is 63 – 6= 57. So the value of the expression 63 – 54 ÷ 9 is 57.

Question 8.
\(\left(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{2}\right) \times 5\)
Answer:
The value of the expression \(\left(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{2}\right) \times 5\) is 5.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the parentheses part which is \(\left(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{2}\right) so the value will be 1. And now we will perform the multiplication part which is 1 × 5= 5. So the value of the expression [latex]\left(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{2}\right) \times 5\) is 5.

Question 9.
15 + (16 – 6) × 1
Answer:
The value of the expression 15 + (16 – 6) × 1 is 25.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (16 – 6)= 10 and the result will be 6. Now we will perform the multiplication part which is 10 × 1= 10 and the result will be 10. And now we will perform the addition which is 15 + 10 then the result will be 25. So the value of the expression 15 + (16 – 6) × 1 is 25.

Question 10.
(18 + 23 + 22) ÷ 9
Answer:
The value of the expression (18 + 23 + 22) ÷ 9 is 7.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (18 + 23 + 22)= 63 and the result will be 63. Now we will perform division which is
63 ÷ 9= 7. So the value of the expression (18 + 23 + 22) ÷ 9 is 7.

Question 11.
80 – 6 × 5 × 2
Answer:
The value of the expression 80 – 6 × 5 × 2 will be 20.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the multiplication part which is 6 × 5 × 2= 60 and the result will be 60. Now we will solve the subtraction part which is 80 – 60= 20. So the value of the expression 80 – 6 × 5 × 2 will be 20.

Insert parentheses to make the statement true.
Question 12.
6 + 2 × 7 = 56
Answer:
The expression after inserting parentheses is (6 +2) × 7.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 6 + 2 × 7. So we will insert the parentheses for 6 + 2, then the expression will be
(6 +2) × 7. So we will solve the expression using the BODMAS rule, now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (6 +2)= 8. And now we will perform the multiplication part which is 8 × 7= 56. So the statement is true by inserting the parentheses for 6 + 2.

Question 13.
18 – 6 ÷ 2 + 5 = 11
Answer:
The expression after inserting parentheses is (18 – 6) ÷ 2 + 5.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 18 – 6 ÷ 2 + 5. So we will insert the parentheses for 18 – 6, then the expression will be
(18 – 6) ÷ 2 + 5. So we will solve the expression using the BODMAS rule, now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (18 – 6)= 12. And now we will perform division which is 12 ÷ 2= 6. Now we will perform the addition part which is 6 + 5= 11. So the statement is true by inserting the parentheses for 18 – 6.

Question 14.
10 + 2 × 4 – 1 = 16
Answer:
The statement is true by inserting parentheses for 4 – 1 and the expression is 10 + 2 ×(4 – 1).

Explanation:
Given the expression is 10 + 2 × 4 – 1. So we will insert the parentheses for 4 – 1, then the expression will be
10 + 2 ×(4 – 1). So we will solve the expression using the BODMAS rule, now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (4 – 1)= 3. And now we will perform the multiplication part which is 2 × 3= 6. And now we will add the result 6 with 10 which is 10 + 6= 16. So the statement is true by inserting parentheses for 4 – 1.

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 4
Answer:
No, Newton is not correct.

Explanation:
No, Newton is not correct. Because Newton did not use the BODMAS rule to solve the expression. By using the BODMAS rule first Newton should solve the division part and then he should solve the addition part.

Question 16.
Writing
Describe how you can evaluate 9 × (40 + 5) two different ways.
Answer:
The expression 9 × (40 + 5) can be solved by the BODMAS way and the other way to solve the expression is by Distributive property.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 9 × (40 + 5), so to solve the expression we will use the BODMAS rule. So by the BODMAS rule first we will solve the parentheses part which is (40 + 5)= 45 and then we will solve the multiplication part which s 9 × 45= 405. This process is one way to solve the given expression. Another way to solve the expression is by Distributive property and the equation can be solved as
9 × (40 + 5) = (9 × 40) + (9 + 5)
= 360 + 451
= 405.
and this property is called as Distributive property which means Distributive Property is a property of Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A robotics team orders 14 shirts. The order has a $9 shipping fee. Use the expression 14 × 12 + 9 to find how much the team spends on the order.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 5
Evaluate 14 × 12 + 9 using the order of operations.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 6
The team spends _____ on the order.

Answer:
The team spends $177 on the order.

Explanation:
As robotic team orders, 14 shirts and the order has a $9 shipping fee and the given expression is 14 × 12 + 9. We can solve this expression by the BODMAS rule in which BODMAS stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the multiplication part which is stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the multiplication part which is 14 × 12= 168 and then we will solve the addition part which is 168 + 9= 177. So the team spends $177 on the order.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-5th-Grade-Chapter-2-Numerical-Expressions-2.2-6

Show and Grow

Question 17.
A parking garage has 7 floors with 109 spaces on each floor. There are 486 spaces being used. Use the expression 7 × 109 – 486 to find how many spaces are not being used.
Answer:
The number of spaces that are not being used is 1,367.

Explanation:
As a parking garage has 7 floors with 109 spaces on each floor and there are 486 spaces being used, so given expression is 7 × 109 – 486. So the given expression first we will solve the multiplication part by the BODMAS rule in which BODMAS stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So now first we will solve the multiplication part which is 7 × 109= 1,853 and then we will solve the subtraction part which is
1853 – 486= 1,367. So the number of spaces that are not being used is 1,367.

Question 18.
At a fair, you ride the swinging ship 3 times and the bumper cars 5 times. Use the expression (3 × 2) + (5 × 4) to find how many tickets you use in all.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 7
Answer:
The number of tickets I have used is 26 tickets.

Explanation:
As a fair has a swinging ship and a bumper car and I rode the swinging ship 3 times and the bumper cars 5 times, so the given expression is (3 × 2) + (5 × 4). By the BODMAS rule first, we will solve the parentheses part and in which BODMAS stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (3 × 2) + (5 × 4)= 6 + 20 and then we will solve the addition part which is 6 + 20= 26. So the number of tickets I have used is 26 tickets.

Question 19.
You download 128 songs and divide them into4 equal-sized playlists. You delete 1 playlist. Then you download 56 more songs. Use the expression 128 – (128 ÷ 4) + 56 to find how many songs you have now.
Answer:
The number of songs we had is 40 songs.

Explanation:
As I have downloaded 128 songs and divide them into 4 equal-sized playlists and then deleted 1 playlist. Then I have downloaded 56 more songs, so the given expression is 128 – (128 ÷ 4) + 56. By the BODMAS rule first we will solve the parentheses part and in which BODMAS stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (128 ÷ 4)= 32 and now we will solve the addition part which is 32 + 56= 88, and now we will solve the subtraction part which is 128 – 88= 40. So the number of songs we have is 40 songs.

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
A politician buys 3 boxes of campaign buttons. There are 60 buttons in each box. He divides the buttons into4 equal groups. How many buttons are in each group?
Answer:
There will be 45 buttons in each group.

Explanation:
As a politician buys 3 boxes of campaign buttons and there are 60 buttons in each box. So the total number of buttons is 3 × 60= 180 buttons and then he divides the buttons into four equal groups. So the number of buttons in each group is 180 ÷ 4= 45. So there will be 45 buttons in each group.

Order of Operations Homework & Practice 2.2

Evaluate the expression.
Question 1.
(8 – 2) × 4
Answer:
The value of the expression (8 – 2) × 4 will be 24.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (8 – 2)= 6 and the result will be 6. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 6 × 4= 24. So the value of the expression (8 – 2) × 4 will be 24.

Question 2.
7 + (6 ÷ 3)
Answer:
The value of the expression 7 + (6 ÷ 3) will be 10.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (6 ÷ 3)= 3 and the result will be 3. Now we will solve the addition part which is 7 + 3= 10. So the value of the expression 7 + (6 ÷ 3) will be 10.

Question 3.
5 × (6 + 2)
Answer:
The value of the expression 5 × (6 + 2) will be 40.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (6 + 2)= 8 and the result will be 8. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 5 × 8= 40. So the value of the expression 5 × (6 + 2) will be 40.

Question 4.
21 + 42 ÷ 7
Answer:
The value of the expression 21 + 42 ÷ 7 will be 27.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the Division part which is 42 ÷ 7= 6 and the result will be 6. Now we will solve the addition part which is 21 + 6= 27. So the value of the expression 21 + 42 ÷ 7 will be 27.

Question 5.
\(\left(\frac{1}{4}+\frac{2}{4}+\frac{3}{4}\right)\) × 2
Answer:
The value of the expression \(\left(\frac{1}{4}+\frac{2}{4}+\frac{3}{4}\right)\) × 2 will be 3.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve parentheses part which is \(\left(\frac{1}{4}+\frac{2}{4}+\frac{3}{4}\right)\)= 6/4 and the result will be 3/2. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 3/2 × 2= 3. So the value of the expression
\(\left(\frac{1}{4}+\frac{2}{4}+\frac{3}{4}\right)\) × 2 will be 3.

Question 6.
86 – 9 × 6
Answer:
The value of the expression 86 – 9 × 6 will be 32.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the multiplication part which is 9 × 6= 54 and the result will be 54. Now we will solve the subtraction part which is 86 – 54= 32. So the value of the expression 86 – 9 × 6 will be 32.

Question 7.
56 – 22 ÷ 2
Answer:
The value of the expression 56 – 22 ÷ 2 will be 45.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the division part which is 22 ÷ 2= 11 and the result will be 11. Now we will solve the subtraction part which is 56 – 11= 45. So the value of the expression 56 – 22 ÷ 2 will be 45.

Question 8.
27 + 11 × 4
Answer:
The value of the expression 27 + 11 × 4 will be 71.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the multiplication part which is 11 × 4= 44 and the result will be 44. Now we will solve the addition part which is 27 + 44= 71. So the value of the expression 27 + 11 × 4 will be 71.

Question 9.
21 – (12 + 6) ÷ 9
Answer:
The value of the expression 21 – (12 + 6) ÷ 9 will be 19.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (12 + 6)= 18 and the result will be 18. Now we will solve the division part which is 18 ÷ 9= 2 and now we will solve the subtraction part which is 21 – 2= 19. So the value of the expression 21 – (12 + 6) ÷ 9 will be 19.

Evaluate the expression.
Question 10.
9 × (5 + 15) – 42
Answer:
The value of the expression 9 × (5 + 15) – 42 will be 138.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (5 + 15)= 20 and the result will be 20. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 9 × 20= 180 and now we will solve the subtraction part which is 180 – 42= 138. So the value of the expression 9 × (5 + 15) – 42 will be 138.

Question 11.
14 + 56 ÷ 7 – 6
Answer:
The value of the expression 14 + 56 ÷ 7 – 6 will be 16.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the division part which is 56 ÷ 7= 8 and the result will be 8. Now we will solve the addition part which is 14 + 8= 22 and now we will solve the subtraction part which is 22- 6= 16. So the value of the expression 14 + 56 ÷ 7 – 6 will be 16.

Question 12.
(106 + 350 + 244) ÷ 10
Answer:
The value of the expression (106 + 350 + 244) ÷ 10 will be 70.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will solve the parentheses part which is (106 + 350 + 244) and the result will be 700. Now we will solve the division part which is 700 ÷ 10= 70. So the value of the expression (106 + 350 + 244) ÷ 10 will be 70.

Insert parentheses to make the statement true.
Question 13.
36 – 9 ÷ 9 = 3
Answer:
The statement is true by inserting parentheses for 36 – 9.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 36 – 9 ÷ 9 = 3. So we will insert the parentheses for 36 – 9, then the expression will be
(36 – 9) ÷ 9. So we will solve the expression using the BODMAS rule, now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (36 – 9)= 27. And now we will perform the division part which is 27 ÷ 9= 3. So the statement is true by inserting parentheses for 36 – 9.

Question 14.
12 + 8 ÷ 4 + 1 = 6
Answer:
The statement is true by inserting parentheses for 12 + 8.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 12 + 8 ÷ 4 + 1 = 6. So we will insert the parentheses for 12 + 8, then the expression will be
(12 + 8) ÷ 4 + 1. So we will solve the expression using the BODMAS rule, now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (12 + 8)= 20. And now we will perform the division part which is 20 ÷ 4= 5, now we will solve the addition part which is 5 + 1=6. So the statement is true by inserting parentheses for 12 + 8.

Question 15.
10 + 4 × 12 – 6 = 34
Answer:
The statement is true by inserting parentheses for 12 – 6.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 10 + 4 × 12 – 6 = 34. So we will insert the parentheses for 12 + 8, then the expression will be 10 + 4 × (12 – 6). So we will solve the expression using the BODMAS rule, now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (12 – 6)= 6. And now we will perform the multiplication part which is 4 × 6= 24, now we will solve the addition part which is 10 + 24=34. So the statement is true by inserting parentheses for 12 – 6.

Question 16.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says that because of the order of operations, the expressions are equivalent. Is your friend correct? Explain.
10 – (5 × 2) + 7    10 – 5 × 2 + 7
Answer:
Yes, my friend is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, my friend is correct. The expressions are equivalent because of the order of operations. By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So if we solve the expression without parentheses we will get the same result. So my friend is correct.

Question 17.
Number Sense
Which expressions have a value of 9?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 8
Answer:
On solving all the expressions the expression 5 + 40 ÷ 5 – 4, 5 × (10 – 4) – 21 has got the value of 9.

Explanation:
To check which expression has a value of 9, we will follow the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So the first expression is
2 + 1 × 3= 2 + 3, here first we will solve the multiplication part by the order of operations and then we will solve the addition part.
on solving we will get the result as 5.
So the first expression didn’t get the value as 9.
The second expression is
3 × 4 – 1= 12 – 1, here first we will solve the multiplication part by the order of operations and then we will solve the addition part.
on solving we will get the result as 11.
So the second expression didn’t get the value as 9.
The third expression is
5 + 40 ÷ 5 – 4 = 5 + 8 – 4
= 13 – 4, here first we will solve the division part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part, and then the subtraction part.
On solving we will get the result as 9.
So the expression has the value 9.
The fourth expression is
40 – 30 ÷ 10 + 8 = 40 – 3 +8
= 40 – 11, here first we will solve the division part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part, and then the subtraction part.
On solving we will get the result as 29.
So the expression didn’t get the value as 9.
The fifth expression is
18 ÷ (8+0+18) = 18 ÷ (26), here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the division part. By seeing the solution we can say that the expression didn’t get the value 9.
The sixth expression is
5 × (10 – 4) – 21 = 5 × (6) – 21
= 30 – 21, here first we will solve the parentheses part by order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part, and then we will solve the subtraction part.
On solving we will get the result as 9.
So the expression has the value 9.
On solving all the expressions the expression 5 + 40 ÷ 5 – 4, 5 × (10 – 4) – 21 has got the value of 9.

Question 18.
Modeling Real Life
Fifth graders at a school write a paper about a historical person for a contest. There are 5 classes of 25 students and 1 class of 28 students participating in the contest. Use the expression 5 × 25 + 28 to find how many students participate in the contest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 9
Answer:
The number of students who participated in the contest is 153.

Explanation:
As there are 5 classes of 25 students and 1 class of 28 students participating in the contest and the given expression is 5 × 25 + 28. So, here first we will solve the multiplication part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part. So
5 × 25 + 28= 125 + 28
On solving the expression we will get the result as 153. So the number of students who participated in the contest is 153.

Review & Refresh

Divide. Then check your answer.
Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 10
Answer:
On dividing 832 ÷ 8 we will get the result as 104.

Explanation:
On dividing 832 ÷ 8 we will get the result as 104. To check the answer we will multiply the result 104 and 8 which is 104 × 8= 832.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 11
Answer:
On dividing 215 ÷ 7 we will get the result as 30.71.

Explanation:
On dividing 215 ÷ 7 we will get the result as 30.71. To check the answer we will multiply the result 30.71 and 7 which is 30.71 × 7= 214.97.

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.2 12
Answer:
On dividing 5,078 ÷ 5 we will get the result as 1015.6.

Explanation:
On dividing 5,078 ÷ 5 we will get the result as 1015.6. To check the answer we will multiply the result 1015.6 and 5 which is 1015.6 × 7= 5,078.

Lesson 2.3 Write Numerical Expressions

Explore and Grow

Write a real-life problem that can be represented by one of the expressions below. Switch papers with your partner. Which expression represents your partner’s problem? Explain.
7 × (8 + 5)
(7 × 8) + 5
Answer:
The expression represented by the partner is (7 × 8) + 5.

Explanation:
Given that the expressions are 7 × (8 + 5) and (7 × 8) + 5. So the solution for my problem is
7 × (8 + 5)= 7 × (12), here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. On solving we will get the result as 84. While checking my friend’s paper he solved the expression (7 × 8) + 5= 56 +5, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part. On solving we will get the result as 61. AS the parentheses are different in the expression so the answer differs.

Make Sense of Problems
How can parentheses change the meaning of an expression? Explain.
Answer:
These parentheses in the expression represent that the expression or the equation should be solved first before any other calculation has done. The path between the parentheses represents as one number.

Think and Grow: Write an Interpret Expressions

Example
Write the words as an expression.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 1
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 2
10 ÷ _______
The numerical expression is ______.

Answer:
The numerical expression is 10 ÷ (9 – 4).

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is 10 ÷ (9 – 4). So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the division part. So
10 ÷ (9 – 4) = 10 ÷ 5
on solving we will get the result as 5.

Example
Write the words as an expression. Then interpret the expression.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 3
The numerical expression is _____.
The value of the expression is _______ times the sum 54 + 97.

Answer:
The numerical expression is (54 + 97) × 2.
The value of the expression is 2 times the sum of 54 + 97.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (54 + 97) × 2. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
(54 + 97) × 2 = 151 × 2
on solving we will get the result as 302.
The numerical expression is (54 + 97) × 2.
The value of the expression is 2 times the sum of 54 + 97.

Show and Grow

Write the words as an expression
Question 1.
Multiply 8 and 5, then divide by 4.
Answer:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (8 × 5) ÷ 4.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (8 × 5) ÷ 4. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the division part. So
(8 × 5) ÷ 4= 40 ÷ 4
on solving we will get the result as 10.

Question 2.
Multiply the sum of 14 and 18 by 4.
Answer:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (14 + 18) × 4.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (14 + 18) × 4. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
(14 + 18) × 4= 32 × 4
on solving we will get the result as 128.

Write the words as an expression. Then interpret the expression.
Question 3.
Multiply 3 by the sum of 12 and 3.
Answer:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is 3 × (12 + 3).

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is 3 × (12 + 3). So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
3 × (12 + 3)= 3 × 15
on solving we will get the result as 45.

Question 4.
Subtract 30 from 50, then divide by 10.
Answer:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (50 – 30) ÷ 10.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (50 – 30) ÷ 10. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the division part. So
(50 – 30) ÷ 10= 20 ÷ 10
on solving we will get the result as 2.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the words as an expression. Then interpret the expression.
Question 5.
Add 238 and 12, then multiply by 3.
Answer:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (238 + 12) × 3.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (238 + 12) × 3. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
(238 + 12) × 3= 250 × 3
on solving we will get the result as 750.

Question 6.
Subtract 15 from 60, then divide by 9.
Answer:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (60 – 15) ÷ 9.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (60 – 15) ÷ 9. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the division part. So
(60 – 15) ÷ 9= 45 ÷ 9
on solving we will get the result as 5.

Write the words as an expression. Then evaluate the expression.
Question 7.
Multiply 5 by the difference of 25 and 20.
Answer:
The numerical expression is 5 × (25 – 20) and on evaluating we will get the value as 25.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is 5 × (25 – 20). So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
5 × (25 – 20)= 5 × 5
on solving we will get the result as 25.

Question 8.
Add the product of 60 and 4 to the product of 5 and 4.
Answer:
The numerical expression is (60 × 4) + (5 × 4) and on evaluating we will get the value as 260.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (60 × 4) + (5 × 4). So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part. So
(60 × 4) + (5 × 4)= 240 + 20
on solving we will get the result as 260.

Write the expression in words.
Question 9.
13 + (4 × 6)
Answer:
Add 13 to the product of 4 and 6.

Explanation:
To expand the given expression 13 + (4 × 6) in words we will be written as
Add 13 to the product of 4 and 6.

Question 10.
(4 + 8) ÷ 2
Answer:
Add 4 and 8 and then divide by 2.

Explanation:
To expand the given expression 13 + (4 × 6) in words we will be written as
add 4 and 8 and then divide by 2.

Question 11.
Newton has $20. He spends $4 on lunch and $13 at the store. Write an expression to represent the situation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 4
Answer:
The expression can be represented as
$20 – ($13 + $4)= $20 – ($17)

Explanation:
As Newton has $20 and he spends $4 on lunch and $13 at the store. So the expression can be represented as
$20 – ($13 + $4)= $20 – ($17)
here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the subtraction part. On solving we will get $3.

Question 12.
Writing
Explain how you know which operation to use when writing words as an expression.
Answer:
The operation to use when writing words as expressions are
The sum is used as addition and the difference is used as subtraction and the product is used as the product and the quotient is used as the division.

Question 13.
Number Sense
Write the words as an expression. Then use a property of addition to write an equivalent expression.
Add 9 to the sum of 21 and 6.
Answer:
The numerical expression of the given expression is 9 + (21 + 6) and the property used to solve the expression is Distributive property.

Explanation:
Given that the expression in words is Add 9 to the sum of 21 and 6. The numerical expression of the given expression is 9 + (21 + 6). The property we can use to solve the expression is distributive property. By Distributive Property is a property in which Multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So by the distributive property, the expression will be solved as
9 + (21 + 6)= 9 + 27, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part. On solving we will get the result as 36.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
On your turn of a word game, you draw the card shown and create the word MATH. Your word score is the sum of the points of the letters you use. How many points do you earn on your turn?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 5
Write an expression.
Think: Add _____, _____, _____, and _____, then multiply by _____. (____ + ____ + _____ + _____) × _____
Interpret the expression.
You earn ____ times as many points as the value of your word score.

Answer:
Add 3 + 1 + 1 + 4, then multiply by 3. (3 + 1 + 1 + 4) × 3
You earn 3 times as many points as the value of your word score.

Explanation:
Given that the word M has a score of 3 and the word A has a score of 1 and the word T has a score of 1 and the word H has a score of 4. As word score is the sum of the points of the letters you use so we will add the total score which is 3 + 1 + 1 + 4= 9 and now we will multiply by 3 to triple the score. So the expression will be
(3 + 1 + 1 + 4) × 3= (9) × 3, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. On solving we will get the result as 27.

Evaluate the expression.
(3 + 1 + 1 + 4) × 3 = ______ × _____
= ____
So, you earn _____ points on your turn.

Answer:
The points that I have earned in my turn is 27.

Explanation:
Given the expression is (3 + 1 + 1 + 4) × 3= (9) × 3, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. On solving we will get the result as 27. So the points that I have earned in my turn are 27.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You make 2 batches of fruit salad. How many cups of fruit do you use in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 6
Answer:
The number of cups of fruit does we use in all is 14 cups.

Explanation:
As there are two cups of strawberries, 1 1/2 cups blueberries, 2 1/2 cups grapes,1 cup pineapple and there are two batches of fruit salad. So the expression will be 2 × ( 2 + 1 1/2 + 2 1/2 + 1).
2 × ( 2 + 1 1/2 + 2 1/2 + 1)= 2 × ((4 + 3 + 5 + 2)/2)
= 2 × (14/2) here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. On solving we will get the result as 14. So the number of cups of fruit do we use in all is 14 cups.

Question 15.
A customer places an online order for a video game that costs $49 and 3 books that each cost $12. Shipping costs $6. What is the total cost of the order?
Answer:
The numerical expression will be 49 + (3 × 12) + 6 on solving the result will be 91.

Explanation:
As the customer places an online order for a video game that costs $49 and 3 books and each book costs $12 and the shipping cost is $6. So the numerical expression will be 49 + (3 × 12) + 6.
49 + (3 × 12) + 6= 49 + 36 +6, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part. On solving we will get the result as 91.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
Eight students use2 sets of 52 cards to play a game. The cards are divided equally among the players. How many cards does each player get?
Answer:
The numerical expression is (2 × 52) ÷ 8 on solving the result will be 13.

Explanation:
As there are eight students and uses two sets of 52 cards to play a game, so the cards are equally divided among the players. So the numerical expression will be (2 × 52) ÷ 8.
(2 × 52) ÷ 8= 104 ÷ 8, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the division part. On solving we will get the result as 13.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
How much more does it cost to rent 2 adult bikes for 4 hours than a tandem bike for 4 hours? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 7
Answer:
It costs four times more than the tandem bike.

Explanation:
To rent a two adult bike for four hours then a tandem bike for four hours.
So the numerical expression will be (2 × 4) – 4.
(2 × 4) – 4= 8 – 4, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the subtraction part. On solving we will get the result as 4.

Write Numerical Expressions Homework & Practice 2.3

Write the words as an expression.
Question 1.
Add 10 to the quotient of 72 and 8.
Answer:
The numerical expression is  (72 ÷ 8) + 10 and on evaluating we will get the value as 19.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (72 ÷ 8) + 10. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
(72 ÷ 8) + 10= 9 + 10
on solving we will get the result as 19.

Question 2.
Subtract 55 from the sum of 124 and 56.
Answer:
The numerical expression is  (124 + 56) – 10 and on evaluating we will get the value as 170.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (124 + 56) – 10. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
(124 + 56) – 10= 180 – 10
on solving we will get the result as 170.

Write the words as an expression. Then interpret the expression.
Question 3.
Add 14 and 13, then divide by 3.
Answer:
The numerical expression is  (14 + 13) ÷ 3 and on evaluating we will get the value as 9.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (14 + 13) ÷ 3. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
(14 + 13) ÷ 3= 27 ÷ 3
on solving we will get the result as 9.

Question 4.
Subtract 29 from 39, then multiply by \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Answer:
The numerical expression is  (39 – 29) × 1/2 and on evaluating we will get the value as 5.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (39 – 29) × 1/2. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the multiplication part. So
(39 – 29) × 1/2= 10 × 1/2
on solving we will get the result as 5.

Write the words as an expression. Then evaluate the expression.
Question 5.
Subtract the product of 5 and 8 from the product of 10 and 9.
Answer:
The numerical expression is (10 × 9) – (5 × 8) and on evaluating we will get the value as 50.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (10 × 9) – (5 × 8). So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the subtraction part. So
(10 × 9) – (5 × 8)= 90 – 40
on solving we will get the result as 50.

Question 6.
Add 15 to the quotient of 60 and 3.
Answer:
The numerical expression is 15 + (60 ÷ 3) and on evaluating we will get the value as 35.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is 15 + (60 ÷ 3). So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part. So
15 + (60 ÷ 3)= 15 + (20)
on solving we will get the result as 35.

Write the expression in words.
Question 7.
35 – (14 + 17)
Answer:
The expression in words is Subtract the sum of 14 and 17 with 35.

Explanation:
To expand the given expression 35 – (14 + 17) in words we will be written as
Subtract the sum of 14 and 17 with 35.

Question 8.
(30 – 20) × 10
Answer:
The expression in words is Subtract 30 and 20 and then multiply by 10.

Explanation:
To expand the given expression (30 – 20) × 10 in words we will be written as
Subtract 30 and 20 and then multiply by 10.

Question 9.
Descartes has $9. He works 5 hours and earns $8 each hour. Write an expression to represent the situation.
Answer:
The expression will be (5 × 8)+ 9 and on solving the expression we will get the result as 49.

Explanation:
As Descartes has $9 and he works 5 hours and earns $8 each hour, so the expression will be (5 × 8)+ 9.
(5 × 8)+ 9= 40 + 9, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part. On solving the expression we will get the result as 49.

Question 10.
Open-Ended
Write a real-life problem that can be represented by the phrase “5 more than the sum of 15 and 7.”
Answer:
The numerical expression is (15 + 7) +5.

Explanation:
To represent the phrase 5 more than the sum of 15 and 7 in a numerical expression is (15 + 7) +5. As given that the 5 more than the sum of 15 and 7so we will add the number 5 to the sum of 15 and 7.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Write two different expressions that each represent the combined area of the rectangles. Then evaluate the expressions.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 8
Answer:

Explanation:

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A music teacher replaces the strings on 3 violins, 2 violas, 4 cellos, and 1 bass. There are 4 strings on each of the instruments. How many strings does the teacher replace?
Answer:
The total number of strings replaced by the teacher is 37.

Explanation:
As music teacher replaces the strings on 3 violins, 2 violas, 4 cellos, and 1 bass and there are 4 strings on each of the instruments. So the teacher replaces 3 × 4= 12 violins and 2 × 4= 8 violas and 4 × 4= 16 cellos and 1 × 4= 1 bass. So the total number of strings replaced by the teacher is 12 + 8 + 16 + 1= 37.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
A customer buys 2 shirts that cost $10 each and a pair of jeans that costs $14. What is the customer’s total after using the coupon?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.3 9
Answer:
The customer’s total after using the coupon is $24.

Explanation:
As the customer buys 2 shirts that cost $10 each which is 2 × 10= 20 and a pair of jeans that costs $14 which is
2 × 14= 28. So the total purchase is 20 + 28= 48 and the coupon is 1/2 off on the entire purchase. This means
48 × 1/2= 24. So the customer’s total after using the coupon is $24.

Review & Refresh

Subtract.
Question 14.
9\(\frac{3}{4}\) – 5\(\frac{1}{4}\) = _____
Answer:
On subtracting 9\(\frac{3}{4}\) – 5\(\frac{1}{4}\) we will get the result as
4\(\frac{2}{4}\).

Explanation:
To subtract 9\(\frac{3}{4}\) – 5\(\frac{1}{4}\) first we need to convert mixed fraction into improper fraction. So the improper fraction will be \(\frac{39}{4}\) – \(\frac{21}{4}\). As the denominator is equal which is 4 so on subtracting \(\frac{39}{4}\) – \(\frac{21}{4}\) we will get the result as \(\frac{18}{4}\). So the mixed fraction of the result is 4\(\frac{2}{4}\).

Question 15.
6\(\frac{1}{3}\) – 3\(\frac{1}{3}\) = ______
Answer:
On subtracting 6\(\frac{1}{3}\) – 3\(\frac{1}{3}\) we will get the result as
\(\frac{3}\).

Explanation:
To subtract 6\(\frac{1}{3}\) – 3\(\frac{1}{3}\) first we need to convert mixed fraction into improper fraction. So the improper fraction will be \(\frac{19}{3}\) – \(\frac{10}{3}\). As the denominator is equal which is 3 so on subtracting \(\frac{19}{3}\) – \(\frac{10}{3}\) we will get the result as \(\frac{9}{3}\) which is \(\frac{3}\).

Question 16.
4\(\frac{7}{12}\) – 1\(\frac{11}{12}\) = ______
Answer:
On subtracting 4\(\frac{7}{12}\) – 1\(\frac{11}{12}\) we will get the result as
\(\frac{8}{3}\).

Explanation:
To subtract 4\(\frac{7}{12}\) – 1\(\frac{11}{12}\) first we need to convert mixed fraction into improper fraction. So the improper fraction will be \(\frac{55}{12}\) – \(\frac{23}{12}\). As the denominator is equal which is 12 so on subtracting \(\frac{55}{12}\) – \(\frac{23}{12}\) we will get the result as \(\frac{32}{12}\) which is \(\frac{8}{3}\).

Lesson 2.4 Evaluate Expressions with Grouping Symbols

Explore and Grow

Write the words as an expression. How is the expression different from the expressions you wrote in previous lessons?

Multiply the sum of 4 and 5 by the difference of 8 and 7.
Answer:
The numerical expression is ( 4 + 5 ) × (8 – 7 ) and on evaluating we will get the result as 9.

Explanation:
Given, Multiply the sum of 4 and 5 by the difference of 8 and 7.
the sum of 4 and 5 is ( 4 + 5 )
the difference between 8 and 7 is ( 8 – 7 )
And the Multiplication of these two is  ( 4 + 5 ) × (8 – 7 ) = 9 × 1 = 9 .
Here we used simple mathematic rules for the expression other than using any properties and methods. And here we have only one pair of grouping symbols.

Precision
How can you evaluate an expression that has more than one pair of parentheses?
Answer: The expressions having more than one parenthesis can be evaluated by performing grouping symbols and in the next step, multiply and divide from left to right, Add and subtract from left to write if there are any,
parentheses( ), brackets [ ], braces { } are very helpful in grouping the symbols and to evaluate the numerical expression by performing inside operations parentheses, inside brackets, or inside braces.

Think and Grow: Evaluate with Grouping Symbols

Key Idea
Parentheses ( ), brackets [ ], and braces { } are called grouping symbols. You can write and evaluate numerical expressions that have more than one pair of grouping symbols.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 1
Order of Operations (with Grouping Symbols)
1. Perform operations in grouping symbols.
2. Multiply and divide from left to right.
3. Add and subtract from left to right.
Example
Evaluate (25 – 5) ÷ (3 + 1).
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 2
So, (25 – 5) ÷ (3 + 1) = ______ .

Example
Evaluate [60 – (3 + 7)] × 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 3

Show and Grow

Evaluate the expression.
Question 1.
(18 – 12) × (8 ÷ 4)
Answer:
On evaluating we will get the result as 12

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is (18 – 12) × (8 ÷ 4)
Firstly perform the operations within the parentheses,
Then we have,(8 ÷ 4) = 2,
(18 – 12) = 6, and now we will perform the multiplication part.
To evaluate the expression, multiply the resulting output from the inside parentheses operations, then 6 × 2 = 12
So , (18 – 12) × (8 ÷ 4) = 12

Question 2.
35 – [6 × (1 + 4)]
Answer:
On evaluating we will get the result as 5.

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is 35 – [6 × (1 + 4)]
Firstly perform the operations within the parentheses,
we have , (1 + 4) = 5 ,
Now performing operation inside brackets we get, [6 × 5] = 30,
and now we will  perform the subtraction part
Next, apply the resulted output in the expression then we have, 35 – 30 = 5.
So,  35 – [6 × (1 + 4)] = 5.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Evaluate the expression.
Question 3.
(60 – 12) ÷ (3 + 5)
Answer:
On evaluating we will get the result as 6

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is  (60 – 12) ÷ (3 + 5)
Firstly perform the operations within the parentheses,
we have , (60 – 12) = 48 ,
(3 + 5) = 8, now we will perform the subtraction part
Next, Divide the resulted outputs, we get 48 ÷ 8 = 6.
So , (60 – 12) ÷ (3 + 5) = 6

Question 4.
95 – (26 + 14) × (4 ÷ 2)
Answer:
On evaluating we will get the result as 15

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is 95 – (26 + 14) × (4 ÷ 2)
Firstly perform the operations within the parentheses,
we have (26 + 14) = 40 ,
(4 ÷ 2) = 2, now we will perform the multiplication part and then we will perform the subtraction part.
Now we have the given expression as 95 – ( 40 × 2 ), And calculating the inside parentheses we get ( 40 × 2 )= 80
Then 95 – 80 = 15
So , 95 – (26 + 14) × (4 ÷ 2) = 15 .

Question 5.
(8 + 2) × (13 + 7 + 5)
Answer:
On evaluating we will get the result as 250

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is (8 + 2) × (13 + 7 + 5)
Firstly perform the operations within the parentheses,
we have (8 + 2)  = 10,
(13 + 7 + 5) = 20, and now we will perform the multiplication part.
To evaluate the given expression apply the resulted output as 10 × 25= 250
So, (8 + 2) × (13 + 7 + 5) = 250.

Question 6.
2 × [(96 – 72) ÷ 8]
Answer:
On evaluating the numerical expression the result is 72.

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is 2 × [(96 – 72) ÷ 8]
Firstly perform the operations within the parentheses,
we have (96 – 72)  = 24,
[24 ÷ 8]= 3, and now we will perform the multiplication part.
To evaluate the given expression apply the resulted output as 24 × 3= 72
So, 2 × [(96 – 72) ÷ 8]= 72.

Question 7.
[(4 – 9) – (30 ÷ 6)] × 4
Answer:
On evaluating the expression we will get the result as 40.

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is [(4 – 9) – (30 ÷ 6)] × 4
Firstly perform the operations within the parentheses,
we have (4 – 9)  = (-5),
(30 ÷ 6) =5 which is [-5 -5]= 10 and now we will perform the multiplication part.
To evaluate the given expression apply the resulted output as 10 × 4= 40
So, [(4 – 9) – (30 ÷ 6)] × 4 = 40.

Question 8.
36 + {[(7 + 5) ÷ 6 × 9] + 24}
Answer:

Write the words as an expression. Then evaluate the expression.
Question 9.
Divide the sum of 35 and 28 by the sum of 3 and 4.
Answer:
The numerical expression is (35 + 28) ÷ (3 + 4) and on evaluating we will get the value as 9.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is (35 + 28) ÷ (3 + 4). So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the division part. So
(35 + 28) ÷ (3 + 4)= 63 ÷ 7
on solving we will get the result as 9.

Question 10.
Add 11 to the product of 4 and 6, then divide by 5.
Answer:
The numerical expression is [(4 × 6) + 11] ÷ 5 and on evaluating we will get the value as 9.

Explanation:
The numerical expression using parenthesis is [(4 × 6) + 11] ÷ 5. So, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part after that we will solve the division part. So
(35 + 28) ÷ (3 + 4)= 63 ÷ 7
on solving we will get the result as 9.

Question 11.
Reasoning
Will the value of {3 + [(38 – 10) – 1]} ÷ 3 change when the braces are removed? Explain.
Answer: Yes, the value will be changed if we remove the braces.

Explanation:
Yes, the value will be changed if we remove the braces because if the expression with braces means first we will solve the part of the braces and then we will solve by the order of operations. So by that, the value of the expression will be changed when the braces are removed.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Use each symbol once to make the number sentence true.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 4
Answer:
The numerical expression will be (8 + 2) × (20 ÷ 4) – 11.

Explanation:
The numerical expression will be (8 + 2) × (20 ÷ 4) – 11. Let’s solve the expression to check the answer.
(8 + 2) × (20 ÷ 4) – 11= (10) × (5) – 11
= 50 – 11, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part after that we will solve the subtraction part. On solving we will get the result as 39.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A woman walks 2 miles from her house to the lake, walks 3 laps on the sidewalk around the lake, then walks2 miles back to her house. She does this each day for 3 days. How many miles does the woman walk in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 5
Think: How many laps does she walk around the lake? How far does she walk to and from her house?
Write an expression.
[____ + (_____ × _____) + _____] × _____
Evaluate the expression.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 6
So, the woman walks ______ miles in all.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
You collect 12 coins and 4 gems, complete 2 missions, and fail to complete 1 mission. How many points do you earn?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 7
Answer:
The total number of points earned is 175.

Explanation:
The number of coins collected is 12, so the number of points earned for one coin is 5 so for 12 coins it will be
12 × 5= 60 points and the number of gems collected is 4, so the number of points earned for each gem is 10 so for 4 gems it will be 4 × 10= 40 points. The completed missions is 2, so the number of points earned for completing one mission is 50 so for 2 missions it will be 2 × 50= 100 points and the missions failed is 1, so the number of points lost for failing one mission is -25 so for 1 failed mission it will be 1× -25= -25 points. So the total number of points earned is (60 + 40 + 100) – 25= 200 -25, here first we will solve the parentheses part by the order of operations then we will solve the addition part after that we will solve the subtraction part. On solving we will get the result as 175. So the total number of points earned is 175.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A book has 200 pages. You read 10 pages twice each day for 1 week. What fraction of the book, in tenths, do you have left to read?
Answer:
Th fraction in tenths is 3/10.

Explanation:
As the book has 200 pages and 10 pages were read twice a day for a week as a week means seven days and twice a day means 2 × 7= 14. So the number of pages were read is 14 × 10= 140 pages. And the number of pages left is 200 – 140= 60. So to represent this in a fraction it will be 60/200 which is 3/10.

Evaluate Expressions with Grouping Symbols Homework & Practice 2.4

Evaluate the expression.
Question 1.
15 ÷ (5 × 1) – (2 × 1)
Answer:
On evaluating the given expression result will be 5.

Explanation:
Given the numerical expression is 15 ÷ (5 × 1) – (2 × 1). By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (5 × 1) – (2 × 1)= 5 – 2= 3 and the result will be 3. Now we will perform division which is
15 ÷ 3= 5. So the value of the expression 15 ÷ (5 × 1) – (2 × 1) is 5.

Question 2.
(7 + 9) ÷ (2 + 4 + 2)
Answer:
On evaluating the given expression we will get the result as 2.

Explanation:
Given the numerical expression is (7 + 9) ÷ (2 + 4 + 2). By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (7 + 9) ÷ (2 + 4 + 2)= 16 ÷ 8 and the result will be 16 ÷ 8. Now we will perform division which is
16 ÷ 8= 2. So the value of the expression (7 + 9) ÷ (2 + 4 + 2) is 2.

Question 3.
(1 + 5) × (2 + 3)
Answer:
On evaluating the given expression result will be 25.

Explanation:
Given the numerical expression is (1 + 5) × (2 + 3). By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (1 + 5) × (2 + 3)= 5 × 5 and the result will be 5 × 5. Now we will perform the multiplication part which is 5 × 5= 25. So the value of the expression
(1 + 5) × (2 + 3) is 25.

Question 4.
[(16 – 14) + (9 × 4)] ÷ 2
Answer:
On evaluating the given expression result will be 9.

Explanation:
Given the numerical expression is [(16 – 14) + (9 × 4)] ÷ 2. By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (16 – 14) + (9 × 4)= 2 + 36 and the result will be 38. Now we will perform the division part which is 38 ÷ 2= 19. So the value of the expression
[(16 – 14) + (9 × 4)] ÷ 2 is 19.

Question 5.
70 ÷ [(463 – 443) ÷ 2]
Answer:
On evaluating the given expression result will be 7.

Explanation:
Given the numerical expression is 70 ÷ [(463 – 443) ÷ 2]. By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (463 – 443)= 20 and the result will be 20. Now we will perform the division part which is 20 ÷ 2= 10. And there is another division part which is 70 ÷ 10= 70. So the value of the expression 70 ÷ [(463 – 443) ÷ 2] is 7.

Question 6.
9 × {[14 ÷ 2 + (4 – 1)] – 8}
Answer:
On evaluating the given expression result will be 18.

Explanation:
Given the numerical expression is 9 × {[14 ÷ 2 + (4 – 1)] – 8}. By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. Now first we will perform the parentheses part which is (4 – 1)= 3 and the result will be 3. Now we will perform the other parentheses part which is [14 ÷ 2 + (3)] = 7 + 3 and the result will be 10. Now we will perform the other parentheses part which is {10 – 8}= 2. Now we will perform the multiplication part which is 9 × 2= 18. So the value of the expression 9 × {[14 ÷ 2 + (4 – 1)] – 8} is 18.

Write the words as an expression. Then evaluate the expression.
Question 7.
Multiply the sum of 4 and 5 by the difference of 14 and 8.
Answer:
The numerical expression is (4 + 5) × (14 – 8) on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 54.

Explanation:
Given that Multiply the sum of 4 and 5 by the difference of 14 and 8, so to represent this in an expression it will be (4 + 5) × (14 – 8). Now we will solve the numerical expression which is (4 + 5) × (14 – 8) = 9 × 6
Now first we have solved the parentheses part which is (4 + 5) × (14 – 8) and the result will be 9 × 6. And then we will perform the multiplication part which is 9 × 6= 54. So on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 54.

Question 8.
Add 23, 26, and 17, then divide by 7.
Answer:
The numerical expression is (23 +26 +17) ÷ 7 on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 9.4.

Explanation:
Given that Add 23, 26, and 17, then divide by 7, so to represent this in an expression it will be (23 +26 +17) ÷ 7. Now we will solve the numerical expression which is (23 +26 +17) ÷ 7= 66 ÷ 7
Now first we have solved the parentheses part which is (23 +26 +17) and the result will be 66. And then we will perform the division part which is 66 ÷ 7= 9.4. So on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 9.4.

Question 9.
Writing
Explain how to evaluate the expression.
8 × [(36 – 33) × 2]
Answer:
On evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 48.

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is 8 × [(36 – 33) × 2]= 8 × [3 × 2]
Now first we have solved the parentheses part which is (36 – 33) and the result will be 3 and then we will perform the other parentheses part which is [3 × 2]= 6. And then we will perform the multiplication part which is
8 × 6= 48. So on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 48.

Question 10.
Open-Ended
Write and evaluate two equivalent numerical expressions that show the Distributive Property.
Answer:
The two numerical equations are 5 × (90 + 7) and 83 × 7.

Explanation:
Let the equation be 5 × 97, by distributive property the equation will be
= 5 × (90 + 7)
= (5 × 90) + (5 × 7)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the equation is
5 × 97 = 5 × (90 + 7)
= (5 × 90) + (5 × 7).

Let the equation is 83 × 7, by distributive property the equation will be
= 7 × (80 + 3)
= (7× 80) + (7 × 3)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. So the equation is
7 × 83 = 7 × (80 + 3)
= (7 × 80) + (7 × 3)

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend has 3 California postcards, 2 Hawaii postcards, and 4 New York postcards. He gives 1 postcard away, then divides the rest equally among 4 pages of a scrapbook. How many postcards are on each page?
Answer:

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A nutritionist recommends that fifth graders should eat about 305 grams of fruit each day.You eat the apple shown. How many more grams of fruit should you eat today?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2.4 8
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 13.
639 × 5 = _____
Answer:
The product of 639 × 5= 3195.

Explanation:
The product of 639 × 5 is 3,195. So to check the answer is reasonable we will divide the result by 5 which is
3195 ÷ 5= 639. So the answer is reasonable.

Question 14.
7 × 1,926 = _____
Answer:
The product of 7 × 1,926 is  13,482.

Explanation:
The product of 7 × 1,926 is 13,482. So to check the answer is reasonable we will divide the result by 7 which is
13,482 ÷ 7= 1,926. So the answer is reasonable.

Question 15.
507 × 3 = ______
Answer:
The product of 507 × 3 is 1,521.

Explanation:
The product of 507 × 3 is 1,521. So to check the answer is reasonable we will divide the result by 3 which is
1,521 ÷ 3= 507. So the answer is reasonable.

Numerical Expressions Performance Task

Atoms are the basic building blocks of matter. When two or more atoms bond together, they form a molecule or a compound.
• The chemical formula for a water molecule is H2O because it has 2 atoms of hydrogen (H) and 1 atom of oxygen (O).
• The chemical formula for the compound sodium chloride, also known as table salt, is NaCl because it has 1 atom of sodium (Na) and 1 atom of chlorine (Cl) in a repeating pattern.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 1
Question 1.
How many atoms are in 52 molecules of water?
Answer:

Question 2.
You and your friend want to make models for a science fair.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 2
a. Your friend wants to make a model of sodium chloride. The model has the same number of green and orange atoms. There are 4 × 4 × 4 atoms in all. How many orange atoms do you need?
b. You make a model of a salt-water mixture. You use 14 atoms of sodium, 14 atoms of chlorine, and 10 molecules of H2O. Write an expression that represents the number of atoms in your salt-water model. Use the Distributive Property to rewrite your expression. Find the number of atoms in your model.
c. You and your friend buy 3 boxes of foam balls to represent atoms. There are 45 foam balls in each box. How many foam balls are left after you and your friend make the models above?
Answer:

Numerical Expressions Activity

Expression Boss
Directions:
1. Each player rolls three dice to complete the numerical expression. Players can arrange the numbers however they choose.
2. Each player evaluates the numerical expression.
3. Players compare their values. The player with the greater value earns one point.
4. If the values are equal, each player earns one point.
5. The player with the most points at the end of the game wins!
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions 3
Answer:

Numerical Expressions Chapter Practice

2.1 Number Properties

Complete the equation. Identify the property shown.
Question 1.
56 × _____ = 0
Answer:
The product of 56 × 0 is 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.

Explanation:
The product of 56 × 0 is 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.
As Multiplication Properties of Zero is the product of any number and 0 is 0. So 56 × 0 is 0.

Question 2.
8 + (242 + 32) = (8 + 242) + _____
Answer:
The sum of 8 + (242 + 32) = (8 + 242) + 32 and the property which is used is the Commutative property. And the sum of the given expression is 282.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 8 + (242 + 32) = (8 + 242) + 32 and the property which is used is the Commutative property. Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. And the sum of the given expression is 282.

Use the Distributive Property to find the product.
Question 3.
8 × 64
Answer:
The equation is 8 × 64= 8 × (60 + 4)
= (8 × 60) + (8 × 4) and the property used is Distributive property.
And the product of the given expression is 512.

Explanation:
Given that 8 × 64, by distributive property the equation will be
= 8 × (60 + 4)
= (8 × 60) + (8 × 4)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. And the product of the given expression is 512.

Question 4.
57 × 9
Answer:
The equation is 57 × 9= 9 × (50 + 7)
= (9 × 50) + (9 × 7) and the property used is Distributive property.
And the product of the given expression is 513.

Explanation:
Given that 57 × 9, by distributive property the equation will be
= 9 × (50 + 7)
= (9 × 50) + (9 × 7)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. And the product of the given expression is 513.

Use a property to find the sum or product. Identify the property you used.
Question 5.
3 × 92
Answer:
The equation is 3 × 92= 3 × (90 + 2)
= (3 × 90) + (3 × 2) and the property used is Distributive property.
And the product of the given expression is 276.

Explanation:
Given that 3 × 92, by distributive property the equation will be
= 3 × (90 + 2)
= (3 × 90) + (3 × 2)
So, Distributive Property is a property that multiplying a sum (or difference) by a number is the same as multiplying each number in the sum (or difference) by the number and adding (or subtracting) the products. And the product of the given expression is 276.

Question 6.
41 × 6 × 0
Answer:
The product of 41 × 6 × 0 is 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.

Explanation:
The product of 41 × 6 × 0 is 0 and the property used is Multiplication Properties of Zero.
As Multiplication Properties of Zero is the product of any number and 0 is 0. So 41 × 6 × 0 is 0.

Question 7.
13 + 24 + 57
Answer:
The sum of 13 + 24 + 57 = 24 + 57 + 13 and the property which is used is the Commutative property. And the sum of the given expression is 94.

Explanation:
Given the expression is 13 + 24 + 57 = 24 + 57 + 13 and the property which is used is the Commutative property. Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. And the sum of the given expression is 94.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
The graph shows the number Favorite Apple of votes each apple received. How many people were surveyed? Identify the property you used.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions chp 8
Answer:
The total number of people surveyed is 46. And the property which can be used is the Commutative property

Explanation:
As given that each apple image is equal to four votes, so to know how many people are surveyed let’s first find the count of the apples and then the count of the votes. So Fuji has four apple images and a half apple image, so the total number of votes for Fuji is 4×4= 16 and a half apple image means two votes. So the total number of votes is 16 + 2= 18 votes. So the total number of votes for Fuji is 18 votes. And Granny Smith has three apple images, so the total number of votes for Granny Smith is 3×4= 12. And Honeycrisp has four apple images, so the total number of votes for Granny Smith is 4×4= 16. So the total number of people surveyed is 18 + 12 + 16= 46.
And the property which can be used is the Commutative property, as the Commutative Properties means changing the order of addends or factors does not change the sum or product. So the expression can be written as 18 + 12 + 16= 16 + 18 +12.

2.2 Order of Operations

Evaluate the expression.
Question 9.
18 × (9 – 3) ÷ 2
Answer:
The value of the expression 18 × (9 – 3) ÷ 2 is 54.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses part which is (9 – 3)= 6 and the result will be 6. Now we will solve the division part which is 6 ÷ 2= 3 and the result will be 3. And now we will solve the multiplication part which is 18 × 3= 54. So the value of the expression is 54.

Question 10.
50 – 18 ÷ 3 × 7
Answer:
The value of the expression 50 – 18 ÷ 3 × 7 is 8.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the division part which is 18 ÷ 3= 6 and the result will be 6. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 6 × 7= 42 and the result will be 42. And now we will solve the subtraction part which is 50 – 42= 8. So the value of the expression is 8.

Question 11.
(36 + 14) × 4 ÷ 5
Answer:
The value of the expression (36 + 14) × 4 ÷ 5 is 40.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses part which is (36 + 14)×4= 50 × 4  and the result will be 200. Now we will solve the division part which is
200 ÷ 5 = 40 and the result will be 40. So the value of the expression is 40.

Question 12.
Number Sense
Which expressions have a value of 6?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 2 Numerical Expressions chp 12
Answer:

2.3 Write Numerical Expressions

Write the words as an expression. Then interpret the expression.
Question 13.
Multiply 8 by the difference of 54 and 49.
Answer:
The numerical expression is (54 – 49) × 8 on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 40.

Explanation:
Given that Multiply 8 by the difference of 54 and 49, so to represent this in an expression it will be (54 – 49) × 8. Now we will solve the numerical expression which is (54 – 49) × 8 = 5 × 8
Now first we have solved the parentheses part which is (54 – 49) and the result will be 5. And then we will perform the multiplication part which is 5 × 8= 40. So on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 40.

Question 14.
Subtract 58 from 94, then divide by4.
Answer:
The numerical expression is (94 – 58) ÷ 4 on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 9.

Explanation:
Given that Subtract 58 from 94, then divide by4, so to represent this in an expression it will be (94 – 58) ÷ 4. Now we will solve the numerical expression which is (94 – 58) ÷ 4= 36 ÷ 4
Now first we have solved the parentheses part which is (94 – 58) and the result will be 36. And then we will perform the division part which is 36 ÷ 4= 9. So on evaluating the numerical expression we will get the result as 9.

Question 15.
Your friend buys a bag of 24 party favors and a bag of 16 party favors. She shares them equally among 5 friends. Write an expression to represent the problem.
Answer:

Write the expression in words.
Question 16.
45 + (7 × 8)
Answer:
Add 45 to the product of 7 and 8

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is 45 + (7 × 8), so in words, it will be represented as add 45 to the product of 7 and 8

Question 17.
(18 ÷ 2) – 5
Answer:
Divide 18 by 2 and then subtract 5.

Explanation:
Given that the numerical expression is (18 ÷ 2) – 5 so in words, it will be represented as divide 18 by 2 and then subtract 5.

2.4 Evaluate Expressions with Grouping Symbols

Evaluate the expression.
Question 18.
(28 – 14) × (42 ÷ 6)
Answer:
The value of the expression (28 – 14) × (42 ÷ 6) is 98.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses part which is (28 – 14) × (42 ÷ 6)= 14 × 7. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 14 × 7= 98 and the result will be 98. So the value of the expression is 98.

Question 19.
6 × [(21 – 9) ÷ 3]
Answer:
The value of the expression 6 × [(21 – 9) ÷ 3] is 24.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses part which is(21 – 9)= 12. Now we will solve the other parentheses part which is [12 ÷ 3]= 4 and the result will be 4. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is 6 × 4= 24. So the value of the expression is 24.

Question 20.
[(2 × 2) + (10 ÷ 5)] × 4
Answer:
The value of the expression [(2 × 2) + (10 ÷ 5)] × 4 is 32.

Explanation:
By the order of operations, we will perform the addition in the parentheses first and then multiply and divide from left to right. And then we will add and subtract from left to right. So this is performed by the BODMAS rule which stands for Bracket, Of, Division, Multiplication, Addition, and Subtraction. So first we will solve the parentheses part which is (2 × 2) + (10 ÷ 5)= 4 + 2 and the result will be 8. Now we will solve the multiplication part which is
8 × 4= 32. So the value of the expression is 32.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Answers are provided in a comprehensive manner for better understanding. Interested students have to solve as many questions as possible using the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Ch 10 and become pro at solving subtraction problems below 1,000. So that you can understand the concept and answer any kind of questions framed on the Subtraction of Numbers within 1,000.

Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000

BIM 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Answer Key is useful for the students who are willing to be perfect in Math skills and also parents for guiding their kid to have the best score in the written exam. This chapter includes questions on vocabulary, Subtract 10 and 100, Use a Number Line to Subtract Hundreds and Tens, Use a Number Line to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers, Use Compensation to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers, Use Models to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers, Subtract Three-Digit Numbers, Subtract from Numbers That Contain Zeros, Use Addition to Subtract and Explain Subtraction Strategies.

Learn the different ways of finding the difference of two numbers within 1,000. By solving the questions on Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Textbook, you can be able to find subtraction of any two numbers and explain how to use different subtraction strategies. Hence Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 pdf and learn the fundamentals in an easy manner.

Lesson 1 Subtract 10 and 100

Lesson 2 Use a Number Line to Subtract Hundreds and Tens

Lesson 3 Use a Number Line to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 4 Use Compensation to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 5 Use Models to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 6 Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Lesson 7 Subtract from Numbers That Contain Zeros

Lesson 8 Use Addition to Subtract

Lesson 9 Explain Subtraction Strategies

Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000

Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 v 1
Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 v 2

Answer:
8 is the sum and 5 is the difference.

Explanation:
By adding 5+3 we will get the sum of those two digits which is 8 and, by subtracting 8-3 we will get the difference of those two digits which is 5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-v-2

Define It
Match.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 v 3

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-v-3
Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems.
Compensation is a strategy used to make a ten to help add and subtract numbers.

Lesson 10.1 Subtract 10 and 100

Explore and Grow

Model 251. Make a quick sketch of your model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 1
251
Answer:
To model 251 which is 100+100+50+1.

Explanation:
To model 251 which is 100+100+50+1, we will take a table of 10×10 by which we can build 100 blocks. So for 251, we will take two 10×10 blocks and one 10×5 blocks for which we can build 50 blocks and a single block.Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-v-4

Model 10 less than 251. Make a quick sketch of your model.
251 − 10 = _____

Answer:
251-10= 241

Explanation:
To model 10 less than 251, we will subtract 251 – 10 which is 241. So to model 241, we will expand that 241 as
100 + 100 + 40 + 1 so we will take two 10×10 blocks for which we and one 10×4 block and a single block.

Model 100 less than 251. Make a quick sketch of your model.
251 – 100 = ______
Answer:
251 – 100= 151.

Explanation:
To model 100 less than 251, we will subtract 251 – 100 which is 251. So to model 151, we will expand that 151 as
100 + 50 + 1 so we will take one 10×10 block for which we and one 10×5 block and a single block.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
278 − 10 = _____
278 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 278 − 10 is 268.
The difference of 278 − 100 is 178.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 278-10, we will pick the tens digit number in 278 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
7 – 1= 6
therefore 278 – 10= 268.
And to find the difference of 278-100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 278 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
2-1= 1
therefore 278-100= 178.

Question 2.
451 − 10 = ______
451 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 451 − 10 is 441.
The difference of 451 − 100 is 351.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 451-10, we will pick the tens digit number in 451 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
5 – 1= 4
therefore 451 – 10= 441.
And to find the difference of 451-100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 451 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
4-1= 3
therefore 451-100= 351.

Question 3.
623 − 10 = ______
623 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 623 − 10 is 623.
The difference of 623 − 100 is 523.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 623-10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 623 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
2 – 1= 3
therefore 623 – 10= 613.
And to find the difference of 623-100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 623 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
6-1= 5
therefore 623-100= 523.

Question 4.
116 − 10 = _____
116 − 100 = ______
Answer:
The difference of 116 − 10 is 106.
The difference of 116 − 100 is 16.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 116-10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 116 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
1 – 1= 0
therefore 116 – 10= 106.
And to find the difference of 116-100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 116 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
1-1= 0
therefore 116-100= 016.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
100 – 10 = ______
Answer:
The difference of 100 – 10 is 90.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 100-10, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 100 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
10 – 1= 9
therefore 100 – 10= 90.

Question 6.
599 – 100 = ______
Answer:
The difference of 599-100 is 499.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 599 -100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 599 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
5-1= 4
therefore 599-100= 499.

Question 7.
614 − 10 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 614 -10 is 604.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 614 -10, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 614 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
1-1= 0
therefore 614 -10= 604.

Question 8.
890 – 10 = ______
Answer:
The difference of 890 -10 is 880.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 890 -10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 890 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
9-1= 8
therefore 890 -10= 880.

Question 9.
768 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 768 -100 is 668.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 768 -100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 768 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
7-1= 0
therefore 768 -100= 668.

Question 10.
523 – 10 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 523 -10 is 513.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 523 -10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 523 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
2-1= 1
therefore 523 -10= 513.

Question 11.
362 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 362 -100 is 262.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 362 -100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 362 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
3 -1= 2
therefore 362 -100= 262 .

Question 12.
396 – 10 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 396 -10 is 386.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 396 -10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 386 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
9-1= 8
therefore 396 -10= 386.

Question 13.
604 − 10 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 604 -10 is 594.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 604 -10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 604 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
60 – 1= 59
therefore 604 -10= 594.

Question 14.
799 – 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 614 -10 is 604.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 614 -10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 614 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
1-1= 0
therefore 614 -10= 604.

Question 15.
449 − _____ = 349
Answer:
The difference of 449 – 100 is 349.

Explanation:
Let the blank be X,
so 449- X= 349,
Then X = 449-349
X = 100.
Let us cross-check that 100 is correct or not
449-100= 349.
So 100 is correct.

Question 16.
_____ – 10 = 227
Answer:
The difference of 237-10 is 227.

Explanation:
Let the blank be X,
so X – 10 = 227,
Then X = 227 + 10
X = 237.
Let us cross-check that 237 is correct or not
237-10= 227.
So 237 is correct.

Question 17.
Number Sense
Use each number once to complete the equations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 2
_____ – 10 = ______
_____ – _____ = 460
Answer:
470 – 10 = 460
560 – 10= 550.
560 – 100 = 460.
100 – 10= 90.

Explanation:
Let’s take 470,
then 470 – 10 = 460
and 470 – 10 = 460.
Let’s take 560,
then 560 – 10= 550.
and 560 – 100 = 460.
Let’s take 100
100 – 10= 90.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have $106. You spend $10. How much money do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 3
Subtraction equation:
$ _____
Answer:
Subtraction equation is
$106 – $10= $96.

Explanation:
As we have $106 and $10 was spend, so the remaining money left are
$106 – $10= $96.

Show and Grow

Question 18.
You have 334 tickets. You exchange 100 of them for a prize. How many tickets do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 4
_____ tickets
Answer:
The number of tickets left is 234 tickets.

Explanation:
As we have 334 tickets and in that 100 of them are exchanged for a prize, so the remaining tickets are
334 – 100= 234 tickets are remaining.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
You score 745 points in a video game. You lose some points. Now you have 645. How many points did you lose?
_____ points
Answer:
The number of points lost is 100 points.

Explanation:
The score in a video game is 745 points and after losing some points, we have 645 points. So the number of points lost is 745 – 645= 100 points.

Question 20.
How can you mentally subtract 10 or 100 from a number?
____________________
____________________
Answer:
We will perform pick the ten’s digit number or hundred digit number. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked with the given values. For example, if we take 452 – 10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 452 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
5 – 1= 4
therefore 452 -10=442.

Subtract 10 and 100 Homework & Practice 10.1

Question 1.
642 − 10 = ______
Answer:
The difference of 642-10 is 632.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 642 -10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 642 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
4 – 1= 3
therefore 642 -10= 632.

Question 2.
416 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 416 -100 is 316.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 416 -100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 416 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
4 – 1= 3
therefore 416 -100= 316.

Question 3.
890 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 890 -100 is 790.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 890 -100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 890 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
8 – 1= 7
therefore 890 -100= 790.

Question 4.
371 − 10 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 371 -10 is 361.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 371 -10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 371 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
7 – 1= 6
therefore 371-10= 361.

Question 5.
501 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 501 -100 is 401.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 501 -100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 501 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
5 – 1= 4
therefore 501 -100= 401.

Question 6.
955 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 955 -100 is 855.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 955 – 100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 955 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
9 – 1= 8
therefore 955 – 100= 855.

Question 7.
203 − 10 = ____
Answer:
The difference of 203 – 10 is 193.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 203 – 10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 203 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
20 – 1= 19
therefore 203 -10= 193.

Question 8.
888 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference of 888 -100 is 788.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 888 – 100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 888 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
8 – 1= 7
therefore 888 – 100= 788.

Question 9.
690 − 10 = ____
Answer:
The difference of 690 – 10 is 680.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 690 – 10, we will pick the ten’s digit number in 690 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
9 – 1= 8
therefore 690 – 10= 680.

Question 10.
107 − 10 = ____
Answer:
The difference of 107 – 10 is 97.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 107 -10, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 107 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
10 – 1= 9
therefore 107 – 10= 97.

Question 11.
723 − ____ = 713
Answer:
The difference of 723 – 10 is 713.

Explanation:
Let the empty blank be X,
then 723 – X = 713
X = 723 – 713
= 10
Therefore X= 10.

Question 12.
____ − 100 = 433
Answer:
The difference of 533 – 100 is 433.

Explanation:
Let the empty blank be X,
then X – 100 = 433
X = 433 + 100
= 533
Therefore X= 533.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says that 678 − 100 = 668. Is your friend correct? Explain.
____________________
____________________
Answer:
No, my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
My friend is not correct, because to find the difference of 678 – 100, we will pick the hundred’s digit number in 678 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
6 – 1= 5
therefore 678 – 100= 578.
As 678 – 100= 578, my friend is not correct.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 5
Answer:
582 – 10 < 683 – 100.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.1-5
As 582 – 10= 572 and 683 – 100 = 583, so 583 is greater than 572. Which is
582 – 10 < 683 – 100.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 6
Answer:
985 – 100 = 895 – 10.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.1-6

As 985 – 100= 885 and 895 – 10 = 885, and here 885 is equal to 885. Which is
985 – 100 = 895 – 10.

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
Newton sends out 233 invitations. 100 people respond to the invitation. How many people have not responded yet?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 7
_______ people
Answer:
The number of people who didn’t respond is 133 people.

Explanation:
As Newton sends 233 invitations and in that 233 invitations 100 people responded, so the number of people who didn’t respond is 233 – 100 = 133 people.

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
648 runners sign up for a marathon. 638 runners finish the race. How many runners do not finish?
______ runners
Answer:
10 runners.

Explanation:
The total number of runners sign up for a marathon is 648 and of that 638 runners finish the race. So the number of persons who didn’t finish the race is 648-638= 10 runners.

Review & Refresh

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 8
____rows of ____
____ + ____ = ____
Answer:
2 rows of 5 triangles

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see two rows of five triangles. And the total number of triangles in the above image is
5+5= 10.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.1 9
____rows of ____
____ + ____ = ____
Answer:
3 rows of 3 circles.
3+3+3= 9.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see three rows of three circles. And the total number of circles are
3+3+3= 9.

Lesson 10.2 Use a Number Line to Subtract Hundreds and Tens

Explore and Grow

Skip count back by tens five times on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 1
555 – _____ = ______

Answer:
The difference between 555-50 is 505.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 555 and then count back tens five times which is 10×5= 50 on the number line. So the number line is

Skip count back by hundreds five times on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 2
555 – ____ = ______
Answer:
555 – 500= 55.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 555 and then count back hundreds five times which is 100×5= 500 on the number line. So the number line is
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2

Show and Grow

Question 1.
520 − 330 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 3
Answer:
The difference between 520 − 330 is 190.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 520 and count back a hundred three times which is 3×100= 300 and the value will be
520 – 300= 220 and then we will count back tens three times, which is 3×10= 30 and the value will be
220-30= 190.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-3

Question 2.
259 − 170 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 4
Answer:
The difference between 259 – 170 is 89.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 259 and count back a hundred one time which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be
259 – 100= 159 and then we will count back tens seven times, which is 7×10= 70 and the value will be
159 – 70= 89.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-4

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
640 – 150 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 5
Answer:
The difference between 640 – 150 is 490.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 640 and count back a hundred one time which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be
640 – 100= 540 and then we will count back tens five times, which is 5×10= 50 and the value will be
540 – 50= 490.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-5

Question 4.
453 – 210 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 6
Answer:
The difference between 453 – 210 is 243.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 453 and count back a hundred one time which is 2×100= 200 and the value will be
453 – 200= 253 and then we will count back ten one time, which is 1×10= 10, and the value will be
253 – 10= 243.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-6

Question 5.
329 – 220 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 7
Answer:
The difference between 329 – 220 is 109.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 329 and count back a hundred two times which is 2×100= 200 and the value will be
329 – 200= 129 and then we will count back tens two times, which is 2×10= 20 and the value will be
129 – 20= 109.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-7

Question 6.
Reasoning
Complete the number line and the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 8
_____ – _____ = _____
Answer:
752 – 100= 652,
652 – 100= 552,
552 – 40= 512.

Explanation:
Given in the above image that 752 – 100= 652 and 652 – 100= 552, and in the next step we can see the result as 512. So the empty box be X and the equation is
552 – X= 512,
X= 552-512
= 40.
So the value of X is 40.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-8

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A batting cage has 360 baseballs. There are 130 fewer softballs are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 9
Subtraction equation:
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 10
____ softballs
Answer:
230 softballs.

Explanation:
The total number of baseballs in the batting cages is 360 baseballs and there are 130 fewer softballs. So the total number of softballs is 360 – 130= 230 softballs.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-10

Show and Grow

Question 7.
A crocodile weighs 535 pounds. A kangaroo weighs 340 pounds less than the crocodile. How much does the kangaroo weigh?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 11
______ pounds
Answer:
The weight of the kangaroo is 195 pounds.

Explanation:
The weight of the crocodile is 535 pounds and the weight of the kangaroo is 340 pounds less than the crocodile, which means
535 – 340= 195 pounds.
So the weight of the kangaroo is 195 pounds.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
A train has 850 seats. A plane has 390 fewer seats than the train. A bus has 370 fewer seats than the plane. How many seats does the bus have?
_____ seats
Answer:
The number of seats on the bus is 90 seats.

Explanation:
As the train has 850 seats, and a plane has 390 fewer seats than the train, which means 850 – 390= 460. So the total number of seats on the train is 460 seats. And a bus has 370 fewer seats than the plane, which means
460 – 370= 90 seats. So the number of seats on the bus is 90 seats.

Use a Number Line to Subtract Hundreds and Tens Homework & Practice 10.2

Question 1.
670 − 520 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 12
Answer:
The difference between 670 – 520= 150.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 670 and count back a hundred five times which is 5×100= 500 and the value will be
670 – 500= 170 and then we will count back tens two times, which is 2×10= 20 and the value will be
170 – 20= 150.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-11

Question 2.
749 − 150 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 13
Answer:
The difference between 749 – 150 is 599.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 749 and count back a hundred one time which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be
749 – 100= 649 and then we will count back tens five times, which is 5×10= 50 and the value will be
649 – 50= 599.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-12

Question 3.
583 − 320 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 14
Answer:
The difference between 583 – 320 is 263.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 583 and count back a hundred three times which is 3×100= 300 and the value will be
583 – 300= 283 and then we will count back tens two times, which is 2×10= 20 and the value will be
283 – 20= 263.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.2-13

Question 4.
Number Sense
Write the equation shown by the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 15
_____ – _____ = ______
Answer:
The equation is 645 – 120= 525.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see the starting point at 645 and it was counted back to 100 then the value will be 645 – 100= 545. Then from 545, it was counted back tens two times which is 10×2= 20. Then the value will be
545 – 20= 525.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A bee pollinates 955 flowers in a day. A second bee pollinates 150 fewer flowers. How many flowers does the second bee pollinate?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 16
_____ flowers
Answer:
855 flowers.

Explanation:
The number of flowers pollinated by the bee is 955 flowers and the second bee pollinates 150 fewer flowers, which means 955 – 150= 805 flowers were pollinated by the second bee.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
A library has 990 books. It has 250 fewer movies than books. It has 410 fewer magazines than movies. How many magazines does the library have?
______ magazines
Answer:
330 magazines.

Explanation:
The number of books in a library is 990 books and 250 fewer movies than books, which is 990 – 250= 740 movies. And 410 fewer magazines than movies, which means 740 – 410= 330 magazines.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.2 17
How many students chose computer?
_____ students
Answer:
3 students.

Explanation:
In the given graph the number of students who choose computer is 3 students.

Lesson 10.3 Use a Number Line to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Use each difference as the starting number in the next equation.
425 − 200 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 1

Answer:
425 – 200= 225,
225 – 20= 205,
205 – 2= 203.

Explanation:
Given the equation is 425 – 200. To represent the given equation in the number line, we will start from 425 and then count back hundred two times which is 2×100= 200 and the value will be
425 – 200= 225 and then we will count back tens two times, which is 2×10= 20 and the value will be
225 – 20= 205 and count back one two times, which is 1×2= 2and the value will be 205 – 2= 203.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.3-1

How does this help you find 425 − 222?
______________________
________________________
Answer:

Explanation:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
674 − 236 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 2
Answer:
674 – 236= 438.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 674 and count back hundred two times which is 2×100= 200 and the value will be
674 – 200= 474 and then we will count back tens three times, which is 3×10= 30 and the value will be
474 – 30= 444 and then we will count back one six times, which is 6×1= 6, and the value will be 444 – 6 = 438.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.3-2

Question 2.
438 −162 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 3
Answer:
The difference between 438 – 162 is 276.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 438 and count back a hundred one time which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be
438 – 100= 338 and then we will count back tens six times, which is 6×10= 60 and the value will be
338 – 60= 278 and then we will count back one two times, which is 2×1= 2, and the value will be 278 – 2 = 276. And the difference between 438 – 162 is 276.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
534 − 311 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 4
Answer:
Explanation:
Let’s start from 438 and count back a hundred one time which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be
438 – 100= 338 and then we will count back tens six times, which is 6×10= 60 and the value will be
338 – 60= 278 and then we will count back one two times, which is 2×1= 2, and the value will be 278 – 2 = 276. And the difference between 438 – 162 is 276.

Question 4.
745 − 109 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 5
Answer:

Question 5.
436 − 84 = ____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 6
Answer:

Question 6.
Number Sense
Write the equation shown by the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 7
____ – _____ = _____
Answer:
678 – 354= 324.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see the starting point at 678 and it was counted back to 300 then the value will be 678 – 300= 378. Then from 378, it was counted back 50 which is 378 – 50= 328. And then it was counted back to 4  then the value is 328 – 4= 324.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your school recycles 762 bottles. 245 are glass. The rest are plastic. How many bottles are plastic?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 8
Subtraction equation:
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 9
_____ bottles
Answer:
517 bottles.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.3-9
The number of bottles recycled by the school is 762 bottles and in that 245 are glass. So the number of plastic bottles is 762 – 245= 517 bottles.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
A squirrel collects 619 nuts for the winter. 421 are acorns. The rest are walnuts. How many walnuts are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 10
_____ walnuts
Answer:
198 walnuts.

Explanation:
The number of nuts was collected by the squirrel in the winter is 619 nuts and in that 421 are acorns, and the rest of all are walnuts, which means 619 – 421= 198 walnuts.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 384 photos. You put your photos into two photo albums. Each album can hold up to 208 photos. How many photos can you put in each album? Explain.
_____ photos in Album 1 _____ photos in Album 2
_________________________
________________________
Answer:
208 photos in Album 1 and 176 photos in album 2.

Explanation:
The number of photos we have is 384 photos and those photos were put into two albums and each album can hold 208 photos, which means we can put a total of 208+208= 416 photos. As we have 384 photos, so 208 photos we can put in one album and 384 – 208 = 176 photos in another album.

Use a Number Line to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 10.3

Question 1.
953 − 328 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 11
Answer:

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.3-11
Let’s start from 953 and count back a hundred three times which is 3×100= 300 and the value will be
953 – 300= 653 and then we will count back tens three times, which is 3×10= 30 and the value will be
474 – 30= 444 and then we will count back one six times, which is 6×1= 6, and the value will be 444 – 6 = 438.

Question 2.
674 − 218 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 12
Answer:
674 – 218= 456.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.3-3
Let’s start from 674 and count back hundred two times which is 2×100= 200 and the value will be
674 – 200= 474 and then we will count back tens one time, which is 1×10= 10 and the value will be
474 – 10= 464 and then we will count back one eight times, which is 8×1= 8, and the value will be 474 – 8 = 456.

Question 3.
594 − 107 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 13
Answer:
594 – 107= 487.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.3-4
Let’s start from 594 and count back a hundred one time which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be
594 – 100= 494 and then we will count back one seven times, which is 7×1= 7, and the value will be 494 – 7 = 487.

Question 4.
Structure
Use the number lines to show 531 − 396 two ways.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 14
531 – 396 = ______
Answer:

 

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You earn 631 points in a video game. You trade in 475 points for a special power. How many points do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 15
____ points
Answer:
156 points.

Explanation:
The number of points earned in a video game is 631 points and in that, we trade in 475 points for a special power, and the remaining points left are 631 – 475 = 156 points.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 137 books. You put your books on two bookshelves. Each shelf can hold up to 72 books. How many books can you put on each shelf? Explain.
_______ books on Shelf 1 _____ books on Shelf 2
____________________
____________________
Answer:
72 books on shelf 1 and 65 books on shelf 2.

Explanation:
The number of books we have is 137 books and we need to put those books in two bookshelves and each shelf can hold up to 72 books. So for two shelves, the number of books can hold is 72+72= 144 books. So 72 books can be put in one bookshelf and in the other bookshelf we can keep remaining books which is 137 – 72= 65 books in another bookshelf.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.3 16
_____ hundreds, ______ tens, and _____ ones is _______.
Answer:
7 hundreds, 6 tens and 3 ones which is 763.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.3-16
In the above image, we can see seven hundred and six tens and three ones which is
7×100 + 6×10 + 3×1
= 700+60+3
= 763.

Lesson 10.4 Use Compensation to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Find 315 − 196.
Answer:
315 – 196 = 119

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So here we will add 4 to 196, after adding we will get 196+4= 200. Now it is easy to subtract from 315,
so 315 – 200= 115 and we will add that 4 to the result 115. So 115+4= 119.

Find 319 − 200.
Answer:
319 – 200= 119.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So here we will add 1 to 319, after adding we will get 319+1= 320. Now it is easy to subtract from 320,
so 320 – 200= 120 and we will subtract that 1 to the result 120. So 120 – 1= 119.

How are the problems the same? How are they different? Which problem can you solve using mental math?
__________________________
___________________________
Answer:

Explanation:

Show and Grow

Use compensation to subtract.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 1
Answer:
654 – 197= 457.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-1
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above it shows that to add 3 to 197, so 197+3= 200,
now 654 – 200= 454 and now we will add 3 to the result,
so 454+3= 457.
654 – 197= 457.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 2
Answer:
835 – 309= 526.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-2
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above, it shows that to subtract 9 in 309, so 309 – 9= 300,
now 835 – 300= 535 and now we will subtract to the result,
so 835 – 309= 535 – 9
835 – 309= 526.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 3
Answer:
571 – 212= 359.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-3
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
571 – 212, so we will subtract 2 in 212, then the number will be 212 – 2= 210,
then 571 – 210= 361,
And now we will subtract -2 to the result,
so 361 – 2= 359.
571 – 210= 359.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 4
Answer:
611 – 392= 219.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-4
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
611 – 392, so we will subtract 92 in 392, then the number will be 392 – 92= 300,
then 611 – 300= 311,
And now we will subtract -92 to the result,
so 311 – 92= 219.
611 – 392= 219.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use compensation to subtract.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 5
Answer:
428 – 212= 216.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-5
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
428 – 212, so we will subtract 2 in 212, then the number will be 212 – 2= 210,
then 428 – 210= 218,
And now we will subtract 2 to the result,
so 218 – 2= 216.
428 – 212= 216.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 6
Answer:
943 – 295= 648

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-6
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
943 – 295 so we will subtract 52 in 295,
then the number will be 295 – 52= 243,
then 943 – 243= 700,
And now we will subtract 52 to the result,
so 700 – 52= 648.
943 – 295= 648.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 7
Answer:
489 – 196= 293.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-7
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
489 – 196, so we will subtract 7 in 196, then the number will be 196 – 7= 189,
then 489 – 189= 300,
And now we will subtract 7 to the result,
so 300 – 7= 293.
489 – 196= 293.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 8
Answer:
709 – 503= 206.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-8
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
709 – 503, so we will subtract 3 in 503, then the number will be 503 – 3= 500,
then 709 – 500= 209,
And now we will subtract 3 to the result,
so 209 – 3= 206.
709 – 503= 206.

Question 9.
613 − 307 = _____
Answer:
613 – 317= 306.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
The given numbers are
613 – 307, so we will subtract 7 in 307, then the number will be 307 – 7= 300,
then 613 – 307= 313,
And now we will subtract 7 to the result,
so 313 – 7= 306.
613 – 307= 306.

Question 10.
861 – 499 = _____
Answer:
861 – 499= 362.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
The given numbers are
861 – 499, so we will subtract 99 in 499, then the number will be 499 – 99= 400,
then 861 – 400= 461,
And now we will subtract 99 to the result,
so 461 – 99= 362.
861 – 499= 362.

Question 11.
Writing
Should you add to or subtract from 194 to find the difference? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 9
Answer:
387 – 194= 193.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-9
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
387 – 194, so we will subtract 7 in 194, then the number will be 194 – 7= 187,
then 387 – 187= 200,
And now we will subtract 3 to the result,
so 200 – 7= 193.
387 – 194= 193.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A fish lays 861 eggs. A turtle lays 198 eggs. How many fewer eggs does the turtle lay than the fish?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 10
Subtraction equation:
______ fewer eggs
Answer:
663 fewer eggs.

Explanation:
As fish lays 861 eggs and a turtle lays 198 eggs, so the number of fewer eggs does the turtle lay than the fish is
861 – 198= 663 fewer eggs.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
A print shop has 650 sheets of white paper and 295 sheets of colored paper. How many fewer sheets of colored paper are there than white paper?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 11
_____ fewer sheets of colored paper
Answer:
355 fewer sheets of colored paper.

Explanation:
As a printer shop has 650 sheets of white paper and 295 sheets of colored paper. So the fewer sheets of colored paper are there than white paper is 650 – 295= 355 fewer sheets of colored paper.

Question 13.
A party store has 725 different cards and 506 different balloons. How many more cards are there than balloons?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 12
____ more cards
Answer:
219 more cards.

Explanation:
As a party store has 725 different cards and 506 different balloons, so the will be 725 – 506= 219 more cards are there than balloons.

Question 14.
How are Exercises 12 and 13 similar? How are they different?
____________________
_____________________
Answer:

Use Compensation to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 10.4

Use compensation to subtract.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 13
Answer:
972 – 415= 557

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-13
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
972 – 415, we will subtract 15 in 415, then the number will be 415 – 15= 400,
then 972 – 400= 572,
And now we will subtract 3 to the result,
so 572 – 15= 557.
972 – 415= 557.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 14
Answer:
328 – 186= 142.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-14
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
328 – 186, we will add 14 to 186, then the number will be 186 + 14= 200,
then 328 – 200= 128,
And now we will add 14 to the result,
so 128 + 14= 142.
328 – 186= 142.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 15
Answer:
703 – 598= 105

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-15
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
703 – 598, we will add 2 to 598, then the number will be 598 + 2= 600,
then 703 – 600= 103,
And now we will add 14 to the result,
so 103 + 2= 105.
703 – 598= 105.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 16
Answer:
On compensation subtraction 841 – 603, we will get the result as 105.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
841 – 603, we will subtract 3 in 603, then the number will be 603 – 3= 600,
then 841 – 600= 541,
And now we will subtract -3 to the result,
so 541 – 3= 105 and on subtracting 841 – 603 we will get the result as 105.

Question 5.
439 – 210 = ______
Answer:
On compensation subtraction 439 -210 we will get the result as 229.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
439 – 210, we will subtract 1 in 210, then the number will be 210 – 1= 209,
then 439 – 209= 230,
And now we will subtract -1 to the result,
so 230 – 1= 229. On compensation subtraction 439 -210 we will get the result as 229.

Question 6.
719 – 302 = ______
Answer:
On compensation subtraction 719 -302 we will get the result as 417.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
In the above figure, the given numbers are
719 – 302, we will subtract 2 in 302, then the number will be 302 – 2= 300,
then 719 – 300= 419,
And now we will subtract -2 to the result,
so 419 – 2= 417. On compensation subtraction 719 -302 we will get the result as 417.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses compensation to find 796 − 304. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 17
Answer:
On compensation subtraction 796 -304 we will get the result as 492.

Explanation:
Yes, my friend is correct. As compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction. So in the above figure, the given numbers are
796 – 304, we will subtract 4 in 304, then the number will be 304 – 4= 300,
then 796 – 300= 496,
And now we will subtract 4 to the result,
so 496 – 4= 492. On compensation subtraction 796 -304 we will get the result as 492.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You write a 225-word essay. Your friend writes a 598-word essay. How many fewer words do you write?
_______ fewer words
Answer:
The number of fewer words written by me is 373 words.

Explanation:
The number of words written by me is 225 easy words and my friend writes 598 essay words. So the fewer words were written by me than my friend is 598 – 225= 373 words.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
How many more students like math than science?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 18
_____ more students
Answer:
151 more students like math than science.

Explanation:
Given the number of students like math is 348 and the number of students like science is 197. So the number of students who like math more than science is 348 – 197= 151 students.

Review & Refresh

Find the missing digits.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 19
Answer:
By adding 35 + 46 we will get the result as 81.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-19
In the above image, we can see the result as 81. So to get 1 in one’s place we will take 6 in the empty box, so by adding 5 and 6 we will get 11. So we got 1 in one’s place. Now we know the one value, so to get the other value we will subtract the value which we got in the result. So 81 – 46= 35, and the other number 35. So 35 + 46= 81.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 20
Answer:
By adding 61 + 37 we will get the result of 81.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-20
In the above image, we can see the result as 98. So to get 8 in one’s place we will take 7 in the empty box, so by adding 1 and 7 which is 7 + 1= 8, we will get 8. So we got 8 in one’s place. Now we know the one value which is 37, so to get the other value we will subtract the value which we got in the result. So 98 – 37= 61, and the other number 37. So 61 + 37= 98.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.4 21
Answer:
By adding 27 + 17 we will get the result of 81.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.4-21
In the above image, we can see the result as 44. So to get 4 in one’s place we will take 7 in the empty box, so by adding 7 and 7 which is 7 + 7= 14, we will get 14. So we got 4 in one’s place. Now we know the one value which is 17, so to get the other value we will subtract the value which we got in the result. So 44 – 17= 27, and the other number 27. So 27 + 17= 44.

Lesson 10.5 Use Models to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Model to solve. Make a quick sketch of your model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 1

323 – 219 = _____
Answer:
On subtracting 323 – 219 we will get the result as 104.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.5-1
To model 323 – 219 which is 104, we will take square for hundred, the line for ten, and dot for ones. To subtract 323 – 219, we can see that 9 is greater than 1. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. And in the above image, we can see the model for 104.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
429 – 165 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 2
Answer:
On subtracting 429 – 165 we will get the result as 264.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.5-2
To model 429 – 165 which is 264, we will take square for hundred, the line for ten, and dot for ones. To subtract 429 – 165, we can see that 6 is greater than 2. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. And in the above image, we can see the model for 264.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
359 – 167 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 3
Answer:
On subtracting 359 – 167 we will get the result as 192.

Explanation:
To model 359 – 167 which is 192, we will take square for hundred, the line for ten, and dot for ones. To subtract 359 – 167, we can see that 6 is greater than 5. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. And in the above image, we can see the model for 192.

Question 3.
527 – 384 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 4
Answer:
On subtracting 527 – 384 we will get the result as 143.

Explanation:
To model 527 – 384 which is 143, we will take square for hundred, the line for ten, and dot for ones. To subtract 527 – 143, we can see that 4 is greater than 2. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. And in the above image, we can see the model for 143.

Question 4.
673 – 245 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 5
Answer:
On subtracting 673 – 245 we will get the result as 428.

Explanation:
To model 673 – 245 which is 428, we will take square for hundred, the line for ten, and dot for ones. To subtract 673 – 245, we can see that 5 is greater than 3. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. And in the above image, we can see the model for 428.

Question 5.
Patterns
Write and solve the next problem in the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 6
Answer:
So on subtracting 629 – 141 we will get the result as 488.
So on subtracting 529 – 241 we will get the result as 288.
So on subtracting 429 – 341 we will get the result as 088.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.5-6
As we can see in the above image that hundreds place was increasing by a hundred times in minuend and in hundreds place hundred was decreasing in subtrahend, so that the next problem will be 629 – 141. To subtract 629 – 141, we can see that 4 is greater than 2. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. So on subtracting 629 – 141 we will get the result as 488. To subtract 529 – 241, we can see that 4 is greater than 2. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. So on subtracting 529 – 241 we will get the result as 288. To subtract 429 – 341, we can see that 4 is greater than 2. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. So on subtracting 429 – 341 we will get the result as 088.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 549 people in a parade. 158 of them are in the marching band. How many people are not in the marching band?
Models:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 7
_____ people
Answer:
The number of people who are not in the marching band is 549 – 158= 391.

Explanation:
The number of people in a parade is 549 and in that 158 people are in the marching band. So the number of people who are not in the marching band is 549 – 158= 391.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
A school library has 784 books. 256 of them are checked out. How many books are not checked out?
_____ books
Answer:
586 books are not checked.

Explanation:
The number of books in a school library is 784 books and in that 256 are checked out. So the number of books not checked out is 784 – 256= 586.

Question 7.
A horse weighs 371 pounds more than a pig. The horse weighs 914 pounds. How much does the pig weigh?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 8
_____ pounds
Answer:
The weight of the pig is 543 pounds.

Explanation:
Given the weight of the horse is 371 pounds more than the pig and the weight of the horse is 914 pounds. So to find the weight of the pig we will subtract 914 – 371= 543. So the weight of the pig is 543 pounds.

Use Models to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 10.5

Question 1.
738 – 544 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 9

Answer:
On subtracting 738 – 544 we will get the result as 194.

Explanation:
To model 738 – 544 which is 194, we will take square for hundred, the line for ten, and dot for ones. To subtract 738 – 544, we can see that 4 is greater than 3. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. And in the above image, on subtracting 738 – 544 we will get the result as 194.

Question 2.
519 – 248 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 10

Answer:
On subtracting 519 – 248 we will get the result as 271.

Explanation:
To model 519 – 248 which is 194, we will take square for hundred, the line for ten, and dot for ones. To subtract 519 – 248, we can see that 4 is greater than 1. So we will need a little bit extra in order to subtract, and then we will use an amount from the column to the left. So in this subtraction, we will borrow when we are subtracting one number that is greater than another. And in the above image, on subtracting 519 – 248 we will get the result as 271.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Complete the subtraction problem so that you need to regroup to subtract.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 11
Answer:
On subtracting 749 – 345 the result will be 404.

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Let the blank be 5 and 749 – 345 will be 404.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
A clown makes 315 balloon animals. 156 are giraffes. How many balloon animals are not giraffes?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 12
_____ balloon animals
Answer:
159 balloon animals are not giraffes.

Explanation:
As a clown makes 315 balloon animals and of that 156 are giraffes, so the number of balloons that are not giraffes is 315 – 156= 159 balloon animals.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend has 102 more downloaded songs than you. Your friend has 213 downloaded songs. How many downloaded songs do you have?
_____ downloaded songs’
Answer:
111 downloaded songs I have.

Explanation:
As my friend has 213 downloaded songs and 102 more downloaded songs than I. So the total number of downloaded songs I have is 213 – 102= 111 songs.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 13
Answer:
463 + 194= 657.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.5-13
By subtracting 463 + 194 we will get the result of 657.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 14
Answer:
186 + 567= 753.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.5-14
By adding 186 + 567 we will get the result of 753.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.5 15
Answer:
623 + 298= 921.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.5-15
By adding 623 + 298 we will get the result of 921.

Lesson 10.6 Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Find each difference.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 1
Answer:
The difference between 529 – 218 is 311.
The difference between 553 – 316 is 237.
The difference between 323 – 194 is 129.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.6-1

Compare the problems. How are they the same? How are they different?
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 2
Answer:
By regrouping in the subtraction of 423 – 174 we will get the result as 249.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.6-2
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 423- 174 we get 249.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 3
Answer:
By regrouping in the subtraction of 542 – 367 we will get the result of 175.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.6-3
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 542- 367 we get 175

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 4
Answer:
By regrouping in the subtraction of 315 – 151 we will get the result of 164.

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 315- 151 we get 164

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 5
Answer: 292

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 568 – 276 we get 292

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 6
Answer: 475

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 821- 346 we get 475

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 7
Answer: 438

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 727- 289 we get 438

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 8
Answer: 246

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 434 – 188 we get 246

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 9
Answer: 628

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 963- 335 we get 628

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 10
Answer: 487

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 741- 254 we get 487

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 11
Answer: 160

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 345- 185 we get 160

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 12
Answer: 209

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 627 – 418 we get 209

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 13
Answer: 193

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 916- 723 we get 193

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 14
Answer: 462

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 829- 367 we get 462

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 15
Answer: 250

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 541- 291 we get 250

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 16
Answer: 169

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 351- 182  we get 169

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 17
Answer: 268

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 465- 197 we get 268

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 18
Answer: 354

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 643 – 289  we get 354

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 19
Answer: 175

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 673- 498 we get 175

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 20
Answer:
The missing digit in the first image is 3.
The missing digit in the first image is 8.
The missing digit in the first image is 4.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.6-20
To find the missing digits in the above figure, we will subtract the difference and minuend. So for the first image we can see that minuend is greater than subtrahend that i 5  is greater than 0, so there is no carry forward. And we can subtract the minuend and difference which is 4 – 1=3. So the missing digit is 3. We can find in another way also by subtracting minuend and the difference which is in the second image we will subtract 957 – 279 which is 678 and the missing digit is 8. For the third image we will add subtrahend and the difference which is
484 + 158 which is 642 and the missing digit is 4.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A jeweler has 616 bracelets and 668 necklaces. He sells 269 bracelets. How many bracelets are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 21
Subtraction equation:
______ bracelets
Answer:
Subtraction equation: 616 – 269= 347
347 bracelets left.

Explanation:
Aa a jeweler has 616 bracelets and 668 necklaces and he sells 269 bracelets. So the number of bracelets left is
616 – 269= 347 bracelets left.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
A vendor has 354 hats and 294 pairs of sunglasses. She sells 186 hats. How many hats are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 22
_____ hats
Answer:
168 hats left.

Explanation:
As the vendor has 354 hats and 294 pairs of sunglasses and she sold 186 hats, the number of hats lefts are
354 – 186= 168 hats left.

Question 21.
There are 449 watercolor paintings and 373 oil paintings in a school art show. 238 paintings win a ribbon. How many do not win a ribbon?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 23
_____ paintings
Answer:
584 paintings didn’t win the ribbon.

Explanation:
The total number of watercolor paintings are 449 and the number of oil paintings is 373 and of that 238 won a ribbon, so the number of paintings that didn’t win the ribbon is, first we will add watercolor paintings and oil painting and then we will subtract 238 from the result. So 449 +373= 822 paintings and in that 238 paintings win a ribbon. So the number of paintings that didn’t win the ribbon is 822 – 238= 584 paintings didn’t win the ribbon.

Question 22.
Explain how Exercises 20 and 21 are different.
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:
In exercise 20 the given objects are hats and sunglasses and asked to find about hats only. But in exercise 21 asked about both water color paintings and oil paintings which didn’t win the ribbon.

Subtract Three-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 10.6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 24
Answer: 435

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.6-24
Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 873 – 438 we get 435

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 25
Answer: 63
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.6-25

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 341 – 278 we get 063

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 26
Answer:  757

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 913 – 156 we get 757

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 27
Answer: 269

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 456- 187 we get 269

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 28
Answer: 328

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 625 – 297 we get 328

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 29
Answer: 269

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 951 – 682 we get 269

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 30
Answer: 78

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 452 – 374 we get 078

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 31
Answer: 368

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 961 – 593  we get 368

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 32
Answer: 457

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. as shown in the above image
Hence 746 – 289 we get 457

Question 10.
Number Sense
Complete the subtraction problem so that you do not need to regroup to subtract.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 33
Answer:
The difference without regrouping is 453 – 241 which is 212.

Explanation:
Let the blank be the any number which is less than 5. As given that we do not need to regroup to subtract, so we will pick any number from 0 to 5. So let the number be 4, then 453 – 241= 212.

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes finds 731 − 246. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 34
Answer:
No, Descartes is not correct.

Explanation:
No, Descartes is not correct. In the above image we can see that 1 is less than 6. So we need to borrow from 3 to subtract the digit 6 from 1. Then 731 – 246 will be 485.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
453 bananas and 456 apples are shipped to a store. When they arrive, 268 of the bananas are rotten. How many bananas are not rotten?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.6 35
____ bananas
Answer:
185 bananas are not rotten.

Explanation:
The total number of bananas is 453 and the number of apples in the store is 456. And in that 268 bananas are rotten, so the number of bananas not rotten is 453 – 268= 185 bananas are not rotten.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
There are 432 red shirts and 293 blue shirts in stock. 516 shirts are sold. How many shirts are left?
_____ shirts
Answer:
209 shirts left.

Explanation:
The total number of red shirts is 432 and the number of blue shirts in stock is 293. So the total number of shirts is
432 + 293= 725 shirts. And in that 516 shirts are sold out, so the number of shirts left is 725 – 516= 209 shirts left.

Review & Refresh

Question 14.
Count by fives.
680, 685, ____, _____, _____, _____, ______
Answer:
680, 685, 690, 695, 700, 705, 710, 715.

Explanation:
By adding five to the given numbers we will get the result as
680 + 5= 685,
685 + 5= 690,
690 + 5= 695,
695 + 5= 700,
700 + 5= 705,
705 + 5= 710,
710 + 5= 715.

Lesson 10.7 Subtract from Numbers That Contain Zeros

Explore and Grow

Find each difference.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.7 1
Answer:
The difference between 400 – 178 is 222.
The difference between 399 – 177 is 222.

Explanation:
For the image 1 we should follow regrouping method, as the digits contains 0. So by regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend. So to subtract 400 – 178 we will borrow from 4 as the 0 is less than 7 and 8. Then 400 – 178 will be 222. For the image 2 we don’t need any regrouping as minuend is greater than subtrahend. So
399 – 177= 222.

How are the problems the same? How are they different? Which problem can you solve without regrouping?
______________________________
______________________________
Answer:
The problems are same by their result and the problem is different as their minuend and subtrahend are different. The second problem can solve without using regrouping. As minuend is greater than subtrahend, so we don’t need regrouping.

Show and Grow

Use regrouping or compensation to subtract.
Question 1.
300 − 139 = _____
Answer:
300 – 139= 161.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 1 for both the numbers. Then 300 – 1= 299 and 139 – 1= 138. Now we will subtract 299 – 138= 161.

Question 2.
402 − 265 = _____
Answer:
402 – 265= 137.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 3 for both the numbers. Then 402 – 3= 399 and 265 – 3= 262. Now we will subtract 399 – 262= 137.

Question 3.
800 − 547 = _____
Answer:
800 – 547= 253.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 1 for both the numbers. Then 800 – 1= 799 and 547 – 1= 546. Now we will subtract 799 – 546= 253.

Question 4.
910 − 252 = _____
Answer:
910 – 252= 658.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 52 in 252 then 252 – 52= 200. Now we will subtract
910 – 200= 710. Now we will subtract 52 from the result 710, which is 710 – 52= 658. So 910 – 252= 658.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use regrouping or compensation to subtract.
Question 5.
310 – 186 = ____
Answer:
310 – 186= 124.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 86 in 186 then 186 – 86= 100. Now we will subtract
310 – 100= 210. Now we will subtract 86 from the result 210, which is 210 – 86= 124. So 310 – 186= 124.

Question 6.
620 – 458 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 620 – 458, the result will be 162.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 58 in 458 then 458 – 58= 400. Now we will subtract
620 – 400= 220. Now we will subtract 58 from the result 220, which is 220 – 58= 162. So 620 – 458= 162.

Question 7.
906 – 729 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 906 – 729, the result will be 177.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 29 in 729 then 729 – 29= 700. Now we will subtract
906 – 700= 206. Now we will subtract 29 from the result 206, which is 206 – 29= 177. So 906- 729= 177.

Question 8.
807 – 389 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 807 – 389, the result will be 418.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 89 in 389 then 389 – 89= 300. Now we will subtract
807 – 300= 507. Now we will subtract 89 from the result 507, which is 807 – 389= 418. So 807 – 389= 418.

Question 9.
503 – 296 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 503 – 296, the result will be 207.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 96 in 296 then 296 – 96= 200. Now we will subtract
503 – 200= 303. Now we will subtract 96 from the result 303, which is 303 – 96= 207. So 503 – 296= 207.

Question 10.
301 – 282 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 301 – 282, the result will be 19.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 82 in 282 then 282 – 82= 200. Now we will subtract
301 – 200= 101. Now we will subtract 82 from the result 101, which is 101 – 82= 19. So 301 – 282= 19.

Question 11.
400 – 197 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 400 – 197, the result will be 203.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 97 in 197 then 197 – 97= 100. Now we will subtract
400 – 100= 300. Now we will subtract 97 from the result 300, which is 300 – 97= 203. So 400 – 197= 203.

Question 12.
600 – 289 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 600 – 289, the result will be 311.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 89 in 289 then 289 – 89= 200. Now we will subtract
600 – 200= 400. Now we will subtract 89 from the result 400, which is 400 – 89= 311. So 600 – 289= 311.

Question 13.
Structure
Show two ways to find 500 −314.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 400 paper lanterns. 279 of them are let go. How many paper lanterns are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.7 2
Subtraction equation:
_____ paper lanterns
Answer:
The number of paper lanterns left is 121.

Explanation:
The number of paper lanterns is 400 and in that 279 of them are let go and the remaining left are
400 – 279= 121. So the number of paper lanterns left is 121.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
There are 803 fans at a stadium. 226 of them leave. How many fans are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.7 3
_____ fans
Answer:
The number of fans left is 577.

Explanation:
The total number of fans in the stadium is 803 and in that 226 of them are left. So the remaining number of fans left is 803 – 226= 577. So the number of fans left is 577.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
A florist plants 600 flowers. The table shows how many have bloomed. How many flowers have not bloomed yet?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.7 4
_____ flowers
Answer:
The number of flowers not bloomed is 72.

Explanation:
The number of plants did the florist plant is 600 flowers. In the table given that the number of blooms in May is 296 and the number of blooms in June is 232. So the total number of blooms in the month of May and June is
296 + 232= 528. And the number of flowers not bloomed is 600 – 528= 72.

Subtract from Numbers That Contain Zeros Homework & Practice 10.7

Use regrouping or compensation to subtract
Question 1.
700 − 465 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 700 – 465, the result will be 235.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 65 in 465 then 465 – 65= 400. Now we will subtract
700 – 400= 300. Now we will subtract 65 from the result 300, which is 300 – 82= 19. So 301 – 282= 19.

Question 2.
302 − 176 = _____
Answer:
On compensation subtraction of 302- 176, the result will be 126.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 76 in 176 then 176 – 76= 100. Now we will subtract
302 – 100= 202. Now we will subtract 76 from the result 202, which is 202 – 76= 126. So 302 – 176= 126.

Question 3.
910 − 186 = ______
Answer:
By compensation subtraction of 910- 186, the result will be 724.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 86 in 186 then 186 – 86= 100. Now we will subtract
910 – 100= 810. Now we will subtract 86 from the result 810, which is 810 – 86= 724. So 910 – 186= 724.

Question 4.
800 − 691 = _____
Answer:
By compensation subtraction of 800 – 691, the result will be 109.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will add 9 for 691 then 691 + 9= 700. Now we will subtract
800 – 700= 100. Now we will add 9 for the result 100, which is 100 + 9= 109. So 800 – 691= 109.

Question 5.
Writing
Explain why you might want to use compensation to subtract. Give an example.
_______________________________
_______________________________
Answer:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction. So we will use compensation subtract. For example, if we take 420 – 326. So by the compensation method, we will subtract 26 in 326 then
326 – 26= 300. Now we will subtract 420 – 300= 120. Now we will subtract 26 for the result 120, which is
120 – 26= 109. So 420 – 326= 94.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
There are 300 coins on a desk. 178 fall off. How many coins are left on the desk?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.7 5
_____ coins
Answer:
The number of coins left on the desk is 122.

Explanation:
The number of coins on a desk is 300 coins and in that 178 coins fall off. So the number of coins left on the desk is, here we will use compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 78 for 178 then 178 – 78= 100. Now we will subtract
300 – 100= 200. Now we will subtract 78 for the result 200, which is 200 – 78= 122. So 300 – 178= 122.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
There are 500 students in a school. How many students are absent?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.7 6
______ students
Answer:
The number of students absent is 88 students.

Explanation:
The total number of students is 500 students and in that the attendance of boy students is 234 and the attendance of girl students is 178. So the total number of students who attended is 234 + 178= 412. And the number of students absent is 500 – 412= 88 students.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
29 + 34 = _____
Answer:
29 + 34= 63.

Explanation:
On adding 29 + 34, we will get the result as 63.

Question 9.
46 + 13 = _____
Answer:
46 + 13= 29.

Explanation:
On adding 46 + 13, we will get the result of 59.

Lesson 10.8 Use Addition to Subtract

Explore and Grow

Use the number lines to solve.
445 – 220 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 1
Answer:

How are the equations the same? How are they different?
__________________________
__________________________
Answer:

Show and Grow

Add to find the difference. Check your answer.
Question 1.
488 − 137 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 2
Answer:
The difference between 488 – 137 is 351.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 137 and add hundred three times which is 3×100= 300 and the value will be
137 + 300= 437 and then we will add fifty which is 437+50= 487 and then we will add one. The value will be
487 + 1=488. So the difference between 438 – 137 is 351.

Question 2.
792 − 446 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 3
Answer:
The difference between 792 – 446 is 346.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 446 and add hundred three times which is 3×100= 300 and the value will be
446 + 300= 746 and then we will add four tens which is 746+40= 786 and then we will add six. The value will be
786 + 6=792. So the difference between 792 – 446 is 346.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Add to find the difference. Check your answer.
Question 3.
521 − 364 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 4
Answer:
The difference between 521 – 364 is 157.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 364 and add hundred once which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be 364 + 100= 464 and then we will add five tens which is 464+50= 514 and then we will add seven. The value will be 514 + 7=521. So the difference between 521 – 364 is 157.

Question 4.
856 – 213 = ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 5
Answer:
The difference between 856 – 213 is 643

Explanation:
Let’s start at 213 and add hundred six times which is 6×100= 600 and the value will be 213 + 600= 813 and then we will add four tens which is 813+40= 853 and then we will add three. The value will be 853 + 3=856. So the difference between 856 – 213 is 643.

Question 5.
492 − 137 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 6
Answer:
The difference between 492 – 137 is 355.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 137 and add hundred three times which is 3×100= 300 and the value will be 137 + 300= 437 and then we will add eight tens which is 437+50= 487 and then we will add five. The value will be  487+ 5=492. So the difference between 492 – 137 is 355.

Question 6.
Number Sense
Write the equation shown by the number line.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 7
_____ – ______ = ______
Answer:
The number line equation is 642 – 221= 421.

Explanation:
In the above figure, to find the number line equation we will add all the numbers which are counted back. So the counted back numbers are 1+10+10+100+100 which is 221. So the number line equation is 642 – 221= 421.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A machine has some bouncy balls. 115 are sold. There are 227 left. How many bouncy balls were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 8
Equation:
Model:
______ bouncy balls
Answer:
The total number of bouncy balls is 342.

Explanation:
As there are 115 bouncy balls sold and 227 are sold. So the total number of bouncy balls is 115+227= 342 bouncy balls.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
There are some fans at a baseball game. 148 leave early. There are 182 left. How many fans were at the baseball game?
_____ fans
Answer:
The total number of fans at the baseball game is 330.

Explanation:
The number of fans left early in the baseball game is 148 fans and after that 182 fans left. So the total number of fans at the baseball game is 148 + 182= 330.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Your school collects 518 cans for a food drive. Your class collects 142 cans. Another class collects 204. How many cans did the rest of the classes collect?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 9
_____ cans
Answer:
The number of cans did the rest of the classes collected is 172 cans.

Explanation:
The number of food cans that the school collects for a food drive is 518 cans and my class collects 142 cans and another class collects 204 cans. The total number of food cans collected by both classes is 142 + 204 which is 346. And the total number of cans collected by the rest of the classes is 518 – 346. Here, we will use compensation subtraction as a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 46 in 346 then 346 – 46= 300. Now we will subtract
518 – 300= 218. Now we will subtract 46 from the result 218, which is 218 – 46= 172. So 518 – 346= 172 cans.

Use Addition to Subtract Homework & Practice 10.8

Add to find the difference. Check your answer.
Question 1.
721 − 314 = ____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 10
Answer:
The difference between 721 – 314= 407.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.8-10
Let’s start at 314 and add hundred four times which is 4×100= 400 and the value will be
314 + 400= 714 and then we will add seven by dividing the seven into two parts by 5+2 tens, which is
714+7= 721 and the value will be 314 + 407= 721. So the difference between 721 – 314= 407.

Question 2.
654 − 334 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 11
Answer:
The difference between 654 – 334 is 320.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.8-11
Let’s start at 334 and add hundred three times which is 3×100= 300 and the value will be
334 + 300= 634 and then we will add twenty by dividing the twenty into two parts by 10+10, which is
634+20= 654 and the value will be 334 + 320= 654. So the difference between 654 – 334= 320.

Question 3.
Descartes adds to find 400 − 279. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 12
Answer:
Yes, Descartes is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, Descartes is correct. By adding the number of jumps 1+20+100 we will get 121. So by adding 121+279 we will get 400. So Descartes is correct.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
There are some people in a national park. 124 of them leave. There are 535 people left. How many people were in the park to start?
______ people
Answer:
The number of people in the park yet to start is 411 people.

Explanation:
The number of people leave is 124 and after that, there are 535 people left. So the total number of people were in the park to start is 535 – 124= 411 people.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have 514 tickets. You spend 220 tickets on a mug and 156 on stickers. How many tickets do you have left?
______ tickets
Answer:
The number of tickets left is 138 tickets.

Explanation:
The number of tickets we have is 514 and 220 tickets are spent on a mug and 156 tickets on stickers. So the total number of tickets left is, we will add both the tickets that were spent on mug and stickers, which is 220+156= 376 tickets. So the number of tickets left are 514-376= 138.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 13
_____ flat surfaces
______ vertices
_____ edges
Answer:
Two flat surfaces,
One vertex,
One edge.

Explanation:
The above image is a cone that has two flat surfaces, one vertex, and 1 edge.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.8 14
_____ flat surfaces
______ vertices
_____ edges
Answer:
Six flat surfaces,
Twelve edges,
Eight vertices.

Explanation:
The above image is a cube that has six flat surfaces, twelve edges, and eight vertices.

Lesson 10.9 Explain Subtraction Strategies

Explore and Grow

Use two different strategies to find 474 − 119.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.9 1
Answer:
The two different strategies used are Regrouping and Compensation.

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend.
So 474 – 119 we get 355.
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 19 in 119 then 119 – 19= 100. Now we will subtract
474 – 100= 374. Now we will subtract 19 from the result 374, which is 374 – 19= 355. So 474 – 119= 355.

Explain why you chose one of your strategies.
________________________
________________________
Answer:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So we will choose compensation subtraction.

Show and Grow

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 1.
477 − 224 = _____
___________________________
___________________________
Answer:
By regrouping subtraction 477 – 224= 253.

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend.
So we will subtract by regrouping the numbers 477 – 224= 253.

Question 2.
686 − 397 = _____
___________________________
___________________________
Answer:
By regrouping subtraction 686 – 397= 289.

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend.
So we will subtract by regrouping the numbers 686 – 397= 289.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 3.
502 − 321 = _____
_______________________
_______________________
Answer:
By regrouping subtraction 502 – 321= 181.

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend.
So we will subtract by regrouping the numbers 502 – 321= 181.

Question 4.
900 − 756 = _____
________________________
_______________________
Answer:
By regrouping subtraction 900 – 756= 144.

Explanation:
Regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend.
So we will subtract by regrouping the numbers 900 – 756= 144.

Question 5.
Reasoning
Your friend solves a subtraction problem. Write the problem your friend solves. Explain what strategy was used to solve.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.9 2
______ – _____ = _____
__________________________
__________________________
Answer:
The number line equation is 335 – 125= 210.

Explanation:
The strategy which was used by my friend to solve is using the number line. And the problem which was solved by my friend is, the count jump starts from 125 and the count is  100+100+10 which is 210, and the number line equation is 335 – 125= 210.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
There are 941 songs in a music library. 365 of them are pop songs. 189 are rock songs. How many songs are not pop songs?
Subtraction equation:
______ songs
Answer:
The number of songs that are not pop songs is 576 songs.

Explanation:
The total number of songs in a music library is 941 songs. And in that 365 of them are pop songs and 189 are rock songs. So the number of songs that are not pop songs is 941 – 365 which is 576 songs are not pop songs.

Show and Grow

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 6.
There are 743 penguins in a colony. 235 are in the water. 159 are in caves. How many penguins are not in the water?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.9 3
_____ penguins
Answer:
The number of penguins that are not in water is 508 penguins.

Explanation:
The total number of penguins in a colony is 743 penguins. And a number of penguins in the water is 235 penguins, and in caves, there are 159 penguins. So the number of penguins that are not in water is 743 – 235= 508 penguins.

Explain Subtraction Strategies Homework & Practice 10.9

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 1.
408 − 196 = _____
__________________________________
__________________________________
Answer:
By compensation subtraction 408 – 196= 212.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will add 4 to the number 196 then 196 + 4= 200. Now we will subtract
408 – 200= 208. Now we will add 4 to the result 208, which is 208 + 4= 212. So 408 – 196= 212.

Question 2.
723 − 515 = ____
______________________________
______________________________
Answer:
By compensation subtraction 723 – 515= 208.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, we will subtract 15 from the number 515 then 515 – 15= 500. Now we will subtract 723 – 500= 223. Now we will subtract 15 to the result 223, which is 223 – 15= 208. So 723 – 515= 208.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton wants to use mental math to find 452 − 239. Is this a good strategy for him to use? Explain.
___________________________
___________________________
Answer:
By compensation subtraction 452 – 239= 213.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a good strategy because compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is quite an effective way of subtraction. So by the compensation method, we will subtract 39 from the number 239 then
239 – 39= 200. Now we will subtract 452 – 200= 252. Now we will subtract 39 to the result 252, which is
252 – 39= 213. So 452 – 239= 213.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
767 people work at a store. 205 are cashiers. 314 stock shelves. How many people are not cashiers? Explain.
______ people
_____________________________
_____________________________
Answer:
The number of people who are not cashiers is 562 people.

Explanation:
The total number of people in the work at a store is 767. And the cashiers are 205 people, and the stock shelves are 314. So the people who are not cashiers is 767 – 205= 562 people are not cashiers.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have a pack of 900 craft sticks. You use 638 for a project. Your friend uses 127. How many craft sticks were not used? Explain.
______ craft sticks
____________________________
____________________________
Answer:
The number of sticks that are not used is 135 sticks.

Explanation:
The total number of craft sticks in a pack is 900 sticks. And in that 638 sticks are used for a project, and a friend uses 127 sticks. So the total number of sticks that are not used is 638 + 127= 765. And the number of craft sticks that are not used is 900 – 765= 135 sticks.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Circle the longer object.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 10.9 4
Answer:
The pen is longer than the eraser.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-10.9-4
In the above image, we can see that the pen is longer than the eraser. So we will round off the pen.

Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Performance Task

The table shows the number of laps that four cars complete in a racing season.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 1
Question 1.
How many fewer laps does the blue car complete than the yellow car?
_____ laps
Answer:
57 fewer laps do the blue car complete than the yellow car.

Explanation:
The number of laps for the blue car is 217 laps and the laps of the yellow car is 274. So 274 – 217= 57 fewer laps does the blue car complete than the yellow car.

Question 2.
How many more laps does the red car complete than the green car?
_____ laps
Answer:
66 more laps the red car complete than the green car.

Explanation:
The number of laps does the red car completes is 300, and the number of laps does the green car completes is 234. So 300 – 234= 66 many more laps does the red car complete than the green car.

Question 3.
The purple car completes 500 laps and the orange car completes 250 laps. Order the cars from the greatest number of laps to the least number of laps.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 2
_____, _____, _____, _____, _____, ______
Answer:
500, 300, 274, 250, 234, 217.

Explanation:
The number of laps completed by the red car is 300 laps,
The number of laps completed by the yellow car is 274 laps,
The number of laps completed by the green car is 234 laps,
The number of laps completed by the blue car is 217 laps,
The number of laps completed by the purple car is 500 laps,
The number of laps completed by the orange car is 250 laps.
So the order of the cars from the greatest number of laps to the least number of laps is
purple car, red car, yellow car, orange car, green car, and the blue car which is
500, 300, 274, 250, 234, 217.

Question 4.
How many cars complete an even number of laps?
_____ cars
Answer:
The total number of cars that complete an even number of laps is 3 laps.

Explanation:
The number of cars that complete an even number of laps is a red car with 300 laps, yellow car with 274 laps, a green car with 234 laps. So the total number of cars that complete an even number of laps is 3 laps.

Question 5.
The red and yellow cars are on Team Go Fast. The green and blue cars are on Team Speed. Which team completes more laps? How many more laps?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 3
Answer:
The team go fast completes more laps than the team speed. And the number of more laps is 123 laps.

Explanation:
The red car completes 300 laps and the yellow car completes 274 laps. As the red and yellow cars are the team, so the total number of laps that both cars completed is 300 + 274= 574 laps. And the green car completes 234 laps and the blue car completes 217 laps. So the total number of laps that both cars completed is 234 + 217=  451 laps. So the team go fast completes more laps than the team speed. And the number of more laps is
574 – 451= 123 laps.

Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Activity

Greatest and Least
To Play: Roll a die 3 times and record each number. Use the numbers to write the greatest and the least three-digit numbers. Find the difference and record your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 4

Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Chapter Practice

10.1 Subtract 10 and 100

Question 1.
230 −10 = _____
Answer:
The difference between 230 – 10 is 220.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 230-10, we will pick the tens digit number in 230 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
3 – 1= 2
therefore 230 – 10= 220.

Question 2.
956 − 10 = _____
Answer:
The difference between 956 – 10 is 946.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 956 -10, we will pick the tens digit number in 956 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
5 – 1= 4
therefore 956 – 10= 946.

Question 3.
597 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference between 597 – 100 is 497.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 597 – 100, we will pick the hundred digit number in 597 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
5 – 1= 4
therefore 597 – 100= 497.

Question 4.
384 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference between 384 – 100 is 284.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 384-100, we will pick the hundred digit number in 384 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
3 – 1= 2
therefore 384 – 100= 284.

Question 5.
705 − 10 = _____
Answer:
The difference between 705 – 10 is 695.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 705-10, we will pick the tens digit number in 705 and in 10. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
70 – 1= 69
therefore 705 – 10= 695.

Question 6.
157 − 100 = _____
Answer:
The difference between 157 – 100 is 57.

Explanation:
To find the difference of 157-100, we will pick the hundred digit number in 157 and in 100. Then we will subtract both the numbers which we have picked. So the result will be
1 – 1= 0
therefore 157 – 100= 057.

10.2 Use a Number Line to Subtract Hundreds and Tens

Question 7.
481 − 250 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 7
Answer:
The difference between 481 – 250 is 231.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 250 and add hundred two times which is 2×100= 200 and the value will be 250 + 200= 450 and then we will add three tens which is 450+30= 480 and then we will add one. The value will be 480 + 1=481. So the difference between 481 – 250 is 231.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
325 crackers come in a box. You set out 160 for a party. How many crackers are left in the box?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 8
_____ crackers
Answer:
The number of crackers left is 165.

Explanation:
The total number of crackers in the box is 325, and in that 160 are set for a party. So the number of crackers left in the box is 325 – 160= 165 crackers left.

10.3 Use a Number Line to SubtractThree-Digit Numbers

Question 9.
604 −97 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 9
Answer:
The difference between 604 – 97 is 507.

Explanation:
Let’s start from 604 and count back ninety once and the value will be 604 – 90= 514 and then we will count back seven, and the value will be 514 – 7=507. So the difference between 604 – 97= 507.

Question 10.
Number Sense
Write the equation shown by the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 10
_____ – _____ = ______
Answer:
The equation is 782 – 325= 457.

Explanation:
In the above image, given it is started from 782 and count back to 300 then the result is 782 – 300= 482, and then it was counted back to 20 then the value is 482 – 20= 462, then the value is counted back to 5 and the value is 462 – 5= 457.

10.4 Use Compensation to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Use compensation to subtract.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 11
Answer:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 12
Answer:

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes uses compensation to find 331 − 214. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 13
Answer:
Yes, Descartes is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, Descartes is correct. As Compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is a quite effective way of subtraction.
So by the compensation method, Descartes subtracted 14 to the number 214 then 214 – 14= 200. Now Descartes subtracted 331 – 200= 131.

10.5 Use Models to Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Question 14.
992 – 645 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 14
Answer: 347
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-chp-14

10.6 Subtract Three-Digit Numbers

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-chp-15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-chp-16

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-10-Subtract-Numbers-within-1000-chp-17

Question 18.
Modeling Real Life
There are 420 T-shirts and120 pairs of shorts at a store. 135 T-shirts are sold. How many T-shirts are left?
_____ T-shirts
Answer:
The number of t-shirts left is 285.

Explanation:
The number of t-shirts is 420 and there are 120 pairs of shorts at a store. And in that 135 tshits are sold out. The remaining t-shirts is 420 – 135= 285.

10.7 Subtract from Numbers that Contain Zeros

Question 19.
600 − 365 = _____
Answer:
By regrouping the numbers 600 – 365= 235.

Explanation:
By regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend.
So we will subtract by regrouping the numbers 600 – 365= 235.

Question 20.
402 − 195 = _____
Answer:
By regrouping the numbers 402 – 195= 207.

Explanation:
By regrouping in subtraction is a process of exchanging one ten into ten ones. We use regrouping in subtraction when the minuend is smaller than the subtrahend.
So we will subtract by regrouping the numbers 402 – 195= 207.

10.8 Use Addition to Subtract

Add to find the difference. Check your answer.
Question 21.
213 − 102 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 21
Answer:
The difference between 213 – 102 is 111.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 102 and add hundred once which is 1×100= 100 and the value will be 102 + 100= 202 and then we will add ten which is 202+10= 212 and then we will add one. The value will be 212 + 1=213. So the difference between 213 – 102 is 111.

Question 22.
564 − 317 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 chp 22
Answer:
The difference between 564 – 317 is 247.

Explanation:
Let’s start at 317 and add hundred two time which is 2×100= 200 and the value will be 317 + 200= 517 and then we will add four tens which is 517+40= 557 and then we will add seven. The value will be 557 + 7=564. So the difference between 564 – 317 is 247.

10.9 Explain Subtraction Strategies

Choose any strategy to solve. Explain how you solved.
Question 23.
573 − 309 = ____
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
Answer:
By compensation subtraction 573 – 309 is 264.

Explanation:
Compensation subtraction is a good strategy because compensation subtraction is a mental math strategy for multi-digit addition which means taking away more than we need and then adding some back which is quite an effective way of subtraction. So by the compensation method, we will subtract 9 from the number 309 then
309 – 9= 300. Now we will subtract 573 – 300= 273. Now we will subtract 9 to the result 273, which is
273 – 9= 264. So 573 – 309 is 264.

Conclusion:

Detailed Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 10 Subtract Numbers within 1,000 Solutions are useful for the students to finish their homework. The step by step by step solution is helpful to become an expert in maths. If you have any queries, then post your doubts in the given below comment section. Check our site regularly to find the answers for all Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 chapters.

Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication

go-math-grade-3-chapter-3-understand-multiplication-answer-key

Practice using Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication and learn various question types on Multiplication. Solve as many questions as possible in the 3rd Grade HMH Go Math Ch 3 Understand Multiplication Answer Key and become pro in the chapter. Thus, you can answer any kind of question framed on the concept and clear your tests or assessments with higher scores.

HMH Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication

To help you out with chapter 3 Understand Multiplication we have jotted down all the exercise problems in your Go Math Textbook. Simply tap on the respective chapter you wish to prepare and learn the fundamentals included within it easily. Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Ch 3 Understand Multiplication is provided in a comprehensive manner for better understanding.

Lesson 1: Count Equal Groups

Lesson 2: Algebra • Relate Addition and Multiplication

Lesson 3: Skip Count on a Number Line

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 4: Problem Solving • Model Multiplication

Lesson 5: Model with Arrays

Lesson 6: Algebra • Commutative Property of Multiplication

Lesson 7: Algebra • Multiply with 1 and 0

Chapter 3 Review/Test

Count Equal Groups Page No 143

Draw equal groups. Skip count to find how many.

Question 1.
2 groups of 2 4
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Count Equal Groups img 1

Answer: 4

Explanation:
There are two groups of 2
There are 2 two’s.
We skip count by 2’s. (2, 4)
So, there are 4 in all.

Question 2.
3 groups of 6 ________

Answer: 18

Explanation:
Draw 6 counters in each group.
There are 3 equal groups.
skip count by six until you say 3 numbers.
There are 3 equal groups with 6 counters in each group.
So, there are 18 counters in all.

Question 3.
5 groups of 3 ________

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Draw 3 counters in each group.
There are 5 equal groups.
Now, skip count by 3’s until you say 5 numbers.
There are 5 equal groups with 3 counters in each group.
So, there are 15 counters in all.

Question 4.
4 groups of 5 ________

Answer: 20

Explanation:
Draw 5 counters in each group.
There are 4 equal groups.
Skip count by 5’s until you say 4 numbers.
There are 4 equal groups with 5 counters in each group.
So, there are 20 counters in all.

Count equal groups to find how many.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Count Equal Groups img 2
______ groups of _______ , _______ in all

Answer: 4, 3, 12

Explanation:
There are three counters in each group.
There are 4 equal groups.
We skip count by 3’s until you say 4 numbers. (3,6,9,12)
So, there are 4 groups of 3, 12 in all.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Count Equal Groups img 3
______ groups of _______ , _______ in all

Answer: 4, 4, 16

Explanation:
There are 4 counters in each group
There are 4 equal groups.
We skip count by 4’s until you say 4 numbers. (4,8,12,16)
There are 4 groups of 4, 16 in all

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Marcia puts 2 slices of cheese on each sandwich. She makes 4 cheese sandwiches. How many slices of cheese does Marcia use in all?
_________ slice of cheese

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Draw 2 counters (cheese) in each group.
There are 4 equal groups (sandwiches).
We skip count by 2’s until you say 4 numbers (4,8)
There are 8 slices of cheese.

Question 8.
Tomas works in a cafeteria kitchen. He puts 3 cherry tomatoes on each of 5 salads. How many tomatoes does he use?
_________ tomatoes

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Draw 3 counters (tomatoes) in each group.
There are 5 equal groups (salads).
We skip count by 3’s until you say 5 numbers (3,6,9,12,15)
There are 15 tomatoes in all.

Count Equal Groups Lesson Check Page No 144

Question 1.
Jen makes 3 bracelets. Each bracelet has 3 beads. How many beads does Jen use?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Count Equal Groups img 4
Options:
a. 12
b. 9
c. 6
d. 3

Answer: b

Explanation:
There are 3 beads in each group.
There are 3 equal groups (bracelets).
Now, skip count by 3’s until you say three numbers (3,6,9)
Jen use a total of 9 beads.

Question 2.
Ian has 5 cards to mail. Each card needs 2 stamps. How many stamps does Ian need?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Count Equal Groups img 5
Options:
a. 2
b. 5
c. 10
d. 15

Answer: c

Explanation:
There are 5 equal groups (cards) with two counters (stamps) in each group.
Now, skip count by 2’s until you say five numbers (2,4,6,8,10)
Ian need a total of 1o stamps.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There were 384 people at a play on Friday night. There were 512 people at the play on Saturday night. Which is the best estimate of the total number of people who attended the play on both nights?
Options:
a. 900
b. 800
c. 700
d. 500

Answer: a

Explanation:
Step 1: Round each number to nearest hundred.
384 —-> 400
512  —-> 500
Step 2: Add the rounded numbers
400 + 500 = 900
The best estimate of the total number of people who attended the play on both nights are 900.

Question 4.
Walking the Dog Pet Store has 438 leashes in stock. They sell 79 leashes during a one-day sale. How many leashes are left in stock after the sale?
Options:
a. 459
b. 441
c. 369
d. 359

Answer: d

Explanation: Use place value to subtract
Subtract 438 – 79
Estimate 450 – 100 =

Step 1
Subtract the ones.
8 < 9, so regroup.
3 tens 8 ones = 2 tens ____ ones
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 1 - i
On subtracting the ones place decimals, we get 9

Step 2
Subtract the tens.
2 < 3, so regroup.
4 hundreds 2 tens = 3 hundreds _____ tens
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 1 - ii
On subtracting the ones and tens place decimals, we get 59

Step 3:
Subtract the hundreds
Then, add to check your answer.
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 1 - iii  GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 1 - iv

Question 5.
The Lakeside Tour bus traveled 490 miles on Saturday and 225 miles on Sunday. About how many more miles did it travel on Saturday?
Options:
a. 500 miles
b. 400 miles
c. 300 miles
d. 100 miles

Answer: c

Explanation:
Use compatible numbers
Step 1: Round each number to nearest hundred.
490 —-> 500
225 —-> 200
Step 2: Subtract the rounded numbers.

(i) Working each column from right to left
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 2 - i
(ii) 0 minus 0 is 0
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 2 - ii
(iii) 0 minus 0 is 0
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 2 - iii
(iv) 5 minus 2 is 3
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 2 - iv

Question 6.
During one week at Jackson School, 210 students buy milk and 196 students buy juice. How many drinks are sold that week?
Options:
a. 496
b. 406
c. 396
d. 306

Answer: b

Explanation:
Use place value to add two addends.
Add 210 + 196
Estimate 200 + 200

Step 1:
Add the ones.

GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 3 - i

Step 2:

Add the tens.
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 3 - ii

Step 3:
Add the hundreds. Regroup the tens as hundreds.
GO Math Grade 3 Count Equal Groups Spiral Review Page No 144 Answer 3 - iii

Relate Addition and Multiplication Page No 149

Draw a quick picture to show the equal groups. Then write related addition and multiplication sentences.

Question 1.
3 groups of 5
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Relate Addition and Multiplication img 6
5 + 5 + 5 = 15
3 × 5 = 15

Answer: 15

Explanation:
Addition Sentence:
There are 5 counters in each group.
There are 3 groups.
Now, add equal groups
5 + 5 + 5 = 15
Multiplication Sentence:
Since there are same number of counters in each circle, you can multiply to find how many in all.
Use multiplication method to find the total counters in equal groups.
Factor x Factor = Product
5    x     3       =  15
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Relate Addition and Multiplication Page No 149 Answer 1 - i

Question 2.
3 groups of 4
_____ + _____ + _____ = ______
_____ × _____ = ______

Answer: 4 + 4 + 4  = 12
3 x 4 = 12

Explanation: Addition Sentence
Draw 4 counters in each group.
There are total 3 groups.
Now, the addition sentence is 4 + 4 + 4 = 12

Multiplication sentence
Draw 4 counters in each circle or group.
Since there are same number of counters in each group, multiply groups and counters to find how many there are altogether.
3 x 4 = 12
factor x factor = product

Question 3.
4 groups of 3
_____ + _____ + _____ + _____ = ______
_____ × _____ = ______

Answer: 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 = 12
4 x 3 = 12

Explanation:
Addition Sentence
Draw 3 counters in each group.
There are total 4 groups.
Now, the addition sentence is 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 = 12

Multiplication sentence
Draw 3 counters in each circle or group.
Since there are same number of counters in each group, multiply counters and groups to find how many there are altogether.
4 x 3 = 12
factor x factor = product

Question 4.
5 groups of 2
_____ + _____ + _____ + _____ + _____ = ______
_____ × _____ = ______

Answer: 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 10
5 x 2 = 10

Explanation:
Addition Sentence
Draw 2 counters in each group.
There are total 5 groups.
Now, the addition sentence is 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 12

Multiplication sentence
Draw 2 counters in each circle or group.
Since there are same number of counters in each group, multiply counters and groups to find how many there are altogether.
5 x 2 = 12
factor x factor = product

Complete. Write a multiplication sentence.

Question 5.
7 + 7 + 7 = _____
_____ × _____ = ______

Answer: 7 + 7 + 7 = 21
3 x 7 = 21

Explanation:
7 + 7 + 7 = 21
This is addition sentence, from this we can find the total no of groups and counters.
From above sentence, we can tell that there are 3 groups and 7 counters in each group.
Multiplication Sentence
There are 3 groups and 7 counters in each group.
Since there are same number of counters in each group, multiply counters and groups to find how many there are altogether.
3  x  7 =  21

Question 6.
3 + 3 + 3 = _____
_____ × _____ = ______

Answer: 3 + 3 + 3 = 9
3 x 3 = 9

Explanation:
3 + 3 + 3 = 9
This is addition sentence, from this we can find the total no of groups and counters.
From above sentence, we can tell that there are 3 groups and 3 counters in each group.
Multiplication Sentence
There are 3 groups and 3 counters in each group.
Since there are same number of counters in each group, multiply counters and groups to find how many there are altogether.
3  x  3 =  9

Problem Solving

Question 7.
There are 6 jars of pickles in a box. Ed has 3 boxes of pickles. How many jars of pickles does he have in all? Write a multiplication sentence to find the answer.
_____ × _____ = ______ jars

Answer: 3 x 6 = 18 jars

Explanation:
Draw 3 boxes as Pickle boxes.
Draw 6 counters in each box to show jars.
Now, find the number of counters (jars).
Since, there are same number of jars in each pickle box, you can multiply to find how many in all.
3 groups of 6 = 3 x 6 = 18

Question 8.
Each day, Jani rides her bike 5 miles. How many miles does Jani ride in all in 4 days? Write a multiplication sentence to find the answer.
_____ × _____ = ______ miles

Answer: 4 x 5 = 20 miles

Explanation:
Draw 4 circles to show 4 days.
Draw 5 counters to show miles.
Now, find the total no of miles ride by Jani in 4 days.
Since, Jani rides same number of miles each day, you can multiply to find how many in all.
4 groups of 5 = 4 x 5 = 20

Relate Addition and Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 150

Question 1.
Which is another way to show
3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3?
Options:
a. 5 × 3
b. 4 × 3
c. 8 × 3
d. 6 × 3

Answer: d

Explanation:
The given question is in the form of addition sentence. Now, we can find the no of counters and groups using it.
Draw 6 circles to show equal groups.
Then, draw 3 counters in each circle.
When you combine equal groups, you can multiply to find how many in all.
No. of equal groups x no of counters = total no of counters
6 x 3 = 18

Question 2.
Use the model. How many counters are there in all?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Relate Addition and Multiplication img 7
Options:
a. 8
b. 10
c. 12
d. 14

Answer: b

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see there are two equal groups.
There are 5 counters in each group.
Now, multiplication sentence to find the number of counters.
No. of equal groups x No. of counters in each group = Total no. of counters
2 x 5 = 10

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A school gave 884 pencils to students on the first day of school. What is 884 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 800
b. 880
c. 890
d. 900

Answer: d

Explanation:
We need to round 884 to nearest hundred.
Now, look at the digit to the right which is 8.

GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 150 Answer 5 - i
8 > 5
So, the hundreds digit increases by one.
Write 9 as the hundreds digit.
Write zeros as the tens and ones digits.
So, 884 rounded to nearest hundred is 900

Question 4.
Find the difference.
6 3 2
– 2 7 4
———
Options:
a. 906
b. 442
c. 358
d. 354

Answer: c

Explanation:
Step-1:
Working each column from right to left.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 150 Answer 6 - i
Step-2:
Subtract the ones. Since, 2 < 4 , you must regroup.
3 tens 2 ones = 2 tens ______ ones.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 150 Answer 6 - ii

Step-3:
Subtract the tens. Since 2 < 7, you must regroup.
6 hundreds 2 tens = 5 hundreds ______ ones.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 150 Answer 6 - iii
Step-4:
Subtract the hundreds.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 150 Answer 6 - iv
Step-5:
Add to check answer.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 150 Answer 6 - v

Question 5.
The line plot below shows how many points Trevor scored in 20 games.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Relate Addition and Multiplication img 8
In how many games did Trevor score at least 18 points?
Options:
a. 3
b. 5
c. 6
d. 10

Answer: d

Explanation:
The numbers in the line plot shows the points scored by Trevor.
Each in the figure stands for 1 game.
Find 18 points scored on the number line.
In the above line plot, we can see the three s above 18, four s above 19, 3 s above 20.
So, We can say Trevor scored at least 18 points in 10 games.

Question 5.
In how many games did Trevor score 18 points or fewer?
Options:
a. 7
b. 10
c. 13
d. 15

Answer: c

Explanation:
The numbers in the line plot shows the points scored by Trevor.
Each in the figure stands for 1 game.
Find 18 and below 18 points scored on the number line.
In the above line plot, we can see the three s above 18, five s above 17, two s above 16, three s above 15 .
So, We can say Trevor scored at least 18 points in 13 games.

Question 6.
Darrien read 97 pages last week. Evan read 84 pages last week. How many pages in all did the boys read?
Options:
a. 13
b. 171
c. 181
d. 271

Answer: c

Explanation:
Add 97 and 84
Step 1:
Add ones. Regroup the ones as tens and ones.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 150 Answer 7 - i
Step 2:
Add tens.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 150 Answer 7 - ii
Step 3:
Add hundreds.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 150 Answer 7 - iii

Skip Count on a Number Line Page No 155

Draw jumps on the number line to show equal groups. Find the product.

Question 1.
6 groups of 3
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Skip Count on a Number Line img 9
6 × 3 = 18

Answer: 18

Explanation:
1 jump on the number line is considered as 1 group.
There are 6 jumps on the number line. So, there are 6 groups.
The length of each jump is 3.
Begin at 0. Skip count by 3’s.
Multiply 6 x 3 = 18

Question 2.
3 groups of 5
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Skip Count on a Number Line img 10
3 × 5 = _______

Answer: 15

Explanation:
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Skip Count on a Number Line Page No 155 Answer 8 - i
1 jump on the number line is considered as 1 group.
There are 5 jumps on the number line. So, there are 5 groups.
The length of each jump is 3.
Begin at 0. Skip count by 3’s.
Multiply 3 x 5 = 15.

Write the multiplication sentence the number line shows.

Question 3.
2 groups of 6
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Skip Count on a Number Line img 11
______ × _____ = _______

Answer: 12

Explanation:
1 jump on the number is considered as 1 group.
There are 2 jumps on number line. So, there are 2 groups.
The length of each jump is 2.
Begin at 0. Skip count by 6’s.
Multiply 2 x 6 = 12.

Problem Solving

Question 4.
Allie is baking muffins for students in her class. There are 6 muffins in each baking tray. She bakes 5 trays of muffins. How many muffins is she baking in all?
________ muffins

Answer: 30 Muffins

Explanation:
There are 5 baking trays with 6 muffins in each tray.
Consider 1 tray as 1 jump and 1 muffin as length of each jump.
Now, use a number line to find how many muffins allie baked in all.
Begin at 0. Skip count by 6s by drawing jumps on the number line.
No. of jumps made = 5
Length of each jump = 6
Multiply. 5 x 6 = 30
So, Allie bakes 30 muffins in all.

Question 5.
A snack package has 4 cheese sticks. How many cheese sticks are in 4 packages?
________ cheese sticks

Answer: 16 Cheese sticks

Explanation:
There are 4 packages with 4 cheese sticks in each package.
Consider 1 package as 1 jump and 1 cheese stick as length of each jump.
Now, use a number line to find how many cheese sticks are in 4 packages.
Begin at 0. Skip count by 4s by drawing jumps on the number line.
No. of jumps made = 4
Length of each jump = 4
Multiply. 4 x 4 = 16
So, there are 16 cheese sticks in 4 packages.

Skip Count on a Number Line Lesson Check Page No 156

Question 1.
Louise skip counts by 4 on a number line to find 5 x 4. How many jumps should she draw on the number line?
Options:
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 9

Answer: c

Explanation:
Given no. of skip counts on a number line = 4
Product = no. of jumps x length of each jump
Given product = 5 x 4
From the given data, we can say that no of jumps = 5
So, no of jumps drawn on the number line = 5.

Question 2.
Theo needs 4 boards that are each 3 feet long to make bookshelves. How many feet of boards does he need altogether?
Options:
a. 12 feet
b. 7 feet
c. 4 feet
d. 3 feet

Answer: a

Explanation:
Given no. of boards = 4
Length of each board = 3 feet
Begin at 0. Skip count by 3’s.
Product = 4 x 3 = 12
So, Theo needs 12 feet of boards altogether.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Estimate the sum.
5 1 8
+ 2 5 1
Options:
a. 200
b. 700
c. 800
d. 900

Answer: c

Explanation:
Use Compatible numbers.
518 —-> 500
251 —-> 300
Perform addition
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 156 Answer 9 - i

Question 4.
Which number would you put in a frequency table to show Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Skip Count on a Number Line img 12?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Answer: d

Explanation:
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 156 Answer 11 - i

Question 5.
A manager at a shoe store received an order for 346 pairs of shoes. What is 346 rounded to the nearest hundred?
Options:
a. 400
b. 350
c. 340
d. 300

Answer: d

Explanation:
Round 346 to nearest hundred.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 156 Answer 12 - i
Since 4 < 5, the digit in the rounding place stays same. i.e, 3
Now, write zeros to the right of the rounding place (tens and ones place)
So, 346 rounded to nearest hundred is 300.

Question 6.
Toby is making a picture graph. Each picture of a book is equal to 2 books he has read. The row for Month 1 has 3 pictures of books. How many books did Toby read during Month 1?
Options:
a. 2
b. 3
c. 6
d. 8

Answer: c

Explanation:
Given, each picture  = 2 books
Row for month 1 = 3 pictures of books = 3 x 2 = 6
So, Toby read 6 books during month 1.

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Page No 157

Choose the best term from the box.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 13

Question 1.
When you combine equal groups, you can _______________ to find how many in all.
_________

Answer: Multiply

Explanation:
When equal groups are combined together, multiplication operation is performed to find the total.

Question 2.
The answer in a multiplication problem is called the _________________ .
_________

Answer: Product

Explanation:
The Product is the answer to a multiplication problem.

Question 3.
The numbers you multiply are called the ______________ .
_________

Answer: factors

Explanation:
The numbers which are multiplied are called factors.

Concepts and Skills

Count equal groups to find how many.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 14
_______ groups of _______ ; _______ in all

Answer:
3 groups of 3; 9 in all

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that there are 3 equal groups.
Each group has three counters.
So, the total no of counters are 9 in all.

Question 5.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 15
_______ groups of _______ ; _______ in all

Answer:
4 groups of 5; 20 in all

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that there are 4 equal groups.
Each group has five counters.
So, the total no of counters are 20 in all.

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 16
_______ groups of _______ ; _______ in all

Answer:
2 groups of 10; 20 in all

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that there are 2 equal groups.
Each group has 10 counters.
So, the total no of counters are 20 in all.

Write related addition and multiplication sentences.

Question 7.
3 groups of 9
_______ + _______ + _______ = _______ ; _______ × _______ = _______

Answer: 9 + 9 + 9 = 27; 3 x 9 = 27

Explanation:
Draw 3 circles as groups.
Draw 9 counters in each circle.
Now, find the number of counters.
Addition Sentence: 3 groups of 9 = 9 + 9 + 9 = 27
Multiplication Sentence: 3 groups of 9 = 3 x 9 = 27

Question 8.
5 groups of 7
Type below:
________
Answer: 7 + 7 + 7 + 7 + 7 = 35; 5 x 7 = 35

Explanation:
Draw 5 circles as groups.
Draw 7 counters in each circle.
Now, find the number of counters.
Addition Sentence: 5 groups of 7 = 7 + 7 + 7 + 7 + 7 = 35
Multiplication Sentence: 5 groups of 7 = 5 x 7 = 35

Draw jumps on the number line to show equal groups.
Find the product.

Question 9.
6 groups of 3
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 17
_______ × _______ = _______

Answer: 6 x 3 = 18

Explanation:
Given, 6 groups of 3
No. of jumps = 6
Length of each jump = 3
Product = No. of jumps x length of each jump = 6 x 3 = 18

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Page No 158

Question 10.
Beth’s mother cut some melons into equal slices. She put 4 slices each on 8 plates. Write a multiplication sentence to show the total number of melon slices she put on the plates.
Type below:
_________

Answer:  8 x 4 = 32

Explanation:
Given data,
There are 8 groups which is shown as plates.
Each group has 4 counters which is shown as slices.
Since, there are equal no. of slices in each plate, we can multiply to find the total number of melon slices.
Now, we can write multiplication sentence as 8 x 4 = 32.

Question 11.
Avery had 125 animal stickers. She gave 5 animal stickers to each of her 10 friends. How many animal stickers did she have left? What number sentences did you use to solve?
_________ stickers left

Answer: Multiplication and Subtraction Sentence, 75

Explanation:
Given, Total no. of animal stickers = 125
She gave 5 animal stickers to each of her 10 friends.
Use multiplicative sentence to find no. of stickers given to her friends.
Product = 5 x 10= 50
Total no. of stickers given to her friends = 50
Now, Total no. of stickers she left with = 125 – 50 = 75.

Question 12.
Matt made 2 equal groups of marbles. Write a multiplication sentence to show the total number of marbles.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Mid -Chapter Checkpoint img 18
Type below:
_________

Answer: 2 x 8 = 16

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see
There are 2 equal groups.
Each group has 8 marbles.

Question 13.
Lindsey has 10 inches of ribbon. She buys another 3 lengths of ribbon, each 5 inches long. How much ribbon does she have now?
__________ inches of ribbon

Answer: 25 inches of ribbon

Explanation:
Given, Lindsey has 10 inches of ribbon.
She buys another 3 lengths of ribbon, each 5 inches long.
Use multiplication sentence to find length of 5 inches = 3 groups of 5
Product = 3 x 5 = 15 inches
Now, add to find how much ribbon lindsey has in all.
15 + 10 = 25
Total length of ribbon = 25 inches.

Question 14.
Jack’s birthday is in 4 weeks. How many days is it until Jack’s birthday? Describe how you could use a number line to solve
__________ days

Answer:  28

Explanation:
Given, Jack’s birthday is in 4 weeks.
Since each week has 7 days, length of each jump = 7
Use number line to find the no. of days.
No. of jumps = 4
Now, begin at o. Skip count by 7’s by drawing jumps on the number line.
Multiply no. of jumps and length of each jump
4 x 7 = 28
So, jack’s birthday is in 28 days.

Problem Solving Model Multiplication Page No 163

Draw a diagram to solve each problem.

Question 1.
Robert put some toy blocks into 3 rows. There are 5 blocks in each row. How many blocks are there in all?
15 blocks

Answer: 15 blocks

Explanation:
Given, Robert put some toy blocks into 3 rows.
Each row contain 5 blocks.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of blocks in all.
Write 5 in each box to show 5 blocks in each of the 3 rows.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of blocks in all.
3 x 5 = 15 blocks
So, there are 15 blocks in all.

Question 2.
Mr. Fernandez is putting tiles on his kitchen floor. There are 2 rows with 9 tiles in each row. How many tiles are there in all?
___________ tiles

Answer: 18 tiles

Explanation:
Given, Mr. Fernandez is putting tiles on his kitchen floor.
There are 2 rows.
Each row contain 9 tiles.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of tiles in all.
Write 9 in each box to show 9 tiles in each of the 2 rows.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of tiles in all.
2 x 9 = 18 tiles
So, there are 18 tiles in all.

Question 3.
In Jillian’s garden, there are 3 rows of carrots, 2 rows of string beans, and 1 row of peas. There are 8 plants in each row. How many plants are there in all?
___________ plants

Answer: 48 plants

Explanation:
Given, there are 3 rows of carrots, 2 rows of string beans, and 1 rows of peas.
Total no. of rows = 6
There are 8 plants in each row.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of plants in all.
Write 8 in each box to show 8 plants in each of the 6 rows.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of plants in all.
6 x 8 = 48 plants
So, there are 48 plants in all.

Question 4.
In Sorhab’s classroom, there are 3 rows with 7 desks in each row. How many desks are there in all?
_________ desks

Answer: 21 desks

Explanation:
Given, there are 3 rows.
Each row contain 7 desks.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of desks in all.
Write 7 in each box to show 7 desks in each of the 3 rows.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of desks in all.
3 x 7 = 21 desks
So, there are  21 desks in all.

Question 5.
Maya visits the movie rental store. On one wall, there are 6 DVDs on each of 5 shelves. On another wall, there are 4 DVDs on each of 4 shelves. How many DVDs are there in all?
___________ DVDs

Answer: 46 DVD’s

Explanation:
Given, there are 2 walls.
On one wall, there are 5 shelves.
Each shelf has 6 DVDs.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of DVDs on one wall.
Write 6 in each box to show 6 DVDs on each of the 5 shelves.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of DVDs on one wall.
5 x 6 = 30 DVDs
So, there are 30 DVD’s on one wall.
On another wall, there are 4 shelves.
Each shelf has 4 DVDs.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of DVDs on another wall.
Write 4 in each box to show 4 DVDs on each of the 4 shelves.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of DVDs on another wall.
4 x 4 = 16 DVDs
So, there are 16 DVD’s on another wall.
Now, find the total no. of DVD’s on both all the walls.
Add. 30 + 16 = 46 DVDs.
So, there are 46 DVD’s in all.

Question 6.
The media center at Josh’s school has a computer area. The first 4 rows have 6 computers each. The fifth row has 4 computers. How many computers are there in all?
___________ computers

Answer: 28 computers

Explanation:
Given, there are 4 rows.
Each row contain 6 computers.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of computers in all.
Write 6 in each box to show 6 computers in each of the 4 rows.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of computers in all.
4 x 6 = 24 computers
So, there are 24 computers in all.
There is another fifth row with 4 computers.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of computers in all.
No. of computers in fifth row = 4 x 1 = 4 computers.
Add the computers in all rows to find how many in all.
24 + 4 = 28
So, there are 28 computers in all.

Model Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 164

Question 1.
There are 5 shelves of video games in a video store. There are 6 video games on each shelf. How many video games are there in all?
Options:
a. 35
b. 30
c. 20
d. 11

Answer: b

Explanation:
Given, there are 5 shelves.
Each shelf contain 6 video games.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of video games in all.
Write 6 in each box to show 6 video games in each of the 5 shelves.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of shelves in all.
5 x 6 = 30 shelves
So, there are 30 shelves in all.

Question 2.
Ken watches a marching band. He sees 2 rows of flute players. Six people are in each row. He sees 8 trombone players. How many flute or trombone players does Ken see?
Options:
a. 2
b. 6
c. 16
d. 20

Answer: d

Explanation:
Given, there are 6 flute players in each row.
There are 2 rows.
Now, use bar model to find the no. of flute players in all.
Write 6 in each box to show 6 flute players in each of the 2 rows.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find the number of flute players in all.
2 x 6 = 12 flute players
Given, there are 8 trombone players.
Now, add flute and trombone players
12 + 8 = 20
So, there are 20 flute or trombone players.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
What is the sum of 438 and 382?
Options:
a. 720
b. 810
c. 820
d. 910

Answer: c

Explanation:
Step 1:
Add ones. Regroup ones as tens and ones.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 13 - i
Step 2:
Add tens. Regroup tens as hundreds and tens.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 13 - ii
Step 3:
Add the hundreds.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 13 - iii

Question 4.
Estimate the sum.
6 2 2
+ 8 4
———
Options:
a. 500
b. 600
c. 700
d. 800

Answer: c

Explanation:
Use compatible numbers.
622 —-> 600
84  —–> 100
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 14 - i

Question 5.
Francine uses 167 silver balloons and 182 gold balloons for her store party. How many silver and gold balloons in all does Francine use?
Options:
a. 15
b. 345
c. 349
d. 359

Answer: c

Explanation:
Given, Silver balloons = 167
Gold balloons = 182
Add Silver and gold balloons to find total in all.
Step 1: Add ones.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 15 - i
Step 2: Add tens. Regroup tens as hundreds and tens.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 15 - ii
Step 3: Add hundreds.
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 15 - iii
So, total no. of silver and gold balloons in all does Francine use = 349

Question 6.
Yoshi is making a picture graph. Each picture of a soccer ball stands for two goals he scored for his team. The row for January has 9 soccer balls. How many goals did Yoshi score during January?
Options:
a. 18
b. 16
c. 11
d. 9

Answer: a

Explanation:
Given, each picture = 2 goals
Row for January = 9 soccer balls
Consider each picture as 9 soccer balls.
Now, find the goals did Yoshi score during January.
9 x 2 = 18
So, 18 goals did Yoshi score during January.

Model with Arrays Page No 169

Write a multiplication sentence for the array.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Model with Arrays img 19
3 × 7 = 21

Answer: 3 x 7 = 21

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see there are same no. of tiles in each row.
There are 3 rows with 7 tiles in each row.
Now, multiplication sentence for array can be written as number of rows x no. of tiles in each row.
Multiply. 3 x 7 = 21

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Model with Arrays img 20
2 × 5 = _______

Answer: 10

Explanation:
In the above figure, we can see there are same no. of tiles in each row.
There are 2 rows with 5 tiles in each row.
Now, multiplication sentence for array can be written as number of rows x no. of tiles in each row.
Multiply. 2 x 5 = 10

Draw an array to find the product.

Question 3.
4 × 2 = _______

Answer: 8

Explanation:
Make an array by placing the same no. of tiles in each row.
From the given data, make an array with 4 rows of 2 tiles.
Now, draw an array.
In the above figure, we can see there are same no. of tiles in each row.
There are 4 rows with 2 tiles in each row.
Now, multiplication sentence for array can be written as number of rows x no. of tiles in each row.
Multiply. 4 x 2 = 8

Question 4.
4 × 4 = _______

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Make an array by placing the same no. of tiles in each row.
From the given data, make an array with 4 rows of 4 tiles.
Now, draw an array.
In the above figure, we can see there are same no. of tiles in each row.
There are 4 rows with 4 tiles in each row.
Now, multiplication sentence for array can be written as number of rows x no. of tiles in each row.
Multiply. 4 x 4 = 16

Question 5.
3 × 2 = _________

Answer: 6

Explanation:
Make an array by placing the same no. of tiles in each row.
From the given data, make an array with 3 rows of 2 tiles.
Now, draw an array.
In the above figure, we can see there are same no. of tiles in each row.
There are 3 rows with 2 tiles in each row.
Now, multiplication sentence for array can be written as number of rows x no. of tiles in each row.
Multiply. 3 x 2 = 6

Question 6.
2 × 8 = _______

Answer: 16

Explanation:
Make an array by placing the same no. of tiles in each row.
From the given data, make an array with 2 rows of 8 tiles.
Now, draw an array.
In the above figure, we can see there are same no. of tiles in each row.
There are 2 rows with 8 tiles in each row.
Now, multiplication sentence for array can be written as number of rows x no. of tiles in each row.
Multiply. 2 x 8 = 16

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Lenny is moving tables in the school cafeteria. He places all the tables in a 7 × 4 array. How many tables are in the cafeteria?
_________ tables

Answer: 28 tables

Explanation:
Given array = 7 x 4
Now, make an array with 7 rows of 4 tiles.
Draw an array and find the no. of tables.
Multiply. 7 x 4 = 28
So, there are 28 tables in the cafeteria.

Question 8.
Ms. DiMeo directs the school choir. She has the singers stand in 3 rows. There are 8 singers in each row. How many singers are there in all?
_________ singers

Answer: 24 singers

Explanation:
Given, no. of singers in each row = 8
No. of rows = 3
Now, make an array with 3 rows of 8 singers.
Find the no. of singers by multiplying no. of rows with singers.
Multiply. 3 x 8 = 24 singers.
So, there are 24 singers in all.

Model with Arrays Lesson Check Page No 170

Question 1.
What multiplication sentence does this array show?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Model with Arrays img 21
Options:
a. 2 × 3 = 6
b. 6 × 3 = 18
c. 3 × 4 = 12
d. 3 × 5 = 15

Answer: d

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the array consists of 3 rows and 5 tiles.
Now, the multiplications sentence is 3 x 5 = 15

Question 2.
What multiplication sentence does this array show?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Model with Arrays img 22
Options:
a. 3 × 9 = 27
b. 3 × 8 = 24
c. 3 × 7 = 21
d. 4 × 5 = 20

Answer: a

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the array consists of 3 rows and 9 tiles.
Now, the multiplications sentence is 3 x 9 = 27

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Use the table to find who traveled 700 miles farther than Paul during summer vacation.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Model with Arrays img 23
Options:
a. Andrew
b. Bonnie
c. Susan
d. Tara

Answer: d

Explanation:
From the table, we can say that paul travelled 233 miles.
Now, use break apart strategy to find sums.
Paul –>      233 = 200 + 30 + 3
Andrew –> 380 = 300 + 80+ 0
Bonnie –>  790 = 700 + 90+ 0
Tara –>      933 = 900 + 30+ 3
Susan –>   853 = 800 + 50+ 3
From the above sums, we can say that Tara travelled farther miles than paul.

Question 4.
Use the bar graph to find what hair color most students have.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Model with Arrays img 24
Options:
a. Brown
b. Black
c. Blond
d. Red

Answer: a

Explanation:
The title shows hair color for students.
The length of bar tells the no. of students had each color.
Now, Find out the which color maximum no. of students have.
We can see that the brown color is the highest.

Question 5.
Spencer ordered 235 cans of tomatoes to make salsa for the festival. What is 235 rounded to the nearest ten?
Options:
a. 200
b. 230
c. 240
d. 300

Answer: c

Explanation:
Round 235 to nearest ten.
The digit to the right of rounding place is 5.
So, the digit in the rounding place is increased by one.
Write zero to the round of rounding digit.
Now, it becomes 240.

Question 6.
Which bar would be the longest on a bar graph of the data?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Model with Arrays img 25
Options:
a. Cheese
b. Pepperoni
c. Vegetable
d. Sausage

Answer: a

Explanation:
Make a bar graph.
Step 1:
Write a title at the top to tell what the graph is about. Label the side of the graph to tell about the bars. Label the bottom of the graph to explain what the numbers tell.
Step 2:
Choose numbers for the bottom of the graph so that most of the bars will end on a line. Since the least number is 1 and the greatest number is 5, make the scale 0-5.
Step 3: Draw and shade a bar to show the number for each pizza topping.
From the bar graph, we can say that the cheese bar would be the longest on a bar graph of the data.

Commutative Property of Multiplication Page No 175

Write a multiplication sentence for the model. Then use the Commutative Property of Multiplication to write a related multiplication sentence.

Question 1.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Commutative Property of Multiplication img 26
5 × 2 = 10
2 × 5 = 10

Answer: 5 × 2 = 10
2 × 5 = 10

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that there are 5 rows.
There are two tiles in each row.
From the given array, the multiplication sentence can be written as 5 x 2 = 10
The Commutative property of multiplication have the same factors in different order.
So, by using commutative property, Multiplication sentence is written as 2 x 5 = 10.

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Commutative Property of Multiplication img 27
______ × _____ = _______
______ × _____ = _______

Answer:
6 x 4 = 24
4 x 6 = 24

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that there are 6 rows.
There are 4 tiles in each row.
From the given array, the multiplication sentence can be written as 6 x 4 = 24
The Commutative property of multiplication have the same factors in different order.
So, by using commutative property, Multiplication sentence is written as 4 x 6 = 24.

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Commutative Property of Multiplication img 28
______ × _____ = _______
______ × _____ = _______

Answer:
3 x 4 = 12
4 x 3 = 12

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that there are 3 equal groups.
There are 4 counters in each group.
From the given array, the multiplication sentence can be written as 3 x 4 = 12
The Commutative property of multiplication have the same factors in different order.
So, by using commutative property, Multiplication sentence is written as 4 x 3 = 12.

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Commutative Property of Multiplication img 29
______ × _____ = _______
______ × _____ = _______

Answer:
2 x 6 = 12
6 x 2 = 12

Explanation:
From the figure, we can say that there are 2 equal groups.
There are 6 counters in each group.
From the given array, the multiplication sentence can be written as 2 x 6 = 12
The Commutative property of multiplication have the same factors in different order.
So, by using commutative property, Multiplication sentence is written as 6 x 2 = 12.

Problem Solving

Question 5.
A garden store sells trays of plants. Each tray holds 2 rows of 8 plants. How many plants are in one tray?
___________ plants

Answer:
16 plants

Explanation:
Given,there are 8 plants.
Each tray holds 2 rows of 8 plants.
Now, by using multiplicative sentence or commutative property, we can find the no. of plants in one tray.
Multiplicative Sentence : 2 x 8 = 16 plants
Commutative property of multiplication: 8 x 2 = 16
So, there are 16 plants in one tray.

Question 6.
Jeff collects toy cars. They are displayed in a case that has 4 rows. There are 6 cars in each row. How many cars does Jeff have?
________ cars

Answer:
24 cars

Explanation:
Given, toy cars are displayed in 4 rows.
There are 6 cars in each row.
Now, by using multiplicative sentence or commutative property, we can find the no. of cars in each row.
Multiplicative Sentence : 6 x 4 = 24 cars.
Commutative property of multiplication: 4 x 6 = 24 cars.

Commutative Property of Multiplication Lesson Check Page No 176

Question 1.
Which is an example of the Commutative Property of Multiplication?
Options:
a. 8 × 4 = 8 × 4
b. 4 × 2 = 2 × 4
c. 2 × 8 = 4 × 4
d. 2 + 4 = 2 × 4

Answer: b

Explanation:
The Commutative Property of Multiplication states that when you change the order
of the factors, the product stays the same. From the given options, 4 x 2 = 2 x 4 is an example of commutative property of multiplication.

Question 2.
What factor makes the number sentence true?
7 × 4 = ■ × 7
Options:
a. 2
b. 4
c. 7
d. 28

Answer: b

Explanation:
The Commutative Property of Multiplication states that when you change the order
of the factors, the product stays the same. From the question, we can see that 7 x 4 = 28;
Then 4 x 7 = 28

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Ms. Williams drove 149 miles on Thursday and 159 miles on Friday. About how many miles did she drive altogether the two days?
Options:
a. about 150 miles
b. about 200 miles
c. about 300 miles
d. about 400 miles

Answer: c

Explanation:

Given, miles driven by Ms. Williams on Thursday = 149
Miles driven by Ms. Williams on Friday = 159
By using compatible numbers, we can find the no. of miles did she drive altogether the two days.
149 —> 150
159 —> 150

GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 176 Answer 16 - i
So, the no. of miles driven altogether is about 300 miles.

Question 4.
Inez has 699 pennies and 198 nickels. Estimate how many more pennies than nickels she has.
Options:
a. about 500
b. about 600
c. about 700
d. about 900

Answer: a

Explanation:

Given, there are 699 pennies and 198 nickels.
Now, estimate to find how many more pennies than nickels she has.
Use compatible numbers to compute it.
699 —> 700
198 —> 200
GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 164 Answer 17 - i
So, Inez has 500 more pennies than nickels.

Question 5.
This year, the parade had 127 floats. That is 34 fewer floats than last year. How many floats were in the parade last year?
Options:
a. 161
b. 151
c. 103
d. 93

Answer: a

Explanation:
Given, no. of floats this year = 127
No. of floats last year are 34 greater than this year.
Now, estimate the no. of floats in the parade last year
Perform Addition operation
Step 1: Add ones. Regroup the ones as tens and ones.

GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 176 Answer 18 - i

Step 2: Add tens.

GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 176 Answer 18 - ii
Step 3: Add hundreds.

GO Math Grade 3 Understand Multiplication Spiral Review Page No 176 Answer 18 - iii

The total no. of floats in the parade last year = 161

Question 6.
Jeremy made a tally table to record how his friends voted for their favorite pet. His table shows Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Commutative Property of Multiplication img 30 next to Dog. How many friends voted for dog?
Options:
a. 6
b. 8
c. 10
d. 12

Answer: d

Explanation:
Count the tally marks. It shows 12. So, the no. of friends voted for dog = 12

Multiply with 1 and 0 Page No 181

Find the product.

Question 1.
1 × 4 = 4

Answer: 4

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any numberand 1 is that number.
So, 1 x 4 = 4

Question 2.
0 × 8 = _______

Answer: 0

Explanation:
The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero
So, 0 x 8 = 0

Question 3.
0 × 4 = _______

Answer: 0

Explanation:
The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 0 x 4 = 0

Question 4.
1 × 6 = _______

Answer: 6

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 1 x 6 = 6

Question 5.
3 × 0 = _______

Answer: 0

The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 3 x 0 = 0

Question 6.
0 × 9 = _______

Answer: 0

The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 0 x 9 = 0

Question 7.
8 × 1 = _______

Answer: 8

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 8 x 1 = 6

Question 8.
1 × 2 = _______

Answer: 2

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 1 x 2 = 2

Question 9.
0 × 6 = _______

Answer: 0

The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 0 x 6 = 0

Question 10.
4 × 0 = _______

Answer: 0

The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 4 x 0 = 0

Question 11.
7 × 1 = _______

Answer: 7

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 7 x 1 = 7

Question 12.
1 × 5 = _______

Answer: 5

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 1 x 5 = 5

Question 13.
3 × 1 = _______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 3 x 1 = 3

Question 14.
0 × 7 = _______

Answer: 0

The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 0 x 7 = 0

Question 15.
1 × 9 = _______

Answer: 9

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 1 x 9 = 9

Question 16.
5 × 0 = _______

Answer: 0

The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 5 x 0 = 0

Question 17.
10 × 1 = _______

Answer: 10

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 10 x 1 = 10

Question 18.
2 × 0 = _______

Answer: 0

The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 2 x 0 = 0

Question 19.
5 × 1 = _______

Answer: 5

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 5 x 1 = 5

Question 20.
1 × 0 = _______

Answer: 0

Explanation:
The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 1 x 0 = 0

Question 21.
0 × 0 = _______

Answer: 0

Explanation:
The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 1 x 0 = 0

Question 22.
1 × 3 = _______

Answer: 3

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 1 x 3 = 3

Question 23.
9 × 0 = _______

Answer: 0

Explanation:
The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 9 x 0 = 0

Question 24.
1 × 1 = _______

Answer: 1

Explanation:
The Identity Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and 1 is that number.
So, 1 x 1 = 1

Problem Solving

Question 25.
Peter is in the school play. His teacher gave 1 copy of the play to each of 6 students. How many copies of the play did the teacher hand out?
_________ copy

Answer: 6 copies

Explanation:
Given, No. of students = 6
Copies given to each student = 1
No. of copies of the play did teacher hand out = 1 x 6 = 6

Question 26.
There are 4 egg cartons on the table. There are 0 eggs in each carton. How many eggs are there in all?
_________ eggs

Answer: 0 eggs

Explanation:
Given, there are 4 egg cartons
There are 0 eggs in each carton
No. of eggs in all = ?
0 x 4 = 0 eggs.
No. of eggs in all = 0

Multiply with 1 and 0 Lesson Check Page No 182

Question 1.
There are 0 bicycles in each bicycle rack. If there are 8 bicycle racks, how many bicycles are there in all?
Options:
a. 80
b. 8
c. 1
d. 0

Answer: d

Explanation:
There are 0 bicycles in each bicycle rack.
There are 8 bicycle racks.
No. of bicycles in all = 8 x 0 = 0

Question 2.
What is the product?
1 × 0 = _______
Options:
a. 0
b. 1
c. 10
d. 11

Answer: a

Explanation:
The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of zero and any number is zero.
So, 1 x 0 = 0

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mr. Ellis drove 197 miles on Monday and 168 miles on Tuesday. How many miles did he drive in all?
Options:
a. 29 miles
b. 255 miles
c. 365 miles
d. 400 miles

Answer: c

Explanation:
Given, no. of miles driven on Monday = 197
no. of miles driven on Tuesday = 168
Perform addition to find the no. of miles driven in all

Question 4.
What multiplication sentence does the array show?
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Options:
a. 1 × 6 = 6
b. 3 × 2 = 6
c. 2 × 6 = 12
d. 5 + 1 = 6

Answer: a

Explanation:
Given array shows 1 row with 6 tiles.
So, multiplication sentence can be written as 1 x 6 = 6

Use the bar graph for 5–6.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Multiply with 1 and 0 img 31

Question 5.
How many cars were washed on Friday and Saturday combined?
Options:
a. 55
b. 80
c. 90
d. 120

Answer: b
Explanation:
From the bar graph, we can see that no. of cars washed on Friday = 25
No. of cars washed on Saturday = 55
Total no. of cars washed on Friday and Saturday = 80

Question 6.
How many more cars were washed on Saturday than on Sunday?
Options:
a. 95
b. 30
c. 25
d. 15

Answer: d

Explanation:
From the bar graph, we can see that cars washed on Saturday = 55
Cars washed on Sunday = 40
55-40 = 15
15 more cars washed on Saturday than on Sunday.

Chapter 3 Review Test Page No 183

Question 1.
There are 3 boats on the lake. Six people ride in each boat. How many people ride in the boats? Draw circles to model the problem and explain how to solve it.
_________ people

Answer: 18 boats

Explanation:
Given, no. of boats on the lake = 3
No. of people ride in each boat = 6
Total no. of people ride in the boats = 3 groups of 6
3 x 6 = 18
So, 18 people ride in the boats.

Question 2.
Nadia has 4 sheets of stickers. There are 8 stickers on each sheet. She wrote this number sentence to represent the total number of stickers.

4 × 8 = 32

What is a related number sentence that also represents the total number of stickers she has?
Options:
a. 8 + 4 =■
b. 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 = ■
c. 8 × 8 = ■
d. 8 × 4 = ■

Answer: d

Explanation:
Given, there are are 4 sheets of stickers.
Each sheet has 8 stickers.
Given total no. of stickers represented as = 4 x 8 = 32
By using commutative property of multiplication, related number sentence can be represented as 8 x 4 =32

Question 3.
Lindsay went hiking for two days in Yellowstone National Park. The first jump on the number line shows how many birds she saw the first day. She saw the same number of birds the next day.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 32
Write the multiplication sentence that is shown on the number line.
______ × _______ = _______

Answer: 2 x 8 = 16

Explanation:
Given, the total no. of jumps = 2
From the figure, we can see that there are two jumps which begins at 0 and skip count by 8’s.
Product = No. of jumps x Length of each jump.
Now, multiplication sentence can be written as 2 x 8 = 16

Chapter 3 Review Test Page No 184

Question 4.
Paco drew an array to show the number of desks in his classroom. Write a multiplication sentence for the array.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 33
________ desks

Answer: 21 desks

Explanation:
In the given array, there are three rows.
Each row has 7 desks.
Now, multiplication sentence can be written as no. of rows x no. of desks in each row.
Multiply. 3 x 7 = 21 desks

Question 5.
Alondra makes 4 necklaces. She uses 5 beads on each necklace. For numbers 5a–5d, choose Yes or No to tell if the number sentence could be used to find the number of beads Alondra uses.
a. 4 × 5 = ■
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i

Explanation: Given, there are 4 necklaces.
Each necklace uses 5 beads.
Now, number sentence (multiplication) can be written as 4 groups of 5 = 4 x 5
So, the answer is yes

Question 5.
b. 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 = ■
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii

Given, there are 4 necklaces.
Each necklace uses 5 beads.
Now, number sentence (addition) can be written as 4 groups of 5 = 5 + 5 + 5 + 5
So, the answer is no.

Question 5.
c. 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = ■
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: i

Given, Given, there are 4 necklaces.
Each necklace uses 5 beads.
Now, number sentence (addition) can be written as 4 groups of 5 = 5 + 5 + 5 + 5
So, the answer is yes.

Question 5.
d. 5 + 4 = ■
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: ii

Given, there are 4 necklaces.
Each necklace uses 5 beads.
Now, number sentence (addition) can be written as 4 groups of 5 = 4 x 5
Using commutative property of multiplication, it can be written as 5 x 4, but given question is 5 + 4.
So, the answer is no.

Question 6.
John sold 3 baskets of apples at the market. Each basket contained 9 apples. How many apples did John sell? Make a bar model to solve the problem.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 34
_______ apples

Answer:27 apples

Explanation:
Given, there are 3 baskets of apples.
Each basket contains 9 apples.
Draw a bar model with 3 boxes to show 3 baskets.
Write 9 in each box to show 9 apples.
Since, there are equal groups, we can multiply to find No. of apples john sold.
3 x 9 = 27 apples.

Chapter 3 Review Test Page No 185

Question 7.
Select the number sentences that show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 3 × 2 = 2 × 3
b. 4 × 9 = 4 × 9
c. 5 × 0 = 0
d. 6 × 1 = 1 × 6
e. 7 × 2 = 14 × 1

Answer: a

Explanation:
Commutative Property of Multiplication states that when you change the order of the factors, the product stays the same.
So, 3 x 2 = 2 x 3 is the answer.

Question 8.
A waiter carried 6 baskets with 5 dinner rolls in each basket. How many dinner rolls did he carry? Show your work.
___________ dinner rolls

Answer: 30 dinner rolls

Explanation:
Given, there are 6 baskets.
Each basket has 5 dinner rolls.
No. of dinner rolls = 6 x 5 = 30 dinner rolls.

Question 9.
Sonya needs 3 equal lengths of wire to make 3 bracelets. The jump on the number line shows the length of one wire in inches. How many inches of wire will Sonya need to make the 3 bracelets?
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 35
_________ inches

Answer: 18 inches

Explanation:
Given, Length of one wire = jump on the number line
From the figure, we can see that length of wire = 6 inches
3 equal lengths of wire is required for 3 bracelets.
So, no. of jumps = 3
length of each jump = 6 inches
Multiply. 3 x 6 = 18
So, sonya need 18 inches of wire to make 3 bracelets.

Question 10.
Josh has 4 dogs. Each dog gets 2 dog biscuits every day. How many biscuits will Josh need for all of his dogs for Saturday and Sunday?
__________ biscuits

Answer: 16 biscuits

Explanation:
Given, there are 4 dogs.
Each dog gets 2 biscuits every day.
No. of biscuits required for all dogs every day = 4 x 2 = 8
No. of biscuits need for all dogs for Saturday and Sunday = 8 x 2 = 16 biscuits.

Chapter 3 Review Test Page No 186

Question 11.
Jorge displayed 28 cans of paint on a shelf in his store.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 36
Select other ways Jorge could arrange the same number of cans. Mark all that apply.
Options:
a. 2 rows of 14
b. 1 row of 28
c. 6 rows of 5
d. 8 rows of 3
e. 7 rows of 4

Answer: e

Explanation:
Given, There are 28 cans of paint on a shelf in a store.
In the given array, there are 4 rows with 7 cans in each row.
So, there are 4 rows of 7.
By using commutative property of multiplication, it can be arranged in 7 rows of 4.

Question 12.Choose the number that makes the statement true. The product of any number and Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 37 is zero.

Answer: 0

Explanation:
The Zero Property of Multiplication states that the product of any number and zero is zero.
So, the answer is 0.

Question 13.
James made this array to show that 3 × 5 = 15.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 38
Part A
James says that 5 × 3 = 15. Is James correct? Draw an array to explain your answer.
a. yes
b. no

Answer: Yes.

Explanation: Draw an array to show 5 rows with 3 tiles in each row.
Then, Multiplication sentence can be written as no. of rows x no. of tiles in each row
5 x 3 = 15

Question 13.
Part B
Which number property supports your answer?
________

Answer: Commutative Property of Multiplication

Explanation:
Commutative Property of Multiplication supports this answer. Because, it states that the product of any tow factors in reverse order remains the same.

Chapter 3 Review Test Page No 187

Question 14.
Julio has a collection of coins. He puts the coins in 2 equal groups. There are 6 coins in each group. How many coins does Julio have? Use the number line to show your work.
Go Math Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 3 Understand Multiplication Review/Test img 39
________ coins

Answer: 12 coins

Explanation:
There are 2 equal groups.
There are 6 coins in each group.
Find total no. of coins by using number line.
Begin at 0. Skip count by 6s by drawing jumps on the number line.
So, no. of jumps = 2
Length of each jump = 6
Multiply. 2 x 6 = 12
Total no. of coins Julio have = 12

Question 15.
Landon collects trading cards.
Part A
Yesterday, Landon sorted his trading cards into 4 groups. Each group had 7 cards. Draw a bar model to show Landon’s cards. How many cards does he have?
________ trading cards

Answer: 28 trading cards

Explanation:
No. of groups = 4
Each group has 7 cards.
Draw a bar model to show the cards.
Draw 4 boxes in the bar model.
Write 7 in each box to show 7 cards.
Since, there are equal groups, multiply to find the no. of cards.
Multiply. 4 x 7 = 28 cards.

Question 15.
Part B
Landon buys 3 more packs of trading cards today. Each pack has 8 cards. Write a multiplication sentence to show how many cards Landon buys today. Then find how many cards Landon has now. Show your work.
Type below:
_________

Answer:52 cards

Explanation:
Given, Landon buys 3 more packs of trading cards
Each pack has 8 cards.
Multiplication Sentence = 3 x 8 = 24.
Total no. of cards = 28 + 24 = 52 cards.

Question 16.
A unicycle has only 1 wheel. Write a multiplication sentence to show how many wheels there are on 9 unicycles.
_______ × _______ = _______

Answer: 9 x 1 = 9

Explanation:
Given, there are 9 unicycles.
Each unicycle has only one wheel.
So, Multiplication Sentence can be written as 9 x 1 = 9.

Question 17.
Carlos spent 5 minutes working on each of 8 math problems. He can use 8 × 5 to find the total amount of time he spent on the problems.
For numbers 17a–17d, choose Yes or No to show which are equal to 8 × 5.
a. 8 + 5
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Explanation:
Given, Carlos spent 5 minutes working on each of 8 math problems.
Given Sentence = 8 x 5
As there are 8 problems with 5 minutes spent on each, the total time can be find out using multiplication sentence.
So, the answer is no.

Question 17.
b. 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: No

Given, Carlos spent 5 minutes working on each of 8 math problems.
Given Sentence = 8 x 5 = 40
But given option 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 25.
So, the answer is no

Question 17.
c. 8 + 8 + 8 + 8 + 8
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes
Explanation:
Given, Carlos spent 5 minutes working on each of 8 math problems.
Given Sentence = 8 x 5 = 40
Given option = 8 + 8 + 8 + 8 + 8 = 40
So, the answer is yes

Question 17.
d. 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5
i. yes
ii. no

Answer: Yes
Explanation:
Given, Carlos spent 5 minutes working on each of 8 math problems.
Given Sentence = 8 x 5 = 40
Given option = 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 40
So, the answer is yes.

Chapter 3 Review Test Page No 188

Question 18.
Lucy and her mother made tacos. They put 2 tacos on each of 7 plates.
Select the number sentences that show all the tacos Lucy and her mother made. Mark all that apply.
Options:
A. 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 14
B. 2 + 7 = 9
C. 7 + 7 = 14
D. 8 + 6 = 14
E. 2 × 7 = 14

Answer: a,e

Explanation:
Total no. of tacos = 2
Each taco has 7 plates.
Addition Sentence can be written as 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 14
Multiplication Sentence can be written as 2 x 7 = 14

Question 19.
Jayson is making 5 sock puppets. He glues 2 buttons on each puppet for its eyes. He glues 1 pompom on each puppet for its nose.
Part A
Write the total number of buttons and pompoms he uses. Write a multiplication sentence for each.
Eyes, Noses
_________ buttons _________ pompoms

Answer: Eyes
10 buttons,
5 x 2 = 10

Noses
5 pompoms
5 x 1 = 5

Explanation:
Given, there are 5 sock puppets
Each puppet has 2 buttons for its eyes
Each puppet has 1 pompom for its nose
Total no. of buttons
Multiplication Sentence = 5 x 2 = 10
Total no. of pompoms
Multiplication Sentence = 5 x 1 = 5

Question 19.
Part B
After making 5 puppets, Jayson has 4 buttons and 3 pompoms left. What is the greatest number of puppets he can make with those items if he wants all his puppets to look the same? Draw models and use them to explain.
_________ puppets

Answer: 2 puppets

Explanation:
Given, there are no. of puppets = 5
There are 4 buttons and 3 pompoms.
Each puppet requires 2 buttons and 1 pompom.
So, he can make 2 puppets with the left items.